Fanuc 16 TB Operators manuel

FANUC Seríes 16-TB
FANUC Series 18-TB
FANUC Series 160
FANUC Series 180=
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot descríbe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in thïs manual should be regarded as ímpossible .
Tabie of Contents
B-62444E/О3
1. GENERAL
GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION OF CNC MACHINE TOOL 
NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL
11. PROGRAMMING
TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE- INTERPOLATION 
FEED- FEED FUNCTION 
PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT
Reference Posítion Machíne-Specifıc Position
Coordinate System oп Part Drawing and Coordínate System Specifıed Ьy CNC - Coordinate System 
How to Indicate Command Dímensions for Movíng the Tool - Absolute, Incremental Commands 
CUTTING SPEED - SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 
SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING - TOOL ЁUNCTION 
COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - NIISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION 
PROGRAM CONFIGURATION  
TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MOTION BY PROGRAM 
TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE 
2. CONTROLLED AXES  
CONTROLLED AXES 
NAMES OF AXES 
INCREMENT SYSTEM
MAØUM STROKES
4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 
POSITIONING G00  
LINEAR  
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION G02,G03  
HELICAL INTERPOLATION G02,G03 
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION  
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION  
CONSTANT LEAD THREADING G32 
VARIABLE-LEAD THREAD CUTTING 134 
CONTINUOUS THREAD CUTГING  
MULTIPLE-THREAD CUTTING  
SKIP FUNCTION G31 
MULTISTAGE SKIP  
TORQUE LIMIT SKIP G31 P99  
5. FEED FUNCTIONS  
5 2 RAPID TRAVERSE  
5.Ø DWELL G04 
7. FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN 
8. COORDINATE SYSTEM   
MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM  
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM 
Settíng a Workpíece Coordínate System  
Selecting a Workpiece Coordínate System  
Changíng Workpiece Coordinate System  
Workpíece Coordínate System Preset  
Workpiece Coordínate System shift  
LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM 
PLANE SELECTION  
9. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION  
ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING G90, G91  
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION G20,G21 
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING  
DIAMETER AND RADIUS PROGRAMMING  
10. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION  
SPECIPYING THE SPINDLE SPEED WITH A BINARY CODE 
SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED VALUE DIRECTLY S5-DIGIT COMMAND  
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL G96, G97  
SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION FUNCTION G25, G26 
SPINDLE POSITIONING FUNCTION
Spíndle Ońentatíon 
Spíndle Positíoning 
Canceling Spíndle Positioníng
11. TOOL FUNCTION T FUNCTION 
TOOL SELECTION
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 
Program of Tool Lífe Data  
COUNTING A TOOL LIFE  
Specífying a Tool Group in a Machíníng Program  
12. AUXILIARY FUNCTiON  
AUXILIARY FUNCTION M FUNCTION  
MίΠ.TIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK 
M CODE GROUP CHECK FUNCTION  
THE SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS B CODES  
TABLE OF CONTENTS
13. PROGRAM C NFIGURATION  
PROGRAM COMPONENTS OTØ THAN PROGRÁM SECTIONS 
PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION 
SUBPROGRAM 
14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING  
CANNED CYCLE 690, G92, G94  
Outer Díameter / Internal Díanıeter Cuttíng Cycle G90  
Thread Cutting Cycle G92  
End Face Turníng Cycle G94  
How to Use Canned Cycles G90, G92, G94 
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLE G70-G76  
Stock Removalin Turníng G71 
stock Removal ín Facíng G72  
Pattern Repeatíng G73  
Fíníshíng Cycle G70 
End Face Peck Drílling Cycle G74 
Outer Díameter / Internal Díameter Dríllíng Cycle G75  
Multíple Thread Cuttíng Cycle G76 . 
Notes oп Multíple Reperitive Cyc1e G70-G76 
CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING G80-G89 
Front Drillíng Cycle G83 / Síde Drillíng Cycle G87 
Front Tappíng Cycle G84 / Síde Tappíng Cycle G88 
Front Boríng Cycle G85 / Síde Boríng Cycle G89  
Canned Cycle for Drillíng Cancel G80  
Precautíons to Be Taken by Operator 
CANNED GRØING CYCLE FOR GRINDING MACØ 
Traverse Grinding Cycle G71 
Traverse Dírect Fixed-dínıensíon Gríndíng Cycle G72 
OsciLlation Grínding Cycle G73  
Oscillation Direct Fíxed-Dímensíon Grínding Cycle  
CHAMFERING Ø CORNER R  
DIRECT DRAWING PROGRAMMING  
RIGID TAPPING  
Front Face Rigid Tappíng Cyc1e G84 /Síde Face Rígid Tapping Cycle G88  
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 
Tool Geometry Offset And Tool Wear Offset  
T code for Tool Offset  
Tool Selectíon 
Offset Number 
G53, G28, G30, and Commands When Tool Posítíon Offset ís Applied  
OVERVIEW OF TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION 
Imagínary Tool Nose  
D vection of Imaginary Tool Nose 
TABLE OF CONTENTS в-s2444εи10з
Offset Number And Offset Value  
Work Position and Move Command  
Notes oп tool Nose Radius Compensatíon  
DETAILS OF TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION 
Tool Movementin Start-up .
Tool Movementín Offset Mode 
Tool Movement in Offset MØe Cancel  
Interference Check 
Overcuttíng Ьy Too1 Nose Radius Compensation 
Correction in Chanıferíng аnd Corner Ares
Input Command from MDI
General Precautions for Offset Operatíons 
G53, G28, G30, and Commands in Tool-típ Radíus Compensation Mode 
CORNER CIRCULAR IØOLATION FUNCTION G39  
TOOL COMPENSA- TION VALUES, NUMBER OF COMPENSATTION VALUSS,
AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM G 10 
Tool Compensatíon аnd Number of Tool Compensation  
Changíng of Too1 Offset value Programmable Data Input G10 
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET G36, G37  
COORDINATE ROTATION 
16. CUSTOM MACRO  
VARIABLES  
SYSTEM VARIABLES  
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION 
MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS 
BRANCH AND REPETITION  
Uncondítíonal Branch GOTO Statement . 
Condíńonal Branch IF Statement 
Repetítíon While Statement . 
MACRO CALL  

Here is the corrected text without the extraneous symbols and numbers:

Simple Call G65
Modal Call G66
Macro Call Using G Code
Macro Call Using an M Code
Subprogram Call Using an M Code
Subprogram Calls Using a T Code
Sample Program
Processing Macro Statements
Registering Custom Macro Programs
Limitations
External Output Commands
Interruption Type Custom Macro
Specification Method
Details of Functions

17. Programmable Parameter Entry G10
18. Memory Operation by FS15 Tape Format
Addresses and Specifiable Value Range for Series 15 Tape Format

Equal-Lead Threading
Subprogram Calling
Canned Cycle
Multiple Repetitive Canned Turning Cycle
Canned Drilling Cycle Formats
19. Functions for High-Speed Cutting
High-Speed Cycle Cutting
Distribution Processing Nation Monitoring Function for the High-Speed Machining Command G05
20. Axis Control Function
Polygonal Turning
Rotary Axis Roll-Over
Simple Synchronization Control
High-Speed Remote Buffer
Synchronization Control
B-Axis Control G100, G101, G102, G103, G110
Angular Axis Control
Tool Withdrawal and Return

21. Two-Path Control Function
Waiting for Tool Posts
Tool Post Interface Check
Conditions for Making a Tool Post Interference Check
Example of Making a Tool Post Interference Check
Balance Cut G68, G69
Memory Common to Tool Posts
Spindle Control in Two-Path Control
Synchronization Control and Composite Control

22. Pattern Data Input Function
Displaying the Pattern Menu
Pattern Data Display
Characters and Codes to be Used for the Pattern Data Input Function

SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY PROG IN THE EDIT MODE
Displaying Memory Used and a List of Programs
Two-path simultaneous editing on the program screen

SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
Setting and Displaying the Tool Offset Value
Direct Input of Tool Offset Value
Direct Input of Tool Offset Measured B
Counter Input of Offset Value
Setting the Workpiece Coordinate System Shifting Amount
Y Axis Offset
Displaying and Entering Setting Data
Sequence Number Comparison and Stop
Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time
Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value
Input of Measured Workpiece Origin Offsets
Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables
Displaying and Setting the Software Operator's Panel
Displaying and Setting Tool Life Management Data
Setting and Displaying B-axis Tool Compensation

SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY 1 T 1
Displaying and Setting Parameters
Displaying and Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data
Displaying the Program Number, Sequence Number, Status, and Warning Messages for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation
Displaying the Program Number and Sequence Number
Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation

SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
External Operator Message History Display

12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
Graphics Display

13. HELP FUNCTION

IV. MAINTENANCE
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
Replacing CNC Battery for Memory Back-Up
Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder
Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder A Series Servo Amp Module

APPENDIX
A. Tape Code List
B. List of Functions and Tape Format
C. Range of Command Value
D. Nomographs
Incorrect Threaded Length
Simple Calculation of Incorrect Thread Length
Tool Path at Corner
Radius Direction Error at Circle Cutting

E. Status When Turning Power On, When Clear and When Reset
F. Character-to-Codes Correspondence Table
G. Alarm List
H. Operation of Portable Tape Reader
GENERAL
This manual consísts of the followíng parts:
About thís manual I.GENERAL
Descńbes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals, and notes for reading thís manual.
PROGRAMMING
Describes each functíon: Format used to program functions in the NC language, characteristics, аnd restrictions. When a program is created through conversatíonal automatic programmíng function, refer to the mаnual for the conversational automatíc programming functíon
Table1 .
OPERATION
Descríbes the manual operatíon and automatic operatíon of a machíne, procedures for ínputtíng and outputtíng data, and procedures for edítíng a program.
IV. MAINTENANCE
Descríbes alarms, self-diagnosís, and procedures for replacíng fuses and batteries.
V. APPENDIX
Lists tape codes, valid data ranges, and error codes.
Some functions descńbed in thís mаnual may not be applied to some products. For detail, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS mаnual.
Thís manual does not descríbe parameters ín detail. For details on parameters mentíoned in this manual, refer to the manual for parameters
B-62442E .
Thís mаnual describes aU optional functíons. Look up the optíons
incorporated ínto your system in the maпual wńtten by the machine tool
builder.
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are:
Product name Abbrevlatlons
FANUC Series 16-Tf3 16-TB Seríes 16
FANUC Seríes 18-TB 18-TB Series 18
FANUC Series 160-TB 160-TB Series 160
FANUC Series 180-TB 180-TB Seríes 180
 The functíon of an CNC machíne tool system depends not only on the CNC, but on the combínation of the machíne tool, íts magnetic 
NOTES ON
cabinet, the servo system, the CNC, the operator s panels, etc. It ís too
READING THIS díffícult to describe the functíon, programmíng, and operation relating
MANUAL to all combinations. This manual generally describes these from the
stand-point of the CNC. So, for details on a particular CNC machine tool, refer to the manual íssued by the machíne tool buílder, whích should take precedence over thís mаnual.
2 Headíngs are placed in the left margin so that the reader cаn easíly access necessary ínformation. When locating the necessary ínformation, the reader cаn save tíme Ьy seaτching though these headings. 
Machining programs, parameters, variables, etc. are stored in the CNC unit internal non-volatíle memory. In  general, these contents are not lost by the swítchíngON/OFF of the power. However, it is possíble that a  state can occur where precíous data stored in the
non-volatiie memory has to be deleted, because of deletíons from a maloperation, or by a failure restoration. In order to restore rapídly when thís kind of mishap occurs, it is recommended that you create a copy of the various kínds of data beforehand.
This manual describes as many reasonabIe varíations ín equípment usage as possible. It cannot address everу combination of features, optíons and commands that should not be attempted.
If a particular combínation of operations is not described, it should not be attempted.
11. PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL B-62444E/03
1 GENERAL
1. GENERAL PROGRRAMING B-Ezaaaε;o3
The tool moves along straight lines and ares constitutíng the workpiece parts fígure Sec II-4 . TOCáL M VEMENT
ALGNG WGRKPlECE
Explanatíons
Tool movement along a straíght líne
Fí a Tool movement along the straight líne whích is paгallel to Z-axís
Program
b Tool movement along the taper líne
PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL B-62444E/03
The term interpolation refers to an operatíon in whích the tool moves
along a straight line or arc in the way descríbed above.
Symbols of the programmed commands GO1, G02, ... aгe caLled ther preparatory function and specífy the type of ínterpolation conducted in the control unít.
a Movement along straight líne b Movement along arc Control unit
lnterpoiatíon movement
ı a Movement along straíght líne
b Movement along aгc
Fíg. d lnterpolatíon function
Notes
Some machínes move tables instead of tools but thís
Ì manual assumes that tools are moved against workpieces.
Thread cutting Threads can be cut by moving the tool in synchronízation with spíndle
rotation. In a program, specífy the thread cutting function by G32.
Fig. e straight thread cutting
1. GENERAL PROGRRAMING 8-62444EJ03
Fíg. f Taper thread cuttíng
PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL
B-624ØE/03
Movement of the tool at a specífied speed for cuttíng a workpiece is called the feed. FEED-FEED FUNCTION
Chuck П Tool
Fig. a Feed function
Feedrates can Ьe specífıed by usíng actual numeńcs.
For example, the following command can be used to feed the tools mm whíle the workpiece makes one turn :
The function of decidíng the feed rate is called the feed functíon See
1. GENERAL PROGRRAMING в-62
PART DRAWING AND TOOL  MOVEMENT
A CNC machíne tool ís provided wíth a fıxed posítíon. Normally, tool
Reference Posítíon change and programming of absolute zero point as descríbed later are 1performed at thís posítion. Thís posítion ís called the reference positíon.
Machíne-Specifíc
Posítíon
Tool post
1 Chuck Reference position
Fíg. a Reference posítion
Explanations The tool can be moved to the reference posítion in two ways:
1. Mаnua1 reference posítíon return See
Reference posítion return ís performed by maпual button operation.
2. Automatíc reference positíon return See II-6 
In geneгal, mаnual reference posítíon return is performed first after the power is turned on. In order to move the tool to the reference posítíon for tool change thereafter, the functíon of automatic reference position return ís used.
1.GENERAL 8-624Λ4F/03 PROGRAMMING 
Coordínate System on
Part Drawíng and 
Coordínate System i
Specifíed by CNC -
Coordínate System
Coordinate system
Part drawíng CNC
Workpiece
Machíne tool
Fig. a Coordinate system
Explanatïons
Coordínate system The following two coordinate systems are specifíed at different locatíons:
See Il-8
Coordínate system on part drawíng
The coordínate system ís wrítten on the part drawing. As the program data, the coordinate values on this coordinate system are used.
2. Coordinate system specífied by the CNC
The coordinate system is prepared oп the actual machine tool. This can be achíeved by programming the dístance from the current posítion of the tool to the zero point of the coordinate system to be set. Х
Distance to the zero point of a coordinate system to be set ε f Program zero point
Fíg. b Coordínate system specified by the CNC
1. GENERAL PROGRRAMING в-s2444Eloз
The tool moves on the coordínate system specífíed by the CNC in accordance wíth the command program generated wíth respect to the coordinate system on the part drawíng, and cuts a workpíece ínto a shape oп the drawíng.
Therefore, in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the drawíng, the two coordínate systems must be set at the same posítíon.
s Methods of setting the The followíng method ís usually used to define two coordínate systems two coordinate systems at the same locatíon ín the same posítion
1. When coordinate zero poínt ís set at chuck face 
Fíg. c Coordinates and dimensíons on part drawíng
 Fíg. d Coordínate system on lathe as specified by CNC made to coincíde with the coordinate system on part drawing
1 PROGRAMM 1NG 1.GENERAL B-62444E/03
2. When coordinate zero poínt ís set at work end face
Fig. e Coordínates and dimensions oп part drawin
Fig. f Coordinate system on lathe as specified by CNC
 made to coincide with the coordínate system on part drawíng
1. GENERAL PROGRRAMING B-62444E/03 1
How to lndícate
Command Dímensíons for Moving the Tool - Absolute, lncremental
Commands
Explanatíons Methods of command for movíng the tool can be índícated by absolute
oг íncremental desígnatíon See r
 Absolute command The tool moves to a point at the distance from zero poínt of the
coordinate system that is to the posítion of the coordínate values. 1
Command specífying movement from poínt A to point B
t Coordínates of poínt B
Fíg. a Absolute command
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL
lncremental command Specífy the dístance from the prevíous tool posítion to the next tool position.
Command specífying movement from poínt A to poínt B
Distance and dírectíon for movement along each axis
Fíg. b lncremental command
Díameter programmíng / Dímensíons of the X axís can be set in díameter or in radíus. Diameter radíus programming programmíng or radius programmíng is employed índependently in each C machíne.
1. Diameter programmíng
In diameter programmíng, specífy the díameter value indícated on the drawing as the va1ue of the X axís.
Coordínate values of poínts A and B 
Fíg. c Díameter programming
2. Radius programming
In radius programming, specífy the dístance from the center of the workpiece, the radius value as the value of the X axis.
Coordínate values of points A and B
Fig. d Radíus programmíng
PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL B-62444E/03
The speed of the tool wíth respect to the workpíece when the workpiece is cut is called the cutting speed.
As for the CNC, the cuttíng speed can Ьe specifıed by the spíndle speed SPINDLE SPEED іп rpm unít.
FUNCTION
Fíg. a Cutting speed
Examples a cutting speed of 300 m/min. 
The spíndle speed ís approxímately 478 rрm, which ís obtaíned from N=l000v/nD. Hence the followíng command ís requíred:
Commands related to the spindle speed are called the spíndle speed function See II-10 .
The cuttíng speed v m/mín can also Ьe specífied directly by the speed value. Even when the workpíece diameter ís changed, the CNC changes the spíndle speed so that the cuttíng speed remaíns constant.
This functíon ís called the constant surface speed control functíon 
1. GENERAL PROGRRAMING в
When dríllíng, tappíng, boring, milling oг the 1íke, ís performed, ít ís necessary to select a suítable too1. When a number is assigned to each tool SELECTION OF TOOL
and the number is specifıed in the program, the corresponding tool is USED FOR VARIOUS selected.
MACHINING - TOOL
FUNCTION
Fig. a Tool used for varíous machíníng
Examples
When the tool is stored at locatíon 01 of the tool post, the tool can be selected by specífyíng T0101.
Thís ís called the tool functíon See II-11 .
PROGRAMMING B-624ØE/03 1. GENERAL
When machíníng ís actually started, ít ís necessary to rotate the spíndle, and feed coolant. For thís purpose, on-off operatíons of spindle motor and COMMAND FOR
coolant valve should be controlled See II-12 .
MACHINE OPERATIONS - MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
Fig. a Command for machine operatíons
The function of specífyíng the on-off operatíons of the components of the machine is called the míscellaneous functíon. In general, the function ís specified by  M code.
For example, when M03 ís specifıed, the spíndle ís rotated clockwíse at the specífıed spíndle speed.
 GENERAL PROGRRAMING B-62444E/o3
A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine ís cailed the program. By specifying the commands, the tool ís moved along
a straight 1ine or an arc, or the spindle motor ís turned on and off. 
 In the program, specífy the commands in the sequence of actual toolmovements. 
Fig. a Program configuratíon
A group of commands at each step of the sequence is called the block. 
The program consists of a group of blocks for a seńes of machining. The
number for díscrimínatíng each block ís called the sequence number, and the number for discrimínatíng each program ís called the program number See II-13 .
GENERAL 8-62444E/03
Explanations The block and the prograni have the following confïgurations.
B10ck
Sequence Preparatory Dimension word Miscel- Spindle Tool
Fig. b Block configuration
A block begins with a sequence number that ïdentifíes that block
Normally, a program number is specified after the end-of-block ; code at the beginning of the program, and a program end code M02 or M30 as specified at the end of the program.
1. GENERAL PROGRRAMING 
When machining of the same pattern appears at many portions of a program, a program for the pattern ís created. Thís ís called the subprogram. On the other hand, the ońgínal program ís called the main program. When a subprogram execution command appears during execution of the main program, commands of the subprogram are executed. When execution of the subprogram is fíníshed, the sequence returns to the main program.
PROGRAM
Explanatíons
Machíníng usíng the end Usually, several tools are used for machining oпe workpiece. The tools of cutter - Tool length have different toollength. It ís very troublesome to change the program compensatíon function in accordance wíth the tools. 
See Therefore, the length of each tool used should be measured in advance.
By settíng the dífference between the length of the standard tool and the м
length of each tool in the CNC data dísplay and setting : see III-11 ,
machiníng can be performed wíthout altering the program even when the
tool is changed. This function is called toollength compensation.
1. GENERAL PROGRRAMING B-62444É/03
Límít switches are ínstalled at the ends of each axís on the machine to prevent tools from moving beyond the ends. The range in which tools can 
TOOL MOVEMENT
move is called the stroke. Besides the stroke limits, data ín memory can RANGE - STROKE be used to define aп аrea which tools cannot enter.
Tools cannot enter thís area. The area is specified by data in memory or a program.
Besides strokes defíned with limít swítches, the operator can defíne an 1аrea which the tool cannot enter usíng a program or data in memorу see 
Sectíon IIl-11 . Thís functíon ís called stroke check.
B-62лØE/03 PROGRAMM 1NG 2. CONTORLED AXES
2 CONTROLED AXEs PROGRAMMING B-62444E/Π3
ltem 16-TB 16-TB, 160-TB
160-TB two-path control
Number of basíc 2 axes 2 axes for each tool post
controlıed axes 1 4 axes in total
Controlled axis expansion Max. 8 axes İ Max. 6 axes for each tcol
total included in Cs axis post +Cs axis Note
Number of basic símu ta- 2 axes 2 axes for each tooI post neously controlled axes 4 axes irı total
Simultaneously controlled Max. 6 axes Max. 4 axes for each toolaxis expansion total post
Note
A two-path control system with a 9-inch CRT has up to eight controlled axes.
Note
The number of simultaneously contro11ab1e axes for manual operation jog feed, incremental feed, or manual handle feed is 1 or 3 1 when bit 0 JAX of parameter 1002 is set to 0 and 3 when it is set to 1 .
Seríes 18
Seríes 1 0
ltem 18-TB ı 18-T6, 180-TB
180-TB two-path conτrol
Number of basíc 2 axes ? axes for each too post
controlled axes ı 4 axes in total
Controlled axis expansion Max. 6 axes Max. 4 axes for each tool included in Cs axis post +Cs axis Note
Number of basic símu ta- 2 axes 2 axes for each tool postneous y controlled axes 4 axes in total
Simu taneously contro ed Max. 4 axes Max. 4 axes for each tool axis expansion total post
A two-path control system with a 9-inch CRT has up to eight controlled
The number of simultaneously controllable axes for manual operation jog feed, incremental feed, or manual feed ís 1 or 3 1 when bit 0 JAX of parameteY 1002 is set
to 0 and 3 when it is set to 1 .
PROGRAMMING 2. CONTORLED AXES
Níne letters, A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, and Z, can be used as axís names.
Each axís name ís determíned according to parameter No. 1020. If the NAMES OF AXES
parameter specífíes 0 or anything other than the nine letters, the axis name defaults to a number from 1 to 8.
Wíth two-path control, the names of two basic axes for one tool post are always X and Z; the names of additíonal axes can be optíonally selected from A, B, C, U, V, W, and Y by usíng parameter No. 1020.
For one tool post, the same axís name cannot be assígned to multíple axes, but the same axís name can be used with the other tool post.
Límítatíons
Default axis name When a default axís name 1 to 8 ís used, the system cannot operate in
MEM or MDI mode.
Duplícate axis name If the parameter specífíes аn axís name more than once, ouly the fírst axís to be assígned that axis name becomes operable.
Notes
1 When G code system A is used, the letters U, V, and W cannot be used as an axis name hence, the maximum of six controlled axes , because these letters are used as
incremental commands for X, Y, and Z. To use the letters U, V, and W as axis names, the G code system must be B or C. Likewíse, letter H is used as an íncremental command for C, thus íncremental commands cannot be used íf A or B is used as an axís name.
2 Wíth two-path control, when ínformatíon such as the M current position about each axis ís displayed on the CRT screen, an axís name may be followed by a subscript to indicate a tool post number ,Xl and X2 . This is axis name to help the user to easily understand which tool post an axís belongs to. When writing a program, the user must specífy X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C without attaching a subscript.
In G76 multiple-thread cutting , the A address in a block specifíes the tool nose angle instead of a command for axis A.
If C or A ís used as an axis name, C or A cannot be used as an angle command for a straight line in chamfering or dírect drawing dimension programming. Therefore, C and
A should be used accordíng to bít 4 CCR of parameter 
2. CONTROLED AXES PROGRAMMING
The increment system consísts of the least input íncrement for input and least command increment for output . The least ínput íncrement 
INCREMENT SYSTENI
is the least incrcment for programming the travel dístance. The least command increment ís the least íncrement for moving the tool on the machine. Both íncrements are represented in mm, inches, or degrees.
The increment system is classifıed ínto IS-B and IS-C Tables and Select IS-B oг IS-C usíng bít 1 ISC of parameter 1004.
When selectíng IS-C, the option for the 1/10 íncrement system ís necessary.
Table a lncrement system 1s-B 
Least input increment Least command increment

1. The unit in the table ís a díameter value with diameter programming and a radius value in radius programming.
2. A command exceeding the maximum stroke cannot be  specified.
З. The actual stroke depends on the machine tool.
3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION
G FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62444E/o3
PREPARATORY FUNCTION G FUNCTION
A number followíng address G determínes the meaníng of the command
for the concerned block.
G codes are divided into the following two types.
Type Meaníng
One-shot G code The G code ís effectíve only ín the block ín whích it is specified
Modal G code The G code is effective untíl another G code of the same group is specified.
Example
There are three G code systems : A,B, and C Tab1e 3 . Select a G code system usíng bits 6 GSB and 7 GSC of parameter 3401. Generally, thís mаnual descńbes the use of G code system A, except when the described ítem can use only G code system B oг C. 1n such cases, the use of G code system B oг C ís descńbed.
3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING G FUNCTION
Explanatíons 1. If the CNC enters the c1ear state see bít 6 CLR of parameter 3402
when the power ís turned oп oг the CNC ís reset, the modal G codes change as follows.
1 G codes marked wíth ín Tab1e 3 are enabled.
2 When the system ís cleared due to power on or reset, whichever specífıed, eíther G20 or G21, remaíns effective.
3 Bít 7 of parameter No. 3402 can be used to specify whether G22 or G23 ís selected upon power on. Resettíng the CNC to the clear state does not affect the selectíon of G22 or G23.
4 Settíng bít 0 GO1 of parameter 3402 determines which code, eíther G00 or GO1, is effective.
5 Settíng bit 3 G91 of parameter 3402 determines which code, eíther G90 or G91, ís effective.
2. G codes of group 00 except G10 and G11 are síngle shot G codes.
3. P/S larm ís displayed when a G code not listed in the G code líst ís specifıed oг a G code wíthout a corresponding option is specífied.
4. G codes of dífferent groups caп be specífied ín the same block.
If G codes of the same group are specífíed ín the same block, the G code specífied last is valíd.
5. If a G code of group 01 ís specífied in a canned cycle, the canned cycle is canceled in the same way as when a G80 command ís specífied. G codes of group 01 are not affected by
G codes for specífyíng a canned cycle.
6. When G code system A ís used for a canned cycle, only the ínítiallevel ís províded at the return point.
7. G codes are displayed for each group number.
3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION
G FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 
G21 G21 G71 Input in mm
G22 G22 G22 09 Stored stroke check function on
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
G25 G25 G25 08 Spindle speed fluctuation detвctiπn off
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G2 7 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Return to reference positíon
G30 G30 G30 00 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
Floatíng reference point return
G31 G31 G31
Skip function
G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting
01
G34 G34 G34 Variable-lead thread cutting
G36 G36 G36 Automatic tool compensatíon X
G37 G37 G37 00 Automatic tool compensation Z
G39 G39 G39 Corner circuiar interpolatíon
G40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation left
G42 G42 G42 Tooi nose radius compensation right
G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting or max. spindle speed setting
 Workpiece coordinate system preset
PREPARATORY FUNCTION
PROGRAMMING G FUNCTION system settíng
G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G55 G55 G55 Workpíece coordinate system 2 selection
Ù56 G56 G56 14 Workpiece coordlnate system 3 selection _
G57 G57 G57 Workpíece coordinate system 4 selection
G58 G58 G58 Wcrkpiece coordínate system 5 selection
G59 G59 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 seIection
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro calling
G66 G66 G66 Macгo modal call
G67 G67 G67 12 Macro modal call cancel
G68 G68 G68 Mirror image for double turrets CN or balance cut mude
G69 G69 G69 Mirror image for double turrets OFF or baÍance cut mode cancel
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 -, G73 Steck removal in turníng
G72 G72 - G-74 00 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 Pattern repeatirıg
G74 074 G76 End face peck drílling
075 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76 G76 G78 Multiple threading cycle
G71 G71 G72 Traverse grirrdiag cycle for grínding machine
G72 G72 G73 Traverse direct constant-dimensíon gŕrdíng cyclθ
01 for grinding machine
073 G73 G74 Oscilation grinding cycle for grinding machine
074 G74 ^G; 5 Oscilation dírect constant-dímension grinding cycle
for grindíng machine
G80 G80 080 Canned cycle for drilling cancel
G90 G77 020 Outer diameteriinternal diameter cutting cycle
G97 G97 G97 : Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 t G94 G94 Peг minute feed
G99 G95 G95 Peг revolution feed

G90 G90 03 Absolute programming
4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING 8-62444 
The G00 conırnand moves a tool to the posítíon in the workpíece system specified wíth an absolute or an íncremental command at a rapid traverse
G00 In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end poínt is programmed.
In the incremental command the dístance the tool moves ís programmed.
Format
1P_: For an absolute command, the coordlnates of an end, and for an lncremental command, the dlstance
the tool moves.
Explanatíons Eíther of the followíng tool paths cаn be selected accordíng to bít 1 LØ
of paraıneter No. 1401.
Nonlínear ínterpolatíon posítíoning
The tool is positíoned with the rapid traverse rate for each axis separately. The tool path ís normally straight.
Línear ínterpolation positioníng
The tool path ís the same as in linear ínterpolatíon GO1 . The tool is posítioned wíthín the shortest possíble tíme at a speed that is not more than the rapíd traverse rate for each axís.
Start posítíon
Línear interpolation positioníng
End position
Non linear ínterpolation positioning
The rapid traverse rate in the G00 commаnd ís set to the parameter for each axís índependently by the machíne tool builder. In the posítíoníng mode actuated Ьy G00, the tool is accelerated to a predetermined speed at the start of a block and ís decelerated at the end of a block. Executíon proceeds to the next block after confırming the ín-posítion.
In-posítion means that the feed motor is wíthín the specífied range.
This range is determíned by the machíne tool buílder by settíng to parameter
PROGRAMMING 4. 1NTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS B-62444E/03
Exampleѕ
< Radíus programmíng >
 Absolute command Incremental command
RestrictiGns The rapíd traverse rate cannot be specífíed in the address F.
Even if linear interpolation positíoníng ís specífıed, nonlinear ínterpolatíon positioníng ís used in the following cases. Therefore, be careful to ensure that the tool does not foul the workpiece.
G28 specifyíng posítíoning between the reference and interrnedíate posítíons.
G53

A tools move along a line to the specifíed posítion at the feedrate specified in F.
The feedrate specifıed іл F ís effective untíl a new value is specífıed. It need not be specified for each block.
The feedrate commanded by the F code ís measured along the tool path.
If the F code is not commanded, the feedrate is regarded as zero.
For feed-per-minute mode under 2-axis símultaneous control, the feedrate for a movement along each axis as follows :
Feed rate of a axís dírectíon F : 
Description of the Command Format
Command Descríptíon
G17 Specífícation of arc on XpYp plane
G18 Specíficatíon of arc on ZpXp plane
G19 ı Specification of arc on YpZp piane
G02 Circular lnterpo ation Clockwise direction CW
G03 Circular lnterpolation Courıteıclockwise direction CCW
XP Command values of X axis or its parallel axis set by parameter No. 1022
 Yp Command values of Y axis or its parailel axis set by parameter No. 1022

Directíon of the círcular Clockwise G02 and counterclockwise G03 oп the XpYp plane 1
ínterpolatíon ZpXp plane oг YpZp plane are defıned when the XpYp plane ís víewed
in the posítive-to-negatíve dírectíon of the Zp axís Yp axís or Xp axis,respectively in the Cartesian coordinate system. See the figure below.
Distance moved on an The end point of an arc is specífíed by address Xp, Yp or Zp, and is arC expressed as an absolute or íncremental value accordíng to G90 or G91.
For the incremental value, the distance of the end point whích ís víewed from the start point of the arc ís specífíed.
Dístance from the start The аrc center ís specífied Ьy addresses I, J, аnd K for the Xp, Yp, and Zp poínt to the center of arc axes, respectívely. The numerícal value followíng I, J, or K, however, ís a vector component in whích the arc center ís seen from the start point, and is always specífíed as аn incremental value irrespectíve of G90 and G91, as shown below.
I, J, and K must be signed according to the dírection.
IO,JO, and KO can be omitted.
If the difference between the radius at the start point and that at the end point exceeds the value іп a parameter
Feedrate The feedrate in cігculаr ínterpolatíon ís equal to the feed rate specífíed by
the F code, аnd the feedrate along the arc the tangentíal feedrate of the arc ís controlled to be the specífíed feedrate. 
The error between the specífıed feedrate and the actual tool feedrate ís2 or less. However, thís feed rate is measured along the arc after the tool nose radius compensatíon ís applied
Restrúctúons If I, J, K, and R addresses are specífied símultaneously, the arc specifíed
Ьy address R takes precedence and the other are ignored.
If an axís not comprising the specifíed plаne ís commanded, an alaгm ís dísplayed.
For example, when a ZX plane is specífíed in G-code B oг C, specífyíng the X-axís or U-axis paгallel to the X-axis causes P/5 alarm No. 028 to be generated.
If the dífference in the radíus between the start аnd end poínts of the arc exceeds the value specífıed in parameter No. 3410, P/S alarm No. 020 is generated.
If the end point is not on the arc, the tool moves in a straight line along one of the axes after reaching the end point.
If an aгc havíng a central angle approaching 180 ís specífíed wíth R, the calculation of the center coordínates may produce an error. In such a case, specify the center of the arc with I, J, and K.
Explanatíons The command method is to simply or secondary add a move command
axis which is not círcular ínterpolatíon axes. An F command specifies a feed rate along a cіrculаr arc. Therefore, the feed rate of the linear axís is as follows:
Length of linear axís
Length of círcular arc
Determíne the feed rate so the linear axís feed rate does not exceed any of the vańous limít values. Bit 0 HFC of parameter No. 1404 can be used to prevent the línear axis feedrate from exceeding varíous limit values.
The feedrate aiong the circumference of two circular ínterpolated axes ís the specífíed feedrate.
Limítations Cutter compensatíon is applíed only for a círcular arc.
Tool offset and toollength compensatíon cannot be used in a block in whích a helical ínterpolatíon is commanded.
4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-s2 
Polaг coordinate interpolatíon ís a functíon that exercises contour control іп converting a command programmed in a Cartesían coordínate system POLAR
to the movement of a linear axís movement of a tool and the movement of a rotary axis rotation of a workpíece . This method is useful in cuttíng I1NTERP OLATION a front surface and gńnding a cam shaft oп a lathe.
Format
Starts polar coordinate interpolation mode enables Specify and polar coordınate ínterpolation ín Separate Blocks.
Specify linear or círcular interpolatíon usíng coordínates in a Cartesían coordínate system consisting of a linear I axis and rotary axís vírtual axis .
 Polar coordínate ínterpolation mode is cancelled for not performíng po1ar coordinate ínterpolation G112 and G113 can be used in place of aпd , respectively.
Explanatíons
Polar coordinate starts the polar coordinate interpolatíon mode and selects a polar
ínterpolatíon plane coordinate ínterpolation plane Fíg. a . Polaг coordínate ínterpolation ís performed on this plane.
Rotary axis virtual axís
Orígín of the workpiece coordínate system a Polar coordlnate lnterpolatlon plane.
When the power is turned oп or the system ís reset, polaг coordinate ínterpolation is cаnceled
The linear and rotation axes for polar coordínate interpolatíon must be set in paτameters No. 5460 and 5461 beforehand.
Note
The plane used before ís specífíed plane seiected
by G17, G18, or G19 is canceled. It is restored when canceling polar coordinate interpolation is specified.
When the system is reset, polar coordinate interpolatíon is canceled and the plane specífíed by G17, G18, or G19 is used.
PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Dístance moved and In the polar coordínate interpolation mode, program commands are
feedrate for polar specifíed with Cartesian coordínates on the polar coordinate interpolation coordínate ínterpolatíon plane. The axís address for the rotatíon axís ís used as the axís address for the second axis virtual axís in the plane. Whether a diameter or
The unít for coordínates on radíus is specífied for the first axís іп the plane ís the same as for thethe hypothetícai axís ís the rotation axis regardless of the specifıcatíon for the fírst axis in the plane.
same as the unít for the The virtual axís is at coordinate 0 ímmediately after ís specífied.
linear axis mm/inch Po1ar ínterpolatíon ís started assumíng the angle of 0 for the posítion the tool when ís specified.
The unít for the feedrate ís Specify the feedrate as a speed relatíve speed between the workpíece and mm/mín or inch/mín tool tangentíal to the po1аr coordínate ínterpolation 
coordinate system usíng F. 1
G codes which can be 1 G01 Línear interpolation
specífíed in the polar G02, G03 Circular ínterpolatíon
coordínate ínterpolatíon G04 Dwell
mode G40, G41, G42 Tool nose radius compensatíon
Polaг coordinate ínterpolatíon ís applied to the path after cutter compensatíon.
G65, G66, G67 Custom macro command
G98, G99 Feed per mínute, feed per revolutíon
Circular ínterpolatíon ín The addresses for specifyíng the radíus of an аrc for circular ínterpolatíon the polar coordínate G02 0г G03 in the polаr coordínate ínterpolation plane depend on the plane fírst axis in the plane linear axís . 
I and J ín the Xp-Yp plane when the 1inear axis ís the X-axis oг an axís C parallel to the X-axis.
J and K in the Yp-Zp plane when the línear axís ís Y-axís or an axís parallel to the Y-axís.
K and I in the Zp-Xp plane when the linear axís ís the Z-axís oг an axís parallel to the Z-axis.
The radíus of an arc can be specífıed also with an R command.
Note
The U-, V-, and W-axes  with the basic axís can be used with G-codes B and C.
Movement along axes The tool moves along such axes normally, índependent of polar
not in the poiar coordinate interpolation.
coordínate ínterpolatíon plane ín the polar
coordínate ínterpolatíon
mode 
Current posítíon dísplay Actual coordínates aгe dísplayed. However, the remaíning distance to ín the polar coordinate move ín a block ís dísplayed based on the coordínates in the polarínterpolatíon mode coordínate ínterpolatíon plаne Cartesian coordínates .

4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING 8-6244E/03
Restrictíons
Coordïnate system for the Before ís specífíed, a workpíece coordínate system where the
poiar coordinate center of the rotary axis is the orígin of the coordínate system must be set.
interpoiation In the mode, the coordinate system must not be changed G92,
G52, G53, relative coordinate reset, G54 through G59, etc. .
Tooi nose radíus The polar coordinate ínterpolation mode cannot be started or terminated
compensation command 0г in the tool nose radius compensatíon mode G41 0г
G42 . 0г must be specífíed іп the tool nose radius
compensatíon canceled mode G40 .
Program restart For a block in the G mode, the program cannot be restarted.
Cuttíng feedrate for the Polar coordinate interpolatíon converts the tool movement for a figure rotatíon axis programmed in a Cartesian coordínate system to the tool movement in the rotation axis C-axis and the linear axís X-axís . When the tool moves closer to the center of the workpíece, the C-axis component of the feedrate becomes larger and may exceed the maximum cuttíng feedrate for the C-axís set ín parameter No. 1422 , causing an alarm see the fıgure below . To prevent the C-axís component from exceeding the
maximum cuttíng feedrate for the C-axís, reduce the feedrate specifıed wíth address F or create a program so that the tool center of the tool when tool nose radius compensatíon is applied does not move close to the center of the workpiece.
Consider lines L1, L2, and L3. AX is the distance the tool moves per time unit at the feedrate specifíed with address F ín the Cartesian coordínate system. As the tool moves from L1 to L2 to L3, the angie at whích the tool moves per time unit corresponding to AX іn the Cartesían coordínate system ìncreases from 8l toO 2 to Θ3.
in other words, the C-axis component of the feedrate becomes larger as the tool moves cioser to the center of the workpiece. The C component of the feedrate may exceed the maximum cutting feedrate for the C-axís because the tool movement ín the Cartesian coordinate system has been converted to the tool movement for the C-axís and the X-axís.
L:Dístance in mm between the tool center and workpiece center when the tool center ís the nearest to the workpiece center
R :Махімuм cuttíng feedrate deg/mín of the C axís 
Then, a speed specifíabie with address F in poiar coordinate ínterpolation can be given by the formuia below.
Specify a speed allowed by the formula. The formuia provides a theoretical value; in practíce, a value slíghtly smaller than a theoretical value may need to be used due to a calcuiatíon error.
Díameter and radius Even when diameter programming ís used for the línear axís X-axis 
programming radius programmíng ís app1іed to the rotary axís C-axís .
PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Examples Example of Polar Coordinate Interpolatíon Program Based on X Axis
Linear Axís and C Axís Rotary Axís
C hypothetical axís
С аxís Path aiter tool nose radius compensatíon
Program path
X axis
Z axís
X axis is by diameter programming, C axis is by radíus programming.
4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING The amount of travel of a rotary axís specifíed by an angle ís once ínternally converted to a distance of a línear axís along the outer surface so that linear ínterpolation oг círcular ínterpolatíon can be performed with
another axís. After ínterpolation, such a distance is converted back to the amount of travel of the rotary axis.
 The cylíndrical interpolatíon function allows the síde of a cylínder to be developed for programmíng. So programs such as a program for cylíndrical cam grooving can be created very easíly.
Cutter compensation To perform cutter compensation in the cylíndrical interpolatíon mode, cancel any ongoíng cutter compensation mode before entering the cylindrical interpolation mode. Then, start and termínate cutter compensation within the cylindrical interpolation mode.
Cylíndrícal ínterpolation In the cylindńcal ínterpolatíon mode, the amount of travel of a rotary axis accuracy specífíed by an angle ís oпce ínternally converted to a dístance of a linear axis oп the outer surface so that linear ínterpolatíon or circular 
lnterpolatíon can be performed with another axís. After ínterpolatíon, such a distance ís converted back to an angle. For this conversion, theamount of travel is rounded to a least input increment. 
So when the radíus of a cylinder is small, the actual amount of travel cаn differ from a specífíed amount of travel. Note, however, that such an error is not accumulatíve.
If maпual operation is perfoгmed in the cylíndrical interpolation mode with mаnual absolute on, an error can occur for the reason described above.
Circular ïnterpoiation If the cylindrical interpolatíon mode ís started when tool nose radíus
and tooi nose radíus compensatíon ís already applied, circular ínterpolatíon is not correctly compensation performed in the cyllndńcal ínterpolation mode.
4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
Posítioning In the cylíndrical ínterpolation mode, positíoning operations íncluding
those that produce rapíd traverse cycles such as G28, G80 through G89 cannot be specífíed. Before positíoníng can be specifíed, the cylíndrícal
interpolatíon mode must be cancelled. Cylíndrical ínterpolation cannot be performed in the posítíoning mode G00 .
Coordinate system In the cylindrical interpolation mode, a workpiece coordínate system
settíng G50 cannot be specified.
Cylindrícal interpolation In the cylíndrícal ínteØolatíon mode, the cylindrical ínterpolatíon mode mode settíng cannot be reset. The cylíndrical ínterpolatíon mode must be cancelled before the cylíndrícal ínterpolatíon mode can be reset.
Canned cycle for dríllíng Canned cycles for drilling, G81 to G89, cannot be specifıed duríng duríng cylíndrícal cylíndrícal ínterpolatíon mode.
ínterpolatíon mode
Examples 
always radlus programming
Fig. d Example of Thread Cutting
Explanatíons In general, thread cutting is repeated along the same tool path in rough
cutting through fínish cutting for a screw. Sínce thread cuttíng starts whenthe posítion coder mounted on the spíndle outputs a 1-turn sígnal, threadíng is started at a fıxed poínt and the tool path on the workpíece is unchanged for repeated thread cutting. Note that the spíndle speed must remain constant from rough cutting through finísh cuttíng. If not,
íncorrect thread lead wíll occur.
In general, the lag of the servo system, etc. will produce somewhat íncorrect leads at the starting and ending points of a thread cut. To compensate for this, a threadíng length somewhat longer than requíred should be specifíed.
Table a lists the ranges for specífying the thread lead. 
Table. a Ranges of lead slzes that can be speclfled 
Least command lncrement
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03
Notes
1. Feedrate overríde is effective fíxed at 100 during thread cutting.
2. it is very dangerous to stop feedíng the thread cutter without stoppíng the spindle. This will suddenly íncrease the cutting depth. Thus, the feed hold functíon is ineffective while thread cuttíng. If the feed hold button ìs pressed during thread cutting, the tool wí11 stop after a block not specifying thread cutting is executed as if the SINGLE BLOCK button were pushed. 
However, the feed hold lamp SPL lamp lights when the FEED HOLD button on the machíne control panel is pushed. Then, when the tool stops, the lamp is turned off single Block stop status .
З. When the FEED HOLD button is held down, or ís pressed again in the first block that does not specífy thread cutting immediately after a thread cutting block, the tool stops at the biock that does not specify thread cutting.
4. When thread cutting is executed ín the single block status, the tool stops after execution of the first block not specifying thread cutting.
5. When the mode was changed from automatic operation to manual operatíon duríng thread cutting, the tool stops at the first block not specífying thread cuttíng as when the feed hold button is pushed as mentioned in Note З.
However, when the mode is changed from one automatic operatíon mode to another, the tool stops after execution of the block not specifyíng thread cuttíng as for the single block mode in Note 4.
6. When the prevíous block was a thread cutting block, cutting wí11 start ímmediately without waítíng for detection of the 1-turn signal even if the present block is a thread cutting block.
Z_; A 1-turn sígnal is not detected before this block.
G32 ; Regarded as threadíng block.
Z_ F_ ; One turn signal is also not detected.
7. Because the constant surface speed control is effective during scroll thread or tapered screw cutting and the spindle speed changes, the correct thread lead may not be cut. Therefore, do not use the constant surface speed control during thread cutting. lnstead, use G97.
8. A movement block preceding the thread cutting block must not specífy chamferíng or corner
9. A thread cutting block must not specifying chamfering or corner R.
spindle speed override function is disabled during thread cutting. The spindle speed is
fixed at 100 cycle retract function is íneffectíve to G32.

4. 1NTERPOLATIОN FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING 
This function for contínuous thread cuttíng ís such that fractional pulses
output to a joínt between move blocks are overlapped wíth the next move G NTINUOUS
for pulse processing and output block overlap .
THREAD CUTTING Therefore, discontinuous machining sectíons caused by the interruption
of move duríng continuously block machining aгe elímínated, thus
makíng it possible to contínuously dírect the block for thread cuttíng
instructions.
Explanatíorıs Since the system ís controlled in such a manner that the synchronism
wíth the spindle does not deviate in the joínt between blocks wherever
possíble, ít is possíble to performed special thread cuttíng operatíon in
whích the lead and shape change midway.
G32 G32
G32
F1g. a Contlnuous Thread Cutting
Even when the same section ís repeated for thread cuttíng whíle changing
the depth of cut, this system allows a correct machiníng without ímpairing
the threads.
Notes
1. B1ock overlap is effective even for G01
command, producing a more excellent finíshing surface.
2. When extreme micro blocks continue, no block overlap may
function.
62
e-624Øεıo3 PROGRAMMING 4. 1NTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Usíng the Q address to specify an angle between the one-spíndle-rotatíon
sígnal and the start of threading shífts the threading start angle, makíng
MULTIPLE-THREAD
ít possíble to produce multiple-thread screws wíth ease.
CUTTING
І н
Multiple-thread screws.
Format
constant-lead threading
G32 IP_ F_ Q_ ; IP_ : End poínt
G32 IP_ Q_ ; F_ : Lead in longítudínal dírectíon
Q_ : Threadíng start angle
Explanations
Available thread cutting G32: Constant-lead thread cutting
commands G34: Vańable-lead thread cuttíng
G76: Multíple-thread cutting cycle
G92: Thread cutting cycle
Límítations
start angle The start angle ís not a continuous-state modal value. It must be
specified each tíme it is used. If a value is not specífíed, 0 is assumed.
Start angle íncrement The start angle Q íncrement is degrees. Note that no decimal poínt
can be specifíed.
Example:
For a shift angle of 180 degrees, specify Q180000.
cannot be specified, because it contains a decimal poínt.
specífíable start angle A start angle Q of between 0 and 360000 in uníts can be
range specífied. If a value greater than 360000 360 degrees ís specifíed, it is
rounded down to 360000 360 degrees .
Multíple-thread cuttíng For the G76 multíple-thread cuttíng commаnd, always use the FS 15 tape
G76 format.
63
4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03
Examples
Program for producíng double-threaded screws
wíth start angles of 0 and 180 degrees

PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTtONS
Linear interpolation can be commanded by specífying axíal move
followíng the G31 command,like GO1. If an external skíp signal ís ínput
SKIP FUNCTION G31
duríng the execution of thís command, executíon of the command ís  ínterrupted and the next block ís executed.
The skíp functíon ís used when the end of machíníng is not programmed but specífıed wíth a sígnal from the machíne, for example, in grínding. It ís used also for measuring the dímensíons of a workpiece.
For detaíls of how to use thís functíon, refer to the manual supplíed by the machíne tool buílder.
Format
Explanatíons The coordínate values when the skíp sígnal ís turned on can be used in a
custom macro because they are stored in the custom macro system
variable 5061 to 5068, as follows:
5061 X axís coordinate value
5062 Z axís coordinate value
5063 3гd axís coordínate value
5068 8th axis coordínate value
Notes
1 If G31 command ís íssued whíle tool nose radíus compensation is applied, an P/8 alarm of ís displayed. Cancel the cutter compensatíon with the G40 command before the G31 command ís specífíed.
2 To increase the precísíon of the tool position when the skip signal is ínput, feedrate overríde, dry run, and automatíc acceleration/deceleration is dísabled for the skip function when the feedrate ís specified as a feed per minute value.
To enable these functions, set bit 7 SKF of parameter No. 6200 to 1. If the feedrate is specífied as a feed per rotation value, feedrate overríde, dry run, and automatic
acceleration/deceleration are enabled for the skíp function, regardless of the setting of the SKF bít.
3 For the high-speed skip option, executíng G31 during feed-per rotation mode causes 
Specífyíng Q1, Q2, Q3, oг Q4 in G04 dwell command enables dwell skíp in a símílar way to specífyíng G31. A skip may occur even if Q ís not specífíed. For an explanatíon of selectíng Q1, Q2, Q3, oг Q4 , refer to the manual supplied by the machíne tool buílder.
Correspondence to skip Parameter Nos. 6202 to 6205 can be used to specify whether the 4-poínt
sígnals oг 8-poínt skíp sígnal ís used when a hígh-speed skíp signal is used .
Specíficatíon ís not limited to one-to-one correspondence. It is possíble to specify that one skip sígnal correspond to two or more 
4. NTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING в-s2aaaεıoз
With the motor torque limited for example, by a torque limit command,
issued through the PMC window , a move command followíng G31 P99 TORQUE 
Explanatíons
G31 P99 If the motor torque límít ís reached, or a SKIP sígnal ís receíved duríng
executíon of G31 Ø9, the current move commаnd is aborted, and the next
block ís executed.
G31 P98 If the motor torque límít ís reached duńng executíon of G31 Ø8, the
current move command ís aborted, and the next block ís executed. The SKIP signal does not affect G31 P98.
Enteríng a SKIP sígnal duríng the executíon of G31 P98 does not cause a skip.
Torque límít command If a torque límít ís not specífíed before the executíon of G31 Ø9/98, the move command continues; no skíp occurs even if a torque límit ís
reached.
Custom macro system When G31 P99/98 is specífied, the custom macro varíables hold the variable coordinates at the end of a skíp. See Section
If a SKIP signal causes a skíp wíth G31 P99, the custom macro system varíables hold the coordínates based on the machine coordínate system when it stops, rather than those when the SKIP sígnal is entered.
Límítatíons
Axís command only one axís can be controlled in each block wíth G31 Ø8/99.
If two oг moгe axes are specífied to be controlled in such blocks, or no axís command is íssued, P/S alaгm No. 015 ís generated.
Degree of servo error When a sígnal índícatíng that a torque límít has Ьeeп reached ís ínput duríng execution of G31 Ø9/98, and the degree of servo error exceeds
32767, P/S a1arm No. 244 ís generated.
High-speed skíp Wíth G31 Ø9, a SKIP signal can cause a skip, but not a high-speed skíp.

PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Símplífíed G31 Ø9/98 cannot Ьe used for axes subject to simplified synchronization
synchronízation and oг the X-axís or Z-axis when under slanted axís control.
slanted axís control
Speed control Bit 7 SKF of parameter No. 6200 must be set to disable dry run,
override, and auto acceleratíon or deceleration for G31 skip commands.
Consecutíve commands Do not use G31 Ø9/98 in consecutíve blocks.
Notes
1. Always specify a torque límit before a G31 P99/98 command. Otherwise, G31 P99/98 allows move commands to be executed without causing a skip.
2. if G31 ís issued with tool nose radius compensation specífied, P/S alarm No. 035 is generated. Therefore, before issuing G31, execute G40 to cancel tool nose radius compensatíon.
PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS
The feed functíons control the feedrate of the tool. The followíng two feedGENERAL functions aгe avaílable:
Feed funetions
1. Rapid traverse
When the posítioníng command G00 ís specífied, the tool moves at a rapid traverse feedrate set ín the CNC parameter No. 1420 .
2. Cuttíng feed
The tool moves at a programmed cuttíng feedrate.
Override Overríde can be applied to a rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate using
the switch on the machine operator s panel.
Automatíc acceleration/ To prevent a mechanícal shock, acceleratíon/deceleration ís automatícally deceleratíon applíed when the tool starts and ends its movement Fig. a .
Rapid traverse rate
TR : AcceIeration/ deceleration tíme
constant for rapid traverse rate
Fíg. b Example of Tool Path between Two Blocks
In circular ínterpolatíon, a radia1 error occurs Fig.
Fíg. c Example of Radíal Error in Círcular lnterpolation
The rounded-corner path shown in Fíg. and the error shown in Fig. depend on the feedrate. So, the feedrate needs to be controlled for nthe tool to move as programmed.
Explanatíons The posítíoníng command Ø posítíons the tool by rapíd traverse. In
rapid traverse, the next block is executed after the specífíed feedrate becomes 0 and the servo motor reaches a certain range set by the machine tool builder ín-position check .
A rapid traverse rate is set for each axís by parameter No. 1420, so no rapid
traverse feedrate need be programmed.
The followíng overrides can be applied to a rapíd traverse rate with the switch on the machine operator s panel:FO, 25, 50, 100
F0: Allows a fixed feedrate to be set for each axis by parameter No. 1421. 
For detaíled ínformatíon, refer to the appropríate mаnual of the machíne tool buílder.
5. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING в-s2444E 
Feedrate of línear ínterpolatíon GO1 , circular ínterpolatíon G02, G03 ,
etc. are commanded wíth numbers after the F code.
In cutting feed, the next block ís executed so that the feedrate change from the prevíous block ís mínimized.
Two modes of specíficatíon are available: per minute G98
After F, specify the amount of feed of the tool per mínute.
peг revolutíon G99
After F, specífy the amount of feed of the tool per spindle revolutíon.
feed
Specify a desired one-digit number after F. Then, the feedrate set wíth the CNC for that number ís set.
Format
Feed per mínute
G98 ; G code group 05 for feed per minute
F_ ; Feedrate command mm/m1n or lnch/min
Feed per revolutíon
G99 ; G code group 05 for feed per revolutlon
F_ ; Feedrate command mm/rev or lnch/rev
Explanatíons
Tangential speed Cuttíng feed ís controlled so that the tangential feedrate ís always set at
constant control a specifıed feeďrate.
X X
End poínt
Center End poínt
Z YZ
Línear ínterpolation Círcular interpolatíon
Fig. a Tangentíal feedrate F
Feed per minute G98 After specífyíng G98 ín the feed per mínute mode , the amount of feed
of the tool peг mínute ís to be dírectly specífíed by setting a number after 
F. G98 ís a modal code. Once a G98 ís specífied, it is valid untíl G99 feed peг revolution ís specifíed. At power-on, the feed per revolutíon mode is set.
An overríde from 0 to 254 in 1 steps caті Ьe applied to feed per mínute with the switch on the machíne operator s pane1. For detaíled ínformation, see the appropríate manual of the machine tool buílder.
B-624ØE/03 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS
No override can be used for some commands such as for threading.
Feed per revolutíon After specifying G99 in the feed per revolutíon mode , the amount of
G99 feed of the tool per spíndle revolutíon ís to be directly specífıed by settíng
a number after F. G99 is a modal code. Once a G99 ís specífied, ít is valid untíl G98 feed per minute is speciffed.
An overríde from 0 to 254 in 1 steps can be applied to feed per revolution wíth the swítch on the machine operator s panel. For detailed ínformatíon, see the appropríate manual of the machíne tool builder.
1 Feed amount per spíndle revolution mm/rev or inch/rev
Fíg. c Feed per revolution
Note
When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate fluctuation may occur. The slower the spíndle rotates, the more frequently feedrate fluctuatíon occurs.
Cuttíng feedrate clamp A common upper limit can be set on the cuttíng feedrate along each axis with parameter No. 1422. If an actual cuttíng feedrate with an override applied exceeds a specífied upper límit, it ís clamped to the upper límít.
5. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING  An upper limit is set in mm/min or inch/min. CNC calculation may involve a feedrate error of 2 with respect to a specified value. However, this is not true for  acceleration/deceleration. To be more specific, this error is
calculated with respect to a measurement on the tíme the tool takes to move 500 mm or more during the steady state:
Reference See Appendix C for a range of feedrates that can be specífied.
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS
WELL G04
Format
X_ : specífy a time decimal poínt permítted
U_ : Specify a tíme declmai poínt permítted
P_ : Specify a time decimal polnt not permitted
ExplanatíonS By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delayed by the
specified time.
Bit 1 DWL of paranıeter No. 3405 caii speeify dwe11 for ea_ch rotatíon in feed per rotation 
Command value range of the dwe11 time Command by P
lncrement system Command value range 
General
Reference position The reference positíon ís a fıxed posítíon oп a machine tool to whích the tool can easíly be moved by the reference posítion return function.
For example, the reference position is used as a posítíon at which tools are automatically changed. Up to four reference posïtíons can be specífíed by settíng coordinates in the machíne coordinate system in parameters No. 1240 to 1243 .
2nd reference posítïon
3rd røførence posítíon
Reference positíon 4th reference
Machine zero point
Fíg. 6 a Machine zero poínt and reference positions
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 6. REFERENCE POS1T10N
Reference posítíon Too1s are automatically moved to the reference position via an
return intermedíate positíon along a specified axís. When reference posítíon return is completed, the lamp for indícatíng the completíon of return goes
Fíg. 6 b Reference position return
Reference posítíon The reference positíon return check G27 is the function whích checks
return check whether the tool has correctly returned to the reference posítion as specified in the program. If the tool has correctly returned to the reference position along a specífíed axís, the lamp for the axís goes on.
Format
Reference posítíon return
1P : Command specifying the intermedíate position
Absolutelıncremental command
Reference posítíon return check
1P : Command specífyíng the reference position
Absolutelıncremental command
Explanatíons
Reference posítíon Posítíoníng to the íntermediate or reference posítions are performed at the return G28 rapid traverse rate of each axís.
Therefore, for safety, the tool nose radíus compensation, and tool offset should be cancelled before executing thís command.
2nd, 3rd, and 4th In a system without an absolute-position detector, the fírst, thírd, and
reference posítíon return fourth reference posítíon return functíons can be used on1y after the G30 reference posítíon return G28 oг manual reference posítion return see

ís made. The G30 command ís generally used when the automatic
tool changer ATC posítíon díffers from the reference posítion.
Reference position G27 commаnd posítions the tool at rapíd traverse rate. If the tool reaches return check G27 the reference position, the reference posítion return lamp líghts up.
However, if the position reached by the tool ís not the reference posítíon, an alarm No. 092 ís displayed.
Restríctíons 1
ì Status the machine lock The lamp for indícatíng the completíon of return does not go on when the being turned on machínc lock ís turned on, even when the tool has automatícally returned to the reference posítíon. In this case, ít is not checked whether the tool has returned to the reference position even when a G27 command ís
specífíed.
First return to the When the G28 command ís specífíed when manual return to the reference reference posítíon after posítion has not been performed after the power has been turned oп, the the power has been movement from the intermediate poínt ís the same as in maлual retum to turned on without an the reference posítíon.
absolute posítion In thís case, the tool moves in the direction for reference posítion return
detector specífíed in parameter ZMIx bit 5 of No. 1006 . Therefore the specífied
íntermediate posítion must be a posítíon to whích reference posítíon return is possíble.
Reference posítíon In an offset mode, the position to be reached by the tool with the G27
return check in an offset command is the posítíon obtained by adding the offset уa1ue. Therefore,mode if the posítion with the offset value added is not the reference position, the lamp does not light up, but аn alarm ís dísplayed instead. Usually, cancel
offsets before G27 ís commаnded.
Líghting the lamp when When the machíne tool is an inch system with metric input, the reference the programmed posítíon posítíon return lamp may also líght up even íf the programmed posítion does not coíncíde with ís shifted from the reference posítíon by least ínput íncrement. This is the reference posítíon because the least ínput increment of the machíne ís smaller than íts least command íncrement.
Reference
General Tools ca be returned to the floatíng reference posítion.
A floating reference point is a posítíon on a machine too1, and serves as a reference point for machíne tool operatíon.
A floating reference poínt need not always be fıxed, but can be moved as requíred.
Format
]p : Command of the íntermedíate posítíon of the floatíng reference posítíon
Absolute commandfıncremental command
Explanatíons On some machíne tools, the cuttíng tools can be replaced at any posítíon
unless they interfere wíth the workpíece or tail stock.
Wıth these machines, the cuttíng tools should be replaced at a posítion as close to the workpíece as possíble so as to miníınize the machine cycle tíme. For this purpose, the tool change position ís to be changed, depending on the fígure of the workpíece. Thís operatíon can easíly be performed using thís functíon. That is, a tool change posítíon suítable for the workpiece ís memorized as a floatíng reference point. Then commаnd
G30.  can easíly cause return to the tool change position.
Floatíng reference The block first positions the tool at the intermediate poínt along the
positíon specifíed axes at rapid traverse rate, then further moves the tool from the
íntermedíate poínt to the floating reference poínt at rapíd traverse rate.
Before using , cancel cutter compensation and tool offset.
settíng of floating A floatíng reference poínt becomes a machine coordínate position
reference posítíon memorízed by pressíng the soft key [SET FRP] on the current posítions display screen see
A floating reference point is not lost even íf power ís turned off.
Examples
8. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
By teaching the CNC a desíred tool positíon, the tool can be moved to the  posítíon. Such a tool posítion is represented by coordínates ín a coordinate system. Coordinates are specífied usíng program axes.
When two program axes, the X-axís and Z-axis, are used, coordinates are specífıed as follows: X Z
This command is referred to as a dímensíon word.
Fig. 8 Too1 Posítíon Specifíed by XaZβ
Coordínates are specífied ín one of following three coordínate systems:
1 Machíne coordinate system
2 Workpiece coordínate system
3 Local coordínate system
The number of the axes of a coordinate system varies from one machine
to another. So, іп this maпual, a dimension word is represented as IP_.
PROGRAMMING 8. COORDINATE SYSTEM B-62444E/03
The point that ís specific to a machíne and serves as the reference of the machine ís referred to as the machíne zero poínt. A machíne tool builder
MACHINE sets a machine zero point for each machíne.
COORDINATE A coordínate system with a machíne zero point set as íts origín ís referred
Y TEM to as a machine coordínate system.
A machine coordinate system is set by performing manual reference positíon return after power-on see A machíne coordínate system, once set, remaíns unchanged untíl the power ís turned off.
Format
Absolute dlmenslon word
Explanations selecting a machíne When a posítíon has been specífíed as a set of machine coordínates, the coordínate system G53 tool moves to that posítíon by means of rapid traverse. G53, used for selectíng the machine coordinate system, ís a one-shot G code. Any commands based on the selected machíne coordínate system are thus
effectíve only in the block containing G53. The G53 command must be specífíed usíng absolute values. If incremental values are specified, the G53 command ís ígnored. When the tool ís to be moved to a machine-specífıc posítíon such as a tool change positíon, program the movement in a machine coordínate system based on G53.
Restríctíons
Cancel of the When the G53 command ís specífied, cancel the tool nose radíus
compensatíon functíon compensation and tool offset.
G53 specífícatíon Sínce the machíne coordinate system must be set before the G53
immedíately after г command is specífıed, at least one manual reference posítíon return or power-on automatíc reference position return by the G28 command must be
performed after the power is turned on. Thís is not necessary when an absolute-position detector ís attached.
Reference When manual reference positíon return is performed after power-on, a
machíne coordínate system ís set so that the reference position is at the coordíпate values of a, β set usíng parameter
. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 
A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate system. A workpíece coordinate system is to be set 
WORKPIECE
wíth the NC beforehand settíng a workpíece coordinate system .
COORDINATE A machining program sets a workpíece coordínate system selecting a
l SYSTEM workpiece coordínate system .
A set workpiece coordinate system can be changed by shifting íts origin
changíng a workpiece coordínate system .
A workpíece coordínate system can be set usíng one of three methods: i
Settíng a Workpíece 1 Method usíng G50
Coordínate System A workpiece cooгdйate system is set by specifying a value after G50
 the program.
2 Automatic setting
If bit 0 of parameter No. 1201 is set beforehand, a workpíececoordinate system is automatícally set when manual reference position return is performed 
3 Input usíng the CRT/MDI panel
Six workpiece cooгdйate systems can be set beforehand using the CRT/MDI pаnel see Part
When an absolute commаnd ís used, a workpíece coordínate system
must be established in any of the ways descńbed above.
Format
setting a workpíece G50 1P_
coordínate system by G50

Explanations: A workpiece coordinate system is set so that a point on the tool, such as the tool tip, is at specified coordinates. If IP is an incremental command value, the work coordinate system is defined so that the current tool position coincides with the result of adding the specified value to the coordinates of the previous tool position. If a coordinate system is set using G50 during offset, a coordinate system in which the position before offset matches the position specified in G50 is set.

Examples:

B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 8. COORDINATE SYSTEM
Example 1 Example 2 Base poínt
Setting the coordinate system by the Setting the coordinate system by the; command Díameter designation ; command Diameter designatíon
The user caп choose from set workpíece coordínate systems as described
Selectíng a Workpíece below. For information about the methods of setting, see Subsec.
Coordínate System
1 G50 or automatíc workpiece coordinate system setting
Once a workpiece coordinate system is selected, absolute commands work with the workpiece coordinate system.
2 Choosing froin six workpiece coordínate systems set using the MDI
By specífying a G code from 654 to 659, one of the workpíece
coordínate systems 1 to 6 can be selected.
G54 Workpíece coordinate system 1
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2
G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4
G58 Workpíece coordínate system 5
G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6
8. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-62444FJ03

Workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 aгe established after reference posítíon return after the power is turned on. When the power ís turned on, G54 coordinate system ís selected.
When bit 2 G50 of parameter No. 1202 is set to 1, executing the G50 command results in the issue of P/S a1aгm No. 10. Thís ís
desígned to prevent the user from confusing coordinate systems.

PROGRAMMING 8. COORDINATE SYSTEM
The síx workpíece coordínate systems specífıed wíth G54 to G59 can
Changing Workpíece be changed Ьy changíng an external workpíece zero poínt offset value
or workpíece zero poínt offset value.
Coordínate System
Three methods are available to change an external workpíece zero
point offset value or workpíece zero poínt offset value.
1 Inputtíng from the MDI panel see
2 Programmíng by G 10 or G50
3 Usíng the external data input functíon
An external workpíece orígín offset can be changed by using a
signal ínput to the CNC. For details, refer to the relevant manual
supplied by the machíne tool buílder.
Workpiece .ί Worφiece Worφiece Worφíece
coordínate coordínate coordínate coordínate
8. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 
Explanatíons
Changíng by G10 Wıth the G10 command, each workpiece coordinate system can be
changed separately.
Changíng by G50 By specífying G50IP_;, a workpiece coordinate system selected wíth a
code from G54 to G59 ís shifted to set a new workpiece coordinate
system so that the current tool position matches the specified coordínates
If IP ís an incremental command value, the work coordínate system ís
defíned so that the current tool posítíon coíncídes wíth the result of adding
the specifíed íncremental va1ue to the coordinates of the prevíous tool
posítíon.
Then, the amount of coordinate system shíft is added to a11 the workpiece
zero point offset values. This means that a11 the workpiece coordínate
systems are shifted by the same amount.
Examples
G54 workpioce coordinate system
If G50X100Z100; ís commanded when the toolís positíoned at 200, 160 іп G54 mode, work- 160 100 Too1 posítíon piece coordínate system 1 X - Z shífted by vector A ís created.

New workpiece coordinate system 100 Z Original workpiece coordinate system 100 200
Suppose that a G54 workpiece coordinate system is specified. Then, a G55 workpiece coordinate system, where the black circle on the tool figure at the left is at $X$, can be set with the following command if the relative relationship between the G54 workpiece coordinate system and G55 workpiece coordinate system is set.

Also, suppose that pallets are loaded at two different positions. If the relative relationship of the coordinate systems of the pallets at the two positions is correctly set by handling the coordinate systems as the G54 workpiece coordinate system and G55 workpiece coordinate system, a coordinate system shift with G50 in one pallet causes the same coordinate system shift in the other pallet.

This means that workpieces on two pallets can be machined with the same program just by specifying G54 or G55.

$A$: Offset value created by G50
$B$: Workpiece zero point offset value in G54
$C$: Workpiece zero point offset value in G55

PROGRAMMING 8. COORDINATE SYSTEM B-624ØE/03
The workpiece coordínate system preset functíon presets a workpíece
coordínate system shífted by manual ínterventíon to the pre-shíft Workpíece Coordinate
workpíece coordínate system. The latter system is displaced from the System Preset
machíne zero poínt by a workpiece zero poínt offset value.
There are two methods for usíng the workpiece coordinate system presetfunction. One method uses a programmed command The other uses MDI operations on the absolute position display screen, relatíve posítíon dísplay screen, and overall posítíon dísplay screen III Format
IP 0; PO ; for G code system A
1P 0; speclfles axls addresses subject to the workplececoordinate system preset operatlon. Axes that are not speclfled are not subject to the preset operation.
Explanatíons When manual reference posítíon return operatíon ís performed іп the reset
state, a workpiece coordínate system ís shífted by the workpiece zero point offset value from the machine coordínate system zero point.
Suppose that the manual reference posítíon return operatíon is performed when a workpíece coordínate system is selected with G54.in thís case, a workpíece coordinate system ís automatically set whích has íts zero point dísplaced from the machíne zero poínt by the G54 workpiece zero point offset value; the distance from the zero point of the workpiece coordínate system to the reference posítíon represents the current posítion
ín the workpíece coordínate system.
G54 workpiece coordínate system
G54 workpíece zero
point offset value
Manual reference position return
If an absolute posítion detector ís provided, the workpíece coordinate system automatícally set at power-up has íts zero poínt displaced from  the machíne zero point by the G54 workpiece zero poínt offset value. The machíne posítíon at the time of power-up ís read from the absolute posítion detector and the current posítíon in the workpíece coordínate system ís set by subtractíng the G54 workpíece zero poínt offset value
from thís machíne posítíon. The workpíece coordínate system set by these operatíons ís shífted from the machine coordinate system using the commands and operatíons listed next page.
a Manual íntervention performed when the manual absolute signal ís off
b Move command executed ín the machíne lock state
c Movement by handle ínterrupt
d Operatíon usíng the mirror image functíon
e Settíng the local coordinate system using G52, oг shiftíng the workpiece coordinate system using G92
8. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING в-s2444E/oз
In the case of a above, the workpíece coordínate system is shífted by the amount of movement during manual ínterventíon.
G54 worφiece coordinate
system before manual
Po
intervention Amount of movement duríng manual
Workpiece zero WZo ínteroention point offset value
Machine zero point system after manual ínterventíon
In the operation above, a workpiece coordinate system once shífted can be preset usíng G code specifícatíon or MDI operation to a workpiece coordínate system displaced by a workpiece zero point offset value from the machíne zero point. This ís the same as when mаnual reference position return operation ís performed on a workpíece coordínate system that has been shifted. In this example, such G code specífıcation oг MDI
operatíon has the effect of returning workpíece coordínate system zero point WZn to the origínal zero point WZo, and the dístance from WZo to Pn is used to represent the current posítíon in the workpíece coordínate system.
Bit 3 PPD of parameter No. 3104 specífies whether to preset relatíve coordínates RELATIVE as well as absolute coordinates.
When no workpíece coordinate system optíon G54 to G59 ís selected, the workpíece coordínate system ís preset to the coordínate system set by automatíc workpíece coordinate system settíng. When automatic workpíece cooτdіnate system setting ís not selected, the workpíece coordínate system is preset with its zero poínt placed at the reference positíon.
Restríctíons
Cutter compensatíon, When using the workpíece coordinate system preset function, cancel tool length compensatíon modes: cutter compensatíon, tool length compensatíon,
compensatíon, tool and tool offset. If the functíon is executed without cancellíng these
offset modes, compensation vectors are temporaríly cancelled.
Program restart The workpiece coordinate system preset function ís not executed duríng
program restart.
Prohíbíted modes Do not use the workpíece coordínate system preset function when the
scalíng, coordinate system rotation, programmable image, oг drawing
copy mode ís set.
PROGRAMMiNG 8. COORDINATE SYSTEM B-62444E/03
When the coordinate system actually set by the G50 command or the
automatic system settíng deviates from the programmed work system, the Workpíece Coordínate
set coordínate system can be shífted see
System shift
Set the desired shift amount in the work coordínate system shift memory.
Explanations
X x-Z: Coordinate system in programming
x-z : Current set coordínate system with shift amount 0
the shift amourıt from Oto 0 in the work coordinate system shift memory.
Fig. a Workpiece Coordinate System shift
See Section of Part III for how to specify the distance the work
coordínate system ís shifted.
8. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING в-62444ειoз
When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a chíldworkpiece coordínate system may be set for easíer programmíng. Such a child coordinate system ís referred to as a coordínate system.

SYSTEM

Format
G52 P _; Setting the local coordinate system
G52 F 0; Canceling the local coordinate system
IP _: Origin of the local coordinate system

Explanations
By specifying G52 IP _;, a local coordinate system can be set in all the workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59). The origin of each local coordinate system is set at the position specified by IP _ in the workpiece coordinate system.

Once a local coordinate system is established, the coordinates in the local coordinate system are used in an axis shift command. The local coordinate system can be changed by specifying the G52 command with the zero point of a new local coordinate system in the workpiece coordinate system.

To cancel the local coordinate system and specify the coordinate value in the workpiece coordinate system, match the zero point of the local coordinate system with that of the workpiece coordinate system.

PROGRAMMING 8. COORDINATE SYSTEM
Notes
1 The local coordínate system setting does not change the workpíece and machine coordinate systems.
2 When G50 is used to define a work coordinate system, if coordinates are not specífied for all axes of a local coordinate system, the local coordinate system remaíns unchanged.
If coordínates are specífied for any axis of a local coordínate system, the local coordinate
system is canceled.
3 G52 cancels the offset temporarily in tool nose radius compensation.
4 Command a move command immediately after the G52 block ín the absolute mode.
5 Whether the coordinate system is canceled upon reset depends onı the specified
parameters. The local coordinate system is canceled upon reset when bit 6 CLR of parameter
Select the planes for circular ínterpolatíon, tool nose radius
compensatíon, coordinate system rotatíon, and drílling by G-code. PLANE

Q1 There are two ways to command travels of the tool; the absolute command, and the íncremental command. In the absolute command,
ABSOLUTE AND
coordinate value of the end positíon is programmed; in the íncremental
INCREMENTAL command, move distance of the positíon itself ís programmed. G90
PROG RAMMING and G91 are used to command absolute or íncremental command,
respectívely. G90, C91 
Absolute programming or íncremental programmíng is used dependíng on the command used. See followíng tables.
G code system A B oг C
Command method Address word G90, G91
Format
G code system A Absolute command lncremental command
X axís move command X U
Z axis move command Z W
Y axís move command Y V
C axís move command C H
G code system B or C Absolute command G90 јр;
lncremental command G91 јр;
Exampies
. Absolute and incremental commands can be used together in a block.
In the above example, the following command can be specified :
2. When both X and U or W and Z are used together in a block, the one specified later is effective.
З. lncremental commands cannot be used when names of the axes are A and B during G code system A is seiected.
9. COORDINATE VALUE
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMM 1 NG AND DIMENSION
Either ínch or metric input can be selected by G code. CONVERSION G20,G21
Format
G20 ; lnch ínput
G21 ; mm ínput
This G code must be specífıed in an índependent block before setting the coordínate system at the begínníng of the program.
After the G code for ínch/metríc conversíon ís specífíed, the unit of ínput data is switched to the least inch or metric input increment of íncrement system IS-B oг IS-C Sectíon The unit of data ínput for degrees remaíns unchanged. The unit systems for the following values are changed after ínch/metńc conversion:
- Feedrate commanded by F code
- Posítíonal command
- Work zero poínt offset value
- Tool compensatíon vaiue
- Unít of scale for manııal pulse generator
- Movement distance in increinentai feed
- Some parameters
When the power is turned on, the G code ís the same as that held before the power was turned off.
Notes
1. G20 and G21 must not be switched during a program.
2. When the least input íncrement and the least command increment systems are different, the maximum error is half of the least command increment. This error is not accumulated.
З. When switching inch input G20 to metric input G21 and vice versa, the tool compensation value must be re-set according to the least input increment.
However, when bit 0 01M of parameter 5006 is 1, tool compensation values are automatically converted and need not be re-set.
4. Reference position return is performed at a low speed for the fírst G28 command after the ínch input is switched to the metric input or vice versa.
5. The inch and metric input can also be switched using setting parameter 1
9. COORDINATE VALUE
Numerícal values can be entered wíth a decimal poínt. A decimal poínt can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can DECIMAL POINT be specífied with the followíng addresses:
PROGRAMMING X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, R, and F.
Explanatíons There are two types of decimal poínt notation: calculator-type notatíon i
and standard notation.
When calculator-type decimal notatíon is used, a value without decіmal poínt ís consídered to be specified in millimeters. When standard decіmal notatíon ís used, such a value is considered to be specífíed in least ínput íncrements. Select either calculator-type or standard decimal notatíon by usíng the DPI bit bit 0 of parameter 3401 .Values can Ьe specifıed both wíth and wíthout decimal point in a síngle program.
Examples
Program command Pocket calculator Standard type decimal
type declmal polnt polnt programming
G04 ; Equívalent to G04 X1000. The tool dwells for one second.
2. Fractions less than the least input increment are truncated.
Examples:Truncated to when the least input increment is mm.
Processed as when the least ínput increment is inch.

9. COORDINATE VALUE
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING AND DIMENSION
Since the work cross sectíon ís usually circular in CNC lathe control
programming, íts dimensions can be specífied in two ways : DIAMETER AND
Diameter and Radíus
RADIUS When the díameter is specífied, it is called díameter programming and
PROGRAMMING when the radíus ís specífıed, ít ís called radíus programmíng.
D1, D2 : Diameter programmíng
R1, R2 : Radíus programming
Explanatíons
Notes on díameter Radíus programmíng oг diameter programming can be specífıed by
programmíng/radíus parameter DIA No.100Ø3 . When usíng díameter programmíng, note programmíng for each the condítíons listed in the command
Table Notes on specífyíng díameter value ltem Notes
X axís command Specífíed wíth a díameter value
lncremental command Specífied with a díameter value
1п the above fígure, specífíes D2 mínus
D1 for tool path B to A.
Coordinate system settíng G50 Specifíes a coordinate value with a diameter value
Component of tool offset value Parameter determines eíther diameter or radíus value
Parameters ín canned cycle, Specífies a radius value such as cuttíng depth along X
axis. R Radíus desígnatíon in circular in- Specífies a radius value terpolation R, 1, K, and etc.
Feedrate along axís Specífies change of radius/rev. or change of radíus/mín.
Display of axis posítion Dísplayed as díameter value 
10. SPINDLE FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03
OSPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
The spíndle speed can be controlled by specifyíng a value followíng
address S.
In addítíon, the spíndle can be rotated by a specifıed angle.
Thís chapter contains the following topics.
10.1SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED WITH A BINARY
CODE
10.2SPECIFYING THE SPIlYDLE SPEED VALUE DIRECTLY
S5-DIGIT COMMAND
10.3CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL G96, G97
10.4SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION
FUNCTION G25, G26
10.5SPIlYDLE POSITIONIlYG
PROGRAMMING 10. SPINDLE FUNCTION B-62444E/03
Specífyíng a value followíng address S sends code and strobe sígnals to
the machine. Oп the machine, the signals are used to control the spíndle SPECIFYING THE
speed. A block can contain oв1y one S code. Refer to the appropríate
SPINDLE SPEED
manual províded by the machíne tool builder for details such as the
W1TH A BINARY number of dígíts in an S code or the executíon order when a move
CODE command and an S code comrnand aгe in the same block.
The spindle speed can be specifıed directly by address S followed by a
fıve-dígít value гpm . The unít for specífyíng the spíndle speed may vary SPECIFYING THE
dependíng on the machine tool builder. Refer to the appropńate maпual
SPINDLE SPEED
províded by the machíne tool builder for detaíls.
VALUE DIRECTLY
55-D1G1T
COMMAND
Specify the surface speed relative speed between the tool and workpiece
1 followíng S. The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant CONSTANTSURFACE
regardless of the posítion of the too1.
SPEED CONTROL
G96, G97
Note : This surface speed unít may change accordíng to
machíne tool builder s specification.
Constant surface speed
Constant surface speed G96 constant surface speed control command is a modal G code. After control command G96 a G96 command ís specífied, the program enters the constant surface speed control mode G96 mode and specífíed S values aгe assumed as a
surface speed. A G96 command must specify the axis along which
constant surface speed control ís applied. A G97 comnıand cancels the
G96 constant surface speed control is applied, a spíndle
speed hígher than the value specífíed in G50S_; maximum spíndle
speed ís clamped at the maximum spindle speed. When the power is
turned on, the maximum spíndle speed ís not yet set and the speed ís not
surface speed commands in the G96 mode are assumed as S
= 0 the surface speed ís 0 untíl M03 rotatíng the spíndle in the positíve
directiori or M04 rotating the spindle in the negative directíon appears
in the program.
 The spíndle speed rpm almost coíncídes with the surface speed m/min
Fig. a Relation between workpioce radius, spindle speed
and surface speed settíng the workpíece To execute the constant surface speed control, ít is necessary to set the coordínate system for I work coordinate system , Z axís, axis to which the constant surface speed constant surface speed control applies becomes zero.
control
Constant surface speed The constant surface speed control ís also effective duríng threading.
control for threadíng Accordíngly, ít ís recommended that the constant surface speed control
be ínvalidated wíth G97 command before starting the scroll threading and
taper threading, because the response problem in the servo system may
not be consídered when the spindle speed changes.
10. SPINDLE FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
Constant surface speed In a rapid traverse block specifıed by G00, the constant surface speed
control for rapíd traverse control ís not made by calculatíng the surface speed to a transient change
G00 of the tool position, but is made by calculatíng the surface speed based on
the positíon at the end poínt of the rapid traverse block, on the condition
that cutting is not executed at rapíd traverse.
Radíus value
Programmed path
The CNC calculates the spíndle speed which ís proportíonal to the
specifíed surface speed at the position of the programmed coordínate
value oп the X axís. Thís ís not the value calculated accordíng to the X
axis coordinate after offset when offset is valid. At the end point N15 in
the example above, the speed at 600 dia. Whích ís not the turret center
but the tool nose ís 200 m/min. If X axis coordínate value ís negatíve,
the CNC uses the absolute value.
B-62444El03 PROGRAMMING 10. SPINDLE FUNCTION
Wıth thís functíon, an overheat a1arm No. 704 ís raísed when the spindle
speed deviates from the specifíed speed due to machine condítíons. SPINDLE SPEED
Thís functíon ís useful, for example, for preventing the seízure of the
FLUCTUATION guíde bushing.
DETECTION
FUNCTION G25, G26
Formalł G26 enables spíndle speed fluctuation detection.
G25 dísables spíndle speed fluctuation detection.
G26 Pp Qq Rr ; spindle fluctuatlon detectlon 
G25 ; spindle fluctuatlon detectlon off
p: Tiine in ms from the íssue of a new spíndle rotatíon command S
commаnd to the start of checking whether the actual spindle speed is
so fast that an overheat cаn occur.
When a specífied speed is reached wíthín the tíme períod of P, spindle
speed ís checked at that tíme.
q: Toleгaпce of a specífíed spindle speed
_ 1-actual spindle speed
9 specified spindle speed X 1
If a specífíed spíndle speed lies within thís range, ít is regarded as
having reached the specífíed value. Then, аn actual spíndle speed ís
checked.
r: Spindle speed fluctuatíon at whích the actual spindle speed is so
fast that an overheat can occur
r_ 1-speed that can cause overheat X 100
specίfίed spindle speed
G26 enables the spíndle speed fluctuatíon detectíon functíon, and G25
dísables the spíndle speed fluctuatíon detection.
Even íf G25 ís specífıed, p, q, and r are not cleагed.
10. SPINDLE FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03
Explanatíons The fluctuatíon of the spindle speed ís detected as follows:
Specífícatíon of Start of check another speed
Specffled speed :
Speed specified by address S and fıve-dígít value x spíndle
ovenide
Actual speed : Speed detected wíth a posítíon coder
p: Tіme elapses sínce the specífíed speed changes until a check starts.
q: Percentage tolerance for a check to start x specifıed speed
r: Percentage fluctuation detected as an alarm conditíon x specífied
speed
d: Fluctuatíon detected as an a1aгm specífıed ín parameter 4913
An a1arm is íssued when the dífference between the specifıed speed and
the actual speed exceeds both r and d.
106
B-62444E/03 P ROG RAM M 1 NG 10. SPINDLE FUNCTION
Notes
1. When an alarm is issued in automatic operation, a singleblock stop occurs. The spindle overheat alarm is indicated on the CRT screen, and the alarm signal sPAL is output set to 1 for the presence of an alarm . This signal ís cleared by resetting.
2. Even when reset operation is performed after an alarm occurs, the aiarm is issued again uniess the cause of the alarm is corrected.
З. No check is made during spindle stop state SSTP = 0 .
4. By settíng the parameter No. 4913 , an allowable range of speed fluctuations can be set whích suppresses the occurrence of an alarm. However, an alarm is issued one
second later if the actual speed is found to be 0 rpm.
10. SPINDLE FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 
In turníng, the spindle connected to the spíndle motor ís rotated at a certaínspeed to rotate the workpíece mounted on the spíndle. The spíndle posítioníng function turns the spíndle connected to the spindle motor by
POSITI0ING a certain angle to position the workpiece mounted on the spindle 
FUNCTION certain angle. The spíndle ís posítíoned about the C-axis.
The spíndle posítioning functíon ínvolves the following three operations
1. Canceling the spindle rotation mode and entering the spíndle posítioníng mode spíndle ońentation 
2. Posítioníng the spindle іn the spíndle posítioning mode
3. Cancelíng the spíndle positíoníng mode, and entering the spindle rotation mode
When spíndle positíoning ís fırst performed after the spindle motor ís used
Spindle oríentation for normal spíndle operation, or when spindle positioning ís ínterrupted, the spindle oríentatíon is requíred.
Oríentation permíts the spíndle to stop at a predetermíned posítion.
Ońentatíon ís dírected Ьy the M code set in parameter No. 4960. The dírection of ońentation cаn be set wíth a parameter. For the analog spíndle, the direction ís set in ZMIx bít 5 of parameter 1006 .
For the seńal spíndle, it ís set in RflTRN bít 5 of parameter 4005 .
The spíndle can Ьe positioned with an arbítrary angle or semí-fıxed angle.
Spindle posítíoníng
Positíoníng wíth a Address M is followed by a 2-dígít numeric. The specifiable value may
semí-fíxed angle Ьe one of the six values from Ma to M a . Va1ue a must be set іn
specífíed by an M code parameter No. 4962 beforehand. The posítioníng angles corresponding
Example C-1000 H4500
The end poínt must be specified with a distance from the program reference posítíon in absolute mode usíng address C. Alternatívely, the end point must also be specífıed wíth a dístance from the start poínt to the end poínt in incremental mode using address H.
A numeńc with the decimal point can be entered.
The value must be specifıed in degrees.
Example degrees
Program reference The positíon to which the spindle ís oríented is assumed as the program
position reference positíon. The program reference position can be changed by
setting of a coordinate system G50 oг automatíc settíng of a coordínate
system OZPR of parameter 1202 .
Feedrate for positioníng
G code A G code B and C
Ad Command Address Command
Command format A-B ín the used A-B in the
Absolute Wíth a dís-command tance from C ; G90,C ;
the program reference position.
10. SPINDLE FUNCTION 8-624лaE/03
Feedrate duríng The feedrate duńng posítioning equals the rapid traverse speed specífıed posítíoníng in parameter No. 1420. Línear acceleration/deceleration is performed.
For the specífıed speed, an overńde of 100 ,50 ,25 ,and FO parameter No. 1421 can be applied.
Speed duríng oríentatíon The tool moves at the rapid traverse speed set in parameter untíl a sufficient speed for ońentatíon ís attained. After the speed for orientation has been attaíned, ońentatíon is performed at the speed set in parameter
When modes are to be switched from spindle posítioníng to normal
Cancelíng spindle spindle rotatíon, the M code set in parameter No. 4961 is specífıed.
positioningNotes
1. Specífy spindle posítioning alone in a block. A move command for the X or Z axis cannot be specífied withín the same block.
2. When emergency stop ís applied duríng spíndle positioning, spindle posítioning stops. To resume it, restart with the oríentatíon step.
З. Feed ho1d, dry run, machine lock, and auxiliary function lock cannot be performed during spíndle positioning.
4. The seríal spindle Cs-axis contour control function and the spindle positíoning functíon cannot be used at a time. if both optíons are specified, the spindle positioníng function has príority.
5. Parameter No. 4962 must always be set even when positioning with a semi-fixed angle specified ín an M-code ís not performed. If the parameter is not set, M-codes from
the M00 to M05 do not function properly. 
6. The spindle positíoning axís ís indicated in pulses in the machine coordinate system.
 TOOL FUNCTION
TOOL FUNCTION T FUNCTION
Two tool functions are available. Oпe is the tool selection function, and
the other ís the tool lífe management function.
11. TOOL FUNCTION
T FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 8-624444E/03
By specifying a 2-dígít/4-dígít numerical va1ue following address T, a code sígnal and a strobe sígnal are transmítted to the machíne too1. T 
Thís ís mainly used to select tools on the machíne.
One T code can be commanded in a block. Refer to the machíne tool buílder s manual for the number of dígíts commandable with address T and the correspondence between the T codes and machine operations.
When a move command and a T code are specifíed in the same block, the commands are executed ín one of the followíng two ways:
1. Sínıultaneous execution of the move command аnd T functíon commands.
2. Executíng T functíon commands upon completíon of move command executíon.
The selectíon of either sequence depends on the machíne tool builder sspecífícatíons. Refer to the machíne tool buílder s manual for details.
one digít of T-code deignates the offset number.
Explanatíons The value after the T code índícates the desíred tool. Part of the values
ís also used as the offset number índícatíng the compensation amount for tool offset.
Refer to the machine tool builder s mаnual for correspondence between the T-code and the tool and the number of dígít to specify tool selection.
Example T2
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING T FUNCTION
Tools are classifıed ínto some groups. For each group, a toollífe time or frequency of use is specífíed. Each tíme a tool is used, the tíme for TOOL LiFE whích the tool ís used is accumulated. When the tool life has been 
MANAGEMENT
reached, the next tool prevíously determíned in the same group ís used.
Thís function ís called the toollífe management function.
Wıth 2-path control, toollife management ís performed for each tool post separately. So toollífe management data ís also set for each tool post.
Program of Tooi Life
Data
Format Tools used sequentíally in each group and their tool life aгe regístered in
the CNC as followíng program format of table 
Program format of iife management
Tape format Meanïng
Explanations A tool life ís specified either as the tíme of use in minutes or the frequency of use, whích depends on the parameter setting parameter No.6800 2 LTM .
Up to 4300 minutes in tíme oг 9999 tímes ín frequency can be specífied for a tool life.
The number of groups to be registered and the number of tools regístered peг group can be combíned in three ways. One of the three combínatíons ís set by a parameter , 1 Each GS1 and GS2 .
GS2 GS1 Number of groups Number of tools
In any combínatíon, up to 256 tools in total can be regístered.
If there are not more than 16 groups and each group contaín not more than 16 tools, for example, select combínatíon 2 1 .Select combínatíon if there are not more than 32 groups and each group contaín not more than eight tools. To change the combinatíon, change the parameter, then set program ís executed wíth the old tool group combinatíon set in the NC. Whenever the parameter ís changed, be sure to reexecute the group setting program.
The same tool number may appear anywhere any times in the program of toollífe data.
Example
11. TOOL FUNCTION
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING T FUNCTION
Explanations The group numbers specífied in P need not be serial. They need not be
assigned to all groups, eíther. When usíng two oг moгe offset numbers
for the same tool in the same process, set as follows;
Tape format Meaning
Explanation
When a tool iife ís Between TΔΔ99 ΔΔ=Too1 group number and TΔΔ88 іn a machíning
specífíed as the time of program, the tíme for whích the tool is used in the cutting mode ís counted use ín mínutes at intervals of 4 seconds. The tíme taken for síngle-block stoppage, feed hold, rapid traverse, dwellíng, and FIN waít ís ígnored.
Up to 4300 mínutes caп be specified for a life.
When a tool lífe ís Countíng is performed for each process that is ínítiated by the cycle start specifíed as the of a machining program and ended when the NC ís reset by the M02 or frequency of use M03 command. The counters for tool groups used ín a process are íncremented by one. Even when the same group is specífíed more than oпce in one process, the counter ís íncremented only by one. Up to 9999 can be set for a toollife.
Counting of a tool life is performed for each group. The life counter contents are not erased even when the power of CNC ís cut off.
When a lífe ís specífíed as the frequency of use, apply an external reset ERS signal to the CNC when M02 or M30 ís executed. 
TOOL FUNCTION
FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
In machining programs, T codes are used to specífy tool groups as Specífyíng a tool
follows:
group ín a machining program
Tape format Meaning
TΔΔ99; Ends the tool used by now, and starts to use the tool of the ΔΔgгoup. 99 distinguishes this specification
: from ordinary specíficatíon.
TΔΔ88; Cancels the offset of the tool of the group.
guíshes thís specificatíon from ordinary specification.
M02 M300 ; Ends the machiníng program.
Explanations
Tape format Meaning
T0199; Ends the previous tool, and starts to use the tool of
the 01 group.
T0188; Cancels the offset of the tool of the 01 group.
T0508; Ends the tool of the 01 group. Selects tool number
05 and offset number 08.
T0500; Cancels the offset of tool number 05.
T0299; Ends tool number 05, and starts to use the tool of
the 02 group.
T0199; Ends the tool of the 02 group, and starts to use thetool of the 01 group. 1f more than one offset number is specified for the tool, the second offset number is
selected. Otherwise, tńe previous offset number is used.
PROG RAMM 1NG 12. AUXILIALY FUNCTION
AUXILIARY FUNCTION
There aгe two types of auxílíary functions ; miscellaneous function M code for specífyíng spindle start, spindle stop program end, and so on, and secondary auxiliary function B code .
When a move command and míscellaneous functíon are specífíed ín the same block, the commands aгe executed in one of the following two ways:
і Símultaneous executíon of the move command and miscellaneous functíon commands.
íí Executíng miscellaneous functíon commands upon completíon of move commаnd executíon.
The selection of either sequence depends on the machíne tool buílder specifıcation. Refer to the manual issued by the machíne tool buílder for details.
AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в
When address M followed by a number ís specified, a code sígnal and 
AUXILIARY
strobe signal are transmítted. These sígnals aгe used for turníng on/off the
FUNCTION power to the machine.
M FUNCTION In general, only oпe M code is valid ín a block but up to three M codes
can be specífíed in a block although some machínes may not allow that .
The correspondence between M codes and functíons ís up to the machíne
tool builder.
AІІ M codes аre processed in the machíne except for M98, M99,M198,
M codes for calling a subprogram parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079 , and
M codes for calling a custom macro parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089 .
Refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machíne tool buílder.
Explanatíons The followíng M codes have specíal meaníngs.
M02,M03 This índicates the end of the main program
End of program Automatic operation ís stopped and the CNC unít ís reset. Thís díffers
with the machine tool bui1der. After a block specífyíng the end of the
program ís executed,control returns to the start of the program. Bít 5 of
parameter M02 oг bit 4 of parameter M03 can be used to dísable M02 from returníng control to the start of the program.
M00 Automatíc operatíon is stopped after a block containíng M00 ís executed.
Program stop When the program is stopped, all existíng modal ínformatíon remaíns
unchanged. The automatíc operation can be restarted Ьy actuatíng the cycle operation. This differs with the machíne tool builder.
M01 Símílarly to M00, automatíc operation ís stopped after a block containíng
Optíonal stop M01 ís executed. Thís code ís only effectíve when the Optíonal Stop
swítch on the machíne operator s panel has been pressed.
M98 This code is used to call a subprogram. The code and strobe sígnals are
Cailing of sub program not sent. See the subprogram section for detaíls .
M99 Thís code indícates the end of a subprogram.
End of subprogram M99 execution returns control to the main program. No code or strobe signal is sent. See the subprogram sectíon for detaíls.
Notes
A block immedíately after an M00, M01, M02, or M03 block ís not buffered. Simílarly, ten M codes which do not buffer can be set by parameters Nos. 3411 to 3421 . Refer to the
machine tool buiIders instruction manual for these M codes.
PROGRAMMING 12. AUXILIALY FUNCTION 1 B-62444E/03
So far, one block has been able to contain on1y oпe M code. Up to three M codes can be specifled in a single block when bít 7 M3B of parameter MULTIPLE M
No. 3404 ís set to 1.
E COMMANDS Up to three M codes specífíed in a block are símultaneously output to the
IN A SINGLE BLOCK machine. Thís means that compared wíth the conventional method of a síngle M command in a síngle block, a shorter cycle tíme can be realized іп machíníng.
Explanatíons CNC allows up to three M codes to be specífıed in one block. However,
some M codes cannot be specífıed at the same tíme due to mechanical operatíon restńctíons. For detailed informatíon about the mechanícal operatíon restrictíons on simultaneous specifícatíon of multiple M codes in one block, refer to the mаnual of each machíne tool builder. 
M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, oг M198 must not be specífied together wíth another M code.
Some M codes other than M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, and M198 cannot be specified together with other M codes; each of those M codes must be specifıed in a single block.
Such M codes іnclude these which direct the CNC to perform internal operations in addítion to sendíng the M codes themselves to the machíne.
To be specífıed, such M codes are M codes for calling program numbers 9001 to 9009 and M codes for dísablíng advance reading buffering of subsequent blocks. Meanwhile, multiple of M codes that dírect the CNC 0nly to send the M codes themselves without performing internal operations can be specifıed in a síngle block.
Examples 
12. AUXILIARY FUNCTION  
The M code group check function checks if a combination of multiple M M CODE GROUP codes up to three M codes contained in a block ís correct.
This function has two purposes. One ís to detect íf any of the multíple M
CHECK FUNGTION
codes specifıed in a block include an M code that must be specified alone.
The other purpose ís to detect íf any of the multíple M codes specífied in a block include M codes that belong to the same group. In either of these cases, P/S alarm No. 5016 ís íssued.
For details on group data setting, refer to the manual available from the machine tool builder.
Explanatíons
M code settíng Up to 500 M codes can be specífíed. In general, MO to M99 are always
specifíed. M codes from M100 and up are optíonal.
Group numbers Group numbers can be set from 0 to 127. Note, however, that 0 and 1 have special meanings. Group number 0 represents M codes that need not be checked. Group number 1 represents M codes that must be specífied alone.
PROGRAMMING 12. AUXILIALY FUNCTION
Indexing of the table is perfornıed by address B arid a followíng 8-digít number. The relatíonship between B codes and the corresponding 
THE SECOND
índexíng díffers between machine tool builders.
AUXILIARY Refer to the manual isaued by the machíne tool builder for details.
FUNCTIONS
B CODES
Explanatíons
2. It is possíble to change over the scale factor of B output, 1000 
Command Output value
When DPI is 1: B 1 1000
When DPI is 0: B 1 1
Main program and There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, subprogram the CNC operates according to the main program. However, when a command callíng a subprogram ís encountered in the main program, control is passed to the subprogram. When a command specífyíng a return to the main program is encountered in a subprogram, control ís returned to the main program.
Main program Subpragram
instructíon 1 lnstruction 1
Follow the direction of the ,
subprogram
Return to the main program
Fig. 13 a Maín program and subprogram
The CNC memory can hold up to 400 main programs and subprograms 63 as standard . A main program can be selected from the stored main programs to operate the machíne. See Chapter IΠ-10 for the methods of registering and selectíng programs.
PROGRAMMING 13. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
Program components A program consists of the followíng components:
Table 13 a Program components 
Components Descriptlons
Tape start Symbol índicating the start of a program fíle Leader sectíon Used for the title of a program fí1e, etc.
Program start Symbol índicatíng the start of a program
Program section Commands for machíníng
Comment section Commerıts or dírectíons for the operator
Tape end Symbol indicatíng the end of a program tile
Leader section
Tape start T1TLE LF Program start
Tape end
Ffg. 13 b Program conffguratlon Example of using IS0 code
Program sectíon A program section consísts of several blocks. A program sectíon starts
configuratíon wíth a program number and ends wíth a program end code.
Program sectíon Proarªm section
confíguration Example of usíng  
Program number 00001 LF
Program end M30 LF
A block contains information necessary for machíning, sııch as a move command or coolant on/off command.specifying a value followíng a slash / at the start of a block disables the execution of some blocks see optíonal block skip Section
13. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING 
This section descńbes program components other than program sections.
See Sectíon for a program sectíon.
F1g. Program configuratlon Exampie of using is code
Explanatíons
Tape start The tape start indicates the start of a fıle that contains CNC programs.
The mark ís not required when programs are entered using SYSTEM oг ordinary personal computers. The mark ís not displayed on the CRT display screen. However, if the fıle is output,the mark ís automatically output at the start of the fíle.
Table Code of a tape start
Name iS0 E1A Notation in thls manual
Tape start ER
Leader section Data entered before the programs in a fıle constitutes a leader section.
When machining is started, the label skíp state ís usually set by turning on the power or resetting the system. In the label skip state, all ínformatíon is ignored until the fírst end-of-block code is read. When a fıle ís read ínto the CNC unit from an I/O device, leader sections are skipped Ьy the label skip functíon.
A leader section generally contaíns information such as a file header.
When a leader section ís skípped, even a TV parity check ís not made. So a leader section can contain any codes except the EOB code.
Program start The program start code is to be entered ímmedíately after a leader section,
that is, immediately before a program sectíon. This code índícates the start of a program, and ís always required to disable the label skíp function. 
Wíth SYSTEM P oг ordínary personal computers, thís code can be entered by pressíng the return key.
Table Code of a program start
Notes
 one fíle contains multiple programs, the EOB code for label skip operation must not appear before a second or subsequent program number. However, an program start
is required at the start of a program if the precedíng program ends with .
Comment sectíon Any information enclosed by the control-out and control-in codes is
regarded as a comment and skipped by the user can enter a header, comments, dírectíons to the operator, etc. in a comment section usíng the EOB code or any other ís no limít on the length of a comment sectíon.
Table Codes of a control-in and a control-out
Name IS0 E1A Notatlon  thls Meaning
code code manual
Control-out 2-4-5 Start of comment sectíon
Control-in 2-4-7 End of comment sectíon
When a program is read ínto memory for memory operation, comment sectíons, íf аny, aгe not ígnored but are also read ínto memory. Note, however, that codes other than those lísted in the code table in Appendix F are ígnored, and thus are not read into memory. When the program in this memory ís output to an external ínput/output device see Section III-8 , any comments are also output.
When a program is dísplayed on the screen, its comment sections are also dísplayed. However, those codes that were ígnored when read ínto memory аre not outputted or dísplayed.
During memoгу operation or DNC operatíon, all comment sections are ígnored.
The TV check function can Ьe used for a comment sectíon by setting parameter CTV bít 1 of No. 0100 .
Notes
1. If a long comment section appears ín the middle of a program sectíon, a move aiong an axis may be suspended for a long time because of such a comment section. So a
comment section should be placed where movement suspensíon may occur or no movement is ínvolved.
2. If only a control-ín code is read wíth no matching control-out code, the read control-in code ís ígnored.
13. PROGRAM úОNF1GURAT14N PRбGRAМMING B-62Ø4E/03
Tape end A tape end ís to be placed at the end of a fíle containing NC programs.
If programs are entered usíng the automatíc programmíng system, the mark need not be entered. The mark ís not dísplayed on the CRT dísplay screen. However, when a fıle ís output, the mark ís automatically output at the end of the fıle. 
If an attempt is made to execute when M02 0г M03 is not placed at the end of the program, the P/S a1arm No. 5010 ís occurred.
Table Code of a tape end Name IS0 E1A Notatlon in this code code manual
Tape end ER
 PROGRAMMING 13. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
Thís section descńbes elements of a program sectíon. See Section 
for program components other than program sections. PROGRAM SECTION
CONFIGURATION
Sequence number
Program sectíon iCOMMENT
Program end
M30 LF
F1g. Program conflguratlon Example of using IS0 code
Program number A program number consístíng of address O followed by a four-digít
number is assígned to each program at the beginníng registered in memory to identify the program.
In ISO code, the co1on : can be used instead of O.
When no program number is specífied at the start of a program, the sequence number N.... at the start of the program ís regarded as its program number. If a fıve-dígit sequence number is used, the lower four digits are registered as a program number. If the lower four dígits are all 0, the program number registered ímmediately before added to 1 ís registered as a program number. Note, however, that NO cannot be used
for a program number.
If there is no program number or aequence number at the start of a program, a program number must be specified usíng the CAT/MDI panel when the program is stored in memorу See Sectíon іп Part III. .
Notes
Program numbers 8000 to 9999 may be used by machine tool builders, and the user may not be able to use these numbers.
13. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING в-s2444
sequence number and A program consísts of several commands. One command unít is called a block block. One block ís separated from another wíth aп EOB of end of block
code. 
Table EOB code
At the head of a block, a sequence number consistíng of address N followed by a number not longer than fıve dígíts 1 to 99999 can be placed. Sequence numbers can be specified in a гаndom order, and ariy numbers can be skípped. Sequence numbers may be specífied for all blocks oг on1y for desíred blocks of the program. In general, however, it
ís convenient to assign sequence numbers in ascending order in phase wíth the machining steps for example, when a new tool is used by tool replacement, and machiníng proceeds to a new surface with table indexing.
N300 ; A sequence number ís underlíned.
F1g. sequence number and block example
Notes
NO must not be used for the reason of file compatibílity with other CNC systems.
Program number 0 cannot be used. So 0 must not be used for a sequence number regarded as a program number.
TV check Vertícal paríty A pańty check ís made for a block on ínput tape vertically. If the number check along tape of characters in one block starting with the code immediately after an EOB and endíng wíth the next EOB ís odd, an P/S alarm ís output. No TV check ís made on1y for those parts that are skípped by the label skip functíon. A comment sectíon enclosed in parentheses is also subject to TV check to count the number of characters. The TV check functíon can Ьe enabled or dísabled by setting on the MDI unit See subsec. in Part llI. .
B-62444E/03 PROQRAMMING 13. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
Block configuration A block consists of one or more words. A word consísts of arı address
word and add Pss followed by a number some dígits 1ong. The plus sígn + or mínus sígn
- may Ьe prefixed to a number.
Word = Address + number Example : X-1000
For an address, one of the letters A to Z is used ; an address defines the meaning of a number that follows the address. Table b índícates the usable addresses and their meaníngs.
The same address may have dífferent meaníngs, depending on the preparatory functíon specífícatíon.
Table Major functíons and addresses
Functlon ı Address Meaning
Program number O Progam number
fequence number N Sequence number
Preparatory fuπction G Specífies a motion mode linear, arc, etc.
Dimension word X, Y, Z, U, V, Coordinate axís muve command W, A, B, C
1, J, K Coordinate of the arc center R qrc radius
Feed function F Rate of feed p r minute,
Rate of feed per гevo ution
Spindle speed function S S pirıdle speed
13. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-62Ø4E/03
Major addresses and Major addresses and the ranges of values specifıed for the addresses are ranges cıf command shown below. Note that these figures represent limíts on the CNC síde, whích are totally different from limíts on the machine tool síde. 
Símílarly, the CNC may be ab1e to control a cutting federate of up to 240 m/min, but the machine tool may not a11ow more than 3 m/min. When developíng a program, the user should carefully read the manuals of the machíne tool as well as this manual to be familíar wíth the restrictions on programming.
Table Major addresses and ranges of command vaiues
Program number O i 
sequence number N
Preparatory functíon G 0-99 0-99
Dímen- lncrement X, Y, Z, -
Optionai block skíp When a slash followed by a number 1  to 9 is specified at the head of a block, and optíonal block skip swítch n on the machine operator panel ís set to on, the information contaíned in the block for which in corresponding to switch nıımber n ís specified ίs ígnored in tape operation or memoгy operation.
When optiorıal block skip switch n ís set to off, the ínformation contaíned in the block for whích n ís specífıed ís valid. This means that the operator can determine whether to skíp the block containíng in.
Number 1 for /1 can be omitted. However, when two or more optíonal block skip switches are used for one block, number 1 for /1 cannot be omitted.
Example
lncorrect Correct
This functïon is ignored when programs are loaded ínto memory. Blocks contaíning /n are also stored in memory, regardless of how the optional block skíp switch ís set.
Programs held in memory can Ьe output, regardless of how the optional block skip swítches are set.
Optional block skíp is effective even during sequence number search operation.
Dependíng on the machíne tool, aІІ optional block skíp switches 1 to 9 may not be usable. Refer to manuals of the machine tool bııilder to fínd which switches are usable.
Notes
1. Position of a slash A slash / must be specified at the head of a block. If a slash
ís placed elsewhere, the ínformation from the slash to irnmediately before the EOB code is ignored.
2. iV and TH check
When an optional block skip swítch is on. TH and TM checks  aгe made for the skípped portíons in the same way as when the optional block skip switch is off.
3. Disabling an optionai block skíp switch
Optional block skip operation is processed when blocks are read from memory or tape into a buffer. Even if a switch is set to on after blocks are read into a buffer, the blocks
already read are not ignored. Notes
on thís thread cuttíng are the same as in thread cutting ín G32. However, a stop by feed hold is as follows 
; Stop after completion of path 3 of thread cutting cycle.
tool retreats whíle chamferíng and returns to the start poínt on the X axís then the Z axís, as soon as the feed hold status is entered during thread cutting motion 2 when the
Thread Cuttíng Cyc1e retract optíon is used.
Ordinary cycle
Motion at feed hold
S op point
Feed hold ís effected here.
Another feed hold cannot be made duríng retreat. The chamfered amount is the same as that at the end poínt.
FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY 
The chamfered angle іп the left figure ís 45 degrees or less because of the delay in the servo system.
Detailed chamfered thread 
Fig. a straíght Thread Cuttíng
In íncremental programmíng, the sign of numbers followíng addresses U and W depends on the direction of paths 1 and 2. That ís , if the directíon of path 1 ís the negative along the X axís, the value of U ís negative.
The range of thread leads, limitatíon of spíndle speed, etc. are the same as in G32 thread cutting . Thread chamferíng can be performed in thís thread cuttíng cycle. A signal from the machine tool, ínítíates thread chamfering. The chamfering dístance ís specífied in a range from to in íncrements Ьy parameter No. 5130 . In the above expressíon, L ís the thread lead.
In the síngle block mode, operatíons 1, 2, 3, and 4 are performed by pressíng cycle start button once.
14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING
The chamfered angle іп the left figure
is 45 degrees or less because of the
delay in the servo system.
Detailed chamfered thread
Fig. Ь Taper thread cuttíng cycle
FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 
End face turníng cycle G94
Face cuttíng cycle
In íncremental programming, the sígn of numbers followíng addresses Uand W depends on the direction of paths 1 arid 2. That ís, íf the dírectíon of the path ís ín the negative dírectíon of the Z axis, the value of W is negative.
In single block mode, operatíons 1, 2, 3, and 4 aгe performed by pressing the cycle start button once.
14. FUNCTIONS TO SMPLIFY PROGRAMMING B-624ØE/03 PROGRAMMING
Taper face cutting cycie
R Rapid traverse
F -Spвcifiвd  F code sígns of numbers In increnıental programrning, the relatíonshíp between the signs of the specifíed ín the taper numbers followíng address U, W. and R, and the Coo1 f aths are as follows: cuttina cvcle
 Since data values of X U , Z W and Fτ during canned cycle are modal, if X U , Z W , or R is not newly commanded, the previously specified data is effectŕve. hus, when the Z axis
movement amount does not vary as in the example below, a canned cycle can be repeated only by specifying the movement commands for the X-axís.
However, these data are cleared, if a one-shot G code expect for G04 dweil ur a G cade in the group 01 except for G90, G92. G94  is commanded.
2 The following three applications can be performed.
1 if an EOB or zero movement commands are specified for
the block following that specífied with a canned cycle,
the same canned cycle is repeated.
2 By specifyíng a canned cycle in the MDI mode, and
pushing the cycle start button after the block
terminates, the same canned cycle as the previous one
wi i be performed.
3 ff the M, S, T function is commanded duríng the canned
cycle mode, both the canned cycle and M, S, or T
functian can be performed simultaneously. 1f this is
inconvenient, cancel the canned cycle once as in the
program examples below specify G00 or G01 and
execute the M, S, or T command. After the execution of
M, S, or T terminates, command the canned cycle again.
Example

An appropríate canned cycle ís selected according to the shape of the
How to use canned material and the shape of the product.
cycles G90, G92, G94
Straíght cuttíng cycle G90
Taper cuttíng cycle G90
Shape of materíal
Shape of product
14. FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIFY
Shape of material
Shape of product
14. FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIFY
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
This optíon canned cycles to make CNC programming easy. For ínstance, the data of the finísh work shape descňbes the tool path for roughMULTIPLE
machíníng. And also, a canned cycles for the thread cuttíng ís avaílable.
REPETITIVE CYCLE
G70-G76
There are two types of stock removals іп turníng : Туpe I and II.
Stock Removal ín
Turníng G71
Designate without sígn. The cuttíng dírectíon depends on the dírectíon
AA . Thís desígnatíon ís modal and ís not changed untíl the other va1ue
is desígnated. A1so this value can be specífıed by the parameter No. 5132 ,
and the parameter ís changed Ьy the program command.
e: Escaping amount
Thís desígnatíon ís modal and ís not changed untíl the other va1ue
is desígnated. A1so this va1ue can Ьe specífíed by the parameter No. 5133 ,
and the parameter ís changed by the program command.
ns: Sequence number of the first biock for the program of fíníshíng shape.
nf : sequence number of the last block for the program oT finíshíng shape.
Δu : Dístance and direction of finíshíng allowance in X direction diameter / radíus
desígnatíon .
Δw : Dístалce and dírectíon of finíshíng allowance in Z dírectíon.
f,s,t : Any F, s, oг T function contaíned ín blocks ns to nf in the cycle is ignored, and
the F, S, oг T functíon in thís G71 block ís effectíve.
F1g. a Cutting Path 1n Stock Removal 1n Turn1n9 Týpe 1
147
14. FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIFY
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 8-62444Ě/03
Notes
1. Whi1e both Δd and Δu, are specified by address U, the
meanings of them are determined by the presence of
addresses P and Q.
2. The cycle machining is performed by G71 command with P
and Q specification.
F, S, and T functions which are specified in the move
command between points A and B are ineffective and
those specífìed in G71 block or the previous block are
effective.
When an option of constant surface speed control is
selected, G96 or G97 command specified in the move
command between points A and B are ineffective, and that
specified in G71 block or the previous block is effective.
The following four cutting patterns are considered. A11 of
these cuttìng cycles are made para11e1ed to Z axis and the
sign of Ju and Δw are as follows:
The tool path between A and A is specified in the biock with
sequence number ns including G00 or G01, and in this
block, a move command in the Z axis cannot be specifíed.
The tool path between A and B must be steadily increasing
or decreasing pattern in both X and Z axis. When the tool
path between A and A is programmed by G00/G01, cutting
along AA is performed in G00/G01 mode resPectively.
З. The subprogram cannot be called from the block between
sequence number ns and nf .
14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING
Type 11 Туpe II díffers from type I іп the followíng : The profile need not show
monotone increase or decrease along the X axís, and ít may have up to 10 concaves pockets .

F1g. e Chamfering 1n stock Removalln Turning Type 11
The clearance e specífied in R to be províded after cutting can also be
set in parameter No. 5133.
A sample cuttíng path ís gíven below:
F1g. f Cutting Path 1n stock Removal 1n Facing
The offset of the tool típ radíus ís not added to fíníshíng allowances
Δu and Δw. In turning, the offset of the tool típ radius ís assumed to be
zero.
W=0 must be specífíed ; otherwise, the tool típ may cut ínto one wa11 síde.
For the first block of a repetitíve portíon, two axes X U and Z W must
be specified. When Z motion ís not performed, WO is also specífıed.
Dístínctíon between type When on1y one axis ís specifíed in the first block of a repetítive portíon
When two axes are specified in the fírst block of a repetítíve portion
-- Туpe II
When the first block does not include Z motion and type llis to be used,
WO must be specifíed.
EXample
As shown in the fígure below, thís cycle ís the same as G71 except that
cuttíng ís made by a operatíon para11e1 to X axís. Stock removal ín facíng
G72
 a Cutting Path 1n stock Removalln Facing
Signs of specífied The followíng four cutting patterns are consídered. AU of these cutting
n u m beι s cycles are made para11e1 to X axís and the sign of Δu and Aw are as follows
Both linear and círcular ínterpolation are possible
slgns of Numbers Speclfled wlth U and W 1n Stock Removalln Facing
The tool path between A and A ís specífıed іп the block with sequence
number ns including G00 or GO1, and in this block, a move commаnd
in the X axís cannot be specífıed. The tool path between A аnd B must
be steadily increasíng and decreasing pattern ín both X and Z axes.
Whether the cutting along AA is G00 0г GO1 mode is determíned by the
command between A and A , as descríbed in item
14. FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIFY
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING в
This function permíts cuttíng a fıxed pattern repeatedly, with a pattern beíng displaced bit by bít. By this cuttíng cycle, ít is possible to effícíently Pattern repeatíng G73 cut work whose rough shape has already been made by a rough machíníng, forgíng or castíng method, etc.
The pattern commanded in the program should be as follows.
 Dístance and dírectíon of relief in the X axis direction Radíus desígnatíon .
Thís designation ís modal and ís not changed until the other value ís
designated. A1so this value can be specífíed by the parameter No. 5135,
and the parameter ís changed by the program command.
Ak : Dístалce and dírectíon of relief in the Z axis dírectíon.
Thís desígnatíon is modal and is not changed until the other value ís
desígnated. Also this value can be specífíed by the parameter No. 5136,
and the parameter ís changed by the program command.
d: The number o division
Thís value ís the same as the repetitive count for rough cuttíng. This
designatíon is modal алd ís not changed untíl the other va1ue is designated.
Also, thís value can be specífíed by the parameter No. 5137, and the
paгameteг ís changed Ьy the program command.
ns: Sequence number of the fírst block for the program of finishíng shape.
nf : sequence number of the last block for the program of finíshing shape.
Δu : Dístалce and direction of finíshing allowалce іп X dírection díameter/radius
desígnatíon
Δw : Distалce and directíon of fíníshíng allowance in Z dírectíon
2. The cycle machining is performed by G73 command with P
and Q specification.
The four cutting patterns are considered. 
When the machíning cycle is terminated, the tool returns to point A.
After rough cuttíng by 671, G72 or G73, the following command permíts fıníshíng.
Finishing cycle G70
1. F, S, and T functions specified in the block G71, G72, G73 are not effective but those specified between sequence numbers ns and nf are effective in G70.
2. When the cycle machining by G70 is terminated, the tool is returned to the start point and the next block is read.
blocks between ns and nf referred in G70 through G73, the subprogram cannot be called.
14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 
Examples
Stock Removal in Turníng G71 Type 
Start point
o : Return amount
Thís desígnation is modal and is not changed untíl the other value is desígnated. A1so thís value can be specified by the parameter No. 5139,and the parameter is changed by the program command.
X: X component of poínt B
U: lncremental amount from A to B
Z: Z component of point C
W: lncrement amount from A to C
Δi : Movement amount in X directíon wíthout sígn
Δk : Depth of cut in Z dírection without sign
ed : Relief amount of the tool at the cutting bottom. 

Δdmiп: Minimum cutting depth specified by the radius value
When the cutting depth of one cycle operatíon becomes smaller than this límit, the cutting depth ís clamped at this value. This designation is modal and ís not changed until the
other value is designated. A1so this value can be specified by parameter No. 5140, and the parameter ís changed by the program command.
d : Fínishing allowance
This designatíon is modal and is not changed until the other valueis designated. 
5141, and the parameter is changed by,the program command.
Dífference of thread radíus 1f i= 0, ordínary straíght thread cuttíng can be made.
k : Height of thread
This value is specífied by the radius value.
PROGRAMMING
Thread cutting cycle When feed hold is applied duríng threadíng in the multiple thread cuttíng retract cycle G76 , the tool quíckly retracts in the same way as in chamfering
performed at the end of the thread cutting cycle. The tool goes back to the start point of the cycle. When cycle start is tríggered, the multiple thread cuttíng cycle resumes.
Without thís retractíon function, when feed hold is applied duríng threadíng, the tool goes back to the start point of the cycle after threading is completed.
See notes in
Notes
1. The meanings of the data specífied by address P, Q, and R
determined by the presence of X U and X W .
2. The cycle machíning ís performed by G76 command with X
U and Z W specification.
By using thís cycle , one edge cutting ís performed and the
load on the tool tip ís reduced.
Making the cuttíng depth Δd for the fírst path, and for
the nth path, cutting amount per one cycle is held constant.
Four symmetrical patterns are considered corresponding to
the sign of each address.
The ínternal thread cutting is avaílable. 1n the above fígure,
the feed rate between C and D is specified by address F,
and in the other path, at rapid traverse. The sign of
íncremental dímensions for the above fígure is as follows:
U, W: minus determined by the directíon of the tool path AC and CD.
R: minus determined by the direction of the tool path AC.
P : pius always
Q : plus aiways
З. Notes on thread cutting are the same as those on G32
thread cuttíng and G92 thread cuttíng cycie.
4. The desígnation of chamfering ís also effective for G92
thread cutting cycle.
5. The tool returns to the cycle start poínt at that tíme cuttíng
depth Δdn as soon as the feed hoid status is entered
during thread cutting when the Thread Cutting Cyc1e
retract optíoń ís used.
14. FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIFY
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING e-s2л44εıoз
Examples
Staggered thread cuttíng
Specífyíng P2 can perform staggered thread cutting wíth a constant depth of cut.
Example: G76 X60640 Z25000 K3680 D1800 A60 P2;
For staggered thread cuttíng, always use the FS 15 tape format see
Sectíon

6. Whíle a multiple repetitive cycle G70AG76 ís beíng executed, it ís possíble to stop the cycle and to perform mаnual operation. But, when the cycle operation ís restarted, the tool should be returned to theposítíon where the cycle operatíon is stopped.
If the cycle operatíon ís restarted wíthout returníng to the stop position, the movement in mаnual operation ís added to the absohıte value, and the tool path is shífted by the movement amount in mаnual operatíon.
7. When G70, 671, G72, oг G73 ís executed, the sequence number specífied by address P аnd Q should not be specífíed twíce or more in the same program.
8. Do not program so that the final movement commаnd of the finishing shape block group desígnated with P and Q for G70, G71, G72, and G73 fıníshes with chamfering oг corner rounding. If it is specífied,P/S alarm No. 69 ís generated.
14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
The canned cycle for drillíng simplífíes the program normally dírectíng the machining operatíon commanded wíth a few blocks, using one block includíng G function.
FOR DRILLING This canned cycle conforms to B 6314.
Following ís the canned cycle G80-G89
Table Canned Cycies
G code Drillíng Hole machining t Operatlon in the Retractlon operation Applícations
axís operation - dírection bottom hole positíon + direction
G80 Cancel
G83 Z axis Cutting feed / íntermíttent Dweil Rapid traverse Front drilling cycle
G84 Z axis Cutting feed Dweil spindle CCW Cuttıng feed Front tapping cycle
G85 7 axis Cuttirıg feed  Cutting feed Front bońng cycle
G87 X axıs Cutting feed intermittent Dwe1i Rapid traverse Side dńlling cycle
G88 x axis Cutting feed Dweil эSpindle CCw Cutting feed Side tappíng cycIe
G89 x axis Cutting feed Dweil Cuttirıg feed Side
Expianatïons In general, the drillíng cycle consísts of the followíng síx operatíon
sequences.
Operatíon 1 Posítíoning of X Z and C axís
Operation 2 Rapíd traverse up to poínt R 1eve1
Operation 3 Ho1e machíning
Operatíon 4 Operatíon at the bottom of a hole
Operation 5 Retraction to point R 1eve1
Operatíon 6 Rapíd traverse up to the ínitíal poínt
fnitial IeveI
Positioníng axís and A drillíng G code specífíes positíoning axes and a drílling axis as
drilling axís shown below. The C-axís and X- or Z-axis are used as posítíoníng
axes. The X- oг Z-axís, which ís not used as a posítioning axis, is used as a dńllíng axis.
Although canned cycles include tappíng and boríng cycles as well as drílling cycles, ín thís chapter, only the tenn drilling wíll be used to
refer to operatíons implemented wíth canned cycles.
Posltloning axls and drilling axls
G83 and G87, G84 and G88, аnd G85 and G89 have the same functíon respectívely except for axes specífied as posítíoníng axes and a drillíng axís.
Drilling mode G83AG85 / G87A89 are modal G codes and remaín in effect until canceled. When in effect, the current state ís the dńllíng mode.
Once dńllíng data is specifíed in the dríllíng mode, the data ís retaíned untíl modified oг cаnceled.
 Specífy aІІ necessary drilling data at the begínníng of canned cycles;
when canned cycles aгe beíng performed, specífy data modíficatíons only.
Return point level In G code system A, the tool returns to the ínítíallevel from the
G98/G99 bottom of a hole. In G code system B oг C, specífyíng G98 returns the
tool to the initíallevel from the bottom of a hole аnd specifyíng G99
returns the tool to the point-R level from the bottom of a hole.
The following illustrates how the tool moves when G98 or G99 is specífíed. Generally, G99 ís used for the first drilling operation аnd 098 ís used for the last drillíng operation.
The ínítiallevel does not change even when dńllíng ís performed in the G99 mode.

PROGRAMMING PROGRAMING в-sг444εı0з
Repeat To repeat dríllíng for equally-spaced holes, specify the number of
repeats in K_.
K ís effective oп1y within the block where it ís specified.
Specify the fírst hole posítíon in íncremental mode.
If ít ís specífıed iri absolute mode, drílling ís repeated at the same
ι positíon.
Number of repeats K Э The maximum command value = 9999

If KO ís specifıed, dńllíng data is stored, but drilling ís not performed.
M code used for C-axís When an M code specifíed ín parameter for C-axis clamp / 
clamp/unclamp unclamp ís coded in a program, the CNC íssues the M code for C-axís
clamp after the tool ís positioned and before the tool ís fed in rapid traverse
to the point-R 1eve1. The CNC also íssues the M code for C-axís unclamp
after the tool retracts to the poínt-R 1eve1. The tool dwells for the tíme
specified in parameter No. 5112.
Cance To cancel a canned cycle, use G80 0г a group 01 G code.
Group 01 G codes
G00 : Positioníng rapid traverse
G01 : Línear ínterpolation
G02 : Circular interpolation CW
G03 : Círcular interpolatíon CCW
Symb 1s in figures Subsequent sections explain the indivídual canned cycles. Fígures ín
these explanations use the followíng symbols:
Positioníng rapíd traverse G00
Cutting feed Iinear inτerpolation G01
v Manual feed
OSS Oríented spindle stop
The spíndle stops at a fixed rotation positíon
Е Shift rapid traverse 000
Ma lssuing the M code for C-axis clamp
14. FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIFY
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING

Explanations Tappíng ís performed by rotating the spíndle clockwíse. When the bottom
of the hole has been reached, the spíndle is rotated in the reverse direction
for retraction. This operatíon creates threads.
Feedrate overrides are ignored duríng tappíng. A feed hold does not stop
the machíne untíl the return operation ís completed.
14. FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIFY
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING
Notes
Bit 6 of parameter No. 5101 specifies whether the spindle stop command M05 is issued before the direction in which the spindle rotates is specified with M03 or M04. For details,
refer to the operator s manual created by the machine tool builder.
Examples M51 ; setting C-axís lndex mode ON
Explanations Canned cycle for dríllíng ís canceled to perform normal operatíon.
Point R and poínt Z are cleared. Other drílling data ís also canceled cleared .
Prccautíons to bo
taken by operator
Reset and emergency Even when the controller ís stopped by resetting or emergency stop ín stop the course of dríllíng cycle, the drilling mode and drilling data are saved ; with thís mind, therefore, restart operation.
síngle blocic When drilling cycle ís performed wíth a síngle block, the operatíon stops at the end points of operations 1, 2, 6 in Fig. a .
Consequently, ít follows that operation is started up 3 times to drill one hole. The operatíon stops at the end points of operatíons 1, 2 wíth the feed hold lamp ON. The operation stops in the feed hold condítions at the end poínt of operation 6 íf the repeat remaíns, and ít stops in stop conditions in other cases.
Feed hold When Feed Ho1d ís applied between operatíons 3 and 5 by G84/G88,
the feed hold lamp lights up ímmedíately if the feed hold ís applied agaín to operatíon 6.
Oııerríde During operatíon wíth G84 and G88, the feedrate oveıride ís 100 .
14. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B-624ØE/03
There are four gńndíng canned cycles : the traverse grinding cycle G71 , traverse direct fıxed-dimension grindíng cycle, oscillation grinding CANNED GRINDING
cycle, and oscíllatíon direct fıxed-dímensíon grínding cycle.
CYCLE With a machíne tool that allows caiined cycles for gńnding to be used, the
FOR GRINDING multíple repetitive canned cycle for turning cannot be used.
MACHINE
Traverse grindíng cycle
H: Number of repetitions Setting value : 1 to 9999
Explanatíons When the multistage skíp operatíon ís used, a gauge number can be
specífied. The method of gauge number specífícatíon ís the same as the method of multistage skip functíon. When the multístage skíp operatíon is not used, the conventíonal skip sígnal is valid.
The same specificatiorıs as G71 apply except for gauge number specífícatíon.
Operation at the tíme of 1. When the tool moves along the Z-axís to grind a workpíece, if 
skíp sígnal ínput skip signal ís írıput, the tool returns to the Z coordinate where the cycle started after the tool reaches the end of the specífíed grínding area.
Termination gn S Skíp sígıal
2. When the tool cuts a workpiece along the X-axis, íf a skíp signal is ínput, the tool stops cutting immediately and returns to the Z coordinate where the cycle started.
3. The skíp sígnal ís valid durírıg dwell, wíthout being affected by parameters DS1 to DS8 No. 6206 0 to 7 . Dwell ís ímmedíately stopped for return to the Z axís coordinate where the cycle started.
H: Number of repetítions setting vaiue : 1 to 9999
Explanations When the multistage skíp operation ís used, a gauge number can be 
specifíed. The method of gauge number specifícatíon ís the same as the method of multistage skip functíon. When the multistage skip operation ís not used, the conventional skíp signal is valíd.
The same specifıcatíons as G73 apply to the other items.
Operatíon at the time of 1. When the tool moves along the Z-axis to grind a workpiece, if a skíp signal ínput skíp sígnal ís input, the tool returns to the Z coordinate where the
cycle started after the tool reaches the end of the specífied gríndíng area.
Skip sígnal
Explanatíons The movement for chamfeńng or corner R must be a síngle movement
along the X or Z axís ín GO1 mode. The next block must be a síngle
movement along the X or Z axís perpendicular to the former block.
I or K, and R always specífy a radius value.
Note that the start poínt for a command specifíed in a block followíng a
chamferíng or corner-R block ís not poínt c but point b shown in Fígs.
a to d . In íncremental programming, specify a dístance from poínt
1 The following commands cause an alarm.
1 One of 1, K, or R is commanded when X and Z axes are specified by G01.
P/S alarm No. 054
2 Move amount of X or Z is less than chamfering value and corner R value in the block
where chamfering and corner R are specifìed. P/S alarm No. 055
3 Next block to the block where chamfering and corner R were specified, has not G01
command. P/5 alarm No. 051, 052
4 1f more than one of 1, K, and R are specified in G01, P/S alarm No. 053 is issued.
2 A single block stops at point c of Fig. a A d , not at point d.
3 Chamfering and corner R cannot be applied to a thread cutting block.
4 C can be used instead of 1 or K as an address for chamfering on the system which does not
use C as an axis name. To use C for an address for chamfering, fix parameter CCR No. 3405 4
to 1.
5 1f both C and R are specified with G01 in a block, the address specified last is valid.
6 Neither chamfering nor corner-R machining can be specified in direct drawing dimension
programmíng.
14. FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIFY
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 8-62444εı03
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET
G68, G69
Format
G68 : Double turret mírror ímage on
G69 : Mírror ímage cancel
Explanatíons Mirгor image can Ьe applied to X-axis with G code.
When G68 is designated, the coordinate system is shifted to the mating
turret side, and the X-axis sign is reversed from the programmed
command to perform symmetrícal cuttíng. To use this functíon, set the
distance between the two turrets to a parameter No. 1290 .
Examples
Double turret programmíng

PROGRAMMING
Angles of straight lines, chamferíng value, corner rounding values, and other dimensíonal values on machíníng drawings can be programmed by
DIRECT DRAWING
directly ínputtíng these values. In addítion, the chamfering and corner 
DIMENSIONS rounding can be inserted between straíght línes havíng an optíonal ang1e.
PROGRAMMING Thís programming is on1y valid in memory operatíon mode.
Format
F1g. a Machlning Drawfng example
For command a straight 1ine, specífy one or two out of X, Z, and A.
If only oлe ís specífíed, the straíght line must Ьe prímaríly defíned Ьy a
command in the next block.
To command the degree of a straight line or the value of chamferíng oг
corner R, command with a comma , as follows :
,By specífyíng 1 to parameter CCR No. 3405 4 on the system which
does not use A oг C as an axís пame, the degree of a stгaight line oг the
value of chamferíng or corner R can be commаnded without a comma
, as follows :
14. FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIFY
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 8-62444FJOЗ
Notes
1 The following G codes are not applicable to the same block as commanded by direct input of
drawing dimensions or between blocks of direct input of drawing dimensions whích define
sequential figures.
1 G codes other than G04 in group 00.
2 G02, G03, G90, G92, and G94 in group 01.
2 Corner rounding cannot be inserted into a threading block.
3 Neither chamfering and corner rounding commands specified in nor those of direct ínput
of drawing dimensions can be used concurrently.
4 When the end point of the previous block is determined in the next block according to sequential
commands of direct input of drawing dimensions, the single block stop is not done, but the feed
hold stop is done at the end point of the previous block.
5 The angle allowance in calculating the point of intersection in the program below is 1
Because the travel distance to be obtained in this calculation is too large.
1 X_ , A_ ; 1f a value within 0 1 or 180 1 is specified for the angle instruction, the
P/S alarm occurs.
2 Z_ , A_ ; 1f a value within 90 1 or 270 1 is specifíed for the angle instruction, the P/S
alarm No. 057 occurs.
6 An alarm occurs if the angle made by the 2 lines is within 1 when caiculatíng the point of
íntersection.
7 Chamfering or corner is ignored if the angle made by the 2 línes is within 1 .
8 Both a dimensional command absolute programming and angle instruction must be specified in the block following a block in whích only the angle instruction is specified.
14. FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIFY
Front face tappíng cycles G84 and side face tappíng cycles G88 can
be performed eíther in conventíonal mode or rígíd mode.
In conventíonal mode, the spíndle is rotated or stopped, in
synchronizatíon wíth the motion along the tapping axis accordíng to
miscellaneous functíons M03 spíndle CW rotation , M04 spíndle CCW
rotation , and M05 spíndle stop .
In ńgíd mode, the spíndle motor is controlled in the saıne way as a control
motor, by the application of compensatíon to both motion along the
tappíng axís and that of the spíndle.
For ńgíd tappíng, each turn of the spíndle corresponds to a certain amount
of feed screw lead along the spíndle axis. This also applies to
acceleratíon/deceleratíon. Thís means that ńgíd tappíng does not demаnd
the use of float tappers as in the case of conventíonal tapping, thus
enablíng high-speed, high-precísion tapping.
When the system ís equípped wíth the optíonal multíspíndle control
functíon, the second spíndle can be used for ńgid tapping.
Controllíng the spíndle motor in the same way as a servo motor in rígid
mode enables high-speed tapping. Front Face Rígíd
Explanatíons Once positíoning for the X-axis G84 oг Z-axis G88 has been completed, the spindle is moved, by rapid traverse, to poínt R. Tapping ís performed from po nt R to point Z, after which the spíndle stops and observes a dwell tírne. Then, the spíndle starts reverse rotation, retracts to poínt R, stops rotating, then moves to the initiallevel by rapid traverse.
Rigid mode Rígid mode can be specifíed by applyíng any of the following methods:
Specífyíng M29S before a tapping block
Specífyíng M29S within a tappíng block
Handling G84 or G88 as a G code for rígid tappíng Set bít 0 G84 of parameter No. 5200 Screw lead In feed per minute mode, the feedrate divided by the spíndle speed is equal
to the screw lead. In feed per rotatíon mode, the feedrate is equal to the screw lead.
Limitations
S commands When a value exceedíng the maximum rotatíon speed for the gear being
used is specified, P/S a1aгm No. 200 ís íssued. For an analog spíndle, when a command ís specífíed such that more than 4095 pulses are generated duríng 8 ms detection unit , P/S alarm No. 202 ís íssued. For a seńal spíndle, when a command ís specifıed such that more than 32767 pulses are generated duríng 8 ms detectíon unit , P/S alarm No. 202 ís issued.
For a built-ín motor equípped wíth a detector having a resolutíon of 4095 pulses per rotatíon, the maxiinum spíndle speed duríng rígid tapping is as follows:
Maximum position The maxímum posítion deviation during movement along the tappíng
devíatíon duríng axís ín ńgíd tappíng mode ís usually set in parameter No. 5310. Use
movemerıt along the parameter No. 5314, however, when setting a value of more than 32767, tappíng axís for example, accordíng to the resolution of the detector beíng used.
R The value of R must be specified in a block whích performs dńllíng. If the value ís specífíed in a block whích does not perform drilling, it ís not stored as modal data.
Cancellatíon Ø to G03 G codes in group 01 must not be specified in a blосk contaíning G84 or G88. If specífied, G84 or G88 in that block ís canceled.
Tool posítíon offset Any tool positíon offset ís ignored in canned cycle mode. 
5 COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Thís chapter describes the following compensatíon functions:
TOOL OFFSET
OVERVIEW OF TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
DETAILS OF TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
CORNER CIRCULAR FUNCTION G39
TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF
COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES FROM
THE PROGRAM G10
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET G36, G37
COORDINATE ROTATION ,
In this unit, there ís пo G code to specify tool offset.
The tool offset ís specified by T code.
Tool geometry offset and tool wear offset are possible to divide the tool
Tool geometry offset offset to the tool geometry offset for compensatíng the tool shape or tool mountíng posítíon and the tool wear offset for compensatíng the tool nose and tool wear offset wear.
Total value of tool geometry offset value and tool wear offset value is set as the tool wear offset value wíthout optíon.
Notes
Tool geometry offset and tool wear offset are optioned.
Poínt on the program Poínt on the program
lmaginary tool E
X axis
geometry Offset
offset amount
value on X axís
X axís
wear L Actual
offset tool
vaiue
Z axis `- Z axís
wear geometry Otfset offset offset amount value value Z axìs
Too selectíon and set number ís spetool geometry offset cifíed with the last number two dígíts of a T code.
Tool selection is made by specifying the T code correspondíng to the tool
Too Se ectíon number. Refer to the machine tool buílder s manual for the relationship
between the tool selectíon number and the tool.
Tool offset number has two meaníngs.
Offset  It ís specifies the offset dístance corresponding to the number that is selected to begín the offset functíon. A tool offset number of 0 or 00índícates that the offset amount ís 0 and the offset ís cancelled.
COMPENSATION FUNCTION
There are two types of offset. One ís tool wear offset and the other is tool
Offset geometry offset.
Explanations
Tool wear offset The tool path ís offset by the X, Y, and Z wear offset values for the
programmed path. The offset dístance corresponding to the number specifíed by the T code is added to or subtracted from the and posítíon of each progranınıed block.
Tool path after offset
This block contains th oftset command with T code /
Programmed path
Compensatíon by oftset X, Z offset vector
Fí Movement of offset 1
Offset vector In , the vector with offset X, Y, and Z is called the offset vector. Compensatíon ís the same as the offset vector.
Offset cancel Offset is cancelled when T code offset number 0 or 00 ís selected. At the
end of the cancelled block, the offset vector becomes 0.
N1 T0202 ; Creates the offset vector correspondíng to offset nunıber 02
Tool geometry offset Wíth the tool geometry offset, the work coordínate system ís shifted by the X, Y, and Z geometry offset amounts. Namely, the offset amount correspondíng to the number desígnated wíth the code ís added to or subtracted from the current positíon.
Absolute command
Programmed path after work  coordinate system 
Tool path after offset Offset amount by tool geometry offset in X, Z 
axis offset vector 
 Programmed path before 
work coordinate system shift
Movement of tool geometry offset
Notes
As well as wear offset, the tool can be compensated by parameter setting LGT to add or sı.ıbtract the  programmed end point of each block.
Offset cancel specífyíng offset number 0, 00, oг 0000 cancels offset.
Notes
When LGC, bit 5 of parameter , is set to 0,
specifying offset number 0 or 00 does not canceí offset.
PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION B-62444E/03
Examples 1. When a tool geometry offset number and tool wear offset number are
specífıed with the last two dígits of a T code 
when LGN, bít 1 of parameter , ís set 0 ,
N1 T0202 ; Specifıes offset number 02
N2 ;
N3 T0200 ; Cancels offset
Programmed N3
path after work N2
coordínate N1
system shíft /
Too1 path after offset
Offset\ /
Notes
When LGC, bit 5 of parameter , ís set to 0, specifying offset number 0 does not cаncel tool geometry offset.
2. Assume that geometry offset is not cаnceНed wíth offset 
Set the parameter
N1 T0202 ; Too1 selectíon number specified
tool geometry offset number 02
N3 T0000 ; Cancels offset 
Offset cancel
Programmed N3
path after work N2
coordinate N1
system shíft

COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
This section describes the following operations when tool posítíon offset
ís applied: G53, G28, G30, and commands, manual reference G53, G28, G30, and
positíon return, and the canceling of tool posítion offset with a T00
When Tool Posítíon
Explanatìons
Reference posítíon Executing reference position return G28 oг a G53 command when tool return G28 and G53 position offset is applied does not cancel the tool positíon offset vector.
command when tooi The absolute position display is as follows, however, accordíng to the position offset ís appiied setting of bit 4 LGT of parameter No. 5002.
LG T= 0 Too1 geometry compensation ís based on shíft of the coordínate system.
Tooi posltlon offset Tool geometry com- Tooi wear compensa-without option pensatlon 
Absolute Block for reference The vector is not re- The shitt is reflected. The vector ís not re-position position return or fiected. T
199
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в-sгa44εıoз
Cancelíng tool posítíon Whether specífying T00 a1one, while tool position offset ís applied,
offset wíth T00 cancels the offset depends on the settíngs of the followíng parameters:
When the tool geometry/wear compensatíon option ís selected
LGN = 0
LGN LGT LGC
The geometry offset number ís: Geometry compensatíon ís The geometry offset is: Result
0: Same as the wear offset applied: 0: Not canceled wíth T00
number 0: Based on shift of the 1: Canceled wíth T00
1: Same as the tool selectíon coordínate system
number 1: Based on movement of the tool
 COMPENSATiON FUNCTION PROQRAMMINQ в
It ís díffícult to produce the compensatíon necessary to form accurate parts when using only the tool offset functíon due to tool nose roundness in OVERVIEW OF TOOL
taper cuttíng oг circular cuttíng. The tool nose radíus compensatíon
NOSE RA ІIJS function compensates automatícally for the above errors.
СOMPENSATION
Tool path wíth compensation lnsufficient depth of cuttin
Shape process without tool nose radíus compensation
Fí Tool path of tool nose radíus compensatíon
The tool nose at posítion A іп following figure does not actually exíst.
lmagínary Tool Nose The ímaginary tool nose is гequіred because ít is usually more diffıcult to set the actual tool nose radíus center to the start posítíon than the ímagínary tool nose Note .
A1so when ímaginary tool nose is used, the tool nose radius need not be considered in programming.
The position relatíonshíp when the tool ís set to the start position is shown in the followíng fígure.
Start positíon
Т Start position
When programmed using the When programmed using the tool nose center imagínary tool nose
Fí Tool nose radíus center and imagínary tool nose 
 PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Notes
1n a machine with reference positions, a standard posítion like the turret center can be placed over
the start posítion. The dístance from thís standard positíon to the nose radíus center or the imaginary
tool nose ís set as the tool offset value.
Setting the distance from the standard posítíon to the tool nose radíus center as the offset value is the same as placíng the tool nose radíus center over the start positíon, while setting the distance from the standard position to the imaginary tool nose is the same as placíng the ímaginary tool nose over the standard posítion. To set the offset value, ít ís usually easier to measure the distance from the standard posítion to the ímagínary tool nose than from the standard position to the tool nose radius
center.
Setting the distance from the standard posítíon Settíng the dístance from the standard position to the to the tool nose center as the tool offset value imagínary tool nose center as the tool offset valueThe start position is placeá over the tool nose center The start positíon is plačed over the imagínary tool noseFí Tool offset value when the turret center ís placed over the start posítíon
Unless tool nose radíus compensatíon ís if tool nose radíus compensation is used, accu-
performed, the tool nose center path is the rate cuttíng will be pertormed.
same as the programmed path.
Start-up Start-up
Programmed path Programmed path
Fí Tool path when programmíng usíng the tool nose center
Wíthout tool nose radíus compensation, the Wíth tool nose radíus compensation, accurate ímagínary tool nose path is the same as the cuttíng wíll be performed.
programmed path.
о lmaginary tool
lmagínary tool nose path Start-up nose path \ Start-up
Programmed path Programmed path
Fí Tool path when programmíng usíng the ímagínary tool nose
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в
The direction of the ímagínary tool nose viewed from the tool nose center
is determined Ьy the diτectíon of the tool duríng cuttíng, so ít must be set Dírection of lmagínary in advance as well as offset values.
Tool Nose
The dírectíon of the ímagínary tool nose can Ьe selected from the eíght specifícatíons shown in the Fí below together wíth theír correspondíng codes.
This illustrates the relation between the tool and the start posítion. The following apply when the tool geometry offset and tool wear offset optíon are selected.

Imaginary tool nose numbers 0 and 9 are used when the tool nose center
coincides with the start posítíon. Set ímagínary tool nose number to
address OFT for each offset number.
Bít 7 WNP of parameter No. 5002 ís used to determine whether the tool
geometry offset number or the tool wear offset number specifies the
direction of the virtual tool nose for tool nose radius compensation.
Limítations

Offset number and
offset value
Explanatíons
Offset number and offset
Thís value ís set from the MDI accordíng to the offset number.
When the optíons of tool geometry compensatíon and tool wear
compensatíon are selected, offset values become as follows :
Tab1e Offset number and offset va1ue

When the geometry offset number ís made common to the tool selection by the parameter
LGT íng and a T code for whích the geometry offset and wear offset number díffer from each other is desígnated, the  ímagínary tool nose dírection specifíed by the geometry offset number is valíd.
Example T0102
The offset value corresponding to the offset number 0 ís always O.
No offset value can be set to offset number O.
In tool nose radius compensation, the positíon of the workpíece wíth respect to the tool must be specífíed. Work Posítíon and
Move Command o code Workplece positlon Tool path
 Movíng along the programmed path
G41 Ríght síde Movíng on the 1eft síde the programmed path
G42 Left síde Moving on the right side the programmed path
The tool is offset to the opposíte side of the workpiece.
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03
The workpiece posítíon can be changed by setting the coordinate system as shown below.
ZCOMPENSATION FUNCTION
Tool movement when the The workpíece posítíon against the toll changes at the corner of the workpíece posítíon programmed path as shown in the following fıgure.
changes Although the workpíece does not exíst oп the ńght side of the programmed path in the above case. the existence of the workpiece ís assumed in the movement from A to B. The workpiece position must not be changed ín the block next to the start-up block. In the above example, íf the block specífyíng motion from A to B were the start-up block, the
tool path would not be the same as the one shown. 
Start-up The block in whích the mode changes to G41 or G42 from G40 ís called
the start-up block.
Transíent tool movements for offset are performed in the start-up block.
In the blαk after the start-up block, the tool nose center is positioned
Vertically to the programmed path of that block at the start posítíon.
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 
Offset cancel The block in which the mode changes to 640 from 641 or 642 ís called
the offset cancel block.
The tool nose center moves to a posítíon vertícal to the programmed path ín the block before the cаncel block. The tool is positíoned at the end positíon in the offset cancel block G40 as shown below.
Specífícatíon of G41/G42 When is specífied again in 641/G42 mode , the tool nose center is ín G41/G42 mode positioned vertical to the programmed path of the precedíng block at the end posítion of the preceding block.
In the block that first specifies 641/G42, the above posítioníng of the tool nose center is not performed.
Tool movement when the When you wísh to retract the tool in the dírectíon specífíed by X U and movíng directíon of the Z W cancelling the tool nose radius compensatíon at the end of tool ín a block whích machining the first block in the figure below, specífy the following : inciudes command is different from the directíon of the workpíece
PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 
The workpíece posítíon specífíed by addresses I and K ís the same as that in the preceding block. If I and/or K ís specifíed wíth G40 in the cancel mode, the I and/or K ís ignored.
TooІ nose radíus compensatíon
Circular ínterpolation
Offset cancel mode I and k are íneffective.
The numeral s followed I and K should always be specified as radíus values.
Examples
Notes on tool nose radius compensatíon 
Explanatíons
Tool movement when ; M code output two or more blocks ; S code output 
wíthout a move X1000 ; Dwell command should not be U0 ; Feed distance of zero
programmed ; G code only consecutívely P01 Q2 ; Offset change If two or more of the above blocks are specifıed consecutively, the tool nose center comes to a posítion vertical to the programmed path of the precedíng block at the end of the preceding block. However, íf the no movement commands is 4 above, the above tool motion is attained only  wíth one block.
G42 mode
Tool nose radíus  compensation wíth G90 outer díameter/ínternal
compensatíon wíth G90 diameter cutting cycle or G94 end face turníng cycle is as follows, :
or G94
Tooі nose radius When one of following cycles ís specífied, the cycle deviates by a tool
compensatíon wíth G71 nose radius compensation vector. During the cycle, no intersection
to G76 or G78 calculation ís performed.
G71 Stock removal in turning oг traverse grinding cycle
G72 Stock removal in facíng or traverse direct constant-diinension gríndíng cycle
G73 Pattern repeating oг Oscillation gríndíng cycle
When one of followíng cycles is specífıed, the tool nose radius compensatíon ís not performed.
074 End face peck dńlling
075 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76 Multíple threadíng cycle
G78 Threadíng cycle
Tooi nose radius Movement after after compensatíon ís shown below.
compensatíon when chamfering is performed
This section provides a detailed explanatíon of the movement of the tool for tool nose radius compensation outlíned in Section
DETAILS OF TOOL
This section consísts of the followíng subsections:
NOSE RADIUS
COMPENSATION General
Correctíon in Chamferíng and Corner Arc
Input Command from MDI
General Precautions for Offset Operations
Thís offset vector simply called vector hereín after ís íntemally crated by the control unít as requíred for proper offsetting and to calculate a tool path wíth exact offset by tool nose radíus from the programmed path.
Thís vector is deleted by resettíng.
The vector always accompanies the tool as the tool advances.
Pгopeг understanding of vector ís essential to accurate programmíng.
Read the descríption below on how vectors are created carefully.
G40, G41, G42 G40, G41 0г G42 ís used to delete or generate vectors.
These codes are used together wíth G00, GO1, G02, G03 0г G33 to specífy a mode for tool motion Offsettíng .
G40 Tool nose radíus compensatíon cancel Neither
G41 Left offset along tool path Ríght
G42 Right offset along tool path Left
G41 and G42 specífy an off mode, while G40 specífíes cancellation of the offset.
Cancel mode The system enters the cancel mode ímmedíately after the power ís turned
on, when the RESET button ori the MDI ís pushed or a program ís forced to end by executíng M02 0г M30. the system may not enter the cancel mode dependíng on the machíne too1. In the cancel mode, the vector is set to zero, and the path of the center of tool nose coíncides wíth the programmed, path. A program must end ín cаncel mode. If it ends in the offset mode, the tool cannot be posítioned at the end poínt, and the tool
stops at a locatíon the vector length away from the end poínt.
COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING start-up When a block which satisfıes all the following condítíons ís executed cancel mode, the system enters the offset mode. Control duríng thís operatíon ís called start-up.
G41 0г G42 is contained in the block, or has been specífied to set thesystem enters the offset mode. Control during thís operatíon ís called start-up.
The offset number for tool nose radíus compensatíon ís not 00.
X or Z moves ís specífied ín the block and the move dístance is not zero.
A círcular command G02 0г G03 ís not allowed in start-up.
If specifíed, P/S alaгm PS34 will осcur. Two blocks are read in duríng start- up. The fírst blосk ís executed, and the second blосk ís entered into the tool nose radíus compensation buffer. In the síngle block mode, two blocks aгe read аnd the first block ís executed, then the machine stops.
In subsequent operatíons, two blocks are read ín advance, so the CNC has the block currently being executed, and the next two blocks.
inner side and outer side When аn angle of íntersectíon created by tool paths specified wíth move commands for two blосks is over 180 , ít ís referred to as ínner side.
When the angle ís between 00 and 180 , ít ís referred to as outer side.
lnner síde Outer side
Programmed path
Meaning of symbols The followíng symbols are used in subsequent fígures:
- S índícates a posítíon at whích a síngle block is executed once.
- SS indicates a positíon at which a síngle block is executed twíce.
- SSS indícates a posítion at whích a single block ís executed three times.
- L indícates that the tool moves along a straíght line.
- C índícates that the tool moves along an аrc.
- r índícates the tool nose radius compensatíon value.
- Àп íntersection ís a posítíon at whích the programmed paths of two blocks íntersect wíth each other after they аre shifted by r.
- índícates O the center of the tool nose radíus.
PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode, the tool moves
Tool Movement ín as íllustrated below start-up :
When ít is exceptíonal
End positíon for the arc If the end of a 1ine leadíng to an arc ís programmed as the end of the arc is not on the arc by místake as íllustrated below, the system assumes that tool nose radíus compensation has been executed wíth respect to an ímagínary circle that
has the same center as the arc and passes the specifíed end posítíon. Based
on thís assumption, the system creates a vector and carries out 1 compensatíon. The resultíng tool nose radíus center path ís dífferent from that created by applying tool nose radíus compensatíon to the programmed path in which the line leading to the агc ís consídered straíght.
COMPENSATΓON FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в
There ís no inner If the tool nose radíus compensatíon value is suffıcíently small, the two
íntersection círcular Tool nose radius center paths made after compensation íntersect
at a posítíon P . Intersectíon P may not occur if an excessívely large value is specífıed for tool nose radíus compensation. When this is predícted, P/S alaгm occurs at the end of the prevíous block and the tool ís stopped. In the example shown below, Tool nose radius center paths along ares A and B íntersect at P when a suffíciently small value ís
specífíed for tool nose radíus compensatíon. If an excessively large value ís specífied, this íntersection does not occuг.
Alaгm and the tod stops , When the tool nose radius compensatíon value is large
When the tool nose radius compensatíon value is small
Center of the arc B Ćenter of the arc A
Prograntmed path 
The center of the arc ís If the center of the aτc is ídentícal wíth the start posítíon oг end poínt, P/S  identical with the start a1aгm No. 038 ís dísplayed, and the tool wíll stop at the end positíon of position or the end the precedíng block. 
G42 Ríght side offset Left síde offset 
The offset dírectíon caп be changed in the offset mode. If the offset dírectíon ís changed іп a block, a vector ís generated at the intersectíon of the tool nose radíus center path of that block and the tool nose radíus center path of a precedíng block. However, the change ís not avaílable in the start-up block and the block following it.
COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03 
Temporary tooi nose If the following command ís specífied in the offset mode, the offset mode radíus compensation ís temporarily canceled then automatically restored. The offset mode can cancel he canceled and started as descńhed in Subsectíons aud
Specifying G28 If G28 is specified in the offset mode, the offset ınode is cаnceled at an
automatic return to the intermediate positíon. If the vector still remains after the tool is returned reference position in to the reference posítíon, the componerits of the vector are reset to zero the offset mode with respect to each axís along whích reference posítion return has been made.
Tool nose radíus The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the movíng directíon
compensation G code in in the previous biock, irrespectíve of machining inner or outer side, by the offset mode commanding the tool nose radíus compensation G code G41, G42 in the offset mode, independently. If this code ís specified in a círcular command, correct circular motíon will not be obtaíned. 
When the directíon of offset ís expected to be changed by the command of tool nose radius compensation G code G41, G42 , refer to Change in the offset dírectíon іп the offset mode 
Command cancelling the During offset mode, íf G50 ís commanded,the offset vector ís temporaríly offset vector temporalíty cancelled and thereafter offset mode is automatícally restored.
In this case, without movement of offset caпcel, the tool moves directly from the íntersectíng poínt to the commanded poínt where offset vector ís canceled. A1so when restored to offset mode, the tool moves to the íntersectíng poínt.
Workpíece coordínate system setting G50 
In this case, note that the CNC obtaíns ari íntersection of the tool path irrespectíve of whether inner oг outer síde machíníng is specifíed When an íntersecrion ís not obtaínable, the tool comes to the normal posítion to the previous block at the end of the prevíous block.
G40 Tool nose radius center path
lnierference Check checks for tool overcuttíng in advance. However, all interference cannot checked by this functíon. The ínterference check ís performed even if
overcuttíng does not occur.
Explanatíons
The direction of the tool nose radius path is different from that of the ínterference programmed path from 90 degrees to 270 ďegrees between these paths .
COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в 
2 In addítion to the conditíon 1 , the angle between the start poínt and end poínt on the Tool nose radíus center path ís quite different from that between the start point and end point on the programmed path ín círcular machíníng more than 180 degrees .
Tool compensatíon value corresponding to T1 : г 1 =
Tool compensatíon value corresponding to T2 : r2 =
In the above example, the arc in block N6 ís placed in the one quadrant.
But after tool nose radíus compensation, the arc ís placed ín the four quadrants.
PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
CorrectÍon of 1 Removal of the vector causíng the interference interference i n advance When tool nose radius compensatíon ís performed for blocks A, B and C and vectors V1, V2, V3 Vq between blocks A and B, and V5, V6, V7 and Vg between B and C are produced, the nearest vectors are checked fırst. If interference occurs, they are ígnored. But if the vectors to be ignored due to interference are the last vectors at the corner, they cannot be ígnored.
Check between vectors V4 and V5
InterferenceVд and V5 are ignored.
Check between V3 and V6
Interference V3 and V6 are ignored
Check between V2 and V7
Interference V2 and V7 are Ignored
Check between V1 and V8
Interference V1 and V8 are cannot be ignored
If while checkíng, a vector without interference is detected, subsequent vectors are not checked. If block B ís a circular movement, a linear movement ís produced if the vectors are ínterfered.

Machíníng an ínside When the radíus of a corner is smaller than the cutter radíus, because the corner at a radíus ínner offsettíng of the cutter wíll result in overcuttíngs, an alarm ís smaller than the tool dísplayed and the CNC stops at the start of the block. In síngle block nose radius operatíon, the overcuttíng ís generated because the tool is stopped after the block execution.
Machíning a groove Sínce the tool nose radius compensatíon forces the path of the center of smaller than the tool the tool to move in the reverse of the programmed direction, overcuttíng
nose radius will result. In this case an a1arm ís dísplayed and the CNC stops at the start
of the b1ьсk.
Aп alarm ís dísplayed and the
Too1 nose radius center path operatíon stops --y . г---
/
Programmed path /
\ /
Overcuttíng íf the opěratíon would not stop
240
в-sг4Øεıoз PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Machíning a step smaller When machíníng of the step ís commanded by circular machíníng in the
than the tool nose radíus case of a program contaíning a step smaller than the tool nose radius, the
path of the center of tool with the ordinary offset becomes reverse to the
programmed direction. In thís case, the fírst vector ís ígnored, and the tool
moves linearly to the second vector posítíon. The single block operatíon
is stopped at thís poínt. If the machining ís not in the síngle blосk mode,
the cycle operatíon ís contínued. If the step ís of linear, no alarm wi11 be
generated and cut correctly. However uncut part wí11 remain.
Línear movement Stop posítíon after executíon of a síngle
lock
S L Too1 nose radíus center path
The fírst vector ís ígnored
Pro rammed path
Cеnter ºf tłe circular
machіп ıng
wo іeεe :
An overcuttíng wí11 result if the fírst vector ís not ígnored.
However, tool moves 1inear1y.
In chamfering oг corner aтcs, tool nose radius compensatíon oп1y Ьe
Correctíon ín performed when an ordinary íntersection exists at the corner.
In offset cancel mode, a start-up Ь1осk oг when exchanging the offset
Chamferíng and
direction, compensatíon cannot be performed, aп P/S alaгm ís
Corner Ares dísplayed and the tool ís stopped.
In inner chamfeńng oг inner corner ares, íf the chamferíng value or corner
аrc value ís smaller than the tool nose radíus value, the tool is stopped wíth
an P/S alarm since overcuttíng wí11 осcur.
Too1 nose Too1 nose
Stopped Stopped
radius radíus
here here
center path center path
-е--- -- --
Programmed 4 Programmed
path path
The valid ínclinatíon angle of the programmed path in the blαks before
and after the corner is 1 degree or less so that the P/S a1aгm , 54
generated by the calculatíng error of tool nose radíus compensatíon does
not occur.
When thís angle ís 1 degree or 1ess, the alarm is not generated.
241
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
When machíníng area The following example shows a machíníng area whích cannot be cut
remaíns or an alarm ís suffícíently.
generated
1
İ
In inner chamfering, if the portion of the programmed path that ís not a
part of the chamferíng in the above fígure C1 0г P2 is in following
range, ínsuffíciently cut are wí11 exist.
0 C 1 or C2 г tan r : too nose radíus
Enlarged víew on the remainíng machíníng aгea
Although the tool should be posítíoned at 2 in the above fıgure, the tool
is posítioned at 1 the tool nose is tangent to line L .
Thus, агea 3 ís not machíned.
P/S alarm or 55 ís displayed ín the followíng cases :
Limit of programmed path with chamferíng / End point P2
- - ł
The alarm is dísP 1 Ya ed ι λ ı a t thı s path 1
N. ı ı λ Too1 nose center ath иıithout
P
l chamfering
.J
Too1 nose center path with chamferíng
Programmed І Too1 nose radíus
path j center path Start point
1
242
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
In outer chamfeńng with an offset, a límít is ímposed on the programmed
path. The path duńng chamfering coincides with the intersection points
P1 or P2 without chamfeńng, therefore, outer chamfeńng is limíted. In
the ŕıgure above, the end poínt of the tool center path wíth chamferíng
coíncides wíth the íntersectíon poínt P2 of the next block wíthout
chamfering. If the chamferíng value is more than the límít value
specífíed, P/S alarm 0г 55 wi11 be dísplayed.
Too1 nose radius compensatíon is not performed for commands input
lnput Command from from the MDI.
However, when automatic operation using absolute commands ís
MD1
temporańly stopped by the síngle block functíon, MDI operatíon ís
performed, then automatíc operatíon starts agaín, the tool path ís as
follows :
In this case, the vectors at the start posítíon of the next block are translated
and the other vectors are produced by the next two blocks. Therefore,
from next blαk but one, tool nose radíus compensation ís accurately
performed.
When position Pp, PB, and Pc are programmed in аn absolute commаnd,
tool ís stopped by the single block function after executíng the Ь1осk from
Pp to PB аnd the tool ís moved by MDl operation. Vectors VB1 and VB2
are translated to VB 1 and VB2 аnd offset vectors are recalculated for the
vectors VC1 and VC2 between block PB-Pς and PC-PD.
However, sínce vector VB2 ís not calculated again, compensatíon is
accurately performed from posítion Pς.
243
15. COMPENςAT10N FUNCTIUN PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/o3

General Precautions
for Offset Operations
Changíng the offset In general, the offset value ís changed in cancel mode, or when changíng
value tools. If the offset value ís changed ín offset mode, the vector at the end
poínt of the block ís calculated for the new offset value.
Calculated from offset Calculated from offset
value ín block N6 value ín block N7

/
/ N7 \
/ \
/ \
/ N1
\ \\
Programmed path
When some vectors aгe produced between blocks N6 and N7, the vector
at the end point of the present blocks ís calculated usíng the offset value
of the block N6.
The polarity of the offset When a negative offset value ís specífíed, the program is executed for the
amount and the tool fıgure whích is created by exchanging G41 for G42 0г G42 for G41 in the
nose center path process sheet.
A tool machining an iriner profile will machine the occuг profıle, and tool
machíníng the outer profıle wil1 machíne the ínner profıle.
An example ís shown below. In general, CNC machiníng ís programmed
assumíng a posítíve offset va1ue. When a program specífies a tool path
as shown in 1, the tool wi11 move as shown in 2 if a negatíve offset ís
specified. The tool in 2 wil1 move as shown ín 1 when the sígn of the offset
value is reserved.
Notes
When the sign of the offset va ue is reversed, the offset
vector of the tool nose is reversed but the imaginary too
nose direction does not change.
Therefore, do not reverse the sign of the offset va ue
when starting the rnachining rneeting the imaginary toπ
nose to the start point.
2Ø
в-s24Øεıoз PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION

G53, G28, G30, and When a G53 command ís executed in tool-típ radíus compensation
commands ín mode, the tool-típ radíus compensatíon vector ís automatícally
canceled before posítíoning, that vector beíng automatícally restored
tool-típ radíus
by a subsequent move command. The format for restoríng the tool-típ
compensatíon mode
radíus compensation vector ís the FS 16 type when bit 2 CCN of
parameter No. 5003 is set to 0, or the FS 15 type when the bít is set to
1.
When a G28, G30, oг command is executed in tool-tip radius
compensatíon mode, the tool-típ radíus compensation vector ís
automatícally canceled before automatic reference positíon return,
that vector being automatícally restored by a subsequent move
command. The timing and format for canceling and restoríng the
tool-tip radius compensation vector are the FS 15 type when bit 2
CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 1, oг the FS 16 type when the
bít is set to 0.
Explanatíons
G53 command ín tool-tip When a G53 command ís executed in tool-típ radius compensation mode,
radíus compensation a vector havíng a length equal to the offset is created, at the end of the
mode preceding block, perpendicular to the direction in which the tool moves.
When the tool moves to a specífıed positíon according to the G53
command, the offset vector ís cаnceled. When the tool moves accordíng
to the next commаnd, the offset vector ís automatícally restored.
The format for restoring the tool-tip radius compensation vector ís the
start-up type when bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 0, oг the
intersection vector type FS 15 type when the bit is set to 1.
G53 command in offset When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 0
mode
When bít 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 1
245
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в-s2a44εı0з
lncremental G53 When bít 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 0
command in offset mode
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 1
[FS15 type] a
r ф
r G00
O41 G00 Š //G00
G53 //
G53 command When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 0
specifying no movement
in offset mode ф. Start-up - - 1


r s G00
G00
s
G41 G00
G53
OØx ;
G90 G41_ ;
G00 X20. Y20. ;
G53 X20. Y20. ;
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 1
[FS15 type] s
ф._.
8 G00
G00
s
G41 G00
G53
246
8-62444E/o3 PROGRAMM 1NG 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Notes
1 When an axís not inciuded ín the tool-tip radius
compensation plane is specífied in a G53 command, a
vector perpendícular to the direction ín which the tool moves
is created at the end of the preceding biock and the tool
does not move. Offset mode ís automatically resumed from
the next block in the same way as when two or more blocks
specifying no movement are consecutívely executed .
Example
When bít 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 0
G53 Y_
Start-up
Ї .
--------ήг .
О41 G00 X_ Z_ S
г G00
G00
S G00 S
2 When a G53 command ís executed in tool-típ radíus
compensation mode when a11-axis machine lock ís appiied,
positioning is not performed for those axes to whích
machine lock ís applí d and the offset vector is not
canceled. When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set
to 0 or each-axis machine lock ís appIied, the offset vector
is canceled.
Example 1
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 0 and
a11-axís machine lock is applied
a
- -
1
г І / G00
І
s /
G41 G00 /Ї G00
G53 ї
Example 2
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 1 and
a11-axís machine lock ís applied
[FS15 type]
гі / s G00
/
/
G41 G00 /Ї G00
G53
247
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
Notes
Example 3
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 1 and
each-axis machíne lock is applied
[FS15 type]
Y
г
G41 G00 S .
G53
j
3 When a G53 command is specifíed as a start-up block, the
next block actually becomes the start-up block. When bit
2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 1, however, the next
block creates an intersection vector.
Example
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 0
.
G00
G00
4 When a compensation axis is specified in a G53 command
in tool-tip radius compensation mode, the vectors for other
compensatíon axes are also canceled. This also applies
when bít 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 1. The
FS15 cancels only the vector for the specifíed axis. Note
that the FS15 type cancellation differs from the actual FS15
specifícatíon ín this point.
Example
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 0
[FS15 type]
248
в-s2444ε10з PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
G28, G30, When a G28, G30, oг command ís executed in tool-tip radius
command ín tool-típ compensatíon mode, the operatíon specífıed in the command is
radíus compensatíon performed according to the FS 15 format if bít 2 CCN of parameter No.
mode 5003 is set to 1. An íntersection vector ís created at the end of the
preceding block and a perpendícular vector is created at the íntermedíate
posítíon. The offset vector is canceled when the tool moves from the
íntermedíate posítíon to the reference positíon. The offset vector is
restored as an íntersection veεtor by the next block.
G28, G30, oг When bít 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 0
command in offset mode lntermedíate positíon
Oxxxx ;
with movement to both
G91 041_ ; s G28/30/ s an intermediate position
and reference posítion G28 X40. ZO ;
performed
,
G42 G01 s
Reference posítion or floatíng
reference position
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 1
[FS15 type] lntermedíate posítíon
G28/30/ s
., s G01 .
,
.
.
s
G42 G01
Reference posítion or fioatíng
reference posítion
G28, G30, or When bit 2 CCN of paгameteг No. 5003 ís set to 0
command in offset mode
with movement to an Start-up
> >
intermediate posítion not
r
performed ,,.
G41 G01 s s 001
lntermediate position \ G00
Oxxxx ; G28/30/ s
G91 G41_ ;
Reference positíon or floating
G28 XO YO ; reference posítíon
249
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
When bít 2 CCN of paraIneter No. 5003 ís set to 1
Fs15 type]
s
s--. a
. .
. G41 G01 s G01
lntermedıate posıtıon , G00
G28/30/
s
Reference posítíon or
floating reference positíon
G28, G30, or When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 0
command ín offset mode
wíth movement to a Start-up
> reference position not
performed
Oxxxx ;
G91 G41 _ ;
G28/30/
G28 X40. Y-40. ;
s
Reference posítíon or floatíng reference
posítíon=lntermedíate posítion
When bít 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 1
FS15 type]
s s
,
І ѕ І
G41 G01 G01
І
G00
G28/30/\ >
,
Reference posítíon or floating reference
posítíon=lntermediate position
G28, G30, or When bít 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 0
command in offset mode
with no movement start-up G28/30/
a-
G41
Г і G01
s О0
Oxxxx ; 0
G91 G41_ ;
G28 X40. Y-40. ;
Reference position or floatíng reference
position=lntermedíate position
250
e-s24Øε/oз PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATЮN FUNCTION
Wherı bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 1
[FS15 type]
G28/30/
s-
G41 G01 -
-
s GO
0
GO
1
Reference posítíon or floating reference
position=lntermediate position
Notes
1 When an axis not included in the tool-tip radius
compensation plane is specifíed in a G28, G30, or
command, a vector perpendicular to the direction in which
the tool moves is created at the end of the preceding block
and the tool does not move. Offset mode is automatícally
resumed from the next block in the same way as when two
or more blocks specifying no movement are consecutively
executed .
Example
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 1
[FS15 type]
G28 30/
,
G01
s G01 s
251
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в-s2Ø4εıoз
Notes
2 When a G28, G30, or command ís executed when
a11-axís machine lock ís applied, a vector perpendicular to
the dírection in whích the tool moves ís created at the
intermediate position. 1n this case, the tool does not move
to the reference posítíon and the offset vector is not
canceled. When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set
to 0 or each-axís machine lock is applied, the offset vector
is canceled.
Example 1
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 1.
[FS15 type]
λ
G42 G01
G28
G01
G01

._ Reference posítíon or
s floatíng reference posítion
lntermedíate posítion
Example 2
When bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 is set to 0 and
a11-axis machine lock is applied
[FS15 type]

G42 G01
G28
1ь/, ı s G01
.
G01
_ г 1.
--- Š s Reference posítion or
lntermedíate positíon floatíng reference posítíon
3 When a G28, G30, or command is specified as a
start-up block, a vector perpendicular to the directíon in
which the tool moves is created at the intermediate position.
The vector is then canceled at the reference posítion. The
next block creates an intersection vector.
Example 1
When bít 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003 ís set to 1.
[FS15 type]
G01 s
s Go1
,
G42 G28 G01 ,
,
,

- Reference positíon oг
lntermedíate posítíon floating reference position
252
B-62444E/03 P ROG RAM M 1 NG 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Notes
4 When a compensatíon axis is specífied ín a G28, G30, or
command in tool-tip radius compensation mode, the
vectors for other compensation axes are also canceled.
This also applies when bit 2 CCN of parameter No. 5003
is set to 1. The FS15 cancels only the vector for the
specífied axís. Note that the FS15 type cancellatíon differs
from the actual FS15 specificatíon in this point.
[Fs15 type]
G2 Z lntermedíate Reference position or
position floating reference positíon
253
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING e-s2444εıoз
Duríng radíus compensation for the tool tip, corner circular-
ínterpolation, with the specífied compensation value used as the radius,
CORNER CIRCULAR
caл be performed by specífying G39 in offset mode.
1NTERPOLATION
FUNCTION G39
Format
1п offset mode, specífy
G39;
oг
G391_J_K_;.
Explanatíons
Corner Corner círcular-ínterpolatíon, wíth the specifıed compensation value
circuiar-interpolation used as a radíus, can be performed by specifying the operation as shown
above. Whether the tool moves clockwíse or counterclockwise depends
on whether the last-specifíed dírection code is G41 0г G42. G39 ís a
síngle-shot G code.
G39 wíthout 1, J, and K Specífyíng G39; creates a coгпeг arc for which the end vector ís
perpendicular to the start point of the next block.
G39 wíth 1, J, and K Specífying G39 I_J_K_; creates a corner arc for which the end vector is
perpendícular to the vector specifıed wíth I, J, and K.
Límítations
Move command A move operatíon cannot be specified in a block in whích G39 is
specífíed.
Non-move command T+vo oг moгe contiguous blocks with no move operations can not be
specified immediately after a block in which G39, without I, J, and K, ís
specífied. If a move command ís specifıed in a block with a move
distance of 0, ít ís assumed to be two or more contíguous blocks wíth no
more operarions. If those blocks are specífied, the offset vector
momentarily disappears аnd the system automatically returns to offset
mode.
254
в-s2aØε/oз PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Examples
G39 wíthout 1, J, and K
t1n offset mode x-axís
N1 ;
N2 G39 ;
N3 ;
ł Z-axis
B1ock N1 Offset vector
\
B1ock N2
10 0 , .0 0 І
B1ock N3
Program med
ł X path
/ Too1-típ center
path
ł
t
,
G39 with 1, J, and K
1n offset mode
X-axís N1 ;
N2 G39 ;
N3 ;
ł Z-axis
Offset vector
B1ock N1 1 B1ock N2
B1ock N3
Programmed
path
, \
1 , ... For lathes
\
х
\.
\ \ Tool-típ center path
N
N
\
\
\
\
\
\
, -1 e С,
255
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в-6г444εıoз
Too1 compensatíon values include tool geometry compensation
values and tool wear compensation Fíg. a .
TOOL COMPENSA-
Too1 compensatíon can be specífíed without dífferentiating compensatíon
T10N VALU ES, for tool geometry from that for tool wear.
NUMBER OF
Point on the program Point on the program
COMPENSATION
Ć
lmaginary too1 VALUES, AND
x aкis
ENTERING VALUES geometry Offset
offset FROM THE PROGRAM value on
value x axis
G10 I
x aкis ј -і 111
wear 1 Actual
offset 1 tool
value Z axis
Z axís
wear geometry ј Offset
offset offset value on
value value Z axis
Fíg. Dífference the Fíg. Ь Not dífference the
tool geometry offset from tool tool geometry offset from tool
wear offset wear offset
Too1 compensatíon values can be entered ínto CNC memory from the
CRT/MDI pаne1 see sectíon oг from a program.
A tool compensation va1ue ís selected from the CNC memory when the
correspondíng code ís specífíed after address T in a program.
The value ís used for tool offset or tool nose radíus compensatíon.
See subsec. П for detaíls.

Too1 Compensatíon
and Number of Too1
Compensatíon
Va1id range of tool TaЬ1e shows the valíd ínput range of tool compensatíon values.
compensation values
Tab1e Va1íd range of tool compensatíon values
Increment system Too1 compensatlon value
Metrlc Input mm lnch lnput lnch
1S-B to to inch
1S-c to to
mm inch
The maxímum tool wear compensatíon cаn Ьe changed by settíng
parameter
Number of tool The memorу caп hold 16, 32, 64, oг 99 tool compensatíon values.
compensation
Notes
With the two-path control, the number of specified tool
compensatíon values equals the number of tool
compensatíons for each tool post.
256
PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION B-6244дE/03
Offset values can Ьe input by a program using the followíng command :
Changing of Too1
Offset value
Programrrable Data
lnput G10
Format
G10 P_ X_ Y_ Z_ P_ Q_ ;
or
G10P_U_V_W_C_Q_;
P : Offset number
0 : Command of work coordinate system shift value
1-64 : Command of tool wear offset va1ue
Command va1ue is offset number
10000+ 1-64 : Comrnand of tool geometry offset value
1-64 : Offset number
X: Offset value on X axis absolute
Y: Offset value on Y axis absolute
Z: Offset value on Z axis absolute
U: Offset va1ue on X axis incremental
V: Offset va1ue on Y axis íncramentai
W: Offset va1ue on Z axís incremental
R: Too1 nose radíus offset va1ue absolute
R: Too1 nose radius offset va1ue incremental
Q: lmagínary tool nose number
In an absolute command, the values specífíed in addresses X, Y, Z, and
R aгe set as the offset va1ue corresponding to the offset number specifíed
Ьy address P. In an incremental commаnd, the va1ue specified in
addresses U, V, W, and C is added to the current offset va1ue
corresponding to the offset number.
Notes
Notes
1 Addresses X, Y, Z, U, V, and W can be specified in the same
block.
2 Use of this command in a program allows the tool to
advance little by 1ittle. This command can afso be used input
offset values one at a time from a program by specifying thís
command successiveiy instead of inputting these values
one at a time from the MD1 unit.
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING e-sгØ4εıoз
When a tool ís moved to the measurement position by execution of a
command given to the CNC, the CNC automatically measures the
AUTOMATIC TOOL
dífference between the current coordínate value and the coordínate va1ue
OFFSET G36, G37 of the command measurement position and uses it as the offset va1ue for
the too1. When the tool has been already offset, it is moved to the
measurement posítíon with that offset value. If the CNC judges that
further offset ís needed after calculatíng the dífference between the
coordínate values of the measurement position and the commanded
coordínate values, the current offset value is further offset.
Refer to the instruction manuals of the machíne tool buílder for details.
Explanations
Coordinate system When movíng the tool to a positíon for measurement, the coordinate
system must be set in advance. The work coordinate system for
programmíng ís used in common.
Movement to A movement to a measurement positíon ís performed by specífyíng as
measurement posítion follows ín the MDI, or MEM mode :
G36 Xxa ; oг G37 Zza ;
In thís case, the measurement positíon should be xa or za absolute
command .
Execution of this commаnd moves the tool at the rapíd traverse rate
toward the measurement posítion, lowers the feedrate halfway, then
contínues to move it untíl the approach end sígnal from the measuríng
ínstrument ís issued. When the tool típ reaches the measurement positíon,
the measuríng ínstrument outputs the measurement positíon reach sígnal
to the CNC whích stops the too1.
Offset The current tool offset va1ue ís further offset by the dífference between the
coordínate value a oг 3 when the tool has reached the measurement
position аnd the va1ue of xa or Za specífied in G36Xxa or G37Zza.
Offset value x= Current offset value x+ a-xa
Offset value z= Current offset value z+ β-zа
xa : Programmed X-axis measurement poínt
Za : Programmed Z-axís measurement poínt
These offset values caп also be altered from the MDI keyboard.
PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION B-62444E/03
Feedrate and alarm The too1, when movíng from the stating position toward the measurement
posítíon predícted by xa or Za fl G36 0г G37, ís fed at the rapid traverse
rate across area A. Then the tool stops at poínt T Ха γX oг Zã γz and
moves at the measurement feedrate set by parameter across
areas B, C, and D. If the approach end sígnal turns on during movement
across area B, a1aгm ís generated. If the approach end signal does not turn
on before poínt V, and tool stops at point V and P/S a1aгm ís
generated.
Predicted measurement posítion
Sτartíng position
FR : Rapid traverse rate
FP : Measurement feedrate set by parameter
Fí Feedrate and A1arm
Examples
Too1 number T1 , 50
300
Programmed
zero point
Z-axis measurement
position
100
Offset value Offset value
Before measurement After measurement
X

G50 ; Programmíng of absolute zero point
Coordínate system settíng
SO1 M03 T0101 ; Specifıes tool T1, offset number 1, and spindle
revolutíon
G36 ; Moves to the measurement posítíon
If the tool has reached the measurement posítíon
at ; sínce the correct measurement
posítíon ís 200 mm, the offset value ís altered by

G00 ; Refracts a little along the X axís.
259
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в-s24лaE/o3
G37 ; Moves to the Z-axis measurement posítíon.
If the tool has reached the measurement positíon
at , the offset value ís altered by
м.
T0101 ; Further offsets by the difference.
The new offset va1ue becomes valid when the T
code is specifıed agaín.
Notes
1 When there ìs no T code command before G36 or G37, P/S alarm ís generated.
2 When a T code is specified in the same block as G36 or G37, P/S alarm is generated.
3 Measurement speed Fp , y, and ε, are set as parameters Fp : , y: ,
: by machíne tool builder. ε must be positive numbers so that y>ε.
4 Cancel the tool nose radius compensation before G36, G37.
5 When a manual movement ís inserted into a movement at a measurement feedrate, return the
tool to the posítion before the inserted manual movement for restart.
6 When using the optional tool nose radius compensation function, the tool offset amount is
determined considering the va1ue of tool nose R. Make sure that tool nose radius vaíue is set
correctly.
Example When the tool nose center coincides with the start point.
Movemenτ coínsidering
tool nose radius va1ue
Too1 nose radíus va1ue
Measurement posítion
The tool actually moves from point A to point B, but the tool offset va1ue is determined assuming
that the tooi moves to point C considering the tool nose radius va1ue.
260
в-624Øεıoз PROGRAMMING 15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Wıth the coordínate rotatíon functïon, it is possíble to a fıgure
specífied in a program. For example, a program that produces patterns
COORDINATE
of a fıgure rotated at increasíngly larger angles can be created as a pair of
ROTATION , subprograms, one of which defınes a fıgure, the other of whích calls the
fıgure defØition subprogram Ьy specifying rotation. Thís method ís
useful for reducing the program development time and the size of the
program.
Format
G17
G18 a_ β_ R_ ; Starts rotating the coordinates
G19
Coordínate rotation mode
the coordínates are rotated
; Cancels coordinate rotation
G17 G18 or G19
Selects a plane where the figure to be rotated is
a, 3 :
Specify two coordinates frum among X, Y, and Z of the rotation cen-
ter that match G17, G18, and G19. The values specified as the coor-
dínates uf the rotation center must always be absolute values.
R:
Specifies the rotatíon angle as an absolute value. Counterclockwise
rotation is assumed to be positive. However, setting bít 0 R1N of
parameter No. 5400 enables the use of an incremental va1ue.
lncremerıtal units of the angle: degrees
Specifiable range: -360,000 to ,000
х.І
Rotation angle R incremental value
Rotatíon
Rotation anä1e R absolute value center
а,
> Z
261
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 8-62444εıo3
Explanatíons
P1ane selectíon G code, P1ane selectíon G code G17, G18, oг G19 can be specifíed in a block
G17, G18, or G19 ahead of the coordínate rotatíon G code Do not specífy G17,
G18, oг G19 іл coordinate rotation mode.
Rotation center If the rotatíon center a_, βЈ ís not specifíed, the locatíon of the tool when
ís íssued ís assumed as the rotatíon center.
Rotation angle command If the rotatíon angle command RJ ís not specífied, the value specífied
іп parameter No. 5410 ís used as the rotatíon angle.
Coordínate rotation The coordinate rotation cаncel G code caп be specífıed in the
cancel same block as other commands.
Too1 compensatíon Too1 compensatíon, such as tool offset or tool nose radius compensation,
ís processed after coordinate rotatíon ís performed for a program defming
a figure.
can Ьe used in eíther G00 0г GO1 mode.
Límitatíons
Reference posítíon A reference posítion return commаnd G27, G28, G29, or G30 can Ьe
return issued on1y in mode.
Changes to coordínates Do not attempt to change coordínates in mode commands such as
G50, G54 to G59, and the tool offset commаnd .
Canned cycles Coordínate rotatíon cannot be used in símple canned cycles, multíple
repetítíve canned cycles, oг cаnned drillíng cycles.
lncremental command Always use absolute values in a move command that immedíately follows
the coordinate rotatíon commаnd oг coordinate rotatíon cаncel
command Specífyíng an íncremental value results in the move
command failing to operate normally.
262
15. COMPENSATION FUNCTION B-62444E/o3 PROGRAMMING
Examples
Too1 nose radíus and and can be specified duríng tool nose radíus coØpensatíon,
coordinate rotatíon provided that the coordinate rotation p1ane coincides with the tool nose
radïus compensatíon p1ane.
N1 G50 XO ZO GO1 ;
N2 G42 X1000 Z1000 F1000 T0101 ;
N3 G68 R-30000;
N4 Z3000 ;
N5 G03 U1000 R1000 ;
N6 G01 Z1000 ;
N7 U-1000 ;
N8 G40 XO ZO ;
Program before rotation
. ,
, . Program aŕter rotatíon
0, 0
Tooi path
г
263
95. COMPENSATlβN f=UNCTION PRCGRAмNıiNG В-sгØØε/oз
Repetítíııe Coordínate Coordinate rotatíon can be repeated by calling a regístered subprogram
rotatíon more than once, but wíth íncreasíngly greater rotatíon angles.
Set bit 0 R1N of parameter No. 5400 to 1 to specify the rotation angle
as beíng íncremental. G code A, radius programmíng along the X-axís
G50 XO ZO G18 ;
G01 F200 T0101 ;
M98 F2100 ;
M98 P220Ω L7 ;
G00 XO 7,0 M30 ;
02200;
XO ZO R45. ;
G90 M98 Р21Ω0 ;
M99 ;
C12100 ;
GO1 G42 ZO ;
X-10.Ω ;
;
G40 М99 ;
Рrogrammød tool path
y-
0 1 , 0 ;
l бo1 path with an
0, offset
º
---- ----
subprogram
,
i
264
8-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
6 СUSTOMMAСRo
1
Although subprograms aгe useful for repeatíng the same operatíon, the
custom macro function also allows use of variables, ańthmetíc and logíc
operatíons, and conditional branches for easy development of general
programs such as pocketirig and user-defíned canned machíning
program can caU a custom macro with a símple comrnand, just líke a
subprogram.
Machining program Custom macro
00001 ; 09010 ;
1= 18/2 ;
G01 X 1 Z 1 ;
G02 X 1 Z- 1 R 1 ;
G65 P9010 L2 ;
M30; M99 ;


265
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING в-6гaa4ε]Оз
An ordinary machíníng program specifıes a G code and the travel distance
directly with a numeríc va1ue; examples are G100 and
VARIABLES
Wıth a custom macro, numeric values can be specífied directly or using
a variable number. When a varíable number ís used, the varíable value
can be changed by a program or using operatíons on the MDI pаnc1.
1= 2 ;
G01 X 1 ;
Explanatíon
Varíable representation When specifying a varíable, specify a number sígn followed by a
variable number. Personal computers a11ow a name to be assigned to a
varíable, but this capabílity ís not avaílable for custom macros.
Exaınple: 1
An expressíon can be used to specífy a varíable number. In such a case,
the expression must be enclosed ín brackets.
Example: [ 1+ 2-12]
Types of variables Varíables аre classifíed ínto four types by varíablc number.
TaЬ1e Týpes of varlables
,
Varlable 7ýpe of Functlon
number variable
0 Always Thís variable ís always nu11. No va1ue can be
nu11 assígned to this varíable.
1 - Ø3 Loca1 Loca1 varíables can only be used wíthin a
İ variables macro to hold data such as the results of op-
eratíons. When the power ís turned off, 1oca1
varíables are ínítíalízed to nu11. When a macгo
ís called, arguments are assígned to 1oca1 varí-
ables.
100 - 149 Common Common varíables can be shared among dif-
199 variables ferent macro programs. When the power ís
turned off, variables 100 to 149 are ínitial-
500 - 531 ized to nu11. Variables 500 to 531 hold data
999 even when the power is turned off. As aп op-
tíon, common variables 150 to 199 and
532 to 999 are also available. However,
when these values are using, the length of the
tape that can be used for storage decreases
by m.
1000 - System system variables are used to read and wríte a
varíables varíety of NC data ítems such as the current
posítíon and tool compensation values.
Notes
Common variables 150 to 199 and 532 to 999 are
optíonal.
266
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Range of variable values Loca1 and common vańables can have value 0 0г a va1ue ín the followíng
ranges :
-1047 to -10 29
0
to
If the result of calculation turns out to be ínvalid, aп P/S alarm No. 111
is issued.
Omíssíon of the decímal When a vańable value ís defıned in a program, the decímal point can be
po ί nt omítted.
Example:
When 1=123; ís defined, the actual value of varíable 1 ís

Referencíng varíables To reference the value of a vańable in a program, specífy a word address
followed by the vańable number. When aп expressíon ís used to specify
a vańable, enclose the expressíon in brackets.
Example: GO1X[ 1+ 2]F 3;
A referenced vańable value ís automatícally rounded according to the
least input increment of the address.
Ì
Example:
When GOOX 1; is executed on a 1/1000-mm CNC with
assigned to variable 1, the actual command is ínterpreted as
;.
To reverse the sign of a referenced vańable value, prefix a minus sign -
to .
Example: GOOX- 1;
When an undefined varíable ís referenced, the vańable is ígnored up to an
address word.
Example:
When the value of varíable 1 ís 0, and the value of variable 2 is
nu11, execution of GOOX 1Z 2; results ín GOOXO;.
Undefined variable When the value of a variable ís not defıned, such a vańable ís referred to
as a null vańable. Vańable Ø is always a nu11 varíable. It cannot be
wńtten to, but it can be read.
a Quotation
When an undefıned variable ís quotated, the address ítself is also
ígnored.

When 1 = < vacant > When 1 = 0
090 X100 Y 1 090 X100 Y 1
1 1
G90 X100 G90 X100 YO
1

267
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03
b Operatíon
< vacant > is the same as 0 except when replaced by < vacant>
When 1 = < vacant > When 1 = 0
2= 1 2= 1
1 1
2 = < vacant > 2 = 0
2 = 1 5 2 = 1 5
1 1
2=0 2=0
2 = 1+ 1 2 = 1 + 1
1 1
2=0 2=0
c Conditional expressions
< vacant > differs from 0 on1y for EQ and NE.
When 1 = < vacant > When 1 = 0
1 EQ 0 1 EQ 0
1 1
Establíshed Not estabfshed
1 NE 0 1 NE 0 1
1 1
Establíshed Not established
i
1 GE 0 1 GE 0
1 1
Establíshed Establíshed
1 GT 0 1 GT 0
1 1
Not established Not estabGshed
Custom macro varíables Wíth the two-path control, macro varíables are províded for each tool
common to tool posts post. specifying parameter and 6037 allows some of the
two-path control common vańables to be used for all tool posts.
1
,
268
8-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Dísplayíng variable
values Гх
VARIABLE 01234 N12345
N0. DATA N0. DATA
100 108
101 109
102 110
103 111
104 112
105 113
106 114
107 115
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
X Y
z B
MEM эгв: эг.εэг г.и 18:42:15
[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ OPR [ [ OPRT ]
\
When the value of a vańable ís blank, the varíable ís nuU.
The mark índicates an overflow when the absolute
value of a variable is greater than 99999999 oг aп underflow when
the absolute value of a vańable ís less than 0.0000001 .
Limitations Program numbers, sequence numbers, and optíonal block skíp numbers
cannot be referenced usíng vańables.
Example:
Variables cannot be used in the following ways:
Ø1;
/;
;
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING e-624Øεı03
System vańables can be used to read and wríte internal NC data such as
tool compensatíon values and current position data. Note, however, that
SYSTEM VARIABLES
some system vańables can only be read. System vańables aгe essential
for automatíon and general-purpose program development.
Explanatíons
lnterface signals Sígnals can be exchanged between the programmable machíne controller
PMC and custom macros.
Tab1e System varlables for lnterface slgnals
varlable Function
number
1000- 1015 A 16-bit signal can be sent from the PMC to a custom
1032 macro. Varíables 1000 to 1015 aгe used to read a sig-
na1 bit by bít. Varíable 1032 is used to read a11 16 bíts of
a sígnal at one tíme.
1100- 1115 A 16-bít sígnal can be sent from a custom macro to the
1132 PMC. Varíables 1100 to 1115 aгe used to wríte a sígnal
bit Ьy bit. Varíable 1132 ís used to wríte a11 16 bíts of a
sígnal at one tíme.
1133 Varíable 1133 is used to write a1132 bíts of a signal at one
tíme from a custom macro to the PMC.
Note, that values from -99999999 to caп be
used for 1133.
For detailed informatíon, refer to the connection manual B-62443E-1 .
Too1 compensatíon When the system does not differentíate tool geometry compensatíon from
values tool wear compensatíon, use vańable numbers for wear compensatíon.
Tab1e Ѕyѕtem varlables for tool compensatlon memory C
X axls Z axls Too1 nose radius Y axls
compensatlon compensatlon compensatlon 1ma 1na compensatlon
Compensation value value value too9noØ va1ue
number posltlon T
βeome- Geome- Geome- Geome-
Wear try Wear y Wear try Wear t
ry
1 2001 2701 2101 2801 2201 2901 2301 2401 2451
49 . 2749 . 2849 . . . 2449 2499
64 2064 2164 2264 2964 2364
Tab1e system varlables for 99 tool compensatlon values
x axls Z axls Too1 nose radlus Y axls
compensatlon compensatlon compensetlon 1ma 1пa compensatlon
Compensatlon value value value toognosé va1ue
number posltlon T
Geome- Оeome- Geome- Geome-
Wear try Wear try Wear try Wear тгу
1 10001 15001 11001 12001 12001 17001 13001 14001 19001
99 10099 15099 11099 12099 12099 17099 13099 14099 19099
270
a-62ØaE/o3 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Note
System variabies 2001 to 2964 can also be used to
determine Y-axis wear or geometry compensation values
No. 1 to 49, X-axis or Z-axis geometry compensation
values No. 1 to 49, and other compensation values No. 1 to
64.
e Macro alarms
Tab1e System varíable for macro alarms
Variabie Function
number
30 0 When a value from 0 to 200 is assigned to variable 3000,
the CNC stops wíth an alarm. Atter an expression, an aiarm
message not longer than 26 characters can be described.
The CRT screen displays a1arm numbers Ьy addíng 3000 to
the value in variable 3000 along with an a1arm message.
Exainple:
3000=1 TOOL NOT FOUND ;
The aların screen dísplays 3001 TOOL NOT FOUND.
Tіme ínformatíon Time information caп be read and wńtten.
Tabie System varlabies for time information
Varíabie Function
number
3001 This variable functions as a timer that cuunts in 1- millisвcond
íncrements at a11 times. When the power ís turned on, the
value of this varìable is reset to O. When 2147483648 mi11i-
seconds is reached, the va1ue of thís timer returns to O.
3002 This variable functions as a timer that counts in 1-hour incre-
ments when the cycle start lamp is oп. This timer preserves
its value even when the power ís turned ott. When
hours is reached, the va1ue of this timer returns
to O.
Ø011 Thís variable can be used to read the current date year/
month/day . Year/month/day ínformatíon ís converted 4o an
apparent decimal number. For example, March 28, 1993 is
represented as 19930328.
3012 This variable can bº used to read the current time hourѕ/min
utes/seconds . Hcurs/minutes/seconds information ís con-
verted to an apparent decimal number. For example, 34 min-
utes and 56 seconds aftε г ís represented as 153456.
--- 2; --
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-62Ø4E/03
e AutomØtic operatíon The control state of automatic operation can be changed.
contral Tab1e System varlable 3003 for automatic operatía control
3003 singie block Completíon of an auxíliary
functíon
0 Enabled T be awai;ed
1 Dísabled To Ьe awaited
2 Enabied Not to be awaíted
3 Disabled Not to be awaíted
When the power is turned on, the value of thís variable is О.
When síngle block stop ís dísabled, single block stop operatíon ís not
performed even íf the síngle block swítch is set to ON.
When a waít for the completíon of auxilíary functíons M, S, and T
functions is not specifıed, program execution proceeds to the next
block before completion of auxiliary functions. A1so, distribution
completíon signal DEN is not output.
Tab1e system varlable 3004 for automatic operation control
3004 Feed hold Feedrate Overrlde Exact stop
0 Enabled Enabled Enab1ed
ı Dísabled Enabled Enabled
2 Enabled Dísabled Enabled
3 Disabled Disabled Enabled
4 Enabled Enabled Disabled
5 Disabled Enab1ed Dísabled
6 Enabled Dísabled Disabled
7 Dísabled Dísabled Dísabled
When the power is turned on, the value of this vańable ís О.
When feed hold is disabled:
1 When the feed hold button ís held down, the machine stops ín the
síngle block stop mode. However, sйgle block stop operatíon is
not performed when the síngle block mode ís dísabled with
variable 3003.
2 When the feed hold button ís pressed then released, the feed hold
lamp comes on, but the machine does not stop; program executíon
contínues and the machíne stops at the fírst block where feed hold
is enabled.
When feedrate override ís dísabled, an override of 100 ís always
applied regardless of the setting of the feedrate override swítch on the
machíne operator s pane1.
When exact stop check is dísabled, no exact stop check position
check ís made even in blocks including those which do not perform
cuttíng.
272
B 62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Settíngs settíngs can be read and written. Binary values are converted to decímals.
30J5
15 14 13 12 11 10 G a
Setti ng Γ έ=Ćv
_ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o
- - Setting - ` 1: јC -- TVC
9 FCVL Whether to use the FS15 tape format conversion capabi ity
5 SEQ Whether to automatica y irısert sequence numbers
2 1N1 Mi1 imeter input or inch input
1 SO Whether to use F P, or 1S0 as the output code
0 TVC : Whether to make a TV ch2ck
Mirror ímage The mírror-ímage status for each axís set usíng an external switch or
settíng operation can Ьe read through the output sígnal mírror-image
check signal . The mirror-ímage status present at that time can Ьe
checked. See Sectíon in III.
The value obtaíned in bínary ís converted ínto decіmal notatíon.
3007
7 6 5 4 Ø 2 1 Ø
settíng 8th axís 7th axis 6th axís 5th axís 4th axís 3th axis 2th axis 1th axis
_
Γ 0 rnirror-image function is disab ed
For each bit, oг - is indicated.
L 1 mirror-image function is øпaЬ ed J
Examplε : f 3007 is 3, the mirror-image function is onabied for the first and s cond
When the mirror-image functíon is set for a certain axís by both the
mirror-image sígnal and setting, the sígnal value and settíng value are
ORed and then output.
When mírror-ímage signals for axes other than the controlled axes are
turned oп, they are stí11 read into system variable 3007.
System vańable 3007 ís a write-protected system varíable. If an
attempt is made to wńte data in the vańable, P/S 116 a1aгm WRITE
PROTECTED VARIABLE ís íssued.
Number of machined The number target number of parts requíred and the number completíon
parts number of machíned parts cаn be read and wrítten.
Tab1e System varíables for the number of parts rεкtufred and the
number of machlned pгrts
VarCabie nunıber Functíon
3901 Number of machined parts comp etion number
3902 Number oŕ required parts target number
273
1 ;. CL1ST0М МA,CFšC? PROGRAMMING 8-624ØE/π3
Notes
Do not substitute a negative va1ue.
McıdO nformation Moda1 informatíon specified in blocks up to the ímmedíately preceding
block can be read.
Tab1e ãystem ыartabies for modai informatlon
Variatıie Functicn
number
400; G00, G01, G02, CO3, G33, G34 Group 01
4002 G96, G97 Group 02
4003 Group 03
4004 G68, G69 Group 04
4005 G98, G99 Group 05
4006 G20, G21 Group 06
4007 G40, G41, G42 Group 07
4008 G25, G26 Group 08
4009 G22, G23 Groııp 09
4010 G80 - G89 Group 10
4011 Group 11
4012 G66, G67 Group 12
4014 G54-G59 Group 14
4015 Group 1 5
4016 G17 - G19 Group 1 E
4022 Group 22
4109 F code
4113 M code
4114 sequence number
4115 Program number
4119 S code
4120 T code

Еxaτпple:
When 1= 4001; ís executed, the resultíng value ín 1 ís 0,1, 2, 3,
or 33.
When a modal ínformation readíng system vańable correspondíng to a G
code group whích cannot Ьe used ís specífied, a P/S a1aгm is íssued.
я Current р sıtïon Position information cannot be wńtten but can Ьe read.
Tab1e system varlables for posltlon lnformatiorı
. --mτ-
varlabie Posltion Coordinate Too1 oom- i fiead
number lnformatíon system pensatlon operatIon
ı vafue during
ımovement
5001- 5008 B1ock end poin t Workpíece Not Enabled
coordinate inciuded
system
5021- 5028 Currentpositíon Machine 1ncluded Dísabied
coordinate
system
5041- 5048 Current position Workpieco
_ coordınate --------.---
5061- 5068 Skίp signal posítion ı system Enabled
274
8-62444E/û3 PROGRAMM 1NG 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Tab1e system varlables for posltion lnformation
Variable Posítíon Coordlnate Tooі com- Read
number lnformatlon system pensatìon operatíon
value duríng
movement
5081, 5082 Too1 offset vafue j Disabled
__________
5101- 5108 Deviated servo
posítíon
The first dígit from 1 to 8 represents an axis number.
The tool offset value currently used for execution rather than the
immedíately preceding tool offset value ís held in varíables 5081 to
5088.
Tńe tool position where the skíp signal is turned on in a G31 skíp
functíon block is held in vańables 5061 to 5068. When the skip
sígnal is not turned on in a 631 block, the end poínt of the specífied
block is held in these vańables.
When read duríng movement is disabled, this means that expected
values cannot Ьe read due to the bufferíng preread functíon.
Workpíece coordínate Workpiece zeio poínt offset values can be read and wńtten.
system compensatíon
Tab1e system varíabies for workpiece zero polnt offset vaiues
values workpíece zero
point offset values Varíabíe Functáon
number
5201 First-axis external workpiece zero point offset value
5208 Eíghth-axis external workpiece aero point offset value
5221 First-axis G54 workpiece zero point offset value
5228 Eighth-axïs G54 workpiece zero point offset value
5241 First-axis G55 workpiece zero point offset value
5248 Eighth-axís G55 workpie,^e zero poínt offset valu
5261 First-axis G5β workpíecв zero point offset value
5268 Eighth-axis G56 workpiece zero point offset value
5281 First-axis G57 workpiыce zero poínt offset va1ue
5288 Eighth-axìs G57 woгlφiecв zero point offset vafue
5301 First-axis G58 workpiece zero point offset va1ue
5308 Eighth-axis G58 workpiece zero point offset va1ue
5321 Fiıst-axıs G59 workaaíыce zero point ofiset value
5328 Fighth-axós G59 workpíece zero point offset vaIue t
Notes
Tπ u5e variables 5201 to 5328, the workpiece coordinate
system option is necessary.
25 ---
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING e-62Øaε 03
The operations listed іп Tab1e 163 a caп be performed on variables. The
expression to the ríght of the operator can contaín constants arid/or
ARITHMETIC AND
varíables combined Ьy a function oг operator. Variables j and K in an
LOG1C OPERATION expressíon can be replaced with a constant. Variables on the left can also
be replaced with an expression.
Tabie Arithmetic and logic operatlon
Function Format Remarks
Definition i= j
Sum i= j+ k;
Difference i= j- k;
Product i= j k;
Quotient i= j/ k;
Sinø i=S1N[ j]; An angle is specified in de-
grees. 90 degrees and 30
Cosine i=COS[ j]; minutes is represented as
Tangent i=TAN[ j]; degrees.
Arctangent i=ATAN[ jJ/[ k];
Square root i=SQRT[ j];
AbsoIute value i=ABs[ jj;
Rounding off i=ROUND[ j];
Rounding down i=FiX[ j];
Roundìng up i=FUP[ jj;
OR i= j OR k; A logical operation is per-
for ііad oп binary numbers
XOR ì= j XOR k; bít by bit.
AND i= j AND k;
Conversion from BCD to B1N i=B1N[ j]; Used for sigrıal exchangs
Conversiorı from B1N to BCD i=BCD[ j]; to and from the PMC
Explanatíüns
Angie uıtíts The ınits of angies used with the SIN, COS. TAN, aiid ATAN functions
are degrees. For example, 90 degrees and 30 minutes is represented as
degrees.
ATAN function After the ATAN function, specify the lengths of two sides separatcd by
a slash. A result ís found where 0 result < 360.
Exaіпple :
When 1=ATAN[1]/[-1 j, the value of І is
ROUND functíon When the ROUND function is included in an aríthmetíc or logie
operatïon command, IF statement, or WHILE statement, the ROUND
ftinction rounds off at the first decimal place.
Examрle:
When 1=ROUND[ 2]; ís executed where 2 holds , the
value of ыarіaЫe 1 ís
276
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
When the ROUND function ís used in NC statement addresses, the
ROUND functíon rounds off the specífíed value accordíng to the least
ínput íncrement of the address.
Example:
Creatíon of a dríllíng program that cuts according to the values
of variables 1 and 2, then returns to the orígínal positíon
Suppose that the íncrement system is 1/1000 mm, variable 1
holds , and variable 2 holds Then,
G00 G91 X- 1; Moves mm.
GO1 X- 2 F300; Moves mm.
G00 X[ 1+ 2];
Sínce + = , the travel distance is ,
whích
does not return the tool to the orígínal posítíon.
This difference comes from whether addítion ís performed before
or after гоuпdіng оІТ. GOOX-[ROUND[ 1]+ROUND [ 2]] must be
specified to return the tool to the oríginal position.
Roundíng up and down With CNC, when the absolute value of the ínteger produced by an
to an ínteger operatíon on a number ís greater than the absolute value of the original
number, such an operatíon ís referred to as roundíng up to an ínteger.
Conversely, when the absolute value of the ínteger produced by an
operatíon oп a number ís less than the absolute value of the orígínal
number, such an operation ís referred to as rounding down to an ínteger.
Be partícularly careful when handling negative numbers.
Example:
Suppose that and
When 3=FUP[ 1] is executed, is assigned to 3.
When 3=FIX[ 1] ís executed, is assigned to 3.
When 3=FUP[ 2] is executed, ís assígned to 3.
When 3=FIX[ 2] is executed, ís assigned to 3.
Abbrevíatíons of When a functíon ís specífíed ín a program, the fírst two characters of the
aríthmetiz and logíc function name can be used to specífy the function.
operatíon commands
Example:
ROUND - RO
FIX - FI
Príoríty of operatíons 1 Functions
2 Operatíons such as multiplicatíon and divísíon , /, AND, MOD
3 Operatíons such as addítion and subtractíon +, -, OR, XOR
I
Example 1= 2+ 3 S1N[Ø];
η
1
2
ι .
Y
3
1 , 2 , and 3 índícate the order of operatíons.
277
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING 8-624ØE/03
Bracket nestíng Brackets are used to change the order of operatíons. Brackets can be used
to a depth of fıve 1evels íncludíng the brackets used to enclose a function.
When a depth of fıve 1evels is exceeded, alarm No. 118 occurs.
Example 1=s1N [ [ [ 2+ 3] 4 + 5] 6] ;
-- J
1
` 2
r
3
4
5
1 to 5 indicate the order of operations.
Límitatíons
Brackets Brackets [, ] are used to enclose an expressíon. Note that parentheses
are used for comments.
Operatíon error Erгors may occur when operatíons are performed.
TaЬ1e Errors 1nvolved 1n operatlons
Operation Average Maximum 7ype of error
eггoг error
a= b c ReIative error 1
a= Ь/ c ıo ε
з.7зx10-º b
a=
a= b+ c 2
a=Ь-c Mın b c
a= S1N [ b] Abs0lute eггoг 3
a=cOs[b]
ı ε ı de g rees
a= ATAN [ b]/[ c] 4
Notes
1. The reiative error depends on the result of the operatíon.
2. Smaller of the two types of errors is used.
3. The absolute error ís constant, regardless of the result of
the operation.
4. Functíon TAN performs S[N/COS.
278
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
The precísíon of varíable values ís about 8 decimal dígíts. When very
large nuınbers are handled ín an additíon or subtractíon, the expected
results may not be obtained.
Example:
When an attempt is made to assiØ the following values to
variables 1 and 2:
1 =987654321 Н

the values of the variables become:

2=98765433000Π
In thís case, when 3= 2- 1; is calculated, results.
The actual result of thís calculatioii is slightly dífferent because
ít ís performed in bíıτary.
A1so Ьe aware of errors that can result froτn conditional expressíons
using EQ, NE, GE, GT, LE, and LT.
Example:
IF[ 1 EQ 21 is effected by errors ín both 1 and 2, possibly
resultíng іп an incorrect decision.
1 ńerefυre, instead find the dıfifierence between tlıe two ariables
wíth IF[ABS[ 1- 2]].
Then, assume that the values of the two varíables are equal when
the díff erence does not exceed an allowable límit ín this
case .
A1so, be careful when roundíng down a value.
Example:
When 2= 1 1000; ís calctilated where ;, the resultíng
value of variable 2 is not exactly 2 but 1.99999997.
Here, when 3=FIX[ 2]; ís specífíed, the resultíng value of
variable 1 is not 2. but In thís case, round down the value
after correcting the error so that the result is greater than the
expected number, or round it off as follows:
3=FIX []
3=ItOUNll[ 2]
Divisor When a divisor of zero is specífíed in a dívisíon or TAN[90], alarnı No.
112 occurs.
16. GUSTOM MAUFìO PROGRAMM1Nβ в-s2aaaE/03
The following blocks aгe referred to as macro statements:
N9ACR0 STATEiV1ENTS Blocks containíng an arithmetíc or logíc operation =
AND NC STATElV1ЕNTS
Blocks contaíníng a control statement such as GOTO, DO, END
Blocks containing a macro ca11 coininand such as macro ca11s by
G65, G66, G67, or other G codes, or by M codes
Aпy block other than a macro statement is referred to as an NC statement.
Explanations
Differences from NC Even when síngle block mode ís on, the machíne does not stop. Note,
statements however, that the machine stops in the single block mode when bít 5
SBM of parameter 6000 ís 1.
Macгo blocks are not regarded as blocks that involve no movement in
the tool nose radíus compensation mode see Section
NC statements that have If a block contaíns a subprogram ca11 command M98, a subprogram
the same property as ca11 usíng an M code, or a subprogram ca11 usíng a T code and does
macra statements not contaín any command address other than O, N, P, oГ L, that block
is equivalent to a macro statement.
If a block contains M99 and does not contaín any command address
other than O, N, P, or L, that block is equivalent to a macro statement.
B-62444E/o3 PROGRAMM 1 NG 16. CUSTOM MACRO
In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO
statement and IF statement. Three types of branch and repetitíon
BRANCH AND
operatíons aгe used:
REPET1T10N
Branch and repetítíon GOTO statement uncondítíonal branch
1F statement condítíonal branch: if ..., then...
WH1LE statement repetítíon whíle ...
A branch to sequence number n occurs. When a sequence number outside
of the range 1 to 99999 is specifıed, P/S a1arm occurs. A sequence Uncondítional Branch
number can also be specified using an expression.
GOTO Statement
GOTO n ; n: Sequence number 1 to 99999
Exaмple:
GOTO1;
GOTO 10;
Specífy a condítíonal expression after IF. If the specífıed conditional
Conditional Branch expressíon ís satisfied, a branch to sequence пumЬeг n occurs. If the
specifíed condítíon ís not satisfıed, the next block ís executed.
1F Statement
1f the value of varíable 1 ís greater than 10, a branch to sequence number
N2 occurs.
1f the condition 1F [ 1 GT 10] GOTO 2;
ís not satísfíed
Processíng 1f the conditíon ís satisfíed
N2 G00 G91 ;F--1
Explanations
Conditíonal expression A condítíonal expressíon must іnclude an operator ínserted between two
varíables or between a vańable and constant, and must be enclosed in
brackets [, ] . An expressíon can be used instead of a vańable.
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/o3
Operators Operators each consist of two letters and are used to compare two values
to determine whether they are equal oг one value ís smaller oг greater than
the other value. Note that the ínequality sígn cannot be used.
Tab1e Operators
Operator Mean1ng
EQ Equa1 to =
NE Not equal to
GT Greater than >
GE Greater than or equal to ?
LT Less than <
LE Less than or equal to
Sample program The sample program below fınds the total of numbers 1 to 10.
09500;
1=0;1nitial value of the variable to hold the sum
2=1;1nítíal va1ue of the varíable as an addend
N1 1F[ 2 GT 101 GOTO 2; Branch to N2 when the addend is greater than
10
1= 1+ 2; Calculatíon to fínd the sum
2= 2; Next addend
GOTO 1; Branch to N1
N2 M30;End of program
Specífy a condítional expression after WHILE. Whí1e the specifíed
condítíon ís satisfıed, the program from DO to END ís executed. If the Repetítíon
specifíed condítíon ís not satisfied, program executíon proceeds to the
Whíle Statement
block after END.
WH1LE [conditional expressionj DO m ; m=1,2,3
, ........................................:
1f the condítion 1f the condition ; processíng ;
is not satisfied is satisfied
END m ;
Explanatíons Whí1e the specífied condítíon ís satisfıed, the program from DO to END
after WHILE ís executed. If the specified conditíon is not satisfıed,
program executíon proceeds to the block after END. The same format as
for the IF statement applíes. A number after DO and a number after END
aгe ídentífıcatíon numbers for specífyíng the range of execution. The
numbers 1, 2, and 3 can be used. When a number other than 1, 2, and 3
ís used, P/S a1arm No. 126 occurs.
282
B-62444E/03 PROG RAMM 1 NG 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Nestíng The ídentificatíon numbers 1 to 3 in a DO-END loop can be used as
many tímes as desíred. Note, however, when a program includes crossíng
repetítion loops overlapped DO ranges , P/S a1arm No. 124 occurs.
З. DO loops can be nested to a 1. The ídentífícatíon numbers
maximum depth of three 1evels. 1 to 3 caп Ьe used as many
times as r quired.
WH1LE [ ... ] DO 1 ;
Γ WH1LE [ ... ] DO 1 ;
Processing
г- WH1LE[...]D03; ` END 1 ; ΓWH1LE[...]D02;
Processing ;
г- WH1LE [ ... ] DO 1 ;
` END 3 ;
Processing
L_ END 1 ; END 2 ;
END 1 ;
2. DO ranges cannot overlap.
4. Control can be transferred to the
г- WH1LE [ ... ] DO 1 ; outsíde of a 1oop.
Processing
WH1LE [ ... ] DO 1 ;
WH1LE [ ... ] DO 2 ; 1F[...]GOTOn;
L_ END 1 ; END 1 ;
L__ . Nn Processing
END 2; 5. Branches cannot be made to a
location within a 1oop.
1F[...]GOTOn;
Γ WH1LE[...]D01 ;
;л N n .. ,
L END 1 ;
Límitatíons
Infinite loops When DO m ís specífıed wíthout specífyíng the WHILE statement, аn
infinite loop ranging from DO to END ís produced.
Processíng tíme When a branch to the sequence number specifıed in a GOTO statement
occurs, the sequence number ís searched for. For thís reason, processíng
ín the reverse dírection takes a longer tíme than processíng in the forward
dírectíon. Using the WHILE statement for repetítíon reduces processíng
tíme.
Undefíned variab[e In a conditional expression that uses EQ or NE, a null value and zero have
different effects. In other types of conditional expressíons, a nu11 va1ue
ís regarded as zero.
283
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
Sample program The sample program below finds the total of numbers 1 to 10.
00001;
1=0;
2=1;
WH1LE[ 2 LE 10]DO
1;
1= 1+ 2;
2= 2;
END 1;
M30;
284
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMM 1 NG 16. CUSTOM MACRO
A macгo program can Ьe called usíng the followíng methods:
MACRO CALL Macro ca11 Símple ca11 G65
modal ca11 G66, G67
Macгo ca11 wíth G code
Macro ca11 with M code
subprogram ca11 wíth M code
subprogram ca11 wíth T code
Restríctíons
Dífferences between Macro caП G65 differs from subprogram caH M98 as descríbed below.
macro ca11s and
subprogram ca11s Wıth G65, an argument data passed to a macгo can be specified. M98
does not have thís capabílíty.
When an M98 block contaíns another NC commаnd for example,
GO1 M98Pp , the subprogram ís called after the commаnd ís
executed. On the other hand, G65 uncondítionally ca11s a macro.
When an M98 block contains another NC commаnd for example,
GO 1 X M98Pp , the machine stops in the síngle block mode. On
the other hand, G65 does not stops the machíne.
Wıth G65, the 1eve1 of 1oca1 vańables changes. Wıth M98, the 1eve1
of 1oca1 variables does not change.
When G65 ís specífied, the custom macro specífıed at address P is called.
Data argument can be passed to the custom macro program. Símple Ca11 G65
G65 P p L 2<argument-specífícatíon>
P : Number of the program to ca11
C : Repetition count 1 Ьy defauit
Argument : Data passed to the macro
00001 ; 09010 ;
3= 1+ 2 ;
065 P9010 L2 ; 1F [ 3 GT 360] GOTO 9;
G00 X 3 ;
M30 ; N9 M99 ;
Explanatíons

Ca11 After G65, specify at address P the program number of the custom
macro to caІl.
When a number of repetítíons is requíred, specífy a number from 1 to
9999 after address L. When L ís omítted, 1 ís assumed.
By using argument specíficatíon, values are assigned to corresponding
1oca1 varíables.
285
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-62Ø4Eı03
Argument specífícation Two types of argument specífícatíon are available. Argument
specífícation I uses letters other than G, L, O, N, and P once each.
Argument specificatíon II uses A, B, and C oпce each and also uses I, J,
and K up to ten tímes. The type of argument specification ís determíned
automatically according to the letters used.
Argument specífícation I
Address Variable Address Varíable Address Variable
number number number
A 1 1 4 T 20
B 2 J 5 U 21
C 3 K 6 V 22
D 7 M 13 W 23
E 8 Q 17 X 24
F 9 R 18 Y 25
H 11 1 Z 26
Addresses G, L, N, O, and P cannot be used in arguments.
Addresses that need not be specífied can be omitted. Loca1 variables
correspondíng to an omitted address are set to nuU.
Argument specification II
Argument specíficatíon H uses A, B, and C oпce each and uses I, J, and
K up to ten times. Argument specífıcation II ís used to pass values such
as three-dimensíonal coordínates as arguments.
Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable
number number number
A 1 K3 12 J7 23
B 2 14 13 K7 24
C 3 J4 14 1 25
11 4 K4 15 J 26
J1 5 15 16 K 27
Kі 6 J5 17 19 28
12 7 K5 18 J9 29
J2 8 1g 19 K9 30
K2 9 J6 20 110 31
13 10 Kς 21 J10 32
Jg 11 1, 22 K10 33
Subscrípts of I, J, and K for indícatíng the order of argument
specification are not written іn the actual program.
Restrictions
Format G65 must be specifíed before аny argument.
Mixture of argument The CNC ínternally identífíes argument specífícatíon I and argument
specifications 1 and 11 specífícation П. If a mixture of argument specifícatíon I and argument
specifícatíon П ís specífíed, the type of argument specífıcation specifıed
later takes precedence.
Position of the decimal The units used for argument data passed wíthout a decіmal poínt
point correspond to the least ínput íncrement of each address. The value of an
argument passed wíthout a decímal poínt may vary according to the
system confíguratíon of the machíne. It ís good practíce to use decimal
poínts in macгo caІІ arguments to maíntain program compatibility.
286
B-62444Eί03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUST M MAvRO
Ca11 nesting Ca11s can be nested to a depth of four 1evels íncludíng simple ca11s G65
and modal calls G66 . Thís does not include subprogram ca11s M98 .
Loca1 varísble 1evels Loca1 variables from 1eve10 to 4 are províded for nestíng.
The 1eve1 of the maín program is О.
Each tíme a macro is callcd wíth G65 or G66 , the 1oca1 vańable 1eve1
is incremented by one. The values of the 1oca1 vańables at the prevíous
1eve1 are saved in the CNC.
When M99 is executed in a macro program, control returns to the
calling program. At that time, the 1oca1 variable 1eve1 is decremented
by oпe; the values of the 1oca1 varíables saved when the macro was
caUed are restored.
Main program Macro
1eve10 Macro 1eve 1 Macro 1eve12 Macгo 1eve13 1eve14
00001 ; 00003 ; 00004 ; 00005 j
1=1 ;
G65 P2 A2 ; G65 P3 A3 ; G65 P4 A4 G65 P5 A5
M30; 11 M009090 ;2 ; M99 І M99 ; M99 ;
Loca1 varíables
1eve10 Leve1 1 Leve12 Leve13 Leve14
1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5
33 33 33 33 33
Commoп varíables
100-, 500- Variables that can be read from and wrítten to by
macros at dífferent 1evels
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-62444E/o3
ѕamØae program Move the tool beforehand along the X- and Z-axes to the posítíon where
Dгí6 c;ycše a drílling cycle starts. Specífy Z or W for the depth of a ho1e, K for the
depth of a cut, and F for the cutting feedrate to dń11 the ho1e.
Z w
Аиn Rapíd traverse
Caiiing format
G65 P9100 ώW r Kk Ff ;
Z : Ho1e depth absolute specifıcatíon
U: Ho1e depth íncremental specifıcation
K: Cutting amount per cycle
F : Cuttíng feedrate
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMiNG 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Program calling a macro 00002;
program G50 ;
G00 XO S1000 M03 ;
G65 Ø100 ;
G00 M05 ;
M30 ;
MдcCO progra111 09100;
called program 1=0 : ...................... C1ear the data for the depth of the current ho1e.
2=0 : ...................... C1ear the data for the depth of the precedíng
ho1e.
IF [ 23 NE 0] GOTO 1; ..... If incremental programming, specíf`ıes the
jump to N1.
IF [ 26 EQ 0] GOTO 8 ; ..... If neither Z nor W ís specífıed, aп error
occurs.
23= 5002 26; ........... Calculates the depth of a ho1e.
лі 1= 1+ 6; Calculates the depth of the current ho1e.
IF [ 1 LE 23] GOTO 2 ; ...... Determínes whether the hole to be cut is
too de p.?
1= 23; .... Clamps at the depth of the current ho1e.
N2 G00 W 2; Moves the tool to the depth of the preceding
hole at the eutting feedrate.
GO1 W [ 1 2] F 9 ; ....... Dri11s the ho1e.
G00 W 1; Moves the tool to the drilling start poínt.
IF [ 1 GE 23] GOTO 9 ; Checks whether drillíng ís completed.
2= 1 : ..................... Stores the depth of the eαrrent ho1e.
GOTO 1;
N9 M99 ;
N8 3000=1 NOT Z OR U COMMAND
16. CUST кv1 ΛЛлï:ahÚ PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
Once G66 ís íssued to specífy a modal ca11 a macгo is called after a block
specífyíng movement along axes ís executed. This continues until G67 MOda1 Ca1I G66
is issued to cancel a modal ca11.
G66 P p L. C<aŕgument-specŕficatìan>
P Number of the program to caíi
F, : Røpetítíon count 1 by default
Argument : Úλ.ta passed to the macro
00001 ; 09100 ;
G66 P9100 L2 λ ; G00 Z- 1 ;
GOΩ G90 ; Go1 Z-- 2 FO.з ;
; \
;
G67 ;
M30 ; M99 ;
Explanatíons
Ca11 After G66, specífy at address P a program number subject to a modal
caІІ.
When a number of repetítions ís required, a number from 1 to 9999 can
be specífíed at address L.
As with a símple caІІ G65 , data passed to a macгo program :.
specified in arguments.
Canceilation When a G67 code ís specífíed, modal macгo ca11s are no longer performed
in subsequent blосks.
Ce11 nes ìn Ca11s cаn be nested to a depth of four 1evels includíng símple ca11s G65
аnd modal calls G66 . This does not include subprogram calls M98 .
+ мodaІ eакі nestìng Moda1 calls can be nested by specífyíng another G66 code duríng a modal
ca11.
Restríetíons In a G66 block, no macros can Ьe called.
G66 needs to be specified before аny arguments.
No macros can be called in a block which contains a code such as a
míscellaneous function that does not involve movement along an axís.
Loca1 varíables arguments can on1y be set in G66 blосks. Note that
1oca1 varíables are not set each time a modal ca11 is performed.
B-62aaaε/o3 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Sample program Thís program makes a groove at a specífıed position.
Callíng format
G66 P9110 Uu Ff ;
U: Groove depth incremental specífícatíon
F: Cutting feed of grooving
Program that ca11s a 00003;
macro program G50 ;
sıo0o м0з ;
G66 P9110 ;
G00 ;
;
;
G67 ;
G00 M05 ;
м30;
Macro program 09110 ;
program called GO1 U 21 FØ : ........................... Cuts the workpiece.
G00 U 21 : .................................. Retracts the too1.
м99 ;
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03
By setting a G code number used to call a macгo program in a parameter,
the macгo program can be called in the same way as for a símple caІІ Macro Ca11 Using
G65 .
G Code
00001 ; 09010 ;
081 ;
M30; t N9 M99 ;
Parameter = 81
Explanatíons By setting a G code number from 1 to 9999 used to ca11 a custom macro
program 9010 to 9019 in the corresponding parameter Nos. 6050 to
6059 , the macro program can be called in the same way as with G65.
For example, when a parameter is set so that macro program 09010 can
Ьe caІed with G81, a user-specifıc cycle created using a custom macro
can be caHed without modifying the machining program.
Correspondence
between parameter Program number Parameter number
numbers and program
09010 6050
numbers
09011 6051
09012 6052
09013 6053
09014 6054
09015 6055
09016 6056
09017 6057
09018 6058
09019 6059
Repetítion As with a símple ca11, a number of repetitions from 1 to 9999 can be
specified at address L.
Argument specífícatíon As with a símple cаH, two types of argument specifıcatíon are avaílable:
Argument specífication I and argument specífícatíon II. The type of
argument specification is determined automatícally according to the
addresses used.

Restrictions
Nestíng of calis usíng G In a program called with a G code, no macros can Ьe cаHed using a G code.
codes A G code in such a progam is treated as an ordínary G code. In a program
cаHed as a subprogram wíth an M oг T code, no macros can be called usíng
a G code. A G code in such a program is also treated as aп ordinary G code.
d
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
By settíng an M code number used to call a macro program in a parameter,
the macгo program can be called in the same way as with a simple ca11 Macro Cai1 Usíng
G65 .
an M Code
00001 ; 09020 ;
M50 ; J
M30 ; ` M99 ;
Parameter 6080 = 50
Explanations By settíng an M code number from 1 to 99999999 used to caLl a custom
macro program 09020 to 09029 ín the correspondíng parameter Nos.
6080 to 6089 , the macro program can be called in the same way as with
G65.
Correspondence
between parameter Program number Parameter number
numbers and program
09020 6080
numbers 09021 6081
ґУnnnn
09023 6083
09024 6084
09025 6085
09026 i 6086
09027 6087
09028 6088
09029 6089
Repetïtion As with a símple ca11, a number of repetitions from 1 to 9999 caп Ьe
specified at address L.
Argument specíficatíon As wíth a símple ca11, two types of argument specífıcation are avaílable:
Argument specífication I and argument specification II. The type of
argument specífıcation ís determined automatically according to the
addresses used.
Restrictions
- An M code used to ca11 a macтo program must be specífied at the start
of a block.
- In a macгo called wíth a G code or in a program called as a subprogram
wíth an M or T code, no macros can Ьe caHed usíng an M code. An
M code in such a macгo or program ís treated as an ordínary M code.
16. cusToм мACRO PROGRAMMING B-624ØE/03
By settíng an M code number used to call a subprogram macгo program
ín a parameter, the macro program can be called in the same way as with Subprogram Ca11
a subprogram call M98 .
Using aп M Codo
00001 ; 09001 ;
M03 ;
< _
M3β; M99 ;
Parameter 6071 = 03
Expianations By settíng an M code rıumber from 1 to 99999999 used to call a
subprogram in a parameter Nos. 6071 to 6076 , the correspondíng
custom macro program 09001 to 09006 cаn be called ín the same way
as with M98.
Correspondence
between parameter Pïogïam numbeï Parame,er numbeï
numbers and program
09001 6071
numbers 09002 6072
09003 6073
09004 6074
69005 6075
09006 6076
09007 6077
09008 6078
09009 6079
Repetition As with a símple ca11, a number of repetítíons from 1 to 9999 carı be
specífied at address L.
Argument speCϊfϊCatίon Argument specífıcatíon ís not allowed.
M code An M code in a macro program that has been called ís treated as an
ordinary M code.
Límítatíons :ln a macгo called with a G code or in a program called wíth аn M or T code,
rıo subprograms can be called using an M code. An M code in such a
macгo oг program is treated as an ordínary M code.
16. CUSTOM MACRO E-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING
By enablíng subprograms macгo program to be called with a T code in
a parameter, a macгo program can be caHed each time the T code is subprogram Ca11s
specified in the machining program.
Usíng a T Code
00001 ; 09000 ;
T0203 ;
E
M30 ; M99 ;
Bit 5 TCS of parameter = 1
Explanatíons
Ca11 By settíng bit 5 TCS of parameter to 1, the macro program
09000 can be cаHed when a T code is specífíed in the machíníng program.
A T code specifíed in a machíning program ís assigned to common
variable 149.
Limitatíons In a macгo cаHed wíth a G code or in a program cаHed with an M or T code,
no subprograms can be caіed usíng a T code. A T code in such a macro
or program ís treated as an ordinary T code.
295
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING в-s2aa4εıСљз
By using the subprogram call function that uses M codes, the cumulative
Sample Program usage tíme of each tool is measured.
C o n d i t on s The cumulative usage time of each of tool numbers 1 to 5 ís measured.
The tíme ís not measured for tools whose number is 6 0г moгe.
The followíng varíables are used to store the tool numbers and
measured times:
Ø01 Cumulatíve usage tíme of tool number 1
Ø02 Cumulative usage tíme of tool number 2
503 Cumulatíve usage tíme of tool number 3
504 Cumulative usage time of tool number 4
505 Cumulative usage time of tool number 5
Usage time starts being counted when the M03 command is specified
and stops when M05 is specifıed. System variable 3002 is used to
measure the time during whích the cycle start lamp is on. The time
duríng which the machine ís stopped by feed hold and single block
stop operation ís not counted, but the tíme used to change tools and
pallets is іncluded.
Operatíon check
Parameter setting Set 3 in parameter , and set 05 іn parameter
Varíable va1ue setting Set 0 in variables 501 to 505.
Program that ca11s a 00001;
macro program тo100 мo6;
мoз;
M05 : .......................... Changes 501.
T0200 M06;
M03;
M05 : .......................... Changes 502.
T0300 M06;
M03;
M05; .......................... Changes 503.
T0400 M06;
M03;
M05 :.......................... Changes 504.
T0500 M06;
M03;
M05 :.......................... Changes 505.
M30;
296
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Macro program 09001 M03 : .......................... Macro to start counting
program called M01;
IF[FIX[ 4120/100] EQ 0]GOTO 9 : ............. No tool specifíed
IF[FIX[ 4120/100] GT 5]GOTO 9; ...... Out-of-range tool number
3002=0 : .................................. Clears the tímer.
N9 M03 : .............. Rotates the spíndle in the forward dírection.
M99;
09002 M05 : ........................... Macгo to end counting
M01;
IF[FIX[Ø120/100] EQ 0]GOTO 9 : ............. No tool specífíed
IF[FIX[ 4120/100] GT 5]GOTO 9; ...... Out-of-range tool number
[500+FIX [ 4120/100]]= 3002+ [500+FIX[Ø120/100]];
Calculates cumulative time.
N9 M05 : ................................... Stops the spíndle.
M99;

1
297
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-62Ø4εı03
For smooth machíníng, the CNC prereads the CNC statement to be
performed next. Thís operation ís referred to as buffering. In tool nose
PROCESSING MACRO
radíus compensation mode G41, G42 , the NC prereads NC statements
STATEMENTS two oг three blocks ahead to fınd íntersectíons. Macгo statements for
ańthmetíc expressíons and condítíonal branches are processed as soon as
they are read ínto the buffer. Blocks contaíníng M00, M01, M02, oг M30,
blocks contaíníng M codes for whích bufferíng ís suppressed by settíng
parameter to 3420 , and blocks containíng G31 are not preread.
Explanatíons
When the next block ís
not buffered
N1 > N1 G31 ; M codes that are not
N2 100=1 NC statement
buffered, G31, etc. execution
W uN2
Macro statement execution Π > :B1ock being executed
Buffer
Bufferíng the next block
in other than tool nose
> N1 ; N1 N4 radíus compensation NC statement
mode G41, G42 N2 1=100 ; executíon
N3 2=200 ;
normally prereadíng one N4 ; N2 N3
block Macro statement
executíon
N4
Buffer
> : B1ock beíng executed
: B1ock read ínto the buffer
When N1 ís beíng executed, the next NC statement N4 ís read into the
buffer. The macгo statements N2, N3 between N 1 and N4 aгe prосessed
duńng executíon of N1.
298
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMM 1NG 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Bufferíng the next biock
ín tool nose radíus
> N1 G01 G41 G91 F100 T0101 ; compensatíon mode
G41, G42 N2 1=100 ;
> : B1ock beíng executed N3 ;
: Blocks read ínto the buffer N4 2=200 ;
N5 ;
NC statement N1 N3
execution \
ј N2ј ј
Macгo statement
execution
u T ú
Buffer
When N 1 is being executed, the NC statements іп the next two blocks up
to N5 are read ínto the buffer. The macro statements N2, N4 between
N1 and N5 aгe processed duríng executíon of N1.
When the next block
ínvolves no movement in
> N1 G01 G41 G100 T0101 ; tool nose radíus
compensation C G41, N2 1=100 ;
> : B1ock beíng executed N3 ; G42 mode : Blocks read ínto the buffer N4 2=200 ;
N5 M08 ;
N6 Ø=300 ;
N7 ;
N1 , N3
NC statement ј
execution
\
Macro statement l N2 N4 ј N6
execution y t y t y
1- -3 -ј 1 N5 1- -1
Buffer
When the NC 1 block is being executed, the NC statements in the next two
blocks up to N5 are read into the buffer. Sínce N5 is a block that ínvolves
no movement, an íntersectíon cannot be calculated. In this case, the NC
statements in the next three blocks up to N7 are read. The macro
statements N2, N4, and N6 between N1 and N7 are processed during
execution of N1.
299
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-62aØεıo3
Custom macro programs are símílar to subprograms. They can be
regístered and edíted in the same way as subprograms. The storage
REGISTERING
capacíty ís determined by the totallength of tape used to store both custom
CUSTOM MACRO macros and subprograms.
PROGRAMS
- 300 -
B-62444E/03 F RC, ΓRAiV1MINО 16. CUSTÇJM MAC RO

Ј ItΛ TA.TІ CyNЅ
MDl operatitın The macro ca11 command can be specifíed in MDI mode too. Duríng
automatíc operation, however, it is ímpossible to swítch to the MDI mode
for a macгo program ca11.
áequeCıce number A custom macro program cannot be searched for a sequence number.
searctτ
5ing1e biock Even whíle a macro program ís beíng executed, blocks can be stopped in
the síngle block mode except blocks containing macгo ca11 commands,
ańthmetic operation commands, and control commands .
A block contaíníng a macгo ca11 command G65, G66, or G67 does not
stop even when the síngle block mode ís on. Blocks containing ańthmetíc
operatíon commands and control commands can be stopped in síngle
block mode by settíng SBKM bit 5 of parameter 6000 to 1.
Síngle block stop operatíon ís used for testing custom macro programs.
When SBKM bít 5 of parameter 6000 is set to 1, a síngle block stop takes
place at every macro statement.
Note that when a síngle block stop occurs at a macro statement in tool nose
radius compensation mode, the statement is assumed to be a block that
does not involve movement, and proper compensation cannot be
performed іп some cases. Strictly speaking, the block ís regarded as
specifying a movement with a travel dístance 0.
Optional block skip A/ appearíng in the middle of an <expressíon> enclosed in brackets [
] on the ńght-hand síde of an ańthmetic expression is regarded as a
divisíon operator; ít ís not regarded as the specífıer for an optional block
skíp code.
Operatíon in ED T mode Registered custom macro programs and subprograms should be protected
from beíng destroyed by accident. By settíng NE8 bít 0 of parameter
3202 and NE9 bít 4 of parameter 3202 to 1, deletíon and edíting are
disabled for custom macro programs and subprograms wíth program
numbers 8000 to 8999 and 9000 to 9999. When the entíre memory is
cleared by pressíng the jREsETj and j ELETEj keys at the same tíme to turn on
the power , the contents of inemory such as custom macro programs are
deleted.
Reset With a reset operation, 1oca1 variables and commoп vańables 100 to
149 are cleared to nuU values. They can be prevented from beíng cleared
by settíng, CLV and CCV bíts 7 and 6 of parameter 6001 . System
varíables 1000 to 1133 are not cleаred.
A reset operation clears any called states of custom macro programs and
subprograms, and any DO states, and returns control to the main program.
Display of the PROGRAM As wíth M98, the M arid T codes used for subprogram ca11s аre not
RË зTART scrc^n dísplayed.
FeecI hold When a feed hold ís enabled duńng execution of a macro statement, the
machine stops after executíon of the macro statement. The machíne also
stops when a reset or a1arm occurs.
Constant vaíues that can .0000001 to
ıue laSed Ì11 εелμÌ ĞSSIon> -99999999 to -0.0000001
The number of sígnífícant digits ís 8 dесіма1 . If thís range is exceeded,
P/S alarm No. 003 occurs.
301
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING в-вгaaaεı0з
1 О In addítion to the standard custom macro commands, the followíng macro
commands are avaílable. They are referred to as external output
ЕXTEF lАθ UTрUT
commands.
СC3 i Л Λ1θ ı4N DЅ - BPRNT
- DPRNT
- POPEN
- PCLOS
These commands are províded to output variable values and characters
through the reader/punch ínterface.
Expianaticms Specify these commands in the followíng order:
Opeп command: POPEN
Before specífying a sequence of data output commands, specífy thís
command to establísh a connection to an external ínput/output device.
Data output command: BPRNT or DPRNT
Specífy necessary data output.
C1ose command: PCLOS
When a11 data output commands have completed, specífy PCLOS to
release a connection to an external ínput/output device.
С рaη command POPEN POPEN
POPEN establishes a connection to аn external ínput/output device. It
must be specífíed before a sequence of data output commands. The CNC
outputs a DC2 control code.
Data output corııı aпε
BPRNT BPRNT [ a b [ c ] ... ]
Number of signíficant decimal places
Varıable
Character
The BPRNT commаnd outputs characters and varíable values in binary.
í Specífíed characters are converted to correspondíng ISO codes
according to the setting data ISO that ís output at that time.
specífíable characters are as follows:
- Letters A to Z
- Numbers
- Speciai characters , /, +, -, etc.
An asterísk ís output by a space code.
іі A11 variables аre stored with a decimal point. Specífy a variable
followed by the number of sígnifícant decimal places enclosed in
brackets. A varíable value is treated as 2-word 32-bít data,
íncłudíng the decіmal digits. It ís output as bínary data startíng from
the highest byte.
iií When specífied data has been output, an EOB code ís output
according to the ISO code settíngs.
iv Nu11 variables aгe гegaтded as 0.
302
B-62Ø4εıo3 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MAС RO
Example
BPRINT [ C X 100 [3] Z 101 [3] M 10 [O] ]
Varíable value



уЈ J --,---J
LF
i 2 00000000
М
-16384001FFG?OC ί +
Z
406 00000196
X
Space
r
Data output command
DPFRNϊ DPRNT [ a b [cd] ...]
п Number of sígnifícant decimal рlacгs
Number of sígnifícant digits in the п,egeг part
Varíable
Character
The DPRNT command outputs characters and each digit in the value of
a vańable accordíng to the code set in the settings ISO .
i For an explanatíon of the DPRNT commaпd, see Items i , ííi , and
ív for the BPRNT command.
іі W hen outputtíng a vańable, specífy followed by the varíable
number, then specífy the number of dígíts in the ínteger part and the
number of decimal places enclosed in brackets.
One code is output for each of the specifíed number of digíts, startíng
with the highest dígít. For each digít, a code ís output according to
the settíngs ISO . The decimal poínt ís also output usirıg a code set
ín the settíngs ISO .
Each variable must be a numeric va1ue consístíng of up to eíght digíts.
When hígh-order digíts are zeros, these zeros are not output íf PRT
bitl of parameter 6001 ís 1. If PRT bit 1 of parameter 6001 is 0,
a space code ís output each time a zero ís encountered.
When the number of decímal places ís not zero, dígíts in the decimal
part are always output. If the number of decіmal places is zero, пo
deciinal poínt ís output. When PRT bit 1 of parameter 6001 is 0, a
space code ís output to índícate a posítíve number instead of +; if
PRT bit 1 of parameter 6001 ís 1, пo code is output.
303
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
Example
DPRNT [ X 2 [53] Z 5 [53] T 30 [20] ]
Varíable value



1 Parameter PRT
1ігtПойЈ


LF
T 23
Z -
X
2 Parameter PRT

LF
T23

X
C1ose command PCLOS PCLOS ;
The PCLOS command releases a connection to an external input/output
device. Specífy thís command when a11 data output commands have
terminated. DC4 control code is output from the CNC.
Requíred setting Specífy the channel use for parameter 020. According to the specífícation
of thís parameter, set data ítems such as the baud rate for the
reader/punch ínterface.
1/0 channel0 : Parameters 101, 102 and 103
1/O channel 1: Parameters 111, 112 and 113
1/0 channel2 : Parameters 121, 122 and 123
Never specífy output to the Fanuc Cassette or floppy dísks.
When specifyíng a DPRNT commаnd to output data, specify whether
leadíng zeros are output as spaces Ьy settíng PRT bit 1 of parameter
6001 to 1 ог 0 . To índícate the end of a line of data ISO code, specífy
whether to use ori1y an LF NCR, of bit 3 of parameter 0103 ís 0 or an
LF and CR NCR is 1 .
304
PROGRAMM NG 16. CUSTOM MACRO 8-62444E/03
Notes
Notes
1 1t ís not necessary to always specify the open command
POPEN , data output command BPRNT, DPRNT , and
ciose command PCLOS together. Once an open
command is specified at the beginning of a program, it
does not need to be specífiod again except after a closε
command was specified.
2 Be sure to specify open commands and close commands
in pairs. Specífy the close command at the end of the
program. However, do not specify a close command if no
open command has been specified.
3 When a reset operation is performed while commands are
beíng output by a data output command, output is stopped
and subsequent data is erased. Therefore, when a reset
operation is performed by a code such as M30 at the end
of a program that performs data output, specify a close
command at the end of the program so that processing
such as M30 is not performed untíl a11 data ís output.
4 Abbreviated macro words enclosed in brackets [] remains
ı.ınгhяnged. However, note that when the characters in
brackets are divided and input several times, the second
and subsequent abbreviations are converted and input.
5 O can Ьe specified in brackets []. Note that when the
characters in brackets [] are divided and input several
times, O is omitted in the second and subsequent inputs.
1 C. CIUSTOM MF,CRO PROGRAMMING 8-62444El03
When a program is being executed, another program caп be called by
inputtíng an interrupt signal U1NT from the machíne. This function ís
INTERRUPTION TYPE
referred to as an ínterruption type custom macro function. Program an
CUSTQIIЛ MACR interrupt command ín the followíng format:
Format
M96 P0000 ; Enables custom macro ínterrupt
M97 ; Disables custom macro ínterrupt
Explanatíons Use of the interruptíon type custom macro function allows the user to call
a program during executíon of аn arbítrary block of another program.
This allows programs to be operated to match sítuations which vary from
time to time.
1 When a tool abnormality ís detected, processing to handle the
abnormalíty is started by an external signal.
2 A sequence of machíníng operatíons ís interrupted by another
machining operatíon without the cancellatíon of the current
operatíon.
3 At regular íntervals, ínformation oп current machiníng is read.
Lísted above are examples like adaptíve control applications of the
ínteτruptíon type custom macro function.
1
1
M96 Pxxxx;
lnterrupt
sígnal O xxxx;
UIl`iT
nter
sígnal i
uіNТ
м9 9 PO000 ;
-- . N0000; E--
1
1
M97 lnterrupt
signal
UINT
Fig lnterruptlon type custom macro tunctlon
When M96Pxxxx ís specífied in a program, subsequent program
operation cаn Ьe ínternıpted Ьy an interrupt sígnal UINT input to
execute the program specifıed by Pxxxx.
When the interrupt sígnal U1NT, marked by in Fig. ís ínput
duńng executíon of the ínterrupt program oг after M97 ís specifıed, ít is
ignored.
306
B-62Ø4E/o3 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO

Specifícatíon Method
Explanatíons
lnterrupt condítíons A custom macro interrupt ís available on1y duríng program execution. It
is enabled under the following conditions
- When memory operation or ΛAD1 operatíon ís selected
- When STL start lamp ís on
- When a custom macro ínterrupt ís not currently being processed
Specifícation Generally, the custom macro interrupt functíon ís used by specífying M96
to enab1e the interrupt signal UINT and M97 to dísable the sígnal.
Once M96 ís specified, a custom macro ínterrupt can be inítíated by the
ínput of the interrupt signal UINT untíl M97 ís specifíed or the NC ís
reset. After M97 ís specified oг the NC is reset, пo custom macro
ínterrupts aгe ínitíated even when the interrupt sígnal UINT ís ínput.
The ínterrupt sígnal UINT is ígnored untíl another M96 command is
specífied.
M96 M97 M96
1
lnterrupt signal
U1NT
Γ1
Effectíve interrupt
input sígnal
U1NT is kept on
The ínterrupt sígnal UINT becomes valid after M96 ís specífíed. Even
when the sígnal ís ínput in M97 mode, it is ignored. When the sígnal ínput
in M97 mode is kept on until M96 ís specífíed, a custom macro ínterrupt
is initiated as soon as M96 ís specífıed on1y when the status-triggered
scheme is employed ; when the edge-tríggered scheme is employed, the
custom macro interrupt ís not initiated even when M96 ís specifíed.
Notes
Notes
For the status-tríggered and edge-triggered schemes, see
ltem Custom macro interrupt signal U1NT of Subsec.

307
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-s2aaaεıo3

Detaíls of Functíons
Explanatíons
ubprogram-type There are two types of custom macro interrupts: subprogram-type
ínterrupt and macro-type interrupts and macro-type ínterrupts. The ínterrupt type used is selected
interrupt Ьy MSB bít 5 of parameter 6003 .
a 5ubprogram-type ínterrupt
An ínterrupt program ís called as a subprogram. Thís means that the
1evels of local vańables remain unchanged before and after the
interrupt. This interrupt ís not included in the nestíng 1eve1 of
subprogram calls.
b Macro-type interrupt
An interrupt program ís called as a custom macro. This means that
the 1evels of local vańables change before and after the interrupt. The
interrupt is not included in the nesting 1eve1 of custom macro calls.
When a subprogram ca11 or a custom macro caU ís performed wíthin
the ínternıpt program, this ca11 is included in the nestíng 1eve1 of
subprogram calls or custom macro ca11s. Arguments cannot be passed
from the current program even when the custom macro interrupt is a
macro-type ínterrupt.
M codes for custom In general, custom macro ínterrupts are controlled by M96 аnd M97.
macro ínterrupt control However, these M codes, may already being used for other purposes such
as an M functíon or macro M code caH by some machine tool builders.
For thís reason, MPR bit 4 of parameter 6003 ís provided to set M codes
for custom macro interrupt control.
When specífyíng thís parameter to use the custom macro interrupt control
M codes set by parameters, set parameters 6033 аnd 6034 as follows:
Set the M code to enable custom macro interrupts іп parameter 6033, and
set the M code to dísable custom macro ínterrupts in parameter 6034.
When specifying that parameter-set M codes аre not used, M96 and M97
аre used as the custom macro control M codes regardless of the settíngs
of parameters 6033 and 6034.
The M codes used for custom macro ínterrupt control are processed
ínternally they are not output to external uníts . However, in terms of
prograτn compatíbílity, ít ís undesírable to use M codes other than M96
аnd M97 to control custom macro ínterrupts.
Custom macro ínterrupts When performing a custom macro íntemıpt, the user may want to
and NC statements ínterrupt the NC statement beíng executed, or the user may not want to
perform the interrupt until the execution of the current block ís completed.
MIN bít 2 of parameter 6003 ís used to select whether to perform
interrupts even іn the middle of a block or to wait until the end of the
block.
308
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Type 1 i When the ínterrupt sígnal UINT ís input, any movement or dwe11
when an ínterrupt ís beíng performed is stopped ímmedíately and the ínterrupt program is
performed even in the executed.
middle of the block
ii If there are NC statements in the interrupt program, the command in
the ínterrupted block ís lost and the NC statement in the ínterrupt
program ís executed. When control is returned to the ínterrupted
program, the program ís restarted from the next block after the
ínterrupted block.
ííi If there are no NC statements in the ínterrupt program, control is
returned to the ínterrupted program by M99, then the program ís
restarted from the command іn the interrupted block.
lnterrupted by macгo interrupt
Executíon ín
progress π
Normal program
CNC command restart; when
there are no NC statements
lnterrupt sígnal U1NT ínput ín the ínterrupt program
Executíon in
progress
Custom macro
interrupt
Type 11 í If the block beíng executed ís not a block that consists of several cycle
when an ínterrupt ís operations such as a dńllíng canned cycle and automatíc reference
performed at the end of posítíon return G28 , aп ínterrupt ís performed as follows:
the block
When an interrupt sígnal UINT ís input, macro statements in the
interrupt program are executed immedíately unless an NC statement
ís encountered in the ínterrupt program. NC statements are not
executed untíl the current block ís completed.
íi If the block being executed consists of several cycle operatíons, an
ínterrupt is performed as follows:
When the last movement in the cycle operatíons is started, macгo
statements in the ínterrupt program are executed unless aп NC
statement ís encountered. NC statements aгe executed after aІІ cycle
operations are completed.
Execution in
progress
Normal pгogгam
lnterrupt sígnal U1NT input
Executíon ín η
progress rG
Custom macro NC stεtement in the
interrupt íntлrrı pt program
309
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-62Øaεıoз
Condítíons for enabling The sígnal becomes valid after executíon starts of a block that
and dísablíng the custom contains M96 for enabling custom macro ínterrupts. The sígnal becomes
macro ínterrupt signal invalid when executíon starts of a block that contains M97.
Whi1e an interrupt program ís being executed, the intemipt signal
becomes invalid. The signal become valid when the execution of the
block that ímmedíately follows the interrupted block in the main program
ís started after control returns from the interrupt program. In type I, íf the
interrupt program consists of only macгo statements, the ínterrupt signal
becomes valid when execution of the ínterrupted block is started after
control returns from the ínterrupt program.
Custom macro interrupt
duríng executíon of a
block that ínvolves cycle
operatíon

Type IFor type 1 Even when cycle operation ís in progress, movement ís íntemıpted, and
the ínterrupt program ís executed. If the íntemφt program contaйs no
NC statements, the cycle operatíon ís restarted after control ís returned to
the íntemıpted program. If there are NC statements, the remainíng
operations in the ínteпupted cycle aгe díscarded, and the next block is
executed.
Type IFor type 11 When the last movement of the cycle operatíon is started, macгo
statements in the interrupt program are executed unless an NC statement
ís encountered. NC statements are executed after cycle operation ís
completed.

310
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Custom macro ínterrupt There aгe two schemes for custom macro ínterrupt signal UINT ínput:
signal U1NT The status-tńggered scheme and edge- triggered scheme. When the
status-tńggered scheme ís used, the sígnal ís valíd when it ís on. When
the edge triggered scheme is used, the signal becomes valíd on the ńsíng
edge when it switches from off to on status.
One of the two schemes is selected with TSE bit 3 of parameter 6003 .
When the status-tńggered scheme ís selected by thís parameter, a custom
r
macгo ínteпupt ís generated íf the internipt signal UINT ís on at the tíme
the sígnal becomes valid. By keepíng the ínterrupt sígnal UINT on, the
interrupt program caп be executed repeatedly.
When the edge-tńggered scheme is selected, the interrupt sígnal UINT
becomes valid on1y on íts rísíng edge. Therefore, the interrupt program
ís executed oп1y momentarily іп cases when the program consísts of only
macгo statements . When the status-tńggered scheme is ínappropńate,
or when a custom macro ínterrupt ís to be performed just once for the
entire program in this case, the interrupt sígnal may be kept on , the
edge-triggered scheme ís useful.
Except for the specífíc applicatíons mentíoned above, use of eíther
scheme results in the same effects. The tíme from sígnal input untíl a
custom macro ínterrupt ís executed does rıot vary between the two
schemes.
0
lnterrupt signal J1NT lnterrupt lnterrupt lnterrupt lnterru
ıt
execution executíon executíon execut on
? ј ь Ї ь Ї
status-triggered
scheme
___
u i i
i i r
Interrupt
executıon
ь Ї
Edge-tríggered
scheme
In the above example, an ínterrupt ís executed four tímes when the status
tńggered scheme ís used; when the edge- tríggered scheme ís used, the
interrupt is executed just once.
R
311
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-62Ø4εı03
Return from a custom To return control from a custom macro interrupt to the ínterrupted
macгo ínterrupt progranı, specify M99. A sequence number in the interrupted program
can also be specifíed usíng address P. If thís is specífıed, the program is
searched from the beginning for the specifıed sequence number. Control
ís returned to the fırst sequence number found.
When a custom macro interrupt program ís beíng executed, rio interrupts
are generated. To enable another interrupt, execute M99. When M99 is
specified a1one, it ís executed before the precedíng commands termínate.
Therefore, a custom macro ínterrupt is enabled for the last command of
the ínterrupt program. If thís ís ínconvenient, custom macro ínterrupts
should be controlled by specífyíng M96 and M97 in the program.
When a custom macro ínterrupt ís beíng executed, no other custom macro
interrupts are generated; when an interrupt is generated, additional
ínterrupts агe inhibited automatically. Executing M99 makes ít possible
for another custom macro ínterrupt to occur. M99 specifıed a1one in a
block ís executed before the prevíous block terminates. In the following
example, an interrupt ís enabled for the Gxx block of 01234. When the
sígnal ís input, O 1234 ís executed agaín. 05678 ís controlled by M96 and
M97. In thís case, an ínterrupt ís not enabled for 05678 enabled after
control ís returned to 01000 .
01000;
1
1
M96P1 234;
lnterrupt
lnterrupt ќ 01234
GxxXxxx;
M99;

M96P5678 05678
M97
lnterrupt
x
GxźXxxx; lnterrupt
M96;
i
M99; M97 i

Notes
When an M99 block consísts only of address O, N, P, L, or
M, thís block is regarded as belongíng to the previous block
ín the program. Therefore, a síngle-block stop does not
occur for this block. 1n terms of programming, the following
1 and 2 are basícally the same. The difference is
whether GOO is executed before M99 ís recognízed.
1 GOO XO00 ;
M99 ;
2 GOO X000 M99 ;
312
B-624444E/03 PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO
Custom macro ínterrupt A custom macro ínterrupt ís dífferent from a normal program ca11. It ís
and modal information initíated Ьy an interrupt signal UINT during program execution. In
general, any modificatíons of modal informatíon made by the ínterrupt
program should not affect the interrupted program.
For thís reason, even when modal ínformatíon ís modifíed by the ínterrupt
program, the modal informatíon before the interrupt ís restored when
control ís returned to the internıpted program by M99.
When control ís returned from the interrupt program to the interrupted
program by M99 Pxxxx, modal informatíon can again be controlled by
the program. In thís case, the new continuous information modífıed by
the ínterrupt program is passed to the interrupted program. Restoration of
the o1d modal informatíon present before the interrupt ís not desírable.
This ís because after control is returned, some programs may operate
differently dependíng on the modal ínformatíon present before the
ínterrupt. In this case, the following measures are applicable:
1 The interrupt program provides modal information to be used after
control ís returned to the interrupted program.
2 After control ís retumed to the ínterrupted program, modal
ínformation ís specifíed agaín as necessary.
OΔΔΔΔ
lnterrupt sígnal U1NT
M96 Pюa
Oxxx;
`
г
1 1
Modífy modal informatíon
Wíthout P specifícatíon
`
M ďa1 ı
information remains
unchanged before and M99 P0000 ;
Iafter the interrupt. _-
Wíth P specífication 1 NO000;
\The new modal information modifíed by the inter-
rupt program ís present.
Тype іModa1 ínformatíon The modal ínformation present before the ínterrupt becomes valid. The
when control ís new modal ínformation modified Ьy the interrupt program is made
returned by M99
ínvalíd.
Pe іModa1 ínformation The new modal information modifıed by the interrupt program remaíns
when control ís valid even after control ís returned. The o1d modal ínformation which was
returned by M99
valid in the interrupted block can Ьe read usíng custom macro system
PO000
varíables 4001 to 4120.
Note that when modal ínformation ís modified by the ínterrupt program,
system varíables 4001 to 4120 are not changed.
313
16. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/o3
System varíables The coordinates of poínt A can be read usíng system varíables 5001
posítíon ínformation and up until the fírst NC statement is encountered.
vaiues for the interrupt
program The coordínates of poínt A can be read after an NC statement with no
move specíficatíons appears.
The machine coordínates and workpíece coordínates of point B can
be read usíng system vańables 5021 and up and 5041 and up. i
Too1 nose center path
lnterrupt generated
i
. ._,
Custom macro interrupt When the interrupt sígnal UINT is input and an ínterrupt program ís
and custom macro called, the custom macro modal ca11 is canceled G67 . However, when
modal ca11 G66 is specifıed in the ínterrupt program, the custom macro modal ca11
becomes valid. When control ís returned from the ínterrupt program Ьy
M99, the modal ca11 is restored to the state it was in before the ínterrupt
was generated. When control ís returned Ьy M99Pxxxx;, the modal ca11
in the interrupt program remains valíd. 1
Custom macro ínterrupt When the interrupt sígnal UINT is input whíle a return operatlon ís being
and program restart performed in the dry run mode after the search operatíon for program
restart, the ínterrupt program is called after restart operatíon terminates
for a11 axes. Thís means that interrupt type H is used regardless of the
parameter settíng.

1
314
17. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER
e-62aØE/o3 PROG RAM M 1NG ENTRY G10
1
J PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER ENTRY G10
General The values of parameters can be entered in a program. Thís function is
used for setting pitch error compensatíon data when attachments are
changed oг the maximum cutting feedrate oг cuttíng time constants are
changed to meet changíng machining condítions.
315
17.PROGRAMABLE PARAMETER
ENTRY G10 PROGRAMMING B-62444E./o3
Format i
Format ι
G10ι50;Parameter eпtгу mode setting
N_R_; For parameters other than the axls type
N_P_R_; For axls type parameters
1

G1 1; Parameter entry mode cancel
Meaníng of command
N_: Parameter No. Ø1g1ts oг compensatlon posltlon to
1023 for
pltch errors compensatlon ,000 5d1g1t
R_: Parameter setting value Leading zeros can Ø omltted.
P_: Ax1s No. 1 to 8 Used for entering axls type parameters
Explanations
Parameter settíng value Do not use a decimal point in a value set in a parameter R_ .
RJ a decimal point cannot be used in a custom macro variable for R_
eíther.
Axís Specífy an axís number PJ from 1 to 8 up to eíght axes for an axís type
parameter. The control axes are numbered in the order in whích they are
displayed on the CNC display.
For example, specífy P2 for the control axís whích ís displayed second.
Notes
Do not fail to perform reference poínt return manually after
changing the pitch error compensatíon data or backlash
compensation data. Wíthout this, the machíne posítíon can
deviate from the correct positíon.
Other NC statements cannot be specifíed while in
parameter ínput mode.
The canned-cycle mode must be cancelled before entering
of parameters. When not cancelled, the drílling motion wí11
Ьe activated.
316
17. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER
в-ε24Øεıo3 PROGRAMM 1NG ENTRY G10
Examples
1. Set bit 2 SPB of bít type parameter No. 3404
G10L50 ; Parameter entry mode
N3404 R 00000100 ; SBP settrng
G11 ; caпcel parameter entry mode
2. Change the values for the Z-axís and C-axis in axis type parameter
the coordínates of stored stroke límit 2 in the positíve
direction for each axís .
G10L50 ; Parameter entry mode
N1322P3R4500 ; Modífy Z axís
N1322P4R12000 ; Modífy C axís
G11 ; cancel parameter entry mode
317
18. MEMORYOPERATION BY
FS15 TAPE FORMAT PROGRAMMING B -62Ø4E/o3
1
І MEMORY OPERATION by FS15 TAPE FORMAT
Programs in the FS 15 tape format can be registered in memory for
memoгу operation by setting bit 1 of parameter No. 0001. Registration
, to memory and memoгy operatíon are possíble for the functíons which use
the same tape format as that for the FS 15 as well as for the followíng
functíons whích use a dífferent tape format:
Equa1-lead threadíng
5ubprogram calling
Canned cycle
Multiple repetitíve canпed cycle
Canned drílling cycle
Notes
Regístration to memory and memory operation are possib e
only for the functions avaílable ín thís CNC.
_.,
,
318
18. MEMORY OPERATION BY
8-62444E/03 P ROG RAM M 1 NG FS15 TAPE FORMAT
Some addresses whích cannot be used for the thís CNC can be used in the
Seńes 15 tape format. The specífıable value range for the Seríes 15 tape ADDRESSES AND
format ís basícally the same as that for the this CNC. Sectíons П to
SPECIFIABLE VALUE
П descńbe the addresses wíth a different specífiable value range.
RANGE FOR Series 15 If a value out of the specífıable value range ís specífıed, an alarm ís issued.
TAPE FORMAT
319
18. MEMORY OPERATION BY
FS15 TAPE FORMAT PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03

EQUAL-LEAD
THREADING
Format
G32IP_F_Q_;
oг
G32IP_E_G1_;
1PCombination of axis addresses
F:Lead along the longitudínal axis
E:Lead along the longitudinal axis
Q:sight of the threadíng start angle ignored if specífíed
Explanatíons
Address Although the Seríes 15 allows the operator to specífy the number of
threads per ínch wíth address E, the Seríes 15 tape format does not.
Addresses E and F are used in the same way for specífying the lead along
the longítudínal axís. The thread lead specífıed wíth address E ís therefore
also assumed as a continuous-state value for address F. Address Q for
specífyíng the shíft of the threadíng start angle can be specifıed but is
ígnored.
specífíable value range
for the thread lead
Address for thread lead mm ínput ínch input
E to to
9.999999inch
Command with a to to
decimal poínt 9.999999ínch
F
Command without a to to 9.9999inch
decimal point
Specífíable value range
for the feedrate
Address for feedrate mm input inch input
Feed lncrement 1 to 240000 to
per min- system 1a-B mm/min inch/min
ute lncrement 1 to 100000 to
F system 1s-C mm/mín ínch/min
Feed per rotatíon to to
mm/rev ínch/rev
Notes
Specífy the feedrate one more tíme when swítching between feed per
mínute and feed per rotatíon.
320
18. MFMORY OPERAГION BY
PROGRAMMING FS15 TAPE FORMAT B-62444E/o3

SUBPRGGRdλΠΠ
CALLING
Format
σИ9aPO000L00С 0;
P:Subprogram number
L:Repetition count
Explanatíon
Address Address L cannot be used in this CNC tape format but can be used in the
Seńes 15 tape format.
Subprogram number The specifıable va1ue range ís the same as that for this CNC 1 to 9999
If a value of more than four dígíts ís specifieď. the last four digits are
assumed as the subprogram number.
Repetítíon eount The repetítion count L can be specífied in the range from 1 to 9999. If no
repetitíon count is specífıed, 1 ís assumed.
18. MEMORY OPERATIΠN BY
FS15 TAPE FORMAT PROGRAMMING в-s2Ø4εıo3

CANNED CYCLE
Format
Outer / inner surface turníng cycie straight cutting cycie
G90X__Z_F_;
Outer / lnner surface turníng cycie taper cutting cycie
G90X_Z_1_F_;
1:Length of the taper section along the X-axis radius
Threading cycie straight threading cycle
G92X_Z_F_ _;
F:Thread iead
Q:Shift of the threading start angIe ignored íf specífíed
Threadíng cycie taper threadíng cycle
G92X_Z_ _F_;
1 Lэngth of the taper section along the X-axis radius
End surface turning cycie front taper cuttíng cyc e
G94X Z_ F_;
End surface turníng cycle front taper cutting cycle
G94X__Z_K_F_;
K:Length of the taper section aiong the Z-axis
Address Addresses I and K cannot be used for a canned cycle ín this CNC tape
format but can Ьe used in the Seríes 15 tape format. Address Q can be
specífíed in the Seńes 15 format but is ignored.
Specifiabie va1ue range Same as that for equal-lead threading in section П See sectíon
for the feedrate
18. MEMORY OPERATfON BY
B-62444E 03 PROGRAMMING FS15 TAPE FORMAT

MULTIPLE
REPETITIVE CANNED
TURNING CYCLE
FO trfl at
Outer / inner surface turning cycie
G71 P_Q_U_W_1_K_D_F_S_T_;
1:Length and direction of cuttíng aliowance for fínishing the rough
machining cycle along the X-axis ignored íf specified
K:Length and direction of cuttíng allowance for fíníshíng the rough
machining cycle along the Z-axís ígnored íf specífied
D :Depth of cut
End surface rough machining cycle
G72 P_О_U_W_І_K_D_F_S_T_;
1:Length and direction of cutting allowance for finíshing the rough
machining cycle along the X-axís ígnored if specífied
K:Length and direction of cuttíng allowance for fíníshing the rough
machining cycle along the Z-axis ignored íf specifíed
D :Depth of cut
ί:losed-Eoop turning cycic
G 73 P_Q_U _W_1_K_D_F_S_T_;
1:Length and directíon of clearance aiong the X-axis radius
K:Length and direction of ciearance along the Z-axis
D :Number of divisions
End surface cutting-off cycie
G74X_Z_1_K_F_D_;
or
G74U_W_1_K_F_D_;
1:Distance to be traveled aiong the X-axis
K:Depth of cut along the Z-axis
D:Clearance of the tool at the end of the cuttíng path
Outer / 1nner surface cutting-off cycle
G75X_Z_1_K_F_D_;
or
G75U_W_1_K_F_D_;
1:Distance to be traveied aiong the X-axís
K:Depth of cut along the Z-axis
D:Ciearance of the tool at the end of the cuttíng path
Mu1t1ple repetltive threading cycie
G7βX_Z_1_K_D_F_A_P_Q_;
1:Dífference of radiuses at threads
K :Heíght of thread crest radíus
D:Depth of the first cut radíus
A:Angie of the tool tip angle of ridges
P :Method of cutting
323
18. MEMORY OPERATION BY
FS15 TAPE FORMAT PROGRAMMING e-s2aaaεıoз
Addresses and If the followíng addresses are specífíed ín the Seríes 15 tape format, they
specífíable va1ue range are ígnored.
I and K for the outer/inner surface rough machiníng cycle G71
I and K for the end surface rough machíníng cycle G72
Address P for specífyíng the method of cuttíng for the multiple repetitíve
threading cycle G76 ís always P1 constant depth of cut wíth a síngle
edge regardless of the commаnd value for P. A va1ue of between 0 and
120 degrees cаn Ьe specífíed for tool típ angle A. If other values are ,
specifíed, P/S a1aгm 062 ís íssued.
Address D cuttíng depth and retractíon dístance can be specifıed wíth
a value between -99999999 and 99999999, ín the míninıum ínput
íncrement, even when calculator-líke decimal poínt ínput is specifıed
when bít 0 DPI of parameter No. 3401 ís set to 1 . When address D
contains a decimal poínt, P/S a1arm No. 007 ís íssued.
The specifıable value range for the feedrate ís the same as that for
equal-lead threadíng. See sectíon
324
18. MEMORY OPERATION BY
8-62444E/o3 PROGRAMMING FS15 TAPE FORMAT

CANNED DRILLING
CYCLE F RMATS
Format
Driliing cycie
G81X_C_Z_F_L_;orG82X_C_Z_R_F_L_;
R: Distance from the inítíal 1eve1 to the R posítíon
P: Dwei1 time at the bottom of the hole
F : Cutting feedrate
L : Number of repetitíons
Peck driliing cycle
G81X_C_Z_R_Q_P_F_L_;
R: Distance from the initial 1eve1 to the R posítion
Q: Depth of cut ín each cycle
P: Dwe11 time at the bottom of the hole
F : Cııtting feedrate
L : Number of repetítíons
High-speed peck dríiiing cycie
G83.1X_C_Z_R_Q_P_F_L_;
R: Distance from the ínítial 1eve1 to the R posìtion
Q: Depth of cut in each cycle
P: Dwe11 time at the bottom of the hole
F : Cutting feedrate
L : Number of repetitíons
Tapping
G84X_C_Z_R_P_F_L_;
R: Dístance from the ínítíal 1eve1 to the R posítíon
P: Dwe11 tíme at the bottom of the hole
F : Cutting feedrate
L : Number of repetítions
Rigid tappíng
G84.2X_C_Z_R_P_F__L_S_ ;
R: Distance from the inítial 1eve1 to the R posítíon
P: Dwe11 time at the bottom of the hole
F : Cutting feedrate
L. : Number of repetitions
S : Spindle speed
Boring cycle
G85X_C_Z_R_F_L_;orG89X_C_Z_R_P_F_L_;
R: Dístance from the ínítíaí 1eve1 to the R posítion
P: Dwe11 time at the bottom of the hole
F : Cuttíng feedrate
L : Number of repetitíons
Cancei
G80 ;
Explanatíons
For thís CNC tape format, the address used to specify the number of
Address repetitíons ís K. For the FS 15 tape format, it is L.
325
18. MEMORY OPERATION BY
FS15 TAPE FORMAT PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03
G code Some G codes are valid on1y for this CNC tape format or FS 15 tape
format. Specifyíng aп ínvalid G code results in P/S a1arm No. 10 being
generated.
G codes valíd on1y for the FS15 tape format G81, G82, ,
G codes valíd on1y for the Seríes 16/18/160/180 G87, G88
tape format
Posítíoníng plane and For this CNC tape format, the posítíoning p1aпe and drílling axís aгe
dríllíng axís determined according to the G code for the canned cycle used.
For the FS 15 tape format, the positioning p1aпe and dríllíng axís aгe
determined according to G 17/G 19.
The drillíng axís ís the basic axís Z-axis oг X-axis that does not 1ie in
the posítíoníng p1aпe.
O code Posltloning p1ane DrI111ng axis
G17 XY p1ane Z-axís
G19 YZ plane X-axís
Resettíng bít 1 FXY of parameter No. 5101 enables fıxing of the drilling
axís to the Z-axís.
Details of data Data for the cаnned cycle ís specifíed as follows:
specífyíng machíníng G X C Z R Q P F L ;
І l 1
__________
Drílling mode Dríllíng data Number of repetitions
Ho1e positíon data
setting Address Explanatlon
Drílling G Canned drilling cycle G code
mode
Ho1e posí- X/U Z/W lncremental or absolute value used to specify the
tion data C/H hole posítion
lncremental or absolute value used to specify the
Z/W X/U distance from the R positíon to the bottom of the
hole
lncremental value used to specífy the distance
from the ínítíal 1eve1 to the R posítion, oг absolute
R value used to specífy the R posítion. Whích to use
depends on bit 6 of parameter No. 5102 and the G
Drillíng code system beíng used.
mØe lncremental value used to specify the depth of cut
Q in each G83 or cycle wíth radíus program-
míng.
Dwe11 time at the bottom of the ho1e. The relatíon-
P ship between the dwe11 time and the specífied va1-
ue ís the same as that for G04.
F Cuttíng feedrate
Number of Number of repetítions for a sequence of cuttíng
repetítíons L operatíons. 1f L is not specífíed, ít ís assumed to
be 1.
326
18. MEMORY OPERATION BY
e-624ØE/03 PROGRAMM 1NG FS15 TAPE FORMAT
Specífyíng the R positíon The R position is specifıed as an íncremental va1ue for the distance
between the ínítiallevel to the R posítion. For the FS 15 tape format, the
parameter and the G code system used determíne whether an íncremental
or absolute value ís to be used to specífy the dístance between the inítial
1eve1 and the R posítion.
If bit 6 RAB of paτameter No. 5102 ís 0, an íncremental va1ue ís always
used. If ít is 1, the type of value used depends on the G code system used.
When G code system A ís used, аn absolute value is used. When G code
system B oг C ís used, an absolute value is used in G90 mode, and an
incremental value ís used in G91 mode.
serles
FS15 tape format 16/18/160/180
tape format
Bít 6 of parameter No. 5102 = 1 Bít 6 of parameter
No. 5102 = 0
G code system
A B C lncremental
lncremental
G90 G91
Absolute
Absolute lncremental
Details of the canned The correspondence between the G codes and this CNC tape format or
cycle FS 15 tape format ís listed below. Thís líst also provídes notes on dwe11
during a canned cycle.
No. GПП Use This CNC command format
1. G81 Drílling cycle G83 G87 PO
No dwellíng
2. G82 Drilling cycle G83 G87 P
The tool always dwells at the bottom of the ho1e.
З. G83 Peck drillíng cycle G83 G87
If the block contains a P command, the tool dwells at the bottom of the
ho1e.
4. Peck drilling cycle G83 G87
If the block contains a P command, the tool dwells at the bottom of the
ho1e.
Note Either type A oг B is selected accordíng to bít 2 RTR of
parameter No. 5101.
5. G84 Tapping G84 G88 I
f the block contaíns a P commаnd, the tool dwells after ít reaches the
bottom of the hole and after ít ís retracted to the R posítion.
6. Rigid tapping M29 5_ G84 G88
If the block contaíns a P command, the tool dwells before the spíndle
starts rotatíng in reverse at the bottom of the hole аnd before it starts
rotatíng in the normal dírection at the R posítíon.
7. G85 Boring cycle G85 G89 PO
No dwelling
8. G89 Boring cycle G85 G89 P_
The tool always dwells at the bottom of the ho1e.
Parameter No. 5114 determínes cleаrаnce d for G83 and
Clearance d for G83 and

327
18. MEMORY OPERATION BY
FS15 TAPE FORMAT PROGRAMMING в-62aaaεıo3
Dwe11 with G83 and For Seńes 15-T, G83 0г does not cause the tool to dwe11. For the
FS 15 tape format, the tool dwells at the bottom of the hole on1y if the
block contaíns a P address.
Dwellíng wíth G84 and In Seńes 15-T, G84/ causes the tool to dwe11 before the spindle
starts rotatíng іп eíther the normal ог reverse direction, according to the
correspondíng parameter settíng. For the FS15 tape format, when the
block contaíns a P address, the tool dwells at the bottom of the hole and
at the R posítion before the spindle starts rotating either in the norma1 or
reverse direction.
Rígíd tappíng For the FS 15 tape format, rígíd tappíng caп be specífíed by usíng the
methods listed below:
Format Condltlon parameter , comment
X_ Z_ R_ ;
S ; Settíng F10/F11 = 1
X_ Z_ R_ .... ;
M29 S
G84 X_ Z_ R_ ... , ςommoп to Series 16 format
M29 S G84 X_ Z_ R_ ... ,
G84 X_ Z_ R_ .... 8 ; G84 is made a G code for rígid tapping.
Bít 0 G84 of parameter No. 5200 = 1
G84 X_ Z_ R_ .... ; Commoп to Seríes 16 format
Diameter or radius Specifying 1 for bít 7 RDI of parameter No. 5102 causes the canned
programmíng cycle R command diameter oг radíus programmíng mode in the FS 15 tape
format to match the díameter or radíus programming mode for the drilling
axís.
Dísablíng the FS15 Specifying bít 3 F16 of parameter No. 5102 dísables the FS15 tape
format format. Thís applies on1y to the canned dńllíng cycle. However, the
number of repetitions must be specífíed by usíng the L address.
Notes
Setting bit 3 F16 of parameter No. 5102 to 1 overrides bits
6 RAB and 7 RD1 of parameter No. 5102; both settings
are assumed to be 0.
Limítatíons
C-axís as the dríllíng It is ímpossíble to use the C-axis the thírd axís as a dńllíng axis. So,
axís specífying G18 ZX p1аne generates P/S a1arm No. 28 p1ane selection
command error .
Clampíng the C-axís For the FS15 tape format, ít ís impossible to specífy aгі M code for
clampíng the C-axís.
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 19. H1GH SPEED CYCLE CUTTING
1
9 FUNCTIONS FOR H1GH SPEED CUTTING
19. H1GH SPEED CYCLE CUTTING PROGRAMMING 8-62444E 3
191 This function can convert the machíníng profıle to a data group that can
be distńbuted as pulses at hígh-speed by the macгo compiler and macro
H1GH iРEED CYCLE
executor. The functíon can also call and execute the data group as a
CUTTING machiníng cycle usíng the CNC command G05 command .
Thís function is applied to 1-path lathe control.
Format
G05 P10000 LOMC ;
P10000 ís number of the machining cycle to be called fìrst:
P10001 to P10999
L000 ís repetition count of the machining cycle
L1 applíes when this parameter is omitted. :
L1 to L999
Caі1 and execute the data for the high speed cutting cycle specïfıed by the
macro compiler and macro executor usíng the above command.
Cyc1e data can be prepared for up to 999 cycles. Select the machíníng
cycle Ьy address P. More than one cycle can be called and executed in
seńes usíng the cycle connectíon data in the header.
specífy the repetition count of the called machíníng cycle by address L.
The repetition count in the header can be specífíed for each cycle.
The connectíon of cycles and their repetition count are explained below
wíth an example.
Example Assume the followíng:
Cyc1e 1 Cyc1e connectíon data 2 Repetitíon count 1
Cyc1e 2 Cyc1e connectíon data 3 Repetítíon count 3
Cyc1e 3 Cyc1e connection data 0 Repetitíon count 1
G05 P10001 L2 ;
The followíng cycles aгe executed in sequence:
Cycles 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 1, 2, 2, 2, аnd3
Notes
Notes
i.,An alarm is issued if the function is executed τn the G41/G42
mode.
2. single block stop, dry run/feedrate override, automatìc
acceleration/deceieration and handle interruption are
disabled during high-speed cycle machining.
e-6гØ4ε/oз PROGRAMMING 19. H1GH SPEED CYCLE CUTTING
Alarms
A1aгm Descri ptI ons
number
115 The contents of the header are invalid. This alarm is ïssued in
the following cases.
1. The header corresponding to the number of the specifìed
cá1 machining cycle was rıot found.
2. A cycle connection data value ís not in the valid range
0 to 999 .
3. Thы number of data items in the header is not in the valid
range 1 to 32767 .
4. The first variable No. for storing data in the executable
format is not in the va1id range 20000 to 85535 .
5. The last variable No. for storing data in the executable
format exceeds the limit 85535 .
6. The first variable No. for start data in the executable
format overlaps with a variable No. used in the header.
178 Hígh-speed cycle machíníng was specífied in the G41/G42
mode.
179 The number of control axes specifíed in parameter 7510 ex-
ceeds the maximum number.

19. H1GH SPEED CYCLE CUTTING PROGRAMMING в-s2aaaε/oз
1 2 Duríng high-speed machíníng, the dístributíon processing status ís
monítored. When dístríbutíon processíng termínates, P/S a1arm No. 000
QίЅTRВUТ9C N
and P/S alarm No. 179 are íssued upon completíon of the hígh-speed
PROCЕЅЅlNt `,à machíning command accordíng to the settíng of ITPDL bit 7 of
TERM NдT ОN parameter No. 7501 .
M JNІTОRING
These P/S alarms can be canceled oп1y by turníng off the CNC power.
FUNСТЮN FC R ТFłЕ
Н1СН- эРЕED
M.,ACHiNiNG
COMMAND G05
ExpianatíлCıĆ
Hígh - speed machining High-speed machining usíng the hígh-speed remote buffer A functíon,
command hígh-speed remote buffer B function, and high-speed cycle functíon
based on the G05 command
Distřibutíon processíng Failure to perform normal dístríbutíon processíng because distribution
termínation prосessíng requíred for high-speed machining exceeded the CNC
processing capacity, or because dístribution data sent from the host was
delayed for some reason while the hìgh-speed remote buffer A or G
functíon was being used
Number PAessage a Contents
000 F LEASЕ TURN OFF POWER During high-speed machining,
p distribution přocessing was ter-
ббI minated.
Related parameters:
Remote buffer transfer baud rate
pařameter íVo. 1331
179 FARAPv1. NC. 7510 SETTlN Number of controlled axes in
EEPOP high-apeed machining parame-
ter Na. 7150
Ńigh-spвed aκis seiection dur-
ing high-speed machining bit 0
of parameteř No 7510
в-62aØE/o3 PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION
2 fl Ј AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION

333
20. ÃX1S CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMM 1NG B-62444E/03
Polygonal turning means machíníng a polygonal fígure Ьy rotatíng the
workpíece and tool at a certaín ratio. POLIGONAL
TURNING
a Polygonal turning
By changing condítíons which are rotation ratio of workpiece and tool and
number of cutters,the machíníng fígure can be changed to a square oг
hexagon. The Machíníng time can be reduced as compared with
polygonal fígure machiníng usíng C and X axes of the po1ar coordinate.
The machíned fígure however, is not exactly polygonal. Generally,
polygonal turning ís used for the heads of square and/or hexagon bolts oг
hexagon nuts.
-
a
b Hexagon bolt
Format
G51 .2 G251 P_О_;
P,Q: Rotatíon ratío of spíndle and Y axís
specífy range:lntefer 1 to 9 for both
P and G1
When O 1s a posltive value, Y axls
makes posltive rotatlon.
When G11s a negative value, Y axls
makes negative rotatlon.
334
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION
Explanatíons Too1 rotatíon for polygonal turning ís controlled by CNC controlled axís.
This rotary axís of tool is called Y axís ín the followíng description.
The Y axís ís controlled by command, so that the rotatíon speeds
of the workpiece mounted on the spíndle previously specifíed Ьy
S-command and the tool becomt the specífíed ratio.
Example Rotatíon ratio of workpíece spíndle to Y axís ís 1:2, and the
Y axís makes posítíve rotation.
Q2;
When siinultaneous start is specífied by , the one-rotatíon sígnal
sent from the posítíon codes set on the spíndle ís detected. After thís
detectíon. the Y axis rotation is controoled according to the rotation ratío
P:Q while synchronizing wíth the spindle speed. Namely, the Y axís
rotatíon ís controlled so that the spindle аnd Y axis stand in a relation of
P:Q. Thís relation will be maintaíned untíl the plygonal turníng cancel
command is executed or reset operatíon . The direction of Y axis
rotation ís determined by the code
Q and not affected Ьy the dírectíon of the 1position coder rotatíon.
Synchroníxatíon of the spindle and Y axís ís canceled by the following
commnad:
;
When ís specífíed, synchronízatíon of the spindle and Y axís is
canceled and the Y axis stops.
Thís synchronizatíon is also canceledd in the followíng casset:
i Power off
íí Emergency stop
iíí Servo a1aгm
iv Reset external reset sígnal ERS, reset/rewínd ignal RRW, and
RESET
key on the CRT/MDI paпe1
v Occurrence of P/S a1аrm Nos. 217 to 221
Example
GOOX100. ; Workpíece rotatíon speed
1000rmp
Q2 ; Too1 rotatíon start tool
rotatíon speed 2000гpm
; X axís infeed
G04X2. ;
;X axis escape
; Too1 rotatíon stop
M05 ; Spindle stop
Specífy and always in a single block.
335
20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в-62aaaεıo3
Príncíple of Polygonal The príncíple of polygonal turníng is explained below. In the
Turníng figure below the radíus of tool and workpíece are A and B, and
the angular speeds of tool and workpíece are aand β. The orígin
of XY cartesían coordínates ís assumed to be the center of the
workpíece.
Símplífyíng the explanation, consíder that the tool center exists
at the position
Po A,0 oп the workpíece períphery, and the tool nose starts
from posítíon Pto A B, 0 .
A ; Workpioca radius
B ; Roo1 radíus
a ; WorØiece angular speed
. χ / ; Too1 angular speed
Po A, 0
Pto A-0, 0
In this case, the tool nose posítion Pt Xt,Yt after tíme t is
expressed by equation 1:
Xt=Acos at-Bcos β-a t
Equatíon 1
Yt=Asín at+Bsín β-a t
Assuming that the rotation ration of workpíece to tool ís 1:2,
пamely, β=2a,
equation 1 ís modífíed as follows
Xt=Acosat-Bcosat= A-B cosat
Equatíon 2
Xt=Asínat+B sínat= A+B sinat
Equatíon 2 índícates that the tool nose path draws an ellipse
wíth longer díameter A+B and shorter díameter A B.
Then consider the case when one tool is set at 180 symmetrícal
posítions, for atotal of two. It ís seen that a square can be
machíned with these tools as shown below.
336
B-62444El03 P ROG RAM M i N G 20. AX15 CONTROL FUNCTION
If three tools are set at every 1200, the machíníng figure wi11 be
a hexagon as shown below.
- 337
20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION P RбΓ RAм м ι NÚ 8-62444E/лθ
Notes
1. For the maximum rotation speed of too1, refer to the rnanuaİ publíshed by the MTB. Do not
specífy a spindle speed or ratio to spíndle speed exceedíng the maximum rotation speed of the
too1.
2. The Y axis, uniike the other controlled axes, cannot be specifîied a move command as Y--. That
is, an axis move command is unnecessary for the Y axis. Because, when po ygonai
turníng mode ís specifíed, it is only necessary to control the Y axis so that the tool rotates at a
certain ratio to the spíndle rotation speed.
However, only the reference point return command G28V0; caп be specified since the Y axis
rotation is stopped at the unstable posìtion when polygonai turning mode cancel
command ís specified. 1f the tool rotation start position ís unstable , a problem may occur, for
example, when the same figure is machined wíth a fíníshing tool after once machined wíth a
roughing too1.
Specification of G28V0; for Y axís is equal to the orientation command for the spíndle. 1n the
other axes, unlike the manual reference point return, G28 usually makes reference point return
without detecting the deceleration limit. However, with G28V0; , for the Y axis, reference point
return is executed by detecting the deceleratíon límit, like manual reference poínt return.
To machine a workpíece into the same figure as the prevíous one, the tool and the spindle must
be in the same positíon as the prevíous time when the tool starts rotating. The tool is set start
rotation when the one-rotation signal of the posítion coder set on the spindle is detected.
З. Unlíke the other controlled axes, the least command increment of the Y axis is not degree
sínce an axis move command is unnecessary for the Y axís. The least command íncrement of
the Y axis is related to parameters such as feedrate.
Therefore, pay attention to these parameters upon machine adjustment.
L: Move distance deg per motor rotation
Q: Number of pulses per pulse coder rotation
CMR : Command multiply Set parameter No. 1820
DMR : Detection multíply Set parameter , 5 and 6 However,when flexible
feed gear ís used,set the value of numerator and the value of denominator of
DM R
Least command increment = L x CMR
Q x DMR
DeĺectÍon unİt _ Least commaпd increment
CMR
L
QxDMR
Move distance per Y axís rotatíon = Leasτ co ι ш d ί cгeme Parameter
For example, in case of L=720 deg, Q=3000 pulses, CMR=2,the move distance is as follows;
Least command increment :
Detection unit :
Move dístance per Y axis rotation : 3000
І + ]
1 Errur regíster Detector
Least commanc
íncrement

Detectíon unit
DMR
VVhen the least command increment of the Y axis is deg, the parameters concerning the
feedrate of the Y axis should be set in unit of 120 deg/min Thousandfold of least
command increment , not ín 1 deg/min.
_ 38 __
20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING
4. The Y axis used to control tool rotation for polygonaİ turning uses the 4th axis. However, by
setting parameters, the 3rd axis may also be used. 1n this case, that axis must be
named C axis.
5. Among the position display of the Y axis, the display for the machine coordinate value
MECHINE wi11 change from a range of 0 to the parameter setting the amount of movement per
revolutíon as the Y axis moves.
Absolute or relative coordinate vaİues are not renewed.
6. An absolute position detector cannot be set on the Y axis.
7. The followíng signals become either valid or invalid in relation to the Y axis in synchronous
operatíon.
Va1id signals in relation to Y axis:
machíne lock
servo off
1nvalíd signals in relation to Y axis:
feed hold
interlock
ovrride
dry run
During a dry run, however, there is no wait for a revolution signal ín the block.
8. Manual contínuous feed or handle feed is invalid when the Y axis is in synchronous operation.
9. The starting point of the threading process becomes inconsistent when performed duríng
synchronous operation.
Cancel the synchronizing by executing when threading.
Y axís in synchronous operation is not irсl::ded ín the number of axis controlled
símultaneously.
339
20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в-624Øεı0з
The roll-over functíon prevents coordínates for the rotation axis from
overflowíng. The roll-over functíon is enabled by setting bit 0 of ROTARY AX1S
parameter 1008 to 1.
ROLL OVER
a
Explanations For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specífíed іп the
command. For an absolute command, the coordinates after the tool has
moved are values set in paranıeter No. 1260, and rounded by the angle
corresponding to one rotation. The tool moves in the dírectíon in which +.
the fínal coordínates aгe closest when bit 1 ROAx of parameter No. 1008
ís set to 0. Dísplayed values for relative coordínates aгe also rounded by
the angle correspondíng to one rotation when bit 2 ROAx of parameter
No. 1008 ís set to 1
Examples Assume that axís C is the rotatíng axis and that the amount of movement
per rotatíon is parameter No. 1260 = 360000 . When the
followíng program ís executed usíng the roll-over function of the rotatíng
axís, the axís moves as shown below.
Sequence Actual Absolute coordlnate
φ number movement value after movement
value end
N1 ; N1 -150 210
N2 ; N2 -30 180
N3 ; N3 -80 100
N4 ; N4 120
N5 ; N5 -840 0
Relatíve -720 -360 -0 360
coordínate value
Absolute _00 -0 -0 -0
coordínate value
1
г10 AØoіuτe
N1
180 N2 -
100
N3
I 120
N4
N5

1
340
в-sг4Øεıoз PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION
The sinıple synchronizatíon control functíon allows synchronous and
norma1 operatíons on two specifıed axes to be switched, accordíng to an
SIMPLE
ínput signal from the machine.
SYNCHRONIZATION For a machíne with two tool posts that can be índependently driven with
CONTROL different controlled axes, thís functíon enables the operatíons descríbed
below.
This sectíon descríbes the operatíons of a machine having two tool posts,
both of whích cаn be independently operated along the X-axís and
Y-axís. If your machine uses other axes for the same purpose, substítute
the corresponding axís names for X and Y.
Fíg. a Sample Axís Confíguration of a Machine on which
the símple Synchronization Control Functíon ís Executed
Explanatíons
Synchronous operation Synchronous operation is possíble oп a machíne havíng two tool posts.
In synchronous operatíon mode, movement on one axís can be
synchronízed wíth movement specífıed for another axís. The move
command can be specified for one of the two axes, whích is referred to
as the master axis. The other axis, for referred synchronization with the
master axís ís maíntained, ís referred to as the slave axís. If the master axis
is X and the slave axís ís Y, synchronous operation oп the X-axís master
axís and Y-axís slave axis are performed according to Xxxxx
commands issued for the master axis.
In synchronous operatíon mode, a move commаnd specífied for the
master axís results in sinıultaneous operatíon of the servo motors of the
master аnd slave axes.
In this mode, synchronízatíon error compensation is not performed. That
ís, any posítíoning error between the two servo motors is not monítored,
nor is the servo motor of the slave axis adjusted to mínimíıe any error.
No synchronízation error alarm is output. Automatic operations can be
synchronízed, but manual operatíons cannot.
Normal operation Normal operatíon ís performed when dífferent workpieces are machíned
on dífferent tables. As wíth normal CNC control, move commands for
the master and slave axes aгe specified with the addresses of those axes
X and Y . Move commands for the two axes can Ьe specified in an
ídentícal block.
1 Accoτding to the Xxxxx command programmed for the master axís,
movement ís performed along the X-axís, as in norma1 mode.
341
20. AX1S CONTFiOL FUNCTiON PROGАAMMWG B-62aa4εıo3
2 Accordíng to the Yyyyy command programmed for the slave axis,
movement is performed along the Y-axis, as in norma1 mode.
3 According to the Xxxxx Yyyyy command, simultaneous movements
aгe performed along both the X-axís and Y-axís, as iri norma1 mode.
Both automatic and manual operatíons can Ьe controlled, as in norma1
CNC control.
swítchíng synchronous For details of how to switch the synchronous and normal operations, refer
and normal operatíons to the manual supplíed by the machíne tool buílder.
Automatíc reference If a command for automatíc reference posítíon return G28 , oг return to
posítíon return the second, third, or fourth reference position G30 , is issued in
synchronous operatíon mode, a reference positíon return ís performed for
the X-axis, and an ídentical movement is performed for the Y-axis. If
this Y-axis movement agrees with a return to the reference posítíon on
the Y-axís, a lamp índicating that reference positíon return has been
completed for the Y-axís also lights.
It is recommended, however, that G28 аnd G30 Ьe specified in normal
operation mode.
Checkíng automatíc If a command for checkíng automatic reference positíon return G27 ís
reference positíon return íssued in synchronous operation mode, identícal movements are
performed for the X-axís and Y-axís.
If these X-axis and Y-axís movements correspond to returns to the
reference positions oп the X-axís and Y-axis, the lamps índicatíng that
reference posítion return has been completed for the X-axís and Y-axis
líght. If not, an alarm ís output.
It is recommended, however, that G27 be specifíed in norma1 operatíon
mode.
S1ave axís command If a move command ís specified for the slave axis in synchronous
operation mode, P/S alarm 213 ís output.
Master and slave axes The master axis is defıned ín parameter 8311. The slave axis ís specífied
by aп external signal.
Límítatíons
Coordinate system If coordínate system setting or tool compensation causing a shíft in the
settíng and tool coordinate system is performed in synchronous operation mode, P/8
compensatíon a1aгm 214 ís output.
External deceleratíon, In synchronous operation mode, the sígnal for external deceleration,
ínterlock, machíne lock ínterlock, oг machíne lock of the master axis on1y is va1id. The
corresponding slave axis sígnal is ígnored.
Pítch error Pítch error compensatíon and backlash compensatíon are performed
compensatíon separately for the master and slave axes.
Manual absolute swítch In synchronous operation mode, the mаnual absolute switch must be set
to on ÁBS must be set to 1 . If the switch is set to off, the corгect slave
axís movement may not be made.
Manual operation Manua1 operatíons cannot be synchronized.
342
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTiON
г A remote buffer can contiriuously supply a large amount of data to the
CN C at high speeds when connected to the host computer or input/output
H1GH-SPEEU FtEN40TE
equipınent via a seńal ínterface.
EUFFER
RS-232-C / RS-422 Host
E
Remote putв
CNC buffør
lnput/output
equipment
When the remote buffer ís connected online to the host computer, fast and
reliable DNC operation ís possible.
The remote buffer functíon íncludes high-speed remote buffer A and
high-speed remote buffer B for high-speed machining. High-speed
remote buffer A uses bírıary data. For detaíls on remote buffer
specifications, refer to the Reınote Buffer Supplement B-61802-1 .
гı Specify GΠ5 on1y in a block using normal NC command format. Then
specify move data in the specíal format explained below. When zero is Fiígh-speed remote
specifíed as the travel dístance along a11 axes, normal NC comınand
buffer A G05
format can be used again for subsequent command specifïcation.
CNC
Remote buffer

_ RS-232-C / RS-422 ј
Hosi computer
i

20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в-sг444εıoз
F rmat
Binary input operatíon enabied : G05;
Ğinary input operation dísabled : The travei distance a cng
a1 axes are set to zero.
Data fcrmat for binary ínput operatíon
1
Byte

Hígh byte
1 st axis
L ow hyte
Da ta
sequence
Higiı byte
2nd axis
Low byte

Hígh byte t.
Nth axís
Low byte

Check byte
in the data format for íbinary Input operation, the travei dіs[ance aíong
each axls 2 bytes per unít time is specifíed. The travel dístances
along aІІ axes are piac,ed sequentiaily from the fifst axis, then a check
byte ls added. The data Ic-egth fo one biαck дs 2 x N+ 1 bvtes .
Aii dв[a must be speclfied in binary.
Explanati0ns
Seleetíng tĆ e unít tíme The unit time in ms can be selected by setting bíts 4, 5, and 6 of
parameter No. 7501.
Te avei dístance d0ta The followíng unit is used for specifying the travel distance along each
axís. A negative travel dístance ís índícated in 2 s complement.
Increment system Is-B IS-C lJnit
-;---
Mi1limeter machine mm
lnch machine ^ch
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION
The data format of the travel distance is as follows. The bíts marked are
used to specífy a travel distance per unit time.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ΓQ 4
L
Example: When the travel dístance ís 700 μm peτ unit time millimeter
nia1iiiie witń increment system 1S-B
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Ó 0 1 0 1 4 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 Qι
-
C9ıeck Byte A11 bytes of the block except for the check byte [2 NІ bytes are sumnıed
up, and any bits above 8th bít are díscarded.
Transfer speed The CNC reads 2 x N+ 1 -byte data where N is the iiiimber of axes for
every unit tinıe that is set in the parameter. To a11ow the CNC to continue
machíning without interruption, the following minimum baud rate is
required for data transfer between the host and remote buffer:
2xN x -- x1000 baiid T : Unit tíme
Cutter compensaťíon lť GUa ıs specified iıı cuttcr coτupensation mode, the P/S 178 a1aгm is
issued.
Feed hold and ínterloek Feed hold and interlock are effectíve.
Mírror ímage The mírror ímage functíon programnıable mirror image and setting
mirror image caniiot be turned on or off in the G05 mode.
Acceleratíon / In bínary ínput operation mode, when tool movement starts and stops in
deceleratiºn type cutting feed mode, exponentíal acceleration/deceleration ís perfornıed
the acceleratíon/deceleratíon time constant set in parameter No. 1622 is
used .
Limitatíons
Moda1 command In binary inptit operatíon mode, on1y linear ínterpolation as specífíed in
the defíned data format ís executed equivalent to the incremental
command for linear ínterpolation .
1nvalíd functíons The single bloek, feedrate override, and iiiaxiniuni cutting feedrate clamp
functíons have no effect. The program restart, block restart, and
high-speed machiniııg functions cannot be used. In addition, miscella-
neous functíons cannot Ьe executed in binary operation.
Memory regístratíon No data can be stored in memory.
20. AXiS CONTROL FUNCTI N pRnGRAMMING B-62Øaεıo3
The synchronízation control functíon enables the synchronízatíon of
movements on two axes. If a move command is programmed for one of ЅYNCHRONІZАT10N
those two axes master axis , the functíon automatically issues the same
CONTROL command to the other axis slave axís , thus establishíng synchronization
between the two axes. The parkíng state can be selected to suppress
movement of the slave axís, even if a move command ís specífied for the
master axís. If the parking state ís used wíth the synchronízation control
functíon, the operation can be controlled as follows:
1 Synchronízes the movement on the slave axís with that of the master
axís.
2 Performs slave axís movement according to the move command
progranuned for the master axís. However, the movement specífíed
by the command ís not made for the master axís ítself master parkíng .
3 Updates the slave axis coordínates accordíng to the dístance travelled
along the master axís. However, no movement is made for the slave
axis slave parkíng .
When method 2 above ís used, the followíng operation can be perfoiined
Example Sуnchronizing movem nts on the Z-axis and Y-axís
master tзarking
a 1 э
_.--
Movement is performed for the X-axis and Y-axis according to
commands íssued for the X-axís аnd Z-axís. The Y-axís movement is
synchronízed with that of the Z-axís. If the Z-axis is set to the parkíng
state, the coordinates on the Z-axís and Y-axis are updated.
As the coordinates on the Z-axis and Y-axís are always updated, the
coordínate system need not be reset when the synchronízation status is
changed. A move command can be executed immediately after the status
ís changed.
Notes
1. in the synchronization control described above, an identica
move conımand is simultaneousiy output for two servo
processing systems. Positional error between the two servo
motors is not monitored, nor is either servo motor adjusted
to mïnimize the error. That is, synchronizaticn error
compensation is not carried out.
2. The method used to specify the synchrvnization controi
function varies with the machïne tool builder. For detaiis,
refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool buiider.
-- 346 --
PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION 8-624ØE/03
This functíon sets an axís B-axís índependent of the basíc controlled
axes X1, Z1, X2, and Z2 and allows dríllíng, boríng, oг other machining B-AX1S CONTROL
along the B-axís, ín paralle1 wíth the operations for the basíc controlled
G100, G101, G102, axes. The X2 and Z2 axes can be used in two-path control mode.
G103, G110
Format
Registeríng operatíon
programs
G101-G100 : Starts registering the fírst program.
G102-G100 : Starts regísteríng the second program.
G103-G100 : Starts regísteríng the third program.
G100 : Ends regístering of the programs.
Three operatíons programs oп the B-axís can be regístered. 1n two-
path control mode, three programs caп Ьe registered for each tool post.
The B-axis operatíon program must be specífíed in the blocks between
G101, G102, oг G103 and G100, allowíng ít to be díscriminated from the
normal NC program.
The regístered operation is started upon executíng the corresponding M
code, described below.
01234 ;
Normal NC program
G101 ;- Starts regístering of a B-axis
operation program.
B-axis operatíon program
G 100 ; Ends registeríng of the B-axis
operatíon program.
Normal NC program
M30 ;
Note 1n the block of G101, G102, G103, or G100, specify no other codes.
347
20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в-s2a4aεЈОз
Command used to start
the operatíon
To start an operation, the míscellaneous functíons M specífied in
parameters 8251 to 8253 are used.
Parameter 8251:
M code used to start operatíon of the fírst program
Parameter 8252:
M code used to start operation of the second program
Parameter 8253:
M code used to start operatíon ef the third program
01234
Starts executing the registered B-axıs operaiion. 1n
M , - subsequent blocks, the normal NC program and the
B-axís operation program are executed in para11e1.
is specified in parameters 8251 to 8253.
M30 ;
Example
01234 ;
G50 X100. Z200. ;
G 101 ; ρ Starts regístering of an
G00 B 10. ; operation program.
M03 ;
G04 P2500 ; 0 Blocks of the B-axis
G81 B20. R15. F500 ; operatíon program
G28 ;
G 100 ; 0 Ends registering of the
G00 X80. Z50. ; operation program.
GO1 X45. F1000 ;
GOO X10. ;
M 3] Command used to start the
GO1 Z30. F300 ; programmed operation
M30 ;
ú to 03 : Specify the B-axís operation program in blocks between
G101, G102, oг G103 and G100. The program is registered ín pro-
gram memory.
[] : Starts executing the B-axis operatíon registered with []] to [
above. 1n subsequent blocks, the normal NC operatíon and the B-
axis operation are executed in para11e1. An M code of the miscella
neous function ís used to start the B-axis operation. The M code,
used to start the operation, ís specified ín parameters 8251 to 8253.
Síngle-motíon operatíon
G110 [operation command];
A single-motion operatíon for the B-axís can be specifíed and
executed as shown above. Such an operatíon need not be regís-
tered as a specíal first to third program. Nor does ít need to be
Ьy a specíal command, as descríbed above.
348
e-62дØE О3 PROGRAMMING 20. AX15 CONTROL FUNCTİON
Explanations
Specifying two-path One of the following three two-path control modes can be selected:
control mode 1 B-axís control ís executed for either tool post 1 0г 2.
2 B-axís control ís executed separately for tool posts 1 and 2.
3 Identical B-axís control ís executed for tool posts 1 and 2.
The mode is selected accordíng to the value specifíed for parameter 8250
for each tool post.
Codes that can be used The following 13 G codes, and the M, S, and T codes of the miscellaneous
in a B-axís operatíon functíons, can be used in a B-axís operatíon program:
program
Code Descrlptlon
G00 Positioning rapíd traverse
G01 Linear interpolation cuttíng feed
G04 Dwe11
G28 Reference position return, automatíc coordinate system setting
G80 Canned cycle, cancel
G81 Dríllíng cycle, spot dríllíng
G82 Dríllíng cycle, counterboríng
G83 Peck drillíng cycle
G84 Tappíng cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boríng cycle
G98 Feed per minute
G99 Feed per rotatíon
M Auxi1iary function
S Auxiliary functíon
T Auxiliary function, tool offset
G28 reference positíon return
Unlike the norma1 G28 cycle, the G28 cycle for a B-axís operatíon does
not include intermediate point processing. For example, the following
cannot be specífíed:
G28 ;
G80 to G86 canned drílling cycle
Of the cаnned dňlling cycles supported by the FANUC Seńes 16 or Seňes
18 for machíning centers, those cycles equívalent to G80 to G86 can be
executed.
Data can Ьe specified in the same way as for the FANUC Seňes 16 or
Seňes 18 for machining centers, except for the followíng points:
1. The drilling posítíon ís not specifıed wíth X аnd Y.
2. The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole is specífıed with
B.
349
20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION PROΓRAMMING B-62444E/OЗ
3. A11 operations are executed in the ínitíallevel return mode.
4. The repetítíon count K cannot be specífíed.
5. In canned cycle mode, point R must be specifıed. If poínt R is
omitted, P/S alarm No. 5036 ís output.
6. The dríllíng start poínt d for the G83 peck drilling cycle ís specífied
with parameter 8258.
G98, G99 feed per mínute, feed per rotation
The MDF bit bít 2 of parameter 8241 specífies an ínítíal
contínuous-state G code for G110, or the G code to start registration of
the operation program G101, G102, G103 .
When the MDF bít ís set to 0, the inítial continuous-state code ís G98.
When the MDF bit is set to 1, the ínitial contínuous-state code ís G99.
Example
When MDF ís set to 0
G110 B100. F1000. ; 1000 mm/min
G110 G99 B100. F1 ; 1 mm/rev
Note
1n two-path control mode, the system uses the actual
spíndle speed, calculated from the feedback sígnal output
by the positíon coder connected to the tool post to which the
controlled axis belongs.
M, S, and T codes auxilíary functions
Accordíng to a numeríc value subsequent to address M, S, oг T, the bínary
code and strobe signal are sent to the machine. The codes and sígnals for
addresses M, S, and T are a11 output to an ídentical ínterface and can be
used to control power-on or power-off of the machine. For this purpose,
the axís control ínterface of the PMC is used, whích díffers from that used
for the míscellaneous functíons for the normal NC program. The
following M codes, used to control the spindle, are automatically output
during the G84 tapping or G86 boríng cycle:
M03: Forward spindle rotatíon
M04: Reverse spíndle rotatíon
M05: 5pіnd1e stop
T to T + 9 , where ís the number specífíed in parameter 8257, are
used as the codes of the auxilíary functions to adjust the tool offset.
Example
T50 to T59 íf parameter 8257 is set to 50
1. Aп M, S, or T code must not be specifíed in a block contaíning
another move commаnd. The M, S, and T codes must not be
specífıed in аn identical block.
2. Usually, normal NC operatíon and B-axís operatíon are
índependent of each other. Synchronizatíon between operatíons
can be established by coordinatíng the míscellaneous functions of
the лoгma1 NC program and B-axis operation program.
350
в-s2444εıoз PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION
Normal NC operatíon Regístered B-axis operatíon
M 11 ; G00 B 111 ;
GO1 X999 : GO1 B222 ;
G28 Z777 ; G28 ;
M50 ; M50 ;
G00 X666 ; G81 B444 R111 F222 ;
Upon receivíng M50 of both the norma1 NC program and the B-axis
program, the PMC ladder outputs the completíon sígnals F1N for the
two míscellaneous functíons. G00 X666 of the noгma1 NC program and
G81 B444 R111 F222 of the B-axís program aгe executed
símultaneously.
Custom macro
Custom macro vańables 1oca1 variables, commoп vańables, system
variables can be used in an operatíon program between G101,
G 102, oг G 103 аnd G 100.
1. The value of the macro vańable ís calculated not from the data exísting
upon executíon of the B-axís operatíon, but from the data existíng at
registratíon of the operatíon program.
2. An ínstructíon that causes a branch to a location beyond the range of
G101, G102, oг G103 to G100 ís processed without beíng checked.
З. In the two-path control mode, tool posts 1 and 2 use different macгo
vańables.
Operation program When a new operatíon program ís registered, the previous operatíon
program ís automatícally deleted.
If an error ís detected in an operation program to be registered, the
program is inítíalízed but is not regístered.
ι
Moda1 In the same way as a norma1 NC program, the B-axís operation program
cаn use the followíng as modal data: modal G codes, F codes, and P, Q,
and F codes in the canned cycle. These codes do not affect the modal
ínformation of the norma1 NC program. When a B-axis operatíon
program is started by G101, G102, oг G103 , the ínítíal modal data ís set
for the program. It is not affected by the prevíous modal informatíon.
Example
GO1 X10. F1000 ;
G101 G102, G103 ; 2
B 10. ; 3
GO1 B-10. F500 ;
G100 ; 5
X-10. ;
Irrespective of the modal ínformatíon for norma1 operatíon GO1
specified in block , Ь1осk 3 specifíes G00 íf the MDG bít bit 1 of
parameter 8241 ís set to 0, or GO1 if the MDG bit is set to 1.
B1ock causes movement wíth F1000, specífied in block 1.
351
20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING в-sгØ4εıoз
Operation start The MST bit bit 7 of parameter 8240 specífíes the method used to start
coмmarıd the B-axís operatíon as described below:
If the MST bít ís set to 1, the B-axís operation is started when the M code
to start the operatíon ís executed.
If the MST bít is set to 0, the B-axís operation ís started when the M code
used to start the operatíon is executed and the PMC outputs the
míscellaneous functíon completion sígnal FIN .
Up to fıve M codes for startíng the programs can be stored. The programs
corresponding to these M codes are executed in succession. In two-path
control mode, up to five codes can be stored for each tool post.
Example
When the first, second, and third programs are started by M40, M41,
and M42, respectively
01234. ;
M40 ; M code for starting the fırst program
M41 ; M code for startíng the second program
M42 ; M code for startíng the third program
M40 ; M code for startíng the fırst program
M41 ; M code for starting the second program
M30 ;
As M41 ís specífıed while the program started by M40 is beíng executed,
the second program is automatically started upon termination of the fírst
program.
M42, M40, and M41, specífíed duňng executíon of the fırst program, аre
stored such that the corresponding programs are executed in the same
order as that in which the M codes are specífied.
If six or more M codes for starting the programs are specífíed while a
program ís being executed, P/S alarm 5038 ís output.
In two-path control mode, the M code specifıed for tool post 1 starts the
B-axís program regístered for tool post 1. The M code specified for tool
post 2 starts the B-axís program regístered for tool post 2.
specífying absolute or The amount of travel along the B-axís can be specífied in eíther absolute
íncremental mode oГ íncremental mode. In absolute mode, the end poínt of travel along the
B-axís is programmed. In incremental mode, the amount of travel along
the B-axis is programmed directly.
The ABS bít bít 6 of parameter 8240 ís used to set absolute or
incremental mode. When the ABS bit ís set to 1, absolute mode is
selected. When the ABS bit ís set to 0, incremental mode is selected. The
mode is specífıed with thís parameter when the program ís registered.
352
e-sгaØεıoз PROORAMMING 20. AX1S CONTRCL FUNCTION
Specifying a tool offset The T ; command shífts the end poínt of the specífıed B-axís travel, in
either the positíve oг negatíve direction, Ьy the amount specifıed with the
B-axís offset screen. If this functíon ís used to set the difference between
the programmed tool posítíon and actual tool positíon in machíníng, the
program need not be modifíed to correct the tool position.
The value specified wíth parameter 8257 ís assígned to the auxiliary
function to cаncel the offset. The subsequent nine numbers are assígned
to the tool offset functíons. These auxíliary functíon numbers are
dísplayed on the B-axis offset screen. For detaíls, see OPEØTION.
Single-motíon operatíon If a G110 biock ís specífıed, a síngle-motíon operatíon along the B-axís
can be specífıed and executed. In síngle-motíon operation mode, a single
block results in a síngle operation. The síngle-motíon operation ís
executed ímmediately províded íf ít is specífıed before the B-axís
operation is started. If the operatíon ís specífíed while a regístered
program is beíng executed, the operatíon ís executed once that program
has termínated.
After the specifíed single-motíon operation has been executed, the next
blосk is executed.
G110 GO1 B 100. F200 ; B1ock for single-motion
operation along B-axis
G00 X 100. Z20. ;
Program memory An operatíon program ís regístered in program memorу as a seríes of
different blосks of the move, dwell, auxíliary, and other functions.
Program memorу can hold a desíгed number of blocks, up to a maximum
of 65535 blocks for each program. If the program memoгу contaíns no
free space when an attempt is made to regíster a B-axís program, P/S
a1aгm 5033 is output. Six blocks гequіre 80 characters of program
memorу. A canned cycle G81 to G86 is also regístered as a series of
blocks, such as travel and dwell.
The entire program memorу ís backed up by battery. The programs
regístered in pгogram memorу are thus retained even after the system
power is turned off. After turning the system power on, the operatíon can
Ьe started símply Ьy specifying the M code for startíng the program.
Example
G101 ;
G00 B 10 . : ................. One block
G04 P 1500 : ................ Oпe block
G81 B20. R50. F600 ; ........ Three blocks
G28 : ...................... One block
M 15 : ..................... One block
G 100 ;
Tota17 blocks
Reset When the NC ís reset by pressíng the MDI reset key or by the íssue of аn
external reset sígnal, reset and rewínd sígnal, oг emergency stop, B-axís
control is also reset. The PMC ínterface sígnal can reset only B-axís
control. For details, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool
manufacturer.
353
20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING e-s2a4aεıoз
PMC-controlled axís A B-axís operation can be executed on1y when the B-axís can be
controlled by the PMC. For details, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine tool builder.
Límitatíons
Single-motíon operatíon
1. 0n1y a síngle-motion operatíon can be specífied wíth G110.
G 110 G00 B 100 . : .............. OK
G 110 G28 ; ................... OK
G 110 G81 B 100. R F 100 ; ... P/S alarm
2. A canned cycle G81 to G86 , and other operatíons containíng
multíple motíons, cannot be specífıed wíth G110.
If an ínhibíted operation ís specifíed, P/S a1aгm ís output.
3. modal information specifíed wíth G110 does not affect the subsequent
blocks. In the G 110 block, the ínítíal modal value specified at the start
of the operatíon becomes valid, irrespective of the modal information
specífıed the previous blocks.
Example
When the MDG bít bit 1 of parameter 8241 ís set to 1 and the
MDF bít bít 2 of parameter 8241 ís set to 1
G98 G00 X 100. F 1000 ; .......... 1
G110 B200. F2 : ................ 2
X200.;
GO1 X200. ; ................... 4
B1ock 2 ínstigates cuttíng feed GO1 at mm/rev G99 .
B1ock 3 instigates rapíd traverse G00 .
B1ock 4 ínstigates cutting feed GO1 at 1000 mm/min G98 .
4. Duńng tool-típ radíus compensatíon, two or moгe G110 blocks cannot
be specifıed ín successíon. If such blосks are specífıed in succession,
P/S a1arm No. 504 ís output. To specífy two or more G110 blocks in
succession for a B-axís operation, regíster the blосks as a program
wíth G101, G102, oг G103 and G100.
354
в-s24ØE/03 PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION
Examples
Absolute or íncremental
mode
Absolute or íncremental mode
o 1oo 200 300 400 500 600 ?0 L
1 ј - 200
2 І. - 350
450
Dwe11
200
3 . 350 І-
λ 550
Dwe11
200 І- λ
100 І------λ
- - - -Rapíd tra- Cutting Dwe11 Øsolute va1-
feed Øsolute modé e
lncremëñ al mode
G101 G012, 103 ; G101 G012, G103 ;
1 G01 6200. F100 ; 1 G01 6200. F100 ;
2 G82 6100. R150. P5000 F200 ; 2 G82 B450. R350. P5000 F200 ;
3 6200. R150. P5000 ; 3 B550. R350. P5000 ;
4 G00 B-100. ; 4 G00 B100. ;
G 10Q,; G 100
M _ M -
M30 ; M30 ;
Too1 posts 1 and 2
1f a síngle axís ís used as the common B-axís of the two tool posts in
two-path control, tool posts 1 and 2 share the B coordínate.
For example, after program 1 for tool post 1 and program 2 for tool post
2 are executed in that order, the total travel along the B-axis appears to
Ьe .

G101 ;
G00 6200. ; Absolute mode
G100 ;
M30 ;

G101 ;
G00 B300. ; Absolute mode
G100 ;
M30;
20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/03
Too1 offset
Example
When parameter 8257 ís set to 50
Auxi1iary function used to cancel the offset: T50
Auxíliary functíons used to adjust a tool offset: T51 to T59
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50
350
Absolute mode
20
ĺ2
- - 30
4
5 5 - - -
6 0 ıt- -
lncremental mode
10
20
ĺ2 40
4
5 35
6 30 - ĺ
Program
G101 G012, G103 ;
1 G01 B10. F100 ;
2 T51 ;
3 G00 620. ;
4 T52 ;
5 B0. ;
6 T5Q,;
G100 ;
M ,
Where the offset of T51 ís and the offset
of T52 ís
в-sгaØεıoз PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION
When the X-axis makes an angle other than 90 wíth the Z-axis, the
ínclíned axís control functíon controls the dístance traveled along each ANGULAR AX1S
axís accordíng to the ínclinatíon angle. A program, when created,
CONTROL
assumes that the X-axis and Z-axís íntersect at ńght angles. However, the
actual dístance traveled ís controlled accordíng to an ínclínatíon angle.
+X Program coordínate system
1 /+X Coordínate system actually used
0
+Z
θ : 1nclinatíon angle
EXplanatíons The dístance traveled along each axís ís controlled accordíng to the
formulas descńbed below.
The distance to be traveled along the X-axis ís determíned by the
following formula when ít ís specífıed wíth a díameter :
_ Xp
X 2 cos B
The dístance traveled along the Z-axís ís corrected by the ínclínatíon of
the X-axis, and ís determined by the following formula:
Za = Zp- Ź Xp tan B
The feedrate is determíned as descňbed below. The speed component
along the X-axís ís determined by the following formula:
Fp
Fa =
cos θ
Xa, Za, Fa:Actual dístance and speed
Xp, Zp, Fp:Programmed dístance and speed
Method of use Parameter AAC No. 8200Ø enables or disables the ínclíned axis
control functíon. If the functíon ís enabled, the dístance traveled along
each axis is controlled accordíng to an inclination angle No. 8210 .
Paranıeter AZR No. 8200 2 enables x-axís manual reference point
return on1y with a distance along the X-axís.
Bít 5 NOZAGC of sígnal G0063 can enable slanted axis control on1y for
the X-axís are converted to those along the slanted axís wíthout affecting
commands along the Z-axís.
Absolute and relative An absolute аnd a relatíve posítíon aгe índícated in the programmed
positíon dispiay Cartesian coordínate system. Machíne posítíon dísplay
Machíne posítíon dísplay A machíne posítíon índícatíon ís províded in the machíne coordinate
system where аn actual movement ís takíng place according to an
inclinatíon ang1e. However, when ínch/metńc conversíon is performed,
a posítion ís índícated whích íncorporates inch/metńc conversíon applíed
to the results of ínclínatíon angle operation.
357
20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62Øaεıo3
Notes
1. After inclined axís control parameter setting, be sure to
perform manual reference point return operation.
2. 1f a movement along the Z-axis occurs in X-axis manual
reference point return operation, be sure to perform
reference point return operation startíng with the X-axis.
З. 1f an inciination angle close to 0 or 90 is set, an error can
occur. A range from 20 to 60 should be used.
4. Before a Z-axís reference point return check G37 can be
made, X-axis reference point return opera?íon must be
completed.
5. After moving the tool along the X-axis with bit 5 NOZAGC
of signal G0063 set to 1, be sure to perform manual
reference posìtion return.
8-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION
To replace the tool damaged duríng machiníng or to check the status of
machining, the tool can be wíthdrawn from a workpiece. The tool can
TOOL WITHDRAWAL
then be advanced agaín to restart machíníng effícíently.
AND RETURN The tool wíthdrawal and return operatíon consísts of the followíng four
steps:
Retract
The tool is retracted to a predefined position using the TOOL WITHDRAW
swìtch.
Withdrawal
The tool is moved to the tool-change posítíon manually.
Return
The tool returns to the retract posítíon.
Reposítioníng
The tool returns to the ínterrupted posítion.
For the tool withdrawal and return operatíons, see Section in
Operation.
Q : Posítion where the TOOL WITHDRAW switch was turned on
: Programmed position
O : Posítíon to whích the tool ís retracted by manual operation
- > : Retractíon path
Manua1 operation wíthdraw path
----+ : Return path
----> : Reposítíoning
. Ø
Z
Format Specífy a retractíon axís and distance in the followíng format:
1P_ ;
1P_ : 1п íncremental mode, retraction dístance from the position
where the retract signal ís turned on
1n the absolute mode, retractíon dístance to an absolute
posítíon
359
20. AX15 CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING β-62444F/03
Explanations
Retractíon When the TOOL WITHDRAW swítch on the machíne operator s panel
ís turned on duńng automatíc operatíon or in the automatíc operatíon stop
or hold state, the tool ís retracted the length of the programmed retractíon
dístance. This operation is called retractíon. The position at which
retractíon is completed ís caUed the retractíon positíon. Upon completion
of retractíon, the RETRACT POSITION LED on the machine operator s
panel goes on.
When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch is turned on duńng execution of
a block in automatíc operatíon, executíon of the block is interrupted
immedíately and the tool is retracted. After retractíon ís completed, the
system enters the automatic operation hold state.
If the retractíon distance and dírection are not programmed, retraction ís
not performed. In this state, the tool can be withdrawn arid returned.
When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch ís turned on in the automatíc
operation stop or hold state, the tool ís retracted, then the automatíc
operation stop or hold state is entered again.
When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch is tuмed on, the tool withdraw
mode ís set. When the tool withdraw mode ís set, the TOOL BEING
WITHDRAWN LED on the machíne operator s pane1 goes on.
Withdrawal When the manual mode is set, the tool can be moved manually manual
contínuous feed or manual handle feed to replace the tool or measure a
machined workpiece. This operation is called a withdrawal. The tool
withdrawal path is automatícally memońzed by the CNC.
Return When the mode ís returned to automatic operation mode and the TOOL
RETURN swítch on the machine operator s pane1 is turned off, the CNC
automatically moves the tool to the retractíon positíon by tracing the
manually-moved tool path backwards. Thís operation ís called a return.
Upon completion of a return to the retractíon position, the
RETRACTIONS POSITION LED comes on.
Reposítioníng When the cycle start button ís pressed while the tool is in the retraction
posítíon, the tool moves to the position where the TOOL WITHDRAW
swítch was turned on. Thís operation is called repositíoníng. Upon
completion of reposítíoníng, the TOOL BEING WITHDRAWN LED ís
turned off, índicatíng that the tool wíthdrawal mode has terminated.
Operatíon after completíon of reposítíoning depends on the automatic
operation state when the tool wíthdrawal mode is set.
1 When the tool withdrawal mode ís set duríng automatíc operation,
operatíon is resumed after completíon of repositíoning.
2 When the tool withdrawal mode is set when automatic operation ís
held or stopped, the orígínal automatíc operation hold or stop state ís
set after completíon of reposítíoning. When the cycle start button is
pressed agaín, automatíc operatíon ís resumed.
в-s2aØε/oз PROGRAMMING 20. AX1S CONTROL FUNCTION
Límítations
offset If the ońgin, presettíng, or workpíece offset ís changed after retractíon ís
specífíed wíth in absolute mode, the change ís not reflected in the
retraction posítíon. After such changes are made, the retractíon posítion
must be respecifıed wíth
When the tool ís damaged, automatíc operatíon caп Ьe internipted wíth
a tool withdrawal and return operatíon ín order to replace the too1. Note
that íf the offset value ís changed after tool replacement, the change ís
ígnored when automatíc operatíon ís resumed from the start poínt or other
poínt іn the ínterrupted block.
Machíne 1ock, mírror When wíthdтawíng the tool manually in the tool wíthdrawal mode, never
ímage, and scalíng use the machíne 1ock, mirror-únage, oг scaling function.
Threadíng Too1 wíthdrawal and return operation cannot be performed duńng
threadíng.
Drílling canned cycle Too1 wíthdrawal and return operatíon cannot Ьe performed during a
dríllíng canned cycle.
Reset Upon reset, the retractíon data specifíed in ís cleared. Retraction
data needs to be specifıed again.
Retraction command The tool wíthdrawal and return functíon ís enabled even when the
retractíon command ís not specífıed. In this case, retraction and
reposítíoníng are not performed.
Notes
Notes
The retraction axis and retraction distance specified in need
to be changed ín an appropriate block according to the figure being
machined. Be very careful when specifyíng the retraction
dístance; an íncorrect retractíon dístance may damage the
workpíece, machíne, or too1.
361
CONTROL
FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
21
TWO- PATH CONTROL FUNCTION
- 362 -
21. TWO-PATH CONTROL
B-s2aллE/o3 P ROGRRAM 1 NG FUNCTION
Two-path control can be used wíth a lathe that supports símultaneous
cuttïng by íts two índependently operatíng tool posts.
GENERAL
Applíeation to atheswíth Seriesl6-TF two-pathcontrol can beusedforalathethatmachinesone
One spíndle and two to0i workpíece attached to one spíndle wíth two tool posts sinıultaneously.
posts For example, while one tool post is performíng outer surface machining,
the other tool post can perform ínner surface machírıíng, thus reducing
machining time dramatícally.
Too1 post 1
Spindie
Too1 post 2
Application to iathes wíth one spindie and tow tool posts
Applícatíon to lathes Seńes 16-TB two-path control can be used for a lathe that machines a
with two spíndies and workpïece attached to each of two spindles wíth two tool posts
two tooi posts sïmultaneously. In this case, each tool post operates independently of
each other as if two lathes were used, thus improvíng productivíty.
Spindle 1 -ј---_

Too1 post 2
Fig. Applicatlon to lathes wíth two spindles and two tool posts
CONTROL
F Ů NCT1Γ N PROGRAMMING B-62444El03
s Control.ıírag tt,vo tool The operatíons of two tool posts are programmed índependently of each
posts independentiy at other, and each program is stored in program memory for each tool post.
the saır:e time When automatic operatíon ís to be performed, each tool post ís actívated
after selecting a program for machíníng wíth tool post 1 and a program
for machiníng with tool post 2 from the programs stored in program
memory for each tool post. Then the programs selected for the tool posts
are executed índependently at the same tíme. When tool post 1 and tool
post 2 need to waít for each other duńng machíning, the waitíng function
ís avaílable Sectíon
CRT/MD1
Qa 16/18/160/180-TB _J X
Tco post 1
controi Z1
sucfl as
Prog am nterpoiatio
memory for and axis
tooI post 1 controi
Reader/ Program tor tooi
1 punch post 1
ıinterface ц
AІ X
Toai post ?
Program control
memory for sı.ach as Z2
tool post 2 ínterpoiatior Proηra,τ o1
posť 2 and axis
contro
Fíg. Controllíng two tool posts independentIy at the same tíme
Just one CRT/MDI ís provided for the two tool posts. Before operatíon
and display on the CRT/MDI, the tool post selection sígnal ís used to
swítch between the two tool posts.
Notes
Notes
Simultaneous operatíon of the two tool posts or t ıe
operation of on y a single tool post can be selected by
pressing a key cn the machíne operator s panel. For details,
refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
21. ТЛ/O-P4ГH ĞONTROL
B-62444E/03 PPOGRRAMING FUNCTiON

Wlλ6T1NG FOR TOOL
POST з
Explanatïons Control based on M codes is used to cause one tool post to wait for the
other duńng machining. By specifying an M code in a machining
program for each tool post, the two tool posts can waít for each other at
a specifıed block. When an M code for waiting is specífıed in a block for
one tool post during automatíc operation, the other tool post waits for the
same M code to be specífıed before staring the executíon of the next block.
Thís functíon ís called the tool post waiting functíon.
A range of M codes used as M codes for waiting is to be set in the
parameters Nos. 8110 and 8111 before hand.
ExampYe M100 to M103 are used as M codes for waitíng.
Parameter setting:No. 8110=100 Mínímum M code for waiting:
M100
No. 8111=103 Maxіmum M code for waitíng:
M103
Too1 post 1 pŕcgram Too1 post 2 program
01357 ; 02468 ;
G50 X_ Z G50 X_ Z_ ;
G00 X_ Z_ T010 I; G00 X_ Z._ T0202 ;
S1000 M03 ; S2000 M03 ;
M100 ; M100;
N1100 G01 X Z F ; N2100 _G_01 XZ F Waiting
1
N2199 Simultaneous,
M101 ; ł independent operation
of tool post 1 N1100 to
N1199 and toof post 2
N1199 1 N2100 to N2199
M101 ; εWaiting M101 >
M102 ;
Waiting
N2200 S3000 ;
û00 X_ Z T0202 ;
Operation of tool post
2 N2200 to N2299
only _ .-- N2299
M102; __
N2300 _ Waiting
Simultaneous, àΠ0 X Z i 0505 :
ndependent operation
of tool post 1 N1300 To
N1399 and tool pcst 2 N qn
N2300 to N2395 N1399 ; ; ı M103 ;
1
M103; __-___ -
Waìting
мaπ : _ , ìvi30 ; ίі ı u μ Γ vιuáп
365
AТ H СONTROL
FUNCT10N PROGRAMΓVIING s-624д4E p3

fVOtes
1. An M code for waiting must always be specífíed in a singie biock.
2. if one tool post is waïting because of an M code for waitíng specified, and a dífferent M code
for waiting is specifíed with the other tool post, an P/a alarm No. 1 G is raised, in thïs
case, both tool posts stop operation.
З. PMC-CNC ,e
Unlike otheY M code5, the M code for waitíng is not output to the PMC.
4. Operation of a single tool post
if the operatïon of a single tool post is required, the M code for waiting need nct be deleted.
By using the NOW T sígnal to specify that waíting be ignored GOOб3, 1 , the M code for
waiting irı a machining program can be ignored. For details, refer to the manuai suppiied by
the rnachine tool builder.

366
21. TWO-PATH CONTROL
8-62444E/o3 P ROQRRAM 1 NQ FUNCTION

Too1 Post lnterface
Check
When two tool posts machíne the same workpíece simultaneously, the
tool posts can approach each other very closely. If the two tool posts General
interfere wíth each other due to a program error or any other settíng error,
a serious damage such as a tool or machíne destruction can occur.
The function tool post ínterference check ís available which caп
decelerate and stop the two tool posts before the tool posts interfere wíth
each other due to an íncorrect command.
Too1 post 2
\ 1
Too1 post 1
The contours of the two tool posts are checked to determíne whether or
not an ínterference occurs.
To make a tool post ínterference check, data íncludíng the relatíonshíps
between the two tool posts and ínterference forbidden areas that ís, tool Data setting for the
shapes needs to be set. The method of such data settíng ís descríbed
Too1 Post lnterference
below.
Check Function With the tool post ínterference check functíon, whether or not the two tool
posts ínterfere wíth each other ís determíned Ьy checkíng if the
interference forbidden areas based on the interference forbídden areas of
the currently selected tools of the tool posts overlap each other after the
movement of the tool posts.
Explanations
When reference poínt return operation is completed wíth aU axes X 1,Z 1,
Positíon settíng for X2, Z2 , the reference poínt of tool post 1 is set at the origin of the ZX
reference poínts of two p1ane coordinate system. At this tíme, the posítion of the reference poínt
tool posts of tool post 2 ís set in a parameter. The next item describes the reference
poínts.
367
CONTROL
FUNCTION PROQRAMMINQ 8-62444FJo3
In the ZX plane coordinate system at the origín of whích the reference
point of tool post 1 ís set, set the X coordinate e of the reference poínt
of tool post 2 ín parameter No. 8 15 1, and íts Z coordínate in parameter
.
The unit of setting is the least commаnd íncrement. For an axís subject
to diameter specífícatíon, a díameter value is to be specífıed.
Measure e and ζ when reference point return operatíon ís completed
with the four axes X1, Z1, X2, Z2 . When the relative coordinate
parameters and 8152 of the two tool posts are to be updated,
reference point return operation must always Ьe completed wíth the four
axes beforehand. Otherwise, the ínternally memorіzed relational
posítíons of the tool posts are not updated to new paτameter values.
21. TWO-PATH CONTROL
B-62444E/03 P ROG R RAM 1 NG FUNCTION
Set the relatíonshíp
between the coordinate ı s Ø 4 3 2 1 Ø
systems of the two tool 8140 TY1 TYO
posts ín parameter
TYO, TY1:Set the relationship between the coordinate systems of the

two tool posts, wíth tool post 1 used as the reference.
1 When TY1=0 and TY0=0 2 When TY1=0 and TY0=1
Too1 post 2
Too1 post 2 Too1 post 1
X
X Too1 post 1 tI
Z Z
Z
4 When TY1=1 and TY0=1
3 When TY1=1 and TY0=0
X Too1 post 1 X Too1 post 1
Ъ ı 7 7
, 1 ,
X Z
Too1 post 2
X
Too1 post 2
21 TWO-PATH CC NтRoι
F U N Cт 1 Ğ Γv PROGRAMM 1 NG B-g2444E/o3
+ Setting of ïnlerference An ínterference forbídden area ís set using a combínatíon of two
fвrbíddeıa Ørea rectangular areas. Some examples are shown below. The dashed línes
índicate ínterference forbídden areas.
Example í
г -,
aгea 1
,
Агea 1
ιvea 2 0Г Aгla 2
L---------J
Example 2
p
-
О Area1 Area2
ι
J
The coordínates of the upper and lower ends points A and B shown
below of each of two rectangles are set, wíth the reference point of the
tool post set as the ońgín.
ι

X

X>1
Z>K
See Section for ínformation about the coordinate setting
procedure.
370
21. TWO-PATH CONTROL
B-62444E/03 PROGRRAMING FUNCTION

setting and Dísplay of
lnterference Forbídden
Areas for Too1 Post
lnterference Checking
Explanations Dísplay and set tool shape data ínterference forbídden areas according
to the procedure below.
1 Press functíon key.
2 Press the chapter selection soft key [TOOLFM].
3 Wíth the tool post selectíon sígnal, select a tool post for whích
ínteгference forbídden areas for tool post ínterference checking are to
be displayed and set.
4 Dísplay the screen íncludíng a tool number for whích data is to be set.
Method 1:Select the screen by using the page keys and cursor keys.
Method 2:Enter a desired tool number, then press the soft key
[]
Λ Λ Λ Λ,
OFFSET N0. σ 01
AREA1 AREA 2
X = X =
Z = Z =
І = I =
R = R =
OFFSET NO = 02
AREA1 AREA 2
X = X =
Z = Z =
І = 2 =
K = K =
1_ s 0 т0000
iЙElvĺ wτ 12 : 02 : 08 HEAD1
[ ][ ][ ] [ +INPUT ] [ INPUT ]
5 Move the cursor to a data ítem to be set, wíth the cursor move keys.
When data for poínt A ís to be set, move the cursor to X and Z.
When data for point B ís to be set, move the cursor to I аnd K.
6 Wıth the numeric keys, enter the coordinates of point A oг B.
Fгactíon dígíts can be entered.
X
A X, Z
Z
X>1
Z>K
B І. K
7 By pressing the soft key [1NPUT], the entered coordinates are set.
Press the soft key [NPUT] when an entered numeric value ís to set
after ít is added to data already set.
371
CONTROL
FUNCTION PROGRAMMING 8-62444E/0.З

Notes Too1 number
The tool geometry data must be set for each tool number. The
tool number here refers to the offset number. When both tool
geometry offset and tool wear offset are used, the tool number
corresponds to the wear offset number. To use two or more
offset numbers for the same too1, the same data for the tool
must be set two or more tímes ín the tool geometry data.

Conditíons for Makíng A tool post interference check ís made when ali conditíons listed below
are satisfíed.
a Too1 Post
1 Paraıneter IFE for enabling the tool post ínterference lnterference Check
check functíon is set to O.
2 After power is turned on, reference point return operation ís completed
with a11 axes X1,Z1, X2, Z2 . When an absolute-posítíon detector is
used, the matchíng between a machíne posítíon and absolute-posítíon
detector posítíon must be completed.
3 Offset numbers other than 0 aгe specífíed using T codes for two tool
posts.
4 When mаnual mode is used,parameter IFM for enabling
the tool post йterference check function in manual mode ís set to 1.
When a11 condítions for making a tool post йterference check are
satísfıed, the tool-post-ínterference-check-й-progress sígnal ís
output to the PMC.
Notes
Notes
The tool post ínterference check functíon can be executed
only when the number of the tool actually selected agrees with
the programmed tool number.
The function cannot be executed correctly if the tool ís
selected by a manual operation or if no tool selectíon
command is specífied after power-on.
372
21. TWO-PATH CONTROL
B-62444E/03 PRØRRAMINQ FUNCTION
when all condítíons described іп Sectíon aгe satísfíed, a tool post
ínterference check ís started. When a tool post interference check ís made, Execution of Too1 Post
an ínterference forbídden area ís set for the two tool posts by using the tool
lnterference Checkíng
shape data corresponding to the currently selected tool numbers.
Then whether the areas ínterfere wíth each other ís checked.
Explanations
г--,
,

----------,
When interface forbidden areas tool shapes as índicated by dashed lines
are set for tool posts 1 and 2 as shown above, a check is made by
determíníng whether the two ínterference forbídden areas indicated by
dashed línes overlap each other after the movement of the tool posts.
If the two areas íntетfere wíth each other аn P/S a1aгm No. 508 0г No. 509
ís raised;the two tool posts агe decelerated and stopped.
If an ínteτference alarm ís raísed, a tool post ínterference a1aгm sígnal ís
output to the pMC.
If an interference a1arm ís raísed Ьy the ínterference of the two tool posts
duńng automatíc operatíon, swítch to mаnual mode to move the tool posts
out of the ínterference state. Then release the alarm by a reset.
The ínterference check functíon cаn Ьe enabled even in mаnual mode by
settíng the parameter No. 8140 3 to 1. This allows the tool posts
interfeńng with each other to be moved along the axes on1y in such
directions that c1eаг the interference. Wıth this capabílity, the two tool
posts ínterferíng with each other in automatíc operatíon cannot be
manually moved by mistake further ínto the ínterference forbídden areas
after the mode ís swítched to mаnual mode to c1eаr the interference, thus
providing safety.
373
CONTROL
F U N CT10N P ROG RAM M I NG в-s2Ø4Eıo3
Notes
Notes
1. When an alarm is raised, the CNC system and machíne
system stop with some delay in time.
So an actual stop position can be closer to the other tool
post beyond an interference forbidden position specífíed
using tool shape data. So, for safety, tool shape data a 1ittle
larger than the actual shape should be set. The extra
distance, L, required for this purpose ís calculated form a
rapid traverse feedrate as follows
L= Rapid traverse feedrate x 1
7500
For example, when a rapid traverse feedrate of 15 m/min is
used, L=2mm.
2. When parameters and interface forbidden areas Section
are set to use the ínterference check function, be
sure to check that correct interference forbidden areas are
set. For this purpose, set manual mode, and cause the tool
posts to interfere with each other in various directíons.
374
21. TWO-PATH CONTROL
FUNCTION B-624ØE/03 PROGRRAMING

Example of Makíng a
Too1 Post lnterference
Check
Explanatíons
ј 215m Metric input with metric machíne tool Too1 post 1 +
X
А І
115m
Coordínate
1515 system of tool
75mm post 1
115mп1
1 Н J
0 +Z
łZ
- 200m _1 1400m
m
140m 1 ζL
m І І
100m
..І of tool post 2
8omm 60m 1 Omm
m ı T0202
1---- ---J
+
120 mm Too1 post 2 X
The coordinate systems shown on the right of the fıgure above are the ZX
plane coordínate systems of tool posts 1 and 2. For clarity, the coordinate
systems are shífted;actually, the orígíns of the coordínate systems must
match the machíne zero poínts.
Assume the machíne confıguration shown above. Assume also that offset
number 02 is assigned to tool post 1, and offset number 15 is assigned to
tool post 2.
Suppose that the fıgure represents the state of reference poínt return
operation completed with all axes X1,Z1, X2, Z2 . Then set -800
mm diameter and -200 mm in parameter Nos. 8151 and 8152,
respectívely.
The posítional relationshíp of the two tool posts matches type 4
índícated іп Sectíon So set parameters TYO аnd
TY1 No.8140Ø, 1 as follows:
Parameter TY1 No.814Ø1 =1
Parameter TYO No.8140Ø =1
Then set tool shape data interference forbídden аrea for each tool post.
375
CONTROL
FUNCTION PROGRAMM 1 NG 8-62444E/03
The fígures below show the setting of data for tool number 02 assigned
to tool post 1 and for tool number 15 assigned to tool post 2.
TOOL FORM DATA 00001 N00001
OFFSET NO. = 01
AREA 1 AREA 2
X= X=
Z= . Z=
_ I=
K= R=
OFFSET NO. = 02
AREA 1 AREA 2
X= X=
Z= Z=
I= J=
K= R=
1 S 0 T0000
1.ІЕM 12:02:08 HØ 1
[ ][ ][ ] [ +INPUT ] [ INPUT ]
-,,
TOOL FORM DATA 00001 N00001
OFFSET NO. = 15
AREA 1 AREA 2
X= X=
Z= _ ШЈС Z=
_ 2=
R= R=
OFFSET NO. = 16
AREA 1 AREA 2
X= X=
Z= Z=
I= I=
R= R=
i_
S 0 T0000
В4ЕM R f ł R ł ł f 12:02:36 HEAD 2
[ ] ]ľ ][ +INPUT ] [ INPUT ] J
Set data for other tools simílarly. A preparation for an interference check
ís completed when data has been set for a11 tools. Turn on power. Then,
an interference check ís started when a T code ís specifıed with each tool
post
after reference point return operation is completed with a11 of the four axes
X1, Z1, X2, Z2 .
376
21. TWO-PATH CONTROL
8-624ØE/o3 PROGRRAM 1NG FUNCTION
When a thin workpiece ís to be machíned as shown below, a precísion
machíníng caп be achieved Ьy machíning each side of the workpíece wíth
BALANCE CUT
a tool símultaneously;thís functíon caп prevent the workpíece from
G68,G69 warpage that caп result when on1y one síde is machíned at a time. When
both sídes are machíned at the same tíme, the movement of one tool must
be in phase with that of the other too1. Otherwise, the workpíece can
víbrate, resultíng in poor machíníng. Wíth this function, the movement
of one tool post can be easíly synchronized wíth that of the other tool post.
F1g. Balance cut
Explanations When G68 ís specified in the programs for both tool post 1 and tool post
2, the pulse dístributíon of tool post 1 ís synchronízed with that of tool
post 2 to start balance cutting. Thus the two tool posts cаn move exactly
at thp_ c- a--m--P-- t-í-mл łn n1-1 -n- a. ..-. - σ
O co e Meaning
G68 Balance cut mode
G69 Balaпce cut mode cancel
In the balance cut mode, balance cutting ís performed on1y when a move
command ís specífied for both tool posts. Balance cutting is performed
even when different axes are specified for each tool post or an offset move
command ís specífied. G68 0г G69 must be specífied in a síngle block.
Otherwíse, a P/S a1aгm No. 163 ís raísed. When G68 or G69 ís
specífied wíth one tool post, the tool post does not move untíl the
execution for the other tool post proceeds to G68 0г G69. And íf cuttíng
ís specified wíth one tool post in the balance cut mode, the tool post does
not move until the execution of or the other tool post proceeds to a cuttíng
command.
Notes
Balance cut only starts cutting feed on both tool posts at the
same time; it does not maintaín synchronization thereafter. To
synchroníze a11 the movements of both tool posts, the setting
for both tool posts, such as the travel dístance and feedrate,
must be the same.
377
21,TW0-PATH CONTROL
F U N CT 10 N P ROG RAMM 1 NG Ø-62444G/03
Example
Too1 post 1 program Too1 post 2 program
G68 ;; G68 ; Balance cut mode ;
; ; Ba1an гuτ
ZO ; ZO ; Balaпce cut
G69 ; G69 ; Balance cut mode
cancel
E---
Notes
1 Time delay before the pulse distribution of both tool posts
is started is 2 msec or shorter.
2 1n the balance cut mode, synchronízation is established at
the start of a move block, so movement can momentaríly
stop.
3 1f feed hoid operation is performed during balance cutting
using both tool posts, balance cut processing is not
performed at restart time, it is performed when the next
move command is specïfíed for both tool posts.
4 Balance cutting ís not performed in dry run or machíne 1ocK
state.
5 When rapid traverse operation is specified, balance cut
processing is not performed.
6 A workpiece .for which thread cutting has been performed
in the balance cut mode cannot be subjected to thread
cutting in the cancel mode. Thread cuttíng starts at a
different position.
7 The cancel mode G69 is set by a reset.
8 When the option mirror image for double turrets is
selected, the balance cut function cannot be LIsed.
378
21. TWO-PATH CONTROL
B-62444E/03 P ROQRRAM 1 NQ FUNCTION
A machíne with two tool posts has different custom macro common
varíables and tool compensation memory areas for tool posts 1 and 2. MEMORY COMMON
Too1 posts 1 and 2 can share the custom macro common vańables and tool
TO TOOL POST
compensatíon memory areas províded certain parameters aгe specífıed
accordingly.
Explanatíons
Custom macro common Too1 posts 1 and 2 can share a1 oг part of custom macro common variables
varíables 100 to 149 and 500 to 531, províded parameters 6036 and 6037 aгe
specified accordíngly. The data for the shared varíables can Ьe written
or read from eíther tool post. See Section of Part II.
Too1 compensatíon Too1 post 2 can reference or specify the data in the tool compensation
memory memory area of tool post 1, províded the CMF bit bit 5 of parameter
8100 ís specífíed accordingiy. Thís can be executed on1y when tool posts
1 and 2 have ídentical data for tool compensatíon number of groups,
number of columns, unít system, etc. .
CONTROL
FUNCTION PROGRAMM 1 NG 8-62444E/03
The two-path control functíon supports two spíndle ínterfaces. Thus,
16-TB can control a lathe that símultaneously machínes a workpíece SPINDLE CONTROL
attached to one spíndle with two tool posts, or can control a lathe that
1N TWO PATH simultaneously machines a workpiece attached to each of two spíndles
CONTROL wíth two tool posts.
The former spíndle control ís referred to as 1-spindle control, and the
latter is referred to as 2-spindle control.
Parameter 2SP No.3703Ø ís used to select 1-spindle control or
2-spindle control.
Explanatíons
1-spíndle control Oпe spindle is controlled by programmed commands for tool post 1 0г
tool post 2. Programmed commands Note 1 for the spindle caп be
specifíed from either tool post. However, a spíndle speed output selection
signal Note 2 determínes which commands from the two tool posts are
valid. The spíndle ís controlled accordíng to the commands from a tool
post selected Ьy the sígnal.
A feedback pulse sígnal from the posítion coder attache to the spíndle ís
applied to both tool posts. Such a feedback pulse signal ís used for
processing such as thread cuttíng and feed per rotation with each tool post.
. 2-spíndle control Two spindles, spindle 1 and spíndle 2 Note3 , aгe controlled
independently of each other accordíng to programmed commands Note
1 for each tool post. Usually, programmed commands for tool post 1 aгe
used to control spindle 1, and programmed commands for tool post 2 are
used to control spíndle 2. Feedback pulse signals from the posítíon coders
attached to spíndle 1 and spíndle 2 are applied to tool post 1 and tool post
2, respectively.
The spindle speed output selection sígnal Note 2 can be used to specífy
which spindle must be controlled Ьy programmed commands for which
tool post. In additíon, a spíndle feedback ínput selectíon sígnal Note 2
can be used to specífy whích spindle must be controlled by programmed
commands for whích tool post. In addítíon, a spíndle feedback ínput
selection sígnal Note 2 caп Ьe used to specify which tool post must
receíeve a feedback signal from whích spindle. Thus, tool post 1 can
control spíndle 2, and tool post 2 can control spindle 1.
21. TWO-PATH CONTROL
в-в2444E/03 PROGRRAMING FUNCTION
Notes
1. The programmed commands for spind es include the
fo lowing.
S code to specify a spird e speed
М03 foYward spind e rotation , NЛ04 reverse spind e
rutation
Commands for constant surface speed control G96, G97,
s code to specify surface speeds, commands to specify
maximum spind e speeds
2. Refer to the FANIJC Series 16/ 1 8/160/180-MODEL B
CONNECTION MANUAL FUNCTION for detailed
information about the spind e speed output selectíon signal
and spind e feedback input se ection signai. Control over
these signa s varies from one machine tool builder to
another. So be sure to read the re evant manuai prepared
by the machine tool builder to be fami ìar wíth the
commands for the spind es.
З. The spindle connected to spínd e interface 1 maín CPU
board is defined as spindle 1, and the spind e connected
to spind e interface 2 optiona board 2 is defined as
μіІІu C ι. гuі uelaIi rε;τeгτo I-f\ıvuU 5erıes 16ï18ï160/180-
MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL FUNCTION .
21 TWO-PATH CυNтUί.
FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
In 2-paths control, the synchronízatíon control functíon and composite
control functíon enable synchronízation control in a síngle system or
SYNCHRONIZATION
between two systems, composite control of two systems, and
CONTROLAND
superposítíon control of two systems.
COMP0ЅITE
CONTROL
ExpianØtíons
Synchruniгatí n control Synchronízes movement along an axis of one system wíth that along aп
axis of the other system.
Example
Synchronízing movement along the Z1 and Z2 axes
Turret 1
X1
W
/
Workpíece
Z1 Z2 Synchronizвd with move-
ment along the Z1 axis
Machíníng according to a program for syst -m 1
Synchronízes movement along an axís of one system with that along
another axís of the same system.
Example
Synchronízíng movement along tbe Z1 and B1 aAes
Turret 1
X1 I
/
j///////////// Taі 1 stock
Workpiece 1 ..........
<--->
E31 Synchronızed with move-
ment along the Z1 axís
21. TWO-PATH CONTROL
B-s2444E/o3 PROGRRAMING FUNCTION
Composíte control Exchanges the move cominands for dífferent axes of dífferent systems.
Example
Exchanging the commands for the X1 and X2 axes
-> Upon the execution of a command programmed for system 1,
movement ís performed along the X2 and Z1 axes.
Upon the executíon of a command programmed for system 2,
movement is performed along the X1 and Z2 axes.
Γ
1
Machining according to a
ι X1 Turret 1
program for system 1 \\ Γ \\ \
Workpiece , \\ \\
\\\\\ D
í/ıı
1 \\ \\ Work-
\ \ piece 2
I њ \\ \\ Z2 > І
χг \ \------
ı Turret 2 Machíníng accord-
íng to a program for L -------------- -- - system 2
Superposítíon control Provídes a move command of an axís for a dífferent axís ín another
system.
Example
Providing the Z2 aıás wíth a move command specified for the Z1
axís
Γ Machining according
to a program for sys-
tem 1
/ -----ı
ı1 1
1 ı
X2
Work- ---- 1
piece 2 1
1 72
L -----------J
Machíníng according to a program
for system 2
383
CONTROL
FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03
Notes
Notes
The method used to specify synchronization or composite
control varíes with the machine tool builder. For details,
refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
384
22. PAπERN DATA ıNPUT
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
2 PATTERIV ATA 1NRUT FUNCTION
,,: a
Thís functíon enables users to perform programming símply Ьy extracting
numeric data pattern data from a drawíng and specifying the numerícal
values from the CRT/MDI paпe1.
This eliminates the need for programming using an existing NC language.
Wıth the aid of thís function, a machíne tool buílder can prepare the
program of a hole machíníng cycle such as a bońng cycle or tappíng
cycle usíng the custom macro function, and can store ít ínto the program
memoгу.
Thís cycle ís assigned pattern names, such as BOR1, TAP3, and DRL2.
An operator can select a pattern from the menu of pattern names displayed
on the screen.
Data pattern data which is to be specified Ьy the operator should be
created in advance with vańables in a drillíng cycle.
The operator can ídentify these vańables usíng names such as DEPTH,
RETURN RELIEF, FEED, MATERIAL oГ other pattern data names. The
operator assigns values pattern data to these names.
22. PAπERN DATA INPUT
PROGRAAMING Fl.1NCT10N 8-62444E/03

Pressing theeЕ.,, k o ey and E г>J [MENu] is displayed on the followíng
DISPLAYBNCa THE
pattern menu screen.
PATTERN MENU
MEм3 : HOLε PATTERN 00000 N00000
1. TAPPING
2. DRILLING
З. BORING
9. POCRET
5. BO. T HOLE
6. LINE ANGLE
7. GRID
8. PECR
9. TEST PATRN
λ 0 . BAOΣe
> _
MDI 16:05:59
[ MACRO ] [ ] [ OPR ] [ [ OPRT ]
\
HOLE PATTERN :
This ís the menu títle. An arbítrary character stríng consísting of up
to 12 characters can be specífıed.
BOLT HOLE :
This ís the pattern name. An arbítrary character string consístíng of
up to 10 characters can be specífíed, íncludíng katakana.
The machíne tool builder should specify the character stríngs for the menu
title and pattern name using the custom macro, and load the character
stríngs ínto program memorу as a subprogram of program No. 9500.
22. PATTERN DATA 1NPUT
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
Macro commands Menu títle : C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10 C11 C12
specífyíng the menu C1,C2, ,C12: Characters ín the menu títle 12 characters
títle Macгo ínstruction
G65 H90 Pp Qq Rr I; Jj Kk :
H90:Specífıes the menu títle
p: Assume a1 and a2 to be the codes of characters C1 and C2. Then,
PO00 000
Code a2 of character 02
Code a1 of character 01
q: Assuine a and aд to be the codes of characters C3 and Cд. Then,
q=a3103+a4
r: Assume a5 and Ø to be the codes of characters C5 and C6. Then,
r=a5103+a6
í: Assume a7 and a8 to be the codes of characters C7 and C8. Then,
і=a7103+a8
j: Assume a9 and a10 to be the codes of characters C9 and C10. Then,
j=a9103+a 10
k: Assume a11 and a12 to be the codes of characters C11 and ,
k=a11103+aι2
Example
If the title of the menu ís HOLE PATTERN then the nıacro
instructíon ís as follows:
G65 H90 P072079 Q076069 R032080
HO LE P
I065084 J084069 K 2 78;
AT TE RN
For codes correspondíng to these characters, refer to the table in

22. PATTERN DATА lNPUT
PROÙRAAMING в-sгØøεıoз FUNCTION
MaC1 O instructíon Pattern narne: C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10
describíng the pattern C1, C2, ,C10: Characters in the pattern name 10 characters
name Macro ínstructíon
G65 H91 Pn Qq Rr Ii Jj Kκ ;
H91: Specífies the menu títle
n: Specífies the menu No. of the pattern name
_ n_1to10
q: Assume a1 and a2 to be the codes of characters Ci and C2. Then,
q=ai ,103+a2
r: Assume a3 and aд to be the codes of characters C3 and Cд. Then,
r=a3,103+a4
і: Assume a5 and a6 to be the codes of characters C5 aııd Cб. Then,
i=a5,103+a6
j: Assume a7 and a8 to be the codes of characters C7 аnd C8. Then,

k: Assume a9 and a10 to be the codes of characters C9 and C10. Then,

Example
If the pattern name of inenu No. 1 is EOL I` HOLE then the macro
ínstructíon ís as follows.
G65 H91 P1 Q066079 , R076084 I032072 J079076 K069032 ;
BO LT LJ H OL EL_J
Pattern fVo. seleetíon To select a pattern from the pattern menu screen, enter the correspondíng
pattern No. The followíng is an example.
1
1 NPUT
The selected pattern No. is assïgned to system variable 5900. The
custom macro of the selected pattern can be started by startíng a fíxed
program external program No. search wíth an external sigrıal then
referríng to the system variable 5900 іл the program.
Notes
1f each characters of P, Q, R, 1, J, and K are not specified in a
мacro instruction, ŕwo spaces are asçígned to each cımitted
character.
22. PATTERN DATA 1NPUT
PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03 Fl1NCT10N
Example Custom macros fOr the menu title and hole pattern names.
-
MENU : HOLE PATTERN 00000 N00000
1. TAPPING
2.
DRILLING
3. BORING
4. POCKET
5. BOLT HOLE
6. LINE ANGLE
7. GRID
8. PECK
9. TEST PATRN
10. BACK
> _
ØI 16:05:59
[ MACRO ] ] [ OPR ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
\
09500 ;
N1 G65 H90 PΠ72 079 0076 069 R032 080 1 065 084 J 084 069 K082 078 ; HOLE PATTERN
N2G65 H91 P1 0066 079 R076 084 1 032 072 J 079 076 K069 032 ; HOLE
N3G65 H91 P2 0071 082 R073 068 ;
N4G65 H91 P3 0076 073 R078 069 1 032 065 J 078071 K076069 ; ANGLE
N5G65 H91 P4 0084 065 R080 080 1 073 078 J 071 032 ; 4.TAPPING
N6G65 H91 P5 0068 082 R073 076 1 076 073 J 078 071 ; 5.DR1LLING
N7G65 H91 P6 0066079 R082073 1 078 071 ;
N8G65 H91 P7 0080 079 R067 075 1 069 084 ;
N9G65 H91 P8 0080069 R067075 ;
N10G65 H91 P9 0084 069 R083 084 1032 080 J065 084 K082 078 ; PATRN
N11 G65 H91 P10 0066 065 R067 0750 ;
N12M99 ;
389
22. PATTERN DATA 1NPUT
PROGRØM 1NG PUNCTlON B-62444E/03
When a pattern menu ís selected, the necessary pattern data is displayed.
PATTERN DATA
VAR. : BOLT HOLE 00001 N00000
DISRLAY NO. κAМЕ DATA COØNT
500 TOOL І іІФ
501 STANDARD X BOLT HOLE
502 STANDARD Y CIRCLE
503 RADIUS SET PATTERN
504 S. ANGL DATA TO VAR.
505 HOLES NO
506
507
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
X Y
z
> _
ØI 16:05:59
[ ] [ MENU ] [ OPR ] ] [ OPRT ] ı
і
BOLT HOLE :
This ís the pattern data títle. A character stńng consístíng of up to 12
characters can be set.
TOOL :
Thís is the vańable name. A character stríng consisting of up to 10
characters can be set.
BOLT HOLE CIRCLE :
Thís ís a comment statement. A character string can be displayed
consístíng of up to 8línes, 12 characters per 1ine.
It is permíssíble to use katakana in a character stńng oг 1ine.
The machine tool buílder should program the character strings of pattern
data title, pattern name, and varíable name usíng the custom macro, and
load them ínto the program memory as a subprogram whose No. ís 9500
plus the pattern No. 09501 to 09510 .
390
22. PATTERN DATA 1NPUT
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
Macro ínstructíon Menu title : C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10C11C12
specífying the pattern C1 ,C2,..., C12 : Characters in the menu title 12 characters
data title Macro ínstruction
the menu títle G65 H92 Pn Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk ;
H92 : Specіfіes the pattern naine
p: Assume a1 and a2 to be the codes of characters C1 and C2. Then,

See for character codes.
q: Assume a3 and a4 to be the codes of characters C3 and C4. Then,

2: Assume a5 and a6 to be the codes of characters C5 аnd C6. Then,
г
i: Assume a7 and a8 to be the codes of characteгs C7 and C8. Then,
і
j: Assume a9 and a10 to be the codes of characters C9 and C10. Then,
j=aς.103+aі0
k: Assume a11 and a12 to be the codes of characters C11 and C12. Then,
k=a11 < 103+a12
Example
Assume that the pattern data title ís BOLT HOLE. The macro
ínstructíon is gíven as follows:
G65 H92 P066079 Q076084 R032072 I079076 J069032;
BO LT u H OL E
Macro ínstructíon Variable гіame : C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10
specífyíng the varíable C1, C2,-, C10 : Characters in the varíable name 10 characters
name Macro instructíon
G65 H93 Pn Qq Rr Iĺ Jj Kk ;
H93 : Specífíes the vańable пame
n: Specífıes the menu No. of the varíable name
п=1 to 10
q: Assume a1 and a2 to be the codes of characters C1 and C2. Then,

r: Assume a3 аnd a4 to be the codes of chaгacters C3 and C4. Then,
г
i: Assume a5 and a6 to be the codes of characters C5 аnd C6. Then,
í=a5 103+a ,
j: Assume a7 and ag to be the codes of characters C7 аnd C8. Then,

k: Assume a9 аnd a10 to be the codes of characters C9 and C10. Then,
ı0
Example
Assume that the vańable name of the vańable No. 503 ís RADIUS.
The macгo ínstructíon ís given as follows:
G65 H93 P503 OQ 82065 R068073 1085083 ;
RA DI US
Variable names can be assigned to 32 common variables
500 to 531, which are not cleared when the power ís
turned off.
391
22. PATTERN DATA iNPUT
FU NCT10N PROGRØM ING в-s244aεıoз
Macro instruction to Orxe comment ĺíne: C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12
descríbe a comment C1, C2,..., C12 : Character stríng in one comment 1ine 12 characters
Macro instruction
G65 H94 pn Qq Rr Iĺ Jj Kg ;
H94 : Specífíes the comment
p: Assume a1 and a2 to be the codes of characters C1 and C2. Then,

See for character codes.
q: Assume a3 and a4 to be the codes of characters C3 and C4. Then,

r: Assume aς and a6 to be the codes of characters Cς and C6. Then,
г=aς.103+a6
і: Assume a7 and a8 to be the codes of characters C7 and C8. Then,
í=a7,103+a8
j: Assume aς and a10 to be the codes of characters C9 and C10. Then,

k: Assume a11 and a12 to be the codes of characters C11 and C12. Then,

A comment can be dísplayed in up to eíght línes. The comment consísts
of the first line to the eíghth líne ín the programmed sequence of G65 H94
for each 1ine.
Example
Assume that the comment is BOLT HOLE. The macro instruction
is gíven as follows:
G65 H94 P 40 2066 Q079076 R084032 I072079 J076069;
B OL T1 Ј HO LE
392
22. PATTERN DATA 1NPUT
B-62444E/03 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
Examples Macгo instructíon to describe a parameter title , the variable name, and
a comment.
VAR. : BOLT HOLE 00001 No00oo
NO. NAME DATA COØNT
500 TOOL Ф
501 sтANDARD x BOLT HOLE
502 STANDARD Y CIRCLE
503 RAD1U5 SET PATTERN
504 S. ANGL DATA TO VAR.
505 HOLES NO
506
507
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
x Y
Z
> _
ØI 16:05:59
1 і йІ ] [ λîENU ] [ OPR ] [ ] [ OPRT ] ı
\
09501 ;
N1G65 H92 P066 079 0076 084 R032 072 1 079 076 J069 032 ; VAR : BOLT HOLE
N2G65 H93 P500 0084 079 R079076 ; 500 TOOL
N3G65 H93 P501 0075 073 R074 085 1078 032 J088 032 ; 501 K1JUN X
N4G65 H93 P502 0075 073 R074 085 1 078 032 J089 032 ; 502 KUUN Y
N5G65 H93 P503 0082 065 R068 073 1 085 083 ; 503 RADIUS
N6G65 H93 P504 0083 046 R032 065 1 078 071 J 076 032 ; 504
N7G65 H93 P505 0072 079 R076 069 1 083 032 J078 079 K046 032 ; 505 HOLES NO
N8G65 H94; Comment
N9G65 H94 P042 066 0079 076 R084 032 1072 079 J076 069 ; BOLT HOLE
N10G65 H94 R032 067 1073 082 J067 076 K069 042 ; CIRCLE
N11 G65 H94 P083 069 0084 032 080 065 1084 084 J069 082 K078 032 ; SET PATTERN
N12G65 H94 P06δ 065 0084 065 R032 084 1079 032 J086 065 K082046 ; DATA NO VAR.
N13G65 H94 P078 079 0046 053 R048 048 1045 053 J048 053 K046 032 ;
N14M99;
393
22. PATTERN DATA 1NPUT
PROGRØMING FUNCTION B-62444E/03

CHARACTERS AND
CODES TO BE USED
FOR THE PATTERN
DATA 1NPUT FUNCTION
Characters and codes to Ø used for the pattern
data lnqut functlon
a ter Code Comment áctér Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 033 Exclama
tíon mark
G 071 1 034 Quotatíon
mark
їґ 072 t 035 Hash sígn
I 073 p 036 Do11ar sígn
J 074 037 Percent
K 075 038 Ampersand
L 076 039 Apostrophe
M 077 Г 040 Left
parenthesís
N 078 041 Ríght
parenthesís
O 079 042 Asterísk
P 080 + 043 P1us sígn
Q 081 044 Comma
R 082 045 Minus sígn
S 083 046 Period
T 084 / 047 81ash
085 058 Co1on
V 086 ; 059 Semícolon
W 087 < 060 Left angle
bracket
X 088 = 061 Equa1 sign
Y 089 > 062 Right angle
bracket
2 090 ? 063 Question
mark
0 048 w 064 HAt mark
1 049 [ 091 Left square
bracket
2 050 0 092
3 051 0 093 Yen sígn
4 052 ] 094 Ríghtsquar
bracket
5 053 095 Underscore
394
22. PATTERN DATA 1NPUT
PROGRAMMING B-62444E/03 FUNcт cN
Tabie b Numbers of subprograms employed in the pattern data input function
Subprogram No. Function
09500 Specifies character strings dispiayed on the pattern data menu.
09501 Specifies a character string of the pattern data correspondírıg to pattern
09502 Specifies a character string of the pattern data correspor?ding 4o pattern
09503 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern
09504 Specifıes a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern
09505 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern
09506 Specífies a character stríng of the pattern data corresponding to pattern
09507 Specifìes a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern
09508 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern
09509 Specifies a character string of the pattern data correspondíng to pattern
09510 Specifies a charaсter string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern
Tab1e. c Macro instructions used 1n the pattern data input function
G code H code Functlon
G65 H90 Specifies the menu titie.
G65 H91 Specifies the pattern name.
G65 H92 Specifíes the pattern data titie.
065 093 Sμecifies the varıabie name.
G65 H94 Specifies the comment.
Tab1e. d System varlables empioyed in the pattern data input functlon
System variable Function
t5900 Pattern No. selected by user.
1
111. OPERATION
B-624ØE/03 OPERATION 1. GENERAL
1
GENERAL
г

- 399 -
İ
1, GENERAL 8-624л4E/OЗ

MANUAL
OPERATION
Expianatíons
Manual reference The CNC machine tool has a position used to determine the machíne
positíon return See posítíon.
Sectíon This posítíon is caUed the reference posítíon, where the tool is replaced
or the coordínate are set. Ordínarily, after the power is turned on, the tool
ís moved to the reference posítion.
Manua1 reference posítíon return ís to move the tool to the reference
posítion using swítches and pushbuttons located on the operator s pane1.
λ Reference posítíon
Too1
Machíne operator s panel
O O O O
000 1
O O O

a Manual reference position return
The tool can be moved to the reference posítíon also with program
commands.
Thís operatíon ís caHed automatíc reference position return See Section
II-6 .
400

B-62444E/03 OPERATION 1. GENERAL
The tool movement by Usíng machine operator s pane1 swítches, push buttons, or the manual
manual operatíon handle, the tool can be moved along each axís.

Fí b The tool movement by manual operatíon
The tool can be moved in the following ways:
i Manual continuous feed jog feed See Sectioa Π
The tool moves contínuously while a push button remaíns pressed.
ii Inстemental feed See Sectíon IΠ
The tool moves by the predetermined distance each time a button is
pressed.
ííí Manua1 handle feed 5ee Section П
By rotatíng the manual handle,the tool moves by the dístance
corresponding to the degree of handle rotation.
401
1.GENERAL OPERATION 8-62444E/03
Automatíc operation ís to operate the machine accordíng to the created
program. It includes memory, MDI, and DNC operatíons. See Sectíon
TOOL MOVEMENT
IlI-4 .
BY PROGRAMING
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION Program
01000 ;
1 м_s_τ
G92_X_; τool
G00... ;
G01...... ;
a Too1 Movement by Programmíng
Explanations
Memory operatíon After the program ís once regístered in memory of CNC, the machíne can
Ьe run accordíng to the program ínstructíons. Thís operatíon ís caІed
memoгy operatíon.
CNC
Memory
Fí b Memory Operation
MD1 operation After the program ís entered, as an command group, from the MDI
keyboard, the machíne can Ьe run accordíng to the program. Thís
operation is called MDI operatíon.
MD1 keyboard Machine
C

Manual program
input
c MDi operatíon
DNC operatíon The machine can be operated by readíng a program directly from an
external ínput/output device, without havíng to register the program in
CNC memorу. Thís ís called DNC operatíon.
402
в-s24Øεıoз OPERATION 1. GENERAL

AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
Explanatíons
Program seíectíon Select the program used for the workpíece. Ordínaríly, oлe pгogгam ís
prepared for one workpíece. If two oг moгe programs are ín memory,
select the program to be used, by searchíng the program number Sectíon

1n memory or oп a tape
Program number
G92-
Work-1 program
M30
_ Program number 01002
G92
Work-2 program Automat-
іc opeгa-
tion
M30
Program number 01003
G92
Work-3 program
M30
a Program Selectíon for Automatíc Operatíon
Start and stop Pressíng the cycle start push button causes automatíc operation to start.
See Sectíon 111-4 By pressíng the feed hold or reset push button, automatic operatíon pauses
or stops. By specífying the program stop or program termínatíon
command in the program, the runníng wil1 stop during automatíc
operation. When oлe process machining ís completed, automatic
operatíon stops.
Start Cyc1e start -
Stop Feed hold Automatic operation
Reset
1
Program ѕtорІ Stop caused
Program end by program
Fí b Start and Stop for Automatíc Operatíon
403
1. GENERAL OPERATION B-62444E/03
Handle interruptíon See Whi1e automatíc operation is beíng executed, tool movement can overlap
Sectíon automatic operation by rotatíng the manual handle.
Depth of cut specifíed
by a program
Fí c Handle lnterruptíon for Automatíc Operation
4Ø
в-sг4Øεı0з OPERATION 1. GENERAL
Before machíníng ís started, the automatíc runníng check can be
executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machíne TESTING A
as desíred. Thís check can be accomplíshed by running the machíne
PROGRAM actually oг viewíng the position dísplay change wíthout runníng the
machine See Sectíon Ill-5 .

Check by Running the
Machíne
Explanations
Dry run See Sectíon Remove the workpiece, check on1y movement of the too1. Select the tool
movement rate using the dial оп the operator s pаne1.
Fí a Dry run
Feedrate overríde See Check the program by changíng the rate specífíed in the program.
Sectíon
Feed rate specífíed Ьy program
100 mm/mín.
Feed rate after feed rate
Too1 override : 20 mm/mín.
b Feedrate Overríde
405
1. GENERAL OPERATION 8-62444E/03
Single block See When the cycle start push button ís pressed, the tool executes one
Sectíon operation then stops. By pressing the cycle start agaín, the tool executes
the next operation then stops. The program ís checked in thís manner.
Fí c síngle B1ock

Fiow to View the
Position Display
Change without
Running the Machine
Explanatíons
Machíne lock See
Sectíons
CRT/MD1
XO0000
Y .....
Too1
WoØíece
The tool remains stopped, and only the
positional dísplays of the axes change.
d Machine Lock
Auxílíary functíon lock When automatíc running ís placed ínto the auxíliary function lock mode
See Sectíon duńng the machíne lock mode, a11 auxíliary functions spíndle rotatíon,
tool replacement, coolant on/off, etc. are dísabled.
406
8-6244дE/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL
After a created program ís once regístered in memory, it can be corrected
oг modífíed from the CRT/MDI pane1 See Sectíon III-9 . EDITING A PART
Thís operatíon can Ьe executed using the part program storage/edit
PROGRAM
function.
Program correction oг modification
a Part Program Editing
407 --
1. GENERAL OPERAT1oN B-62444E/03
The operator can display or change a value stored in CNC internal
meınory by key operatíon on the CRT/MDI screen See ΠI-11 .
DiSPLAY ІNG AN
SETT1NG DATA
Data setting LW
Data display
Screen Keys
C RT/M D 1
CNC memory
a Dísplayíng and Settíng Data
Explanatíons
Offset va1ue
Geometry weer com-
BØttİng compensation pensauon
Too1 compensatíon
numberl
Too1 compensatíon
number2
Screen Keys Dísplay Too1 compensation
number3
CRT/MD1
CNC memorу
Fí b Dísplayíng and setting Offset Values
The tool has the tool dimensíon length, diameter . When a workpíece ís
machíned, the tool movement value depends on the tool dimensíons.
By settíng tool dímension data in CNC memory beforehand,
automatically generates tool routes that permít any tool to cut the
workpiece specífíed by the program. Too1 dimensíon data ís called the
offset value See Section Π
408
8-624ØE/o3 OPERATION 1. GENERAL
c Offset Va1ue
Displayíng and settíng Apart from parameters, there ís data that ís set by the operator in
operator s settíng data operatíon. Thís data causes machíne characteristícs to change.
For example, the followíng data can be set:
Inch/Metńc swítchíng
I/O devices selection
Mírror ímage cuttíng on/off
Thc above data is called settíng data See Sectíon
8etting data
settíng lnch/Metric swítching
1/0 device selectíon
Mírror image ON/OFF settíng
Screen Keys ј Dísplayí ng
CNC Memory
Operatíonal
characteristics
Program Automatic
operation
Movement of
the machíne
Fí d Displayíng and setting Operator s setting data
409
1. GENERAL OPERATION 8-62444E/o3
e Dísplayíng and setting The CNC functions have versatílíty ín order to take action in
parameters characteristícs of various machínes.
For example, CNC can specífy the followíng:
Rapíd traverse rate of each axis
Whether íncrement system ís based on metríc system or ínch system.
How to set command multíply/detect multíply CMR/DØ
Data to make the above specífıcatíon is called parameters See Sectíon

Parameters differ depending on machíne too1.
Parameter
Rapid traverse rate
setting Positíon control
Reference posítion return
Backlash compensatíon data
tf Pítch error compensatíon
Screen Keys Dísplay data
CRT/MD1
Movement
Program Automatic of the
operation machine
e Displayíng and settíng parameters
Data protection key A key called the data protection key can be defíned. It ís used to prevent
part programs, offset values, parameters, and settíng data from beíng
regístered, modífıed, oГ deleted erroneously See Sectíon III-11 .
Data settíng
Screen Keys
Protectíon Key
CRT/MD1
Regístratíon /
alteration inhíbítíon Machíne operator s
panel
Program
Offset value
signal Parameters
setting data
CNC memory
Fí f Data Proteetion Key
410
в-ε24Øεıaз OPERATION 1. GENERAL

DISPLAY
The contents of the currently active program aгe displayed. In addition,
the programs scheduled next and the program list are displayed. Program Display
See Section
Active sequence number
Active program numbcr
PROGRAM 1100 00005
N1 G90 G17 G00 G41 ;
N2 G01 F150 ;
N3 ;

, .ю 4фю
Program N6 G03 ;
content N7 G01 ;
N8 ;
N9 ;
N 10 ;
N11 G00 G40 XO ZO ;

MEM STOP 13:18:14
PRGRM CHECK CURRNT NEXT OPRT
J
I Currently executed program
The cursor indícates the currently executed 1ocation
PROGRAM 1100 00003
SYSTEM ED1T10N B1A1 - 03
PROGRAM NO. USED 10 FREE 53
MEMORY AREA USED 960 FREE 5280
PROGRAM LIBRARY L1ST
00001 00002 00010 00020 00040 00050
00100 00200 01000 01100
>_
ED1T - 13:18:14
1 PRGRM, 1 l Ѕј [ JOPRTKЅј l

411
1.GENERAL OPERATION B-62444E/03
The current posítion of the tool is dísplayed wíth the coordinate values.
The distance from the current posítion to the target posítíon can also be Current Positíon
dísplayed. See Sectíon to
Díspiay
1
ACTUAL PosıτıoN Aвsoιuτε 0003 00003
X
Z
C
PART COUNT 30
RUN T1ME OH41 M CYCLE T1ME OH OM22S
MEM .,, ..
19:47:45
REL ALL l 1 OPRT I

When a trouble occurs duríng operatíon, error code and a1arm message are
dísplayed on CRT screen. See APPENDIX G for the list of eпor codes and A1arm Díspiay
theír meaııings. See Section
ALARM MESSAGE 1000 00003
010 1MPROPER G-CODE
>
MEMSTOP ііІ 19:55:22
MSG HISTRY Ѕј
l J Jl
J
412
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 1.GENERAL
When this option is selected, two types of run time and number of parts
Parts Count Display, are dísplayed on the Sectíon
Run Tíme Dísplay
ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTE 0003 00003
X
Z
C
PART COUNT 18
RUN T1ME OH16M CYCLE T1ME OH 1 M OS
MEM STRT , ... F1N 20:22:23
Ѕј REL , ALL , OPRT
i
The graphic can be used to draw a tool path for automatíc operation and
manual operatíon, thereby indicatíng the progress of cutting and the Graphic Display See
position of the too1. See Section III-12
Sectíon 111-12
1-path control
413
1. GENERAL OPERATION B-62444E/π3
/
HEAD1 00001 N00021 HEAD2 00020 N00020
χ X1 χ X2
4 Z1 Z2
ı
ı
Z Z 6
1 2
MEM STRT F1N 08 : 24 : 56 HEAD1
CG.ØJI , zooм OPRT ,
J
2-path control
414
в-s24ØE/oз OPERATION 1. GENERAL
Programs, offset values, parameters, etc. input in CNC memory can be
output to paper tape, cassette, or a floppy disk for savíng. After once
ATA
output to a medium, the data can be input ínto CNC memory.
OUÌPUT
Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
Memory Papertape
Program
FANUC Floppy
Reader/puncher FANUC Floppy Cassette
Offset intertace cassette adaptor
Parameters
Floppy disk
т
о
CNC
Automatic programming system
a Data Output
415
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION 8-62444E/o3
2
OPERATIONAL DEVICES
The peripheral devices avaílable include the CRT/MDI pane1 or
LCD/MDI pane1 attached to the CNC, machíne operator s pane1 and
external input/output devices such as tape reader, PPR, floppy cassette,
and FA card.
416
OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B-62444E/03
The followíng Settíng and Display uníts aгe avaílable.
SETTING AND 9-inch monochrome CRT/MDI panel sma11 type .........
DISPLAY UN1T 9-ínch monochrome CRT/MDI panel standard type .......
9-ínch co1oг CRT/MDI panel sma11 type ...............
9-ínch color CRT/MDI panel standard type .............
9-ínch monochrome PDP/MDI pаne1 standard type .......
14-ínch co1oг CRT/MDI hońzontal type ................
14-ínch co1oг CRT/MDI vertical type ..................
9-ínch monαhгome CRT separate type ................
9-ínch color CRT separate type .......................
9-inch monосhrome PDP separate type ................
ínch monochтome LCD separate type ..............
ínch co1oг LCD separate type .....................
цкh color LCD/MDI horízontal type ..............
ínch color LCD/MDI vertícal type ................
Separate type MDI small type .......................
Separate type MDI standard type ....................
417
2. OPERAl-lONAL DEVIGES OPERATiON в-s2лaaεıoз
,1
9-inch
Monochrome/Co1or
CRT/MD1 Pane1
Sma11 Type
FUNCTION KEYS

ľ
DГг No GΛ 8é 90
oos oaoc mκ wm aп

вá f E г
σ σ σ σ σ σ σ


9-ínch
Monochrome/Co1or
CRT/MD1 Pane1
Standard Type
RESET KEY
HELP KEY ı ADDREδS/NUMERIC KEYS

Γ λW
\ ΛO<1 Q Á N GE P 8 κгa
OMEΛ
Zs C η Y, ED1T KEYS

W V 2 3η S. a 00 CANCEL KEY
м
.4Н
К ύ , a
R F
Eφ
1NPUT KEY
г a .
, т ó е- c 0

σ σ σ σ σ σ σ

POWER ON/OFF BUTTONS PAGE ı FUNCTION KEYS
SOFT KEYS SH1FT KEY UP/DOWN CURSOR KEYS
KEYS
418
OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B-62444E/03

9-ínch Monochrome
PDP/MD1
Standard Type
RESET KEY
HELP KEY ı ApDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS
[ ]
1p[ 0, N GE Pa 7 lt0
x Ze Cp , . Y ED1T KEYS a
. . Э 2
CANCEL KEY M. ao 0 0
L.
Ø, I K R F п E 1NPUT KEY OM
i eáд . . a.ıs 0 + á
C C 0 o.pε R
O o 0 0 o O

POWER ON/OFF BUTTONS PAGE- 1 FUNCTION KEYS
SOFT KEYS
SH1FT KEY UP/DOWN CURSOR KEYS
KEYS

14-ínch Co1or CRT/MD1
Horízontal Type
RESET KEY
ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS HELP KEY

г вя τσ ıв--τ-1

σσ P
σZ.oσ
σaFł a
0000
a800- SH1FT KEY
oo σ
o2σo ED1T KEYS
oσo
aσ 1NPUT KEY
CANCEL KEY σ
FUNCTION KEYS
0 0 0 o σ o 0 0 o σ o σ 1
oσ ai
a a o CURSOR KEYS
Q


POWER ON/OFF BUTTONS SOFT KE`ЧS PAGE-UP/DOWN KEYS
419
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION в-s2444E/o3
i
14-ırıch Co1or CRT/MD1
Vertícal Type

L ıMвиε ,:: 4_т


SOFT KEYS
o eıι1 Ea σіІεЁ- І
FUNCTION KEYS fXJC] Jí Э
L1Π <- ]f-- ED1T KEYS
Ĺ 1LλΠΓ 1 ΓJĽ1L1ґ ,C1
Π Ĺ1 JLJGI OĽ1Γ7 ΓJ і CURSOR KEYS
J
SH1FT KEY POWER ON/OFF вUTTONS PAGE-UP/DOWN KEYS
1NPUT KEY
ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS CANCEL KEY
216
9-Ínch
Monochrome/Co1or
CRT Separate Type

ı

0 0 0 0 0 0

SOFr κεYS
420
в-sг4Øεıoз OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

9-ínch Monochrome
PDP Separate Type

Ø o 0 0 0 o Ø

SOFГ KEYS

ínch Monochrome
LCD Separate Type
421
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATiON в-s2aaaε/oз

ínch Co1or LCD
Separate Type
0 0
a 000ao ooaao 0
0 0
SOFT KEYS
....

ínch Co1or LCD/MD1
Horízontal Type
FUNCTION KEYS ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS

ΓlJ ΠıüØısT ]
o, и, G Po 9-
u Zs C, 0
BQ Q V
ı г
K
R

F CANCEL KEY
L
SH1FT KEY
1NPUT KEY
вá . . HELP KEY
RESET KEY
Сі OOCJOO OΓЈ[.:-1ΓзOO
i
PAGE-UP/DOWN KEYS ı ED1T KEYS
SOFT KEYS CURSOR KEYS POWER ON/OFF вUTTONS
422
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

ínch Co1or LCD/MD1
Vertical Type
POWER ON/OFF BUTTONS
. e
1
, ... ь
ı

SOFT KEYS 000000 oσσ000
RESET KEY
oZ..σ σσo σ e г FUNCTION KEYS
w ooг σ σ 2 o
HELP KEY ED1T KEYS
uoσuЕ σ Ј ooσ-- σoo o
CURSOR KEYS
SH1FT KEY
- ırı o
e
ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS 1 г ηuC-urı
CANCEL KEY 1NPUT KEY

Separate Type MD1
Sma11 Type
FUNCTION KEYS ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS

г---
Sθ 90
2:1 SH1FT KEY
CANCEL KEY
1NPUT KEY
vos aØ ά ºııσı ı cıwı иг τ
ED1T KEYS
г x κs+a κ roı L_swaı λ Ø
a ćε 1
ь
v
ε
Ü
HELP KEY
RESET KEY

PAGE-UP/DOWN KE1 S CURSOR KEYS
423
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION в-sгa44Eıoз

Separate Type MD1
Standard Type
HELP KEY RESET KEY ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS

ED1T KEYS
. 0 w H 0 2 0 CANCELKEY
M a a o 00
Øτ 1NPUT KEY
a a

PAGE- FUNCTION KEYS SH1FT KEY UP/DOWN CURSOR KEYS
KEYS
- 424 -
OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVIGES
B-62444E/03
Explanatíon of the keyboard
2 RESET KEY
3 HELP KEY ı 5 ADDRESS/NUMERlC KEYS
0 0
---
N, GE Po 7 8 9 0 0
cp . 9 ED1T KEYS
а.
Cl 0 η Н
w
J 2 0 0 8 CANCEL KEY
Ů
0 a u
ó Ï K, 0
I, R F
Em
7 1NPUT KEY
.a .. o 0
=1 0
a
Іс
1 POWER ON/OFF BUTTONS 12 PAGE- 10 FUNCTION KEYS
4 SOFT KEYS
6 SH1FT KEY UP/DOWN 11 CURSOR KEYS
KEYS
Fí 9 monochrome or color CRT/MD1 panel horizontai type
Explanatíon of the MD1 keyboard
-τ-
Number Name Expianation
1 Power ON and OFF Press theses buttons to turn CNC power ON and OFF.
buttons
OOFF i ON
2 RESET key Press thís key to reset the CNC, to cancel an a1arm, etc.
aεsετ
3 HELP key Press this key to display how to operate the machíne too1. such as MD1 key op-
eration, or the details of an alarm which occurred in the CNC He1p functíon .
нειa
4 Soft keys The soft keys have various functíons, according to the Applicatíons. The soft key
functions are dísplayed at the bottom of the CRT screen.
5 Address and numeríc keys Press these keys to ínput alphabetic, numeric, and other characters.
N 4 ...
6 SH1FT key Some keys have two characters on their keytop. Pressíng the kыy
_ switches the characters. Specíal character Ê is displayed on the screen when a
character indicated at the bottom ríght curner on the keytop can be entered.
7 ıNPı.1T key When an address or a numerical key ís pressed, the data ís ínput to the buffer,
and it is dıspiayed oп tŕıe CRT screon. To cepy the data in the key ínput buffer to
INPUT the offset register, etc., press the <1NPUT> key. This key , equivaIent to the [1N-
PUT] key of the soft keys, and either can be pressed to produce the same result.
425
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-62444E/03
TaЬ Explanation of the MD1 keyboard
Number Name Explanatlon
8 Cancel key Press thís key to delete the last character or symbol input to the key ínput buffer.
When the key input buffer displays
CAN >N001X100Z_
and the cancel CAN key is pressed, Z ís canceled and
>NOO1X100_
is displayed.
9 I Program edit keys Press these keys when edítíng the program.
,ι7εд : Alteratíon
ALTER INsEAT DELETE
иsεRT : lnsertion
: Deletion
10 I Function keys Press theses keys to swítch dísplay screens for each function.
See sec. for detaíls of the functíon keys.
aos гεзoa
11 I Cursor move keys There are four dífferent cursor move keys.
f O: This k d e ir y e c ís tí o u n s . e d T h to em cu o rs v o e r t h ís e m cu o r v s e o d r i t n o s th h e o r r t í g u h n t i t o s rí
OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B-б2 :44Ei03

Fl1NCT N KEYS AND
SOFT KEYS

Generai SCreen
Operations
1 Press a function key ori the CRT/MDI oг LCD/MDI pane1. The
oFF Eτ
POS PROG chapter selectíon soft keys that belong to the selected functíon appeaг.
sETTlNG
2 Press oпe of the chapter selectíon soft keys. The screen for the
selected chapter appears. If the soft key for a target chapter ís not
sysτεм MES3AGE GRAPH displayed, press the contínuous menu key next-menu key .
In some cases, addítíonal chapters can Ьe selected wíthín a chapter.
Functíon keys
3 When the target chapter screen ís displayed, press the operatíon
selection key to display data to be manípulated.
L ıc ıc J
4 To redísplay the chapter selectíon soft keys, press the return menu
key.
Chapter selection
soft keys Operation
selectíon The general screen display procedure is explained above. However,
key the actual display procedure vańes from one screen to another. For
t > t detaíls, see the descríptíon of índívídual operatíons.
Return menu Continuous me nu
key key
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION в-s2a4aεıoз
Functíon keys are provided to select the type of screen to be dísplayed.
The followíng function keys are provided on the CRT/MDI and Functíon Keys
LCD/MDI panels:
POS Press thís key to dísplay the position screen.
PROG Press thís key to dísplay the program screen.
OFFSET
Press thís key to dísplay the offset/settíng screen.
SElTlNG
sysτεм Press thís key to dísplay the system screen.
MEØ6l,ОE Press this key to dísplay the message screen.
Press thís key to dísplay the help screen. HELP
GRAPH Press thís key to display the graphics screen.
в-sг4Øεıoз OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
To dísplay a moгe detailed screen, press a function key followed by a soft
key. Soft keys are also used for actual operations. Soft Keys
The following íllustrates how soft key dísplays are changed by pressíng
each function key.
The symbols ín the following figures mean as shown below :
_____ : lndícates screens
: lndicates a screen that can be dísplayed by pressíng a
function key 1
[ ] : lndícates a soft key 2
: lndícates input from the MD1 panel.
[ ] : lndícates a soft key dísplayed іп green or híghlíghted .
: lndícates the continuous menu key ríghtmost soft key 3 .
1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently.
2 Some soft keys are not dísplayed depending oп the option
confıguration.
3 In some cases, the continuous menu key ís omítted when the 14 CRT
dísplay or 10 LCD ís used.

f
429
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-62444E/03
POS1T10N SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key гos
-Pos
Absolute coordinate display
[ABS] - OPRT ] PTSPRE] EXEC]
- RUNPRE] EXEC]
Relative coordinate display
[REL] -[ OPRT ] is or numeral [PRESET]
RiG1N] T [дLLEXE]
L Axís name [EXEC]
TSPRE] -јEXEC]
UNPRE] -[EXEC]
Current position díspla
[ALL] - OPRη] is oг numeral [PRESET]
R1G1N] [ALLEXE]
Ãxis пame јEXEC]
TSPRE] -- EXEC]
UNPRE] -[EXEC]
Hand1e ínterruptíon
[HNDL] [ OPRT ] T PTSPRE] --[EXEC]
ıl- RUNPRE] [EXEC]
Monitor screen
[MON1] f OPRT ] -Ј--[PTSPRE] --[EXEC]
L[RUNPRE] --[EXEC]
430
OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B-62444E/o3

[ PROGRAM SCREEN h Soft key transitíon triggered by the function key
L ...__.._ -i in the MEM mode -- f
1/2
PROG
Program dísplay screen - -
[PRGRM] [ OPRT ] BG-EDT] = See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed 1
Q O number --[O 5RH]
1 N number --[N SRH]
[REW 1ND]
[P TYPE]
[Q TYPE]
F SRH] --- [CAN]
L [EXEC]
Program check dísplay screen
[CHECK] ABS] -1 OPRT ] BG-EDT] b See When the soft key [BG-EDT] ís pressed
REL] J O number [O SRH]
N number --[N SRH]
[REW 1ND]
C
i [P TYPE]
ł [Q TYPE]
F SRH] [CAN]
L [EXEC]
Current block display screen
[CURRNT] OPRT ] [BG-EDT] b See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
Next block dísplay screen
[NEXT] [ OPRT ] [BG-EDT] b See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
Program restart display screen
[RSTR] [ OPRT ] [BG-EDT] b See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
2 Continued on the next page
431
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-62444E/03
2/2
2
[ -ј--[PRGRM] Return to 1 Program dísplay
Fí1e directory display screen
[D1RJ --[ OPRT ] --[SELECT] ,-ξFi1e No. [F SET]
L[EXEC]
Schedule operation display screen
[SCHDUL] [ OPRT ] LEAR] -- [CAN]
L [EXEC]
Schedule data fINPUT]
1
1
,

1
ı
1

432
в-s2aØε/oз OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Soft key transition tríggered by the function key PAОО PROGRAM SCREEN
in the ED1T mode -
1/2
P ROG
Program dísplay
[PRGRM] [ OPRT ] BG-EDT] b see When the sott key [BG-EDT] is pressed
O number [O sRH]
Address [sRH-1]
Address [sRHT]
REWIND]
sRH] [CAN]
N number EXEC]
EAD] [CHA1N] The cursor moves to the end of a program.
[sTOP]
[CAN]
O number EXEC]
UNCH] T [sTOP]
C [t;AN]
O number [EXEC]
-ѓDЕLЕТЕ] [CAN]
L N number [EXEC]
LјЕХ_ЕDТ] COPY] CRSRA] O number јEXEC]
ACRSR]
ABTTM]
ALL]
MOVE] CRSRA] O number fEXEC]
ACRSR]
ABTTM]
ALL]
MERGE] T-[ACRSR] O number fEXEC]
L[ABTTM]
CHANGE] Address -[BEFORE] `
Address -ЃAFTER] sK1P]
[1-EXEC]
[EXEC]
1 Contínued on the next page
433
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION e-s2444εıo3
2/2
1
Pгo гam directo dis 1a 9 Y p Y 1
ı- [L1B] [ OPRT ] BG-EDT] = See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
O number fO SRH] b Return to the program

[READ] [CHA1N]
[STOP]
[CAN]
O number fEXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
O number fEXEC]
Graphic Conversational Programming
Н- [] [PRGRM] Return to the program
[- ]
[ G number [BLOCK] Data [L1NE]

When a G number ís omitted, [CHAMF]
the standard screen appears. []
[1NPUT]
ι
Floppy directory display
[FLOPPY] PRGRM] Return to the program
[D1R] j OPRT ] F SRH] [C N A u N m ] eral -- F SET]
[EXEC]
READ] Numeral --[F SET]
Numeral --[O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
PUNCH] Numeral --[F SET]
Numeral --[O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
DELETE] Numeral F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC] i
434
в-sг4Øεıoз OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
PROGRAM SCREEN ; : Soft key transítíon tríggered by the function key PAφ
11 ín the MD1 mode
[RОЇЈ______
Program dísplay
[PRGRM] <--[ OPRT ] [BG-EDT] b See When the soft key [BG-EDT] ís pressed
г
Program ínput screen
1 [MDł] [ OPRT ] BG-EDT] b See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
Address SRH 1]
Address SRHT]
REWIND]
г Current block dísplay screen
[CURRNT] OPRT ] [BG-EDT] See When the soft key [BG-EDT] ís pressed
Next block dísplay screen
[NEXT] OPRT ] [BG-EDT] b See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
Program restart dísplay screen
[RSTR] [ OPRT ] [BG-EDT] b See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
435
2. OPERATIONAL DEV10Es OPERATION в-s2a44εıoз
----ı
PROGRAM SCREEN h Soft key transition triggered by the function key PR
in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode
[оїЈ______
Program display
PRGRM OPRT ] [BG-EDT] b see When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
Current block display screen
[CURRNT] OPRT ] BG-EDT] see When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
Next block display screen
[NEXT] [ OPRT ] BG-EDT] b See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed -
Program restart display screen ,
i
[RSTR] [ OPRT ] [BG-EDT] b see When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
PROGRAM SCREEN h Soft key transition triggered by the function key PRo
in the TJOG or THDL mode
ої]______
Program dísplay
[PRGRNF] [ OPRT ] BG-EDT] b see When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
O number [O sRH] b Return to the program
Address [sRH ]
Address sRHT]
REWIND]
Program dírectory display
[L1B] [ OPRT ] -1--jBG-EDT] b see When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed
L O number --- O sRH] b Return to the program
436
OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B-62444E/03
Soft key transition tríggered by the functíon key PR
PROGRAM SCREEN
When the soft key [BG EDT] is pressed in a11 mo es
1/2
PROG
Program dísplay
[PRGRM] --[ OPRT ] -T-[BG-END]
O number [O sRH]
Address [sRH 1]
Address [sRHT]
REWIND]
sRH] [CAN]
L N number [EXEC]
EAD] [CHA1N] The cursor moves to the end of a program.
[STOP]
[CAN]
O number ---[EXEC]
FPUNCH] [sTOP]
L[CA ON ]number [EXEC]
ELETE] -E [CAN]
N number ---[EXEC]
X-EDT] COPY] CRSRA] O number fEXEC]
ACRSR]
ABTTM]
ALL] -
MOVE] CRSRA] O number [EXEC]
ACRSR]
ABTTM]
ALL] -
MERGE] -i--[ACRSR] =і- O number --[EXEC]
L[ABTTM]
-јCHANGE] Address -[BEFORE]

L Address -ЃAFTER] SK1P]
[1-EXEC]
[EXEC]
1 Contínued on the next page
437
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-62444E/03
2/2
1
Pro9 ram directo rY dis p1Y a
- [L1B] [ OPRT ] BG-EDT]
O number --[O SRH] b Return to the program
[READ] [CHA1N]
[STOP]
[CAN]
O number fEXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
O number -- EXEC]
Graphíc Conversatíonal Programming
[] j PRGRM] b Return to the program
-[]
L G number BLOCK] Data [L1NE]
When a G number is omitted, [CHAMF]
the standard screen appears. []
[1NPUT]
Floppy dírectory dísplay
[FLOPPY] -T [PRGRM] b Return to the program
L[D1RJ [ OPRT ] F SRH] Numeral [F SET]
[CAN]
EXEC]
READ] Numeral jF SET]
Numeral -- O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
PUNCHJ Numeral jF SET]
Numeral --[O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
DELETE] Numeral F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
438
OPERATION 2. OPERATIGNAL DEVICES β-62444E/03
OFFSETISETTING SCREEN Soft key transitïon triggered hy the function key
1/2
OFFSET
sETTING
T o0 o 1 s ff e t sc reen
L - [OFFSET] EAR] i-[ OPRT ] Number [NO SRH]
--[GEOM] Axís name and numeral fMEASUR]
Axís name ξł]
Numeral NPUT]
Numeral --[1NPUT]

CLEAR] [ALL]
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
ι PUNCH] [CAN]
L [EXEC]
Settíng screen
[SETING] [ OPRT ] Number јNO SRH]
ON:1 ]
OFF:O]
Numeral fNPUT]
Numeral f1NPUT]

Work coordínate system settíng screen
f- [WORK] [ OPRT ] Number -- NO SRH]
Axis name and numeral MEASUR]
Numeral NPUT]
Numeral [1NPUT]
f Macгo variables dísplay screen
[MACRO] [ OPRT ] Number NO SRH]
Ãxis name ]
Numeral -- 1NPUT]
PUNCH] [CAN]
ί
[EXEC]
1 1 Contínued on the next page
439
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-62444EJ03
Soítware operator s panel screen
Too1 lífe management settíng screen
[TOOLLF] - [ OPRT ] Number [NO SRH]
CLEAR] -1-[CAN]
L- EXEC]
L. Numeral ---[1NPUT]
Y axís tool offset screen
- [] -i-[WEAR] -1-[ OPRT ] Number ---[NO SRH]
GEOM] Axís name and numeral -[MEASUR]
Axís name -јł]
Numeral -fNPUT]
Numeral -- 1NPUT]
CLEAR] [ALL]
[W EAR]
[GEOM]
READ] T CAN]
L. [EXEC]
PUNCH] CAN]
EXEC]
Workpiece shift screen
[] f OPRT ] Numeral [NPUT]
Numeral f1NPUT]
440
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
SYSTEM SCREEN Soft key transítion tríggered by the functìon key 5У51EM
1
1 /3
sysτεм
Parameter screen L
- [PARAM] [ OPRT ] Number NO SRH]
ON:1]
OFF:O]
Numeral NPUT]
Numeral [1NPUT]

READ] CAN]
EXEC]
PUNCH] CAN]
Note Search for the start of the file using EXEC]
the PRGRM screen for read/punch.
Diagnosis screen
[DGNOS] [ OPRT ] Number fNO SRH]
PMC screen
-F [PMC] PMCLAD] SEARCH] -Ј-- TOP]
BOTTOM]
SRCH]
W-SRCH]
N-sRCH]
F-SRCH]
ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
R1GER] -Ј--[ГRGON]
RGOFF]
START]
DUMP] SEARCH]

DPARA]/[NDPARA] BYTE]
RGSRC] WORD]
1N1T] ]
ł--[W 1NDOW] D1V1DE]
CANCEL]
DELETE]
SELECT]
1DTH] 1 2 3
Continued on the next page
Ø1
2. CPERATICNAL DEVICES OPERATION e-s2a44εıo3
1 2 3 2/3
η_ DUМP] SEARCH]
ı p.
BY ϊ E]
1WORD]
]
DRARA]/[NDPARA]
MCDGN] 1--[T1TLE]
STATUS] - SEARCH]
h-fALARM]
TRACE] гг D1SP]/[TRCPRM]
EXEC]
SEARCH]
h- M. Ѕ RCHj `-[1NPlJη
ANALYS] г[SCOPE] [SGNPRM]
With DELEтε] STARη/[STOP]
PMC-RC iN1T] T-SRCH]
OΠIy ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
EXCHG] T SELECη -fTO] - EXEC]
. CANCEL]
ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
-[PMCPRM] [TiMER]
COUNTR]
KEEPRL]
DATA] G. DATA] ]
G.CONη G-SRCH]
] SEARCH]
1N1η
Ú ЧδETT1NG] -[YES]/[MANUAL]/[ROM]
L NO]/[AUTO]/[RAM]
I-[STOP]/[RU N]
L-[1/O] i-[EXEC]
CANCEL]
No.
PEED] -[ 1NPU η
1N1η
D1]/[ROM]
System confíguration screen
[SY5TEM]
4
Contínued on the next Page
442
B-62444E/o3 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
4 3/3
Pítch error compensatíon screen
[P1TCH] OPRT ] No. fNO SRH]
ON:1]
OFF:O]
Numeral [NPUT]
Numeral - 1NPUT]
EAD] AN]
XEC]
UNCH] AN]
Note Search for the start of the fíle usíng
XEC] the PRGRM screen for read/punch.
Servo parameter screen

[] ] OPRT ] ON:1]
[SV TUN] OFF:O]
Numeral [1NPUT]
RACE] L- ] [ OPRT ]
TRNςFJ
F
Spíndle parameter screen
[] [] -- [ OPRT ] ON:1]
ł--[S N] O FF:O]
L_[] `[1NPUT]
Waveform díagnosis screen
[] -T--[]
L[] -Г [STSRT]
M E-i]
E-T1ME]
H-DOBL]
H-HALF]
STSRT]
CH-1 T]
н-1 l]
V-DOBL]
V-HALF]
STS RT]
CH-2T]
]
` -DOBL]
U V-HALF]
443
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION 8-62444E/б3
мεssдGε sCεtεεи Soft key transition triggered by the function key
MEцAGE
A1arm display screen
[ALARAA]
Message display screen
A1aгm history screen --
[HISTRY] [ OPRT ] --[CLEAR]
HELP sCRεεw Soft key transition triggered by the function key HE
LELrJ______
A1arm detaíl screen
[1 ALAM] [ OPRT ] јSELECT]
Operation method screen 1
[2 OPR] [ OPRT ] јSELECT] ı
Parameter table screen --
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 2. OPERATiONAL DEVICES
GRAPHIC 5CREEN Soft key transítion tríggered by the function key
τ
f
Too1 path graphïcs
GRAPH
Too1 path graphics
PRM] --[ OPRT ] fNORMAL]
GRAPH] j OPRT ] HEAD]
ERASE]
PROCEs]
EXEc]
sTOP]
ŻOOM] --[ OPRT ] ACT]
- H /LO]
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-62444E103
When an address and a numerícal key are pressed, the character
correspondíng to that key is input once into the key input buffer. The Keηa lnрLıІ ε d lnıput
contents of the key ínput buffer ís displayed at the bottom of the CRT
Buffer
screen.
In order to indícate that ít ís key ínput data, a > symbol ís dísplayed
immediately in front of it. A _ is dísplayed at the end of the key ínput
data índícatíng the ínput position of the next character.
Key input buffer disp > N001X100Z_
ED1T ALM 12:35:45
[ ] [ 1 [ ] [ ] [ ]
ı
Fíg. Key ínput buffer dísplay
To ínput the lower character of the keys that have two characters ínscribed
on them, fırst press the ѕНІ FT key and then the key in questíon.
When the SHIFT key ís pressed, _ indícatíng the next character ínput
posítion changes to A . Now lowercase characters can be entered shíft
state .
When a character ís input іn shíft status the shift status ís canceled.
Furthermore, if the sн Fт key is pressed ín shíft status, the shift status is
canceled.
It ís possíble to input up to 32 characters at a time in the key ínput buffer.
Press the CAN key to cancel a character oг symbol ínput in the key input
buffer.
Example
When the key ínput buffer displays
>NOO1X100Z_
and the cancel caN key is pressed, Z ís canceled and
>NOO1X100_
is dísplayed.
B-s2aØε/oз OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVlCFS
2,2,5 After a character or number has been input from the MDI pane1, a data
Warnïng Messages check is executed when 1NPU1 key oг a soft key is pressed. In the case of
incorrect input data or the wrong operation a flashing warning message
wi11 be displayed on the status display 1ine.
Data input dísplay ł >
Warning message displa
ED1T WRONG MODE Status displap---L
Soft key display-- [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
J
Fig. Warning message display
TaЬ[ Warníng Messages
Warning message Content
FORMAT ERROR The format is íncorrect.
WR1TE PROTECT Key input is ínvaiíd because ot data protection
key or the parameter ís not write enabled.
DATA iS оUT OF RANGE The input va1ue exceeds the permítted range.
TOO MANY D1G1TS The input va1ue exceeds the permitted number of
digits.
WRONG MODE Parameter input is not possible in any mode
other than MD1 mode.
ED1T REJECTED 1t is not possible to edit ín the current CNC
status.
447
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION в-sгa44εıoз
There aгe 12 soft keys in the 14 CRT/MDI, LCD/MDI, or
LCD/MDI parie1. As íllustrated below, the 5 soft keys on the right and 14 CRT, LCD, and
those oп the ríght and left edges operate in the same way as the 9 CRT,
LCD Soft Key
whereas the 5 keys on the left hand síde are expansíon keys dedicated to
Confíguration the 14 CRT, LCD, or LCD.
9 CRT soft key
4 D
1 1 1, 1
14 CRT / LCD / LCD ı
soft key j
a D
1 1
τ
14 CRT/ LCD / LCD dedícated expansíon soft keys
Fig. CRT and LCD soft key configuration
Whenever a posítíon dísplay appears ín the left half of the screen after a
functíon key other than Pos ís pressed, the soft keys on the left half of
the soft key display area are dísplayed as follows:
4 ABS REL ALL HNDL
The soft key corresponding to the posítíon dísplay is indicated in reverse
video.
448
8-624Øε/o3 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Fíve types of external ínput/output devices are available. This section
outlines each device. For detaíls on these devíces, refer to the
EXTERNAL 1/0
corresponding manuals listed below.
DEVICES
Tab1e External 1/0 device
Devlce name Usage Max. Reference
storage manual
capacity
FANUC Handy Fi1e Easy-to-use, multí function 3600m B-61834E
inpuUoutput devíce. 1t ís de-
sígned for FA equípment and
uses floppy disks.
FANUC Fluppy Cas- lnput/output device. Uses 2500m B-66040E
sette floppy dísks.
ł
FANUC FA Card Compact ínpuUoutput device. 160m B-61274E
Uses FA cards.
FANUC PPR lrıput/output devíce consist- 275m B-58584E
ing of a paper tape reader,
tape punch, and printer.
Portable Taμe Reader input device for reading pa Appendix
per tape. H
The following data can be input/output to or from external ínput/output
devíces:
1. Programs
2. Offset data
З. Parameters
4. Custom macro comınon variables
5. Pítch error compensatíon data
For how data is input and output, see Chapter III-8.
449
2. OPERATiONAL DEVİCES OPERATION e-6г444E/o3
Parameter Before an external input/output devíce can be used, parameters must be
set as follows.
CNC
MA1N CPU BOARD OPT10N-1 BOAFiD
Channell Channel2 Channel3
JD5A JD5B JD5C JD6A
RS-232-б RS-232-β RS-232-б RS-422
Reader/ Reader/ Host Host
puncher puncher computer computer
1/0 CHANNEL=O 1/0 CHANNEL=2 1/0 CHANNEL=3 1/O CHANNEL=3
oг
1/0 CHANNEL=1
This CNC has three channels of reader/punch interfaces. The
ínput/output device to be used ís specifíed Ьy settíng the charmel
connected to that device in settíng parameter I/O CHANNEL.
The specifíed data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an
ínput/output device connected to a specifíc channel must be set in
parameters for that channel in advance.
For channell, two combinations of parameters to specify the ínput/output
devíce data are provided.
The followíng shows the ínterrelation between the reader/punch ínterface
parameters for the channels.
lnput/output channel
qıoı 5tφ bλ and other data number parameter 1/0 CHANNEL=O
0020 0102 Number specífied for the
channel 1 input/output device
0020 1/0 CHANNEL 0103 8aud rate
Specífy a channel for an 0111 S1φ bd and other daaa
ínput/output devíce. 1/0 CHANNEL=1 0112 Number specifled for the channel 1
input/output device
0113 1/0 CHANNEL Baud rate
= 0 : Channel 1
= 1 : Channel 1 0121 Stφ bit and other data
= 2 : Channel2 1/0 CHANNEL=2 0122 Number specifíed for the
= 3 : Channel3 channel2
inputjoutput device
0123 Baud ra1e
0131 Stφ Ь 1 and dher data
0132 Number spec rfied for the
input/output device 1/0 CHANNEL=3 0133 Baud ґa1e
channel3
0134 Selectioп oτ oгocoІ and
otherdaıa
Parameter NumØr 0135 8electíon of RS-422 0г
RS-232C, and other
data
450
a--s24Øε,oз OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
The Handy File ís an easy-to-use, multi function floppy disk
input/output devíce designed for FA equipment. By operatíng the Handy FANUC Handy Fi1e
File dírectly or remotely from a unít connected to the Hаndy Fi1e,
programs cаn be transferred and edited.
The Hаndy Fí1e uses ínch floppy disks, whích do not have the
problems of paper tape , noísy duríng input/output, easily broken, and
bulky .
Oпe or moгe programs up to bytes, whích is equívalent to the
memory capacity of 3600-m papeг tape can be stored on one floppy dísk.
RS-422
lntertace
RS-232-C
lnterface
σ
σ
FANUC Handy F11e

0 \ ггіп
RS-232-C oг
RS-422 lnterface
Punch panel, etc.
When the Floppy Cassette is connected to the CNC, machining programs
stored in the CNC can Ьe saved on a Floppy Cassette, аnd machining FANUC FIoppy
programs saved in the Floppy Cassette can be transferred to the CNC.
Cassette
σ
p 01
σ
σ

σ
O σ
σ
RS-232-C lnterface
FдVIER Punch panel, etc. ТΦó
451
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION в-s2444Eıo3
An FA Card ís a memory card used as an ínput medium in the FA fíeld.
It is compact, but has a large memory capacíty wíth high relíability, and FANUC FA Card
requíres no specíal maintenance.
When an FA Card ís connected to the CNC via the card adapter, machíning
programs stored ín the CNC can Ьe transferred to and saved in an FA Card.
Machining programs stored on an FA Card can also be transferred to the
CNC.
с=і і

O
0
o RS-232-C lntertace p ЯЕЅЄТ
Punch panel, etc.
2, The FANUC PPR consísts of three uníts: A pńnter, papeг tape punch, and
papeг tape reader. FANUC PPR
When the PPR is used a1one, data can be read from the tape reader and
prínted oг punched out. It ís also possíble to perform TH and TV checks
on data that was read.
Е10
0

0
RS-232-C lntertace
Punch panel, etc.
452
B-β244лE/o3 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
The portable tape reader is used to input data from paper tape.
Portable Tape Reader
RS-232-C lnterface
Punch pane1, etc.
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION в-sг444εıoз

POWER ON/OFF

Turníng on the Power
Procedure of turning on the power
1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machíne tool is norma1.
For example, check that front door and rear door are closed.
2 Turn oп the power accordíng to the manual íssued by the machine
tool builder.
3 After the power is turned oп, check that the position screen ís
dísplayed. An a1arm screen is displayed if an a1arm occurs upon
power-on. If the screen shown in Sectíon is dísplayed, a
system faílure may have occurred.
If the machine tool ís in the emergency stop state, the software
configuratíon screen, shown in , appears.
Press the Ø function key on the CRT/MDI oг LCD/MDI, oг release
the machíne from emergency stop.
The posítíon screen then appears. If the posítíon screen is not
dísplayed, a system failure may have occurred.
ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTE 01000 N00010
X
Z
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM 09:06:35
І. ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
-ј
4 Check that the fan motor ís rotating.
Note
Untí1 the posítional or a1arm screen is dísplayed at the power
on, do not touch them. Some keys are used for the
maintenance or special operatíon purpose. When they are
pressed, unexpected operatíon may be caused.
454
в-624Øεıo3 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
If a hardware failure or installation error occurs, the system displays one
of the following three types of screens then stops. Screen Dispiayed at
Information such as the type of printed círcuít board installed in each slot
Power-on
is índicated. This information and the LED states are useful for failure
recovery.
S1ot status display
SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY
0 : 003E4000 0 :
1 : 30464202 1 :
2 : 00504303 2 :
3: 3:
4: 4:
5: І 5:
t ,
Physíca l slot number Physícal slot number
prímary secondary
lnformation such as the module 1D of an installed prínted circuit board
xxppoσaв
L-- lnternally-assígned slot number
tt
Types of printed circuit boards Module functíon
Module 1D Software 1D
3E : Maín CPU 40 : CNC
3F : Remote buffer 41 : PMC
41:PMC-RC 42 :
45 : Graphics 43 : sUB
46 : 45 : Graphics
50 : sUB CPU 46 : Graphics
53 : 49 :
4A : Remote buffer
4F:PMC-RC
г
455
2. OPERfiT1 NAL DEVICES OPERATION в-62Ø4εıoз
Screen indícating
module settíng status
B1A1 -01
SLOT 01 3046 : END END: Settíng completed
SLOT 02 3050 : B1ank: Setting not com-
t
eci Mótlule 1D
S1ot number
Dísplay of software
configuration
B1 A1 - 01
CNC control software
SERVO: 9070-01 Dígítal servo ROM
sUB : xxxx-xx Sub CPU remote buffer
OMM : yyyy-yy Order-made macrolmacro
PMC : zzzz-zz compíler
PMC J

Power Disconnectíon
Procedure for Poser Dísconnectíon
1 Check that the LED indícatíng the cycle start ís off on the operator s
pane1.
2 Check that all movable parts of the CNC machíne tool is stoppíng.
3 If aп external ínput/output devíce such as the Handy Fí1e ís connected
to the CNC, turn off the external ínput/output devíce.
4 Contínue to press the POWER OFF pushbutton for about 5 seconds.
5 Refer to the machíne tool buílder s manual for turning off the power
to the machíne.
456

4
/ Revísíon Record
,,υNVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE
Series 15-MODEL B, Series 16 CAP 11 OPERATOR s MANUAL B-61804E-2
Addítion of Series 16-TB
Addition of 1X. Y-AX1S FAPT FUNCTION
Addition of X11. DOUBLE S1DED MACHINING
Additíon of APPENDIX 2. RESTR1CT10NS ON
EACH SYSTEM
Tota1 revision
Contents Editiоn Dat Contents
-
[ј

CONTENTS
1NTRODUCTION
A . OPERATIONPROCEDURES
B . CREATING A PROGRAM
EXAMPLE 1 : TURNING ON HOLLOW WORK
EXAMPLE 2 : TURNING ON SOL1D WORK
APPENDIX . KEYS OPERABLE 1N THE FAPT MODE
b
t.

1NTRODUCTION - 1
1NTRODUCTION
The MSD-516II MOR1C-T6FII , MOR1C-D6FII is the control unit in which the conversational
programming function is added to the MSC-516 MF-T6, MF-D6 .
What is the conversational programming function?
How to work the graphic function?
To solve the questions above, this manual explains, wíth the following two examples, how to
create a program for MSD-516II MOR1C-T6FII, MOR1C-D6FII and how to check the
program with graphic functíon.
Example 1: TURNING ON HOLLOW WORK
Example 2: TURNING ON SOL1D WORK
1n the last page, part drawings are described. When you wi11 practice this examples, open the
last page and input the data while referring to dimensions and shapes of part drawings.
This AN 1NTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING manual wi11 help you learn the programming
operation.
CAUTION : 1n this conversational programming manual, only the operation procedures from
program creating to programmed tool paths drawing check are explaíned.
Therefore, tool interference is not taken into consideration.
The cutting condition data used in this programming manual is provided just for
reference: for the actual machining, carefully set the optimum cutting
conditions for each workpiece and too1, since data such as the clearance
differs depending on the too1, holder, and tapper.
2 - 1NTRODUCTION
S1GNS USED 1N TH1S MANUAL
1n this manual, switches and keys necessary for operation are expressed by the signs.

aaσo
oσo
oJo
oo o
000σ
σa
oσo
oeoe
= L-_ =_ oe o
óσóo
Π

Power ON OFF switches Soft-keys
Sign : [ ON OFF Sgn : FAPT ExFC [ cURSOR T etc.
,
H FE KЈ Pо
XA Z U
Y wv L

úL2јІЅР Address keys
Sign : [ O M etc.
1 І-+
, + ж
Π
5H1FTИ Shift key
Sign : [ SH1FT
DEL
PROG
Function selection keys
Sign : PROG ] -
FAPT
1NTRODUCTION - 3
EXAMPLE OF S1GNS USED
1 To input with the data entry keys:
[4] [2] [.] [5] [1NPUT]
2 To input the data with the element symbol keys:
- To input shape of arc in the clockwise direction.
] 1NPUT ]
- To input shape of neckíng.
[ N ] [ 1NPUT ]
- To ínput shape of threadíng.
[ T ] [ 1NPUT ]
- To input shape of grooving.
[ G ] [ 1NPUT ]
- To input shape of chamferíng.
C ] [ 1NPUT ]
- To input shape of roundness.
R ] [ 1NPUT ]
3 To input program number [ нOME ] wíth address keys:
[ sнIFτ ] [ oH ] [ o][M] [sHIFT] FE ] [INPUT]
4 -1NTRODUCTION
FLOW UNT1L THE PRODUCT 1S COMPLETED
F1ow of product up to completion is shown as below. Operate the machine accordíng to the
followìng steps. Thís manual explains the operations on the steps, Θ, , and .
1
O Examıne the drawıng and condrtıons Θ lnput the data of the tools to be
for machiníng. used.

J J
1
O Create the program ín Mount the tools and workpíece to
conversatíonal method. the machíne.
0
\ J J
1NTRODUCTION - 5
1
1
Measure and ínput the tool Set the wokpíece zero poínt.
geometry offset value.



J U
ι J ` J
For the center-work, set the Workpiece ís machíned ín automatíc
taílstock. operatíon.

D
, oσ
ВН
`-т-
ВН 1

_д
іоі І і І1 І a
ισ
=- -= = = = = = = = = =
0 D
ι J \ J
O Workpíece ís machine in automatíc Product is completed.
operation.
J J
Please grasp the general flow of operation before starting the
conversational programming.
CONTENTS
1. TURN ON THE POWER .................. A - 1
2. 1NPUT THE TOOL DATA .................. A - 2
3. CREATE A PROGRAM ................... A - 3
4. CHECK THE PROGRAM BY DRAWING 1T
ON THE SCREEN ....................... A-5
5. END THE OPERATION ................... A - 6


a
г.1.
.
ł
t
. .
.
т,
.
4
Γ
e-624ØE/03 OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION
- MANUAL OPERATION

MANUAL OPERATION are four kínds as follows :
Manual reference positíon return
Manua1 continuous feed
Incremental feed
Manua1 handle feed
Manua1 absolute on/off
457
OPERATION OPERATION В-62444E/C3
The tool ís returned to the reference posítion as follows :
The tool ís moved iii the direction specified in parameter ZMI
MANl1AL
bít 5 of No. 1006 for each axís with the reference position return switch
REFERENCE on the τтіachіne operator s pane1. The tool moves to the deceleration poínt
POS1TiON RETURN at the rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference posítíon at the FL
speed. The rapid traverse rate and FL speed are specífıed in parameters
No. 1420,1421, and 1425 .
Four step rapíd traverse ovenide ís effective duńng rapíd traverse.
When the tool has returned to the reference posítíon, the reference
posítíon return completion LED goes on. The tool generally moves along
on1y a síngle axís, but cаn move along three axes simultaneously when
specified so in parameter JAX bít 0 of
ω
Reference
posítíon
Deceleration η,,
poínt j ,
______ Rapid traverse motíon Decelerated
motíon Rapíd traverse rate
FL speed rapid traverse override ís
effectíve
Procedure for Manual Reference Posítíon Return
мooε σ 1 Press the reference posítíon return switch, one of the mode selection
swítches.
σ
2 To decrease the feedrate, press a rapid traverse override switch.
L
3 Press the feed axis аnd dírection selectíon switch corresponding to the
RAPıD тRavεasε axís and direction for reference position return. Continue pressing the
swítch until the tool returns to the reference positíon. The tool can be
1oJ c1C l J1
moved along three axes símultaneously when specifıed so in an
appropríate parameter settíng. The tool moves to the deceleration
poínt at the rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference positíon at
the FL speed set in a parameter.
When the tool has returned to the reference posítíon, the reference
posítion return completíon LED goes on.
4 Perform the same operatíons for other axes, íf necessary.
The above is an example. Refer to the appropriate manual províded by
the machine tool buílder for the actual operatíons.
Γ ZERO PCØпЮN η
PØ мo2ı млиu мσМ X y Z C GRAM Ø πe5 x
σσ σST σσσσσ
тCCL NUIMØEH
1 2 3 4 5 B 7 8 NC7 MG7 σ σ σ σ σ σ σ σ σ σ
458
OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION B-62444E/03
Explanatíon
Automatícally settíng Bít 0 ZPR of parameter No. 1201 ís used for automatícally settíng the
the coordínate system coordínate system. When ZPR ís set, the coordínate system is
automatícally determíned when manual reference posítíon return ís
performed.
When a and γ are set in parameter 1250, the workpiece coordínate system
ís determined so that the reference point oп the tool holder or the posítíon
of the típ of the reference tool is X=a,Z=ywhen reference posítíon return
ís performed. Thís has the same effect as specífying the followíng
command for reference position return:
G92XØx;
Restrictíons
Moving the tool agaín Once the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED
lights at the completion of reference posítion return, the tool does not
move unless the REFERENCE POSITION RETCTRN swítch ís turned
off.
Reference posítíon The REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED ís
return completion LED extinguíshed Ьy either of the following operations:
- Movíng from the reference posítion.
- Enteríng an emergency stop state.
The dístance to return to For the dístance Not in the deceleratíon condítion to return the tool to
reference positíon the reference posítíon, refer to the manual íssued by the machine tool
builder.
ь

1
459
PERATlG`N OPERATION B-62444E/03
In the manual continuous mode, pressing a feed axis and dírectíon
selectíorı swítch on the machine operator s panel continuously moves the
MANUAL
tool along the selected axís in the selected direction.
c+QNτıNuous FEED The manual continuous feedrate ís specífıed in a parameter
The manual continuous feedrate can be adjusted with the manual
мOoε contínuous feedrate override dia1.
Pressing the rapid traverse swítch moves the tool at the rapid traverse
ιι feedrate regardless of the position of the manual continuous feedrate
overríde día1.
Mаnua1 operatíon ís allowed for one axís at a time. 3 axes can be
selected at a tíme by parameter JAX No.1002Ø .
X Too1
m/min
?T\ N rpm
Workpiecв
Z
о

Y Whí1e a switch ís pressed, the
tool moves in the dírectíon
specífíed by the swítch.
Procedure for Manual Contínuous Feed
1 Press the manual continuous switch, one of the mode selectíon σAX1S DIRECTION
switches.
+X +v
2 Press the feed axis and directíon selectíon switch corresponding to the
1l 11 axís аnd direction the tool ís to be moved. Whi1e the switch ís pressed,
the tool moves at the feedrate specífíed in a parameter No. 1423 . 1 _Y
The tool stops when the swítch is released.
3 The manual continuous feedrate can be adjusted wíth the manual
contínuous feedrate override día1.
4 Pressíng the rapid traverse switch while pressing a feed axis and
directíon selection switch moves the tool at the rapid traverse rate
whíle the rapíd traverse swítch is pressed. Rapíd traverse overńde by
the rapid traverse overńde swítches ís effective duńng rapid traverse.
0 2000 The above ís an example. Refer to the appropńate mаnual províded
by the machíne tool builder for the actual operations.
JOG FEED RATE OVERRIDE
RAР1D TRAVERSE
1D
- ØO -
OPERATIqN З. MANUAL OPERATION R-62444 E o3
Explanatíons
Manual synchronous To enable manual synchronous feed, set bít 4 JRV ofparameter
feed to 1.
Duríng manual synchronous feed, the tool ís jogged at the followíng
feedrate:
Feed dístance per rotatíon of the spindle mm/rev specífíed wíth
parameter No. 1423 x marival contínuous feedrate override x actual
spindle speed rev/min .
Restríctíons
Acceieration/decelera- Feedrate, tíme constant and method of automatíc acceleratíon/
tion for rapid traverse deceieratíorı for manual rapíd traverse are the same as G00 in programmed
coτnmaлd.
Change of nıodes Changíng the mode to the manual continuous feed JOG mode while
pressíng a feed axis and diгection selection switch does not enable manual
contínuous feed. To enable manual continuous feed, enter the manual
contínuous feed JOG mode first, then press a feed axis and direction
selectíon swítch.
Fapid travØrse рrior to If reference posítion return ís not performed after power-on, pushing
reference posítion return RAPID TRAVERSE button does not actuate the rapid traverse but the
remaíns at the manual continuous feedrate. Thís function can be disabled
by settíng parameter RPD
461
OPERATION OPERATION в-s24Øεıo3
In the incremental INC mode, pressíng a feed axís and direction з.з
selectíon swítch on the machine operator s pane1 moves the tool one step
P СR .T FEEE
along the selected axis in the selected d vection. The mínimum dístance
the tool ís moved is the least input íncrement. Each step can be 10, 100,
oг 1000 times the least input íncrement.
Thís mode is effectíve when a manual pulse generator is not
connected.
X
Each time a switch is
pressed, the tocf nıoves
one step in the direction
speeified y the switch.
Рго: еdutε lcэг rrεrrıε пt Eeed
1 Press the INC swítch, one of the mode selectíon swítches.
2 Select the dístance to be moved for each step wíth the magnífıcation
χ.г., х ı ίю dia1.
3 Press the feed axís and directíon selectíon switch corresponding to the
axís and direction the tool is to be moved. Each time a switch is
х1 pressed, the tool moves one step. The feedrate ís the same as the jog
feedrate.
4 Pressing the rapid traverse swítch while pressing a feed axis and
AX1S DIRECTION - d vectíon selectíon switch moves the tool at the rapíd traverse rate.
Rapid traverse override by the rapid traverse overríde switch ís
f+X l,v effective duríng rapid traverse.
a 11
The above ís an example. Refer to the appropńate manual províded
ı_Y X
by the machíne tool builder for the actual operations.
ЕxрiaReti4г
TГave1 diÇlanсє The dístance the tool travels along the X-axís can be specífíed wíth a
specílÉecl Лt ı а díameter.
diameter
8-624ØE/03 OPERATION З. MANUAL OPFRÄTIπN
In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the
manual pulse generator on the machíne operator s paпe1. Select the axis u1ANUAL HANDLE
along which the tool ís to be moved with the handle feed axís selectíon
FEE switches.
The mínímum dístance the tool is moved when the manual pulse
generator ís rotated by one graduation ís equal to the least ínput íncrement.
Or the distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator ís
rotated Ьy one graduatíon can be magnífied by 10 times oг by one of the
two magnífícatíons specified by parameters No. 7113 and 7114 .
X
i
Maпua1 puise generatur
PrQcedure for Manue NandEe Feed
1 Press the HANDLE swítch, one of the mode selectíon swítches.
Γ
2 Select the axís along which the tool is to be moved by pressíng a
handle feed axís selectíon switch.
3 Select the magnífícatíon for the distance the tool is to be moved by
pressíng a handle feed magnífícatíon switch. The minímum distance
the tool ís moved when the mаnual pulse generator ís rotated by one
graduatíon ís equal to the least ínput íncrement.
4 Move the tool along the selected axís by rotating the handle. Rotatíng
the handle 360 degrees moves the tool the dístance equívalent to 100
graduatíons.
The above is an example. Refer to the appropríate manual provided
Ьy the machíne tool buílder for the actual operations.
Гς Я ru1se generator
463
ΛNUAL ОPCΉATiÚN OPERATION 8-624ØE/o3
ExpianéãtťOΠ
Avaïlabilíty of manuai Parameter JHD bit 0 of No. 7100 enables or dísables the manual pulse
puıse generator in Jog generator in the JOG mode.
mode JHD When the parameter JHD bit 0 of No. 7100 ís set 1,both manual handle
feed and incremental feed are enabled.
ø AvaiiaЬility of manuai Parameter THD bit 1 of No. 7100 enables or dísables the mаnual pulse
puise qenerator in generator in the TEACH IN JOG mode.
iElλCŕi 1N JOG mode
Tн
A comrııand to thе MPG Parameter HPF bít 4 of No. 7100
exceeding rapid traverse Parameter HPF bít 4 of No. 7100 or No. 7117 specífíes as follows:
rate SET VALUE 0: The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate and
generated pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate are
í dístance the tool is moved may
not match the graduations on the manual pulse
generator.
SET VALUE 1: The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate and
generated pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate are
not ignored but accumulated in the CNC.
No longer rotating the handle does not immediately
stop the too1. The tool is moved by the pulses
accumulated in the CNC before ít stops.
Movement direction of Parameter HNGx bít 0 of No. 7102 swítches the directíon in whích the
an axïs to the rotatïon of tool moves along an axis, corresponding to the directíon in which the
MPG нNt:ax handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated.
Rгstгictioпѕ
Numher of MPGs Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected, one for each axís.
The three manual pulse generators can be símultaneously operated.
г.
Notes
1. Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotaticзns
per second or lower. 1f the manual pulse generator ís
r4tØted at a rate higher than five rotations per second, the
tool may not stop ímmediately after the handle is no longer
rotated or the distance the tooi moves may not match the
graduatíons on the manual pulse generator.
2 Rotating the hanďie quickly with a iarge magnífication such
as x100 moves the tool too fast. The feedrate is clamped
at the rapid traverse feedrate.
464
в-s2aØε/o3 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION
Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to
the coordínates can be selected Ьy turníng the manual absolute swítch on
MANUAL Aвsoιuτε
oг off on the machine operator s panel. When the switch is turned on, the
ON ı4ND OFF dístance the tool ís moved by manual operation ís added to the
coordinates. When the switch is turned off, the dístance the tool ís moved
by manual operation is not added to the coordinates.
: axis
ЈЇЈ
Pz Manua1 o peration
^ Y
P1
O Z axis
The coordinates values change by the amount oś manual operation.
Fig. Coordinates with the switch ON
X2
X1
Z2
01
The coordinates do not change.
Fig. Coordinates with the switch OFF
465
3.MΉNUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-62444El03
Explatıatían The followíng descńbes the relatíon between manual operatíon and
coordinates when the manual absolute swítch is turned on or off, using a
program example.
G01 G90 ; 1
; 2
3 ,
The subsequent fıgures use the following notatíon:
- Movement of the tool when the swítch ís on
-- Movement of the tool when the switch is off
The coordinates after manual operatíon include the distance the tool ís
moved by the marlual operatíon. When the switch ís off, therefore,
subtract the dístance the tool ís moved by the manual operatíon.
Manual operatíon after Coordínates when block 2 has been executed after mаnual operation
the end of block X-axis , Z-axís at the end of movement of block 1 .
X
, ,
,

Manual ł- Swítch ON , operatıon
--- Switch OFF
í
ф- Z
Manual operatíon after a Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed whíle block 2 ís beíng
feed hoid executed, manual operatíon X-axís + is performed, and the cycle
start button ís pressed аnd released
г
x
,
, _--0
,-_ ,
І Manual . i
o eration
, ;
,
ł Z
ł Swítch ON
-- Swítch OFF
466
OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATION B-62444E/03
When reset after a Coordínates when the feed hold button ís pressed while block 2 ís beíng
nıanual operation executed, manual operatíon Y-axís is performed, the control unit
following a feed hoid is reset wíth the RESET button, and block 2 is read agaín
X

,
,150. O .
,
Manual
, operation
,
, , Swítch ON
ś1 Z
Swítch OFF - - - +
When a movement When there ís on1y one axís in the followíng command, on1y the
command in the next commanded axis returns.
block ís only one axís
N1 G01 χ ; , 200 0,
;
; ϊ
º
1
Manu a1
operation N3
Swítch ON N2 ,
Swítoh OFF - - - + N1
;
Z
When the next move When the followíng commands are íncremental commands, operatíon is
block is an incremental the same as when the switch ís OFF.
s Manual operatíon during
tool nose radius
compensation When the switch is OFF
After manual operatíon is performed wíth the switch OFF during tool
nose radíus compensatíon, automatíc operatíon ís restarted then the tool
moves parallel to the movement that would have been performed if
mаnual movement had not been performed. The amount of separation
equals to the amount that was performed mаnually.
/
Cutter path atter /
manual operatìon /
/
Manual
operatíon
ı .
,,
Too1 nose radíus path
Lz
Programmed path
467
OPERAT,ON OPERATION в-62aaaE/o3
When the swítch is ON during tool nose radius compensation
Operatíon of the machine upon return to automatíc operatíon after manual
ínterventíon wíth the swítch ís ON during executíon with an absolute
command program in the tool nose radius compensation mode wíll be
descríbed. The vector created from the remaíning part of the current block
and the begínníng of the next block ís shifted in para11e1. A new vector ís
created based on the next block, the block following the next block and
the amount of manual movement. This also applies when manual
operatíon ís performed during corneríng.
Manual operation performed in other than cornering
Assume that the feed hold was applied at point PH while moving from Pp
to PB of programnıed path Pp, PB, and Pς and that the tool was mаnually
moved to Р.. The block end point PB moves to the point PB> by the
amount of manual movement, and vectors VB1 and VB2 at PB also move
to VB 1 and VB2 . Vectors VC1 and VC2 between the next two blocks PB
- Pς and Pς - PD are discarded and new vectors VC1 and VC2> VC2 =
VC2 in this example aгe produced from the relation between PB - Pς аnd
PC - PD. However, since VB2 ís not a newly calculated vector, correct
offset ís not performed at block PB - Pς. Offset ís correctly performed
after Pς.
V
Vg Cı
V2 Vgі
VB2
Programmed path
Veı \ \ ρA absolute com-
\ P g ρH mand
Too1 nose radíus` . \ Tool noss radíus
path after \ ` path before
manual operation пıanual operation
\
\, \ Manual operation
468
OPERATION З. MANUAL OPERATiON º-62444Е 03
Manual operation during cornering
Thís is aп example when manual operation ïs performed durïng cornering.
VA2 , VB1 , and VB2 are vectors moved in parallel wíth VA2, VB1 and VB2
by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calculated
from VC1 and VC2. Then correct tool nose radíus compensation ís
performed for the blocks followíng Pc.
t
V / 01 / \
VB11ıf Pa . Pc ,
/ Vc2
/ -
V B1 / f Programmed path
absolute command
Too1 nose radíus \
path after ηToo1 nose radius
ma ual o eratíon \ .уΡдΡ path b fore P \ ѕ
manual operation
yVA1
\ Pд Maiiva1 operatíon
\
\
\ VA1
Manual operation after single block stop
Manual operatíon was performed when execution of a block was
termínated Ьy single block stop.
Vectors Vgі and VŚ2 are shífted by the amount of maaual operation.
Sub-sequent processíng ís the same as case a described above. An MDI
operatíon can also be ínterveneted as we11 as manual operatíon. The
movement ís the same as that by ırıanual operation.
Too1 nose radius path after Vς 1
manual operatíon
V7- - , Vc1
/
vBl
;2
Manual
operation
/
Programmed path
VB1 absolute command Pβ
P
Too1 nose radius
path before
manual operatíon
4. АUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-62444E/03
4 AUTOMATIC OPERATiON
Programmed operation of a CNC machíne tool ís referred to as automatic
operation.
Thís chapter explaíns the followíng types of automatíc operatíon:
MEMORY OPERATION
Operation by execııtíng a program registered in CNC memory
MD1 OPERATION
Operatíon Ьy executing a prograØ entered from the λ. DI paпe1
DNC operation
Operatíon while reading a program from an input/output devíce
PROGRAM RESTART
Restarting a prograτn for automatíc operatíon from an intermediate
poiпt
SCHEDULING FUNCTION
Scheduled operatíon by executíng programs files regístered in an
external input/output device Handy File, Floppy Cassette, or FA
Card
SIλβPROGRAM CALL FUNCTION
Functíon for callíng and executíng subprograms fíles regístered in an
external input/output device Handy File, Floppy Cassette, or FA
Card during memory operation
MANUAL HANDLE 1NTERRUPTION
Function for performíng manual feed duńng movement executed by
automatíc operation
MIRROR lMAGE
Functíon for enabling mírror-ímage movement along an axís duríng
automatíc operatíon
MANUAL 1NTERVENTION AND RETURN
Functíon restartíng automatic operatíon by returníng the tool the
posítion where mаnual interventíon was started duríng automatíc
operatíon.
λ
в-sг4Øεıoз OPERATιON 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Programs are regístered in memory in advance. When one of these
programs ís selected and the cycle start swítch on the machine operator s
MEMORY
pane1 ís pressed, automatíc operatíon starts, and the cycle start LED goes
OPERATION on.
When the feed hold swítch on the machíne operator s pаne1 is pressed
duńng automatic operation, automatíc operatíon is stopped temporarily.
When the cycle start swítch is pressed agaín, automatíc operatíon ís
restarted.
When the reset switch on the CRT/MDI or LCD/MDI panel ís pressed,
automatic operation terminates аnd the reset state is entered.
For the two-path control, the programs for the two tool posts cаn be
executed símultaneously so the two tool posts can operate índependently
at the same time.
The following procedure ís gíven as an example. For actual operatíon,
refer to the mаnual supplied by the machíne tool buílder.
Procedure for Memory Operatíon
1 Press the MEMORY mode selection swítch.
2 Select a program from the regístered programs. To do this, follow the
steps below.
2-1 Press Fλ00 to dísplay the program screen.
2-2 Press address 0
2-3 Enter a program number usíng the numerіc keys.
2-4 Press the [0 SRH] soft key.
For the two-path control, select the program for the tool post to be
operated. When operating the two tool posts at the same tíme, select a
program for each tool post.
3 For the two-path control, select the tool post to be operated wíth the
tool post selection switch on the machíne operator s pane1.
4 Press the cycle start switch on the machíne operator s pаne1.
Automatíc operation starts, and the cycle start LED goes on. When
automatic operation terminates, the cycle start LED goes off.
5 To stop or cаncel memoгу operation mídway through, follow the
steps below.
a. Stopping memory operation
Press the feed hold switch on the machine operator s pane1. The
feed hold LED goes on and the cycle start LED goes off. The
machine responds as follows:
i When the machine was movíng, feed operatíon decelerates
and stops.
ií When dwe11 was beíng performed, dwell ís stopped.
ííi When M, S, oг T was beíng executed, the operatíon ís
stopped after M, S, oг T ís fıníshed.
471
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION в-s2Ø4Eıoз
When the cycle start swítch on the machíne operator s pane1 ís
pressed while the feed hold LED is on, machine operation
restarts.
b. Terminating memory operatíon
Press the key on the CRT/MDI or LCD/MDI pane1.
Automatic operatíon is terminated and the reset state is entered.
When a reset ís applied during movement, movement decelerates
then stops.
Explanatíon
Memory operatíon After memory operation ís started, the followíng are executed:
1 A one-block command is read from the specified program.
2 The block command ís decoded.
3 The command executíon ís started.
4 The commаnd in the next block ís read.
5 Buffering is executed. That ís, the command ís decoded to a11ow
immediate execution.
6 Immedíately after the precedíng block ís executed, executíon of the
next block can be started. Thís ís because buffeńng has been executed.
7 Hereafter, memory operation can be executed by repeatíng the steps
4 to 6 .
stoppíng and termínatíng Memoгy operation cаn be stopped usíng one of two methods: Specífy a
memory operation stop commаnd, oг press a key on the machine operator s pane1.
- The stop commands іnclude M00 program stop , M01 optíonal
stop , and M02 and M30 program end .
- There are two keys to stop memory operatíon: The feed hold key and
reset key.
Program stop M00 Memoгy operatíon ís stopped after a block containing M00 is executed.
When the program is stopped, a11 exístíng modal ínformation remains
unchanged as in single blосk operation. The memoгy operatíon can be
restarted by pressíng the cycle start button. Operatíon may vary
depending on the machine tool buílder. Refer to the manual supplied by
the machine tool builder.
Optíonal stop M01 Síτnílarly to M00, memorу operatíon ís stopped after a block containíng
M01 ís executed. Thís code is only effectíve when the Optional Stop
switch on the machine operator s pane1 is set to ON. Operation may varу
dependíng oп the machine tool builder. Refer to the mаnual supplíed by
the machíne tool builder.
Program end When M02 0г M30 specífied at the end of the maín program is read,
M02, M30 memorу operation ís termínated аnd the reset state ís entered.
In some machínes, M30 returns control to the top of the program. For
details, refer to the manual supplíed by the machine tool builder.
Feed hold When Feed Ho1d button oп the operator s pane1 ís pressed during memory
operation, the tool decelerates to a stop at a tíme.
472
в-s24Øεıoз OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Reset Automatíc operatíon can be stopped and the system can be made to the
reset state by using RE3ET key on the CRT/MDI or external reset sígnal.
When reset operatíon is applied to the system during a tool movíng status,
the motíon ís slowed down then stops.
Optíonal block skíp When the optíonal block skip swítch on the machíne operator s panel is
turned on, blocks containing a slash / are ignored.
Cyc1e start for the For the two-path control, a cycle start switch ís províded for each tool
two-path control post. This allows the operator to activate a síngle tool posts to operate
them at the same tíme in memory operation or MDI operatíon. In general,
select the tool post to be operated wíth the tool post selection switch on
the machine operator s panel and then press the cycle start button to
activate the selected tool post. The procedure may vary wíth the machíne
tool buílder. Refer to the appropríate manual issued by the machíne tool
builder.
Calling a subprogram A fíle subprogram in an external ínput/output devíce such as a Floppy
stored ín an external Cassette can be called and executed during memoгy operatíon. For
ínput/output devíce detaíls, see Sectíon
473
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION в-s2444Eıoз
In the MD1 mode, a program consisting of up to 10 lines can be created
in the same format as norma1 programs and executed from the MDI pane1. MD1 OPERATION
MDI operatíon is used for símple test operations.
The followíng procedure ís given as an example. For actual operation,
refer to the manual supplíed by the machine tool buílder.
Procedure for MD1 Operatíon
1 Press the MD1 mode selectíon switch.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for which a program is to
be created with the tool post selection switch. Create a separate
program for each tool post.
2 Press the jPROGj functíon key on the CRT/MDI or LCD/MDI pane1 to
select the program screen. The following screen appears:
PROGRAM MD1 0010 00002
00000;
G00 G90 G94 G40 G80 G50 G54 G69
G17 G22 G21 G49 G98 067 G64 G15
B HM
T D
F S
>
MD1 __= 20:40:05
PRGRM , CURRNT, NEXT , OPRT
Program number 00000 is entered automatically.
3 Prepare a program to be executed by an operatíon símilar to norma1
program edítíng. M99 specified in the last Ь1αk caп return control to
the begшníng of the program after operatíon ends. Word ínsertion,
modífícatíon, deletíon, word search, address search, and program
search aгe available for programs created in the MDI mode. For
program editing, see Chapter ΠI-9.
4 To entirely erase a program created in MDI mode,use one of the
followíng methods:
a. Enter address O , then press the key on the MDI pane1.
Ь. Alternatively, press the key. In this case, set bit 7 of
parameter 3203 to 1 in advance.
474
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
5 To execute a program, set the cursor on the head of the program. Start
from an íntermedíate point is possíble. Push Cyc1e Start button on
the operator s pane1. By thís action, the prepared program wíll start.
For the two-path control, select the tool post to be operated wíth the
tool post selection swítch on the machíne operator s panel
beforehand.
When the program end M02, M30 oг ER ís executed, the
prepared program wí11 be automatícally erased and the operation will
end.
By cominand of M99, control returns to the head of the prepared
program.
-
PROGRAM MD1 00001 N00003
јјф G00 Z200. ;
M03 ;
G01 F500 ;
M93 P9010 ;
G00 ;

G00 G90 G94 G40 G80 G50 G54 G69
G17 G22 G21 G49 G98 G67 G64 G15
B HM
T D
F S
>
MD1 12:42:39
PRGRM CURRNT NEXT , OPRT ,
F
6 To stop or termínate MDI operatíon іп midway through, follow the
steps below.
a. Stoppíng MD1 operation
Press the feed hold swítch on the machíne operator s pane1. The
feed hold LED goes on and the cycle start LED goes off. The
machíne responds as follows:
i When the machíne was movíng, feed operatíon decelerates
and stops.
ii When dwell was being performed, dwe11 ís stopped.
iii When M, S, or T was beíng executed, the operation ís
stopped after M, S, oг T ís finíshed.
When the cycle start switch on the machíne operator s pane1
ís pressed, machine operatíon restarts.
b. Termínatíng MD1 operatíon
Press the key on the CRT/MDI or LCD/MDI pane1.
Automatic operation ís tennínated аnd the reset state ís entered.
When a reset ís applied duńng movement, movement
decelerates then stops.
475
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION в-s2Ø4εıoз
Explanation The prevíous explanatíon of how to execute and stop memory operation
also applies to MDI operatíon, except that in MDI operatíon, M30 does
not return control to the beginníng of the program M99 performs thís
function .
Erasíng the program Programs prepared in the MD1 mode wíll be erased ín the followíng cases:
In MDI operation, if M02, M30 0г ER ís executed.
If bit 6 MER of parameter No. 3203 ís set to 1, however, the program
is erased when executíon of the last block of the program ís completed
by single-block operation.
In MEMORY mode, if inemorу operatíon ís performed.
In ED1T mode, if аny edítíng ís performed.
Background edítíng ís performed.
Upon reset when bít 7 MCL of parameter No. 3203 ís set to 1
Restart After the editing operation duńng the stop of MDI operatíon was done,
operation starts from the current cursor posítíon.
Edítíng a program duríng A program can be edited during MDI operation. The edíting of a program,
MD1 operatíon however, ís dísabled until the CNC ís reset, when bít 5 MIE of parameter
No. 3203 ís set accordíngly.
Limítation
Program regístratíon Programs created in MDI mode cannot be regístered.
Number of línes ín a A program cаn have as mаny línes as can fít on one page of the CRT
program screen.
A program consistíng of up to six línes can Ьe created. When parameter
MDL No. 3107 7 ís set to 0 to specífy a mode that suppresses the
display of contínuous-state information, a program of up to 101ines can
be created.
If the created program exceeds the specified number of lines, ER is
deleted prevents ínsertíon and modífícatíon .
subprogram nestíng Calls to subprograms M98 can be specified in a program created in the
MDI mode. This means that a program registered in memory can be
called and executed during MDI operatíon. In addítion to the main
program executed by automatic operation, up to two 1evels of subprogram
nesting are allowed when the custom macro optíon ís províded, up to four
1evels are allowed .
Main program Subprogram Subprogram
00000; 01000; 02000;
;
M98P 1000; M98P 2000; M98P 3000;
M30; M99; M99;
0ne-1eve1 nestíng Two-1eve1 nestíng
F1g. Leve1 of subprograms Ca11ed from the MD1 Program
476
в-s24Øε/oз OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Macro ca11 When the custom macro optíon ís provided, macro programs can also be
created, called, and executed in the MD1 mode. However, macro ca11
commands cannot be executed when the mode is changed to MD1 mode
after memory operatíon ís stopped during execution of a subprogram.
Memory area When a program ís created in the MD1 mode, an empty area in program
memory ís used. If program memory ís full, no programs can be created
in the MD1 mode.
477
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION в-sг444εıoз
This function specifıes Sequence No. oг B1ock No. of a block to be
restarted when a tool is broken down or when ít is desíred to restart
PROGRAM
machiníng operation after a day off, and restarts the machining operatíon
RESTART from that block. 1t can also be used as a hígh-speed program check
function.
There are two restart methods: the P-type method and Q-type method.
Operation can be restarted anywhere. Thís restart method ís
P TYPE used when operatíon is stopped because of a broken too1.
Program start poínt machíning start point
I
1
/
/
/
/
Return operation
/
/
Restart posítío
Before operatíon can be restarted, the machíne must be
Q τ.YPE moved to the programmed start point machíníng start point
Return operatíon
\
Program start point
machining start point
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
Restart position
478
в-s24Øε oз OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Procedure for Program restart by Specífyíng a sequence number
Procedure 1
[PTYPE] 1 Retract the tool and replace ít with a new one. When necessary,
change the offset. Go to step 2.
[QTYPE] 1 When power is turned ON or emergency stop is released, perform a11
necessary operatíons at that time, íncludíng the reference posítion
return.
2 Move the machíne manually to the program startíng poínt machiníng
start poínt , and keep the modal data and coordinate system ín the
same conditíons as at the machíníng start.
3 If necessary, modífy the offset amount.
Procedure 2
[COMMON TO P TYPE / 1 T urn the program restart swítch on the machíne operator s pane1 ON.
Q TYPE]
2 Press PROQ on the CRT/MDI pane1 to display the desíred program.
[Q TYPE]
3 Find the program head.
00000 or
4 Enter the sequence number of the block to be restarted, then press the
[P TYPE] [P TYPE] or [Q TYPE] soft key.
Sequence number
[Q TYPE]
N 000 00000 or
If the same sequence number appears more than once, the locatíon of
[P TYPE] the target block must be specífied. Specífy a frequency and a
F requency
sequence number.
. Sequence number
479
4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-62444E/03
5 The sequence number ís searched for, and the program restart screen
appears on the CRT dísplay.
PROGRAM RESTART 00002 N00100
DESTINATION M 1 2
X 57. 096 1 2 i
12
12
12
1
DISTANCE TO GO
1 X 1. 459
T 2 Z 7. 320
S
S 0 T0000
MEM 10:10:40
l l J l J OPRT , ı
DESTINATION shows the posítion at which machíning is to restart.
DISTANCE TO GO shows the distance from the current tool position
to the posítíon where machíning ís to restart. A number to the left of
each axís name índícates the order of axes determined by parameter
settíng along whích the tool moves to the restart position.
The coordínates and amount of travel for restartíng the program can
be displayed for up to five axes. If your system supports six or more
axes, pressíng the [RSTR] soft key agaín displays the data for the
síxth and subsequent axes. The program restart screen dísplays on1y
the data for CNC-controlled axes.
M: Fourteen most recently specífíed M codes
T: Itwo most recently specifıed T codes
S: Most recently specified S code
Codes аre displayed in the order in which they are specífıed. AU
codes аre cleаred by a program restart command or cycle start ín the
reset state.
6 Turn the program re-start switch OFF. At this tíme, the fıgure at the
left side of axís name DISTANCE TO GO blirıks.
7 Check the screen for the M, S, and T codes to be executed. If they are
found, enter the MD1 mode, then execute the M, S and T functions.
After executíon, restore the prevíous mode.
1
These codes аre not dísplayed on the program restart screen.
8 Check that the dístance índícated under D 1STANCE TO GO is correct.
A1so check whether there ís the possíbility that the tool might hit a
workpiece or other objects when it moves to the machining restart
posítion. If such a possibility exists, move the tool manually to a
posítion from whích the tool can move to the machining restart
posítíon without encounteríng any obstacles.
9 Press the cycle start button. The tool moves to the machining restart
posítíon at the dry run feedrate sequentially along axes in the order
specífied by parameter settings No. 7310 . Machining ís then
restarted.
480
в-624Øε/oз OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Procedure for Program Restart by Specifyíng a B1ock Number
Procedure 1
[ P TYPE ] 1 Retract the tool and гeplace ít with a new one. When necessary,
change the offset. Go to step 2.
[ Q TYPE ] 1 When power is turned ON or emergency stop is released, perform aН
necessary operatíons at that tíme, includíng the reference posítíon
return.
2Move the machine manuaUy to the program startíng point machining start
point , and keep the modal data and coordínate system in the same
conditíons as at the machiníng start.
3If necessary, modify the offset amount.
Procedure 2
[COMMON TO P TYPE / 1 Turn the program restart swítch on the machíne operator s pane1 ON.
Q TYPE]
2 Press PROO on the CRT/MDI pane1 to dísplay the desired program.
[Q TYPE] 3 Find the program head. Press function RE3E7 key.
oг
O00000000
4 Enter the number of the block to be restarted then press the [P TYPE]
[P TYPE]
or [Q TYPE] soft key. The block number cannot exceed eight digits.
B1ock number
5 The block number ís searched for, and the program restart screen
appears on the CRT display.
PROGRAM RESTART 00002 N01000
DESTINATION M 1 2
X 57. 096 1 2
12
12
12
DISTANCETOGO
Z X 71 .3 . 2 4 0 59 T
S
S 0 T0000
MEM
10:10:40
ίІ:ІІ:
, , OPR η ,

DESTINATION shows the positíon at which machining is to restart.
DISTANCE TO GO shows the distance from the current tool position
to the positíon where machiníng ís to restart. A number to the left of
each axís пame indicates the order of axes determíned Ьy parameter
settíng along which the tool moves to the restart posítíon.
The coordínates and amount of travél for restartíng the program can
481
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION в-в2444εıoз
be dísplayed for up to fíve axes. If your system supports six or more
axes, pressing the [RSTR] soft key agaín displays the data for the
sixth and subsequent axes. The program restart screen dísplays only
the data for CNC-controlled axes.
M: Fourteen most recently specífíed M codes
T: Two most recently specified T codes
S: Most recently specífied S code
B: Most recently specífıed B code
Codes are displayed in the order in whích they are specífied. A1i
codes are cleared by a program restart command or cycle start ín the
reset state.
6 Turrı the program re-start switch OFF. At thís tíme, the fıgure at the
left side of axís name DISTANCE TO GO blinks.
7 Check the screen for the M, S, T, аnd B codes to be executed. If they
are found, enter the MD1 mode, then execute the M, S, T, and B
functions. After executíon, restore the prevíous mode.
These codes are not dísplayed on the program restart screen.
8 Check that the distance indícated under DISTANCE TO GO ís correct.
A1so check whether there ís the possibilíty that the tool míght hit a
workpíece or other objects when ít moves to the machíníng restart
posítíon. If such a possíbility exísts, move the tool mаnually to a
posítion from whích the tool can move to the machining restart
posítion without encounteńng any obstacles.
9 Press the cycle start button. The tool moves to the machíning restart
posítion at the dry run feedrate sequentíally along axes in the order
specífíed by parameter settíngs No. 7310 . Machíníng ís then
restarted.
Expianations
Biock number When the CNC is stopped, the number of executed blocks ís dísplayed on
the program screen oг program restart screen. The operator cаn specífy
the number of the block from which the program is to be restarted, by
referencing the number dísplayed on the CRT. The dísplayed number
índicates the number of the block that was executed most recently. For
example, to restart the program from the block at which executíon
stopped, specífy the displayed number, plus one.
The number of blocks is counted from the start of machíníng, assuming
one NC line of a CNC program to be one block.
< Example 1 >
CNC Program Number of blocks
00001 ; 1
G90 G92 XO YO ZO ; 2
G01 X100. F100 ; 3
G03 X01 -50. F50 ; 4
M30 ; 5
482
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
< Example 2 >
CNC Program Number of blocks
00001 ; 1
G90 G92 XO YO ZO ; 2
G90 G00 Z100. ; 3
G81 X100. Y0. Z-120. R-80. F50. ; 4
1 = 1 + 1 ; 4
2= 2 ; 4
Ø= 3 ; 4
G00 XO ZO ; 5
M30 ; 6
Macro statements are not counted as blocks.
Storing / clearíng the The block number ís held in memory while no power is supplied. The
block number number can be cleared by cycle start in the reset state.
B1ock number when a The program screen usually displays the number of the block currently
program ís halted or beíng executed. When the executíon of a block ís completed, the CNC
stopped ís reset, or the program is executed in síngle-block stop mode, the
program screen displays the number of the program that was executed
most recently.
When a CNC program ís halted or stopped by feed ho1d, reset, or
síngle-blосk stop, the followíng block numbers are dísplayed:
Feed hold : B1ock beíng executed
Reset : B1ock executed most recently
Síngle-block stop : B1ock executed most recently
For example, when the CNC is reset during the execution of block 10, the
dísplayed Ь1осk number changes from 10 to 9.
MD1 interventíon When MDI intervention ís performed while the program is stopped by
síngle-blосk stop, the CNC commands used for interventíon are not
counted as a Ь1осk.
B1ock number exceedíng When the block number dísplayed on the program screen exceeds eight
eíght digits dígíts, the blосk number ís reset to 0 and counting contínues.
Limitatíon
P-type restart Under any of the following condítíons, P-type restart cannot be
performed:
When automatic operation has not been performed sínce the power
was turned on
When automatíc operatíon has not been performed sínce an emergency
stop was released
When automatic operatíon has not been performed sínce the
coordínate system was changed or shífted change in an external offset
from the workpiece reference point
Restart block The block to be restarted need not be the block whích was interrupted;
operatíon can restart wíth any block. When P-type restart ís performed,
the restart block must use the same coordinate system as when operatíon
was interrupted.
483
4. AUTOMATIO OPERATION OPERATION e-6гØ4εıoз
Síngle block When síngle block operation ís ON during movement to the restart
positíon, operatíon stops every tíme the tool completes movement along
aп axís. When operation ís stopped in the síngle block mode, MDI
interverttion cannot be performed.
Manual íntervention Duríng movement to the restart posítíon, manual íntervention can be used
to perform a return operation for an axis if ít has not yet been performed
for the axis. A return operatíon cannot be done further on axes for which
a return has already been completed.
Reset Never reset duńng the time from the start of a search at restart until
machíníng ís restarted. Otherwíse, restart must be performed again from
the fırst step.
Manual absolute Regardless of whether machíníng has started oг not, manual operation
must be performed when the manual absolute mode is on.
Reference posítíon If no absolute-posítion detector absolute pulse coder is provided, be
return sure to perform reference posítíon return after turníng oп the power and
before performing restart.
Alaгτn
Alarm No. Contents
071 The specified block number for restarting the program is nat found.
094 After interruptíon, a coordínate system was set, then P-type
restart was specífíed.
095 After ínterruptíon, the coordínate system shift was changed,
then P-type restart was specified.
096 After ínterruptíon, the coordínate system was changed, then
P-type restart was specífíed.
097 When automatíc operatíon has not been performed since
the power was turned on, emergency stop was released, or
P/S a1arm Nos. 094 to 097 was reset, P-type restart was
specified.
098 After the power was turned on, restart operatíon was per-
formed without reference posítíon return, but a G28 com-
mand was found in the program.
099 A move command was specífíed from the MD1 pane1 during
a restart operation.
5020 An erroneous parameter was specifífed for restarting a pro-
gram.
484
B- б244йE/03 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIG OPERATION
Notes
As a ru1e, the tool cannot be returned to a correct position
under the followìng conditions.
Special care must be taken in the following cases since
none of them cause an alarm:
Manual operation ís performed when the manual absolute
mode is OFF.
Manual operation is performed when the machine is locked.
When the mirror image is used.
When manual operation is performed in the course of axís
movement for returning operation.
When the program restart is commanded for a block
between the block for skip cutting and subsequent absolute
command block.
When program restart specified for an intermediate block for
a multiple repetitive canned cycle
- 485 -
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION в-εг444εıoз
The schedule function allows the operator to select fíles programs
SCHEDULING registered on a floppy-disk in an external ínput/output device Handy
FUNCTION Fí1e, Floppy Cassette, or FA Card and specify the execution order and
number of repetitions schedulíng for performíng automatíc operatíon.
It is also possíble to select ori1y one fi1e from the fıles ín the external
input/output devíce and execute ít duńng automatíc operatíon.
F1LE DIRECTORY
F1LE NO. F1LE NAME
0001 00010
0002 00020
0003 00030
0004 00040
List of files іп an external ínput/output device
Set fíle number and
number of repetítíons.
ORDER F1LE NO REPET1T10N
01 0002 2
02 0003 1
03 0004 3
04 0001 2
Schedulíng screen
δ
Executíng automatic operation
Procedure for Schedulíng Functíon
Procedure for executíng 1 Press the MEMORY switch on the machine operator s pane1, then
one file press the јPRφј functíon key on the MDI panel.
2 Press the rightmost soft key continuous menu key , then press the
[FL. SDL] soft key. A líst of fıles registered in the Floppy Cassette is
displayed on screen No. 1. To dísplay more fıles that are not
dísplayed oп thís screen, press the page key on the MDI pane1. Fi1es
registered in the Floppy Cassette can also be dísplayed successívely.
486
8-624ØE/03 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
F1LE DIRECTORY 00001 N00000
CURRENT SELECTED : SCHEDULE
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
0000 SCHEDULE
0001 PARAMETER
0002 ALL PROGRAM
0003 00001
OOØ 00002
0005 00010
0006 00020
0007 00040
0008 00050
MEM.... ... .., 19:14:47
- PRGRM , , 3CHDUL C OPRT , I l

Screen
3 Press the [ OPRT ] and [SELECT] soft keys to dísplay SELECT
FILE NO. oп screen No. 2 . Enter a file number, then press the [F
SET] and [EXEC] soft keys. The fıle for the entered file number is
selected, and the fîle name is indicated after CURRENT
SELECTED: .

F1LE DIRECTORY 00001 N00000
CURRENT SELECTED:00040
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
0000 SCHEDULE
0001 PARAMETER
0002 ALL PROGRAM
0003 00001
0004 00002
0005 00010
0006 00020
0007 00040
0008 00050
SELECT F1LE N0.=7
>
MÉM.,., ... ,,. 19:17:10
F SET EXEC

Screen
4 Press the REMOTE switch on the machíne operator s pane1 to enter
the RMT mode, then press the cycle start swítch. The selected file ís
executed. For detaíls on the REMOTE switch, refer to the manual
supplied by the machíne tool bui1der. The selected fıle number is
índícated at the upper right corner of the screen as aп F number
ínstead of an O number .
487
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-62Ø4E/03
F1LE DIRECTORY F0007 N00000
CURRENT SELECTED:00040
RMT 13:27:54
PRGRM І- l , sCHDUL OPRT I

Screen
Procedure for executíng 1 Display the líst of fıles registered in the Floppy Cassette. The dísplay
the scheduling function procedure is the same as ín steps 1 and 2 for executíng one fí1e.
2 Ori screen No. 2, press the [ OPRT ] and [SELECT] soft keys to
display SELECT F1LE NO.
3 Enter fıle number 0, and press the [F SET], and [EXEC] soft keys.
SCHEDULE is índícated after CURRENT SELECTED: .
4 Press the left most soft key return menu key and the [SCHDUL] soft
key. Screen No. 4 appears.
F1LE DIRECTORY F0000 N02000
ORDER F1LE NO.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
>
MEM _ _= 22:07:00
Ѕј OPRT ]
PRGRM, D1R і.ј:ііііјі
/
Screen
Move the cursor and enter the fíle numbers and number of repetítíons
in the order in whích to execute the fíles. At this time, the current
number of гepetitíons is O.
5 Press the REMOTE swítch on the machíne operator s pane1 to enter
the RMT mode, then press the start swítch. The files are executed ín
the specífıed order. When a fıle ís being executed, the cursor ís
posítíoned at the number of that file.
The current number of repetítions ís íncreased when M02
488
8-624ØE/03 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
oг M30 is executed in the program beíng ruri.
F1LE DIRECTORY 00000 N02000
ORDER FILE NO.
.. 01 5 5
0 02 23 23
03 0004 9999 156
04 0005 ØP 0
05
06
07
08
09
10
RMT .,.. ... ... 10:10:40
PRGRM D1R OPRт _

Screen
Exp[anations
Specifyíng no fíle If no file number ís specífíed on screen No. 4 the file number field ís left
number blank , program execution is stopped at that poínt. To leave the file
number fıeld blank, press numeńc key QO then игu
Endless repetítion If a negative value is set as the number of repetitíons, is
displayed, and the file ís repeated índefınítely.
C1ear When the [ OPRT ], [CLEAR], and [EXEC] soft keys are pressed on
screen No. 4, aІІ data is cleared. However, these keys do not functíon
while a fíle is beíng executed.
Return to the program When the [PRGRM] soft key ís pressed on screen No. 1, 2, 3, 4, oг 5, the
screen program screen ís dísplayed.
Límítatíon
Number of repetitíons Up to 9999 caп be specífíed as the number of repetítíons. If 0 is set for a
file, the file becomes ínvalid and ís not executed.
Number of fíles By pressíng the page key on screen No. 4, up to 20 fıles can be regístered.
regístered
M code When M codes other than M02 aтіd M30 aгe executed ín a program, the
current number of repetitíons ís not íncreased.
Dísplaying the floppy Duríng the executíon of file, the floppy directory display of background
dísk directory duríng fíle edítíng cannot be referenced.
executíon
Restartíng automatíc To resume automatic operation after it is suspended for scheduled
operatíon operatíon, press the reset button.
schedulíng functíon for The schedulíng functíon can be used on1y for a síngle tool post.
the two-path control
489
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-62444E/03
A1arm
Alarm 1do. Descríptíon
086 An attempt was made to execute a file that was not regís-
tered in the floppy disk.
210 M198 and M099 were executed duríng scheduled opera-
tíon, uг M198 was executed during DNC operation.
490
e-s24Øε/oз OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The subprogram call functíon ís províded to ca11 and execute subprogram
SUBPROGRAM fıles stored in an external ínput/output devíce Handy Fi1e, FLOPPY
CALL FUNCTION CASSETTE, FA Card during memory operatíon.
When the followíng block in a program in CNC memory ís executed, a
subprogram fıle in the external ínput/output devíce ís called:
Format
1. FS15 tape format
M198 P0000 LAAAA;
1
Number of repetitions
- Fi1e number for a fiie in the 1/0 device
1/0 devices ca11 ínstruction
2. Other than FS15 tape format
M198 PΠΠΠΠ Δ Δ ;
Fí1e number for a fíle
in the 1/0 device

Number of repetitions
1/0 devices ca11 instructíon
Explanatíon The subprogram ca11 function is enabled when parameter for the
ínput/output devíce is set to 3. When the custom macro optíon ís provided,
eíther format 1 0г 2 can be used. A dífferent M code can be used for a
subprogram call dependíng on the settíng of parameter In this
case, M198 ís executed as a normal M code. The file number ís specifíed
at address P. If the SBP bit bít 2 of parameter ís set to 1, a
program number can Ьe specifıed. When a fıle number ís specified at
address P, Fxxxx ís índícated ínstead of Oxxxx.
Programs in memory Program ín the external
execution mode input/output device
N1 ;
N2 ; 0123 .... Fi1e number
N3 M198 P0003 0123 ;
N4 ,
N5
_____ : Fírst ca11/return
_ : Second ca11/return
: Third ca11/return
F1g. a Program F1ow When M1981s speclfled
Restrictíons For the two-path control, subprograms in a floppy cassette cannot be
called for the two tool posts at the same tíme.
491
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION в-бzØ4Eıoз
Notes
1. When M198 in the program of the file saved in a floppy
cassette is executed, a P/S alarm is given. When
a program in the memory of CNC is called and M198 is
executed during execution of a program of the file saved in
a floppy cassette, M198 is changed to an ordinary M-code.
2. When MD1 is intervened and M198 is executed after M198
is commanded in the memory mode, M198 is changed to
an ordinary M-code. When the reset operation is done in
the MD1 mode after M198 is commanded in the MEMORY
mode, it does not influence on the memory operation and
the operation is continued by restarting it in the MEMORY
mode.
492
OPERATiON 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The movement by manual handle operatíon can be done by overlappíng
it wíth the movement by automatíc operation ín the automatic operation
mode.
X
Too1 posítion during
automatic operation
Too1 positíon after
handle ínterruptío
Programme -
depth of cut
\
Depth of cut by
handie ínterruptíon
F1g. a Manual Handle lnterruptlon
Hand1e interruption axis selectíon sígnals
For the handle ínterruptíon axís selectíon sígnals, refer to the manual
supplied by the machíne tool buílder.
During automatic operatíon, handle íntenυptíon ís enabled for an axís íf
the handle ínterruption axís selectíon signal for that axís is on. Hand1e
interruptíon ís performed Ьy turning the handle of the manual pulse
generator.
Notes
1. The travel distance by handle interruptíon is determined
according to the amount by which the manual pulse
generator is turned and the handle feed magníficatíon x1,
x10, xM, xN .
Since this movement is not accelerated or decelerated, it is
very dangerous to use a large magnification value for
handle ínterruption.
The move amount per scale at x1 magnifícation is
mm metric output or inch inch output .
2. Handle interruption is disabled when the machine is locked
during automatic operation.
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-б>444E/03
Explanatíons
Relatíon wíth other The followíng table índícates the relation between other functíons and the
functíons movement by handle interrupt.
D1splay Relation
Machíne lock Machine lock ís effectíve. The tool does not move
even when this signal turns on.
lnterlock lnterlock ís effective. The tool does not move
even when thís signal turns on.
Mirror image ís not effective. lnterrupt functíons on
the pius directíon by plus dírection command,
Mírror ímage even íf thís sígnal turns on.
Posítion dispiay The following table shows the relation between varíous position display
data and the movement by handle ínterrupt.
D1splay Relatlon
Absolute coordínate Handle ínterruptíon does not change absolute
value coordínates.
Relative coordínate Handle interruption does not change reiative
value coordínates.
Machíne coordínate Machine coordínates are changed by the travel
value dístance specífied by handle ínterruption.
Travel distance display
Press the functíon key гoв , then press the chapter selectíon soft key
[HNDL].
The move amount by the handle interrupt is displayed. The following 4
kinds of data are displayed concurrently.
HANDLE 1NTERRUPTION 00000 N00200
1NPUT UN1T OUTPUT UN1T
X X
Z Z
RELATIVE DISTANCE TO GO
U X
Z
PART COUNT 287
RUN T1ME 1 H 12M CYCLE T1ME OH OM OS
MD1 10:29:51
Г ABS Г REL ALL 1 OPRT 1
_/
a 1NPUT UN1T :
Hand1e interrupt move amount in ínput unít system
Indícates the travel distance specífıed by handle ínterruption
according to the least input íncrement.
b OUTPUT UN1T :
Hand1e interrupt move amount in output unit system
Indicates the travel dístance specífıed by handleí nterruption
according to the least command íncrement.
494
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
c RELATIVE :
Posítíon in relatíve coordínate system
These values have no effect on the travel dístance specífíed by handle
interruption.
d DISTANCE TO GO :
The remaíníng travel dístance ín the current block has no effect on the
travel dístance specifıed by handle ínterruptíon.
The handle ínterrupt move amount ís cleared when the manual reference
posítíon return ends every axis.
495
4. AUTOМATIC OPERATION OPERATION s-sгØ4Eı0з
Duríng automatíc operation, the mírror image functíon caп be used for
M1RRGR [MAGE movement along an axis. To use thís function, set the mírror image swítch
to ON on the machíne operator s pane1, oг set the mírror image setting to
ON from the CRT/MDI oг LCD/MDI .
X X-axis mirror ímage goes on.
Programmed tooi path
.
,` To o1 path after the mírror
image function ís used
Too1
a Z
F g. a Mlrror lmage
Procedur0 The followíng procedure ís given as an example. For actual operation,
refer to the mаnual supplied by the machine tool builder.
1 Press the síngle block switch to stop automatíc operation. When the
mirror ímage functíon ís used from the begínning of operatíon, thís
step ís omítted.
2 Press the mirror ímage swítch for the target axis on the machine
operator s pane1.
Alternatively, turn on the mirror ímage setting by following the steps
below:
2-1 Set the MD1 mode.
ОF.ЕТ
2-2 Press the 9ET- function key.
Tp1Ø
BETΓ O
2-3 Press the [SETING] soft key for chapter selectíon to display the
setting screen.
-
sETT1NG MIRROR 1MAGE 00020 N00001
MIRROR 1MAGEX = Q: OFF1 : ON
MIRROR 1MAGEZ = 0 0 : OFF 1: OM
>_
1vIEM 14:47:57
ı OFFSET , WORK OPRT 1
496
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
2-4 Move the cursor to the mirror ímage settíng posítion, then set the
target axís to 1.
3 Enter an automatic operatíon mode memory mode or MDI mode ,
then press the cycle start button to start automatic operation.
Explanatíons
The mirror image functíon can also be turned oп and off by settíng bít
0 MIRx of parameter to 1 0г О.
For the mirror image switches, refer to the mаnual supplíed by the
machine tool builder.
Restríctíons The dírection of movement during maпual operation, the directíon of
movement from an intermediate poínt to the reference posítíon during
automatíc reference position return G28 .
497
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION e-sгØ4εıoз
4. In cases such as when tool movement along an axis ís stopped by feed hold
MANUAL INTERVENTION during automatic operatíon so that manual íntervention can be used to replace the too1: When automatic operation is restarted, this function
AND RETURN returns the tool to the posítíon where manual ínterventíon was started.
To use the conventíonal program restart function and tool withdrawal and
return functíon, the swítches on the operator s pane1 must be used in
conjunctíon with the MDI keys. Thís function does not requíre such
operatíons.
Explanations
Manual absolute on/off In manual absolute off mode, the tool does not return to the stop posítíon,
but instead operates according to the mаnual absolute on/off function.
Override For the return operatíon, the dry run feedrate is used, and the jog feedrate
overríde function is enabled.
Return operatíon Return operation is performed accordíng to positioning based on
nonlinear ínterpolatíon.
Sίngle biock If the síngle block stop switch is on duríng return operatíon, the tool stops
at the stop posítion and restarts movement when the cycle start swítch is
pressed.
CanceIiation If a reset occurs or аn alarm is íssued duńng manual intervention or the
return operation, this functíon is cаnceІІed.
MD1 mode Thís function can be used in the MDI mode as we11.
Restríctions
Enablíng and disabling Thís function is enabled onіy when the automatic operation hold LED ís
manual íntervention and
oa. When there is no travel distance remainíng, this functíon has no effect return
even if a feed hold stop is performed with the automatic operatíon hold
signal SP bit 5 of G008 .
Offset When the tool is replaced using manual ínterventíon for a reason such as
damage, the tool movement cannot be restarted by a changed offset in the
middle of the ínterrupted block.
Machine 1ock, mírror When performing manual interventíon, never use the machine 1ock,
ímage, and scalíng
mírror image, or scaling functíons.
498
8-624ØE/o3 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Example
1. The N1 block cuts a workpiece
Too1 N2
Љ.

B1ock start poínt 1 N1
2. The tool ís stopped by pressíng the feed hold switch in
the middle of the N1 block poínt A .
N2
N1 Poínt A
З. After retracting the tool manually to point B, tool movement is restarted.
Point B
Manual
intervention N2
N1 Point
A
4. After automatíc return to poínt A at the dry run feedrate, the remaíníng
move command of the N1 block is executed.
Poínt B
\
\ N2
\
\
\
Í N1 Poínt A
Notes
When performing manual ínterventíon, pay partícular
attentíon of machíning and the shape of the workpíece so
that the machíne and tool are not damaged.
499
4. A,UTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION e-sг4a4εı03
By actívatíng automatic operation during the DNC operatíon mode
RMT , ít ís possíble to perform machíning DNC operation while a pNC ORERATION
program is being read in vía reader/puncher interface, oг remote buffer.
If the floppy cassette directory dísplay option is available, ít is possíble
to select files programs saved in an external ínput/output unít of a floppy
format Handy Fí1e, Floppy Cassettes, or FA card and specify schedule
the sequence and frequency of executíon for automatic operatíon.
To use the DNC operatíon functíon, ít ís necessary to set the parameters
related to the reader/punch ínterface, and remote buffer in advance.
DNC OPERATION
Procedure 1 Search for the program fıle to be executed.
2 Press the REMOTE swítch on the machine operator s pаne1 to set
RMT mode, then press the cycle start switch. The selected fíle is
executed. For details of the use of the REMOTE switch, refer to the
relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Program check screen
PROGRAM CØCR 00001 N00020 9 CRT
.. ... ... . .
κoзo xг ;
N050 ;
RELATIVE DIST TO GO G00 G17 G90
X X G22 G94 G21
Y Y G41 G49 G80
Z 2 G98 G50 G67
A A B
C C H M
HD . T D M
F S M
sACT AEPEAT
RMT STRT MTN 21:20:05
[ ABS ] п Н ][ OPRT J
Program screen
PROGRAM 00001 N00020
9 CRT
... .. . - .
κoзo Xг ;
N040 xз Zз ;
N050 ;
N060 ;
N070 ;
N080 ;
N090 ;
N100 ;
N110 ;
N120 ;
RMT STRT MTN 21:20:05
l Ĺ CЯECR j [ 7 [ ] [ OPRT

5p0
8-624ØE/o3 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Program screen \
CRT PROGRλN
N180 ;
нoзo ; N190 ;
N040 ; и20o Zз ;
N050 ; N210 ;
N060 ; N220 ;
N070 ; N230 ;
N080 ; N240 M02 ;
N090 Xз ; θ
N100 ;
N110 ; κ12o ;
κLз0 ;
N140 ; N150 ;
N160 ;
N170 ;
RMT θTAT NTN 222324
CHEC OPA
λ φ T
\
J
Duríng DNC operatíon, the program currently beíng executed ís
displayed on the program check screen and program screen.
The number of dísplayed program blocks depends on the program being
executed.
Any comment enclosed between a control-out mark and control-in
mark Q wíthín a block ís also displayed.
Explanations
Duńng DNC operatíon, programs stored in memory can be called.
Duríng DNC operation, macгo programs stored in memory cаn be
calІed.
Limitations
Limít on number of In program dísplay, no more than 256 characters can be displayed.
characters Accordingly, character dísplay may be truncated ín the middle of a block.
M198 command for In DNC operatíon, M198 cannot be executed. If M198 is executed, P/S
callíng a program from a1arm No. 210 ís íssued.
withín an externai
ínput/output unít
Custom macro In DNC operatíon, custom macros can be specifıed, but no repeat
instruction and branch instructíon can be programmed. If a repeat
ínstruction oг branch ínstruction is executed, P/S a1arm No. 123 ís íssued.
When reserved words such as IF, WHILE, COS, and NE used wíth
custom macros in DNC operatíon are dísplayed during program display,
a blank ís inserted between adjacent characters.
Example
[Duńng DNC operatíon]
102=SIN[ 100] ; 102 = S I N[ 100] ;
IF[ 100NE0]GOTO5 ; -i I F[ 100NE0] G O T O 5;
M99 When control ís returned from a subprogram or macгo program to the
callíng program duríng DNC operatíon, it becomes impossíble to use a
return comrnand M99P for which a sequence number ís specífied.
501
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-62ц44Li03
A1arm
Number Message Contents
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory Ьy
using Reader / Puncher interface, the
ready signal DR of reader / puncher
was turned off.
Power supply of 1/O unit is off or cable is
not connected or a Ø. is defective.
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command is useű during
COMMAND 1N DNC DNC operation.
Modify the program.
210 CAN NOT COMAND Or M198 is executed in the DNC opera
M198/M199 tìon. Modify the program.
502
B-62лØE/03 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
5
TEST OPERATION
The following functions are used to check before actual machining
whether the machine operates as specified by the created program.
1. Machíne Lock and Auxílíary Functíon Lock
2. Feedrate Overríde
З. Rapíd TYaverse Override
4. Dry Run
5. Síngle B1ock5
503
:5. TEST OPERATfON OPERATION B-62444E/03
To display the change in the posítion wíthout movíng the too1, use
machine 1ock. MACHINE LOCK AND
There are two types of machine 1ock, all-axís machine 1ock, which stops
AUXILIARY the movement along a11 axes, and specífíed-axís machine 1ock, which
FUNCTION LOCK stops the movement along specifıed axes oп1y. In addítion, auxíliary
function 1ock, which disables M, S, and T commands, is avaílable for
checking a program together wíth machíne 1ock.
CRT/MD1
XO0000
Z.....
Too1
1
The tool does not move but the position
along each axis changes on the dísplay.
F1g. Machine lock
Procedure for Machíne Lock and Auxílíary Function Lock
Machíne Lock Press the machine lock switch on the operator s pane1. The tool does not
move but the positíon along each axís changes on the dísplay as if the tool
were moving.
Some machines have a machíne lock swítch for each axis. On such
machínes, press the machíne lock swítches for the axes along which the
tool is to be stopped. Refer to the appropńate manual províded by the
machine tool buílder for machine 1ock.
The positional relationship between the workpíece coordinates and
machine coordínates may díffer before аnd after automatic operation
using machine 1ock. In such a case, specify the workpiece coordínate
system by usíng a coordínate setting command or by performíng manual
reference positíon return.
Auxíliary Functíon Lock Press the auxilíary functíon lock swítch on the operator s pane1. M, S, and
T codes аre dísabled and not executed. Refer to the appropríate manual
províded by the machíne tool builder for auxílíary functíon 1ock.
Restrictíons
M, S, T command by only M, S, аnd T commands аre executed in the machíne lock state.
machine lock
Reference posítion When a G27, G28, oг G30 command ís íssued in the machine lock state,
return under Machíne the commаnd ís accepted but the tool does not move to the reference
Lock posítíon and the reference posítion return LED does not go on.
M codes not locked by M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 commands are executed even in
auxíiíaty functíon ock the auxíliary functíon lock state.
504
в-в244лε103 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
A programmed feedrate can be reduced or íncreased by a percentage
selected by the overńde dia1. Thís feature ís used to check a program.
FEE RATE
For exanıple, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min ís specified in the program,
OVERRI E setting the overńde dial to 50 moves the tool at 50 mm/min.
Feedrate 100 mm/mіп
Specified by programmed Too1 Check the machining
by altering the feedrate
Feedrate 50 mm/mín after ..<__ from the value speci-
feedrate override fíed ín the program.
Fíg. Feedrate overrlde
Procedure for Feedrate Override
Set the feedrate override dial to the desired percentage oп the
machine operator s pane1, before or duńng automatic operation.
On some machínes, the same dіa1 ís used for the feedrate override dial
and manual contínuous feedrate dia1. Refer to the appropriate mauual
provided by the machine tool buílder for feedrate override.
a 200
JoG FEED RATE OVEZRIDE
RestrictÍons
Overríde Range The override that can be specifıed ranges from 0 to 254 . For indívidual
machínes, the range depends on the specífications of the machine tool
builder.
Overrïde duríng thread Duríng threadíng, the override is ígnored and the feedrate remains as
specífíed by program.
505
5. TFST OPERATION OPERATION B-62444E/03
An override of four steps F0, 25 , 50 , and 100 can be applied to the
rapid traverse rate. FO is set by a parameter No. 1421 .
RAP1D TRAVERSE
OVERR DE
W
ti
ti
Rapid traverse
5m/пin
ratel0m/mín Override
50
F1g. Rap1d traverse overríde
Procedure for Rapíd Traverse Overríde
Select one of the four feedrates with the rapíd traverse overríde swítch
during rapid traverse. Refer to the appropriate manual províded by
the machíne tool builder for rapid traverse overríde.
ιoV
Rapid traverse override
Expİanatiorr The followíng types of rapid traverse are avaílable. Rapíd traverse
override can be applied for each of them.
1 Rapíd traverse by G00.
2 Rapid traverse during a canned cycle.
3 Rapid traverse in G27, G28 and G30.
4 Manua1 rapid traverse.
5 Rapid traverse of manual reference position return
506
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
The tool ís moved at the feedrate specífíed by a parameter regardless of
the feedrate specífied in the program. This functíon is used for checking
DRY RUN
the movement of the tool under the state that the workpiece ís removed
from the table.
F1g. Dry run
Procedure for Dry Run
Press the dry run swítch on the machíne operator s pane1 during
automatic operatíon. The tool moves at the feedrate specifíed in a
paгameteг. The rapid traverse switch can also be used for changing
the feedrate. Refer to the appropriate manual províded by the
machíne tool buílder for dry run.
Explanatíon
Dry run feedrate The dry run feedrate changes as shown ín the table below accordíng to the
rapid traverse switch and parameters.
N1N , MC Rapid traverse Program command
Пιoex LOCK
button Rapíd traverse Feed
ON Rapid traverse rate Dry run feedratexJVmax 2
OFF Dry run speed x JV,or rapid Dry run feedrate x JV
traverse rate 1
Max. cutting feedrate ............... Setting by parameter
Rapid traverse rate ................. Setting by parameter
Dry run feedrate ................... Setting Ьy parameter
JV: Jog feedrate overňde
1 Dry run feedrate x JV when parameter RDR bít 6 of No. 1401 ís
1. Rapíd traverse rate when parameter RDR ís O.
2 Clamped to the maximum cutting feedrate
JVmax: Maxímum value of jog feedrate overňde
507
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION 8-62444E/03
Pressing the síngle block swítch starts the síngle block mode. When the
cycle start button ís pressed in the síngle block mode, the tool stops after SINGLE BLOCK
a single block in the program ís executed. Check the program in the síngle
block mode by executíng the program block Ьy block.
Cyc1e start
Cyc1e start Cyc1e start
Cyc1e start ЈТооІ

Stop Stop Stop
Stop

WoØíeoe
singie block
Procedure for Síngle B1ock
1 Press the síngle Ь1αk swítch on the machíne operator s pane1. The
execution of the program ís stopped after the current block ís
executed.
2 Press the cycle start button to execute the next b1осk. The tool stops
after the blосk is executed.
Refer to the appropńate manual provided by the machíne tool builder
for single block execution.
Explanation
Reference position If G28 to G30 are issued, the síngle block function is effective at the
return and singie block íntermedíate point.
508
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
Síngle block duríng a In a canned cycle, the síngle block stop points are as
canned cycle follows.
-њ- Rapid traverse
S : single block Cutting feed
Too1 Explana-
straíght cutting cycle раі ttσπ
G90 Taper cuttíng cycle
Outerfınner turníng cycle S Too1 path 1 4
to 4 is as-
2 І. sumed as
one cycle.
After 4 ís fin-
ished, a stop
ıs ma e. G92 straíght threadíng cycle Taper threadíng cycle
Threading cycle S Too1 path 1
4 to 4 is as-
1 sumed as
one cycle.
After 4 ís fín-
ished, a stop
ıs ma e. G94 straight end surface cuttíng Taper end surface cutting
End surface turníng cycle ŹŹΓβ čyZ`Г8 Too1 path 1
п - -1 ѕ to 4 is as-
2 4 sumed as
3 one cycle.
After 4 is fín-
íshed, a stop
ís made.
G70
Fínishing cycle Too1 path 1
to 7 ís as-
sumed as
one cycle.
After 7 ís fín-
íshed, a stop
ís made.
G71 ª - - s
Outer surface rough Each tool
machining cycle --- ----6- , path 1 to 4,5
G72 to 8,9 to 12,
End surface rough machining ,1f - -12 - - - õ
13 to 16 and
cycle º ----- 17 to 20 ís ςf f6 14 t3+
assumed as
ıy one cycle.
y After each
cycle ís fín-
L _ [.. L ished, a stop
This fígure shows the case for G71. G72 ís the ís made.
same.
F1g. single block during canned cycle 1/2
509
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-62444E/o3
-- +ы Raμ d traverse
S : singla-block stop a Cutting feecl
Too1 Explanatio
7ξG73
Closed-loop cutting cycle Too1 path 1
to 6 ís as
sumed as
one cycle.
After 10 is
fírıish:?d, a
stop ïs
le---
G74
1 End surface cuttíng-off cycle Too1 path 1 8-- 7- б 4- - 2 S G75 ,, tol0isas
Outer/ínner surrface cutting-off 10 sumed as
cycle -> one oycle. -.- -r
After 10 is
finíshed, a
Thís figure shows the case for G74. G75 ís the stop is
same.
G76
Multíple repetítíve threadíng cycle Too1 path 1
to 4 ís as-
sume as
one cycle.
After 4 ís fín-
íshed, a stop
ís made.
F1g. single biock during саппв:й cycle 212
Ѕtiί г Эíı; 11d Single block stop is not performed in a block contaíníng M98P_;. M99;
Sı1 λьlίσ ď95,ι`гС oг G65.
However, síngle block stop is even performed in a block wíth M98P_ oг
M99 command, if the block contaíns an address other than O, N or P.
510
в-sгaØεІoз OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
Special síngle-block Two-path control supports a single-block command sígnal for each of
control tool posts 1 and 2. Single-block stop can thus be specífíed for the
automatíc operation program for each tool post. Note, however, that when
the síngle-block comxтіaвd signals for both tool posts 1 and 2 are turned
on, the tools may stop at dífferent posítíons accordíng to the command
programs.
The special single-block control functíon elímínates such a difference by
applying feed hold to a tool post when the other tool post enters
single-block stop mode.
The special single-block control functíon ís enabled when bít 6 DSB of
parameter No. 8100 ís set to 1.
The single-blосk comınand signals for tool posts 1 and 2 aгe effectíve
even when the specíal single-block control functíon ís used.
When tool post 1 ог 2 is placed іn the síngle-block mask state or feed-hold
mask state Ьy a threadíng or custom macro program, the tool is not
stopped until the mask state ís termínated.
The tool posts are not synchroníіed. Therefore, if the following programs
are executed, feed hold ís app1іed to tool post 2 upon the completion of
for tool post 1, but the tool of tool post 2 is not stopped exactly at

Too1 post 1 Too1 post 2
00001 ; 00002 ;
G50 XO ; G50 XO ;
GO1 X10. F100 ; GO1 X20. F100 ;
GO1 X20. ;
511
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION 8-62444E/03
6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS
To ímmedíately stop the machíne for safety, press the Emergency stop
button. To prevent the tool from exceedíng the stroke ends, Overtravel
check and Stroke check are avaílable. Thís chapter describes emergency
stop, overtravel check, and stroke check.
512
B-62444E/03 GP ERAT 1 ON 6. SAFE T Y FUNCTI NS
бј If you press Emergency Stop button on the machíne operator s pane1, the
machíne movement stops in a moiuent. EMERGEIVCY STOP
ќЎЎ Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Fíg. Enıergency stop
This button ís locked when it is pressed. Although it varies wíth the
machine tool builder, the button can usually be unlocked by twisting it.
Explanatian EMERGENCY STOP interrupts the current to the motor.
Causes of trouble must be removed before the button is released.
-- 513
G. sAFETY Fı hıGТЮNS OPERATlON e-sτ444εıoз
When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool
límit swítch, the tool decelerates and stops because of workíng the lírnít OVERTRAVEL
swítch and an OVER TRAVEL ís dísplayed.
Deceleration and stop Y
V` W
Stroke end Ĺimit switch
f=σg. Overtravei
Explar atíon
Overtravel durinØ When the tool touches a límít swítch along an axís duríng automatíc
automatíc operatθon operation, the tool ís decelerated and stopped along a11 axes and an
overtravel a1arm ís dísplayed.
Overtravel during In manual operatíon, the tool is decelerated and stopped on1y along the
manuaI operation axís for which the tool has touched a limit swítch. The tool stíll moves
along the other axes.
Fíeleasíng overtravel Press the reset button to reset the alarm after movíng the tool to the safety
dírectíon Ьy manual operation. For details on operation, refer to the
operator s manual of the machíne tool builder.
e46arm
Plo. MessaØe Descrïрtïon
The tool ńas xceeded the ńardware-spe-
5Qδ Overtravel: +n cífied overtravei iimit along the positive nth
axis n: 1 to 8 .
The tool has exceeded the haráware-spe-
507 Overtravel: -n cified overtravef limít along the negative nth
axís n: 1 to 8 .
-- 514
B-6244дЕ/o3 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
There areas whích the tool cannot enter can be specífíed wíth stored
sтRoкε СнεСк stroke limít 1, stored stroke límít 2,and stored stroke límít 3.
/yıııııııııı,ı ııııııııı
/

Stored stroke límít 3
Stored stroke límit 2

Stored stroke límít 1
:Forbídden area for the tool
Flg. stroke check
When the tool exceeds a stored stroke limit, an a1arm is displayed and the
tool ís decelerated and stopped.
When the tool enters a forbídden area and an a1аrm ís generated, the tool
can Ьe moved in the reverse direction from which the tool came.
Explanation
Stored stroke límít 1 Parameters Nos. 1320, 1321 ог Nos. 1326, 1327 set boundary. Outsíde
the area of the set linıits ís a forbidden area. The machine tool builder
usually sets this area as the maximum stroke.
Stored stroke límít 2 Parameters Nos. 1322, 1323 oг commands set these boundaries. Inside
G22, G23 or outsíde the area of the limít caп be set as the forbídden area. Parameter
OUT No. 1300Ø selects either ínside or outsíde as the forbídden area.
In case of program command a G22 command forbíds the tool to enter the
forbídden area, and a G23 command permits the tool to enter the
forbidden area. Each of G22; and G23; should be commanded
índependently of another commands in a block.
The command below creates or changes the forbídden area:
515
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-62444E/03
G 22X_Z_I_K_;
A X,Z
1
B I,K
X>i,Z>K
X-1>ζ
Z-K>ζ
ζis the dístance the tool travels in 8 ms. It ís 2000 ín least
command increments when the feedrate ís 15 m/min.
Fig. Creating or changing the forbidden area using a program
When settíng the area by parameters, poínts A and B in the figure below
must be set.
A Кı,Zı
B X2,Z2
ñ1>ñ2,Z1>Z2
X1-X2> ζ
ZІ-Z2> ζ
ζіs the dístance the tool travels in 8 ms. It is 2000 in least
commаnd íncrements when the feedrate ís 15 m/min.
F1g. Creating or changing the forbldden area using a parameters
In límít 2, even íf you místake the order of the coordínate value of the two
points, a rectangular, with the two poínts beíng the apexes, wíll be set as
the area.
When you set the forbídden аrea X1,Z1,X2,and Z2 through parameters
Nos. 1322, 1323 , the data should be specifıed by the distance from the
reference posítion in the least commаnd increment. Output increment
If set the forbídden area XZIK Ьy a G22 commаnd, specífy the data by
the distance from the reference posítion in the least ínput increment Input
íncrement. The programmed data are then converted into the numerica1
values in the least commаnd íncrement, and the values are set as the
parameters.
StOred stroke límít 3 Set the boundary wíth parameters No. 1324 and 1325. The area ínsíde the
boundary becomes the forbídden атea.
516
в-624Øε/oз OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Checkpoínt for the The parameter settíng or programmed value XZIK depends on whích
forbídden area part of the tool or tool holder ís checked for entering the forbídden area.
Confirm the checkíng posítíon the top of the tool or the tool chuck before
programmíng the forbídden area.
If poínt C The top of the tool ís checked in Fíg. d , the distance
should be set as the data for the stored stroke limít function. If poínt D
The tool chuck ís checked, the dístance d must be set.
C
The position of the
tool aiter reference
position return
F1g. Setting the forbidden aгea
Forbidden area over Area can be set in piles.
lapping ---
FIg. setting the forbldden area over iapping
Unnecessary limits should be set beyond the machine stroke.
Effectíve tíme for a Each limit becomes effectíve after the power ís turned on and manual
forbídden area reference posítíon return or automatíc reference posítíon return by G28
has been performed.
After the power ís turned on, íf the reference position ís in the forbidden
аrea of each limit, аn alarm is generated íınmediately. 0n1y ín G22 mode
for stored stroke límít 2 .
Releasíng the alarms When the tool has become unmovable іп the forbidden area, push the
emergency stop button to release the forbidden condítion аnd move the
tool out of the forbídden area in the G23 mode; then, if the settíng ís
wrong, correct ít and perform the reference positíon return agaín.
Change from G23 to When G23 ís switched to G22 in the forbidden аrea, the following results.
1 When the forbídden аrea is ínsíde, an a1arm is informed in the next
G22 ín a forbídden area move.
2 When the forbidden аrea ís outside, аn a1aгm is informed ímmediately.
517
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION e-s2444εıoз
settíng the forbídden For the two-path control, set a forbídden area for each tool post.
area for the two-path
control
Notes
1n setting a forbidden area, if the two points to be set are
the same, the area is as follows:
i When the forbidden area is iimit 1, a11 areas are forbidden
areas.
2 When the forbidden area is limit 2 or limit 3 a11 areas are
movable areas.
Tímíng for dísplaying Parameter BFA bit 7 of No. 1300 selects whether an a1arm is displayed
an alarm immedíately before the tool enters the forbidden аrea oг ímmediately after
the tool has entered the forbidden area.
ALram
Number Møssagы Contents
500 ı OVER TRAVEL: Exceeded the n-th axis 1-8 + síde stored
+n stroke limit 1.
501 OVER TRAVEL: Exceeded the n-th axis 1-8 - side stored
-n stroke limít 1.
502 OVER TRAVEL: Exceeded the n-th axis 1-8 + síde stored
_ +n s4roke limit 2.
503 OVER TRAVEL: Exceeded the n-th axis 1-8 - side stored
İ -n stroke fimit 2.
504 OVER TRAVEL: Exceed d the n-th axís 1-8 + side stored
+n stroke limít З.
505 OVER TRAVEL: Exceeded the n-th axis 1-8 - síde stored
-n strok limit З.
i

1
i
518
в-s24Øεıoз OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
The chuck-tailstock barrier functíon prevents damage to the machíne Ьy
CHUCK AND checkíng whether the tool tip fouls either the chuck or tailstock.
Specífy an area ínto whích the tool may not enter entry-inhíbitíon aгea .
TAІL TOCK Thís ís done usíng the specíal settíng screen, accordíng to the shapes of
BARRIERS the chuck and taílstock. If the tool típ should enter the set area duríng a
machíníng operatíon, thís function stops the tool and outputs an alarm
message.
The tool can Ьe cleаred from the area on1y by retractíng ít in the directíon
opposíte to that in whích the tool entered the area.
settíng the chuck and taílstock barríers
setting the shapes of the
1 Press the functíon key.
chuck and taílstock
2 Press the [ contínuous menu key. Then, press the [BARIER]
chapter selectíon soft key.
3 Pressíng the page key toggles the dísplay between the chuck barrier
settíng screen and tailstock barrier settíng screen.
Chuck barrier Øtting screen
BARRIER CHUCK 00000 N00000

1 TY=O O:IN,I:OUT
wı L =
L- L 1 W =
L1= CX W1=
L
CX=
CZ=
ACTUAL POSITION ABSOLUITE
X Z
>_
ØI 14:46:09
і [ ][ ][ ][
][ OPRT ]

519
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION в-6г4Øεıoз
TaíLstock barrier settíng screen

BARRIER TAILSTOCK 00000 N00000
rL -, L =
D = 200. г ú
L1 L1=
/D3 D1= j г г
/_ L2 L2=
T z -ή / D2=
.ı D2 D1 D
DB=
/DB
Z TZ=
ACTUAL POSITION ABSOLUTE
X Z
>
ØI 14:46:09
[ INPUT ] [ tINPUT ] [ SET ] [ ] [ ]
4 Positíon the cursor to each ítem definíng the shape of the chuck or
taílstock, enter the corresponding value, then press the [1NPUT] soft
key. The value ís set. Pressing the [NPUT] soft key after a value has
been entered adds the entered value to the current value, the new
setting being the sum of the two values.
Items CX and CZ, both on the chuck barrier settíng screen, and item
TZ on the tailstock barrier setting screen can also be set in another
way. Manually move the tool to the desíred posítion, then press the
[SET] soft key to set the coordínate s of the tool in the workpíece
coordinate system. If a tool having an offset other than 0 is manually
moved to the desired posítíon wíth no compensatíon applied,
compensate for the tool offset in the set coordinate system.
Items other than CX, CZ, and TZ cannot be set by usíng the [SET] soft
key.
Example
When the tool típ enters the entry-ínhíbítion area duríng machiníng,
the function stops the movement of the tool and displays an a1arm
message. Sínce the machíne system can stop on1y a slíght delay after
the CNC stops, the tool wíll actually stop movíng at a point withín the
specífıed boundary. For safety, therefore, set an area a 1ittle laтgeг than
the determined аrea. The dístance between the boundańes of these two
areas, L, ís calculated from the followíng equation, based on the rapíd
traverse rate.
L= Rapíd traverse Rate x Šφ
When the rapid traverse rate is 15 m/mín, for example, set an area
havíng a boundary 2 mm outsíde that of the determíned aгea.
The shapes of the chuck аnd tailstock can Ьe set usíng parameters No.
1330 to 1345.
Note
Set G23 mode before attemptíng to specífy the shapes of the chuck and
tailstock.
520
в-6г444εı0з OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Reference posítíon 1 Return the tool to the reference posítíon along the X- and Z-axes.
return The chuck-tailstock barríer functíon becomes effective on1y once
reference posítíon return has been completed after power on.
When an absolute positíon detector ís províded, reference position
return need not always Ьe performed. The posítional relationshíp
between the machíne and the absolute posítíon detector, however,
must be determíned.
Reference positíon 1 After reference posítion return, specifyíng G22 stored stroke limít
return oп makes the entry-ínhíbítíon areas for the chuck and tailstock
effective. Specífyíng G23 stored stroke límít off dísables the
functíon.
Even if G22 ís specífíed, the entry-ínhíbítion area for the tailstock can
Ьe disabled by issuíng a tailstock barrier sígnal.
When the tailstock ís pushed up agaínst a workpíece or separated from
the workpíece by usíng the míscellaneous functíons, PMC signals are
used to enab1e or dísable the tailstock setting area.
G code Tallstock barrler Chuck barrler Tallstock barrler
slgnal
0 Effective Effectíve
G22
1 Effectíve lneffectíve
G23 No relatíon lneffectíve lneffective
G22 ís usually selected when the power is turned on. Using G23, bít 7
of parameter No. 3402, however, it can be changed to G23.
Explanatíons
settíng the shape of the
chuck barrier
Chuck holding the outer Chuck holding the
face of a too1 inner face of a tool
X
L
Li
i L 1
Z
CZ 11ј \
Orígín of work-
piece coordi-
nate system Orígín of work-
piece coordinate
system
Note The hatched areas indicate entry-ínhíbítíon areas.
521
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION ŕŚ-62дd4E: 03
Symboi Descriptlon
TY Chuck-shapeselectíon 0: Hoiding the innerface ofatooi, i Hoiding tiie outer
face of a tooi
CX Chuck posítíon along X-axis
CZ Chuck posítion along Z-axís
L Length of chuck jaws
W Depth of chuck jaws radíus
L1 Hoidíng length of chuck jaws
W 1 Holdíng depth of chuck jaws radíus
TY :
Selects a chuck type, based on its shape. Specífyíng 0 selects a chuck
that holds the inner face of a too1. Specífying 1 selects a chuck that
holds the outer face of a too1. A chuck is assumed to be symmetrícal
about its Z-axís.
CX, CZ:
Specífy the coordínates of a chuck positíon, poínt A, in the workpíece
coordínate system. These coordínates are not the same as those in the
machine coordínate system. Tab1e 1 lists the units used to specífy the
data.
Note
Whether díameter programming or radius programming ís used for
the юхіs determines the programmíng system. When diameter
programmíng is used for the axís, use díameter programmíng to
enter data for the axís.
Tabie 1 Units
lncrement Data unit
system Va1id data range
1s-A iS-B
Metric input mm mm 99999999 to
Inch input inch ínch 99999999 to
L, L1, W, W1:
Defıne the shape of a chuck. Tab1e 2lísts the uníts used to specífy the
data.
Note
Always specífy W and W1 in radius. When radíus programmíng
ís used for the Z-axís, specífy L and L1 in radius.
Tabie 2 Units
lncrement Data unit
Vai1d data range system ig-q iS-B
Metric input mm mm 99999999 to
Inch input inch inch 99999999 to
522
B-s2444E/03 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Settíng the shape of a
taílstock barríer
-- ι-- ь
τ
Ѓ- ιı -
ь
Work- B
piece D3 D2 D1 D z

/
Orígín of the
workpíece
coordinate
system
Symbol Descrlptlon
TZ Tailstock Øsition along the Z-axís
L Tailstock length
D Tailstock díameter
L1 Tailstock length 1
01 Taílstock díameter 1
L2 Taílstock length 2
02 Tailstock díameter 2
D3 Taílstock díameter 3
TZ
Specífıes the Z coordínate of the chuck posítíon, poínt B, in the
workpiece coordinate system. These coordínates are not the same as
those in the machine coordinate system. Tab1e 3 lists the uníts used
to specífy the data. A tailstock is assumed to be symmetrical about its
Z-axis.
Note
Whether diameter programmíng oг radíus programmíng ís used for
the Z-axís determínes the programming system.
Tab1e 3 Un1ts
lncrement Data u 1
system Va11d data range
1S-A 1S-B
Metríc ínput mm mm -99999999 to
Inch ínput inch inch -99999999 to
L, L1, L2, D, D1, D2, D3:
Defíne the shape of a taílstock. Tab1e 4 lists the uníts used to specífy
the data.
Note
Always specífy D, D1, D2, arid D3 in díameter programmíng.
When radíus programmíng ís used for the Z-axis, specífy L, L1,
and L2 in radíus.
523
6. SAFETY FUNCTı.ONS OPERATION B-62444EJ03
Tab1e 4 Units
lncrement Data unít
Vaiíd data range
system is-p Іі S-B
Metric ínput mm mm -99999999 to
Inch input ínch inch -99999999 to
Settíng the The típ angle of the tailstock ís 60 degrees. The entry-inhibition aгea ís
entry-ínhíbítion area for set around the tip, assumíng the angle to be 90 degrees, as shown below.
the taílstock típ
Límítations
Correct setting of an If an entry-inhíbitíon area ís incorrectly set, ít may not be possible to
entry-inhíbition area make the aгea effectíve. Avoid making the followíng settings:
L< L1 or W< W1 in the chuck-shape settíngs.
D2 < D3 in the taílstock-shape settíngs.
A chuck settíng overlappíng that of the taílstock.
Retraction from the If the tool enters the entry-inhibítíon аrea and an alarm ís issued, swítch
entry-ínhibítíon area to manual mode, retract the tool manually, then reset the system to release
the alarm. In manual mode, the tool can be moved on1y іn the opposite
dírection to that іn whích the tool entered the area. The tool cannot be
moved in the same dírection further into the area as ít was travelling
when the tool entered the aгea.
When the entry-inhíbítíon areas for the chuck and tailstock are enabled,
and the tool ís already posítíoned within those areas, аn alarm ís issued
when the tool moves. When the tool cannot be retracted, change the
setting of the entry-inhibítíon areas, such that the tool ís outside the areas,
reset the system to release the alarm, then retract the too1. Finally, reínstall
the oríginal settings.
524
в-62444ε1oз OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Coordínate system An entry-ínhibítion area ís defíned using the workpíece coordinate
system. Note the followíng.
1 When the workpiece coordínate system ís shifted by means of a
command or operatíon, the entry-ínhibition area ís also shífted by the
same amount.
Entry-ínhibi-
tion area
Entry-inhíbí-
01d workpiece tíon area
coordínate system
01d workpiece
coordínate system
Machíne coordínate system
Use of the following commands and operations will shíft the workpiece
coordínate system.
Comrnands:
G54 to G59, G52, G50 G92 in G code system B oг C
Operaбons:
Manua1 handle ínterrupt, change in offset relatíve to the workpíece
reference poínt, change in tool offset tool geometry compensatíon ,
operation with machíne 1ock, mаnual operatíon wíth machíne absolute
sígnal off
2 When the tool enters an entry-ínhíbítíon агea duríng automatíc
operatíon, set the mаnual absolute sígnal, ABSM, to 0 on , then
manually retract the tool from the area. If thís sígnal ís 1, the dístance
the tool moves in manual operation ís not counted in the tool
coordinates ín the workpiece coordinate system. Thís results іn the
state where the tool can never be retracted from the entry-ínhibítion
агea.
Stored stroke límit 2 When both stored stroke limit 2 and the chuck-taílstock barrier function
are províded, the barríer takes príoríty over the stroke límít. Stored stroke
limit 2 is ígnored.
Alarms
Number Message Contents
502 OVER TRAVEL: +X The tool has entered the entry-ínhíbition
aгea during positíve-dírection movement
along the X-axis.
OVER TRAVEL: +Z The tool has entered the entry-ínhibition
area duríng posítive-directíon movement
along the Z-axís.
503 OVER TRAVEL: -X The tool has entered the entry-ínhíbítíon
aгea duríng negatíve-direction movement
along the X-axis.
OVER TRAVEL: -Z The tool has entered the entry-ínhíbítíon
aгea during negative-dírectíon movement
along the Z-axis.
525
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION в-s2aaaεıo3
Duríng automatíc operatíon, before the movement specifıed Ьy a gíven
block ís started, whether the tool enters the ínhibíted area defíned by STROKE L1M1T
stored stroke limít 1, 2, oг 3 is checked by determíning the positíon of the
CHECK PR10R TO end point from the current posítion of the machíne and a specifıed amount
PERFORMING of travel. If the tool is found to enter the ínhíbíted area defíned by a stored
stroke límít, the tool ís stopped ímmediately upon the start of movement MOVEMENT
for that block, and an alarm is dísplayed.
Notes
Notes
1 Whether the coordinates of the end point, reached as a
result of traversíng the distance specifíed ín each block, are
ín a inhibited area ís checked. 1n thís case, the path followed
by a move command ís not checked. However, if the tool
enters the inhibited area defíned by stored stroke limít 1, 2,
or 3, an alarm is issued. See the examples below.
Example 1
lrıhíbŔe дгea defiпвd b
stored stroke limít 1 or 2:
\ `
ı
End poínt
Sta rt poínt \
The tool ís stopped at poínt a accordíng
to stored stroke límít 1 or 2.

lmmediately upon movement commencíng
from the start poínt, the tool is stopped to
enable a stroke limít check to be performed
before movement.
526
OPERATION G. sAFETY FJNCTIONú B-a2444E/03
Examp e 2
End point
έnhíbέtØ aгea defined by
stored st:oke iimit 1 or 2
\
The tool ís stopped at puint a according
Start poínt to stored stroke límít 1 or 2.
lnhìbτttзεf area definëd fśy
staт8tl8t1 oke έimít 1 oг 2 End poiπt
..λ
immedíately upon movement commencing
from the start point, the tooi ís stopped to
eпaЬ1e a stroke límít check to be performed
before movement.
Expianations When a stroke liniit check prior to movement is performed, whether to
check the movement performed Ьy a G31 skip block and G37 automatic
toollength measurement block can Ьe determíned using NPC bít 2 of
parameter No. 1301 .
Liınitatíons
M a c h i n e 1 o c k If machíne lock ís applied at the start of movement, no stroke líınít check
made before movement ís performed.
G23 When stored stroke limít 2 ís dísabled G23 mode , no check is made to
determine whether the tool enters the inhibíted aгea defined by stored
stroke límít 2.
program restart When a program ís restarted, an a1arm ís lssued if the restart positíon ís
wíthín a ínhibited area.
Manual intervention When the executíon of a block ís restarted after manual interventíon
Io owing a feed hoid followíng a feed hold stop, no a1arm ís issued even íf the end poínt ís
stop wíthín a inhíbited area.
A biock consistíng o If a block consistíng of multíple operations such as a canned cycle and
multíp e operations exponentíal ínterpolation ís executed, an a1aгm ís íssued at the start poínt
of any operation whose end poínt falls wíthín a ínhíbited агea.
527
6. SAFETY FUNÚTfGNS ОРrrRATıON в-вгaaaεıo3
Cyrïndríoal ínterpolation In cylíndrical ínterpolatíon mode, no check ís made.
mode
PoEaC coordinete In polar coordínate interpolatíon mode, no check ís made.
ïnterpoletion mode
Slanted axis control When the slanted axis control option ís selected, no check ís made.
Simple synchronous In símple synchronous control, on1y the master axis ís checked; no slave
control axesare checked.
rawìng Duríng drawíng, no check is made.
PMC вxis cortrol No check is made for a movement based on PMC axís control.
Chuck/tailstock barrier No check is made for a chuck/tailstock barrier area lathe system .
Synçhronous mixed No check ís made for an axis placed in synchronous mixed mode
mode two-path lathe control .
A1arm
Number Message Contents
506 ØVER TRAVEL : The stroke limít check, made before move
+n ments is peгfoεmed, reveals that the tcol
would enter a inhíbíted area in the + direct oп.
507 OVER TRAVEL : Th stroke iimit check. made before move
-n ments ís performed, reveais that the tool
_ _e would enter a inhibited ar a in tńe - direction.
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
OPERATION FL1NCTION S β-62444E/03
7
ALARM ANQ SELF- 1AGNOS1S FUNCTIONЅ
When an a1arm occurs, the correspondíng a1arm screen appears to indícate
the cause of the a1arm. The causes of alarms are classífıed by error codes.
Up to 25 previous alarms caп be stored and dísplayed on the screen alarm
hístory dísplay .
The system may sometimes seem to be at a ha1t, although no a1arm ís
dísplayed. In thís case, the system may be performing some processing.
The state of the system can be checked usíng the self-díagnostic function.
529
7. ALARM AND SELF DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS OPERATION 8-62444E/03

ALARM DISPLAY
Explanatíons
A1arm Screen When an a1arm occurs, the a1arm screen appears.

ALARM MESSAGE 0000 00000
100 PARAMETER WR1TE ENABLE
510 OVER TRAVEL :+X
520 OVER TRAVEL :
530 OVER TRAVEL :
S 0 T0000
MD1 ж ж 18:52:05
I ;іі ı MSG
J ı HISTRY1 I
Another method for In some cases, the a1arm screen does not appear, but an ALM is displayed
alarm dísplays at the bottom of the screen.
PARAMETER RS232C 1NTERFACE 01000 N00010
0100 ENS NCR CTV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0101 NFD AS1 SB2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0102 DEVICE NUM. CHO
0103 BAUDRATE CHO 10
0111 NFD AS1 S62
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0112 DEVICE NUM. CH1 0
0113 BAUDRATE CH1 0
- S 0 T0000
MEM _ 08:41:27
ON:1 OFF:O rNPUT 1 1NPUT ı
In thís case, dísplay the alarm screen as follows:
1 Press the function key , Eѕа o
2 Press the chapter selectíon soft key [ALARM].
530
7. ALARM ANG SELF-Cl1AGNί:7S9Ѕ
в-sг44.4Е/u3 OРĚRATIGN FiJNCT10NS
Reset of the e1a rm Error codes and messages indicate the cause of an a1arm. To recover from
an alarm, elímínate the cause and press the reset key.
Error coties The error codes are classifíed as follows:
No. 000 to 232: Program errors
No. 300 to 308: Absolute pulse coder APC alarms
No. 350 and 351: Seňa1 pulse coder SPC alarms
No. 400 to 417: Servo alarms
No. 500 to 507: Overtravel alarms
No. 700 to 704: Overheat alarms
No. 750 to 762: Spindle alarms
No. 900 to 973: System alarms
For an alarm No. 000 to 232 that occurs in assocíatíon with background
operation, the indicatíon xxxBP/S a1aгm is províded where xxx ís an
a1arm number . 0n1y a BP/S a1aгm ís provided for No. 140.
See the error code líst in the appendíx for detaíls of the error codes.
531
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIUNS OPERATION в-62444E/oз
Up to 25 of the most recent CNC alarms aгe stored and displayed on the
screen. ALARM НISTORY
Dísplay the a1arm history as follows:
зP LÁY
Procedure for A1arm Hístory Dísplay
1 Press the functíon key мEeaмэd
2 Press the chapter selection soft key [HISTRY].
The alarm history appears.
The followíng ínformation items are displayed.
1 The date the a1arm was issued
2 A1aгm No.
3 A1aгm message some contaíns no message
3
4 To delete the recorded ínformatíon, press the softkey [ OPRT ]
then the [DELETE] key.
ALARM HISTORY 00100 N00001
1 94 16:43:48 PAGE=1
2 Q1 Q 3 MPROPER G-CODE 4
8:22:21
506 OVER TRAVEL : +X
20:15:43
417 SERVO ALARM : X AX1S DGTL PARAM
MEM 19:47:45
ф,Ј ALARM C MSG , :іі І;ї I J ı OPRT 1

1 The date the alarm was íssued
2 A1aгm No.
3 A1arm message some contaíns no message
4 Page number
532
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
8-62444E/03 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
The system may sometímes seem to be at a ha1t, although no a1arm has
occurred. In this case, the system may be performing some processing. CHECKING BY
The state of the system can be checked by displaying the self-díagnostic
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
screen.
SCREEN
Procedure for Díagnostíc
1 Press the function key 6УgTEм
2 Press the chapter select key [DGNOs].
3 The díagnostic screen has more than 1 pages. Select the screen by the
following operatíon.
1 Change the page by the 1-page change key.
2 Method by soft key
- Key input the number of the díagnostic data to be displayed.
- Press [N sRCH].
DIAGNOSTIC GENERAL 00000 N00000
000 WAITING FOR F1N SIGNAL :0
001 MOT10N :0
002 DWELL :0
003 1N-POS1T10N CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0 :0
005 1 NTER LOCK/sTART-LOCK :0
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0

ED1T 14:51:55
C PARAM 1 C і PMC C OPRT 1
J SYSTEM
\ J
Expianatíons
Se1f diagnostíc screen at For the two-path control, the díagnostíc screen for the tool post selected
2-path control with the tool post selection switch is dísplayed. When displayíng the
díagnostíc screen for the other tool post, specífy the tool post wíth the tool
post selection swítch.
533
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-624444E/03
Explanatíons Díagnostíc numbers 000 to 015 índicate states when a command ís
beíng specifíed but appears as íf ít were not being executed. The table
below lists the ínternal states when 1 is dísplayed at the right end of
each line oп the screen.
Tab1e a A1arm dísplays when a command ís specíned but appears as if it were ııot beíng executed
No. Dísplay lnternal status when 1 ís dísplayed
000 WAITING FOR F1N SIGNAL M, S. T functíon beíng executed
001 MOT10N Move command ín automatíc operation being
executed
002 DWELL Dwe11 beíng executed
003 1N-POS1T10N CHECK 1n-posítíon check beíng executed
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0 Cutting feed overríde 0
005 1NTERLOCK/START-LOCK lnterlock ON
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK Waíting for spindle speed arríval signal to turn on
010 PUNCHING Data beíng output via reader puncher interface
011 READING Data being input via reader puncher ínterface
012 WAITING FOR UN CLAMP Waiting for index table clamp/unclamp before B axís
index table índexíng start/after B axís index table
índexing end to complete
013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0 Jog overríde 0
014 WAITING FOR Emergency stop, external reset, reset rewínd, or
MD1 pane1 reset key on
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM External program number searchíng
NUMBER SEARCH
1à61e Ь A1arm dísplays when an automatíc operation ís stopped or paused.
No. Dísplay lnternal status when 1 is dísplayed
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN Set when emergency stop turns on or when senıo
a1arm occurs
021 RESET BUTTON ON Set when reset key turns on
022 RESET AND REWIND ON Reset and rewind turned on
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON Set when emergency stop turns on
024 RESET ON Set when external reset, emergency stop, reset, or
reset rewínd key turns on
025 STOP MOT10N OR DWELL A flag which stops pulse dístribution. 1t ís set ín the
following cases.
1 External resetturned on.
2 Reset rewind turned on.
3 Emergency stop turned on.
4 Feed hold turned on.
5 The MD1 pane1 reset key turned on.
6 Swítched to the manual mode JOG
/HANDLE/1NC .
7 Other a1aгm occuггed. There is also alarm
whích ís not set.
Diagnostíc numbers 020 to 025 índícate the states when automatíc operation ís stopped or paused.
534
7. ALARM AND SELF DIAGNOSIS
8-62444E/03 GPERATION FUNCTIONS
The table below shows the signals and states which are enabled when each
diagnostic data ítem is 1. Each combination of the values of the diagnπstic
data indicates a uníque state.
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 U 1 0 0 0 0
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY sTOP ON 1 0 0 O 0 04 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWЕLLј 1 1 1 1 1 1 C
Emergency stop signal input
External reset signal input
MD1 reset button tumed on
Reset rewind input
Servo a1arm generation
Changed to another mode or feed hold
single block stop
Diagnostic numbers 030 and 031 indicate TH alarm states.
No. Display Meaning of data
030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH DATA The position of the character which caused TH
alarm is displayed by the number of characters from
the beginníng of the block at TH alarm
031 TH DATA Read code of character which caused TH alarm
535
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION 8-624ØE/o3
8 DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
NC data is transferred between the CNC and external ínput/output devices
such as the Handy File.
The followíng types of data caп be entered and output :
1.Program
data
3.Parameter
4.Pítch error compensation data
macro common variab1e
Before an ínput/output devíce can be used, the ínput/output related
parameters must be set.
For how to set parameters, see Chapter III-2.
Rs-422
ínterface
RS-232-C
intertace Н0 .
FANUC He Wy F11ı
RS-232-C or ı
RS-422 interface
Punch pane1 etc...
536
B-62444E/o3 OPERATION 8. DATA /1NPUT/OUTPUT
Of the external input/output devíces, the FANUC Handy File and FANUC
Floppy Cassette use floppy disks as theír ínput/output medium, and the
F1LES
FANUC FA Card uses an FA card as its ínput/output medium.
In this manual, an ínput/output medium ís generally referred to as a
floppy. However, when the descńptíon of one input/output medium
varíes from the descriptíon of another, the name of the ínput/output
medium ís used. In the text below, a floppy represents a floppy dísk or
FA card.
Unlíke an NC tape, a floppy allows the user to freely choose from several
types of data stored on one medium on a file-by-file basís.
Input/output is possíble with data extending over more than oпe floppy
disk.
Explanations
What ís a Fí1e The unít of data, which is input/output between the floppy and the CNC
by one ínput/output operatíon pressing the VREADW or VPUNCHW
key , ís cafled a Hfí1eI. When ínputtíng CNC programs from, or
outputting them to the floppy, for example, one or a11 programs within the
CNC memory are handled as one fı1e.
Fí1es are assigned automatícally file numbers 1,2,3,4 аnd so on, wíth the
lead fıle as 1.
Fí1e 1 Fí1e 2 Fi1e 3 Fí1e n B1ank
Request for floppy When one file has been entered over two floppíes, LEDs on the adaptor
replacement flash alternately on completíon of data ínput/output between the fírst
floppy аnd the CNC, prompting floppy replacement. In this case, take the
first floppy out of the adaptor and ínsert a second floppy іп its place. Then,
data ínput/output wíll continue automatically.
Floppy replacement ís prompted when the second floppy and later is
requíred during file search-out, data ínput/output between the CNC аnd
the floppy, oг file deletion.
Floppy 1
Fí1e 1 Fí1e 2 Fí1e 3 Fi1e k-1 Fí1e k
Floppy 2
Contínua- Fi1e k Fi1e n B1ank
tJoп nf fіІ 4
Since floppy replacement ís processed Ьy the inputJoutput device, no
specíal operation ís requíred. The CNC wíll ínterrupt data input/output
operatíon until the next floppy ís ínserted ínto the adaptor.
When reset operatíon ís applied to the CNC duńng a request for floppy
replacement, the CNC is not reset at once, but reset after the floppy has
beenreplaced.
537
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION в-s2aa4εıoз
PrOtect switch The floppy is províded wíth the write protect swítch. Set the switch to
the write enab1e state. Then, start output operation.
Wríte protect swítch of a cassette Wríte protect swítch of a card
Write protect switch
Ø
===:=:=:і
ı
1 Write-protected 2 Wríte-enabled Reading, 1 Wríte-protected 2 Wríte-enabled Readíng,
0n1y reading ís wrítíng, and deletion are pos- 0n1y readíng ís wrítíng, and deletíon are pos-
possíble. síble. possíble. sible.
F1g. Protect swltch
Wríting memo Once wrítten in the cassette oг card, data can subsequently Ьe read out by
correspondence between the data contents and file numbers. Thís
correspondence cannot be verifıed, unless the data contents and file
numbers are output to the CNC and dísplayed. The data contents can bc
dísplayed wíth display function for directory of floppy dísk See Section

To dísplay the conterıts,write the file numbers and the contents on the
memo column which ís the back of floppy.
Entry example on MEMO
File 1 NC parameters
File 2 Offset data
Fí1e 3 NC program 00100
Fi1e n-1 NC program 00500
File n NC program 00600
538
8-624ØE/03 OPERATION 8. DATA /1NPUT/OUTPUT
When the program ís ínput from the floppy, the fıle to be input fírst
must be searched. F1LE SEARCH
For thís purpose, proceed as follows:
Fí1e 1 Fí1e 2 Fí1e 3 Fi1e n B1ank
Ѓ
Fi1e searchíng of the file n
Procedure for Fí1e Heading
1 Press the EDIT or MEMORY switch on the machíne operator s
panel.
2 Press functíon key FRoo
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]
4 Press the rightmost soft keyρ next-menu key .
5 Enter address N.
6 Enter the number of the fıle to search for.
NO
The begínníng of the cassette or cаrd ís searched.
One of N 1 to N9999
Of the fíle Nos. 1 to 9999, a desígnated fıle ís searched.
N-9999
The file next to that accessed just before ís searched.
N-9998
When N-9998 ís desígnated, N-9999 is automatícally ínserted
each time a file is input or output. This condition ís reset by the
designatíon of N1,N1 to 9999, oг N-9999 0г reset.
7 Press soft keys [FSRH] and [EXEC]
The specífıed file ís searched for.
Explanatíon
Fí1e search by N-9999 The same result ís obtaíned both by sequentíally searchíng the files by
specífyíng Nos. N1 to N9999 and Ьy first searching one of N1 to N9999
and then using the N-9999 searchíng method. The searchíng time ís
shorter iii the latter case.
539
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION ï--6Ź444E/c3
A1arm
No. Descríption
The ready signal DR of an irput, output davice is off.
An alarm is not immedíateiy indicated in the CŃC even when
an alarm occurs duríng head searching when a fíle is not
86 , found; oг the líke .
An a1arm is given wh n the input/output operation is performed
after that. Thís alarm is also raised when N1 is specified for
writing data to an empty floppy. 1n this case, spacífy N0.
540
B-624ØE/03 OPERATION 8. DATA /1NPUT/OUTPUT

Files stored on a floppy can Ьe deleted fıle Ьy fíle as required. F1LE DELETION
Procedure for Fi1e Deletion
1 Insert the floppy ínto the input/output devíce so that it is ready for
wrítíng.
2 Press the EDIT swítch on the machíne operator s pаne1.
3 Press functíon key PROO
4 Press soft key [ OPRT ]
5 Press the ríghtmost soft keyρ next-menu key .
6 Enter address N.
7 Enter the number from 1 to 9999 of the file to delete.
8 Press soft key [DELETE], then press soft key [EXEC].
The file specífıed ín step 7 ís deleted.
Explanatíons
Fi1e number after the file When a fıle ís deleted, the file numbers after the deleted file are each
ís deleted decremented by one. Suppose that a fíle numbered k was deleted. In
thís case, files are renumbered as follows:
Before deletíon after deletíon
1A k>1 1A k>1
k Deleted
k An kA n>1
PrOtect switch Set the write protect swítch to the write enable state to delete
the files.
541
e-sг4Øεıoз OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
15 Turri the power to the NC back on.
16 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button oп the machíne operator s
paаe1.
,6,2 AII parameters are output in the defıned format from the memory of the
Outputt[ng Parameters CNC to a floppy or NC tape.
Procedure for Outputtíng Parameters
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for whích parameters to
be input are used wíth the tool post selectíon switch.
2 Specífy the punch code system ISO oг EIA using a parameter.
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machíne operator s pane1.
,,sTw 4 Press function key
5 Press chapter selectíon soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter
screen.
6 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
7 Press rightmost soft key 0 ne xt-menu key .
8 Press soft keys [PUNCH] and [EXEC].
AІІ parameters are output in the defıned format.
Explanations
Output format Output format is as follows:
N . P .. ;
N . A1P ... A2P ... AnP ... ;
N . P .. ;
N:Parameter No.
A:Axis is the number of control axis
P:Parameter settíng value .
Output fíle name When the floppy disk directory display functíon is used, the name of the
output file is PARAMETER.
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION в-s2a4aεıo3
Pítch error compensatíon data are loaded ínto the memory of the CNC
from a floppy or NC tape. The input format ís the same as the output lnputtíng Pítch Error
format. See Sectíon When a pitch error compensation data ís loaded
Compensation Data
which has the corresponding data number as a pítch error compensatíon
data already regístered in the memory, the loaded data replaces the
existíng data.
Procedure for Pítch Error Compensatíon Data
1 Make sure the ínput device is ready for reading.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for which pitch error
compensation data to be input ís used wíth the tool post selection
swítch.
2 When usíng a floppy, search for the required file according to the
procedure in Sectíon
3 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machíne operator s
pane1.
= 4 Press functíon key eεmю
5 Press the soft key [SETING] for chapter selection.
6 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for PARAMETER WRITE
PWE in settíng data. P/S a1arm No. 100 índícatíng that
parameters can Ьe wńtten appeaгs.
7 Press soft key .r. ευ
8 Press the ńghtmost soft key L J next-menu key and press
chapter selection soft key [P1TCH].
9 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
10 Press the ńghtmost soft keyQ next-menu key .
11 Press soft keys [READ] and [EXEC].
Pitch error compensatíon data are read into memory. Upon
completion of йput, the ØUT йdícator at the lower-right corner
of the screen dísappears.
СЖF Т 12 Press function key eεma
13 Press soft key [SETING] for chapter selectíon.
14 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for PARAMETER WRITE
PWE in settíng data.
15 Turn the power to the NC back on.
16 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator s
pаne1.
550
в-s24ØεІoз OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
Explanations
Pítch error Parameters 3620 to 3624 and pitch error compensatíon data must be set
compensatíon correctly to apply pítch error compensation correctly
See subsec.
AlI pítch error compensation data are output in the defmed format from
the memory of the CNC to a floppy oг NC tape. Outputtíng Pitch Error
Compensatíon Data
Procedure for Outputtíng Pítch Error Compensatíon Data
1 Make sure the output device ís ready for output.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for whích pítch error
compensation data to be output ís used wíth the tool post selectíon
swítch.
2 Specífy the punch code system ISO oг EIA usíng a paгameteг.
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machíne operator s paпe1.
Θ.Θ,ЕМ 4 Press functíon key
5 Press the rightmost soft key next-menu key and press chapter
selection soft key [P1TCH].
6 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
7 Press ńghtmost soft key next-menu key .
8 Press soft keys [PUNCH] and [EXEC].
AU pítch error compensation data are output ín the defined format.
Explanations
Output format Output format ís as follows:
N 10000 P ;
N 11023 P ;
N:Pitch error compensatíon poínt No.
P:Pitch error compensatíon data
Output fíle name When the floppy disk directory dísplay functíon ís used, the пame of the
output file ís PITCH ERROR .
551
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION в-sг444ε/oз

1NPUTTING/OUTPUTT-
1NG CUSTOM MACRO
COMMON VARIABLES
The value of a custom macro common vaňable 500 to Ø99 is loaded
lnputting Custom into the memory of the CNC from a floppy oг NC tape. The same format
used to output custom macro common vańables is used for ínput. See
Macro Common
Subsec. For a custom macro common vańable to be valid, the input
Variables
data must be executed by pressing the cycle start button after data ís input.
When the value of a common variable ís loaded ínto memory, thís value
replaces the value of the same common variable already existíng if any
in memorу.
Procedure for lnputting Custom Macro Common Variables
1 Register the program which has been output, as descńbed іп Sectíon
, in memory accordíng to the program ínput procedure
described in Section 1П
2 Press the MEMORY switch on the machíne operator s pаne1 upon
completíng ínput.
3 Press the cycle start button to execute the loaded program.
4 Dísplay the macro vańable screen to check whether the values of the
common variables have been set correctly.
Displav of the macro variable screen
OFF ET Press functíon key
Press the ńghtmost soft key next-menu key .
Press soft key [MACRO].
Select a vańable with the page keys or numeric keys and
soft key [].
Explanatíons
Common varíables The commoп vańables 500 to 531 can be input and output.
When the option for addíng a common vańable ís specifıed, values from
500 to Ø99 can be input and output.
100 to 199 can be ínput and output when bít 3 PU5 of parameter No.
6001 ís set to 1.
552
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
C ıstom macro common variables 500 to Ø99 stored in the memory
of the CNC can Ьe output in the defined format to a floppy oг NC tape. Outputting Custom
Macro Common
Varíable
Procedure for Outputtíng Custom Macro Common Varíable
1 Make sure the output devíce ís ready for output.
2 Specífy the punch code system ISO oг EIA usíng a parameter.
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machíne operator s pаne1.
оЕТ 4 Press functíon key
5 Press the rightmost soft key O next-menu key , then press soft
key [MACRO].
6 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
7 Press the ríghtmost soft key[] n ext-menu key .
8 Press soft keys [PUNCH] аnd [EXEC].
Common varíables are output in the defíned format.
Explanations
Output format The output format ís as follows:

500=[25283 65536]/134217728 1
501= 0; 2
502=0; 3
503=;
.;
531=;
M02;

1 The precision of a variable is maintaíned by outputtíng the value of
the variable as <expressíoıv.
2 Undefíned varíable
3 When the value of a vańable is 0
Output fíle name When the floppy disk directory dísplay functíon ís used, the name of the
output file ís MACRO VAR .
Common variable The common vańables 500 to 531 cаn be ínput and output.
When the optíon for addíng a common variable is specified, values from
500 to Ø99 can be ínput and output.
100 to 199 can be ínput and output when bít 3 PU5 of parameter No.
6001 ís set to 1.
553
8. ATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-бf444E`03
On the floppy directory display screen, a dírectory of the FANUC Handy
File, FANUC Floppy Cassette, oг FANUC FA Card fıles caп Ьe dísplayed.
C11Ѕ4 LAY6NG
In addítion, those fıles can be loaded, output, and deleted.
fl1RFGT RY OF
FLOF FY DI ;fC
DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00001 N00000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
EDIT 11:51:12
f PRGRM 1 f 1 і 1 f 1 OPRT 1
/
554
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
г
Dispiaying the Dírectory
Dísplayíng the Dírectory of Floppy Dísk Fí1es
Prcacedure 1 Use the followíng procedure to dísplay a dírectory of aH the
files stored ín a floppy:
1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator s panel.
2 Press function key
3 Press the ńghtmost soft key Q next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [FROPPY].
5 РгеѕѕраgеkеуГfІ oг
LЈ i
6 The screen below appears.
fL
DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00001 N00000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
0001 PARAMETER
0002 00001
0003 00002
0004 00010
0005 00040
0006 00050
0007 00100
0008 01000
0009 09500
EDIT _ ___ _ 11:53:04
F SRH , READ C
PUNCH J DELETE ,

J
a
7 Press a page key agaín to display another page of the directory.
555
. DATA 1fvPUTIOUTPUT OPERATION 8-62444É/03
Prooedure 2 Use the following procedure to dísplay a directory of files
startíng with a specífied Cile number :
1 Press the EDIT switch on the machíne operator s pane1.
2 Press function key PROQ
3 Press the rightmost soft keyQ next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press soft key [F SRH].
7 Enter a file number.
8 Press soft keys [F SET] and [EXEC].
9 Press a page key to display another page of the directory.
10 Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key display shown in the
screen of Fíg.
DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00001 N00000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
SEARCH
F1LE NO. =
>
ED1T 11 :54:19
CFsET,C ,C ,C CAN , EXEC,
\
a
556
OPERATION 8. DATA iNPUT/OUTPUT Ø-62444E/03
Exp1aClations
Sсreen fiíelds and their NO :Displays the file number
meaníngs NØ :Dísplays the file name.
METER :Converts and prínts out the fıle capacity to
papeг tape length. You can also produce H
FEET I by settíng the INPUT UNIT to INCH
of the setting data.
VOL. :VVhen the file ís multí-volume, that state is
dísplayed.
Ex. Floppy or card A
Floppy or card B
Floppy or card C
C01
CO2
j
L03

C number meana CONTINUE
L number means LAST
number number of floppíes or cards
557
8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION в-8гaaaεıoз
The contents of the specífıed file number are read to the memory of NC.
Readíng Fì1es
Procedure for Readíng Fí1es
1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator s pane1.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for which a fıle ís to be
input in memory with the tool post selectíon switch.
2 Press functíon key гп э
3 Press the ríghtmost soft keyQ next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press soft key [READ].
ĺ
DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00001 N00000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
READ
F1LE NO. = PROGRAM NO. =
>
ED1T κ в 11 : 55 : 04
, C EXEC ,
CF SET , C O SET, STOP , C CAN
7 Enter a fíle number.
8 Press soft key [F sET].
9 To modífy the program number, enter the program number, then press
soft key [O SET].
10 Press soft key [EXEC]. The fi1e number índicated in the lower-left
corner of the screen ís automatically incremented by one.
11 Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key dísplay shown in
the screen of Fíg.
558
B-624ØE/o3 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NPUT/OUTPUT
8,8_3 Any program in the memory of the CNC unit can be output to a floppy
Outputtíng Programs as a file.
Procedure for Outputtíng Programs
1 Press the EDIT swítch on the machine operator s pane1.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for whích a program ís to
be output from floppy wíth the tool post selection swítch.
2 Press function key PROG
3 Press the rightmost soft keyρ next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press soft key [PUNCH].
ґ

DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00002 N01000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
PUNCH
F1LE NO. _ PROQRAM NO. =
>_
ED1T . . . 11 : 55 : 26
F SET C O SET, C STOP , C CAN , C EXEC ,
Ј
7 Enter a program number. To write aІ1 programs ínto a síngle fı1e, enter
-9999 in the program number fíeld. In thís case, the fıle name
ALL.PROGRAM ís registered.
8 Press soft key [O SET].
9 Press soft key [EXEC]. The program or programs specífied in step 7
are written after the last file on the floppy. To output the program after
deleting files startíng with an exístíng fıle number, key in the fíle
number, then press soft key [F sET] followed by soft key [EXEC].
10 Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key dísplay shown in
the screen of Fí
8. GATA iNPU ί OίJTPUT ύРEг,ATiCN B-β2 лøE О3
The file wíth the specifıed file number ís deleted.
UeIetíng FHes
Procedure for Deleting Fi1es
1 Press the EDIT switch on the machíne operator s pane1.
2 Press function key PRoo
3 Press the rightmost soft key [ next-menu key .
4 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
6 Press soft key [DELETE].

1
DIRECTORY FLOPPY 00001 N00000
NO. F1LE NAME METER VOL
DELETE
F1LE NO. = NAME=
>_
ED1T 11 :55:51
CAN l ı EXEC
CF SET , F NAME J f I
_/
7 Specify the fıle to be deleted.
When specífyíng the fíle with a fıle number, type the number and
press soft key [F SET].When specifying the fıle wíth a fıle name, type
the name and press soft key [F NAME].
8 Press soft key [EXEC].
The file specifıed in the fíle number field is deleted. When a fíle is
deleted, the file numbers after the deleted fíle aгe each decremented
by one.
9 Press soft key [CAN] to return to the soft key display shown in
the screen of Fíg.
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 8. DATA 1NFUT/OUTPUT
LímítDtions
lnputtíng fíle numbers 1f F SÉT] aг [O SET] ís pressed wíthout key inputting f ile number and
and program numbers program number, file number or program number shows blank. When
wíth keys 0 ís entered for fıle numbers or program numbers, 1 ís dísplayed.
1/0 deVEces To use channel0 ,set a devíce number in parameter 102.
Set the I/O devíce number to parameter No. 0112 when channel 1 is used.
Set ít to No. 0122 when channel2 ís used.
sígnífícant For the numeral ínput in the data ínput area wíth FILE NO. and
dígits PROGRAM NO., on1y lower 4 digíts become valid.
Collatíon When the data protection key on the machine operator s pane1
ís ON, no programs aгe read from the floppy. They are veńfied agaínst
the contents of the memory of the CNC ínstead.
ALARM
No. Contents
71 An ínvalíd fíle number or program number was entered.
Specifíed program number is not found.
79 Verífícatíon operation found a mismatch between a program
loaded ínto memory and the contents of the floppy
The datas et-ready sígnal DR for the ínput/output device is
86 turned off. The no fíle error or duplicate fíle error occurred on
the input/output device because an invalid file number, pro-
gram number, or fíle name was entered.
561
9. EОıı-ııvG PА ХRЈ\мs OPERATION i3 ьг444Eι0з
ЕD1Т NС РRОGRАMЅ
G en e а І This chapter describes how to edít programs registered in the CNC.
Editing íncludes the insertíon, modífícatíon, deletíon, and replacement of
words. Edíting also includes deletíon of the entíre program and automatíc
insertion of sequence numbers. The extended part program edítíng
function can copy, move, and merge programs. Thís chapter also
descríbes program number search, sequence number search, word search,
and address search, whích are performed before editíng the program.
Regístratíon
-.

Edítíng
1 Pюgгam number search: See Section
Search for part 2 Sequence number search: See Sectíon
of program to be 3 Word search: See Section
edited 4 Address search: See Section
1 lnserting, aItering, and deletíng a word: See Subsections to
lnsertíng, alteríng, 2 Replacíng words and addresses: See SuØectíon
and deleting pro- 3 Deleting blocks: See Sectíon
grams 4 Copyíng, movíng, and mergíng programs: See Subsectíons and
5 Deletíng programs: See section
Output

562
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Thís sectíon outlines the procedure for ínserting, modífyíng, and deletíng
a word in a program regístered in memory.
1NSERTING ,ALTERING
AND DELETING
A WORD
Procedure for insertíng, altering and deletíng a word
1 Select ED1T mode.
2 PressP
3 Select a program to be edíted.
If a program to be edited is selected, perform the operatíon 4.
If a program to be edited ís not selected, search for the program
number.
4 Search for a word to be modified.
Scan method
Word search method
5 Perform аn operatíon such as alteríng, ínsertíng, or deletíng a word.
Explanation
Concept of word and A word is an address followed by a number. With a custom macro, the
edítíng unít concept of word is ambíguous.
So the editing unit is considered here.
The edítíng unít ís a unít subject to alteration or deletion ín one operation.
In oлe scan operatíon, the cursor índícates the start of an edítíng unit.
An insertíon ís made after an edíting unit.
Defırцtíon of edítíng unít
i Program portion from an address to immediately before the next
address
ií Aл address is an alphabet, IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO=,or ; EOB .
According to this defínítíon, a word is an edíting unít.
The word word, when used in the descriptíon of edítíng, means аn
edítíng unit according to the precíse definition.
Notes
The user cannot continue program execution after altering,
inserting, or deleting data of the program by suspendíng
machining in progress by means of an operation such as a
síngle block stop or feed hold operatíon during program
executíon. 1f such a modifícation is made, the program may
not be executed exactly according to the contents of the
program dispIayed on the screen after machining is
resumed. So, when the contents of inemory are to be
modifíed by part program edíting, be sure to enter the reset
state or reset the system upon completíon of editing before
executíng the program.
563
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION в-62Ø4εıoз
A word can be searched for by merely movíng the cursor through the text
scanning , by word search, oг by address search. Word Search
Procedure for scanning a program
1 Press the cursor key O
The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursor is
dísplayed at a selected word.
2 Press the cursor key
The cursor moves backward word by word on the screen; the cursor is
displayed at a selected word.
Example When ís scanned
.\
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
N01234
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

3 Holdíng down the cursor key u oг u scans words
continuously.
4 The fırst word of the next block ís searched for when the cursor key
і ís pressed.
5 The fxrst word of the previous block is searched for when the cursor
key l t is pressed.
6 Holdíng down the cursor key O or O moves the cursor to the
head of a block contínuously.
7 Pressing the page key dísplays the next page and searches for
the first word of the page.
8 Pressíng the page key O displays the prevíous page and searches
PAOE
for the fцst word of the page.
9 Holdíng down the page key or f dísplays one page after
another.
564
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Procedure for searchíng a word
Eaκample of Searchíng for S12
.
PROGRAM 00050 N01234 N01234 ís beíng
00050 ; searched for/
; scanned currently.
572; S12 ís searched
N56789 M03 ; for.
M02 ;

1 Key in address S
2 Key ín 1O O
S 12 cannot be searched for íf on1y S 1 ís keyed in.
S09 cannot be searched for by keyíng in on1y S9.
To search for 509, be sure to key ín 509.
3 Pressíng the [SRHЅі.] key starts search operatíon.
Upon completion of search operatíon, the cursor ís dísplayed at S 12.
Pressíng the [SRHT] key rather than the [SRH.і.] key performs search
operatíon ín the reverse direction.
Procedure for searchíng an address
Eхаmple of Searchíng for M03
PROGRAM 00050 N01234
N01234 ís beíng 00050 ;
searched for/
; scanned currently.
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ; M03 is searched
M02 ; for.

1 Key іn address M
2 Press the [SRHЅL] key.
Upon completion of search operation, the cursor ís displayed at M03.
Pressíng the [sRHT] key rather than the [] key performs search
operation ín the reverse direction.
A1arm
A1aгm number Descrlptlon
71 The word or address beíng searched for was not found.
565
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B_62aaaεІoз
The cursor can be jumped to the top of a program. Thís functíon ís called
headíng the program poínter. This sectíon describes the three methods Headíng a Program
for headíng the program pointer.
Procedure for Headíng a Program
Method 1
1 Press ІREB І when the program screen is selected ín EDIT mode.
When the cursor has returned to the start of the program, the contents
of the program are dísplayed from íts start on the screen.
MethOd 2 Search for the program number.
1 Press address 0 l,when a program screen ís selected in the
MEMORY or ED1T mode.
2 Input a program number.
3 Press the soft key [O SRH].
Method 3 1 Select MEMORY oг ED1T mode.
2 Press P
3 Press the [ OPRT ] key.
4 Press the [REWIND] key.
566
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS

lnsertíng a Word
Procedure for ínsertíng a word
1 Search for or scan the word ímmedíately before a word to be inserted.
2 Key in an address to be ínserted.
3 Key ín data.
4 Press the N9ERT key.
Example of lnsertíng T15
Procedure 1 Search for or scan Z1250.
ı
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ; is
N01234 searched for/
S12 ; scanned.
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

σ
2 Key іn T 1
3 Press th IN e SEFT key.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
N01234 T15 ; T15 ís ínserted.
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

567
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-в2444ε/oз

Alteríng a Word
Procedure for alteríng a word
1 Search for or scan a word to be altered.
2 Key in an address to be inserted.
3 Key in data.
4 Press the ALTER key.
Example of changíng T15 to M15
Procedure 1 Search for oг scan T15.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ; T15 ís searched
N01234 ; for/scanned.
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

0

2 Key іn O 1
3 Press the ιτε key.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
N1234 M15 ; T15 ís changed to
S12 ; M15.
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;

568
e-sг4Øε/aз OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS

Deieting a Word
, Procedure for deleting a word
1 Search for or scan a word to be deleted.
2 Press the key.
Example of deleting
Procedure 1 Search for or scan
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ; ís
N01234 ІІ, і M15 ; в searched for/
S12 ; scanned.
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

2 Press the key.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
N01234 M15 ; is deleted.
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

569
9. Ëú T1NG PROGRAMS OPERATION 5-62Ø4È З
A block or blocks can be deleted in a program.
DELETING
BLОCKS
The pгoceduгe below deletes a block up to íts EOB code; the cursor
advances to the address of the next word.
Deletíng a B1ock
Procedure for deletíng a block
1 Search for or scan address N for a block to be deleted.
2 Key ín εoв ,
3 Press the 1 тЁ1.
Example of deletíng a block of
Procedure 1 Search for or scan N01234.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
; N01234 i8
S12 ; searched for/
N56789 M03 ; scanned.
M02 ;

2 Key ín εoв
3 Press the DЄІЉ k , e E y.
Program 00050 N01234
B1ock containing
00050 ; N01234 has
S12 ; been deleted.
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

570
3-62444E/03 OPERAT1oN 9. EDITING PR GRAMS
The blocks from the cιırrently dísplayed word to the block with a specífíed
sequence riumber can Ьe deleted. Deieting Muitíple
Biocks
Rrocedure for deietíng multíple biocks
1 Search for or scarı a word in the fírst block of a portion to be deleted.
2 Key in address N
3 Key in the sequence number for the last block of the portion to be
deleted.
4 Press the key.
Exaмpie of deieting blocks from a block containíng N01234 to a biock containíng N56789
Pr ocedure 1 Search for or scan N01234. ,
ogram 00050 N01234
IPr 00050 ;
; N01234 is
S12 ; searched for/
scanned. N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;

-7 2. Kev in N 5 6 8 9

Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
:А15 ,
S12 ; Underiined
part is d -
N56789 M03 ; leted.
M02 ;

3 Press the OEIE E key.
Program 00050 N01234
00050 ;
Blocks from block
M02 ; i containing
N01234 to block
contai n ng
N56789 have
Ьeeп deleted.
`a. EDIT1iJG РRQGRAMS OPERATION в-c244дε/О3
When memory holds multiple programs, a program caл be searched for.
There are three methods as follows.
PROGRAN[
NUMBER sÉARCFi
Procedure šor program number search
Method 1 1 Select E T оr MIÉMORY rnode.
2 Press PRØ to dísplay the program screen.
3 Key in address о
4 Key in a program number to be searched for.
5 Press the [O šFЗH] key.
6 Upon completion of search operation, the program number searched
for ís dísplayed in the upper-ríght corner of the CRT screen
If the program ís not found , P/S alarm No. 71 occurs.
Method 2 1 Select E[31T or MEMORY mode.
2 PressP to dísplay the program screen.
3 Press the [O SRH] key.
In thís case, the next pгogгam in the directory ís searched for..
Method 3 Thís method searches for the program number 0001 to 0015
correspondíng to a sígnal on the machine tool side to start automaάc
operation. Refer to the relevant maвual prepared by the machine tool
builder for detailed information on operation.
1 Select MEMORY mode.
2 Set the reset state 1
The reset state ís the state where the LED for índícatíng that
automatíc operatíon is in progress is off. Refer to the relevant
mаnual of the machine tool builder.
3 Set the program number selecάon sígnal on the machíne tool side to a
number from 01 to 15.
If the program correspondíng to a signal on the machíne tool
side ís not regístered, P/S alaгm No. 59 ís raised.
4 Press the cycle start button.
When the signal on the machine tool side represents 00,
program number search opeгaάoп ís not performed.
A1aгm A1arm No. Contents
59 The program wìth the selected number cannot be searched
duríng extвrnai р зgram number search.
7 i The specífíed program number was not found during
program number search.
572
ь
OPERATION 9. E 1TihJG PRОGRAMS 8-62444E/03
Sequence number search operatíon ís usually used to search for a
sequence number in the middle of a program so that executíon can be
SEGtIlENCE
started oг restarted at the block of the sequence number.
NUMBER SEARCH
Example Sequence number 02346 ín a program 00002 ís
searched for.
Program
00001 ;
N01234 ;
S12 ;
Selected program 00002; Thís sectíon is
N02345 ; searched startíng at
Target sequence -- N02346 ; the begínníng.
number is found. Search operation ís
00003 ; performed only withín a
program.
Procedure for sequence number search
1 Select MEMORY mode.

2 Press PROq
3 If the program contaíns a sequence number to be searched for,
perform the operatíons 4 to 7 below.
If the program does not contaín a sequence number to be
searched for,select the program number of the program that
contains the sequence number to be searched for.
4 Key in address N
5 Key in a sequence number to be searched for.
6 Press the [N SRH] key.
7 Upon completion of search operation, the sequence number searched
for is displayeci in the upper-right coмeг of the CRT screen.
If the specífıed sequence nuØber ís not found in the program currently
selected, P/S alarm No. 60 occurs.
573
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION e-62aaaεıoз
Explanations
Operatíon duríng Search Those blocks that are skípped do not affect the CNC. Thís means that the
data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates and M, S, and T codes does
not alter the CNC coordinates and modal values.
So, ín the first block where execution ís to be started oг restarted by usíng
a sequence number search command, Ьe sure to enter requíred M, S, and
T codes and coordínates. A block searched for by sequence number
search usually represents a poínt of shíftíng from one process to another.
When a block in the míddle of a process must be searched for to restart
executíon at the block, specífy M, S, and T codes, G codes, coordínates,
аnd so forth as requíred from the MDI after closely checkíng the machíne
tool and CNC states at that poínt.
Checking duríng search During search operation, the followíng checks are made:
Optíonal block skip
P/S a1aгm No. 003 to 010
Restríctíons
searching ín Duríng sequence number search operation, M98Pxxxx subprogram ca11
sub-program ís not executed. So аn P/S a1aгm ís raísed íf an attempt ís made
to search for a sequence number in a subprogram called by the program
currently selected.
Maín program subprogram
01234 Љ 05678
N88888
M98 P5678
. \ M99 ;
1f an attempt is made to search for N8888 ín the example aØve, an a1aгm ís raísed.
A1arm
A1amı No. Contents
60 Command sequence number was not found in the se-
quence number search.
574
в-s24Øεıo3 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Programs regístered in memory can be deleted,eíther one program by one
program or all at once. A1so, More than one program can be deleted by
DELETING
specifying a range.
PROGRAMS
A program registered in memorу can be deleted.
Deletíng One Program
Procedure for deletíng one program
1 Select the ED1T mode.
2 Press FROCá to display the program screen.

3 Key in address
4 Key in a desired program number.
5 Press the І ЕЁтЕ key.
The program wíth the entered program number is deleted.
AlI programs regístered in memorу can be deleted.
Deletíng A11 Programs
Procedure for deletíng a11 programs
1 Select the ED1T mode.
2 Press P Ø to display the program screen.
3 Key in address O.
4 Key іn -9999.
5 Press edít key to delete all programs.
575
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION e-s2aaaεıoз
Programs withín a specífıed range in memory are deleted.
Deletíng More Than One
Program by Specífying a
Range
Procedure for deletíng more than one program by specifyíng a range
1 Select the ED1T mode.
2 PressP to display the program screen.
3 Enter the range of program numbers to be deleted wíth address and
numeric keys in the followíng format:
OXXxX,OYYYY
where XXXX ís the startíng number of the programs to be deleted and
YYYY is the endíng number of the programs to be deleted.
.
4 Press edit key to delete programs No. XXXX to No. YYYY.
576
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Wıth the extended part program edítíng functíon, the operations descńbed
below can Ьe performed usíng soft keys for programs that have been
EXTENDED PART
regístered in memory.
PROGRAM EDITING Following editíng operations are available :
FUNCTION AН or part of a program can be copied or moved to another program.
One program can be merged at free posítíon ínto other programs.
A specified word or address in a program can be replaced wíth another
word or address.
577
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-624444E/03
A new program can be created by copyíng a program.
Copyíng an Entíre
Program
Fíg. Copyíng an Entire Program
In Fíg. , the program wíth program number xxxx ís copied to a newly
created program wíth program number yyyy. The program created by
copy operation ís the same as the original program except the program
number.
Procedure of copyíng an entire program
1 Enter the ED1T mode.
2 Press functíon key P
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. C C Lc C C
aσσσσσe-
Contínuous 4 Press the contínuous menu key.
ι menu key
C C C C EСп 5 Press soft key [EX EDT].
aσσ 0 σ
6 Check that the screen for the program to be copied ís selected cСОРГ C C c C
and press soft key [COPY].
a σ σ σ σσ
7 Press soft key [ALL].
э l l C CALL J ll
aσσσσσ
8 Enter the number of the new program wíth oті1y numeríc keys and
Numeňc keys Oo to 0
press theј NPUTj key.
[ c C CєEс
9 Press soft key [EXEC]. aσσσσσ
578
8-62444E/o3 OPERATION 9. EDlT1NG PROGRAMS
A new program can be created by copying part of a program.
Copyíng Part
of a Program
Fig. Copyíng Part of a Program
In Fig. , part B of the program with program number xxxx is copied
to a newly created program wíth program number yyyy. The program for
whích an edíting range is specífied remaíns unchanged after copy
operation.
Procedure for copyíng part of a program
1 Perform steps 1 to 6 in subsectíon
2 Move the cursor to the start of the range to be copied and press soft key
C Ø
[CRSR ].
aσσσσσ
[ сAsтM
3 Move the cursor to the erid of the range to be copied and press soft key
..-CRSR] or [..-BТТM] in the latter case, the range to the end of the
program ís copied regardless of the position of the cursor . aσσσσσ
4 Enter the number of the new program with on1y numeric keys and
Numeńc keys 0o to
press the j ıиPuтј key.
5 Press soft key [EXEC].
C C ExEс ιC
aσσσσσ
579
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION 8-62444EJ03
A new program can be created by movíng part of a program.
Moving Part of a
Program
Fig. Movíng Part of a Program
In Fig. , part B of the program wíth program number xxxx ís moved
to a newly created program wíth program number yyyy; part B ís deleted
from the program with program number xxxx.
Procedure for movíng part of a program
1 Perform steps 1 to 5 in subsection
2 Check that the screen for the program to be moved is selected and
[ Mо
press soft key [MOVE].
aσσσσσ
3 Move the cursor to the start of the range to be moved and press soft
CačSR\ CC C C key [CRSR-..].
a σ σ σ σ σ
4 Move the cursor to the end of the range to be moved and press soft key
[] or [ BTTM] ín the latter case, the range to the end of the
C SR C J
ιC program ís copied regardless of the positíon of the cursor .
aσσσσσ
5 Enter the number of the new program with on1y numeńc keys and
press the key.
Numeńc keys 0 to СЈ
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
LC C C СØ Ј
aσσσσσ
580
8-62444E/03 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
Another prograın can Ьe inserted at an arbítrary positíon in the current
program. MCrgíng a Program
Fig. Mergíng a program at a specifíed locatíon
In Fig. , the program with program number XXXX is merged wíth the
program wíth program number YYYY. The OYYYY program remains
unchanged after merge operation.
Procedure for mergíng a program
1 Perform steps 1 to 5 in subsectíon Π
ι
2 Check that the screen for the program to be edited is selected and press
C о
soft key [MERGE].
a σ σ σ σ σ
3 Move the cursor to the posítíon at whích another program ís to be
ínserted and press soft key [ CRSR] oг [ BTTM ] ín the latter case,
the end of the current program ís dísplayed .
C CA OL4R CABTIM
L C
aσσσσσ 4 Enter the number of the program to be ínserted with on1y numeric
keys and press the 1NPUT key.
5 Press soft key [EXEC].
Numeńc keys 0o to Ei The program with the number specífíed in step 4 ís ínserted before the
cursor posítíoned ín step З.
L Ø J
aσσσσσ
581
9. ED1TfNG PRUGRAMS OPERATION B-62444E/03

Supp[ementary
Explanation for
Copyíng,Moving
and Mergíng
Explanations
setting an edítíng range The setting of an edítíng range start point wíth [CRSR ] can be changed
freely until an edíting range end point ís set wíth [ CRSR] oг [-BTTM].
If an edíting range start point ís set after aп edítíng range end point, the
editing range must be reset startíng wíth a start point.
The settíng of an edítíng range start poínt and end point remaíns va1id untíl
an operatíon ís performed to ínvalídate the setting.
One of the followíng operatíons ínvalídates a settíng:
Ari edit operation other than address search, word
search/scan, and search for the start of a program ís performed
after a start point or end poínt ís set.
Processíng ís returned to operatíon selectíon after a start poínt
oг end point is set.
Without specífyíng a In copyíng program and movíng program, íf [EXEC] ís pressed wíthout
program number specífyíng a program number after an edítíng range end poínt ís set, a
program wíth program number 00000 ís regístered as a work program.
This 00000 program has the followíng features:
The program can be edíted in the same way as a general
program. Do not run the program.
If a copy oг move operatíon is newly performed, the prevíous
ínformatíon ís deleted at executíon tíme, and newly set information
aH oг part of the program ís re-regístered. In merge operation, the
previous ínformation ís not deleted. However, the program, when
selected for foreground operatíon, cannot be re-registered in the
background. A BP/S 140 a1aгm ís raísed. When the program is
re-registered, a free area is produced. Delete such a free аrea wíth the
REвET key.
When the program becomes unnecessary, delete the program by a
пoгma1 editíng operation.
Edítíng when the system When the system ís waiting for a program number to be entered,
waítíng for a program no edit operatíon can be performed.
number to be entered
Restríctïons
Number of dígíts for If a program number is specífíed by 5 or more dígits, a format error is
program number generated.
582
8-62444E/o3 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
A[arm
Alarm No. Contents
70 Memoгу became ínsuffícient whíle copying or inserting a pro-
gram. Copy or insertion is terminated.
101 The power was interrupted during copying, movíng, or inserting
a prograrn and memory used for editíng must be cleared.
When tłцa larm occurs, press the key p, whíle pressing func-
tion ke PØ
On1y the prograni being edited ís deleted.
Replace one or more specified words.
Replacement can be applied to all occurrences or just one occurrence of Rep[acement of
specified words or addresses in the program.
Words and Addresses
Procedure for change of words or addresses
1 Perform steps 1 to 5 in subsectíon
L 2 Press soft key [CHANGE]. о ıЈ
a σ σ
3 Enter the word or address to be replaced.
4 Press soft key [BEFORE].

aσσσσσ
5 Enter the new word or address.
ιC Ø
6 Press soft key [AFTER].
aσσσσσ
7 Press soft key [EXEC] to replace a11 the specífıed words or addresses
after the cursor.
Press soft key [1-EXEC] to search for and гeplace the first осcurrence C C Øс J L ѕкφ
of the specífied word or address after the cursor. aσσσσσ
Press soft key [SK1P] to on1y search for the first occurrence of the
specifíed word or address after the cursor.
583
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION 8-62444E/03
EXAMPLES

Replace X100 wíth Z200
[CHANGE]OX 1O 0 0 [BEFORE] 2 0 0
[AFTER] [EXEC]
0
Replace X100Z200 wíth
[CHANGE] X 1 0 2 0 0 [BEFORE]
X30 O
X 0 [AFTER] [EXEC]
a
Replace 1F wíth WH1LE
[CHANGE] 1
Π
[BEFORE]O H 1 [AFTE
OE
R] [EXEC]
0
O
Replace X wíth ,C10
[CHANGE] X [BEFOR] 1 [AFTER] [EXEC]
Explanation
Replacíng custom The followíng custom macro words are replaceable:
macros IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, BPRNT, DPRINT, POPEN, PCLOS
The abbreviations of custom macro words can Ьe specífıed.
When abbreviations are used, however, the screen displays the
abbrevíations as they are key ínput, even after soft key [BEFORE] and
[AFTER] are pressed.
Restrictions
The number of Up to 15 characters caп Ьe specífıed for words before or after replacement.
characters for Sixteen oг moгe characters cannot be specifíed.
replacement
The characters for Words before or after replacement must start wíth a character representíng
replacement an format error occurs.
584
OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS β-62444E/03
Unlike ordinary programs, custom macro programs are modified,
ínserted, oг deleted based on edítíng uníts.
E 1TlNG OF
Custom macro words can be entered in abbrevíated form.
cUSTOM MACROS Comments can be entered in a program.
Refer to the section for the comments of a program.
Explanations
Edítíng unít When edíting a custom macro already entered, the user can move the
cursor to each editíng unit that starts wíth any of the followíng characters
аnd symbols:
a Address
b located at the start of the left síde of a substítutíon statement
c /, í,=, and ;
d Fírst character of IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, POPEN, BPRNT,
DPRNT аnd PCLOS
Oп the CRT screen, a blank is placed before each of the above
characters and symbols.
Example Head posítíons where the cursor ís placed
N001 X- 100i
1 123
λ100212 X[12/ 3]ś
N003 X-SQRT[ 3/3 [ 4]]i
004 2 1 1
0055 1 10 10i
IF[ 1NE0]QOTO 10
WHILE[ 2LE5] DO1
[200+ 2]_ 2 10i
2_ 2
ÉND 1i
Abbrevíatíons of custom When a custom macro word ís altered or inserted, the fírst two characters
macro word oг moгe cаn гeplace the entire word.
Namely,
WHILE->WH GOTO - GO XOR -э XO AND -> AN
SIN -> SI COS -> CO TAN -> TA ATAN -> AT
ŚQRT -э SQ ABS -> AB BCD - BC BIN -> BI
FIX -> FI FUP -> FU ROUND -i RO END -> EN
POPEN -> PO BPRNT - BP DPRNT -i DP PCLOS->PC
Example Keying in
WH [AB [ 2 ] LE RO [ 3 ] ]
has the same effect as
WHILE [ABS [ 2 ] LE ROUND [ 3 ] ]
The program ís also dísplayed in thís way.
585
9. EDi Т iNG PROGRAMS OPERATION в-s2444εıo3
Edítíng a progranı while executíng another program ís called background
edítíng. The method of edítíng is the same as for ordinary editing
BACKGR UND
foreground editing .
ED1T1NG A program edited ín the background should be regístered in foreground
program memory Ьy performing the following operatíon:
Duńng background edítíng, a11 programs cannot be deleted at once.
λ
Procedure for background editing

1 Enter ED1T or MEMORY mode.
Memoгу mode ís allowed even while the program ís beíng executed.
2 Press functíon key PRØ
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ], then press soft key [BG-EDT].
The background edítíng screen is dísplayed PROGRAM
BG-EDIT is displayed at the top left of the screen .
4 Edit a program on the background edíting screen ín the same way as
for ordínary program edítíng.
5 After editíng is completed, press soft key [ OPRT ], then press soft
key [BG-EDT]. The edíted program ís regístered in foreground
program memory.
Explanatíon
Alarms duríng Alarms that may occur during background editíng do not affect
background edítíng foreground operatíon. Conversely, alarms that may occur duríng
foreground operation do not affect background editing. In background
edíting, if an attempt ís made to edít a program selected for foreground
operatíon, a BP/S alarm No. 140 ís raised. On the other hand, íf an
attempt is made to select a program subjected to background edítíng
duńng foreground operatíon by means of subprogram callíng or program
number search operation usíng an external signal , a P/S a1arm Nos. 059,
078 ís raísed in foreground operatíon. As wíth foreground program
edítíng, P/S alarms осcuг ín background edítíng. However, to distínguísh
these alarms from foreground alarms, BP/S ís dísplayed in the data ínput
1ine on the background editing screen.
586
в-s2444εıoз OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
The password function bít 4 NE9 of parameter No. 3202 caл be locked
using parameter No. 3210 PASSWD and parameter No. 3211
PASSWORD
KEYWD to protect program Nos. 09000 to 09999. In the locked state,
FUNCTION parameter NE9 cannot Ьe set to 0. In thís state, program Nos. 09000 to
09999 cannot Ьe modifíed unless the correct keyword ís set.
A locked state means that the value set in the parameter PASSWD díffers
from the value set ín the parameter KEYWD. The values set in these
parameters are not displayed. The locked state ís released when the va1ue
already set in the parameter PASSWD ís also set ín parameter KEYWD.
When 0 is dísplayed ín parameter PASSWD, parameter PASSWD ís not
set.
Procedure for locking and unlocking
LockÍng 1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Enable parameter wńting. At thís tíme, P/S alarm No. 100 ís íssued
on the CNC.
3 Set parameter No. 3210 PASSWD . At this tíme, the locked state ís
set.
4 Disable parameter wńting.
5 Press the Яεsετ key to release the a1arm state.
Unlockíng 1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Enable parameter wńting. At thís tíme, P/S a1arm No. 100 ís issued
on the CNC.
3 In parameter No. 3211 KEYWD , set the same va1ue as set in
parameter No. 3210 PASSWD for locking. At thís time, the lосked
state ís released.
4 Set bít 4 NE9 of paτameteг No. 3202 to 0.
5 Disable parameter wńting.
6 Press the јяεѕЕτј key to release the a1arm state.
7 Subprograms from program Nos. 9000 to 9999 caп now be edited.
587
9. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION в-s2aaaεıoз
Explanatíons
setting parameter The locked state ís set when a value ís set in the parameter PASSWD.
PASSWD However, note that parameter PASSWD can Ьe set only when the locked
state ís not set when PASSWD = 0, oг PASSWD = KEYWD . If an
attempt ís made to set parameter PASSWD іп other cases, a warníng ís
given to indícate that wńtíng ís dísabled. When the locked state ís set
when PASSWD = 0 and PASSWD = KEYWD , parameter NE9 ís
automatícally set to 1. If an attempt ís made to set NE9 to 0, a warning
is gíven to índícate that wńtíng ís dísabled.
Changíng parameter Parameter PASSWD can be changed when the locked state ís released
PASSWD when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD = KEYWD . After step 3 in the
pгoceduгe for unlocking, a new value can be set in the parameter
PASSWD. From that time on, thís new value must be set in parameter
KEYWD to release the locked state.
Settíng o ín parameter When 0 ís set іn the parameter PASSWD, the number 0 ís displayed, and
PASSWD the password function is disabled. In other words, the password function
can Ьe disabled by either not settíng parameter PASSWD at a11, or Ьy
settíng 0 in parameter PASSWD after step 3 of the pгoceduгe for
unlockíng. To ensure that the locked state ís not entered, caτe must be
taken not to set a value other than 0 in parameter PASSWD.
Re locking After the locked state has been released, ít can be set agaín by setting a
dífferent value іп parameter PASSWD, or by turníng the power to the NC
off then on agaín to reset pагameteτ KEYWD.
Notes
Once the locked state is set, parameter NE9 cannot be set
to 0 and parameter PASSWD cannot be changed untíl the
locked state ís released or the memory a11 clear operatíon
is performed. Special carв must be taken ín setting
parameter PASSWD.
588
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
1
OCREATING PROGRAMS
Programs can be created usíng any of the followíng methods:
MD1 keyboard
PROGRAMMING 1N TEACH 1N MODE
CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING 1NPUT W1TH GRAPHIC
FUNCTION
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
AUTOMATIC PROGRAM PREPARATION DEVICE FANUC
SYSTEM P
Thís chapter describes creating programs usíng the MDI pane1, TEACH
IN mode, and conversational prograInming wíth graphic functíon. Thís
chapter also describes the automatic insertíon of sequence numbers.
589
10. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION в-s2aaaεıoз
Programs can be created in the ED1T mode usíng the program editíng
functíons descńbed in Chapter IIl-9.
US1NG
Т І Pı4NEL
Procedure for Creatíng Programs Usíng the MD1 Pane1
Procedure 1 Enter the ED1T mode.
2 Press the aRoa key.
3 Press address key O and enter the program number.
4 Press the 1NSERT key.
5 Create a program usíng the program edíting functions descńbed in
Chapter 9.
Explanatíon
Comments ín a program Comrnents can be wrítten in a program using the control ín/out codes.
Example 00001 FANUC SERIES 16 ;
M08 COOLANT ON ;
When the 1NSERT key ís pressed after the control-out code
,comnıents, and control-in code have been typed, the typed
comments are regístered.
When the j 1NSERTІ key ís pressed mídway through comments, to enter the
rest of comments later, the data typed before the I1NSERTI key is pressed
may not be correctly registered not entered, modífied, or lost because
the data is subject to an entry check whích ís performed ín norma1
editing.
Note the followíng to enter a comment:
Control-in code cannot be registered by itself.
Comments entered after the 1N3EλT key ís pressed must not begin with
a number, space, or address O.
If an abbreviation for a macro ís entered, the abbrevíatíon ís converted
ínto a macro word and regístered see Sectíon
Address O and subsequent numbers, or a space can be entered but are
omítted when registered.
590
в-εz444εІoз OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
Sequence numbers can Ьe automatícally inserted in each block when a
program ís created usíng the MDI keys in the EDIT mode. AUTOMATiC
Set the increment for sequence numbers in parameter 3216.
lNЅЕRiЮN OF
SЕОUEfVCЕ
NUMBERS
Procedure for automatíc ínsertíon of sequence numbers
Procedure 1 Set 1 for SEQUENCE NO. see subsectíon
2 Enter the ED1T mode.
3 Press гaoo to display the program screen.
4 Search for or register the number of a program to be edíted and move
the cursor to the EOB ; of the block after which automatic ínsertion
of sequence numbers is started.
When a program number ís registered and an EOB ; ís entered wíth
the 1NSER7 key, sequence numbers are automatícally ínserted startíng
with 0. Change the ínítíal value, íf requíred, accordíng to step 10, then
skip to step 7.
5 Press address key
ΓΠ
and enter the inítíal value of N.
6 Press 1NSER7 key.
7 Enter each word of a block.
8 Press εoв key.
591
10. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION в-sг444ε oз
9 Press јІNѕEяTј . The EOB ís regístered in memory and sequence numbers
are automatically ínserted. For example, if the ínítial va1ue of N is 10
and the parameter for the íncrement ís set to 2, N 1 2 inserted and
dísplayed below the line where a new block ís specífied.
PROGRAM 00040 N00012
00040 ;
N10 G92 XO YO ZO ;

>
ED1T - 13:18:08
Г і L1B OPRT

10
In the example above, íf N 12 ís not necessary in the next block,
pressing the OE ETε key after N 12 ís dísplayed deletes N 12.
To ínsert N 100 in the next block ínstead of N 12, enter N 100 and
pressАιτεР a о fter N 12 ís displayed. N 100 ís regístered and ínítíal
value ís changed to 100.
592
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
1 О.J When the playback optíon ís selected, the TEACH 1N JOG mode and
TEACH 1N HANDLE mode are added. In these modes, a machíne posítion CREATING
along the X, Z, and Y axes obtained by manual operation ís stored in
PROGRAMSIN
memory as a program position to create a program.
TEACH 1N MODE The words other than X, Z, and Y, whích include O, N, G, R, F, C, M, S,
T, P, Q, and EOB, can be stored in memory in the same way as ín ED1T
mode.
Procedure for Creatíng Programs ín TEACH 1N Mode
The procedure described below can Ьe used to store a machíne posítíon
along the X, Z, and Y axes.
1 Select the TEACH 1N JOG mode or TEACH 1N HANDLE mode.
2 Move the tool to the desíred posítion with jog or handle.
3 Press јPRоеј key to dísplay the program screen. Search for or regíster
the number of a program to be edíted and move the cursor to the
posítíon where the machíne posítion along each axís ís to be
registered inserted .
4 Key in address X
5 Press the iNSER7 key. Then a machíne posítion along the X axís ís
stored ín memory.
Example Absolute position for mm ínput
X10521 Data stored in memorу

6 Simílarly, key in Z , then press the ІNSERT key. Then a machíne
posítíon along the Z axís ís stored in memory. Further, key in Y
then press the SEдT key. Then a machíne position along the Y axís ís
stored іn memoгу.
A11 coordinates stored usíng thís method are absolute coordinates.
593
10. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-62444E/o3
Examples
01234 ;
N1 G50 X100000 Z200000 ; χ
N2 G00 X14784 Z8736 ;
N3 G01 Z103480 F300 ;
Fo 10002000
N4 M02 ;
Pг 10000,1 oз48o
z
1 Set the settíng data SEQUENCE NO. to 1 on . The íncremental
value paraØeter No. 3212 ís assumed to be 1 .
2 Select the TEACH 1N HANDLE mode.
3 Make positioning at posítíon PO by the maтіual pulse generator.
4 5elect the program screen.
5 Enter program number 01234 as follows:
O 1 2 4 iиsεRT
This operation registers program number 01234 in memory.
Next, press the followíng keys:
εoв иsεaτ
Aп EOB ; ís entered after prograın number 01234. Because no
number ís specifıed after N, sequence numbers are automatically
ínserted for NO and the first block N1 ís regístered in memory.
6 Enter the PO machíne posítíon for data of the fírst block as follows:
G 5 0 X WSεRT NSεRT EOB иsεaτ
Oиsεaт
Thís operatíon registers G50 X100000 Z200000 ; in memory. The
automatíc sequence number ínsertíon function registers N2 of the
second block in memory.
7 Posítíon the tool at P1 with the manual pulse generator.
8 Enter the P 1 machíne position for data of the second block as follows:
G Π 0 1NSERT 1NSεRT INSERT εOв 1NSERT
O
This operatíon registers G00 X14784 Z8736; іп memory. The
automatíc sequence number ínsertion function registers N3 of the
thírd block in memoгу.
9 Posítion the tool at P2 wíth the manual pulse generator.
594
8-62444E/03 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
10 Enter the P2 machíne posítíon for data of the thírd block as follows: σ
G 0 1 Z F 3
NSERT NSERT
NSERT EOB ІNSERT
This operatíon regísters GO1 Z103480 F300; in memory.
The automatic sequence number insertion function registers N4 of the
fourth block in memory.
11 Regíster M02; ín memory as follows:
M EOB 1NSERT O ONSER7
N5 índícatíng the fífth block ís stored in memorу usíng the automatic
sequence number ínsertíon function. Press the key to delete it.
Thís completes the registration of the sample program.
Explanatíons
Checkíng contents of the The contents of inemory can be checked in the TEACH 1N mode by using
memory the same procedure as in ED1T mode.
PROGRAM 01234 N00004
RELATIVE ABSOLUTE
U X
W Z
01234 ;
N1 G50 X100000 YO Z20000 ;
N2 000 X14784 Z8736 ;
N3 G01 Z103480 F300 ;
N4 M02 θ

i_
THND 14:17:27
:ІеЈ:іі ] LIB , OPRT l
\ __.,
Regísteríng a posítíon
When a value ís keyed in after keyíng in address
Π Π
, oг Y
with compensatíon
then the key ís pressed, the value keyed in for a machíne position
is added for regístration. Thís operatíon ís useful to correct a machine
posítíon by key-ín operatíon.
Regísteríng commands Commands to be entered before and after a machine positíon must be
other than positíon entered before and after the machíne posítíon is registered, by usíng the
commands same operatíon as program edítíng in ED1T mode.
595
10. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION e-62444εıoз
Programs can Ьe created block after block oп the conversatíonal screen
whíle dísplayíng the G code menu. CONVERSATIONAL
Blocks in a program can be modíf ed, ínserted, or deleted using the G code
PROGRAMMING menu and conversational screen.
W1TH GRAPHIC
FUNCTION
Procedure for Conversational Programmíng wíth Graphíc Functíon
Procedure 1 1 Enter the ED1T mode.
Creating a program
2 Press If no program ís registered, the following screen is
displayed. If a program ís regístered, the pгogгam currently selected
ís displayed.
PROGRAM 00000 N00000
>_
ED1T _ 11 :59:46
l Ѕј LIB 5І OPRηЅј
\Г J
3 Key in the program number of a program to be regístered after keying
in address O, then press E . For example, when a program with
program number 10 ís to be regístered, key in O 1 QO , then
pressІЫЅEд T T hís regísters a new program 00010.
596
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
4 Press the [] soft key. The following G code menu ís dísplayed
on the screen.
If soft keys different from those shown in step 2 aгe dísplayed, press
the menu return key 0 to dísplay the correct soft keys.
/
PROGRAM 01234 N00004
G00 : POS1T10N1NG
G01 : LINEAR 1PL
G02 : CIRCULAR 1PL. CW
G03 : CIRCULAR 1PL. CCW
G04 : DWELL
G10 : OFFSET VALUE SETTING 0
G20 : 1NCH
G21 : METRIC
G22 : STORED STROKE CHECK ON 0
G23 : STORED STROKE CHECK OFF 0
G25 : SPINDLE SPEED DETECT OFF
G26 : SPINDLE SPEED DETECT ON
>_
ED1T 14:26:15
ІГсі Іtі1
BLOCK
J
5 Key in the G code correspondíng to a functíon to be prograınmed.
When the positioníng functíon ís desíred, for example, the G code
menu lísts the function wíth the G code G00. So key in G00. If the
screen does not índícate a function to be programmed, press the page
key ј j to display the next G code menu screen. Repeat this
operation untíl a desired functíon appears. If a desired functíon ís not
a G code, key in no data.
6 Press the soft key [BLOCK] to dísplay a detailed screen for a keyed in
G code. The fígure below shows an example of detaíled screen for
G00.
-
PROGRAM 01234 N00000
G00 : POS1T10N1NG
G00 GGGX
X-
Z W X, Z
M
S
T
U
W Z
ED1T 4 14:32:57
PRGRM = OPRT ı

597
10. CREAiİfVü PROGRAMS OFERATiбN B-62444E/03
When no keys are pressed, the standard detaíls screen ís dísplayed.
PROGRAM 00010 N00000
7 Move the cursor to the block to be modified oп the program screen.
At this tíme, a data address with the cursor blínks.
8 Enter numeńc data by pressing the numeric keys and press the
[1NPUT] soft key or INPUT key. Thís completes the ínput of one data
ítem.
9 Repeat this operatíon until a11 data requíred for the entered G code is
entered.
10 Press the ј NsEpтј key. This completes the registratíon of data of one
block in program memory. On the screen, the G code menu screen ís
displayed, allowing the user to enter data for another block. Repeat
the procedure starting with 5 as required.
11 After regístering all programs, press the [PRGRM] soft key. The
regístered programs are converted to the conversational format and
displayed.
12 Press the REsET key to return to the program head.
598
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
Procedure2 1 Move the cursor to the block to be modified on the program screen
Modífyíng a b[ock and press the [] soft key. Or, press the [] soft key first to
dísplay the conversatíonal screen, then press the O oг O page
key until the block to be modífied ís displayed.
2 When data other than a G code ís to be altered, just move the cursor to
the data and key in a desired value, then press the [1NPUT] soft key or
lNPLIT key.
3 When a G code is to be altered, press the menu return key O and the
soft key []. Then the G code menu appears. Select a desíred
G code, then key in the value. For example, to specífy a cutting feed,
since the G code menu indicates GO1, key in GO1. Then press the soft
key [BLOCK]. The detailed screen of the G code is displayed, so enter
the data.
4 After data ís changed completely, press the nιτεw key. This operation
replaces an entíre block of a program.
Procedure3 1 On the conversational screen, display the block ímmedíately before a
lnsertíng a block new block ís to be ínseгted, by usíng the page keys. On the program
screen, move the cursor wíth the page keys and cursor keys to
ímmediately before the poínt where a new block is to be ínserted.
2 Press the soft key [] to dísplay the G code menu. Then enter
new blαk data.
3 When ínput of one Ь1αk of data ís completed ín step 2, press the ІNØER7
key. This operatíon inserts a block of data.
Procedure4 1 On the conversational screen, dísplay the contents of a block to be
Deletíng a block deleted, then press the E TE key.
2 The contents of the block dísplayed are deleted from program
memoгу. Then the corıtents of the next block are dísplayed on the
conversatíonal screen.
599
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-62444EJo3
1
ІSETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
General To operate a CNC machíne too1, vańous data must be set on the CRT/MDI
oг LCD/MDI for the CNC. The operator can monitor the state of
operation wíth data dísplayed duńng operation.
Thís chapter descríbes how to display and set data for each function.
Expianations
Screen transition chart The screen transition for when each functíon key on the MDI pаne1 ís
pressed is shown below. The subsections referenced for each screen are
also shown. See the appropňate subsection for details of each screen аnd HELP Pcıs гaØ aε пиo
the setting procedure on the screen. See other chapters for screens not
anın descńbed in this chapter.
See Chapter III-7 for the screen that appears when functíon key Øo í Ь s
MD1 function keys pressed. See Chapter III-12 for the screen that appears when functíon key
Shaded keys o aгe described
ín this chapter. is pressed. See Chapter llI-13 for the screen that appears when
function key ј HELP j ís pressed. In general, functíon key l ís pгepаred
by the machine tool buílder and used for macros. Refer to the maлual
íssued by the machíne tool Ьuі1deг for the screen that appears when
functíon key O is pressed.
Data protectíon key The machíne may have a data protectíon key to protect part programs, tool
compensatíon values, settíng data, аnd custom macro vańables. Refer to
the manual issued by the machine tool builder for where the data
protection key ís located and how to use ít.
600
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-62444E/o3 OPERATION
POS1T10N DISPLAY SCREEN Screen transition triggered by the function key Pos
POS

1
Current posıtıon screen

ґREL CALL CHNDL COFRT, CABS
-,,

Position display of Position displays Totai position dlspıay Manua1 handle in-
work coordinate relative coordinate o each coordinate terruption
system system system =ѕSee =ѕSee
=ѕSee =ѕsee
Display of part Display of part Display of part
count and run count and run count and run
time time time
=ѕSee =ѕSee =ѕSee
Display of actual Display of actual Display of actual
speed 5peed speed
=ѕSee =ѕSee =ѕSee
setting of floating setting of floating setting of floating
reference position reference position reference position
=ѕsвв =ѕsee =ѕSee ІІІ
setting of relative setting of relative
coordinate values coordinate values
=ѕsee =ѕsee
Current position screen


,
ìC l COPRT,
CMON1 ı

Display of oper-
ating monitor
=ѕSee ІіІ
601
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-62444E/03
PROGRAM SCREEN Screen transitíon triggered by the functíon ke P y ROG
in the MEMORY or MD1 mode
: Displayed in MD1 mode
PROG


Program screen
MEM MD1
J
CPRGRM CCHECK fCURRNT fNEXT ;j COPRT


[M ρ
Display of pro- Dísplay of current Dísplay of current
gram contents block and modal block and next
data block
see
Display of pro-
gram number and
sequence number

LГ
[ABS] [ REL]
Command
for MD1 operation
Program beíng executed Program befng eureaıted
Absolute coordinate va1ue Relative Ørdínate value
Dístance to go Dlstance to go Dísplayed ín the Modal vaıues Moda1 values
a ee MD1 mode
..
\
Program screen

MEM
C
fOPRT 1 -,, CRSTR
п

Program restart [PRGRM] [D1R] [SCHDUL]
screen
ІІІ-4.з.
Dísplay of file Settíng of
dírectory schedule

602
β-S2444Ě/03 OPERATION 11. 5ETί1NG AND DISPLAYING DATA
PROGRAM SCREEN Screen transition triggered by the function key P η
in the E 1T mode
PROG



i-rogram screen
ED1T
JNВ 1Γ
;і , COPRT, CPRGRM -,,

Program edítíng Program memory Conversational
screen and program di- programming
=see 111-10 rectory screen
=see 111-10 See 111-11 31 _ l

Program screen \
ED1T
1
;і CFLOPPY і ј COPRT, -ђ,
[PRGRM] [D1R]
Π
Fí1e directory
screenfor
floppy disks
=see 111-9
603
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-62444E/o3
-----_ i---
1 OFFSET/SFTTiNG SCRFFN Screen transition triggered by tłıe furıctíon key
1 9ETTINU
Γ 1/2
OFFSET
sETf 1 NG
Too1 offset value
Jĺ [ЁЈ COFFSET CSETTING CWORK ј COPRT, ј
-,,

Dısplay of Display of set- Dısplay of work-
offset value ting data piece coordinate
system =see =see
ι 111-11 410

ettıng of too Parameter setting settíng of work
offset data see origin offset vatue
=see Šettıng sequence =sθe
number compańson
setting of direct and stop
=see input of tool off-
set value Dísplaying πıп time
=see and parts count
=see
settíng of dírect
ínput of tool off- 3etting the пumbег of parts required
asee іІі set measured B
=іsee
Displayíng set-
setting of count- ting tíme
er ínput of offset =see
value
=See
Тooł offset value \

1
ı ΓMACRO OPR TOOLLF ј OPRT D

.
Dısplay of macг Displaying soft- Displaying tool 1if
variables ware operator s management dat
paпe1 =see =ssee 111
=see

setting macro Software opeгa- Presetäng tool tife counter
variables tor s pane1 switch Clearíng executing data
=see ІІІ
=see =see ІІІз. 1
To пыxt paqe
604
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. sETT1NG AND DISPLAYING DATA
2/2
1

Too1 offset value
C 7C
;і COPRT 21 -ђ, LО

Dísplay of work Display of Y axís
coordínate offset value
system value
see
see

setting of Y axis setting of work
offset data coordinate system
=see shift value
see

settíng of work-
pіece coordínate
shíft value by di-
rect ínput functíon
B for tool offset
measured 2.
=see
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-62444E/03
SYSTEM SCREEN Screen transítion triggered by the function key
sysτεм


\
Parameter screen
CPARAM CDGNOS І CPMC CSYSTEM COPRT ]
i
Display of param- Dísplay of diag-
eter screen nosís screen
ѕee See 111-7

Setting of parameter
see
Parameter screen \

C
\ ;ј CPІTCH ј OF RT


,
Display of pítch
error data
See
Setting of pitch
error data
See
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DA7A в-εг4Øε:./Qз OPERATION
Ѕetting screens The table helow lists the data set each screen.
Settíng screens and data on them
o. ettıng screen ontents o se ğ t i e erence
ltem
1 Too1 offset vaiue Too1 offset va1u2 Subcec.
Too1 nose radíus compensation value
Dírect input of tool offset value Subsec. 2
Direct input of toc _offset a1ue mэasu ad 3 Subsэc 11 _ İ
Counter input of cffset va1ue Šı ubsec.
Y axis offset Subsэc. `
2 Workpίece coordinate Workpiece coordinate syst m shift va1ue Subѕec.
system setting
Workpiece oГίgίГı aťfset vaIue Subsec.
3 Setting data handy Paranıeter write SІı: sec
TV check
Punch code E1A/1S0
lnput unit mmΓınch
1/0 channel
i Automatic insert af Sequэnce No.
, Conversion of tape format
ı F15
, --_ -- -- --
Se4ı:гi ce number comparison and stop Subsεc.
4 1 Setting data mirror 1 Mίrror image Ѕubsec.
image
5 Setting data tímer Parts requíred _ _i Subsec.
6 Macгo varíables Custom macro common variables J S ubsэc.
100A 149 o 1 ОOA 199
ı 500A 531 oГ 500A 59Э
7 Parameter Parameter
8 Pitch error ^ Pitch arror compensation data S absec. 11,5 2
9 scftware operator s Mode seleetíoπ Subsec.
panei Jog feed axis seIection
Jog rapid traverse ;
I] Ãxίs selection for Manua1 pulsa ;
generator 1
Multiplication for manuaI pulsa ı
generator
Jogfeedrate
Feedrate averride
Rapid traverse overrids
Optíonal block skIp
İ Single block
Machine lock
ry run
Protect key y
Feed ho1d
1 О Too1 lífe data Life count Subsec.
Toollίfe мã пaы ѓіé іt
11 Current pcsítíon dis- Fíoating reference position Subsэc. 1
play scraen f
11. SETTING AND DέŠPίAY1NG DATA OPERATION B- ε2дá4uoз
Press function key φs to display the current posítion of the too1.
ЅCRεENЅ
The followíng three screens are used to dísplay the current posítíon of the
D ЅpLА1 εD BY too1:
FUrJСTЮN KEY гos Position display screen for the work coordínate system.
Posítion display screen for the relatíve coordínate system.
Overall posítion display screen.
The above screens can also dísplay the feedrate, run tíme, and the number
of parts. In addítíon, a floatíng reference position can be set on these
screens.
Functíon key иos can also be used to dísplay the load on the servo motor
and spíndle motor and the rotatíon speed of the spíndle motor operatíng
monítor dísplay .
Functíon key Pos can also Ьe used to display the screen for dísplaying
the dístance moved by handle interruptíon. See Sectíon for details on
thís screen.
OPERATION 11. SEГї 1NG AND DISPLAYING DATA B- 62444E/03
Dísplays the current position of the tool in the workpíece coordínate
system. The current posítíon changes as the tool moves. The least ínput Positíon Dísplay ín the
íncrement ís used as the unit for numeric values. The title at the top of
VNorkpíeCe Coordínate
the screen índicates that absolute coordínates are used.
System
D;spCay proccdur^ for the cur; ent positían screen ín the workpiece coordinate system
1 Press functíon key гos
2 Press soft key [ABs].
3 On a 9 CRT, press the [ABs] soft key one more time to dísplay the
coordinates along axes other than the síx standard axes.
Dísplay with one-path control
ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTE 01000 N00010
X
Z
PAPT COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M T1ME OH OM385
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
RT MTN 09:06:35
[ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
Display with two-path control
9 CRT ACTUAL POS1T10N ABSOLUTF 01000 N00010
1
X,

z
456. 89
к 123 . 456
Z
PART COUNT 5
RUN T ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
З000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEMSIRT MTN 09:06:35 HEAD1
C [ FiŕL ĺ C AL1_ ĺ [ HNDL] [ OPHr J
Two--path iathe control / Note For the two-path control, the display may not be as shown above.
9 CRT In some cases, oп1y the coordinates along the axes on tool post 1 are
displayed due to the number of axes. In that case, press the [ABS]
soft key one more time to dísplay the coordínates along the axes on
tool post 2.
609
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-62444E/03
Display wíth two-path control
14 CRT
ACTUAL POSITION 01000 N10010 02000 N20010
AcTUALO ACTUALO
x2
zı x2
cІз u
Y2
ACTUAL BPEED F : OMM/ ACTUц BPEED F : 0 M M /
MIN MIN
8 : ORPM 9 : ORPM
PARTB COUNT 114 PART3 COUNT 114
RUN TØ 5H 9M RUN TIME 5E 3M
CYCLE TØ ON OM 69 CYCLE TØ ON OM 69
M6M BTOP i i λλf 12:34:56
г -τтг NEAD1
REL цL NNDL OPR7 σ
ı ,
\
Exp[anatíons
Dísplay íncludíng Bíts 6 and 7 of parameter 3104 caп be used to select whether the displayed
compensatíon values values include tool offset value and tool nose radíus compensatíon.
Dísplayíng the síxth and On the 9 CRT or the shared screen of the 14 CRT, on1y the coordinates
subsequent axes for the fırst to fıfth axes aгe dísplayed inítially whenever there are síx oг
moгe controlled axes. Pressing the [ABS] soft key dísplays the
coordinates for the sixth and subsequent axes. When síx or more
controlled axes aгe used under two-path control, the coordínates for
path 1 aгe displayed ínítíally on the 9 CRT. Pressíng the [ABS] soft key
dísplays the coordinates for path 2. On the shared screen of the 14 CRT,
the tool post selectíon signal ís used to select the display for path 1 0г 2.
610
в-6zaØεıoз OPERATiON 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Dísplays the current positíon of the tool in a relative coordinate system
based on the coordínates set by the operator. The current posítion changes Posïtíon Díspisy the
as the tool moves. The increment system ïs used as the unit for numeríc
Relative Coos dínate
values. The title at the top of the screen índícates that relatíve coordinates
System are used.
Display procedure fior ti e cıırırent positíon screen wìτ;ı the rгlative coordínate system
1 Press function key Pos
2 Press soft key [REL].
3 On a 9 CRT, press the [REL] soft key one more time to display the
coordinates along axes other than the six standard axes.
Dísplay with one--path control /-
ACTUAί POS1T10N RELATIVE 01000 N00010
U
W
PART COUNT ..
RuU т1МЕ Oн1 5м CYCLE TIME oH Омзεs
з00U мM м S OTOUQO
І vlEм STR н Γ 09:06:35
[ ,λBS j ; LL Z [ HNDL ] [ OPRï ]
o Dispiay with two--path confirol 1
9 CRT ACTUAL POS1T10N RELATIVE0 1000 N00010
U,
W,
џ2
W2
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
A.Γ.T. F3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM sTR? 09:06:35 HEAD1
] [ LL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
J
Note For the two-path lathe control 9 CRT , the dísplay may not be as
shown above. In some cases, on1y the coordínates along the axes
on tool post 1 are displayed due to the number of axes. In that case,
press the [REL] soft key one more tíme to display the coordínates
along the axes on tool post 2.
611
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA oPFRATION в-sгØ4εïo3
Dispiay wíth two-path contrcl

14 CRT
ACTOAI P09ZTZON 01000 N10010 02000 N20010
RELATIVE RELATIVE
02
W2
Aτ
B2
ACTUAL SPEED F : СMM/ ACTUAL θPEED F : 0 N M
MIN M1H
9 : ORPM 3 : ORPM
PAAT3 COUNT 114 PAAT3 cOUNT 114
RUN TIME 5H 3M RUN TØ 5H 3M
CYCLE TØ OH OM 69 CYCLE TIME OH OM 63
MEM 3TOP 12:34:56
HEADl
λ83 ALL HND1 OPR ı

Ехрlar at on
Settínq the reiative The current posítíon of the tool in the relatíve coordínate system can be
eecardíryaťes reset to 0 or preset to a specífıed value as follows:
Prceedt.ıre to set the axis coordinate to a specífíed vaiue
1 Enter an axís address such as X or Z on the screen for the relatíve
24β.91 coordinates. The indícatíon for the specifıed axis blinks and the soft
Y Э ύ.78C keys change as shown on the 1eft.
Z
2 To reset the coordinate to 0, press soft key [ R1G1N]. The relatíve >x
мεм coordinate for the blinkíng axis is reset to O.
eε ORЮif l J
To preset the coordinate to a specifıed value, enter the value
and press soft key [PRESET]. The relatíve coordínate for the
blinkíng axís is set to the entered va1ue.
612
в-s24Øε/oз OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Procedure to reset a11 axes
< Ј
1 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
aσσσσσ
t aø Ј
2 Press soft key [OR1G1N].
aσσσσσ
ι t tј t 1 aEс Ј
3 Press soft key [ALLEXE].
aσσσσσ The relatíve coordínates for all axes are reset to 0.
Display íncludíng Bíts 4 DRL and 5 DRC of parameter 3104 caп Ьe used to select
compensatíon values whether the displayed values include tool offset and tool nose radíus
compensation.
Presettíng Ьy setting a Bit 3 of parameter 3104 ís used to specify whether the dísplayed posítíons
coordínate system in the relative coordínate system are preset to the same values as ín the
workpiece coordinate system when a coordinate system ís set by a G50
G code system A or a G92 G code system B oг C command or when
the manual reference positíon return ís made.
Displaying the síxth and On the 9 CRT or the shared screen of the 14 CRT, on1y the coordinates
subsequent axes for the fvst to fıfth axes are displayed ínítíally whenever there are síx or
moгe controlled axes. Pressíng the [REL] soft key dísplays the
coordinates for the síxth and subsequent axes. When six oг moгe
controlled axes агe used under two-path control, the coordínates for
path 1 are dísplayed ínítially on the 9 CRT. Pressing the [REL] soft key
dísplays the coordínates for path 2. Oп the shared screen of the 14 CRT,
the tool post selectíon signal ís used to select the dísplay for path 1 0г 2.
11. SETГING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-62Ø4Eı0з
Dísplays the followíng positions oп a screen : Current posítíons of the
tool in the workpíece coordinate system, relatíve coordínate system, and Overal[ Posítíon
machíne coordínate system, and the remaíníng dístance. The relative
Display
coordínates can also Ьe set on this screen. See subsectíon for
the procedure.
Procedure for displayíng overall position dísplay screen
ј
1 Press function key
2 Press soft key [ALL].
Dísplay wíth one-path control
ACTUAL POS1T10N 01000 N00010
RELATIVE ABSOLUTE
U X
W Z
MACHINE DISTANCE TO
X GO
Z X
Z
PART COUNT 5
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM 09:06:35
[ ABS ] [ REL ] ] [ ØL ] [ oPRT ]
J
Dísplay wíth two-path control Ї- \
9 CRT ACTUAL POS1T10N 01000 N00010
RELATIVE ABSOLUTE
U 1 X1
W 1 Z1
U2 X2
W2 Z2
MACHINE DISTANCE TO
X1 GO
Z 1 X1
X2 Z1
Z2 X2
PART COUNŔ2
RUN T1ME OH15M CYCLE T1ME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
Ø 09:06:35 Ø1
АВs 7 REL ] [ φ 1 ØL ] Ľ oPRT
OPEnATıOry 11. ЅETT NG AND DISPLAYING DATA Ø-62444F/03
Display with two-path controi
14 CRT
ACTUAL P09ITION 01000 Н10010 02000 и20010
RELATIVE ABθOLUTE RZLATIVE ABθOLUTE
01 X1 U2 X2
W1 Z1 W2 Z2
H1 C1 λ2 λ2
Y1 Y1 B2 B2
млCHτκε OτЅТANcε ТO GO MACH2NE DI9TANCE TO GO
X1 X1 X2 X2
Z1 E1 Z2 Z2
C1 C1 A2 λ2
Y . Y1 B2 B2
ACTUAL 9PEED F : OMM/MIN ACTTJAL 9PΣED F : OMM/MIN
9 : ORPM 9 : ORPM
PAAT9 COUNT 114 PAAT9 COUNT 114
RUN TIME 5H 3M RUN rIME 5H 3M
CYCLE TIWE OH OM 69 CYC1Е TIMΣ OH OM 69
MΣM θTOP 12:34:56 NEAD1
ннα
аЏ
\
Explanations
Coordinate dísplay The current posítions of the tool in the followíng coordinate systems are
displayed at the same time:
Current position in the reiative coordinate system
relative coordinate
Current posítion in the work coordínate system
absolute coordinate
Current posítion ín the machine coordínate system
machine coordinate
Distance to go dístance to go
Dístance to go The dístance remaíning is dísplayed in the MEMORY or MDI mode. The
dístance the tool is yet to be moved in the current block is displayed.
Machine coordinate The least command increment ís used as the unit for values displayed in
system the machine coordinate system. However, the least ínput íncrement can
Ьe used by setting bit 0 MCN of parameter 3104.
Resettíng relatíve On the overall posítion dísplay screen, relatíve coordínates can be reset
coordínates to 0 or preset to specified values. The procedure ís the same as that for
resetting the relatíve coordínates descńbed in
Dísplaying the sixth and On the shared screen of the 14 CRT, on1y the coordinates for the fırst to
subsequent axes fıfth axes are displayed initially whenever there are six or mπгe controlled
axes. Pressing the [ALL] soft key displays the coordínates for the síxth
and subsequent axes. On the shared screen of the 14 CRT, the tool post
selectíon sígnal ís used to select the display for path 1 0г 2.
Üisp9aying the fifth and On the 9 CRT, relatíve coordinates cannot úe dísplayed together wíth
subsequentaxes absolute coordinates when there are fíve or more controlled axes when
the total number of controlled axes ís fıve or moгe, for two-path control .
Pressing the [ALL] soft key toggles the dísplay between absolute and
relatíve coordinates.
- 615 -
11. SË ÌT1NG AND Ú1ЅPLAY1NG . ATA OPERATION 8-624aaE/03
11 A workpiece coordinate system shífted Ьy an operation such as manual
intervention can be preset usíng MDI operations to a pre-shíft workpiece
Presetting the
coordínate system. The latter coordínate system is displaced from the
Workpiece Coordinate
machíne zero point by a workpiece zero point offset value.
ýŚteCn A command can be programmed to preset a workpiece coordinate
system. See Subsec. IΠ
Procedure tor Presetting the VVorkpiece Coordinate systern
1 Press function key Pos
2 Press soft key [ OPRT ].
C CREL CALL ıoFRı
aσσσσσ
3 When [WRK-CD] is not dísplayed, press the continuous menu
key
waκ-co
a σ π σ σ
4 Press soft key [WRK-CD].
Ѕ c C J
5 Press soft key [ALLAXS] to preset a11 axes.
aσσσσσ
6 To preset a particular axís in step 5, enter the axis name X Y
. and 0 , then press soft key [AXS-CD].
Explanations
Operation mode Thís function can be executed when the reset state or automatíc operation
stop state ís entered, regardless of the operatíon mode.
Presettíng relatíve As with absolute coordínates, bít 3 PPD of parameter No. 3104 ís used
coordínates to specífy whether to preset relatíve coordínates RELATIVE .
OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-62444E/03
The actual feedrate on the machine per minute can be displayed on a
Actual Feedrate current positíon display screen or program check screen by settíng bít 0
DPF of parameter 3015. Oгі a 14-ínch CRT, the actual feedrate ís always Dísplay
displayed.
Display procedure for the actual feedrate on the current posítíon dísplay screen
1 Press function key Pos to display a current posítíon dísplay screen.
ACTUAL POSITION ABSOLIITE 01000 N00010
X
Z
PAAT COUNT 5
RUN T2Ø OH15M CYCLE TIØ OH OM38S
3000 λΩi/M S 0 T0000
T MTN 09:06:35
] [ RTL ] [ ALL ] [ ØL ] OPRT ]1

Actual feedrate is dísplayed after
The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millímeter/min or
ínch/min dependíng on the specifıed least ínput increment under the
dísplay of the current position.
Explanations
Actual feedrate value The actual rate ís calculated by the followíng expression:
Fact = Σ >2
where
n : Number of axes
fi : Cutting feed rate ín the tangentíal direction of each axís or rapíd
traverse rate
Fact : Actual feedrate displayed
The dísplay unit: mm/min metric input .
inch/min Inch input, Two dígíts below the decimal
point are displayed.
The feedrate along the PMC axís can be omítted by settíng bit 1 PCF of
parameter 3105.
617
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-ь?aaaεoз
Actual feedrate display In the case of feed per revolutíon and thread cuttíng, the actual feedrate
of feed pet revolution displayed ís the feed per mínute rather than feed per revolutíon.
Actual feec+rate display In the case of movement of rotary axís, the speed ís dísplayed ín uníts of
of rotary axís deg/nun but is dísplayed on the screen in uníts of ínput system at that tíme.
For example, when the rotary axís moves at 50 deg/min, the following is
dísplayed: INCHIM
Actual feedrate dísplay The program check screen also dísplays the actual feedrate.
on the Qther screen
618
B- 62444E/03 OPERATίON 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
б The run tíme, cycle time, and the number of machíned parts are displayed
on the current positíon dísplay screens. DísрIay Qf F un Tírrle
and Pat` ts t.. :вunl
Ргocedu e for dispiayíng rurı tirre and parts count oп the cıarrent position display screen
1 Press function key Pos to dísplay a current positíon display screen.
/- \
ACTUAL POSITION REL?ıTIVE 01000 N000lO
х
г-,
ІЈ 456. ?89
PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME OH15M CYCLE TIME OH OM38S
ArT-г п2 п _ S 0 T0000
MEM MT 09:06:35
[ лBs 1 [ ] C ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPAT ]
The number of machíned parts PART COUNT , run tíme RUN
TIME , and cycle tíme CYCLE TIME are dísplayed under the
current posítíon.
Еxplanatчeιпs
F AFŠT COUNT Indicates the number of machíned parts. The number ís íncremented each
tíme M02, M30, oг an M code specífíed by parameter 6710 ís executed.
Fl11N Т1П11 Indicates the total run time during automatic operation,
excludíng the stop and feed hold time.
CYCLE T1ME Indicates the run tíme of one automatíc operation, excludíng the stop and
feed hold tíme. Thís is automatically preset t0 0 when a cycle start is
performed at reset state. It ís preset to 0 even when power ís removed.
Dísplay on the other Details of the run tíme and the number of machined parts are displayed
screen on the setting screen. See subsectíon Ш
Pararneter setting The number of machíned parts аnd run tíme cannot Ьe set on current
posítíon display screens. They cаn Ьe set by parameters 6711, 6751, and
6752 0Г on the settíng screen.
lncrementíng the number Bít 0 PCM of parameter 6700 is used to specify whether the number of
of machirıed parts machíned parts ís incremented each tíme M02, M30, oГ an M code
specified by parameter 6710 ís executed, oг on1y each time аn M code
specífied by parameter 6710 ís executed.
619
1. ŠETTING AND D ЅPLλY1NG DATA ОPЕFAT Ořь e-s2a4aЕıoз
To perform floating reference position return with a comnıand, the
floatíng reference posítíon must be set beforehand. Settíng the Fioatïng
Referenee Position
Procedure for settíng the floatíng reference positíon
1 Press function key φs ј to dísplay a screen used for displayíng the
current posítíon. Any of the following three screens may be selected:
The screen for displayíng the current posítíon in the relatíve
coordínate system, screen for dísplayíng the current position іn the
workpiece coordínate system, аnd screen for displayíng the current
posítíons in four dífferent coordínate systems.
2 Move the tool to the floating reference posítíon by jogging.
с ς . C го п
3 Press soft key [ OPRT ]. < СГГ Lr=J0
4 Press soft key [5εT FRF].
tsετrn. С ιĺ 5 To register the floating reference posítíons for a11 axes, press soft key aooσoo
[ALLEXE].
ι
To regíster the floating reference posítion of a specífic axís, enter the
ĺ uLαε c αεc
a 0 o σ 0 p name of the axis X , etc. , then press soft key [EXEC]. Two oг
more names can be entered consecutively , ?;і Е [Z
[EXEC] .
The above operation stores the floating reference posítíon. It can be
checked wíth parameter пo. 1244 .
6 In step 4, the floatíng reference positíon along a specífied axís cаn
also be stored by enteríng the axis name such as OX аnd pressíng
soft key [SET FRP].
Expianations
Presetting the reiatïve By parameter FPC bit 3 of parameter 1201 , the relatíve posítíon can be
coordïnate system preset to 0 when a floating reference posítíon ís regístered.
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
The readíng on the load meter can be dísplayed for each servo axís and
the seríal spíndle Ьy settíng bít 5 OPM of parameter 3 11 1 to 1. The Operatíng Monítor
reading on the speedometer can also Ьe dísplayed for the seríal spindle.
Dísplay
Procedure for dísplaying the operatíng monítor
1 Press function key O to dísplay a current positíon display screen.
2 Press the contínuous-menu key Q.
3 Press soft key [MON1].
OPERATING MONITOR 00001 N00001
LOAD METEA
X : 80+h S1 201
Z : 0 SPEED METEA RPM
C : 0 S1 :
1500
PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME OH15M CYCLE TIME OH OM38S
3000 MM/M
МЕM STRT MTN 09:06:35
[ . ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ ØL ] [ OPRT ]
J
Explanatíons
Dísplay of the servo axes The readíng oп the load meter can be dísplayed for up to three servo axes
Ьy settíng parameters 3151 to 3158.
When all these parameters are set to 0, data is displayed on1y for the basíc
axes.
Dísplay of the spindle When serial spíndles are used, the readíng on the load meter and
axes speedometer can be dísplayed on1y for the main serial spindle.
Unít of graph The baт graph for the load meter shows load up to 200 oп1y a va1ue ís
dísplayed for load exceedíng 200 . The bar graph for the speedometer
shows the ratío of the current spíndle speed to the maximum spíndle speed
100 .
621
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION e-62444Eıoз
Load meter The reading oп the load meter depends on servo parameter 2086 and
spindle parameter 4127.
The spindle speed to be dísplayed duríng operatíon monítoríng ís
calculated from the speed of the spíndle motor see the formula below .
The spíndle speed can therefore be displayed, duríng operatíon
monitoríng, even when no posítíon coder ís used. To dísplay the correct
spíndle speed, however, the maximum spíndle speed for each gear
spindle speed at each gear ratío when the spindle motor rotates at the
maximum speed must be set in parameters No. 3741 to 3744.
The ínput of the clutch and gear sígnals for the fírst serial spíndle ís used
to determíne the gear which is currently selected. Control the input of the
CTH1A and CTH2A signals accordíng to the gear selection, by referríng
to the table below.
Formula for calculating the spíndle speed to be dísplayed
Spíndle speed Speed of spindle motor Maximum spindle
dísplayed during = x speed with the
operation monitoring Maximum speed of gear being used
spindle motor
The followíng table lists the correspondence between clutch and gear
selectíon sígnals CTH1A and CTH2A , used to determine
the gear beíng used, and parameters:
CTH1A CTH2A Parameter
0 0 Maxіmum spíndle speed with gear 1
0 1 Maxіmum spíndle speed with gear 2
1 0 Maximum spíndle speed wíth gear 3
1 1 Maxіmum spíndle speed wíth gear 4
The speed of the spíndle motor and spíndle can be displayed, during
operatíon monitoríng, on1y for the fцst seríal spíndle and the spindle
switchíng axis for the fírst seríal spíndle. It cannot be dísplayed for the
second spíndle.
i
622
11. SÉT T NG AND DISPLAViNG DATA 5-62444 E/О3 OРЕRA710N
Ѕpeed meter Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spíndle
motor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by settíng
bit 6 OPS of parameter 3111 to 1.
Goior of graıph Oп a color CRT, if the value of a load meter exceeds 100 , the bar graph
turns purple.
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-ε244м εioз
1 2 This sectíon descńbes the screens dísplayed by pressing functíon key
ЅСRЕЕNЅ ЅRLАУED P іп MEMORY or MDI fvst four of the followíng screens
ВY FUNСέЮN КE,Y μ- display the executíon state for the program currently beíng executed in
MEMORY or MDI mode and the last screen dísplays the command values Má ОRY MODE OR 1
for MDI operation in the MDI mode:
МODε
Pt ogram contents display screen
Current block dísplay screen
Next biock dI5play screen
Program check scroen
ProØram screen for MD1 operation
Operation time Ѕtsmp
Displaγing tho B-axís operation state
Function key l Pяос caп also be pressed in MEMORY mode to display the
program restart screen and scheduling screen.
See Sectíon IΠ for the program restart screen.
See Sectíon IΠ for the scheduling screen.
в-624Øεıoз OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Dísplays the program currently beíng executed in MEMORY or MDT
Program Contents mode.
Display
Procedure for dísplayíng the program contents
1 Press functíon key PRØ to dísplay a program screen.
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PRGRM].
The cursor ís posítíoned at the block currently beíng executed.
PROGRAM oг0oo κ00Із0
02000 ;
N100 G50 XO Z0. ;
N110 G91 G00 X-70. ;
N120 Z-70. ;
. і
N140 G41 GOз ;
N150 GO1 X-25. ;
N160 G02
N170 GO1 X20. ;
N180 G02 X45. Z45. R45. ;
> _ S 0 T0000
Ø STRT 16:05:59
еЈ ] [ CHECK ] [ CØ ] [ NEXT ] OPRT ]
\
Explanatíons
14 ínch CRT Oп a 14-ínch CRT, íbch, oг ínch LCD, the contents of the
ínch LCD program are displayed on the right half of the screen or on the entíre screen
switched each time soft key [PRGRM] ís pressed .
- 1
00006 H00000
ºROGRAM
00003 ; 065 H01 ºK100 0Y3901 ;
065 H01 º/2001 00 ; 665 H01 ºї101 0Y3902 ;
665 x0і º120і4 00 ; 665 x0і ºy390і O 102 ;
665 x01 P 2110 00 ; 065 H01 PM3902 0ї103 004 P2000 ; 604 º5000 ;
GOd º2000 ; 004 º5000 ;
G04 º2000 ; 004 ;
065 H01 P/2001 050000 ; 665 H01 ºK100 OY4001 ;
G65 H01 Pw2014 060000 ; 665 X01 ºy101 0y4002 ;
G65 x01 º 2110 030000 ; / 065 H01 º/102 0K4003
004 º2000 ; 065 H01 Pä103 0ä4004 ;
004 º2000 ; 065 H01 PM104 0y4005 ;
004 P2000 ; 665 H01 ºK105 044006 ;
065 и02 ºi2o0ı 0 2001 a3 ; 665 H01 ºY106 0Y4007 ;
065 H03 P 2016 015000 Rї2014 065 К01 ºY107 0Y4008 ;
065 H01 P 108 0 4009 ;
G65 H04 ºE2110 03 R 2110 ;
qМ a 07:12:55
пгІ гІ і
O SR sRHt sRH: ЯЕWN0 0
\ /
625
11. SET Т 1NG AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION e-62aaaεı0з
Dísplays the block currently being executed and modal data in the
MEMORY or MDI mode. Current B1ock Disp[ay
Ѕcгеeп
Procedure for dísplaying the current block display screen
1 Press functíon key P
2 Press chapter selection soft key [CURRNT].
The block currently being executed and modal data are displayed.
The screen dísplays up to 22 modal G codes and up to 11 G codes
specifíed in the current block.


PROGRAM 02000 κ0o1з0
CURRNT MODAL
GO1 X G16 G00 F
F

G99
G21 T
G40 S
G25
G22
G80
G67 SACT 0
G54
> _ S 0 T0000
Ø STRT 16:05:59
[ PRGRM ] [ CHECK ] I ]I NEXT ]I OPAT ] 1
Exp[anations
14 ínch CRT screen The current block display screen ís not províded for 14-ínch CRTs. Press
soft key [PRGRM] to display the contents of the program on the ńght half
of the screen. The block currently beíng executed is indícated by the
cursor. Moda1 data is displayed on the left half of the screen.
The screen dísplays up to 18 modal G codes.
626
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
ACTUAL P09ITION 03001 н00000
?.BsOLUTE F 0
X MH/HiN
Z
PROGR?.H
03001 ;
G40 ;
G49 M06 79 ;
CO C54 G90 XO ZO ;
C43 Z30. H5 36000 M3 ; MODAL и0 ;
β00 β40 G54 F 500 M 3 Z-22 ;
G17 G43 G84 ;
G90 G80 Gед H 5 C10 P11 9500 ;
G22 G90 G75 D 7 9 и90 ;
G94 G50 G25 t
G21 G87 S 6000
SACT 0 > ЕМ . +. 07:07:40
Hει ALLI I I OPRη σ

Displays the block currently beíng executed and the block to be executed
Next B1ock Display next in the MEMORY or MDI mode.
Screen
Procedure for dísplaying the next block dísplay screen
1 Press function key PRØ
2 Press chapter selectíon soft key [NEXT].
The blосk cuпently being executed and the block to be executed next
are displayed.
The screen dísplays up to 11 G codes specified in the current block
and up to 11 G codes specífied in the next block.

PROGRAM 02000 N00130
CØT NEXT
GO1 X G39 I
G17 8 2000 G42
G41 H 2
G80
> _ s 0 T0000
Ø STRT 16:05:59
[ PRGRM ] [ CHECR ] [ CURRNT ] [ ] OPAT ]
627
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-62Øaεı0з
Dísplays the prograrn currently being executed, current position of the
Program Check Screen too1, and modal data ín the MEMORY mode.
Procedure for dísplayíng the program check screen
1 Press functíon key Pp
2 Press chapter selectíon soft key [CHECK].
The program currently beíng executed, current position of the too1,
and modal data are displayed.
Dísplay with one-path control
PROGRAM 02000 N00130

G92 G90 X100. Z50. 1
G00 XO ZO ;
GO1 Z250. F1000
ABSOLUTE DIST TO GO G00 G94 G80
X X G17 G21 G98
Z Z G90 G40 G50
G22 G67
B
H M
T D
F S
> _ S 0 T0000
Ø STRT 16:05:59
[ PRGRM ] ] [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ][ OPAT ]
Display wíth two-path control
9 CRT PROGRAM 02000 N00130

G92 G90 X100. Z50. ,
G00 XO ZO ;
G01 Z250. F1000
ABSOLUTE DIST TO GO G00 G94 G80
X X G17 G21 G98
Z Z G90 G40 G50
G22 G67
B
H M
T D
F S
> _ S 0 T0000
Ø STRT 16:05:59 HEAD1
[ PRGRM ] ] [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ OPRT ] 1
628
8-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Dísplay wíth two path control
14 CRT
PROGRAM CНECλ 01000 NO1010 PROCRAM CHECλ 02000 N02010
N02010 090 X200. Z200.;
NO1010 GO1 X50, E50. F2000. ; N02020 001 X50. Z50. F3000. ;
N01020 X30. ; N02030 001 X50.. ;
N01030 X50. Z-40. ; N02060 Z-50. ;
N01040 Z-60. ; Н02050 КO ZO AO BO ;
RELATIVE ABsOLUTE DI9T TO RELATIVE ABsOLUTE DI3T TO GO
GO U2 X2 X2
U1 X1 X1 W2 22 Z2
λ2 A2 A2
w1 Z1 Z1 52 52 B2

B1 C1 C1
MODAL MODAL VIGOΦOΦ9ΦOΦ Y]M G00 098 025 067 M
O.θ8D 021 G22 054 M 097 G21 G22 054 M
069 040 G90 018 M G69 G40 G90 018 M
T T
F F OMM/MIN
OMM/MIN 9 1000 ORBM
3 1000 ACT. ORPM 9 0 T0000 > MEM 9TOP 140000 BEAD1
ІРRGR9 NEXT x N
\ J
Explanations
Program díspiay The screen dísplays up to four blocks fıve blocks on the 14 CRT when
two-path control ís being used of the current program, startíng from the
block currently being executed. The block currently being executed ís
dísplayed in reverse video. Duńng DNC operatíon, however, on1y three
blocks can be dísplayed.
Current positíon display The positíon in the workpíece coordínate system or relatíve coordínate
system and the remaíníng dístance are dísplayed. The absolute positions
and relatíve posítíons are swítched by soft keys [ABS] and [REL].
On the 9 CRT when there are six oг moгe controlled axes, pressing the
[ABS] soft key toggles the dísplay between the absolute coordinates for
the fırst to fífth axes and those for the síxth to eighth axes. Pressíng the
[REL] soft key toggles the relatíve coordínate dísplay in the same way.
Moda1 G codes Up to 12 modal G codes are dísplayed.
12 G codes for each path, on the 14 CRT when two-path control ís beíng
used
Dísplaying during During automatic operation, the actual speed, sCAT, and repeat count are
automatíc operatíon displayed. The key ínput prompt >3 is dísplayed otherwise.
629
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OpERAT10N e-s2Ø4εıoз
14 ínch CRT wíth The program check screen is not provided for 14-inch CRTs with
one-path control one-path control. Press soft key [PRGRM] to display the contents of the
program on the ríght half of the screen. The block currently being
executed ís indicated by the cursor. The current position of the tool and
modal data are displayed on the left half of the screen.
Up to 18 modal G codes are displayed.

ACTOAL P09ITION 03001 N00000
ABθOLUTE F 0 мм,мlю
X
Z
PROGRAM
03001 ;
G40 ;
C49 ю06 T9 ;
CO C56 G90 XO ZO ;
C4з Eзo. н5 56000 мз ; MODAL мo ;
в00 G40 в5a F 500 м 3 Y-22 ;
017 G43 064 Z σ.в ;
G90 G80 G89 H 5 G10 P11 F500 ;
G22 G90 β15 D 7 9 мз0 ; , 094 050 c25
021067 S 8000
SACT 0 >
МЕМ łł łłł łłł
07:07:40

λEL ALL Π 1 Π Ex7 ; ,оРн7,
630
в-624Øεı0з OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Dísplays the program input from the MDI and modal data in the MD1
mode. Program Screen for
MD1 Operatíon
Procedure for dísplaying the program screen for MD1 operatíon
1 Press function key P
2 Press chapter selectíon soft key [MD1].
The program ínput from the MDI and modal - dat a are dísplayed.

PROGRAM ØI 02000 N00130

00000 G00 ,
M03 ;
GO1 F500 ;
Program M98 P9010 ;
0 ;
G00 G90 G94 G40 G80 G50 G54 G69
G17 G22 G21 G49 G98 G67 G64 G15
Moda1 ínformatíon H M
T D
F S
> _ S 0 T0000
ØI м 16:05:59
\ [ PRGRM ] Ø OØ l NEXT 7 [ OPRT ] J
Explanatíons
MD1 operatíon See Section for MDI operatíon.
Moda1 ínformatíon The modal data ís displayed when bít 7 MDL of parameter 3107 ís set
to 1. Up to 16 modal G codes are dísplayed.
On a 14-inch CRT, however, the contents of the program are dísplayed
on the ńght half of the screen and the modal data is dísplayed on the left
half of the screen, regardless of thís parameter.
Dísplayíng duríng During automatíc operatíon, the actual speed, SCAT, and repeat count are
automatíc operation displayed. The key input prompt >3 is displayed otherwíse.
631
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION e-s2444εı03
When a machíníng program is executed, the machíníng tíme of the
Stamping the main program is displayed on the program machining time display
Machiníng Time screen. The machíníng tímes of up to ten maín programs are dísplayed
ín hours/mínutes/seconds. When more than ten programs are executed,
data for the oldest programs ís discarded.
Procedure for Stamping Machíníng Time
Procedure 1 1 Select the memory operatíon mode, then press the јАEѕTј key.
Machíníng time
calculation and dísplay 2 Select the program screen, then select a program whose machíníng
time is to be calculated.
3 Execute the program to perform actual machiníng.
4 When the ІREs key is pressed, or M02 0г M30 ís executed, the
machíníng tíme count operatíon stops. When the machíníng tíme
dísplay screen is selected, the program number of the stopped main
program and íts machining tíme are dísplayed.
To display the machiníng time dísplay screen, use the procedure
below. Machiníng time data can be dísplayed in any mode and
during background editing.

Press the functíon key PRØ
Press the ńghtmost soft key once or twíce to dísplay soft key [T1ME].
Press soft key [T1ME]. The machíning tíme dísplay screen appears.
Machlning time d1Ø1ay screen


PROGRλ M TIME 00010 N0002
No. TIME
N0. TIME
00020 12H48M02S
16:52:13
][ ][ ] [ OPRT ] J
632
в-sгaaaεı0з OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
5 To calcu]ate the machíníng times of addítional programs, repeat the
above procedure. The machíning tíme dísplay screen dísplays the
executed maín program numbers and theír machíníng tímes
sequentially.
Note, that machíníng tíme data cannot be displayed for more than ten
main programs. When moгe than ten programs are executed, data for
the oldest programs ís díscarded. The screens below show how the
screen dísplay changes from the ínítia] state where the machíníng times
of ten main programs 00020, 00040, ..., and 00200 aгe dísplayed
to the state where the machining tíme of the maín program 00220 ís
calculated.
PROGRAH TIME 00000 N0000
NO . TIME
00020 12К48м01S
00040 OH48м01s
00060 4H16м01S
00080 OH16м01S
00100 1H2Oм01S
00120 2H08м02S
00140 2H32м01S
00160 OH51м01S
00180 15H04MO1S
00200 OH56м01S
>_
EDIT 16:52:13
[ [ ][ ]ĺ ] [ OPRT ]
\
ó
/

PROGRAH TIME 00000 N0000
NO . T IME
00040 OH48м01S
00060 4H16м01S
00080 OH16м01S
00100 1H2Oм01S
00120 2H08м02S
00140 2H32м01S
00160 OH51MO1S
00180 15H04м01S
00200 OH56м01S
00220 OH03MO1S
> ][ ][ ][
EDIT 16:52:20
ι
] [ OPRT ]
J
633
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-6гØ4εı0з
Procedure 2 1 To insert the calculated machíning time of a program in a program as a
Stamping machíning comment, the machíníng tíme of the program must be displayed on
tíme the machining tiτne display screen. Before stampíng the machiníng
tíme of the program, check that the machining time display screen
shows the program number
2 Set the part program storage and edít mode or background edit state
and select the program screen. Then select the program whose
machíníng tíme ís to be ínserted.
3 Suppose that the machining time of 00100 ís dísplayed on the
machining time display soft key [ OPRT ] to display the
operatíon soft keys. Then, hold down the ríghtmost soft key untíl soft
key [1Ns-TM] appears. When soft key [iNS-TM] is pressed, the
cursor moves to the start of the program, and the machiníng tíme of
the program is inserted after the program number.
PROGRAM 00100 N0000
00100 ;
N10 092 X100. Z10. ;
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 600 Z5. T0101 ;
N40 601 X-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. R2. ;
N60 GO1 X40. ;
і X42. 2-13. ;
Z-50. ;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
N100 X80. ;
EDIT 16:05:59
[ INs-TM ]ľ ]Ľ ][ ][ J
δ
1
PROGRAM 00100 N0000
00100 іІі і і
N10 092 X100. Z10. ;
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 600 Z5. T0101
N40 001 Z-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. A2.
N60 001 X40. ;
N70 X42. Z-13. ;
N80 E-50. ;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
N100 X80. ;
EDIT 16:05:59
\ [ INs-TM ] [ ] [ ][ ][ J
- 634 -
OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-62444El03
4 If a comment already exísts in the block containíng the program
number of a program whose machíníng tíme ís to be ínserted, the
machíníng tíme ís ínserted after the exísting comment.
1
PROGRAM 00100 N0000
ЮІІ SAAFT XSF001 ;
N10 G92 X100. Z10. ;
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 G00 Z5. T0101
N40 GO1 X-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. A2.
N60 GO1 X40. ;
X42. Z-13. ;
N80 Z-50. ;
N90 X44. 2-51
N100 X80. ;
EDIT 16:52:13
ι ς τκs-тм ][ ][ ][ ][ у
δ
-
PROGRAM 00100 NC000
00100 SHAFT XSF001 іІі і .
N10 G92 X100. Z10. ;
N20 51500 M03 ;
N30 G00 Z5. T0101
N40 GO1 Z-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. A2.
N60 GO1 X40. ;
N70 X42. Z-13.
N80 Z-50. ;
N90 X44. Z-51.
N100 X80. ;
EDIT 16:52:13
ς τκs-тм ] [ ][ ][ ][ ј2
5 The machiníng tíme of a program ínserted as a comment can be
dísplayed after aп exístíng program comment on the program
dírectory screen.
Ї-
PROGRAM 00000 N0000
SYSTEM EDITION B001 - 05
PROGRAM NO. USED : 8 FREE : 55
ØORY AREA USED :4320 FREE : 5760
PROGRAM LIBRARY LIST
00020 GEAR XGR001 : 012H48MO1S
00002 GEAR XGR002 : OOOH48MO1S
00010 BOLT YBT001 : 004H16MO1S
00020 BOLT YBT002 : OOOH16MO1S
00040 SHAFT XSF001 : OO1H2OMOIS
00050 SHAFT XSF002 : 002H08MO1S
00100 SHAFT XSFO11 : 002H32M02S
> 00200 PLATE XPL100 : OOOH51MO1S J
EDIT 14:46:09
[ PRGRM ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ OPRT ]
- 635 -
ı l. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-s2aaaεıo3
Expianations
Machíníng t me Machining tíme ís counted from the ínítial start after a reset in memory
operatíon mode to the next reset. If a reset does not occur duríng
operatíon, machíníng tíme ís counted from the start to M03 or M30 .
However, note that the tíme duríng which operatíon is held is not counted,
but the tíme used to wait for completion of M, S, T, and/or B functions
ís counted.
stamøíng the machíning The dísplayed machíníng tíme can be inserted stamped as a comment
tíme in a program stored in memorу. Machíning time ís ínserted as a comment
after the program number.
Program directory The machíníng time inserted after a program number can Ьe dísplayed on
the program directory screen by setting bít 0 NAM of parameter No.
3107 to 1. This lets the user know the machining tíme of each program.
Thís ínformation ís useful as reference data when planníng processíng.
Restrictions
Ąίa+ m When program executíon ís termínated Ьy aл alarm during the machíníng
tíme count, the machiníng tíme until the alarm ís released ís counted.
MC2 If the user specifies that M02 does not reset the CNC but returns
completion sígnal FIN to the CNC to restart the program from the
begínníng successively with bit 5 M02 of parameter No. 3404 set to 0 ,
the machíníng tíme count stops when M02 returns completíon signal FIN.
Stampíng the machíning When the machíníng time of a program to be stamped ís not dísplayed on
time the machíning tíme dísplay screen, the machíníng tíme cannot be ínserted
ínto the pгogτam even íf soft key [1Ns-TM] is pressed.
636
β-6гaaaεıoз OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Program directory When the machíning time ínserted ínto a program ís dísplayed on the
program dírectory screen and the comment after the program number
consísts of on1y machining tíme data, the machíning time ís dísplayed in
both the program name dísplay fíeld and machíning tíme display fíeld.
If machíníng time data ís inserted ínto a program as shown below, the
program d vectory screen does not dísplay the data oг displays only part
of the data.
EXample 1:Program directory screen when a program пame
longer than 16 characters

PROGRAM 00100 N0000
00240 1
OO1H2OMOIS ;
N10 G92 X100. Z10. ;
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 GOO Z5. T0101 ;
N40 GO1 Z-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. A2. ;
N60 GO1 X40. ;
N70 X42. Z-13. ;
N80 Z-50. ;
N90 X44. 2-51. ;
EDIT 16:52:13
[ INs-TM ][ ][ ][ ][ ]
δ
A11 charecters after the flrst 16 characters of the
program comment are dlscarded and the machining tïme
dispiay fleid is left biank.
PROGRAM 00000 N0000
SYSTEM EDITION B1A1 - 05
PROGRAM N0. USED : 8 FREE : 55
ØORY AREA USED :2480 FREE : 5760
PROGRAM LIBRARY LIST
00240 sHAFT XSF301 :
>_
EDIT 16:52:13
[ PRGRM ] [ ][ ][ ][ OPRT ] J
637
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-62444E/03
EXample 2:Prognзm dlrectory screen when two oг moгe machIning
tlmes are stamped.
-
PROGRAM 00260 N0000
00260 SHAFT XSF302 OO1H15M59S
N10 G92 X100. Z10. ;
N20 51500 M03 ;
N30 G00 Z5. T0101
N40 GO1 Z-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. A2.
N60 G01 X40. ;
N70 X42. 2-13. ;
NBO 2-50. ;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
EDIT 16:52:13
ι ς INs-TM ] [ ][ ][ ][ J
δ
On1y the flrst machlning tlme 1s dlsplayed.
00260 N0000 \ PROGRAM
sYSTEM EDITION B1A1 - 05
PROGRAM NO. USED : 8 FREE : 55
ØORY AREA USED :2480 FREE : 5760
PROGRAM LIBRARY LIST
00260 sHAFT XSF302 : OO1H15M59s
>_
EDIT 16:52:13
ι[ PRGRM ] [ : ] Н ][ OPRT ] J
638
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Example 3:Program dlrectory screen when inserted machlning tlme data
does not conform to the format hhhHmmMsss 3-d1g1t
number followed by H, 2-d1g1t number followed by M, and
2-d1g[t number followed by S, 1n thls order
ĺ
PROGRAM 00280 N0000
00280 sHAFT XSF303
N10 G92 X100. 210. ;
N20 S1500 M03 ;
N30 G00 Z5. T0101 ;
N40 GO1 Z-10. F25. ;
N50 G02 Z-12. R2. ;
N60 GO1 X40. ;
N70 X42. Z-13. ;
N80 Z-50. ;
N90 X44. Z-51. ;
N100 X80. ;
EDIT 16:52:13
[ τκs-тм ] [ ][ ][ 1[ J
δ
The machInIng tlme dlsplay f1e1d 1s blank.

PROGRAM 00280 N0000
SYSTEM EDITION B1A1 - 05
PROGRAM NO. USED : 8 FREE : 55
ØORY AREA USED :2480 FREE : 5760
PROGRAM LIBRARY LIST
00260 SSAFT XSF302 : OO1H15M59s
00280 SHAFT XSF303
:
. _
EDIT 16:52:13
[ PRGRM ] [ E : ] ] ]I OPAT ] J
Correctíng the If an incorrect machíning time ís calculated such as when a reset occurs
machíníng time duríng program executíon , reexecute the program to calculate the correct
machiníng tíme. If the machíning tíme display screen dísplays multiple
programs wíth the same program number, select the machiníng tíme of the
latest program number for insertíon into the program.
639
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-в2aaaE/03

Dísplayíng the B-axis
Operatíon State
Dísplayíng the B-axis operatíon state
1 Press the Pя function key.
2 Press the [CHECK] chapter selectíon soft key.
3 Press the [B-DSP] chapter selection soft key. Then, the B-axís
operation state is displayed on the program check screen. The
command currently being executed and the next command are
dísplayed.
PROGRAM CHECR 00001 N0000l

G00 X10. Z20. ;
GO1 X20. Z30. F1000 ;
G04 P1000 ;
ABSOLOTE B-AXIs G00 G95 G22
X GO1 CURR G97 G21 G80
Z G40 G50
Y F G69 G25 G67
B G00 NEXT
B M 102
T
F S
0 SCAT OS 0 T0000
Ø sTRT FIN 21:20:05
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ] [ ] [ OPRT y
640
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Thís sectíon descńbes the screens dísplayed by pressíng function key
SCREENS DISPLAYED P in the EDIT mode. Functíon key PROp in the EDIT mode can
BY FUNCTION KEY display the program edíting screen and the program dísplay screen
1N THE ED1T MODE dísplays memory used and a list of programs . Pressing function key
PRØ in the EDIT mode can also dísplay the conversational graphics
programmíng screen and the floppy file directory screen. See Chapter 10
for the program edítíng screen and conversatíonal graphícs programming
screen. See Chapter 9 for the floppy file dírectory screen.
Displays the number of registered programs, memorу used, and a list of
Displaying Memory registered programs.
Used and a Líst
of Programs
Procedure for displayíng memory used and a list of programs
1 Select the ED1T mode.
For the two-path control, select the tool post for whích a program ís to
be dísplayed with the tool post selectíon swítch.
2 Press functíon key PROq
3 Press chapter selectíon soft key [L1B].

PROGRAM 02000 N00130
SYSTEM EDITION B1A1 - 05
PROGRAM N0. USED : 11FREE : 52
MEMORY AREA USED : 1200FREE : 4320
PROGRAM LIBRARY LIST
00010 00001 00003 00002 00555 00999
00062 00004 00005 01111 00969 06666
00021 01234 00588 00020 00040
> _ S 0 T0000
MD1 16:05:59
[ PRGRM ][ і: ][ ][ OPRT ]

J
Ø1
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-62444εı0з
Explanations
Detaíls of inemory used PROGRAM NO. USED
PROGRAM NO. USED : The number of the programs regístered
íncludíng the subprograms
FREE : The number of programs whích can be
registered additionally.
MEMORY AREA USED
MEMORY AREA USED : The capacity of the program memory in
whích data is regístered indícated by the
number of characters .
FREE : The capacíty of the program memory whích
caв be used addítíonally indícated by the
number of characters .
Program líbrary líst Program Nos. regístered are índicated.
A1so, the program лame can be dísplayed ín the program table by settíng
parameter NAM No. 3107Ø to 1.
PROGRAM 02000 N00130
SYSTEM EDITION B1A1 05
PROGRAM NO. USED : 11FREE : 52
ØORY AAEA USED : 1200FREE : 4320
PROGRAM LIBRARY LIST
00001 MACRO GCODE .MAIN
00002 MACRO
00010 TE T PROGRAM.ARTH4ETIC
00020 TEST MACRO
00040 ТЕЅТ РRОСRАІ4.ОFFЅЕТ
00050
00100 INCH/MM CONVERT CHECK
00200 NACRO
> _
EDIT 16:05:59
[ PRGRM ] Ø ] [ ] [ ] ί OPRT ]
\
Program name Always enter a program name between the control out and control in
codes ímmedíately after the program number.
Up to 31 characters can be used for namíng a program within the
parentheses. If 31 characters аre exceeded, the exceeded characters are
not dísplayed.
0п1y program number is displayed for the program wíthout any program
пame.
O a ;
1 1
Program пumЬeг Program name up to 31 characters
Software seríes Software series of the system is dísplayed.
It is used for maírıtenance ; user is not requíred thís ínformatíon.
Order ín whích programs Programs аre dísplayed in the same order that they are regístered in the
are displayed in the program library list. However, if bít 4 SOR of parameter 3107 is set to
program líbrary líst 1, programs аre dísplayed in the order of program number startíng from
the smallest one.
Ø2
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Order ín whích programs lnımedíately after all programs are cleared Ьy turníng on the power whíle
are regístered
pressíng the j ELE7E ј key , each program ís regístered after the last program
ín the list.
If some programs in the list were deleted, then a new program is
registered, the new program ís inserted in the empty location in the list
created by the deleted programs.
Example When bít 4 SOR of parameter 3107 ίs 0
1. After clearíng a11 programs, regíster programs 00001, 00002, 00003,
00004, and 00005 in this order. The program líbrary líst dísplays the
programs in the followíng order:
00001, 00002, 00003, 00004, 00005
2. Delete 00002 and 00004. The program library líst displays the
programs іп the folIowing order:
00001, 00003, 00005
3. Regíster 00009. The program library líst dísplays the programs in the
following order:
00001, 00009, 00003, 00005
In two-path control, the programs for both tool posts can be displayed and
Two-path edited oп the same screen when bít 0 DHD of parameter No. 3106 ís set
to 1.
símultaneous editing
The name of each tool post is dísplayed above the correspondíng program.
on the program screen
Procedure for Two-path Símultaneous Edíting on the Program Screen
1 Specífy ED1T mode for both tool posts.
2 Press functíon key.

shared screen 9 CRT
PROGRIAM 01357 N00120 02468 N00130
HEAD1 HEAD2
01357 HØ-1 MAIN PROGRAM Q2468 HEAD-2 MAIN PROGRAM ;
N010 G90 G00 NO10 G90 G00
N020 T0101 ; N020 T0101 ;
N030 S30000 M03 ; N030 S30000 M03 ;
N040 G40 G00 N040 G41 G00
N050 GO1 ; N050 GO1 ;
N060 ; N060 ;
N070 ; N070 ;
N080 ; N080 ;
N090 ; N090 ;
N100 ; N100 ;
N110 ; N110 ;
N120 SO M05 N120 T0100 ;
T0102 ;
N140 51000 ;
N150 G41 G00 >N130TO100;M30;
ED2T 16:05:59 HØ1
BG-EDT 7 [ o sRH 1 sRH + 1 ς sRH - 1 [ REWIND J
- 643 -
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-62444E/03
shared screen 14 CRT

_-1
PAOGAλM 01234 N00010 02345 N00100
нØІ cxεлдг>
01236 ; 02345;
N10 G00 ; N100 G00 ;
N20 N200 XO ;
H30 N300 ;
N40 N400 M02 ;
N50
N60
N70 M02 ;
>
ØIT STRT QN FIN ALM 17:25:01 HkADl
Ľ ľ ] ľ ĺ Ľ ] Ĺ ĺ Ľ IPRGпt4ľ I LIB ľ ľ ľ ľ I OPA ] I ]
Explanations
Shared screen and When the selected tool post is in ED1T mode, pressíng the [PRGRM] soft
índívidual screen key dísplays a shared screen which shows the program for the fírst tool
post on the left and that for the second tool post on the right. However,
íf the tool post that ís not selected fails to satísfy any of the conditions
descríbed below, on1y the índívídual screen for the selected tool post is
displayed.

Bit 0 DHD of parameter No. 3106 ís set to 1.
The program screen for the selected tool post ís the 14 type
when the 14 CRT ís beíng used .
Both tool posts are set to ED1T mode.
Background edítíng is not specífíed for eíther tool post.
When the mode for the tool post that is not selected ís changed from ED1T
mode on the shared screen, the índívídual screen 14 type when the 14
CRT is beíng used for the selected tool post ís dísplayed.
On the 14 CRT, pressing the [PRGRM] soft key toggles between the
índívidual screen 9 type and the shared screen.
644
B-62aØε/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYiNG ATA
lndívídual screen 9 CRT
PKOGRAH 01234 н000іo 02345 xooіoo
HEAD1 HEAD2
01234 ; 02345;
N10 C00 ; H100 G00
N20 N200 XO ;
N30 N300
N40 Xθ ; H400 M02 ;
N50
N60
N70 M02 ;
>_
EDIT 3TКT ělІH FIN AØ 17:25:01 ØAD1
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ 1 PRGBM] гτB [ [ ] [ Oºк ] [
lndívídual screen 14 type screen oп the 14 CRT
PROGRAM 01234 N00010
01234 ;
N10 G00 ;
N20 ;
N30 ;
N40 ;
N50 ;
N60 ;
N70 M02 ;

>
EDIT 3TAT NIN FIN ALM 17:25:01 НØλD1
[ ] ][ [ ][ ][ ] [ºкGкм][ Lτa ][ ][ ][ OºК ][ l
lndívídual screen 9 type screen on the 14 CRT
ACTUAL P09ZT20N
01234N00010
ABθOLUTΣ RELATIVK F гм+ıN
X X
Y Y
Z E
λ λ
B 8 PROGRAM 01234 N00010 01234 ;
H10 000 ; N20 X100.; MACHІНE N30 X200.; X N40 X300. Z300.;
Y N50 X400.;
Z N60 X500.; λ
8 N70 M02 ;
G00 G25
097 C22 > G67 G80
099 C67
C21 054
C40 018 9CλT
EDIT 3TAT MI2i FIN ALlI 17:25:01 aEAD1
[ ] [λВ3] HZL] ALL] [ ] [ ] PRGBH] LIB ] [ ] [ ] [ 0ºк ] [ ]
\
645
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-624a4FJo3
Editïng operation Edítíng ís enabled on1y for the program for the selected tool post. The
program for the first or second tool post can be edíted on the same screen
Ьy selecting eíther tool post wíth the tool post selectíon signal.
9 CRT shared screen On the 9 CRT, the shared screen consísts of 80 digits x 25 línes. If the
tool post name specífíed wíth parameter No. 3 13 1 contains a character
other than alphanumeńc and specíal characters + , - . /
: ; < = > ? [ \ ] ^ _ and space , the character wi11 not be dísplayed
correctly. In such a case, operation soft keys [sRH f] and [SRH .]
are dísplayed as [sRH +] and [sRH -].
Límitatíons This functíon cannot Ьe used for background edítíng.
- ε,4ε -
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Press function key O e F ε F9 π E w T a to dísplay or set tool compensatíon values and
SCREENS DISPLAYED
other data.
BY FUNCTION KEY Thís sectíon descńbes how to display or set the following data:
offset value
2. Settíngs
tíme and part count
4.Workpiece origin offset value or workpiece coordínate system shíft
value
macro common varíables
6.Software operator s panel
life management data
This sectíon also describes following functions.
Direct input of tool offset value
Dírect ínput of tool offset value measured B
Counter ínput of offset value
Dírect ínput of workpíece coordínate system shíft
Y axis offset
Sequence number comparison and stop functíon
The following functíons depend on the specifıcatíons of the machíne tool
builder. See the manual issued by the machíne tool builder for details.
Direct input of tool offset va1ue
Dírect ínput of tool offset value measured B
Software operator s pаne1
Toollífe management data
647
11. SETTINΓ AND D SPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-sгaaaεı0з
Dedicated screens are provided for displaying and settíng tool offset
values and tool nose radius compensation values. Settíng and Dísplayíng
the Tooi Offset Va1ue
Procedure for setting and dísplayïng the tool offset value and the tooi nose radius
compensation value
оFзЕТ 1 Press function key
For the two-path control, select the tool post for which tool
compensation values are to be displayed with the tool post selection
switch.
2 Press chapter selectíon soft key [OFFSET] oг press several
tímes until the tool compensatíon screen is displayed.
Dífferent screens are dísplayed dependíng oп whether tool geometry
offset, wear offset, or neither ís applied.
OFFSET 00001 N00000
N0. Z. R T
001 .і 0
002 0
003 0
004 0
005 0
006 0
007 0
006 0
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
U W
> _
ØI 16:05:59
] [ sETING ] WORR ] [ ] [ OPRT ]

Wlthout tool geometry/wear offset
OFFSET/GEOMETRY 00001 N00000
NO. Z. A T
G 001 I . ... l 0
G 002 0
G 003 0
G 004 0
G 005 0
G 006 0
G 007 0
G 006 0
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
U W
Włth 1001 geometry offeet
648 - _
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
OFFSET/WEAR 00001 N00000
N0. Z. R T
W 001 0
W 002 0
W 003 0
W 004 0
W 005 0
W 006 0
W 007 0
W 008 0
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
U W
> _
MDI 16:05:59
φ ] [ GEOM ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ OPRT ] 1 [
W1th tool wear offØt
3 Move the cursor to the compensatíon value to be set or changed using
page keys and cursor keys, oг enter the compensatíon number for the
compensatíon value to be set or changed and press soft key
[].
4 To set a compensatíon value, enter a value and press soft key [1NPUT].
To change the compensatíon value, enter a value to add to the current
value a negatíve value to reduce the current value and press soft key
[NPUT]. Or, enter a new value and press soft key [1NPUT].
TIP is the number of the vírtual tool típ see Programming .
T1P may Ьe specifíed oп the geometry compensatíon screen oг oп the
wear compensatíon screen.
Explanations
Decímal point input A decimal point caв be used when enteríng a compensation value.
Other method An external input/output devíce can be used to ínput or output a cutter
compensatíon value. See Chapter III-8.
Toollength compensation values can be set usíng the followíng functions
descńbed in subsequent subsectíons: direct input of tool offset va1ue,
direct-input functíon B for tool offset measured, and counter ínput of
offset value.
Too1 offset memory 16 groups are provided for tool compensatíon. The number of groups can
Ьe optíonally extended to 32, 64, oг 99. For the two-path control, the
above number of groups can be used for each tool post. Too1 geometry
compensation oг weaτ compensation can be selected for each group.
11 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-s2Ø4εıo3
Dísablíng entry of In some cases, tool wear compensatíon oг tool geometry compensation
compensatíon values values cannot be ínput because of the settíngs in bits 0 WOF and 1
GOF of parameter 3290. The input of tool compensation values from
the MDI can Ьe inhíbíted for a specífıed range of offset numbers. The first
offset number for whích the ínput of a value ís ínhíbíted ís set in parameter
No. 3294. The number of offset numbers, starting from the specífied fírst
number, for whích the input of a value ís inhibited ís set in parameter No.
3295.
Consecutíve ínput values are set as follows:
1 When values aгe input for offset numbers, startíng from one for whích
ínput ís not ínhibíted to one for whích ínput ís ínhíbíted, a warníng is
issued and values are set only for those offset numbers for whích ínput
ís not ínhíbited.
2 When values aгe ínput for offset numbers, startíng from one for which
ínput ís ínhíbíted to one for whích ínput ís not ínhíbited, a warníng ís
íssued аnd no values are set.
Dísplayíng radíus and The radius and TIP are not dísplayed if the tool típ radius compensation
T1P option ís not dísplayed.
Changíng offset values When offset values have been changed duríng automatic operatíon, bít 4
duríng automatíc LGT аnd bit 6 LWM of parameter 5002 can be used for specífying
operatíon whether new offset values become valíd in the next move command or іn
the next T code comınand.
When geometry compensa- When geometry compensa-
LOT LWM tlon values and wear com- tlon values and wear com-
pensatlon values are sepa- pensatlon values ar not
rately speclfled separately speclfled
0 o Become valid in the next T Become valid ín the next T
code block code block
0 Become valid in the next T Become valíd in the next T
code block code block
0 1 Become va1id in the next T Become valid in the next move
code block command
Become valíd ín the next move Become valid in the next move
command command
в-s2aØεıoз OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
To set the dífference between the tool reference posítíon used in
programming the nose of the standard too1, turret center, etc. and the tool Dírect lnput of Too1
tip posítíon of a tool actually used as an offset value
Offset Va1ue
Procedure for direct ínput of tool offset value
setting of Z axís offset 1 Cut surface A іп manual mode with an actual too1.
va1ue Suppose that a workpíece coordínate system has been set.
2 Release the tool in X axís d vectíon on1y, without moving Z axis and
stop the spíndle.
3 Measure distance 3 from the zero point in the workpiece coordinate
system to surface A.
Set this value as the measured value along the Z-axís for the desired
offset number, usíng the followíng procedure:
/
OFFSET/GEOMETRY 00001 N00000
N0. X Z. R T
G 001 0
G 002 0
G 003 0
G 004 0
G 005 0
G 006 0
G 007 0
G 008 0
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
U W
Y H
>MZ120._
ØI 16:05:59
ι ςκo, sRH] [ ØUA ] [ INP . C. ] +ІNРUТ ] INPUT J
3-1 Press the functíon key or the soft key [OFFSET] to dísplay
the tool compensatíon screen. If geometry compensatíon values
and wear compensation values are separately specífied, display
the screen for either of them.
3-2 Move the cursor to the set offset number usíng cursor keys.
3-3 Press the address key OZ to be set.
651
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-62л44εıoз
3-4 Key in the measured va1ue β .
3-5 Press the soft key [MESURE].
The difference between measured value β and the coordínate is
set as the offset value.
Setting of X axís offset 4 Cut surface B in manual mode.
va1ue
5 Release the tool in the Z-axís direction wíthout movíng the X-axís
and stop the spindle.
6 Measure the diameter a of surface B.
Set thís va1ue as the measured value along the X-axis for the desíred
offset number in the same way as when settíng the value along the
Z-axís.
7 Repeat above procedure the same tíme as the number of the necessary
tools. The offset va1ue is automatícally calculated and set.
For example, in case when the coordinate value of surface B
in the diagram above ís , set [MEASURE] at offset
In thís case, is set as the X-axís offset value to offset
Explanatíons
Compensation values for Enter díameter values for the compensatíon values for axes for whí
a program created in diameter programming is used.
diameter programmíng
Too1 geometry offset If ineasured values aгe set on the tool geometry compensatíon screen, all
va1ue and tool wear compensation values become geometry compensatíon values and a11 wear
offset va1ue compensatíon values aгe set to O. If ineasured values are set on the tool
wear compensation screen, the dífferences between the measured
compensation values and the current wear compensatíon values become
the new compensation values.
Retractíng along two If a record button ís províded on the machíne, the tool can retract along
axes two axes when bit 2 PRC of parameter 5005 ís set and the record sígnal
ís used. Refer to the appropńate mаnual issued by the machíne tool
builder.
652
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
The direct ínput function B for tool offset measured ís used to set tool
compensatíon values and workpíece coordinate system shift values. Dírect lnput of tool
offset measured B
Procedure for settíng the tool offset va1ue
Too1 position offset values can be automatícally set by manually movíng
the tool until ít touches the sensor.
Refer to the appropriate manual íssued by the machine tool buílder for
actual operatíon.
1 Execute manual reference posítíon return.
By executíng manual reference posítíon return, a machíne coordínate
system is establíshed.
The tool offset value ís computed on the machíne coordínate system.
2 Set the offset wrítíng mode sígnal GOQSM to HIGH.
Refer to the appropńate manual íssued by the machine tool buílder
for actual operatíon.
The CRT dísplay is automatícally changed to the tool offset screen
geometry , аnd the OFST índícator starts blinking in the status
índícatíon aгea in the bottom of the screen, whích informs that the
offset wńtíng mode is ready.
3 Select a tool to be measured.
4 When the cursor ís not coincíded wíth the tool offset number desíred
to be set, move the cursor to the des цed offset number by page key and
cursor key.
Besides the cursor can also be coíncided with the tool offset number
desíred to set automatically by the tool offset number ínput sígnals
when parameter QNI
In thís case, the posítíon of the cursor cannot be changed on the tool
compensatíon screen using page keys or cursor keys.
5 Near the tool to the sensor by mаnual operatíon.
6 P1ace the tool edge to a contacting surface of the sensor by manual
handle feed.
Bríng the tool edge in contact with the sensor. Thís causes the offset
wrítíng sígnals +MIT1, -MIT1, +MIT2 or -MIT2 to input to CNC.
The offset wrítíng signal is set to HIGH, and the :
The axís ís ínterlocked іп thís d цectіon аnd íts feedíng is
stopped.
The tool offset value extracted by the tool offset memorу tool
geometry offset va1ue which corresponds to the offset number
shown by the cursor ís set up.
7 For both X-axis аnd Z-axís, theír offset value are set by the
operatíons 5 and 6.
8 Repeat operatíons 3 to 7 for necessary tools.
653
11. SETTING AND D1ЅPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-62444εıoз
9 Set the offset wríting sígnal mode GOQSM to LOW.
The writíng mode ís canceled and the blinking OFST indícator líght
goes off.
Procedure for settíng the work coordínate system shiit amount
Too1 posítion offset values cаn be automatícally set by mаnually moving
the tool until it touches the sensor.
Refer to the appropriate mаnual íssued by the machíne tool builder for
actual operatíon.
1 The tool compensatíon values are then calculated based on the
machine coordínates of the too1.
2 Execute mаnual reference posítíon return.
By executíng manual reference position return, the machine
coordinate system ís established.
The workpíece coordínate system shifting amount ís computed based
on the machíne coordínate system of the too1.
3 Set the workpíece coordínate system shífting amount wrítíng sígnal
mode WOQSM to HIGH.
Refer to the appropríate mаnual íssued by the machine tool buílder
for actual operatíon.
The CRT display is automatícally swítches to the workpiece shiftíng
screen, the WFST índícator starts blínkíng at the status índícator
аrea in the bottom of the screen, which ínform that the workpíece
coordinate system shíftíng amount wrítíng mode is ready.
4 Select a tool to be measured.
5 Check tool offset numbers.
The tool offset number correspondíng to the tool requíred for
measurement, shall be set in the parameter in advance.
Besides the tool offset number cаn be set automatícally by settíng the
tool offset number ínput sígnal with parameter QNI
Refer to the appropňate maпual issued by the machíne tool buílder for
detaíls.
6 Manually approach the tool to an end face of the workpíece.
7 P1ace the tool edge to the end face sensor of the workpiece by
manual handle feed.
The workpíece coordínate system shíftíng amount on the Z-axís ís
automatically set.
8 Feed the too1.
9 Set the workpíece coordinate system shífting amount writing sígnal
mode WOQSM to LOW.
The wńtíng mode ís canceled and the blinking WSFT indicator
light goes off.
Refer to the appropńate manual issued by the machíne tool buílder
for actual operation.
654
1 i. SEП1NG AND DISFLAYING DATA B-62д441È/б3 ОPERØТгON
By moving the tool untíl ít reaches the desired reference posítíon, the
correspondíng tool offset va1ue can be set. Counter lnput of Оifѕet
va1ue
Proeeìlure for counter ínput of offset va1ue
1 Mаnually move the reference tool to the reference posítíon.
2 Reset the relative coordínates along the axes to 0 see subsec.

3 Move the tool for which offset values are to be set to the reference
posítion.
4 Select the tool compensatíon screen. Move the cursor to the offset
value to be set using cursor keys.
OΣFSET/GEOMETRY 00001 N00000
NO. Z. R T
G 001 . ,, 0
G 002 0
G 003 0
G 004 0
G 005 0
G 006 0
G 007 0
G 008 0
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
U W
V H
>X_
Ø 16:05:59
l εκo,sRH]ε ØUR ] [ INP . C. ] +INPUT ] INPUT ]J
5 Press address key X oг Z and the soft key [].
Explanatíons
Geometry offset and When the above operations are performed on the tool geometry
wear offset compensatíon screen, tool geometry compensatíon values aгe ínput and
tool wear compensation values do not change.
When the above operations are performed on the tool wear compensation
screen, tool wear compensatíon values are input and tool geometry
compensation values do not change.
1. SFTT9Nü ND DISPLAY Nú DATA OPERATION 8-62444εı03
The set coordinate system can be shífted when the coordinate system
whích has been set by a G50 command oг G92 command for G code Setting the Warkpiece
system B oг C oг automatic coordínate system settíng ís dífferent from
COOrdinate SуѕterTº
the workpíece coordinate system assumed at programmíng.
Ѕhïfting Arrı0unt
Procedure for settí the wcırkpíece cоо пe1e ѕyѕterп ѕhі tξrıp amount
F8Ет
1 Press function key θEт.,ю
2 Press the contínuous menu key several times untíl the screen
wíth soft key [] ís dísplayed.
WORK sxτεт 00001 κ00o0o
sHIFT VAI,UE MEASURØNT
X І ііІ X
Z Z
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
u W
> MZ100. s 0 T0000
MDI ,t 16:05:59
[ ] [ іб І: . ] [ ] [ +INPUT ] INPUT ι
3 Press soft key [].
4 Move the cursor usíng cursor keys to the axis along which the
coordínate system is to be shífted.
5 Enter the shift value and press soft key [1NPUT].
Z
i
в-s2aØε/oз OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Explanatíons
When shift values Shift values become valid ímmedíately after they are set.
become valíd
Shíft values and Settíng a command G50 0г G92 for setting a coordinate system dísables
coordínate system the set shíft values.
settíng command
Example When G50 ; ís specífíed, the coordinate system
is set so that the current tool reference positíon ís X= ,
Z= regardless of the shift values.
Shíft values and If the automatic coordínate system settíng ís performed by manual
coordínate system reference posítíon return after shíft amount setting, the coordínate system
settíng ís shifted ínstantly.
Díameter or radius value Whether the shíft amount on the X axís ís díameter oг radius value
depends on that specífíed in program.
Examples When the actual posítion of the reference poínt ís X= díameter ,
Z= wíth respect to the workpíece origin but it should be X= ,
Z= , set the followíng shíft values:
,
657
1i SETTfNG AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-sгaaaεı0з
Too1 position offset values along the Y-axis can be set. Counter input of
offset values ís also possíble. Y Øxïs Offset
Direct input of tool offset value and dírect input functíon B for tool offset
measured are not available for the Y-axis.
Procedure for settíng the tool offset va1ue of the Y axís
С FТ
1 Press functíon key ,ю.
2 Press the contínuous menu key Q several tímes untíl the screen
with soft key [] is dísplayed.
3 Press soft key [].
The Y axis offset screen is displayed.
OFFSET 00001 N00000
N0.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
Џ W
>_
ØI ńitıt ırıttr 16:05:59
[ OFST . 2 ] [ W . sHFT ] [ ][ ] [ OPRT ]
3-1 Press soft key [GEOM] to display the tool geometry
compensation values along the Y-axis.

OFFSET/GEOMETRY 00001 N00000
N0. G 01
G 02
G 03
G 04
G 05
G 06
G 07
G 08
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
ЇЈ W
>_
ØI 16:05:59
ľ wEAR ] [ . ][ ][ ] [ OPRT ]
658
GPεRAT1ON 11. ŠEГΓING AND DiSPLAYiNG DATA ь-s2444E/03
3-2 Press soft key [WEAR] to display the tool wear compensation
values along the Y-axís.
OFFSET/WEAR 00001 N00000
NO.
W
W 02
W 03
W 04
W 05
W 06
W 07
W 08
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
U W
>_
MDI 16:05:59
[ _ _ ] [ GgoM ] [ ][ ] [ OPRT ]
4 Position the cursor at the offset number to be changed by usíng either
of the following methods:
Move the cursor to the offset number to be changed using page
keys and cursor keys.
Type the offset number and press soft key [].
5 Type the offset value.
6 Press soft key [WEAR]. The offset value ís set and displayed.
OFFSET/WEAR 00001 N00000
N0. Y
W 01
W 02
W 03
W 04 і
W 05
W 06
W 07
W 08
ACTUAL POsITION RELATIVE
U W
>_
ØІ 16:05:59
κo.sRн ] [ мεssuR ] ] +INPUT ] INPtJT ]
659
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATiON 8-62444E/03
Procedure for counter input cf the ofiset vafue
To set relatíve coordinates along the Y-axís as offset values:
1 Move the reference tool to the reference point.
2 Reset relatíve coordínate Y to 0 see subsec.
3 Move the tool for which offset values are to be set to the reference
poínt.
4 Move the cursor to the va1ue for the offset number to be set, press
Y , then press soft key [].
Relative coordínate Y or V ís now set as the offset value.
660
в-в24Øει0з OPERATION 11. SETTING AND D1SPLλY1NG DATA
1 Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting data
screen. On this screen, the operator can also enable/dí.sable parameter Dísplayìng and
wńtíng, enable/dísable the automatic ínsertíon of sequence numbers in
Enteríng Settíng Data
program edíting, and perform settíngs for the sequence number
comparíson and stop functíon.
See Chapter III-10 for automatic ínsertion of sequence numbers.
See subsection for the sequence number comparison and stop
functíon. This subsectíon descríbes how to set data.
Procedure for settíng the settíng data
1 Select the MD1 mode.
ОFøЕТ 2 Press functíon key aетт,
3 Press soft key [SETING] to display the setting data screen.
Thís screen consists of several pages.
Press page key [ ] or , Eo until the desired screen is displayed.
An example of the setting data screen is shown below.
SETTING HANDY 00001 N00000
PAAAMETEA WRITE _ O:DISABLE 1:ENABLE
TV CHECR = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
PUNCH CODE = 1 O:EIA 1:IS0
INPUT UNIT = 0 O:MM 1:INCH
I/O CHANNEL = 0 0-3:CHANNEL NO.
SEQUENCE NO.= 0 O:OFF 1:ON
TAPE FORMAT = 0 O:NO CNV 1:F15
SEQUENCE STOP = 0 PROGRAM NO.
SEQUENCE STOP = 0 SEQUENCE N0.
> _
ØI 16 05 59
[ OFFSET ] Øь e ] [ WORR ] [ ][ OPRT ]
SETTING HANDY 00001 N00000
MIRROR IMAGE X= 0 O:OFF 1:ON
MIRROR IMAGE 2= 0 O:OFF 1:ON
> _
ØI 16:05:59
[ OFFSET ] [ і Гі ] [ WORR ] [ ] [ OPRT j
Ø1
ı ï. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-s2aaaεıoз
4 Move the cursor to the ítem to be changed by pressing cursor keys
f 1
,or .
5 Enter a new value and press soft key [1NPUT].
Contents of settíngs
PARAMETER WR1TE Setting whether parameter writíng ís enabled or dísabled.
0: Dísabled
1 : Enabled
TV CHECK Setting to perform TV check.
0 : No TV check
1 : Perform TV check
PUNCH CODE settíng code when data ís output through reader puncher interface.
0 : EIA code output
1 : ISO code output
1NPUT UN1T Setting a program input unit, inch oг metńc system
0: Metríc
1 : Inch
1/0 CHANNEL Usíng channel of reader/puncher interface.
0: Channel0
1 : Channell
2: Channel2
3: Channel3
SEQUENCE STOP settíng of whether to perform automatíc ínsertíon of the sequence number
or not at program edit in the EDIT mode.
0: Does not perform automatíc sequence number ínsertíon.
1: Perform automatic sequence number insertion.
TAPE FORMAT Settíng the F15 tape format conversíon.
0: Tape format ís not converted.
1: Tape format ís converted.
See PROGRAMMING for the F15 tape format.
SEQUENCE STOP Settíng the sequence number wíth whích the operatíon stops for the
sequence number comparison and stop functíon and the number of the
program to which the sequence пumbег belongs
MIRROR 1MAGE Settíng of mirror ímage ON/OFF for each axes.
0 : Míпoг ímage off
1 : Mіпoг image oп
Others
Page key O oг i can also be pressed to display the SETTING
TIMER screen. See subsection for this screen.
662
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
If a block contaíning a specífıed sequence number appears in the program
beíng executed, operatíon enters síngle block mode after the block ís Sequence Number
executed.
Conıparison and Stop
Procedure for sequence number comparíson and stop
1 Select the MD1 mode.
П..
2 Press function key Ø-
. ,,,,
3 Press chapter selectíon soft key [sET1NG].
4 Press page key oг several tímes until the following screen
ís displayed.
sεТТτκc HANDY 00001 N00000
PARAMETER WRITE = 1 O:DISBBLE 1:ENABLE
ry CHECK = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
PUNCH CODE = 1 O:EIA 1:Is0
INPUT UNIT = 0 O:λΩd 1:INCH
τ/o CHANNEL = 0 0-3:CHANNEL N0.
SEQUENCE NO. = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
TAPE FORMAT = 0 O:NO CNV 1:F10/11
sEQUENCE STOP = 0 PROGRAM NO.
SEQUENCE STOP = SEQUENCE NO.
> _
ØI 16:05:59
ı [ OFFSET ] [ іі ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ OPRT ] I
5 Enter in PROGRAM NO. for SEQUENCE STOP the number 1 to
9999 of the program contaíníng the sequence number with whích
operatíon stops.
6 Enter in SEQUENCE NO. for SEQUENCE STOP with fıve or less
dígíts the sequence number wíth which operatíon ís stopped.
7 When automatic operation is executed, operation enters síngle block
mode at the block containíng the sequence number whích has been
set.
663
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-s2444ε/o3
Expianatíons
Gequence number after After the specified sequence number ís found duńng the executíon of the
the program ís executed program, the sequence number set for sequence number compensatíon
and stop ís decremented by one. When the power ís turned on, the settíng
of the sequence number ís O.
м Exceptíonal blocks If the predetermíned sequence number ís found in a block іп which a11
commands are those to be processed wíthín the CNC control unít, the
execution does not stop at that block.
Example
N1 1=1 ;
N2 IF [ 1 EQ 1] GOTO 08 ;
N3 GOTO 09 ;
N4 M98 P1000 ;
N5 M99 ;
In the example shown above, íf the pгedeteгmіned sequence number ís
found, the execution of the program does not stop.
stop in the canned cycle If the predetermíned sequence number ís found in a blαk whích has a
canned-cycle commаnd, the execution of the program stops after the
return operatíon ís completed.
When the same If the predetenmíned sequence number appears twíce oг moгe ín a
sequence number is program, the executíon of the program stops after the block in whích the
found severai times in predetermined sequence number ís found for the fírst time is executed.
the program
Biock to be repeated a If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block which ís to be
specífíed number of executed repeatedly, the executíon of the program stops after the block ís
times executed specífied tímes.
664
OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B-62444E/03
Various run tímes, the total number of machíned parts, number of parts
requíred, and number of machíned parts can be dísplayed. Thís data can Displaying and Setting
be set by parameters or on thís screen except for the total number of
Run Time,Parts Count,
machíned parts and the time duríng whích the power is on, which can be
and Time set on1y by parameters .
Thís screen can also dísplay the clock tíme. The time can be set on the
screen.
Procedure for Displayíng and setting Run Time, Parts Count and Time
1 Select the MDI mode.
F.ЕТ 2 Press function key 8Е
3 Press chapter selection soft key [sET1NG].
4 Press page key
f
or 4 several times until the following screen
ís dísplayed.
sETTING TIMER 00001 N00000
PARTS TOTAL = 14
PARTs REQUIRED = 0
PARTS COUNT = 23
POWER ON = 4H 31M
OPERATING TIME = OК OM Os
CUTTING TIME = OH 37M 5S
FREE PØOSE = OH OM OS
CYCLE TIME = OH OM OS
DATE = 1993/07/05
TIME = 11:32:52
> _ s 0 T0000
ØI ,t 16:05:59
\ [ OFFSET ][ ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ OPRT ] /
5 To set the number of parts requíred, move the cursor to PARTS
REQUIRED аnd enter the number of parts to be machined.
6 To set the clock, move the cursor to DATE or TIME, enter a new date
oг tíme, then press soft key [1NPUT].
Display items
PARTS TOTAL Thís value ís incremented by one when M02, M30, oг aп M code specified
by parameter 6710 ís executed. Thís value cannot be set on thís screen.
Set the value in parameter 6712.
PARTS REGIUIRED It ís used for setting the number of machined parts requíred.
When the 0 is set to it, there ís no limitation to the number of parts.
A1so, íts settíng can Ьe made by the parameter NO. 6713 .
665
11. SETTING AND D1ЅPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-62444E/03
PARTS COUNT Thís value ís íncremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specífied
by parameter 6710 ís executed. The value can also Ьe set by parameter
6711. In general, this value ís reset when ít reaches the number of parts
requíred. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool bui1der for
details.
POWER ON Displays the total tíme whích the power ís on. Thís va1ue cannot be set
on thís screen but can be preset in parameter 6750.
OPERATING T1ME Indícates the total run time duríng automatic operatíon, excluding the
stop and feed hold time.
This value can be preset in parameter 6751 or 6752.
CUTTING T1ME Dísplays the total time taken by cuttíng that involves cuttíng feed such as
línear ínterpolatíon GO1 and cігculаr ínterpolatíon G02 0г G03 . This
value can be preset in parameter 6753 0г 6754.
FREE PURPOSE Thís va1ue caп be used, for example, as the total tíme duríng whích coolant
flows. Refer to the mаnual issued by the machíne tool builder for detaíls.
CYCLE T1ME Indícates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and
feed hold time. This is automatícally preset to 0 when a cycle start is
performed at reset state. It is preset to 0 even when power ís removed.
DATA and T1ME Displays the current date and time. The date and tíme can be set on thís
screen.
Explanatíons
Usage When the commаnd of M02 0г M30 ís executed, the total number of
machíned parts and the number of machíned parts are íncremented by one.
Therefore, create the program so that M02 or M30 ís executed every time
the processíng of one part ís completed. Furthermore, if an M code set
to the parameter NO. 6710 ís executed, counting ís made in the simílar
manner. A1so, it is possible to dísable countíng even if M02 or M30 ís
executed parameter PCM No. 6700Ø ís set to 1 . For details, see the
mаnual issued by machíne tool builders.
Restríctions
Run tíme and part count Negatíve value cannot Ьe set. A1so, the setting of M and S of run tíme
settíngs ís valid from 0 to 59.
Negative value may not be set to the total number of machined parts.
Time Settí:ıgS Neither negative value nor the value exceedíng the value in the followíng
table can be set.
Item NiaxImum value Item rvlaximum value
Year 2085 Hour 23
_ Month--- 12 -- Minute _ `o 59 ---
Day ı 31 s Secoпd 59 ,
666 --
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETΠNG AND D1SPLAYING DATA
Dísplays the workpiece origín offset for each workpíece coordínate
Dísplayíng and Settíng system G54 to G59 and external workpiece origin offset. The workpiece
ońgín offset and external workpíece origín offset caп be set on this screen.
the Workpíece Orígín
Offset Va[ue
Procedure for Displayíng and settíng the Workpiece Orígin Offset Va1ue
ОFFFТ 1 Press functíon key
2 Press chapter selection soft key [WORK].
The workpíece coordinate system setting screen ís displayed.
WORR cOORDINATES 00001 N00000
NO. DATA NO. DATA
00 . .ІФ 02 X
EXT Z G55 Z
01 x 03 X
G54 Z G56 Z
> _ S 0 T0000
ØI 16:05:59
[ OSFSET ] [ SETING ] ] ] [ OPRT ] 1
\
3 The screen for dísplaying the workpíece origin offset values consísts
of two or more pages. Dísplay a desíred page іn eíther of the
followíng two ways:
Press the page up or page down O key.
Enter the workpiece coordínate system number 0: external
workpiece ońgín offset,l to 6: workpiece coordínate systems G54 to
G59 and press operation selection soft key [].
4 Turn off the data protectíon key to enable wríting.
5 Move the cursor to the workpíece ońgín offset to be changed.
6 Enter a desíred value Ьy pressíng numeríc keys, then press soft key
[1NPUT]. The entered value ís specífied ín the the workpíece orígín
offset value. Oг, by entering a desired value wíth numeńc keys and
pressíng soft key [NPUT], the entered va1ue caп be added to the
previous offset value.
7 Repeat 5 and 6 to change other offset values.
8 Turn on the data protectíon key to dísable wrítíng.
667
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-s2aaaεıoз
This functíon is used to compensate for the difference between the
programmed workpíece coordinate system and the actual workpiece lnput of ineasured
coordinate system. The measured offset for the origín of the workpiece
workpiece origín
coordinate system can Ьe ínput on the screen such that the command
offsets
values match the actual dimensions.
Selectíng the new coordinate system matches the programmed coordínate
system with the actual coordínate system.
Procedure for lnputtíng of Measured Workpíece Orígín Offsets
1 When the workpiece ís shaped as shown above, cut surface A
manually.
2 Move the tool along the X axís wíthout changíng the Z coordinate
then stop the spíndle.
3 Measure distance 3 between surface A and the programmed orígín of
the workpiece coordinate system as shown above.
, 4 Press function key .,тт,a
668
в-sгaØεıOз OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYfNG DATA
5 To display the workpiece ońgín offset setting screen, press the
chapter selectíon soft key [WORK].
ØOØ COORDINATES 01234 N56789
G54
NO. DATA NO. DATA
00 X 02 X
εxт Z G55 Z
01 x 03 x
G54 Z G56 2
> Z100. s 0 T0000
ØI 16:05:59
1 [ NO . SRH ] [ ØUR ] [ ] [ +INPUT ] [ INPUT 7 1
6 Posítíon the cursor to the workpíece ońgín offset value to be set.
7 Press the address key for the axís along whích the offset ís to be set
Z-axís ín this example .
8 Enter the measured value a then press the [MEASUR] soft key.
9 Cut surface B manually.
10 Move the tool along the Z axís wíthout changíng the X coordínate
then stop the spíndle.
11 Measure the díameter of surface A a then enter the diameter at X.
Restríctions
Consecutíve ínput Offsets for two or moгe axes cannot Ьe input at the same time.
Duríng program Thís functíon cannot be used while a program ís being executed.
executíon
Effect from other shift Any shift specífied for the workpíece coordinate system or external offset
va1ue remaíns effective when this functíon ís used.
669
Ёτ т Nú AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION e-s2aaaεı0з
Dísplays common variables 100 to 149 or 100 to 199, and 500 to
53 1 ог 500 to Ø99 on the CRT. When the absolute value for a commoп Díspίаyg and Setting
variable exceeds 99999999, ís dísplayed. The values for
Custom аOCO variables can be set on this screen. Relatíve coordínates can also be set
СOmгюп aríab[es
to varíables.
Procedure for dísplayíng and settíng custom macro common varîabicѕ
1 Press functíon key
2 Press the continuous menu key Q, then press chapter selection
ĺ t ] ι млoяo ĺ
soft key [MACRO].The followíng screen ís dísplayed: aoo oo
1
Continuous menu key
VARIABLE 00001 N00000
NO. DATA NO. DATA
100 ,јІІІ.ІІt 108
101 109
102 110
103 111
104 112
105 113
106 114
107 115
ACTUAL POSITION RELATIVE
W
> _ S 0 T0000
ØI 16:05:59
][ ] [ ] [ ] [ INPUT ] J

3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set usíng eíther of the
followíng methods:
- Enter the vańable number and press soft key [].
- Move the cursor to the varíable number to set by pressíng page keys
P oE І i and/or and cursor keys , O ,and/or y i
4 Enter data wíth numeric keys аnd press soft key [1NPUT].
5 To set a relatíve coordínate in a variable, press address key or
Z , then press soft key [1NRC.].
6 To set a blank ín a varíable, just press soft key [1NPUT]. The value
fıeld for the variable becomes blank.
670
в-624 k1É Оз OPERATION 11. SETTlNG AND DATA
Wıth thís functíon, functíons of the swítches on the machine operator s
panel can be controlled from the CRT/MDI pane1. ïspfayíng and Settíng
Jog feed can be performed using numeric keys.
the Ѕottware
Operators PaneI
PYηCеC+uгe f0; d9sрlayíng and settíng the software operätor s paneí
оθЕт 1 Press functíon key
2 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft oPиз
L C
key [OPR].
Е r 2oo
1 3 The screen consísts of several pages.
Continuous menu key мωε
Press page key ` oг untíl the desíred screen is displayed.
OPERATOR S PANEL 00000 N00000
в ØI ,MEM EDIT HND JOG REF
HANDLE AXIS : ,HX H2 HC HY
STEP MULTI. : 1 10, 100
RAP2D OVRD. :,100 50 25 FO
JOG OVRD .
-
FEED OVRD. . 100

ACTUAIL POSITION ABSOLUTE
X Z
>
REF ,t 16:05:59
[ MACRO ] [ Ø ] [ .В. ][ ][
OPERATOR S PANEL 00000 N00000
OFF ON
SINGLE BLOCK: OFF ON
MACHINE LOCK: OFF ON
PROTECT KEY : PAOTECT RELEASE
FEED HOLD OFF
ACTUAL POSITION ABSOLUTE
X Z
ØI 59
[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] ľ ][ ][
4 Move the cursor to the desíred switch by pressíng cuı sar key Γι T i гr
Π
671
11. SEľT1NG AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-624л4E/03
5 Push the cursor move key l i oгІ to match the mark to an
arbítrary posítíon and set the desired condítion.
6 Press one of the following arrow keys to perform manual contínuous
feed. Press the l 5 ј key together wíth an arrow key to perforτn
manual continuous rapid traverse.
gr 7г gt
Э
4 5 I
1 2 6
xplanatíons
Va1id φ ations The valid operatíons on the software operator s pаne1 are shown below.
Whether to use the CRT or machíne operator s pane1 for each group of
operatíons can be selected by parameter 7200.
Groupl : Mode selection
Group2 : Selectíon of manual continuous feed axis, manual continuous
rapid traverse
Group3 : Selectíon of manual pulse generator feed axis, selec?ioі ı cf
manual pulse magnification x1, x10, x100
Group4 : Manual continuous federate, federate over rıd , rapid traverse
override
Group5 : Optional block skíp, single block, machine 1ock, dry run
Group6 : Protect key
Group7 : Feed hold
Gíspiay The groups for which the machíne operator s pаne1 ís selected by
parameter 7200 are not dísplayed on the software operator s pane1.
Screens on which When the CRT índícates other than the software operator s panel screen
manual ^спtínuous feed and díagnostic screen, manual contínuous feed ís not conducted even if
is va1id the arrow key ís pushed.
Manuai continuous feed The feed axís and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set
and arrow keys wíth parameters Nos. 7210 to 7217 .
A Generai purpose Eight optíonally definable swítches агe added as an extended functíon of
swítches the software operator s pаne1. The name of these swítches can be set by
parameters as character stríngs of max. 8 characters. For the meanings of
these swítches, refer to the manual íssued by machine tool builder.
672
s-s2aØεıo3 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Toollife data can Ьe dísplayed to ínform the operator of the current state
of tool lífe management. Groups whích requíre tool changes are also Displaying and Setting
dísplayed. The tool lífe counter for each group can be preset to an
Tει01 Lífe Management
arbítrary value. Too1 data execution data can be reset or cleared. To
Data
regíster or modify toollife management data, a program must be created
and executed. See Explanations in thís sectíon for details.
Procedure for dísplay and settíng the tool lífe management data
1 Press functíon key ø o
ι
2 Press the contínuous menu key to dísplay chapter selection soft C Ø 9
key [TOOLLF]. σ 0 ρ oσ
1
3 Press soft key [TOOLLF].
Contínuous menu key
4 Oпe page dísplays data on two groups. Pressing page key i oг

successívely displays data on the following groups. Up to four
group Nos., for which the Too1 Change signal is being issued, are
dísplayed at the bottom of each page. An arrow shown in the figure is
dísplayed for fıve oг moгe groups, íf exísts.
TOOL LIFE DATA 03000 N00060
SELECTED GROUP 000
[е 1ј Іј ЈЂ : LIFE 0150 COUNT 0000
0034 0078 0012 0056
0090 0035 0026 0061
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 1
GROUP 002 : LIFE 1400 COUNT 0000
0062 0024 0044 0074
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
TO BE CHANGED : 003 004 005 006 --->
>
Ø 16:05:59
ј MACRO ] [ ] [ OPR ] [ ] [ OPRT /
5 To dísplay the page contaíning the data for a group, eIiter the group
number and press soft key [].
The cursor can be moved to аn arbítrary group by pressíng cursor key
f
oг O .
6 To change the va1ue in the lífe counter for a group, move the cursor to
the group, enter a new value four dígíts , аnd press [1NPUT]. The lífe
counter for the group indícated Ьy the cursor ís preset to the entered
value. Other data for the group ís not changed.
673
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-s2aaaεıoз
7 To reset the tool data, move the cursor on the group to reset, then press
the [ OPRT ], [CLEAR], and [EXEC] soft keys in thís order.
All executíon data for the group índícated by the cursor ís cleared
together wíth the marks , or .
Explaınatíona
Registering tool iífe The toollífe management data must be executed to regíster ít in the CNC
rnanagement data memory.
3. TAPE mode
mode
Edíting Dísplay
Part program
storage Memoгу
editing area
2. MEM mode
Counter
presenting
Too1 lífe data area Memoгу η Dísplay
1 Load the program for toollífe management in the EDIT mode, as wíth
an ordínary CNC tape.
The program wíll be regístered in the part program memorу and wíll
be made ready for display and edíting.
2 Perform a cycle start operatíon in the MEM mode to run the program.
The data will be stored in the toollife data агea of the memory; at the
same tíme, the already exísting tool lífe data of all groups wí11 be
cancelled and the life counters wíll be cleared. Data once stored ís not
erased by turníng the power off.
3 Executíng a cycle start operatíon in the TØE mode ínstead of the
operation of 1 , stores the program contents directly onto the toollife
data агea. In this case, however, dísplay and edítíng cannot be done as
in 1 . TAPE mode ís not always pгepагed according to the machíne
tool buílders.
674
в-sг4Øεı0з OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Dísplay contents
1
TOOL LIFE DATA 03000 N00060
SELECTED GROUP 000
- Іі : LIFE 0150 COUNT 0007
OOк34 0078 0ё12 0056 w
0090 0035 0026 0061
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
GROUP 002 : LIFE 1400 COUNT 0000
0062 0024 0044 0074
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
TO BE CHANGED : 003 004 005 006 --->
>
Ø м 16:05:59
[ MACRO ] [ ] [ OPR ] [ [ OPRT ]
The first line ís the títle 1íne.
In the second line the group number of the current command is
dísplayed.
When there ís no group number of the current cormnand, 0 ís dísplayed.
In línes 3 to 7 the toollífe data of the group ís displayed.
The third line dísplays group number,lífe and the count used.
The life count ís chosen by parameter LTM No. 6800 2 as either
ınínutes or hours or number of tímes used.
In línes 4 to 7, tool numbers are dísplayed. In this case, the tool ís
selected ín the order, 0034 > 0078 0012 056 0090 ...
The meaníng of each mark before the tool numbers is :
: Shows the lífe has fıníshed.
: Shows that the skíp comnıand has been accepted.
Shows that the tool ís currently beíng used.
The life counter counts for tool wíth
ís dísplayed when the next command ís issued by the group to
whích ít belongs.
Línes 8 to 12 are next group lífe data to the group dísplayed in lines 3
t0 7.
In the thírteenth 1ine the group number when the tool change signal ís
beíng emitted ís displayed. The group number dísplay appears in
ascendíng order. When ít cannot be completely dísplayed, ---> ís
dísplayed.
675
ı 1. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION в-sг444εı0з

Ѕettíng and Díspiayíng
В-axís Тºo
Cºmpensatíon
settıng and displayíng B-axís tool compensatíon
1 Press the 5 ЕТТo functíon key.
2 Press the ρ contínuous menu key several tímes. Then, press the
[] chapter selectíon key.
When the optíon for tool geometry and wear compensatíon ís
not províded,
ĺ
OFFSET B-AXIs 00200 N00000
No. DATA
51 .
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
>_ s 0 т0000
MDI ,. ,. 15:29:51
] [ ] [ ] [ ] L 1
When the optíon for tool geometry and wear compensation is
províded,
OFFSET B-AXIS 00200 MOOOÓ
NO. Ø GEOMETRY
51

4 Position the cursor to the ítem to be set or modified, usíng the cursor
keys.
676
в-624Øεıoз OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
5 Enter the value, then press the INPUT key.
Explanatíons The offset caп be set to a value in the following valid data ranges.
Offset Metr1c lnput lnch lnput
1S-B to to
1S-C to to
Specíal B-axís offsets are input or output together wíth usual offsets.
When the option for tool geometry and wear compensation ís provided,
wear offsets and geometry offsets can be specified separately. A tool
offset consists of both the specífíed wear offset and geometry offset.
In two-path control, tool offsets can be specífıed for each tool post or both
tool posts, dependíng on the setting of COF, bít 0 of parameter No. 8242.
677
1. SЕTTiNG AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-62444E/o3
When the CNC and machíne are connected, parameters must be set to
determine the specíficatíons and functions of the machine in order to fu11y ЅCRεεNв DlвPLAYED
utílize the characteristics of the servo motor or other parts.
BY KEY eva.Eм This chapter descňbes how to set parameters on the MDI pаne1.
Parameters can also be set wíth external input/output devíces such as the
Hаndy File see Chapter III-9 .
In addítion, pitch error compensatíon data used for ímproving the
precísíon in positioning with the ball screw on the machine can Ьe set or
dísplayed by the operatíons under functíon key .
See Chapter III-7 for the díagnostic screens dísplayed by pressing
functíon key 6уЅTЕ ,
678
e-s24Øε/Oз OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
When the CNC and machíne are connected, parameters are set to
Dísp[aying and Setting determine the specífıcations and functions of the machine in order to fully
utilíze the characteństics of the servo motor. The settíng of parameters
Parameters
depends on the machíne. Refer to the parameter list prepared by the
machíne tool builder.
Normally, the user need not change parameter setting.
Procedure for displayíng and settíng parameters
1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WR1TE to enab1e wńtíng. See the procedure
for enabling/dísabling parameter writing described below.
2 Press functíon key BTEM
3 Press chapter selection soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter
screen.
PΣц2AMETER sETTING 00010 N00002
0000 SEQ iNI ISO TVC
0001 FCV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 І/O CHANNEL 0
0022 0
> _
MDI 16:05:59
[ PARAM ] [ DGNOs ] [ PMC ] [ SYSTEM ] [ OPAT ] J
4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in
either of the followíng ways:
Enter the parameter number and press soft key [] .
Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys, MaE
o,ОE t
and , and cursor keys, i , O , and y
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeńc keys and press
soft key [1NPUT] in the MDI mode. The parameter ís set to the entered
value and the value ís dísplayed.
6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WR1TE to dísable wríting.
679
11. SF..ГГING ANJ DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-62444E103

Γ roc dtı P for slзlíng/d ıѕрiaуít raın tcı wrí`íпg
1 Select the MD1 mode or enter state emergency stop.
2 Press function key OFFBET 8EПЬЕ0
3 Press soft key [SETING] to display the setting screen.
SETTING HØY 00001 N00000
PARAMETER WRITE = O:DISABLE 1:ENABLE
TV CHECK = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
PUNCH CODE = 1 O:EIA 1:IS0
INPUT UNIT = 0 O:MM 1:INCH
I/0 CHANNEL = 0 0-3:CHANNEL N0.
sEQUENCE N0. = 0 O:OFF 1:ON
TØE FORMAT = 0 O:NO CNV 1:F10/11
sEQUENCE STOP 0 PROGRAM NO.
sEQUENCE STOP = 11 SEQUENCE NO.
> _ s 0 T0000
ØІ 16:05:59
[ OFFSET ] ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ OPRT ] 1
4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WR1TE using cursor keys.
5 Press soft key [ OPRT ], then press [1: ON] to enab1e parameter
writíng.
At this time, the CNC enters the P/S alarm state No. 100 .
6 After setting parameters, return to the setting screen. Move the cursor
to PARAMETER WR1TE and press soft key [ OPRT ] , then press
[0: OFF].
7 Depress the јØј key to release the alarm conditíon. If P/S a1arm No.
000 has occurred, however, turn off the power supply and then turn it
on, otherwise the P/S alarm ís not released.
Explanatíons
settíng parameters wíth See Chapter 8 for setting parameters with external ínput/output devíces
external ínput/output such as the Handy Fí1e.
devíces
Parameters that requíre Some parameters aгe not effective until the power is turned off and on
turning off the power again after they are set. Settíng such parameters causes alarm 000. In this
case, turn off the power, then turn ít on agaín.
Parameter list Refer to the FANUC Series 16/18160/180-MODEL B Parameter Manua1
B-61810E for the parameter 1ist.
Settíng data Some parameters can be set on the setting screen íf the parameter list
índícates Settíng entry ís acceptable . Settíng 1 for PARAMETER
WR1TE ís not necessary when three parameters are set on the settíng
screen.
680
в-62444εıoз OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
If pítch error compensatíon data ís specífied, pitch errors of each axís can
be compensated ín detectíon unít per axis. Dispiaying and Setting
Pítch error compensatíon data is set for each compensatíon poínt at the
PÍtCh Error
intervals specified for each axís. The origín of compensatíon ís the
Compensation Data reference posítíon to which the tool ís returned.
The pitch error compensatíon data is set accordíng to the characteństícs
of the machine connected to the NC. The content of this data vańes
according to the machine model. If ít ís changed, the machíne accuracy
ís reduced.
In pńnciple, the end user must not alter this data.
Pítch error compensatíon data can be set with external devíces such as the
Hаndy Fí1e see Chapter ПI-9 . Compensatíon data can also Ьe wńtten
directly wíth the MDI pane1.
The following parameters must be set for pítch error compensatíon. Set
the pítch error compensation value for each pitch error compensatíon
point number set by these parameters.
In the following example, 33 ís set for the pítch error compensation point
at the reference positíon.
Pítch error compensation va1ue absolute value
3 _ Compensatíon number pa-
Compensation number parameter Γ j rameter for the compensa-
for the reference posítíon No. і point havíng the largest
L v _ aN lu o e 3 3620 2 Ì 622
1 1
----1 1 Γ J 1
1
311 32 33 4 35 36 ::і7
э
/ 1 Reference posí- І .
І Γ_ J -1 tion L _ _ _
Compensatíon magnífícatíon
< > parameter No. 3623
l _ _ J
Compensatíon number parameter Compensation interval
for the compensatíon poínt havíng
the smallest value No. 3621 parameter No. 3624
Compensation l 31 32 І 33 І 35 36 І
ompensatíon ј -1 -1 ј -1 ј -3
value to be set
Number of the pítch error compensatíon poínt at the reference posítion
for each axis : Parameter 3620
Number of the pítch error compensation point havíng the smallest
value for each axis : Parameter 3621
Number of the pitch error compensation poínt having the largest value
for each axís : Parameter 3622
Pítch error compensation magnifıcatíon for each axís : Parameter 3623
Interval of the pitch error compensatíon poínts for each axis :
Parameter 3624
681
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION 8-62444Eı0з
Procedure for d splaying and setting the pítch error compensation data
1 Set the followíng parameters:
Number of the pítch error compensation poínt at the reference
posítion for each axis : Parameter 3620
Number of the pítch error compensatíon poínt having the smallest
value for each axis : Paгameteг 3621
Number of the pitch error compensatíon poínt having the largest
value for each axis : Parameter 3622
Pítch error compensation magnífıcatíon for each axis : Parameter
3623
Interval of the pitch error compensatíon poínts for each axís :
Paranıeter 3624
2 Press functíon key 3Y9TEM
3 Press the contínuous menu key f Ј, then press chapter selection soft ] P СH ] J
ι key [P1TCH]. a00000
The following screen ís dísplayed: 1
Contínuous menu key
PIT-ERROR sETTING 00000 N00000

0000 0 0010 0 0020 0
0001 0 0011 0 0021 0
0002 0 0012 0 0022 0
0003 0 0013 0 0023 0 X 0004 0 0014 0
0024 0
0005 0 0015 0 0025 0
0006 0 0016 0 0026 0
0007 0 0017 0 0027 0
0008 0 0018 0 0028 0
0009 0 0019 0 0029 0
>
МЕМ 16:05:59
[ [ NO.SRК ] [ ON:1 ] [ OFF:O ][ +INPUT ] [ INPUT ] J
4 Move the cursor to the compensatíon poínt number to be set in either
of the followíng ways:
Enter the compensation point number and press the [] soft
key.
Move the cursor to the compensatíon poínt number usíng the page
keys, , oE and , and cursor keys, O, O, O, and

5 Enter a value with numeńc keys and press the [1NPUT] soft key.
682
OPERATlON 11. SF_TГ1NG AND DlSF [_AY1NG DATA 8-Ѕ2444 E/03
Thc program number, sequence number, and current CNC status aгe
always dísplayed on the screen except when the power ís turned on, a
UθSPLAY1NC τHE
system a1arm occurs, or the PMC screen ís displayed.
PPUGRAM NUMBEF , If data setting oг the ínput/output operation ís incorrect, the CNC does not
SEQUENCE NUMBER, accept the operatíon аnd displays a warning message.
This sectíon descríbes the dísplay of the program number, sequence ANrJ ЅτAτUS. AND
number, and status, аnd warníng messages displayed for íncorrect data
WARN NG МES зAGES settíng oг ínput/output operatíon.
F R DATA SEπІNG OR
NF Uτ/C?UTPUτ
OPERAτ10N
The program number and sequence number are dísplayed at the top ríght
on the screen as shown below. isplaying the F rogram
Number and sequence /
Number PROGRAM
-- Socuence No. 01000
N100 G50 XO Z0. ; P o9ram No.
N101 G00 X100. Z50. ;,
01 X230. 256. ;
N103 W-10. ;
N104 U-120. ;
N105 M02 ;
> _
EDIT 16: 05 : 59
ľ ][ CMECK ] CŮØT ][ NEXT ] [ oPRT ]
/
The program number and sequence number dísplayed depend on the
screen and are gíven below:
On the program screen in the EDIT mode on Background edit screen :
The program No. beíng edíted аnd the sequence number just pńor to the
cursor are índicated.
Other than above screens :
The program No. and the sequence No. executed last are írıdícated.
IØedíately after program nuınber search or sequence number
search :
Immedíately after the program No. search and sequence No. search, the
program No. and the sequence No. seaτched are índícated.
683
11. SЕTTING AND DISPLAYiNG DATA. OPERATION 8-62444ε/o3
The current mode, automatic operatíon state, a1arm state, and program
edíting state are dísplayed oп the next to last 1ine on the CRT screen
Dísplay :ıg the Ѕtatuѕ
allowíng the operator to readíly understand the operatíon condition of the
arld WBrtıïng foг аtа
system.
sOttíng ог ІпμutlОιttput If data settíng oг the input/output operatíon is incorrect, the CNC does not
pOratífın accept the operatíon and a warning message ís dísplayed oп the next to last
1ine of the CRT screen. This prevents inva1id data settíng and input/output
errors.
ExpBanatBons
Descríption of eaáh
dísplay 9 Data is out of i anCe.
Note Actually, thís ís dispiayed irı the area start-
ing from 2 . 5 Note Act+ a1By, 5 is dis-
played ïr+ tBıe area for 3
1 2 З 4 a б 4 . 7 8
F_D1T ŠTOP MTN F1N hh:mrn:ss 1NPUT
1 DispIay soft kets HÉAd1
Note Ac?ua11y, 10 is displayed at the position where 8 ís now
disp ayed.
. 1 Gurrent mode Manua1 data input, MDI operatíon
MÉM : Automatíc operatíon Memoгу operatíon
R MT : Automatic operatíon DNC operation
EDIT : Memoгу editíng
B-lND : Manua1 handle feed
J G : Jog feed
TJOG . TEACH IN JOG
Tí iND : TEACH 1N HANDLE
INC Manua1 íncremental feed
REF : Manua1 reference position return
. 2 Autoıııatíc operatBon Reset When the power ís turned on or the state in which
status program execution has termínated and automatíc operatíon
has termínated.
STOB : Automatic operatíon stop The state in which one block has
been executed and automatíc operatíon ís stopped.
HOLD : Feed hold The state ín which executíon of one block has been
ínterrupted and automatíc operation is stopped.
STRT : Automatic operatíon start-up The state in whích the system
operates automatícally
3 Axïs movírag MTN : Indicates that the axis ís moving.
status/dwelí status DWL : Indícates the dwe11 state.
ж . Indícates a state other than the above.
ø 4 Ѕtate Bn which an F1N : Indícates the state in which an auxilíary function ís being
auxiBíary fεзnctBoп ís executed. Waiting for the complete sígnal from the PMC
being executed Indícates a state other than the above.
5 Emergency stop or : Indícates emergency іn reversed display.
reset status -- RESET-- : Indícates that the reset sígnal ís beíng received.
684
8-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
6 A1arm status f : Indícates that an a1aгm ís íssued. Blínks in reversed display.
: Indicates that the battery is 1ow. Blinks in reversed dísplay.
Space : Indicates a state other than the above.
7 Current tíme hh:mm:ss - Hours, minutes, and seconds
8 Program edítíng 1NPUT : Indícates that data ís being input.
status OUTPUT : Indícates that data ís being output.
SRCH : Indicates that a search ís Øйg performed.
ED1T : Indicates that another edítíng operatíon ís beйg performed
insertion, modífication, etc.
LSK : Indicates that 1abels are skípped when data is йput.
RSTR : Indicates that the program ís beíng restarted
Space : Indícates that no editing operatíon ís beйg performed.
9 Warníng for data When ínvalid data is entered wrong format, value out of range, etc. ,
setting or ínput/output when ínput ís dísabled wrong mode, wríte dísabled, etc. , or when
operatíon йput/output operatíon ís íncorrect wrong mode, etc. , a warning message
ís dísplayed. In thís case, the CNC does not accept the setting or
йput/output operatíon.
The following are examples of warning messages:
ExampІe 1
When a parameter ís entered
>1
ED1T WRONG MODE
Display soft keys
Example 2
When a parameter ís entered
> 999999999 J
MD1 TOO MANY D1G1TS
Dísplay soft keys
Example 3
When a parameter ís output to an external input/output device
>_ J
MEM WRONG MODE
Dísplay soft keys
10 Too1 post name HEAD 1: Too1 post 1 ís selected.
for the two-path control HEAD2 : Too1 post 2 ís selected.
Other names can be used dependйg on the settings of parameters 3141
to 3147.
The tool post name ís dísplayed at the posítíon where 8 ís now dísplayed.
Whí1e the progranı ís edíted, a ís displayed.
685
11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION e-62Ø4εı0з
By pressíng the MESSAGE functíon key, data such as alarms, alarm
history data, and external messages can Ьe dísplayed.
ЅПEENS DISPLAYED
For ínformation relatíng to a1arm dísplay, see Sectíon IП For
BY FUNCTION KEY ínformation relatíng to alarm hístory dísplay, see Sectíon
For ínformatíon relatíng to external message dísplay, see the relevant
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
External operator messages can Ьe preserved as hístory data.
Preserved history data can be dísplayed on the external operator message External Operator
history screen.
Message History
Dísplay
Procedure for externai operator message hístory díspiay
,--,
Procedure
1 Press the functíon key.
J
2 Press the continuous menu key [ , then press the chapter selectíon
C C
soft key [MSGH1s]. The screen shown below appears. a 0 0 1

MESSAGE HISTORY 00000 N00000
Date and Page number 94/01/01 17:25:00 PAGE:1
Message nuumber NO.
Display range
Up to 255 characters
MEM STRт MIN FIN AI,M 09:36:48
[ ][ ][ ] [ ]Ľ OPRT ; ı

Up to 255 characters can be specífíed for an external operator message.
By settíng MS 1 and MSO bíts 7 аnd 6 of parameter No. 3113 , however,
the number of characters that can be preserved as external operator
message history data can Ьe restricted, and the number of hístory data
items selected.
686
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Expianations
в Updating exterral When an external operator message number ís specified, updating of the
operator message external operator message hístory data ís started; this updatíng ís
history data contínued until a new external operator message number is specified oг
deletíon of the external operator message history data ís specífıed.
Ciearing external To c1ear external operator message history data, press the [CLEAR] soft
cperator message key. Thís clears all external operator message hístory data. Set MSGCR
history data bít 0 of parameter No. 3113 to 1.
Note that when MS 1 and MSO bits 7 and 6 of parameter No. 3113 , used
to specífy the riumber of external operator message history data items to
be displayed, are changed, a1 exístíng external operator message hístoıy
data ís cleаred.
Límitatíons
Two-path contr oi When two-path control is exercised, the external operator messages for
system 1 are displayed. The external operator messages for system 2 aгe
not displayed.
Qption Before this functíon caп Ьe used, the external data ínput function or
optíonal external message function must be selected.
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-62444FJo3
GRAPHICS FUNCTION
І2
The graphic function índicates how the tool moves duńng automatic
operation oг maвual operatíon.
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION B-62444El03 OPERATION
It ís possíble to draw the programmed tool path oп the 9-ínch oг 14-ínch
CRT screen, which makes ít possíble to check the progress of machíníng, GRAPHICS DISPLAY
while observing the path on the CRT screen.
In addition, it is also possíble to enlarge/reduce the screen.
The drawing coordínates parameter and graphíc parameters must be set
before a tool path can be displayed.
Wıth two-path control, the tool paths of two tool posts are displayed on
the same screen, one on the right and the other on the 1eft.
Graphícs dísplay procedure
Procedure Set the drawing coordínates with parameter before starting
drawing. See Drawing Coordínate System for the settíngs and
corresponding coordinates.
For the two-path control, parameter GRL bít 0 of No. 6500 specifıes
which tool post ís dísplayed on whích síde tool post 1 on the ríght or tool
post 2 on the ńght .
1 Press function key ØP . Press for a sma11 MDI unit.
The graphíc parameter screen shown below appears. If thís screen
does not appeаr, press soft key [].
GRAPHIC PARAMETER 00001 N00020
WORK LENGTH W=
WORR DIAMETER D= 130000
PROGRAM sTOP N= 0
AUTO ERASE A= 1
LIMIT L= 0
GRAPHIC CENTER X= 61655
Z= 90711
Ø s= 32
GRAPHIC MODE M= 0
θ 0 T0000
>_
MEM STRT FIN 12:12:24 HØ1
I і ] I ] I GRAPH ] [ ZOOM ] I OPAT ] J
2 For the two-path control, determíne for whích tool post the data ís
specífied, usíng a tool post select sígnal.
Specífy the PROGRAM STOP N , AUTO ERASE A , and
GRAPHIC CENTER X,Y parameters separately for each tool post.
The other parameters aгe common to both tool posts. It does not
matter for whích tool post they are specifıed first.
3 Move the cursor with the cursor keys to a parameter to set.
4 Enter data, then press the ıиPuт key.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until aН requíred parameters aгe specífıed.
6 Press soft key [GRAPH].
7 Automatíc oг manual operatíon ís started and machine movement ís
drawn on the screen.
689
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B-62444E/03
16-TB
-
HEAD1 00001 N00021 HEAD2 00020 N00020
χ X1 χ X2
4 Z2 4 Z1
i
Z 6 Z
1 2
>_
MEM STRT FIN 12:12:24 HEADl
[ ] Ľ ][ ] [ ZOOM ] [ OPRT ]

i
16-TB two-path lathe control
690
B-62444E/03 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
Magnífyíng drawíngs Part of a drawíng on the screen can be magnified.
8 Press the function key, then the [ZOOM] soft key to display a
magnifıed drawing. The magnified-drawíng screen contaíns two
zoom cursors
/е-
S 0001 00021
w 150000 X
D 150000 Z
>_
MEM STRT FIN 12:12:24
\ [ ] [ ] ] [ ZOOM ] [ oPRT ] /
A rectangle that has one of íts díagonals defıned Ьy the two zoom
cursors is magnífied to the full síze of the screen.
For the two-path control, the zoom cursors are índícated for the
selected tool post. Use the tool post select switch to select the tool
post correspondíng to the drawing to be magnífıed.
Γ Γ 1г l
9 Usíng the cursor keys , move the zoom cursors
O O
to specífy a díagonal for the new screen. Pressíng the [H1 / LO] soft
key toggles the zoom cursor to be moved.
10 To make the original drawing dísappear, press [EXEC].
11 Resume the previous operatíon. The part of the dтawíng specified
wíth the zoom cursors wí11 be magnífıed.
12 To dísplay the orígínal drawìng, press the [NORMAL] soft key, then
start automatíc operatíon.
691
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION в-6г444εı0з
Expianatíon
setting drawíng Parameter No. 6510 ís used to set a drawíng coordínate system for using
coordínate systems the graphíc functíon. The relatíonshíps between settíng values and
drawing coordinate systems are índicated below. Wíth two-path control,
a different drawíng coordínate system can be selected for each tool post.
setting va1ue=0 Setting value=l setting value=2 setting va1ue=3
z xь i z в
z x

x z
r
x
setting value=4 settíng value=5 setting value=6 setting va1ue=7
X
z
. .
z X z
r r
X z X
Graphics parameter
WORK LENGTH W , WORK DIAMETER D
Specífy work length and work diameter. The table below lists the ínput
unít and valid data range.
X
1
W .. W
δ δΓ

t z z
TaЬ1e Unít and Range of Drawing Data
untt
lncrement system Va1id range
mm input lnch lnput
1S-B mm ínch
0 to 99999999
1S-C mm 0,00001 inch
692
B-62444E/o3 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
GRAPHIC CENTER X, Z , sCALE s
A screen center coordinate and drawing scale are displayed. A scale
screen center coordinate are automatícally calculated so that a fıgure
set ín WORK LENGTH a and WORK DIAMETER b can Ьe fu11y
dísplayed on the screen. So, the user need not set these parameters
usually.
A screen center coordinate is defıned ín the workpíece coordínate
system. Tab1e 12. 3. 2 índicates the unít and range. The unít of SCALE
is
PROGRAM STOP N
Set the sequence number of an end block when part of the program ís
to be drawn. A value set in thís parameter ís automatícally cancelled
cleared to 0 oпce a drawing is provided.
AUTO ERASE A
If 1 ís set, the prevíous drawíng ís automatícally erased when
automatíc operation is stated from the reset state. Then, drawing ís
started.
L1M1T L
If 1 is set, the area of stored stroke limít 1 ís drawn wíth
double-dot-and-dash lines.
Notes
The parameter values for drawing are preserved even if
power is turned off.
Executíng drawíng only Sínce the graphic drawíng is done when coordinate value is renewed
duńng automatíc operation, etc., ít ís necessary to start the program by
automatíc operatíon. To execute drawing wíthout movíng the machíne,
therefore, enter the machine lock state.
Deletíng the prevíous Pressing the [REV1EWj soft key on the graphic screen deletes tool paths
drawing on ít. Settíng the graphic parameter as AUTO ERASE A = 1 specifıes
that when automatic operation ís started at reset, program execution
begins after the prevíous drawíng is erased automatícally AUTO ERASE
= 1 .
Drawing a part of a When necessary to display a part of a program, search the starting block
program to be drawn by the sequence number search, and set the sequence number
of the end block to the PROGRAM STOP N= of the graphic parameter
before starting the program under cycle operatíon mode.
Drawíng usíng dashed The tool path is shown with a dashed 1ine - -- for rapíd traverse and
línes and solíd línes with a solid line for cuttíng feed.
Dísplayíng coordínates The displayed drawíng ís índicated wíth coordínates in a work coordinate
system.
Dísplayíng the machíne The machíne zero poínt ís indícated wíth a question mark.
zero poínt
swítchíng from a Even íf the screen is switched to a non-drawíng screen, drawíng
drawíng screen to contínues. When the drawíng screen ís dísplayed agaín, the entíre
another screen dτawíng appears пo parts aгe míssíng .
693
12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION 8-624444E/03
Drawíng for tool posts 1 For the two-path lathe control, the screen ís splít vertícally, and each half
and 2 two-path lathe screen dísplays the tool path for eíther tool post.
- control 1
HEAD1 00001 N00021 HEAD2 00020 N00020
χ x1 χ x2
4 Z1 Z2
- ı
Z Z 6
1 2
>_
MEM STRT FIN 12:12:24 HE:AD1
[ ] [ ][ ][ ZOOM ][ OPRT ] J
Parameter GRL bít 0 of NO. 6500 specífıes whích tool post is to be
dísplayed on whích síde.
GRL = 0: Too1 post 1 is displayed on the left ha1f, and tool post 2 0п
the ńght ha1f.
GRL = 1; Too1 post 1 is displayed on the right ha1f, and tool post 2
on the left ha1f.
Restrictíons
Feedrate In case the feed rate is consíderably high, drawíng may not be executed
correctly, decгease the speed by dry-run, etc. to execute drawíng.
Changíng the graphic After a graphíc parameter ís changed, the [REVIEW] soft key must be
parameters during pressed to ínitíalize the graphíc screen. Otherwíse, the change to the
automatíc operation graphíc parameter ís not reflected correctly.
Coordínate axís names The coordinate axis пaτnes are fixed to X or Z. For the two-path control,
the fírst and second axes for tool post 1 are naıned X 1 and Z1, respectívely,
and the fírst and second axes for tool post 2 aгe named X2 and Z2,
respectívely.
Zoomíng drawíngs If the WORK and DIAMETER graphíc parameters are not set correctly,
the drawíng cannot be magnífied. To reduce a drawing, specify a negative
value for the SCALE graphic parameter. The machíne zero poínt is
índícated with a questíon mark.
694
B-62aØE/03 OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION
1
3 HELP FUNCTION
The help functíon displays on the screen detaíled ínformatíon about
alarms íssued in the CNC and about CNC operatíons. The following
ínformation ís displayed.
Detaíled ínformation of When the CNC is operated incorrectly or an erroneous machining
alarms program ís executed, the CNC enters the alarm state. The help screen
dísplays detailed information about the alarm that has been íssued and
how to reset it. The detailed ínformation is dísplayed on1y for a limíted
number of P/S alarms. These alarms are often misunderstood and are
rather díffícult to understand.
Operatíon method If you are not sure about a CNC operation, refer to the help screen for
ínformation about each operation.
Parameter table When setting oг referring to a system parameter, íf you are not sure of the
number of the parameter, the help screen displays a list of parameter Nos.
for each functíon.
He1p Functíon Procedure
Procedure
1 Press the нειP key on the MDI. HELP 1N1T1AL MENU screen ís
dísplayed.

HELP INITIAL MENU 01234 N00001
HEyP
1. ALARM DBTAIL
2. OPERATION METHOD
3. PARAMETER TABLE
S 0 T0000
МЕM 10:12:25
[ 1 ALM ][ 2 OPR ] [ 3 PARA ] ][ ]

Fí HELP 1N1T1AL MENU Screen
The user cannot swítch the screen dísplay from the PMC screen or
CUSTOM screen to the help screen. The user can return to the norma1
CNC screen by pressing the нειP key or another functíon key.
695
13. HELP FUNCTION OPERATION в-62aaaεı0з
ALARM DETAIL screen 2Press soft key [1 ALAM] on the HELP 1N1T1AL MENU screen to display
detailed ínformation about an alarm currently beíng
raised.
>100 s o т0000
MEM 10:12:25
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ sεLECт ]
How to select each ALARM DETAILS
HELP ALARM DETAIL 00010 N00001
NUMBER : 027 ł A1arm No.
M`SAGE . NO AXES COMØED IN G43/ Normal explana-
FUNCTION . TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION tion on alann
ALARM . Function
IN TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION TYPE C, classiflcation
NO AXIS IS DESIGNATED IN G43 С24
BLOCRS. IN TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION A1aпn deteíle
TYPE C, IT TRIES TO LATCH ON TO
ANOTHER AXIS WITHOUT OFFSET CANCE
LING.
>100 S 0 T0000
MEM 10:12:25
Ľ . l[ 2 OPR ] [ 3 PAAA l ľ ][ ]
Fí ALARM DETAIL Screen when P/S A1aгm is issued
Note that on1y details of the a1arm identifíed at the top of the screen
are dísplayed oп the screen.
If the alarms are a11 reset while the help screen ís dísplayed, the a1arm
dísplayed on the ALARM DETAIL screen ís deleted, índicatíng that no
alarm ís
íssued.
HELP ALARM DETAIL 01234 N00001
NUMBER
M`SAGE .
FUNCTION :
AIARM .
ALABH IS NOT GENERATED
ENTER THE DETAIL REQUIRED ALPıRM NUMBER,
AND PRESS [SELECT] REY
>100 S 0 T0000
MEM 10:12:25
ľ______ 7[ 2 OPR ] [ 3 PARA ] [ ][ 1
Fí ALARM DETAIL Screen when No A1arm is issued
696
8-6244дE/03 OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION
3To get detaíls oп another a1arm number, fvst enter the a1arm number, then
press soft key [SELECT]. Thís operatíon ís useful for investigatíng
alarms not currently beíng
raísed.
HELP ALARM DETAIL 01234 N00001
NUMBER : 100
k SAGE : PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE
FUNCTION :
ALARM
AIARM 2S NΠT GENERATED
>100 s 0 T0000
Ø 10:12:25
[ ][ ][ ] [ ] [ SELECT ] I

ALARM DETAIL Screen when P/S alarm ís s -
lected
OPERATiON METHOD 4To determine aп operatïng procedure for the CNC, press the soft key [2
screen OPR] key on the HELP 1N1T1AL MENU screen. The OPERATION
METHOD menu screen is then displayed. See Fig. 13
e
HELP OPERATION METHOD 01234 N00001
1. PROGRAN EDIT
2. 5EARCH
3. RESET
4. DATA INPUT WITH ØI
5, DATA ĺÑPUT WITH TAPE
6. OUTPUT
7. INPUT W2TH FANUC CASSETTE
8. oUTPUT WITH CASSETTE
9. MEMORY CLEAR
s 0 т0c00
лЕМ 10:12:25
1 ALм ] [ .. ][ 3 PARA ][ ][
OPERATION METHOD Menu Screen
To select an operating procedure, enter an ítem No. from the keyboard
then press the [SELECT] key.
697
13. HELP FUNCTION OPERATION в-s2aaaεı0з
>ı s o т0000
MEM 10:12:25
[ ][ ][ ] [ ] [ SELECT ]
How to select each OPERATION METHOD screen
When 1. PROGRAM ED1T is selected, for example, the screen in
Fígure 13 g is dísplayed.
On each OPERATION METHOD screen, ít is possible to change the
displayed page by pressíng the PAGE key. The current page No. ís
shown at the upper right corner on the screen.
Each ítem
HELP OPERATION MBTHOD т24N00001 Page/maximum
1. PROGRAM EDIT 1/4 page
DELETE ALL PROGRAMS Operation
MODE : EDIT Set mode
SCREEN : PROGRAM Operation locatioa
OPR : 0-9999 Operating
procedure
DELETE ONE PROGRAM
MODE : EDIT
SCREEN : PROGRAM
OPR : OłPROGRAM N[7MBER
> S 0 T0000
Ø 10:12:25
[ 1 ALM .В ][ 3 Pлκл ][ ][ J
Fí Selected OPERATION METHOD screen
J 5 To return to the OPERATION METHOD menu screen, press the
C C C
RETURN MENU key to display [2 OPR] again, and then press the
a σ σ σ σ 0
[2 OPR] key again.
To dírectly select another OPERATION METHOD screen on the
RETURN MENU key screen shown in Fígure 13 h , enter an ítem No. from the keyboard
and press the [SELECT] key.
>3 s 0 т00o0
MEM 10:12:25
Ľ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] SELECT ]
Fíі How to select another OPERATION METHOD screen
PARAM ETE R TAQ L E screen 6 If you are not sure of the No. of a system parameter to be set, or to refer
to a system parameter, press the [3 PARA] key on the HELP 1N1T1AL
MENU screen. A list of parameter Nos. for each functíon ís
displayed. See Fígure 13 j .
It is possíble to change the dísplayed page on the parameter screen.
The current page No. ís shown at the upper ríght corner on the screen.
698
в-s24Øεı0з OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION
-
КELP PARAMETER TABLE 01234 N00001
1/4
SETTEING No. OOOOA
READER/PLRQCHEP. INTERFACE No. 0100A
AXIS CONTROL
/BETTING UNIT No. 1000A
COORDTNATE θYSTEM No. 1200A
STROKE LIMIT No. 1300A
FEED RATE No. 1400A
ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL No. 1600A
SERVORELATED No. 1800A
DI/DO No. 300OA
>_ s 0 Т0000
MEM 10 12:25
[ 1 ALM ] [ 2 OPR ] Ø ] [ ] [ ]
Fig. 13 i TABLE screen
7 To exít from the help screen, press the HELP key or another functíon
key.
Explanation
Confíguratíon of the He1p Screen
HELPkey
CNC HELP
1N1T1AL MENU screen screen
HELP key
or
[1 ALAMJ [2 OPR] [3 PARA] functíon key
ALARM OPERATION PARAM E-
DETAIL METHOD TER TABLE
screen screen ѕçrQQn PAGE key
ιΓιУі key
` Ť
or
fun ίiun key
NO. +[sELECT]
NO. +[SELECT]
нειP key
o
functíon key
699
lV. MAINTENANCE
8-62444E/03 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
1 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY
Thís chapter descríbes the method of replacíng batteries as follows.
REPLACING CNC BATTERY FOR MEMORY BACK-UP
REPLACING BATTERIES FOR ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER
REPLACING BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PUL5E CODER
a series 5ervo Amp Module
Battery for Memory The CNC has a battery to backup the memory devices for part programs,
Backup offset data, system parameters and so on. When the battery was reaching
the 1ow 1eve1, the CNC would dísplay a warning signl ВАТј oп the screen
before losing the important data іп the memoгy.
When you fuıd the sígn j BAT j, please гeplace the battery as soon as
possíble. If you left the CNC power off for more than one week without
changing the battery, the data in the CNC memory could get 1ost.
Battery for Absolute When the machíne ís equipped with absolute encoder. System such as an
Pu1se Coder absolute pulse coder or absolute línear scale, there ís a battery for them
separately from the battery for memorу backup.
When you get an alarm message No. 307 0г 308 APC a1aгm, please
гeplace the battery as soon as possíble followíng the ínstructions ín 0г
, or the absolute posítíon could be lost аnd ít would be requíred to take
a procedure of manual reference point return.
703
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE в-s2aaaεıoз
Replace CNC battery líthíum battery for memory back-up by the
followíng procedure.
REPLACING CNC
Prepare lithíum battery A02B-0200-K102 in advance.
BATT ERY FOR
MEMORY BACK-UP
Procedure for replacíng CNC battery for memory back-up
1 Turn machíne NC power ON. See Notes below
2 Remove the battery case on the front pаne1 of power supply unít.
The battery case can be removed by holdíng the top of the case and
pullíng the case towards you .
3 Remove the connector of the battery.
4 Replace the battery, and connect the connector.
5 Attach the battery case.
6 Turn machine NC power OFF.
Notes
The batteríes can be replaced whether NC power ís ON or
OFF. However, the replacement should be done withín 30
minutes when the power is OFF. Memory contents míght be
erased íf the NC power ís OFF without battery for more than
30 minutes.
When the contents of inemory are 1ost, turning on the power
to the CNC may cause a RAM PARITY system alarm to
occur. 1n this caşe, the CNC cannot be used.
704
MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY в-sг4Øεıoз
Replace batteríes alkaline batteries for absolute pulse coder by the
followíng procedure.
REPLACING
Prepare 4 alkaline batteríes UM-ltype commercíally avaílable in
BATTERIES FOR advance.
ABSOLUTE
PULSE CODER
Procedure for replacíng batteríes for absolute pulse coder
Procedure 1 Turn machine NC power ON.
2 Loosen screws on the battery case to remove the cover. For placement
of the battery case, refer to the machíne tool builder s manual.
3 Replace the batteńes in the case. Insert 2 batteňes each in the opposíte
direction as illustrated below.
4 After replacement, install the cover.
5 Turn machíne NC power OFF
Notes
Replace the batteries for absolute pulse coder when NC
power is ON.
Replacíng the batteríes with power OFF causes the
absolute positíon stored in memory to be 1ost.
705
1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE e-s2444εıoз
In case that the a seńes servo drive ís used, the battery for absolute pulse
coder could Ьe provided on the a seńes servo amplífıer module instead
REPLACING
of the battery case as shown in In thís case the battery ís not an
вдπεRІεs FOR A1kalíne battery but a líthíum battery, A06B-6073-K001. Pгepaгe the
ABSOLUTE PULSE battery in advance and replace ít by the followíng procedure.
CODER a Series Servo
Amp Module
Procedure for replacíng batteríes for absolute pulse coder
Procedure 1 nını machine NC power ON.
2 Remove the battery case on the front pane1 of a seńes Servo Amp
Module sVM .
The battery case can Ьe removed by holdíng the top of the case and
pullíng the case towards you.
3 Remove the connector the battery.
4 Replace the battery , and connect the connector.
5 Attach the battery case.
6 Turn machíne NC power OFF.
Notes
1 Replace the batteries for absolute pulse coder when NC
power is ON.
Replacing the batteries wíth power OFF causes the
absolute positíon stored in memory to be 1ost.
2 1f your machine is equipped wíth a separate battery case,
follow the instructions in
706
APPENDIX
8-624ØE/03 APPENDIX A. TAPE CODE L1ST
TД6 E CODE ϊÌύT
чљ
1S0 code E1A code
Meaníng
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 00 π 0 O Number 0
1 O 00 O O 1 O O Number 1
2 O 00 o O 2 π O Number 2
3 00 o 00 3 O o 00 Number 3
4 0 O O ú O 4 o O Number 4
5 00 π O O 5 O o O O Number 5
6 00 000 6 O o O O Number 6
7 O 00 0 000 7 0 000 Number7
8 O O O O o 8 O o Number 8
9 O O O o O 9 O O o O Number 9
A O o O a O O c O Address A
B O o O Ь O O o O Address B
C 00 o 00 c 000 o 00 Address C
D O o O d O O o O Address D
E O O π O O e O O O o O O? Address E
F 00 o O Π f 000 000 Address F
G O o O O O 9 00 o O O O Address G
H O O o h O O O o Address H
1 O O O o Π i O Π O O o O Address I
J 00 O π O j O O o 00 Address J
K O O o O O k O O o O Address K
L O O O o O 1 O o O O? Address L
M O O π O O m O O o O Address M
N O O o O O n O o O O Address N
O O O O π O O O o O o O O Address O
P O O o p O O o O O O Address P
Q O O O o O q O O O o Address Q
R O O O o O r O O o O Address R
S O O o 00 s 00 o O Address S
T O O O o O t O o O O Address T
U O O o O O u O O o O ? Address U
V O O c O O v O o O O? Address V
W O O O o O O O w O o O O ? Address W
X 00 00 o x 00 c 000 AddressX
Y O O O o 0 y O O O o Address Y
Z O O O o O z O O o O Address Z
709
A. TAPE CODE L1ST APPENDIX B-624ØE/03
1S0 code E1A code Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Wíthout custom With caucs toom
macro B m B
L б бб DeI o x x
NUL o B1ank o x x
BS O O o BS O O o O x x
HT Oo O Tab OOOo00 x x
LF or NL O o O CR or EOB O o
CR O Oo0 O _ x x
SP O O o SP O o
O O o0 O ER Oo 00
O 00 2-4-5 O O o O
O O O o O 2-4-7 O O o O
+ O Oo 00 + 000 o Δ
- O Oo0 O - O o
OOOo O _
/ O O Oo000 / 00 o O
O Oo00 . 00 Oo 00
O O o O O Parameter

O o0 _ Δ
O O o00 Oo00 Δ
Y O o000 _ n
, Parameter O O O o O n
O O Oo0 OOOo 00
O OOOo 00 _ Δ
< OOOoO _ e
= O O O O o O O Parameter Δ

> O OOOo00 _ Δ
? OOOo000 _ Δ
Ø 00 0 _ Δ
[ O O O O o O O Parameter Δ

] O O O O o O O Parameter Δ

Notes
1. The symbols used ín the remark column have the following meaníngs.
Space :
The character wi11 be registered ín memory and has a specífíc meaníng.
1f it is used incorrectly in a statement other than a comment, an alarm occurs.
x: The character wí11 not be registered in memory, but wí11 be ignored.
: The character wi11 be registered in memmory, but wi11 be ignored during program execution.
O: The character wi11 be regístered in memory. 1f it is used in a statement other than a comment,
an alarm occurs.
: 1f it is used in a statement otherthan a comment, the characterwill not be registered in memory.
1f ít ís used in a comment, ít wi11 be registered ín memorу.
2. Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is correct.
3. Codes with incorrect parity cause the TH alarm. But they are ignored without generating
the TH alarm when they are ín the comment sectíon.
4. A character with a11 eight holes punched is ignored and does not generate TH alarm in
E1A code.
B. L1ST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE
FORMAT B-62444E/03 APPENDIX
ι Ѕτ OF FUNСтІОNЅ дNЕ τдРЕ FORMAT
, ς, ςχ ц . 3, - aέ --b мξ- .. vyφ λØ, 1
Some functions cannot Ьe added as options depending on the model.
In the tables below, n _:presents a combination of arbítrary axís
addresses using X and Z.
x= 1 st basic axís X usually
z= 2nd basíc axís Z usually
1/3
Functlons 111ustratlon Tape fomıat
Positioning 000 GOO 1P_ ;
Start poínt
Línear interpolatíon G01 / G01 ]P_ F_;
Start poínt
Start point R
Circu1ar interpolatíon G02 X Z 1 K Ј F;
002, G03 G03 _ _ _ _
R G02
1 x, y
x, y 003
Start
point
R Ј
1
Dwe11 004 GØ P 1 ,
Change of offsetvalue by Too1 geometry offset value
program G10 G10 P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ ;
P=1000+Geometry offset number
Too1 wear offset va1ue
G 10 P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ ;
P=Wear offset number
chimetríc conversíon lnch ínput : G20
G20, G21 Metric input : G21
Spindie speed fluctuatíon G25 ;
detection 025, 026 026 P_ Q_ R_ ;
711
B. L1ST OF FUNCTIONS AND
TAPE FORMAT APPENDIX B-62444E/OЗ
2/3
Functions 111ustration Tape format
Reference posítíon return 1P G27 ]p ;
chвck G27
Start posítíon
Reference position G28 G28 ]P ;
Reference posítion return
G28
2nd, reference position re- Interm iate Øition G30 IP _ ;
turn G30
2nd reference
posítíon G30 Start position
Cutter compensatíon G41 G41
ґ G42 P_ ;
G40, G41, G42 ..
G40 ;;
P : Too1 offset number
G40 : Cancel
G42
Too1
Skip fubction G31 . 1Р G31 1Р F;

/ Skíp
Start signal
posítion
Thread cutting G32 F Equa1 lead thread cutting
G32 ]P_ F_;
ϊ
Automatic tool compensation Measurementt G36 X x ;
G36, G37 position G37 Z a ;
Measurementt
posítion arríval
signal
atart ł,
position
Compensatíon
value
Coordinate system setting X G50 X_ Z_ ;
Spíndle speed settìng Coordínate system setting
G50 G50 S_ ; Spindle speed setting
Z
Mírror ímage for double G68 ;
turret G68, G69 Mírror ímage for dou le turret on
G69 ; Mírror ìmage ca cel
712
B. L1ST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE
B-62444E/03 AP P EN D 1X FORMAT
3/3
Functions 111ustration Tape format
Feed per mínute G98 mm/min ínch/min G98 ... F_ ;
mm/rev ínch/rev
Feed per revolution G99 G99 ... F_ ;
Constant surface speed m/mín or feeUmin G96 S_ ;
control G96/G97 G97 ; Caпce1
N гpm
- - -
Chamferíng, Corner R k Γ Ctk
;
R
Canned cycle Refer to FUNCTIONS TO N_ G70 P_ Q_ ;
C,71 to G76 S1MPLIFY PROGRAMMING G90, G92, G94 G71 U _ R _. _. ;
G71 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G72 W_ R_ ;
G72 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G73 U_ W_ R_ ;
G73 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G74 R_ ;
G74 X u _ Z w _ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G75 R_ ;
G75 X u _ Z w _ P_ Q_ R_ F_. ;
G76 P_ Q_ R_ ;
G76 X u _ Z w _ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G90 l χ_ Z_ 1_ F_ ;
G92 f
G94 X_ Z_ K_ F_ ;
C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX 8-62444El03
C RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
Línear axís
1n case of míllímeter lncrement system
ínput, feed screw ís Іs-в ıs-c
míllimeter
Least input íncrement mm mm
Least command increment X: mm X: mm
Y: mm Y: mm
Max. programmable mm mm
dímensíon
Max. rapid traverse 1 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range 1 Feed per minute : Feed peг mínute :
1 to 240000 mm/mіп 1 to 100000 mm/min
Feed peг revolutíon Feed per revolutíon
to to
mm/rev mm/rev
lncremental feed , , , 1 mm/step , , ,
mm/step
Too1 compensation 0 to mm 0 to mm
Backlash compensatíon 0 to mm 0 to mm
Dwe11 tíme 0 to sec 0 to sec
1n case of inch lncrement system
ínput, feed screw ís
іs-в ıs-c
millímeter
Least input íncrement inch ínch
Least command increment X: ínch X: ínch
Y: ínch Y: inch
Max. programmable inch inch
dímensíon
Max. rapid traverse 1 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range 1 Feed peг mínute : Feed peг minute :
to 9600 ínch/mín to 4000 ínch/min
Feed peг revolution Feed per revolutíon
to to
ínch/rev ínch/rev
lncremental feed , , , , , ,
ínch/step ínch/step
Too1 compensatíon 0 to ínch 0 to ínch
Backlash compensation 0 to mm 0 to mm
Dwe11 tíme 0 to sec 0 to sec
714
APPENDIY. C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE β-62444E/03
1n case of ïnch lncrement system
input, feed screw is
Іs-в г1. ıs-B
inch
Least input íncrement inch inch
L-east cornmand increment X: inch - X: inch
Y: inch Y: inch
Max. programmable inch --- ŕnch -
dímensíon
Max. rapid traverse 1 9600 inch/mín - 40 00 chmin -_
Feedrate range 1 Feed per mínute : Fee-d per minute :
to 9600 ínch/mín to 4000 ínch/mín
Feed per revolution Feed per revolution
to to
inch/rev inch/rev
---------- -----.. _ ...- -- --
lncrementa feed , , , , , ,
ínch/step íncń/step
Too1 compensatíon 0 to inch 0 to ínch
Backlash compensation 0 to inch 0 to ínch
Dwel1 time 0 to sec 0 to sec
1n case of miliimeter lncrement system
ínput, feed screw ís
Іs-в ıs-c
ínch
Least ínput increment mm mm
L ast command increment X: incń X: inch
Y: ínch Y: inch
Max. programmable g9g mm mm
dimensíon
Max. rapid traverse 1 9600 inch/mín i 960 ínch/min
Feedrate range 1 Feed per minute : Feed per mínute :
1 to 240000 mm/min 1 to 100000 mm/miп
Feed per revolution Feed per revolution
to to
mm/rev mm/rev
i ncremental feed , , , 1 mm/step , , , , 0 1
ımm/step -- --- - - -- -
Too1 compensation 0 to mm 0 to mm
Backlash cornpensation 0 to inch 0 to inch
DweiI tíme 0 to sec 0 to sec
- 715 -
C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX в-sгa44εıoз
Rotation axis
lncrement system
1S-B 1S-C
Least input íncrement deg 0 0001 deg
Least command incremeτ4 deg deg
Max. programmable deg deg
dimensíon -
Max. rapid traverse 1 240000 deg/min 100000 deg/mirı
Feedrate range 1 1 to 240000 deg/min 1 to 100000 deg/min
lncremental feed , , , 1 deg/step , , ,
deg/step
Too1 compensation 0 to mm 0 to mm
Backlash compensation 0 to deg 0 to deg
Note
Note
1 The feedrate range shown above are limitations depending
on CNC interpolation capacity.
As a whole system, limitations depending on servo system
must also be considered.
716
B-в2aØЕ/oθ APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAРHS
DNOMOGRAPHS
-7ıı-
[ . ivoчıCCRAPнs APPENDIX Ø-62444E/03
.1 The leads of a thread are generally incorrect in δ1 and δ2, as shown in Fíg.
a , due to automatic acceleratíon and deceleration.
iNCQRRεCT
Thus dístance allowances must be made to the extent of δ1 and δ2 ín the
THREADED LENGTH pτogгam.
lncorrect thread posítion
Explanatíons
How to determíne δ2
52 = T,V mm ....... 1
V= RL
T1 : T me constant of senıo system sec
V : Cutting speed mm/sec T me constant T1 sec of
R : Spindle speed rpm the senıo system: Usually
L : Thread feed mm s.
How to determíne
r δ, _ t-T, + T, exp - Ť V ....... 2
α = eиp - T1 3
Time constant T1 sec of
T1 : T me constant of senıo system sec the servo system: Usually
V : Cuttíng speed mm/sec
s.
The lead at the beginníng of thread cuttíng ís shorter than the specífıed
lead L, and the allowable lead error is AL. Then as follows.
a = dL
When the value of Ha1 ís determíned, the tíme lapse until the thread
accuracy ís attaíned. The tíme HtI is substituted ín 2 to determine δ1:
Constants V and T1 aгe determined іn the same way as for δ2. Sínce the
calculatíon of δ1 ís rather complex, a nomography ís provided on the
followíng pages.
718
B-62444Eί03 APPENDIX D.tiOMOGRAPHs
o How to tsse nornograph Fírst specífy the class and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy, a,
wíll be obtaíned at 1 , and depending on the time constant of cutting feed
acceleratíon/ deceleratíon, the δ1 value when V= 10mm / s wil1 be
obtaíned at 2 . Then, depending on the speed of thread cuttíng, δ1 for
speed other than 10mm/ s can be obtaíned at 3 .
61 V =10mm/Øc
ь
V=20Øm/sec V=40mm/eec
T me constant of
senıo system
т1
ιз 1
т2
ё1
a
L
see the graph in reference later in
the manual for an actual example. L
Fig. Nomograph
Notes
The equations for , and 62 are for when the
acceleration/deceleratíon tíme constant for cutting feed is O.
719
D. ŃOMOGRйPNS APPENDIX B-62444Eί03
.2
SíMFLE
CALCULATION OF
1NCORRECT THREAD
LENGTH
Fig. Incorrect threaded portíon
Explanatíoπs
How to determíne 62
LR
á _ 1800 mm
R : Spíndlв speed rpm ` When tíme constant T of the
L : Thread lead mm senıo system ís s.
How to determine δ1
á == 1800 -1-l τa mm
= á, -1-lпп mm
R : Spindle speed rpm ` When time constant T of the
L : Thread lead mm seıvo system is s.
Followíng a ís a permítted va1ue of thread.
a -1-1na




Examples
R=350rpm
L=1 mm
then
á2 = 3 ĺğφ 1= mm
á, = á2 x = mm
720
D. NOMOÚRAPHS
β-62444E/03 APPENDIX
Feference
V: speed 1в thread aaccц g
Jı Y іOmm/.ec
V. Onmıaee Ym30вмιsee Y.2pвјi.κ V 0 /
ıa1.57fnnec .іθііıΘec τ0.79iсηee +е0.39ія/іec
Y. inlseι V =2in. aec
í0пuε
33σиe
d
8 mm ς , ј1
Meıńc И υd
115 Φσ 1 .à Oλ ςsdL
d 0. 1ISdω2 1.2á 0 o 75 mm Lμd L
Unifκd ihгead 45 7 11910 t21711 1t1tt0 R,dgn, ici
115 7A 61719 10131 1161θ20 R dφι/íncA 715 A
flЪeo etю1
aпсιaгу
Narogτaph for appnıach d15[с.хe d
Nomograph for obtaíníng approach dístance
721
D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-62444EJ03
When servo system delay by exponentíal acceleratíon/deceleration at
cuttíng or caused by the positíoning system when a servo motor ís used
TOOL PATH AT
ís accompanied by cornering, a slight devíatíon is produced between the
CORNER
tool path tool center path and the programmed path as shown in Fig.
a .
Tíme constant T1 of the exponential acceleratíon/deceleratíon is fixed to
0.
v2
-- ,.
ı ı
ı
ı
/
/ Programmed Øth
/
/ - Tooi Øth
Fig. a siíght devíatíon between the tooi path and
the programmed path
Thís tool path ís determined by the followíng parameters:
Feedrate V1, V2
Corner angle 8
Exponentíal acceleration / deceleratíon time constant T1 at cutting
T1 = О
Presence or absence of buffer register.
The above parameters are used to theoretícally аnalyze the tool path and
above tool path ís drawn with the parameter whích ís set as an example.
When actually prograinming, the above items must be consídered and
programmíng must be performed carefully so that the shape of the
workpiece ís within the desíred precision.
In other words, when the shape of the workpiece is not wíthin the
theoretícal precision, the commands of the next block must not be read
until the specifıed feedrate becomes zero. The dwe11 functíon is then used
to stop the machíne for the appropríate peńod.
722
8-624t+дF t13 APPENDIX D. N MOGRAPHS
AΩd ySiš The tool path shown in Fig. b ís analyzed based on the followíng
condítíons:
Feedrate is constant at both blocks before and after corneríng.
The controller has a buffer register. The error díffers wíth the reading
speed of the tape reader, number of characters of the next block, etc.
v
F1g. Example of tool path
Descriptíon of conditíons
and symbols
VX1 = Vcosфl
VY1 = Vsínфl
VXz = V cos ф2
VYz = Vsіпф2
V: Feedrate at both blocks before and after corneríng
VX1 : X-axís component of feedrate of preceding block
VY1 : Y-axís component of feedrate of precedíng block
VX2 : X-axís component of feedrate of following block
Vγp : Y-axis component of feedrate of followíng block
8 : Coгпeг angle
φ1 : Ang1e formed by specifíed path direction of precedíng block
and X-axis
ф2 : Ang1e formed by specífíed path dírectíon of following block
and X-axís
723
D. ŃOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX 8-62444E/03
initiai vaiue calcuiation
Fíg. lnitíal value
The ínitial value when corneńng begins, that ís, the X and Y coordinates
at the end of command distribution by the controller, ís determined by the
feedrate and the positioning system tíme constant of the servo motor.
Xo = Vxı Tı + T2
Yo = Vrı T1 + T2
T1:Exponentíal acceleratíon / deceleratíon time constant. T=0
T2:T me constant of positioning system lnverse of position loop gaín
AnalySίS of corner tool The equatíons below represent the feedrate for the corner section in
path X-axís dírection and Y-axís direction.
V t _ Vxź Vxı [1-TVXŤzťTıexPί-Ť -T2exp -Ť + Vxıl
= V,α[1-TVxŤ2 T,exp -Ť -T2exp -Ť ]
V, t = VTı-T T,exp -Ť -T2exp - + Vrz
Therefore, the coordínates of the tool path at time t are calculated from the
followíng equatíons:
X t = ıVx t dt-Xo
J 0
= T1-7.? 1 T,2 exP - Ť -Tг2 eXP - Ť -V2 T1 + T2-t
Y t = V, t dt-Yo
0
VTı-T2 ťTızexP -Ť -T22exP -Ť ľ-Vп T1 + T2-t
724
B-62444E/o3 APPENDiX D. NOMOGRAPHS
When a servo motor is used, the posítíoning system causes an error
between input commands and output results. Síncc the tool advances
RADIUS DIRECTION
along the specífıed segment, an error is not produced in línear
ERROR AT CIRCLE ínterpolatíon. In circular ínterpolatíon, however, radíal errors may be
cuπıNG produced, specially for circular cuttíng at hígh speeds.
This error can be obtaíned as follows:
z
dr = Ź T,z + Tzz ř 1
dг : Maximum radius error mm
v : Feedrate mm/s
ґ : Cігc1e radíus mm
T1 : Exponentíal acceleratíon/deceleratíon tíme constant sec
at cuttíng T=o
T2 : T me constant of posítoníng system sec . lnverse of posíton
loop gaín
1n the case of be11-shaped acceleratíon/deceleratíon and línear acceleration/
deceleration after cutting feed ínterpolatíon, an approxímatíon of this radius
error can be obtaíned wíth the following expression:
z
dr = T,z + 2Tzz ř
Thus, the radius error in the case of be11-shaped acceleration/deceleratíon
and línear acceleratíon/deceleratíon after ínterpolatíon ís smaller than in
case of exponentiai acceleratíon/deceleration by a factor of 12, excluding
any error caused Ьy a servo loop time constant.
Fíg. Radíus direction error of círcular cuttíng
Sínce the machíning radíus r mm and allowable error mm of the
workpíece is given in actual machíníng, the allowable límít feedrate v
mm /sec ís determíned Ьy equation 1 .
Sínce the acceleratíon/deceleratíon tíme constant at cuttíng whích is set
by thís equipment vańes wíth the machine too1, refer to the manual issued
by the machine tool builder.
725
,- : , N1NG
Č. J 1 Y1 .,jι ` 4Ył lĆ1V ύ1
POWF_R ON, WHEN CLEAR
AND WHEN REáET PP PEN Г Х B-62444E/03
;TAT U S W H E N Т U Fł h1 I N G P C3W E R O N, WH E N C L EA R
АND iNНЕN RЕЅЕT

Parameter 3402 CLR ís used to select whether resettíng the CNC places
ít ín the cleared state or in the reset state 0: reset state/1: cleared state .
The symbols ín the tables below mean the followíng :
O:The status ís not changed oг the movement ís contínued.
x:The status ís cancelled or the movement is ínterrupted.
ltem When turning power on C1eared Reset
8etting Offset value O O O
data
Data set by the O O O
MD1 settíng opera-
tíon
Parameter O O O
Various Programs in O O O
data memory
Contents ín the x x O: MD1 mode
buffer storage x: Other mode
Dísplay of se- O O Note 1 O Note 1
quence number
One shot G code x x x
Moda1 G code lnítíal G codes. lnitial G codes. O
The G20 and G21 codes G20/G21 are not
return to the same state they changed.
were ín when the power was
lastturned off.
F Zero Zero O
S,T,M x O O
K Number of re- x x x
peats
Work coordinate value Zero O O
726
WHEN TURNING
POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR
AND WHEN RESET B-62444EJ03 APPENDIX
ltem When turning power oп Cteared ReØt
Actìon ín Movement x x x
o aerä Dwe11 x x x
tcn
lssuance of M, s x x x
and T codes
Too1 offset x Dependíng on param- O: MD1 mode
eter LVK Other modes depend
on parameter
LVK
Too1 nose radius x x O: MD1 mode
compensatíon x : Other modes
storíng called sub- x x Note 2 O: MD1 mode
program number x: Other modes Note
2
Output CNC a1arm sígnai Extínguish íf there is no Extínguísh íf there is Extinguish if there ís
signals AL cause for the alamı no cause for the aiarm no cause for the a1arm
Reference position x O x : Emergency O x : Emergency
return completion stop stop
LED
S, T and B codes x O O
M code x x x
M, S and T strobe x x x
signals
Spíndle revolution x O O
signal s analog
signal
CNC ready signal ON O O
MA
Servo ready sígnal ON When other than ser- ON When other than ON When other than
SA vo alarm servo a1aгm servo alarm
Cyc1e start LED x x x
STL
Feed hold LED x x x
sPL
Notes
1. When headíng is performed, the main program number is displayed.
2. When a reset ís performed duríng executíon of a subprogram, control returns the
main program.
Execution cannot be started from the middle of the subprogram.
727
F.CHARACTER-TO-CODE
CORRESPONDENCE TABLE APPENDIX B-62444E/03
F
CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDЕNС ТАDLI
Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 033 Exclamatíon mań<
G 071 034 Quotatíon mańc
H 072 035 Hash sígn
1 073 036 Do11ar sign
J 074 037 Percent
K 075 038 Ampersand
L 076 039 Apostrophe
M 077 040 Lett parenthesís
N 078 041 Ríght parenthesis
O 079 042 Asteńsk
P 080 + 043 P1us sign
Q 081 044 Comma
R 082 - 045 Mínus sígn
S 083 . 046 Peńod
T 084 / 047 S1ash
U 085 . 058 co1oп
V 086 059 semíco on
W 087 < 060 Lett ang e bracket
X 0 8 = 061 Equa1 sígn
Y 089 > 062 Right angle bracket
Z 090 ? 063 Questíon mark
0 048 ,д 064 HAt1 mańc
1 049 [ 091 Lett square bracket
2 050 092
3 051 0 093 Yen sígn
4 052 ] 094 Right square bracket
5 053 095 Underscore
Note
Each Japanese akuten or handakuten ís counted as one
character.
728
G. ALARM L1ST 8-62444E/03 APPENDIX G ALARM L,ST
-
i ?rog н érrors P/S alarm
Number Message Contents
000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power.
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm A character with incorrect parity was ínput .
Correct the tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm The number of characters in a block is odd . This alarm wí11
be generated only when the TV check is effective.
003 TOO MANY D1G1TS Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input.
Refer to the item of max. programmable dimensíons.
004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign - was input without an address at tho begín-
ning of a block. Modify the program .
005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was fo1-
lowed by another address or EOB code. Modify the program.
006 1LLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE S1GN Sign - input error Sígn - was input after an address with whích
it cannot be used. Or two or moгe - signs were input.
Modífy the program.
007 1LLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL PO1NT Decimal poìnt . ínput error A decimal poínt was ínput after aп ad-
dress wíth whích it can not be used. Or two decimal points were in-
put.
Modífy the program.
009 1LLEGAL ADDRESS 1NPUT Unusable character was ínput in significant area.
Modify the program.
010 1MPROPER G-CODE An unusable G code or G code correspondíng to the function not
províded is specified. Modify the program.
011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was
inadequate. Modify the program.
014 1LLEGAL LEAD COMMAND 1ri variable lead threading, the lead incremental and decremental out-
putted Ьy address K exceed the maximum command value or a com-
mand such that the lead becomes a negative value ís given.
Modify the program.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS 1n circular ínterpolation G02 0г G03 , difference of the distance be-
tween the start point and the center of an arc and that between the
end poínt and the center of the arc exceeded the va1ue specífied in
parameter No. 3410.
021 1LLEGAL PLANE AX1S An axís not included in the selected plane by usíng G17, G18, G19
COMMANDED was commanded in circular ínterpolatíon. Modify the program.
022 CIRCULAR 1NTERPOLATION 1n circular interpolation, radius R, or the dístanc between the start
poínt and the center of the arc, 1, J, oг K, has not been specífied.
020 G NO CIRCLE RADIUS When circular interpolation is specified, neither R specífying an arc
radius , nor 1, J, and K specífyíng the distance from a start point to
the center is specífied.
023 1LLEGAL RADIUS COMMAND 1n circular interpolation by radíus designation, negatíve va1ue was
commanded for address R. MØify the program.
028 1LLEGAL PLANE SELECT 1п the p1ane selection command, two or more axes ín the same dírec-
tion are commanded.
Modify the program.
729
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 8-62444E/03
Number Message Contents
029 1LLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by T code is too large.
Modífy the program.
030 1LLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number ín T functíon specifíed for tool offset is too large.
Modify the program.
031 1LLEGAL P COMMAND 1N G10 1n setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number following ad-
dress P was excessive or it was not specifíed.
Modify the program.
032 1LLEGAL OFFSET VALUE 1N G10 1n setting an offset amount by G10 or ín wrìting an offset amount 5y
system variables, the offset amount was excessíve.
033 NO SOLUTION AT NRC A point of intersectíon cannot be determined for tool nos radíus
compensation. Modify the program.
034 NO C1RC ALLOWED 1N ST-UP The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 0г G03
/EXT BLK mode in tool nose radius compensation. Modífy the program.
035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Skíp cutting G31 was specified in tool nose radius compensation
mode. Modify the program.
037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE 1N NRC The offset p1aпe is switched in tool nose radíus compensatíon. 1
Modífy the program.
038 1NTERFERENCE 1N CIRCULAR Overcutting wi11 occur in tool nose radíus compensatíon because the
BLOCK arc start point or end point coincides with the arc center.
Modify the program.
039 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED 1N NRC Chamfering or corner R was specìfied with a start-up, a caпcel, oг
switchíng between G41 and G42 іп tool nose radius compensation.
The program may cause overcutting to occur in chamferíng or corner
R. Modífy the program.
040 1NTERFERENCE 1N G90/G94 Overcutting wi11 occur in tool nose radíus compensatíon in canned
BLOCK cycle G90 or G94. Modífy the program.
041 1NTERFERENCE 1N NRC Overcuttíng wí11 occur ín tool nose radius compensation.
Modify the program.
і
046 1LLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN Other than P2, P3 and P4 aгe commanded for 2nd, 3гd and 4th refer-
COMMAND ence position return command.
050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED 1N THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cuttíng block.
BLK Modify the program.
051 M1SSING MOVE AFTĚR CHF/CNR lmproper movement or the move dístance was specífied in the block
next to the chamfering or corner R block.
Modify the program.
052 CODE 15 NOT G01 AFTER The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01.
CHF/CNR Modify the program.
053 TOO MANY ADDRESS 1n the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of 1, K and R
COMMANDS are specifìed. Otherwise, the character after a comma , is not C oг
R in direct drawing dímensions programmíng. Modify the program.
054 NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the corner R
CHF/CNR was specified includes a taper command. Modify the program.
055 M1SSING MOVE VALUE 1N 1n chamferíng or corner R block, the move distance is less than
CHF/CNR chamfer or corner R amount.
056 NO END PO1NT ANGLE 1N Neither the end point nor angle is specified in the command for the
CHF/CNR block next to that for which on1y the angle ís specifíed A . п the
chamferíng common, 1 K is commanded for the X Z axís.
057 NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END B1ock end point is not calculated correctly ín dírect dímension drawíng
programming.
058 END PO1NT NOT FOUND B1ock end point ís not found in direot dimensíon drawing program-
ming.
730
G. ALARM L1ST B-62444E/03 APPENDIX
Number Message Contents
059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND 1n an external program number search or external workpiece number
search, a specífíed program number was not found. Otherwise, a
program specifíed for seaiching is beíng edited iıı background pro-
cessing. Check the prπgrarıı number and external signal. Oг díscon-
tinue the backgrounć editing.
060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Commanded sequence number was not tound in the sequence num-
Ьeг search. Check the sequence number.
061 ADDRESS P/Q NOT FOUND 1N Address P or Q is not specífíed in G7û, G71, G72, oґ G73 command.
G70-G73 Modify the program.
062 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N G71-G76 1 The depth of cut in G71 0г G72 is zero or negative va1ue.
2 The repetítíve count ín G73 is zero or negative value.
3 The negatíve va1ue ìs specified to Δі oг Δk is zero in G74 or G75.
4 A va1ue other than zero ís specífied to address U or W, though Δi
oг nk ís zero in G74 or G75.
5 A negative value ís specífied to Ad, though the relief dírection in
G74 0г G75 is determíned.
6. Zero or a negative value is specìfied to the height of throad or
depth of cut of first time in G76.
7 The specífied minimum depth of cut in G76 ís greater tharı the
height of thread.
8 An unusable angle of tool tip ís specífíed ín G76.
Modífy the program.
063 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Thы seouence number specífíed by address P in G70, G71, G72, or
G73 corıımand cannot be searcńed. Modify the program.
064 SHAPE PROGRAM NOT A target shape which is not monotonuus íncr asø or decrease was
MONOTONOUSLY specífíed in a repetitive canned cycle G71 0г G72 .
065 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N G71-G73 1 G00 cr G0ı is not commanded at the block with the sequence
number which is specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73 com-
mand.
2. Address Z W or X U was commanded ín the biock wìth a se-
quence number whích ís specified by address P in G71 or G72,
respectively.
Modify the program.
066 1MPROPER G-CODE 1N G71-G73 Aπ urıдllcwable G code was commanded between two blocks specí-
fied by addı ess P in û71, G72, or G73. Modify the program.
067 CAN NOT OPERATE 1N MD1 MODE G70, G71, G72, or G73 command with aádress P and Q was speci-
fíed.
Modify the program.
069 FORMAT ERROR 1N G70-G73 The final move command in the blocks specified by P and Q of 070,
G71, G?2, oг G73 ended with chamferíng or corrıer R.
070 NO PROGRAM SPACE 1N The memory aгеa is Insufficient.
MEMORY Delete any uпnecessary p0gram6, then retry.
071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be soarched was not found. Or tńe program wíth
spec;ified proyram number was not tound in program number search.
Check th da a,
072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programѕ to be stored exceeded 63 basíc , 125 op-
tíon , 200 optíon , 400 optíon , or 1000 optíon . Delete unnecessary
programs and execute program regístratíon agaín.
073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY 1N The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and
execute program regístration agaín.
731
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX 8-824ØE/03
Number Message Contents
074 1LLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER The program number is other than 1 to 9999.
Modífy the program number.
075 PROTECT Aп attempt was made to register a program whose number was pro-
tected.
076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Address P program number was not commanded in the block whích
includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program.
077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR The subprogram was called in fíve folds. Modífy the program.
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number oг a sequence number whích was specífíed by
address P ín the block whích includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was
not found. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement
was not found. Otherwíse, a called program is being edíted ín back-
ground processing. Correct the program, or díscontinue the back-
ground editíng.
079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR 1n memory or program collatíon,a program ín memory does not agree
wíth that read from an external 1/0 devíce. Check both the programs
ín memory and those from the external device.
080 G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT 1n the automatíc tool compensation functíon 036, G37 , the mea-
ASSERTED surement posítíon reach sígnal XAE oг ZAE ís not turned on wíthin
aп area specífíed ín parameter 6254 va1ue e .
Thís ís due to a setting or operator error.
081 OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND 1N Automatíc tool compensatíon G36, G37 was specified without a T
G37 code. Automatíc tool compensation functíon Modífy the program.
082 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED 1N 037 T code and automatic tool compensation G36, G37 were specífíed
in the same block. Automatic tool compensation functíon
Modífy the program.
083 1LLEGAL AX1S COMMAND 1N G37 1n automatic tool compensatíon G36, G37 , an ínvalíd axís was spe-
cifíed or the command is incremental. Modífy the program.
085 COMMUNICATION ERROR When enteríng data ín the memorу by using Reader / Puncher inter-
1
face, an overrun, paríty oг framíng error was generated. The number
of bíts of input data or settíng of baud rate or specifícation No. of 1/O
unít is íncorrect.
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When enteríng data ín the memorу by usíng Reader / Puncher ínter-
face, the ready signal DR of reader / puncher was turned off.
Power supply of 1/0 unit ís off or cable is not connected oг a is
defeotíve.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When enteńng data in the memorу by using Reader / Puncher inter-
face, though the read terminate command is specífied, input ís not
interrupted after 10 characters read. 1/0 unít or ís defective.
088 G LAN F1LE TRANS ERROR Fí1e data transfer over the OS1-Ethernet was termínated as a result of
CHANNEL-1 a transfer error.
089 G LAN F1LE TRANS ERROR Fí1e data transfer over the OS1-Ethernet was terminated as a result of
CHANNEL-2 a transfer error.
090 REFERENCE RETURN The reference position return cannot be performed normally because
1NCOMPLETE the reference position return start point ís too close to the reference
posítíon or the speed is too s1ow. Separate the start point far enough
from the reference posítion, or specífy a suffíciently fast speed for
reference posítion return. Check the program contents.
091 REFERENCE RETURN 1n the automatic operation halt state, manual reference posítíon re-
1NCOMPLETE turn cannot be performed.
092 AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE The commanded axis by G27 Reference posítíon return check did
PO1NT not return to the reference positíon.
732
APPENDIX G. ALARM LiST Ø-6244AE/G3
Ьe N rmu Message Contents
094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED COORD P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. After the
CHG automatic operation was interrupted, the coordínate system setting
operatíon was performed.
Perform the correct op ratíon accordíng to th operator s manυai.
095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED EXT OFS P type cannot be specífíed when the program ís restarted. After the
CHG automatíc operation was ínterrupted, the external workpiece offsei
amount changed.
Perform the correct operatíon according to th operator s manual.
096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED WRK OFS P type cannot be specified when the program ís restarted. After the
CHG automatic operation was ínterrupted, the woгφіece offset amount
changed.
Perform the correct operation according to th operator s manuaï.
097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED AUTO P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted. After paw
EXEC eг ON, after emergency stop or P/S aiarm 94 to 97 were reset, пo
automatic operatíon was performed. Perform automatíc operatíon.
098 G28 FOUND 1N SEQUENCE A command of the program restart was specified without the refer
RETURN ence position return operation after power ON or emergency stop,
and G28 was found during search.
Perform the reference position return.
099 MD1 EXEC NOT ALLOWED AFT. After completion of search in program restart, a move command is
SEARCH given wíth MD1.
100 PARAMETER WR1TE ENABLE On the PARAMETER SETTING screen, PWE parameter writíng en-
ab1ed is set to 1. Set it to 0, then reset the system.
i01 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power turned off while rewritíng the memory by program edit op-
p eratíon. 1f this alarm has occurred, press whíle pressing
, and only the program beíng edíted wí11 be deleted.
Regíster the deleted program.
109 P/S ALARM A va1ue other than 0 0Г 1 was specified after P in the G08 ccde, or no
value was specífíed.
111 CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW The result of calculatíon is out of the allowable range -1 to
-10-29, 0, and 10-29 to 1047 .
112 D1VIDED BY ZERO Divisíon by zero was specífied. including tan 90
Modífy the program.
113 1MPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro ís commanded.
Modífy the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR 1N MACRO There is an error in other formats than .
Modify the program.
733
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-62444E/03
Number Message Contents
115 1LLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER A value not defined as a varíable number ís desígnated in the custom
macro oг in hígh-speed cycle cuttíng.
The header contents are ímproper ín a hígh speed cycle cutting. Thís
aіaґm is given in the following cases:
1. The header correspondíng to the specífíed machiníng cycle num-
ber called ís not found.
2. The cycle connectíon data value ís out of the allowable range
0 - 999 .
3. The number of data ín the header ís out of the allowable range
0 - 32767 .
4. The start data varíable number of executabl format data ís out of
the allowable range 20000 - 85535 .
5. The storing data variable number of executable format data is out
of the allowable range 85535 .
6. The storing start data varíable number of executable format data is
overlapped wíth the variable number used in the header.
Modify the program.
116 WR1TE PROTECTED VARIABLE The left side of substítution statement ís a varíable whose substitution
is inhibited. Modífy the program.
118 PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper límit quíntuple .
Modify the program.
119 1LLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument ís negatíve, BCD argument ís negative, or other
values than 0 to 9 aгe present on each líne of B1N argument.
Modify the program.
122 QUADRUPLE MACRO The macro modal ca11 ís specífied ín double.
MODAL-CALL Modífy the program.
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND Macro control command ís used duríng DNC operatíon.
1N DNC Modífy the program.
124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO - END does not correspond to 1: 1. Modify the program.
125 FORMAT ERROR 1N MACRO format is erroneous. Modífy the program.
126 1LLEGAL LOOP NUMBER 1n DOn, 1 n 3 is not establíshed. Modífy the program.
127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT 1N SAME NC and custom macro commands coexíst.
BLOCK Modify the program.
128 1LLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The sequence number specifíed in the branch command was not 0 to
NUMBER 9999. Oг, ít cannot be searched. Modífy the program.
129 1LLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS Aп address which ís not allowed ín ís used.
Modífy the program.
130 1LLEGAL AXIS OPERATION An axis control command was gíven by PMC to an axís controlled by
CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axís
controlled by PMC. Modífy the program.
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM Five or more alarms have generated ín external a1aгm message.
MESSAGES Consult the PMC ladder diagram to fínd the cause.
132 ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND No a1arm No. concerned exísts in external a1aгm message c1ear.
Check the PMC ladder diagram.
133 1LLEGAL DATA 1N EXT. ALARM Sma11 section data ís erroneous ín external a1aгm message or exter-
MSG na1 operator message. Check the PMC ladder díagram.
135 SPINDLE ORIENTATION PLEASE Without any spindle oríentatíon , aп attempt was made for spíndle
indexíng. Perform spíndle oríentatíon.
136 C/H-CODE MOVE CMD 1N SAME A move command of other axes was specífíed to the same block as
BLK. spindle indexing addresses C, H. Modífy the program.
734
G. ALARM ЈST B-62444E/03 APPENDIX
Number Message Contents
137 M-CODE MOVE CMD 1N SAME A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as
BLK. M-code related to spindle índexíng. Modify the program.
138 G SUPERIMPOSED DATA 1n PMC axis control, the íncrement for pulse dístríbutíon on the CNC
OVERFLOW and PMC síde are too large when the superímposed control ex-
tended function is used.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC An axís is selected ín commandíng by PMC axís control.
CONTROL AX1S Modify the program.
145 1LLEGAL COMMAND G112/G113 The conditíons are íncorrect when the po1ar coordinate interpolation
starts oг it is canceled.
1 1n modes other than G40, was specífíed.
2 An error ís found ín the plane selection. Parameters No. 5460
and No. 5461 are íncorrectly specífied.
Modífy the value of program or parameter.
146 1MPROPER G CODE G codes which cannot be specifíed in the po1ar coordinate ínterpola-
tion mode was specífíed. See sectíon and modify the program.
150 1LLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER Too1 Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value.
Modify the program.
151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT The tool group commanded in the machíníng program ís not set.
FOUND Modify the value of program or parameter.
152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY The number of tools within one group exceeds the maximum va1ue
registrable. Modífy the number of tools.
153 T-CODE NOT FOUND 1n tool lífe data regístratíon, a T code was not specified where one
should be. Correct the program.
155 1LLEGAL T-CODE 1N M06 1п the machining program, M06 and T code in the same block do not
correspond to the group in use. Correct the program.
156 P/L. COMMAND NOT FOUND P and L commands are míssíng at the head of program in whích the
tooi group is set. Correct the program.
157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maxіmum allowable
va1ue. See parameter No. 6800 bít 0 and 1 Modify the program.
158 1LLEGAL TOOL L1FE DATA The tool life to be set ís too exc ssíve. Modífy the setting value.
159 TOOL DATA SETTING During executíng a lífe data settíng program, power was turned off.
1NCOMPLETE Set agaín.
160 MISMATCH WATING M-CODE Different M code ís commaпded in heads 1 and 2 as waíting M code.
only wíth two path control Modify the program.
161 COMMAND G68/G69 G68 and G69 aгe not índependently commaпded in balance cut.
1NDEPENDENTLY Modìfy the program.
on1y with two path control
169 1LLEGAL TOOL GEOMETRY DATA lncorreг,t tool figure data in ínterference check.
oп1y with two path controi
175 1LLEGAL G107 COMMAND Conditions when performíng circular interpolation start or cancel not
correct. To change the mode to the cylindrical ínterpolatíon mode,
specify the command in a format of rotatíon-axís name radíus
of cylinder.
176 1MPROPER G-CODE 1N G107 Any of the followíng G codes whích cannot be specified in the cylin-
drical interpolation mode was specifíed.
1 G codes for positioning, such as G28, G76, G81 - G89,
íncludíng the codes specífying the rapid traverse cycle
2 G codes for settíng a coordínate system: G50, G52
3 G cØe for selecting coordinate system: G53 G54-G59
Modífy the program.
177 CHECK SUM ERROR Check sum error
G05 MODE Modífy the program.
735
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-62444E/03
Number Message Contents
178 G05 NOT ALLOWED 1N G41/G42 G05 was commanded ín the G41/G42 mode.
MODE Correct the program.
179 PARAM. NO. 7510 SETTING The number of controlled axes set by the parameter 7510 exceeds
ERROR the maximum number. Modífy the parameter settíng value.
180 COMMUNICATION ERROR Remote buffer connection alarm has generated. Confírm the number
REMOTE BUF of cables, parameters and 1/O devíce.
194 SPINDLE COMMAND 1N A contour control mode, spíndl posítioníng Cs-axis control mode,
SYNCHRO-MODE or rígíd tapping mode was specified duríng the seríal spíndle
synchronous control mode. Correct the program so that the serial
spíndle synchronous control mode is released in advance.
197 C-AX1S COMMANDED 1N SPINDLE The program specified a movement along the Cf-axís when the síg
MODE na1 CON DGN=G027 7 was off. Correct the program, or consult the
PMC ladder díagram to find the reason the signal ís not turned on.
199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefíned macro word was us d. Modify the custom macro.
200 1LLEGAL S CODE COMMAND 1n the rigid tapping, an S value ís out of the range or ís not specífied.
The maximum values for S which can be specífíed іп rígid tappíng ís
set in parameters 5241 to 5243. Change the settíng іп the paranıeter
or modify the program.
201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND 1N R1G1D 1n the rìgid tapping, no F va1ue ís specified.
TAP Correct the program.
202 POS1T10N LS1 OVERFLOW 1n the rígid tapping, spindle distribution value ís too large.
203 PROGRAM M1SS AT R1G1D 1n the rígíd tapping, position for a rigid M code M29 oг aп S com-
TAPPING mand is incorreot. Modífy the program.
204 1LLEGAL AX1S OPERATION n the rígid tapping, an axis movement is specifíed between the rígid
M code M29 block and G84 G88 block. Modify the program.
205 R1G1D MODE D1 SIGNAL OFF Rígid tapping signal DGNG061 1 is not 1 when G84 G88 ís
executed though the rigíd M code M29 is specífied. Consult the
PMC ladder díagram to find the reason the signal ís not turned on.
210 CAN NOT COMAND M198/M099 1 M198 and M199 are executed in the schedule operation. Or
M198 is executed ín the DNC operation. Modífy the program.
2 1n a multíple repetitive pocketing canned cycl , an interrupt macro
was specified, and M99 was executed.
211 G31 H1GH NOT ALLOWED 1N G99 G31 ís commanded in the per revolution command when the hígh-
speed skip option is provided. Modífy the program.
212 1LLEGAL PLANE SELECT The direct drawíng dimensíons programming is commanded for the
p1aпe other than the Z-X p1aпe. Correot the program.
213 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N Movem nt ís commanded for the axis to be synchronously controlled.
SYNCHRO-MODE
214 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N Coordínate system ís set or tool compensation of the shift type is
SYNCHRO-MODE executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program.
217 DUPLICATE G251 COMMANDS or G251 is further commanded ín the polygon machining
mode. Modify the program.
218 NOT FOUND P/Q COMMAND 1N P or Q is not commanded in the G251 block, or the command va1ue
G251 ís out of the range. Modífy the pragram.
219 COMMAND G250/G251 G251 and G250 are not índependent blocks.
1NDEPENDENTLY
220 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N 1n the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the NC
SYNCHR-MODE program oГ PMC axis control interface for the synchronous axis.
221 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N Polygon machining synchronous operatíon and axis control or ba1-
SYNCHR-MODE ance cuttïng are executed at a tíme. Modífy the program.
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE PO1NT Not returned to reference point before cycle start.
736
G. ALARM L1ST 8-62444E/03 APPENDIX
Number Message Contents
225 SYNCHRONOUS/M1XED CONTROL This alarm is generated ín the following circumstances. Searched for
ERROR duríng synchronous and mixed control command.
oп1y wíth two path control only 1 When there ís a mistake in axís number parameter settíng.
2 When there ís a místake in control commanded.
Modify the program or the parameter.
226 1LLEGAL COMMAND 1N A travel command has been sent to the axís beíng synchronized ïn
SYNCHRO-MODE synchronous mode. Modify the program or the parameter.
only wíth two path control only
229 CAN NOT KEEP SYNCHRO-STATE This alarm is generated in the following círcumstances.
only with two path control only 1 When the synchro/mixed state could not be kept due to system
overload.
2 The above condítion occurred in CNC devíces hardware and
synchro-state could not be kept.
Thís a1arm is not generated ın normai use condítions.
231 FORMAT ERROR 1N G10 OR L50 Any of the following errors occurred ín the specífíed format at the prc
grammable-parameter input.
1 Address N or R was not entered.
2 A number not specified for a parameter was entered.
3 The axis number was too large.
4 An axís number was not specífied ín the axís-type parameter.
5 Aп axís number was specifíed іп the parameter whích is not arı
axis type.
6 Aп attempt was made to reset bit 4 of parameter 3202 NE9 oг
change parameter 3210 PSSWD when they are protected by a
password. Correct the program.
232 1LLEGAL AX1S COMMAND 1N Three or more axes were specified as helícal axes in the helical inter-
HELICAL polation mode.
233 DEVICE BUSY When an at empt was made to use a unít such as that connected via
the RS-232-C interface, other users wer2 usíng it.
239 BP/S ALARM Whi1e punching was beíng performed with the function for controiIing
external 1/O units ,background edítíng was performed.
240 BP/S ALARM Background edíting was performed duríng MDí operatíon.
244 P/S ALARM 1n the skip function actívated by the torque límít signal, the number of
accumulated erroneous pulses exceed 32767 before the signal was
input. Therefore, the pulses cannot be corrected wíth one distríbutíon.
Change the condítíons, such as federates along axes and torque
límít, and try again.
245 T-CODE NOT ALOWED 1N TH1S One of the G codes, G50, GıO, and G04, whích cannot be specífíed
BLOCK in the same block as a T code, was specífied with a T code.
5010 END OF RECORD The end of record was specifíed.
5016 1LLEGAL COMBINATION OF M M codes which belonged to the same group were specífied in a
CODE block. Alternatively,an M code which must be specified without other
M codes ín the block was specífíed in a block wíth other M codes.
5018 POLYGON AX1S SPPED ERROR The rotating speed ratio of the command value cannot be ma .ntaíned
in the mode , because the spped ot the spíndle or the polygon
turning synchronaus axís exceeds the ciamp va1ue or itís too s1ow.
5020 PARAMETER OF RESTART Aп erroneous parameter was specífied for restarting a program.
ERROR
5030 1LLEGAL COMMAND G100 The end command G110 was specifíed before the registration start
command G101, G102, or G103 was specifíed for the B-axis.
737
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDiX 8-62444E/03
Number Message Contents
5031 1LLEGAL COMMAND G100, G102, Whi1e a registration start command G101, G102, or G103 was being
G103 executed, another regìstratíon start command was specífied for the
B-axis.
5032 NEW PRG REGISTERED 1N B-AXS Whi1e the machine was moving about the B-axis, at attempt was
MOVE made to regíster another move command.
5033 NO PROG SPACE 1N MEMORY Commands for movement about the B-axis were not regístered be-
B-AX1S cause of ínsuffícíent program memory.
5034 PLURAL COMMAND N G110 Multiple movements were specifíed wíth the G110 code for the B-
axis.
5035 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED A feedrate was not specífíed for cutting feed about the B-axis.
B-AX1S
5036 ADΠRESS R NOT DEFINED IN Poin4 R was not specífied for the canned cycle for the B-axís.
G81-G86
5037 ADDRESS Q NOT DEFINED 1N G83 Depth of cut Q was not specifíed for the G83 code p ck drilling
cycle . Alternatively, 0 was specífied ín Q for teh B-axis.
5038 TOO MANY START M-CODE More than síx M codes for startíng movement about the B-axis were
COMMAND specified.
5039 START UNREGISTERED B-AX1S An attempt was made to execute a program for the B-axis whích had
PROG not been registered.
5040 CAN NOT COMMANDED B-AX1S The machine could not move about the B-axis because parameter
MOVE was incorrectly specifíed, or because the PMC axís system
could not be used.
5041 CAN NOT COMMANDED G110 Blocks containing the G110 codes were successívely specifíed ín
BLOCK tool-tip radíus compensatíon for the B-axís.
5046 1LLEGAL PARAMETER Parameters related to straightness compensatíon have been erro-
neously specified. Possible causes are as follows :
1 lnvaiid axís numbers have been assígned to move or compensa-
tíon axes.
2 The number of pítcherror compensatíon poínts between the maxi-
mum posítive and maximum negatíve points exceeds 128.
3 Straíghtness compensation point numbers have been assígned in
other than ascending order.
4 Straíghtnes compensation points could not belocated between the
maxіmum posítive and maxіmum negatíve pítch error compensa-
tíon poìnts.
5 The amount of compensation per compensation poínt ís too large
or too sma11.
5051 M-NET CODE ERROR Abnormal character receptíon
Characters except code used to transmít
5052 M-NET ETX ERROR ETX code is abnormal.
5053 M-NET CONNECT ERROR Connectíon tíme supenıision error parameter
5054 M-NET RECEIVE ERROR Boring time supervision error parameter
5055 M-NET PRT/FRM ERROR Vertícal paríty or framíng error detectíon
5056 M-NET BOARD SYSTEM DOWN Transmít tíme-out error parameter No. 177
ROM parity error
CPU interruptíon detection of not lísted above
5058 G35/G36 FORMAT ERROR A command for changing the major axís was specífied duríng cireular
threading. Alternatívely, the leangth of the major axís was specified
to be 0.
5059 RADIUS 1S OUT OF RANGE Duríng círcular ínterpolation, the center of the are specífíed with 1, J,
and K caused the radíus to exceed nine digits.
738
G. ALARM L1ST B-62444E/03 APPENDIX
Number Message Contents
5073 NO DECIMAL PO1NT A decimal poínt ís not specífíed for a command for whích a decimal
point must be specified.
5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address appears more than once ín a block. Alternatívely,
a block contains two oг moгe G codes belongíng to the same group.
5082 DATA SERVER ERROR Details are dísplayed on the data server message screen.
2 Background edít alarm
Number Message Contents
070 to 074 BP/S a1aгm BP/S a1aгm occurs in the same number as the P/S a1aгm that occurs
085 to 087 in ordínary program edít.
140 BP/S a1arm 1t was attempted to select or delete in the background a program be-
ing selected ín the foreground. Note
Use background editing correctly.
Note
A1arm ín background edit ís dísplayed in the key input line of the background edít screen instead
of the ordinary alarm screen and is resettable by any of the MD1 key operatíon.
3 Absolute pulse coder APC alarm
Number Message Contents
300 п AX1S NEED ZRN Manual reference position return is requíred for the nth-axís n=1 - 8 .
301 APC ALARM:n AX1S nth-axís n=1 - 8 APC communícation error. Faílure ín data transmíssíon
COMMUNICATION Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo ínterface module.
302 APC ALARM:n AX1S nth-axís n=1 - 8 APC overtime error.
OVER T1ME Faílure in data transmíssíon.
Possíble causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface moduIe.
303 APC ALARM:n AX1S nth-axis n=1 - 8 APC framíng error. Faílure ín data transmíssíon.
FRAMING Possíble causes ínclude a faulty APC, cable, or senıo ínterface module.
304 APC ALARM:n AX1S nth-axis п=1 - 8 APC paríty error.
PARITY Faílure in data transmíssion. Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, oг
servo interface module.
305 APC ALARM:n ÃX1S nth-axís п=1 - 8 APC pulse error a1arm.
PULSE M1SS APC a1aгm. APC oг cable may be faulty.
306 APC ALARM:n AX1S nth-axís n=1 - 8 APC battery voltage has decreased to a 1ow 1eve1 so that the
BATTERY ZERO data cannot be he1d.
APC a1aгm. Baпerу or cable may be faulty.
307 APC ALARM:n ÃX1S nth-axis п=1 - 8 axís APC battery voltage reaches a 1eve1 where the battery
BATTERY DOWN 1 must be renewed.
APC alarm. Replace the Ьatterу.
308 APC ALARM:n AX1S nth-axís п=1 - 8 APC battery voftage has reached a 1eve1 where the battery
BATTERY DOWN 2 must be renewed including when power is OFF .
APC a1aгm .Replace battery.
309 APC ALARM:n AX1S ZRN An attempt was made to perform reference posítíon return without rotatíng the
1MPOSSIBLE motor through one or more turns. Rotate the motor through one or more turns,
turn off the power then on agaín, then perform reference position return.
739
G. ALARM ιlςт APPENDIX B-62444E/03
4 Seríal pulse coder SPC alarms
When either of the followíng alarms ís íssued, a possible cause ís a faulty seńal pulse coder or cable.
Number Message Contents
350 SPC ALARM: ri AX1S PULSE COD- The n axís axís 1-8 pulse coder has a fault. Refer to diagnosis dis-
ER play No. 202 for details.
351 SPC ALARM: п AX1S COMMUNICA- n axís axís 1-8 seríal pulse coder communícatíon error data trans-
T10N míssíon fault Refer to díagnosís dísplay No. 203 for detaíls.
The details of seríal The details of seríal pulse coder alarm No. 350 pulse coder alarm aгe
pulse coder alarm dísplayed in the díagnosís display No. 202 as shown below.

7 s 5 4 3 2 1 Ø
202 1CSA Ø 1PHA RCA ØZA CKA PH
C5A : The seńal pulse coder ís defectíve. Replace ít.
BLA : The battery voltage ís 1ow. Replace the batteńes. This alarm
has nothíng to do wíth a1аrm 350 seńal pulse coder a1arm .
PΣIA : The seríal pulse coder or feedback cable is defectíve. Replace
the seńal pulse coder or cable.
RCA : The seńal pulse coder ís defectíve. Replace it.
BZA : The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first tíme.
Make sure that the batteńes are connected.
Turn the power off, then tum ít on again and perform a
reference posítion return. This alarm has nothing to do with
a1aгm 350 seríal pulse coder a1arm .
CKA : The seríal pulse coder ís defectíve. Replace ít.
SPH : The seńal pulse codeг or feedback cable ís defective. Replace
the seńal pulse coder or cable.
The detaíls of serïal The detaíls of seńal pulse coder a1aгm No. 351 communicatíon alarm
pulse coder alarm aгe dísplayed in the díagnosís dísplay No. 203 as shown below.

7 s Ø 4 3 2 1 0
203 pτε icac sτв мaм
DTE : The seńal pulse coder encountered a communícatíon error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receíver círcuít
ís defectíve. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or
NC-axís board
CRC : The seńal pulse coder encountered a communicatíon error.
The pulse coder, feedback cab1e, or feedback receiver circuít
ís defectíve. Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or
NC-axis Ьoаrd.
STB : the seńal pulse coder encountered a communícation error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receíver circuit
ís defectíve.
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NC-axís Ьoаrd.
PRM: An ínvalid parameter was found. A1arm 417 ínvalid servo
parameter ís also íssued.
740
β-62444E/03 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
5 Servo alarms
Number Message Oontents
400 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S The n-th axís axís 1-8 overload sígnal ís on. Refer to diagnosis
OVERLOAD dísplay No. 201 for details.
401 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S VRDY OFF The n-th axis axis 1-8 senıo amplifíer READY sígnal DRDY went
off.
404 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S VRDY ON Even though the n-th axis axís 1-8 READY sígnal MCON went
off, the servo amplífier READY signal DRDY is sti11 on. Or, when the
power was turned on, DRDY went on even though MCON was off.
Check that the senıo interface module and servo amp are connected.
405 SERVO ALARM: WRONG ZRN Position control system fault. Due to an NC or senıo system fault in
the reference posítion return, there is the possíbilíty that reference
position return could not be executed correctly. Try again from the
manual reference positíon return.
407 SERVO ALARM: EXCESS ERR The difference in synchronous axis posítíon devíatíon exceeded the
set value.
409 SERVO ALARM:EXCESS ERROR An abnormal load on the servo motor was detected. Alternatívely, an
abnormal load on the spindle motor was deteoted in Cs mode.
410 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S EXCESS The posítion devíation value when the n-th axís axis 1-8 stops is
ERR larger than the set value.
Note Límít value must be set to parameter for each axís.
411 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S EXCESS The positíon devíation value when the n-th axis axís 1-8 moves ís
ERR larger than the set value.
Note Límit value must be set to parameter for each axís.
413 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S LS1 OVER The contents of the error register for the n-th axís axís 1-8 are be-
yond of the range of -231 to 231. This error usually occurs as the
result of an improperly set parameters.
414 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S DETECT N-th axís axís 1-8 digital senıo system fault. Refer to diagnosís
ERR dísplay No. 200 and for detaíls.
415 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S MOT10N A speed higher than 511875 units/s was attempted to be set in the
OVER n-th axis axis 1-8 . Thís error occurs as the result of ímproperly set
CMR.
416 SERVO ALARM: п AX1S Posítíon detection system fault in the n-th axis axis 1-8 pulse coder
DISCONNECT disconnectíon alarm . Refer to diagnosís dísplay No. 201 for detaíls.
417 SERVO ALARM: n AX1S DGTL This alarm occurs when the n-th axis axis 1-8 ís in one of the
PARAM condítíons lísted below. Dígítal servo system alarm
1 The value set in Parameter No. 2020 motor form is out of the
specífíed limít.
2 A proper value 111 or -111 ís not set in parameter
motor revolutíon dírection .
3 111ega1 data a value below 0, etc. was set in parameter No. 2023
number of speed feedback pulses per motor revolution .
4 111ega1 data a value below 0, etc. was set ín parameter No. 2024
number of posítíon feedback pulses per motor revolutíon .
5 Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 flexíble fíeld gear rate have
not been set.
6 A value outside the límít of 1 to the number of control axes oг
a non-continuous value Parameter 1023 senıo axís number
contains a value out of the range from 1 to the number of axes,or
an isolated value for example, 4 not prceded by 3 .was set in
parameter No. 1023 senıo axísnumber .
421 SERVO ALARN : n AX1S EXCESS Whí1e the dual posítíon feedback functíon ís beíng applied, aп exces-
ER D síve dífference was detected between a semí-closed loop eггoг and
closed loop error. Check the dual positíon conversíon factor set ín
parameter Nos. 2078 and 2079.
741
G. ALARM L1ST APPENC-X B--62444Ěï03
Details of servo The details of servo alarm No. 414 are displayed in the diagnosís display
alarm No. 200 and as shown below.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
200 IDVL LV oVC HCA HVA DCA 1FBA OFA
OVL : An overload alarm ís beíng generated.
This bit causes servo alarm No. 400. The details are indícated
ín díagnostic data
LV : A 1ow voltage a1arm is beíng generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
OVC: A overcurrent a1arm ís beíng generated ínsíde of digítal servo.
HCA : Aл aЬтoгma1 current alarm ís being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
HVA : An overvoltage a1aгm ís beíng generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
DCA : A regeneratíve discharge círcuít a1аrm ís beíng generated in
servo amp.
Check LED.
FBA : A disconnectíon a1arm ís being generated.
Thís bít causes servo alarm details are indicated
іn diagnostíc data No. 201
OFA : An overflow alarm ís beíng generated inside of digítal servo.
7 s 5 4 3 1
C 204 IOFS CC LDA 1PMS
OFS : A current conversíon eпoг has occurred ín the digital servo.
MCC : A magnetíc contactor contact in the servo amplifier has
welded.
LDA : The LED índicates that serial pulse coder C ís defectíve
PM5 : A feedback pulse eпoг has occurred because the feedback cable
is defective.
Details Cf servQ The details of servo alarms No. 400 and No. 416 are displayed in the
alarrns No. 400 and diagnosis display No. 201 as shown below.
7 6 s 4 3 2 1 Ø
201 WLD EXP
When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data servo a1аrm No. 400 ís
being generated :
ALD 0 : Motor overheating
1 : Aτnplifier overheatíng
When FBAL equal 1 in díagnostíc data servo alarm No. 416 ís
being generated :
ALD EXP AIami detalls
1 0 Buí1t-ín pulse coder disconnection hardware
1 1 Separately ínstalled pulse coder disconnectíon
hardware
0 0 Pu1se coder is not connected due to software.
742
β -624ØEl03 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
6 Over travel alarms
Number Message Contents
500 OVER TRAVEL :+n Exceeded the n-th axís axís 1-8 + síde stored stroke İímít 1.
Parameter 0г 1326 Notes
501 OVER TRAVEL :-n Exceeded the n-th axís axis 1-8 - síde stored stroke límít 1.
Parameter or 1327 Notes
502 OVER TRAVEL :+n Exceeded the n-th axis axis 1-8 + side stored stroke limit 11.
Parameter
503 OVER TRAVEL :-n Exceeded the n-th axís axís 1-8 - síde stored stroke límít 11.
Parameter
504 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n-th axis axis 1-8 + side stored stroke límít 111.
Parameter
505 OVER TRAVEL :-n Exceeded the n-th axís axís 1-8 - síde stored stroke límít 111.
Parameter
506 OVER TRAVEL :+n Exceeded the n-th axis axís 1-8 + síde hardware OT.
507 OVER TRAVEL :-n Exceeded the n-th axis axis 1-8 - síde hardware OT.
508 1NTERFERENCE :+n When n-axís ís movíng in the posítive direction, it ínterferes with the
order tool pcst only with two-path control
509 1NTERFERENCE :-n When n-axís ís moving ın the negative direction, it ínterferes with the
order tool post only wíth two-path control
510 OVER TRAVEL :+n A stroke límít check, made before startíng movement, found that the
end point of a block taııs wicnin ŕhe μlυs + s;de inhibitod aгea aiong
the n-axís defíned by a stroke limit. Correct the program.
511 OVER TRAVEL :-n A stroke limit check, made before starting movement, found that the
end point of a block fa11s wìthin the minus - síde ínhibíted area along
the N-axís defíned by a stroke limit. Correct the program.
Notes
Over travel alarrns No. 504 and No. 505 are provided only with the T series.
Parameters 1326 and 1327 aгe effective when EXLM stroke limit switch signal is on.
7 Overtıeat alarms
Number Message î,onients
700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UN1T Control unit overheat
Check that the fan motor operates normally, and clean the air filter.
701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR The fan motor on the top of the cabinet for the controi unít ís over-
heated. Check the operation of the fan motor and replace the motor íf
necessary.
704 OVERHEAT: SPINDLE Spíndle overheat in the spindie fluctuatíon detectíon
1 1f the cuttíng load is heavy, relíeve the cutting conditíon.
2 Check whether the cutting tool is share.
3 Another possíble cause ís a faulty spindle amp.
743
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-62444E/03
8 Rígid tapping aiarm
Number Message Contents
740 R1G1D TAP ALARM : EXCESS During rígíd tapping, the posítíon devíatíon of the spindle ín the stop
ERROR state exceeded the settíng.
741 R1G1D TAP ALARM : EXCESS Duríng rígíd tappíng, the posítíon devíatíon of the spindle in the stop
ERROR state exceeded the settíng.
742 R1G1D TAP ALARM : LS1 OVER Duríng rigid tapping, an LS1 overflow occurred oп the spíndle síde.
FLOW
9 Seríal spíndle aiarms
Number Message Contents
749 S-SPINDLE LS1 ERROR A communication error occurred for the seríal spindie. The cause
may Ьe the disconnectíon of an optícal cabie or the ínterruption of the
power to the spindle amplífier.
Note Unlike alarm No. 750, this a1arm occurs when a serial commu-
nícatíon alamı is detected after the spíndle amplífíer is normally acti-
vated.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL L1NK ERROR This a1arm is generated when the spíndle control unít ís not ready for
startíng correctly when the power ís turned on in the system with the
seríal spíndle.
The four reasons can be considered as follows:
1 An ímproperly connected optíc cable, oг the spíndle control unít s
power ís OFF.
2 When the NC power was turned on under a1arm conditions other
than SU-01 or AL-24 whích are shown on the LED display of the
spíndle control unit.
1п thís case, turn the spíndle amplifier power off once and perfarnı
startup agaín.
3 Other reasons іmpгopeг combínatíon of hardware
Thís a1aгm does not occur after the system íncluding the spindle
control unít is activated.
4 The second spindie when SP2, bít 4 of parameter No. 3701, is 1
ís in one of the above conditions 1 to 3 .
See diagnostíc display No. 409 for detaíls.
751 SPINDLE-1 ALARM DETECT This a1arm índicates in the NC that an a1aгm ís generated in the
AL-XX spindle unít of the system with the seríal spíndle. The a1arm is dis-
played in form AL-XX XX ís a number . Refer to 11 Alarms d1s-
piayed on spindie servo unit .The a1arm number XX ís the number
indícated on the spindle amplífíer. The CNC holds thís number and
dispiays on the screen.
752 SPINDLE-1 MODE CHANGE This a1arm is generated if the system does not properly termínate a
ERROR mode change. The modes include the Cs contouríng, spíndle posi-
tioning, rigid tappíng, and spindle control modes. The a1arm is actí-
vated if the spindle control unít does not respond correctly to the
mode change command íssued by the NC.
754 SPINDLE-1 ABNORMAL TORQUE An abnormal load on the fírst spindle motor was detected.
ALM
761 SPINDLE-2 ALARM DETECT Refer to spíndle aiarm No. 751. For 2nd axís
AL-XX
762 SPINDLE-2 MODE CHANGE Refer to spíndle a1arm No. 2nd axís
ERROR
764 SPINDLE-2 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as for aiarm No. 754 for the second spíndie
ALM
771 SPINDLE-3 ALARM DETECT Same as for aiarm No. 751 for the third spíndie
AL-XX
744
f
8-62444E/03 APPENDIX G. ALARM L1ST
Number Message Contents
772 SPINDLE-3 MODE CHANGE Same as for alarm No. 752 for the third spindle
ERROR
774 SPINDLE-3 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as for a1arm No. 754 for the thírd spíndle
ALM
The detaíls of spíndle The details of spíndle alarm No. 750 are dísplayed in the díagnosis dísplay
alarm No. 409 as shown below.
7 6 Ø 4 3 2 1 0
409 SPE S2E S1E sHE
SPE 0: In the spindle seńal control, the seríal spíndle parameters
fulfíll the spíndle unít startup condítions.
1: In the spindle seňal control, the seńal spíndle parameters do
not fulfíll the spindle unit startup condítions.
52E 0: The second spíndle ís norma1 duríng the spindle seríal control
startup.
1: The second spindle was detected to have a fault duńng the
spíndle seńal control startup.
S1E 0: The first spíndle ís normal duńng the spíndle seríal control
startup.
1: The fírst spíndle was detected to have a fault duríng the
spíndle axís seńal control startup.
SHE 0: The serial communícatíons module in the CNC ís norma1.
1: The seríal communicatíons module in the CNC was detected
to have a fault.
10 System alarms
These alarms cannot be reset wíth reset key.
Number Message Contents
900 ROM PARITY ROM paríty error CNC/OMM/Servo
Replace the number of ROM.
910 RAM PARITY : 4N RAM paríty eггoг ín the tape memory RAM module. C1ear the
memoгу or replace the module.
After this operation, reset a11 data includíng the parameters.
911 RAM PARITY: 4N RAM paríty error in the tap memory RAM module. C1ear the
memoгу or replace the module.
After this operatíon, reset a11 data íncludíng the parameters.
912 RAM PARITY: 4N RAM paríty error in the tape memorу RAM module. C1ear the
memorу or replace the module.
After thís operation, reset a11 data íncluding the parameters.
913 RAM PARITY : 4N RAM paríty error in the tape memorу RAM module. C1ear the
memoгу oг replace the module.
After this operation, reset a11 data includíng the parameters.
914 SRAM PARITY 2N RAM parity error for part program storage RAM or additional sRAM.
C1ear memorу oг гeplace the main CPU board or additional SRAM.
915 SRAM PARITY 2N Then, re-specífy a11 data includíng parameters.
916 DRAM PARITY RAM parity error in the DRAM module. Replace the DRAM module.
920 SERVO ALARM 1/2/3/4 AX1S Servo alarm 1 st to 4th axís . A watchdog alarm or a RAM paríty er-
гoг in the servo mØu1e occurred.
Replace the senro control module on the main CPU board.
922 SERVO ALARM 5/6П/8 ÃX1S Servo a1aгm 5th to 8th axís . A watchdog a1aгm or a RAM parity er-
ror in the servo module occurred.
Replace the servo control module on the optíon 2 board.
745
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-62444E/03
Number Message Contents
924 SERVO MODULE SETTING ER- The digítal servo module ís not installed.
ROR Check that the servo control module or servo interface module on the
main CPU or optíon 2 board ís mounted securely.
926 SERVO ALARM 1/2/3/4/5/6 AX1S Senıo alarm fírst to síxth axís . A RAM paríty error in the servo mod-
u1e or a watchdog alarm has occurred. Replace the servo control
module on the main CPU board.
930 CPU 1NTERRUPUT CPU error abnormal interrupt
The main CPU board is faulty.
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM Fau1t occurred in the PMC. The PMC control module on the main
CPU board or optíon 3 board may be faulty.
951 PMC-RC WATCH DOG ALARM Fau1t occurred in the PMC-RC watchdog a1arm .Optíon 3 board may
Ьe faulty.
970 NM1 OCCURRED 1N BOC RAM parity eггoг or NM1 occurred ín the PMC-RB or PMC-RA2 mod-
u1e.
971 NM1 OCCURRED 1N SLC An alarm condítíon occurred in the ínterface with an 1/O unít. For
PMC-RA and PMC-RB, check that the PMC control module on the
maіп CPU board ís connected to the 1/0 unit secureiy. For PMC-RC,
check that the PMC control module on the option 3 board ís con-
nected to the 1/O unìt is supplíed wíth power and that the ínterface
module ís íntact.
972 NM1 OCCURRED 1N OTHER MOD- NM1 occurred in a board other than the main CPU board.
ULE
973 NON MASK 1NTERRUPT NM1 occurred for an unknown reason.
974 F-BUS ERROR BUS eггoг of FANUC BUS.
The main CPU board or option 1 to 3 boards may be faulty.
975 BUS ERROR MA1N Main CPU board bus error.
The main CPU board may be faulty.
11 Alarms Dísplayed on spíndle Servo Unít
Num- Meaning Description Remedy
Ьeг
A Program ROM abnormality Detects that control program ís not started due to lnstall normal program
display not installed program ROM not installed, etc. ROM
AL01 Motor Detects motor speed exceeding specífíed speed Check load status.
overheat excessively. Coo1 motor then reset
alarm.
AL02 Excessíve speed deviation Detects motor speed exceedíng specífíed speed Check load status.
excessively. Reset a1arm.
AL03 DC línk seotíon fuse blown Detects that fuse F4 in DC link section is blown Check power transistors,
models 30S and 40S . and so forth.
Replace fuse.
AL04 lnput fuse blown. Detects blown fuse F1 to F3 , open phase or mo- Replace fuse.
lnput power open phase. mentary failure of power models 30S and 40S . Check open phase and
power supply refeneratíve
circuit operatíon.
AL05 Control power supply fuse Detects that control power supply fuse AF2 0г AF3 Check for control power
blown ís blown models 30S and 40S . supply short círcuít .
Replace fuse.
AL-07 Excessíve speed Detects that motor rotatíon has exceeded 115 of Reset a1arm.
its rated speed.
AL-08 High ínput voltage Detects that swítch is flipped to 200 VAC when F1íp swítch to 230 VAC.
ínput voltage ís 230 VAC or hígher models 305
and 40S .
746
B-62444E/03 A + ι- FN G. ALARM L1ST
Num- Meaning Description Remedy
ber
AL-09 Excessive load on maín cír- Detects abnormal temperature rise of power tran- Coo1 radiator then reset
cuít section sístor radíator, alarm.
AL-10 Low input voítage Detects drop in ínput power supply voitage. Remove cause, then reset
alarm.
AL-11 Overvoltage іп DC link sec- Detects abnormally hígh direct current power sup- Remove cause, then reset
tíon p1y voltage ín power circuit sectíon. alarm.
AL-12 Overcurrent in DC línk sectíon Detects flow of abnormally arge current ín díreot Remove cause, then reset
current section of power circuít aiarm.
AL-13 CPU ínternal data memory Detects abnormalíty in CPU ínternal data memory. Remove cause, th n reset
abnormalíty This check is made on1y when power is turned on. a1arm.
AL-15 Spindle switch/output switch Detects iпcorrect switch sequence ín spindle Check sequence.
alarm switch/output swítch operation.
AL-16 RAM abnormalíty Deteots abnormality ïn RAM for external data. This Remove cause, then reset
check is made only when power ís turned oп. a1aгm.
AL-18 Program ROM sum check er- Detects program ROM data error. Thís check is Remove cause, then reset
ror made only when power ís turneci on. a1aгm.
AL-19 Excessíve U phase current Deteots excessíve U phase current detectíon Remove cause, then reset
detectíon círcuit offset círcuít offset. alarm.
Thís check ís made on1y when power ís turned on.
AL-20 Excessive V phase current Detects excessíve V phase current detectíon cir- Remove caus , then reset
detectíon círcuít offset cuít offset. a1arm.
Thís check ís made only when power is turned on.
AL-24 Serial transfer data error Detects seríal transfer data error such as NC pow- Remove cause, then reset
er supply turned off, etc. a1arm.
AL-25 Seriai data transfer stopped Detects that serial data transfer has stopped. Remove cause, then reset
aiarm.
AL-26 Disconnection of speed Deteots abnormalíty ín posítíon coder sígnal such Remove cause, then reset
detectíon sígnal for Cs con- as unconnected caЬ1e and parameter settíng eг- alarm.
touring control ror .
AL-27 Posítion coder sígnal discon- Detects abnormalíty in position coder sígnal such Remove cause, then reset
nectíon as unconnected cable and adjustment error . a1aгm.
AL-28 Disconnectíon of position Detects abnormalíty in positíon detection sígnal for Remove cause, then reset
detectíon signal for Cs con- Cs contouríng control such as unconnected cable alarm.
touring control and adjustment error .
AL-29 Short-time overload Detects that overload has been contínuously ap- Remove cause, then reset
pliзd for some period of time such as restraíníng a1arm.
motor shaft in positíoning .
AL-30 lnput círcuít overcurrent Detects overcurrent flowing ín input círcuít. Remove cause, then reset
aiarm.
AL-31 Speed deteetíon signal dis- Detects that motor cannot rotate at specífied Remove cause, then reset
connectíon motor r straint spe d or it is detected that the motor ís clamped. aiarm.
alarm oг motor is clamped. but rotates at very slow speed or has stopped .
This includes checkíng of speed detectíon signal
caЬ1e.
AL-32 Abnormalíty in RAM ínternal Datects abnormality in RAM interior LS1 for serial Remove cause, then reset
to LS1 for seríal data transfer. data transfer. This check ís made only when power a1arm.
Thís check ís made oniy ís turned on.
when power ís turned on.
G. ALARM L1ST APPENDIX B-62444E/03
Num- Meanlng Descrlptfon Remedy
ber
AL-33 lnsufficient DC link sectíon Detects insufficient charging of dírect current pow- Remove cause, then reset
charging er supply voltage in power circuίt section when a1arm.
magnetic contactor in ampiifier ís turned on such
as open phase and dвfectίve charging resístor .
AL-34 Parameter data settíng Ьe- Detects parameter data set beyond allowabl Set correct data.
yond allowable range of va1- range of values.
ues
AL-35 Excesive gear ratío data set- Detects gear ratio data set beyond allowable Set correct data.
ting range of values.
AL-36 Error counter over flow Detects error counter overflow. Correct cause, then reset
a1aгm.
AL-37 Speed detector parameter Detects ίncorrect setting of parameter for number Set correct data.
setting error of speed detectίon pulses.
AL-39 A1arm for indicating faílure ín Detects 1-rotation sígnal detection failure ín Cs Make 1-rotation signal ad-
detectíng 1-rotatíon signal for contouring contorl. justment.
Cs contouríng control Check cable shíeld status.
AL-40 A1arm for índícatíng 1-rotation Detects that 1-rotation signal has not occurred in Make 1-rotation sígnal ad-
sígnal for Cs contouring con- Cs contouríng controI. justment.
trol not detected
AL-41 A1arm for indícatíng faíiure ín Detects failure ín detectíng position coder 1-rota- Make signal adjustment
detectíng positíon coder tíon sígnal. for sígnal conversion cir-
1-rotatíon sígnal. cuit.
Check cable shíeld status.
AL-42 A1aгm for índícatíng posítion Detects that position coder 1-rotatíon sígnal has Make 1-rotatíon signal ad-
coder 1-rotatíon sígnal not not ίssued. justment for sígnal conver-
detected síon círcuít.
AL-43 A1aгm for indicating discon- Detacts that main spindle positíon coder sígnal Check that main spindle
nectíon of position αoder síg- used for differential speed mode is not connected posítion coder sígnal is
na1 for dífferentíai speed yet or ís dίsconnвαted . connected to connector
mode CN 12.
AL-46 A1arm for indícatíng faílure in Detøcts failure ín detectίng position coder 1-rota- Make 1-rotation signal ad-
detectíng posítion coder tion signals in thread cutting operatíon. justment for sígnal conver-
1-rotatíon sígnal in thread sion círcuit
cutting operation. Check cable shield status.
AL-47 Positíon coder signal ab- Detects íncorrect posítion coder signal count op- Make signal adjustment
normalíty eration. for signal conversíon cír-
cuit.
Check cable shíeld status.
AL-48 Posίtíon coder 1-rotation sig- Detects that occurrence of position coder 1-rota- Make 1-rotation signal ad-
na1 abnormalíty tíon sígnal has stopped. justment for signal conver-
síon círcuít.
AL-49 The converted differentíal Detects that speed of other spindle convert d to Check the posítíon coder
speed ís too hígh. speed of 1oca1 spindle has exceeded allowable state of the other side.
limit in differential mode.
AL-50 Excessíve speed command Detects that speed command calculation value Check parameters such
calculation va1ue ín spíndle exceeded allowabl range ín spindle synchroníza- as a positíon gain.
synchronization control tíon control.
AL-51 Undenıoltage at DC link sec- Detects that DC power supply voltage of power Remove cause, then reset
tíon círcuit has dropped due to momentary power fail- alarm.
ure or loose contact of maqnetíc contactor .
AL-52 1TP sígnal abnormality 1 Detв aг, .гrüaization signal ITP Remove cause, then reset
signal wi?h Э P.;C ,suгh s λoss of 1TP signal . alarm.
G. ALAFsM L1ST в- sг444εıoз APPENDIX
Num- h7earing Descríptton Remedy
ЬeY
AL-53 TP sígnal abnormality 11 Detects abnormality in synchronízatíon sígnal 1TP Remove cause, then reset
signaI wíth CNC such as loss of 1TP sígnal . alarm.
AL-54 Overload current alarm Detects that excessive current flowed in motor for Check if overload opera-
long tíme. tíon or frequent accelera-
tíon/deceleratioп ís per
formed.
AL-55 Power i пы abnormalíty ín Detects that swítch request signal does not match Check operation of mag-
spindle swítching/output power líne status check signal. netíc contractor for power
swítchíng line switching.
Check íf power 1 ηe status
check signal ís processed
normally.
749
H. OPERATION OF
THE PORTABLE TAPE READER APPENDIX 8-62444E/03
OPERATION OF PORTABLE TAPE READER
Portable tape reader ís the devíce which ínputs the NC program and the
data oп the paper tape to CNC.
Names and descriptíons
of each sectíon
3. Capstan roller 11. Cab1e storage
6. Hand1e
4. Control switch 13. Reader/punch
ínterface adapter
2. Optical Light source
reader
8. Meta1 A
7. Wínder
9. Cover lock
. Lowering
Locklever
5. Tape Ьox
12. Photoamplífíer
750
N. OPERATION OF THE PORTABLE
e-s2444F/n3 APPENDIX TAPE READER
Tsbie 1 Descriptíon of Esch Sectian
No Name Descriptíons
An LED Light emitting diode is mounted for each channel and for the feed
hole 9 diodes in total . A built-in Stπp Shoы functíons to decelerate the tape
Líght Sources The líght source ís attracted o the opticai reader Ьy a magnet so that the taF
1 wí11 he held in the correct positíon. This unit can be opened upward, by turnír
the tape reader control switch to the RELĚASE position this turns off the
magnet .
Optical Reader Reads data punched on the tape, through a glass window. Dust or saratche:
2 on the glass wíndow can result in reading errors. Kaep this wíndow ciean.
3 Capstan Rolier Controis the feeding of tape as specified by the control unit.

Á 3-positíon switch used ťo control ťhé Tape ReádF,r.
RELEASE----- The tape is aliowed to be free, or used to open the iight-
source.
When loadíng or urıloadíng the tape, select this posítion.
Tapti Reader AUTO -------- The tape is set to fixed posítion by the stop Shoe. The
4
Control Switch feod and stop of the tape ís controlled Ьy the CNC. To in
put data fronı tape, the Light Source must be closed and
thís posítìon must be selected.
MANUAL ----- The tape can be fed in the forward reading direction. íf
another position ís seiected, the tape feed is stopped.
A Tape Box is located beiow the Tape R ader. A belt used to draw out a pa-
5 ı Tapы Box per tape ís located ínsíde the box. The paper tape can easily be pu11ed out
usíng thís beit. The tape box accomodates 15 meters of tape
6 Hand1e Used to carry the tap reader.
1 7 Wínder Used to advance or rewínd the tape.
,--
Fastener
usually kept open
8
Meta A
-_ O о
Pust1 lnserÍ
Papert ape
aμer apы
When removíng the гo11ed tape, гeduce the
intεrna diameter by pushíng the fastыnыr.
г ,
1 Cover loгk Be sure to use the lock for fasteníng the cover before carryíng the tape read-
9
eг.
751
H. OPERATION OF
THE PORTABLE TAPE READER APPENDIX B-62a4aE/o3
No. Name Descrlptlons
When the tape reader ís raísed, the latch mechanism ís actívated to fíx the
tape reader. Thus, the tape reader ís not lowered. The latch is locked wíth
the loweńng lock lever. The latch is therefore not unlocked even when the
tape reader ís raísed wíth the handle.
10 Loweríng lock lever When the latch is locked, the lever ís horízontal. To store the tape reader in
the box, push the lever to release the 1ock, then raise the tape reader with the
handle to unlock the latch.
When the latch is unlocked, the tape reader can be stored in the box.
When storíng the tape reader, secure it wíth the cover 1ock.
11 Cab1e storage Used to store ro11ed power and sígnal cables. The cable length is m.
12 Photoamplífíer For the tape reader
13 Reader/punch 200 VAC input and 5 VDC output power and reader/punch ínterface adapter
interface adapter PCB
Procedure for Operatíng the Portable Tape Reader
Preparatíons 1 Unlock the cover locks 9. Raise the tape reader wíth the handle 6 untíl
it clicks, then lower the tape reader. The tape reader then appears and
ís secured. Check that the loweríng lock levers 10 are horizontal.
2 Take out the sígnal and power cables from the cab1e storage 11 and
connect the signal cab1e wíth the CNC reader/punch ínterface port
and the power cable wíth the power supply.
Setting the tape 3 Turn the control switch to the RELEASE posítion.
4 Líft the Light Source Unít, аnd insert aп NC tape between the gap.
The tape must be posítíoned as shown in the fıgure, when víewed
looking downward.
Dírectíon ín whích the tape advances
5 Pu11 the tape until the top of the tape goes past the Capstan roller.
6 Check that the NC tape is correctly positíoned by the Tape Guide.
7 Lower the Light Source.
8 Turn the swítch to the AUTO posítion.
9 Suspend the top and гeаr-end of the tape in the Tape Box.
Removíng the tape 10 Turn the swítch to the RELEASE posítíon.
11 Lift the Líght Source and remove the tape.
752
.
H. OPERATION OF THE PQFiTABLE
e-sг444εıoз APPENDIX TAPE READER
12 Lower the Líght Source
storage 13 Store the cables in the cable storage 11.
14 Push the loweńng 1ock lever 10 at both sídes down.
15 Raise the tape reader with the handle 6 to unlock the latch, then gently
lower it.
16 Lock the cover lock 9 and carry the tape reader wíth the handle 6.
NOTE 1 SETTING OF A TAPE
When the NC tape is loaded, the Labe1 Skíp function activates to read but skíp data unti first
End of B1ock code CR ín E1A code or LF in 1S0 code is read. When loading an NC tape,
the location wíthín the tape, from which data reading should be started must properly be
selected and the NC tape should be set as shown in the fígure below.



The program whích should be read
set the tape so that thís sectíon is un- Actuaily, the end of block code ; is CR in EiA code
der oг ís LF in 1S0 code.
the glass wíndow.
NOTE 2 DlSCONNECTION AND CONNECTION OF A PORTABLE TAPE READER
CONNECTION CABLE
Don t disconnect or connect CNC tape reader connection cable sígnal cable without turning
off the CNC power supply, otherwise the PCB of the tape reader and master PCB of CNC
controller may be off the CNC power supply before disconnectíng or connecting
the connectíon cabIe, accordíngly.
753
INDEX
B-62444E/03
- Numbers - BACKGROUND EDITING, 586
balance cut, 377
14 ínch Co1or CRT/MD1 Hońzontal Type , 419
B1ock, 27
14 ínch Co1oг CRT/MD1 Vertícal Type , 420
BRANCH AND REPET1T10N, 281
14 CRT, LCD, and LCD Soft Key Con6guration, 448
2 SYSTEMS CONTROL FUNCTION, 362
Monochrome LCD Separate Type , 421
C Co1oг LCD Separate Type , 422
9 inch Monochrome/Co1or CRT/MD1 Panel ЅмаІІ Type , 418 Calling a subprogram stored ín an extemal ínput/output devíce,
473
9 ínch Monochrome PDP/MD1 Stалdard Type , 419
Callíng of sub- program, 118
9 ínch Monochrome/Co1or CRT Separate Type , 420
Cancelíng spindle posítíoníng, 110
9 ínch Monochrome/Co1or CRT/MD1 Pane1 Standard Type , 418
canned cycle, 137, 322
9 monochrome or co1or CRT/MD1 paпe1 hońzontal type , 425
Canned Cyc1e Cancel G80 , 173
inch Co1or LCD/MD1 Hoňzontal Type , 422 Canned cycle for dńllíng G80-G89 , 164
inch Co1oг LCD/MD1 Vertícal Type , 423 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE FORGRINDING MACHINE ,175
9-inch Monochrome PDP Separate Type , 421 Canned Dńllíng Cyc1e Formats, 325
Chamfeńng and comeг R, 179
Change from G23 to G22 ín a fobídden aгea, 517
- /4 - Change of modes, 461
Change of Words or Addresses, 583 About thís manual, 3
Changíng by G10, 87 Absolute and íncremental programming G90, g91 , 96
Changíng of Too1 Offset value Programmable Data lnput G10 , Actual Feedrate Dísplay, 617 257
Addíng workpíece Ørdinate systems 0г G54 , 91 Changíng workpiece coordinate system, 87
ADDRESSES AND SPECIFIABLE VALUE RANGE FOR SE- Characters and Øes to be used for the pattem data input func- R1ES 15 TAPE FORMAT, 319 tíon, 394
ALARM L1ST, 729 character-to-codes correspondence table, 728
ALARM, J71,79,86K, 561 Check By Running The Machine, 405
A1aгm, 484 Checked by selfdíagnostic screen, 533
506,507 , 514 Checkpoint for the forbídden area, 517
aLARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS, 529 Chuck and Taílstock Barńers, 519
ALARM DETAIL scre n, 696 Chuck barńer settíng screen, 519
A1arm Dísplay, 412, 530 Círcular lnterpolatíon g02,G03 , 45
A1aгm History Display, 532 Clear, 489
A1aгm status, 685 Collation, 542
Alteríng a Word, 568 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - MISCELLA-
NEOUS FUNCTION, 25
ANGULAR AX1S CONTROL, 357
COMPENsatíon FUNCTION, 192
An alarm whíle a program ís output, 544
Condítional Branch 1F Statement , 281
ARITHMETIC AND LOG1C OPERATION, 276
Conditions for making a tool post ínterference check, 372
AUTOMATIC 1NSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS, 591
Configuration of the He1p Screen, 699
AUTOMATIC OPERATION, 403
CONSTANT Lead Threadíng G32 , 57
AUTOMATIC OPERATION, 470
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL G96, G97 , 101
Automatíc operatíon status, 684
continuous thread cutting, 62
AutoMAT1C TOOL OFFSET G36, G37 , 258
CONTROLLED AXES, 32, 41
AUXILIARY FUNCTION M FUNCTION , 118
CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING with GRAPHIC function,
AUXILIARY FUNCTION, 117 596
Axís movíng status/dwe11 status, 684 Coordínate Rotatíon and , 261
COORDINATE SYSTEM, 82
Coordínate system on part drawíng and coordínate system speci-
fíed by CNC - Coordínate system, 17
Ó COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION, 95
B-Axís Control G100, G101, G102, G103, G110 , 347 Copyíng an Entíre Program, 578
i-1
1 N D EX B-62444E/03
Copying Part of a Program, 579 Dísplayíng and Settíng Parameters, 679
CORNER CIRCULAR 1NTERPOLATION FUNCTION G39 , 254 Dísplayíng and Setting Pítch Error Compensation Data, 681
Correctíon in Chamferíng and Comer Arcs, 241 Dísplayíng and Settíng Run Tìme,Parts Count, and Time, 665
Counter lnput of Offset value, 655 Dísplayíng and setting the Software Operator s Paпe1, 671
COUNTING A TOOL L1FE, 115 Displayíng and Settíng the Workpíece Ońgín Offset Va1ue, 667
Creatíng a program, 596 Dísplayíng and Settíng Too1 Life Management Data, 673
CREATING PROGRAMS, 589 DISPLAYING DIRECTORY OF FLOPPY D1SK, 554
Dísplayíng memorу used and a list of programs, 641 CREATING PROGRAMS 1N TEACH 1N MODE, 593
Displayíng the B-axis operation state, 640 CREATING PROGRAMS Using the MD1 PANEL, 590
Displaying the directory, 555 Cuttíng Feed, 74
Dísplayíng the 1loppy dísk dírectory duńng fíle executíon, 489 Current B1ock Display Screen, 626
DISPLAYING THE PATTERN MENU, 386
Current mode, 684
Dísplaying the Program Number and Sequence Number, 683
Current Posítíon Dísplay, 412
DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER, SEOUENCE NUM-
Current time, 685 BER, AND STATUS, AND WARNING MESSAGES FOR DATA
SETTING OR 1NPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION, 683 CUSTOM MACRO, 265
Dísplaying the Statusand Wamíng for Data Settíпg oг lnput/Output CUTTING SPEED - SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION, 23 Operatíon, 684
Cyc1e start for the 16-TTA and 18-TTA, 473 Distance moved and feedrate forpolar coordínate interpolation, 51
Cylíndńcal lnterpolatíon , 54 Dry Run, 507
Dwe11 G04 77
-D-
DATA OUTPUT, 415 -E-
Data settíng for the tool post ínterierence check functíon, 367 EDITING A PART PROGRAM, 407
decimal point programming, 98 EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS, 585
Deletíng a block, 570, 599 EDITING PROGRAMS, 562
Deleting a11 programs, 575 Effective tíme for a forbídden aгea, 517
DELETING BLOCKS, 570 Effıcíent use of inemoгу, 544
Deletíng Fí1es, 560 Emergency Stop, 513
Deleting Multíple Blocks, 571 Emergency stop oг reset status, 684
Deletíng one program, 575 End face peck dńllíпg cycle G74 , 157
End face tumíng cycle G94 , 142 DELETING PROGRAMS, 575
End of program, 118 Descńption of each display, 684
End of subprogram, 118 Detaíls of Functíons, 308
End posítíon for the arc ís not on the arc, 223 DETAILS OF TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION, 215
Endless repetítíon, 489 DIAMETER AND RADIUS PROGRAMMING, 99
equal-lead threading, 320
Dírect drawing dímensíons programmíng, 183
Erasíng the program, 476
Dírect lnput of tool offset measured B, 653
Example of changing T15 to M15, 568
Dírect lnput of Too1 Offset Va1ue, 651
Example of Cylíndńcal lnterpolatíon Pгogrаm, 56
DISPLAY, 411
Example of deletíng a block of , 570
Dírectíon of lmaginary TooІ Nose, 204
Example of deleting blocks from a block containing N01234 to a
Display of Run Tme and Parts Count, 619 block comaining N56789, 571
Dísplay of software confıguratíon, 456 Example of deleting , 569
Display procedure forthe current posítíon screen in theworkpiece Example of lnserting T75, 567
coordínate system, 609 Example of maláng a tool post ínterference check, 375
Display pгoceduгe for the actual feedrate on the current position Execution of tool post ínterterence checking, 373 display screen, 617
Explanatíon of the keyboard, 425 Dísplay procedure for the current posítion screen wíth the relative
coordinate system, 611 EXTENDED PART PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION, 577
Dísplayíng and Enteńng Settíng Data, 661 EXTERNAL 1/O DEVICES, 449
DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA, 408 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS, 302
Dísplayíng and Settíng Custom Macro Common Vaňables, 670
i-2
в-62444E/03 1NDEX
- F- How To View The Position Display Change Without Running The
Machine 406
FA Card, 452
FAIIUC Floppy Cassette, 451
FANUC Handy Fi1e, 451
PPR, 452 1/O device, 561
FEED- FEÉD FUNCTiON, 15 lmaginary Too1 Nose, 202
FEED FUNCTIONS, 70 inch/metric conversıon g24,G21 , 97
Feed hold. 472 incoRRECT THREADED LENGTH, 718
Feedrate Override, 505 lncr mental Feed, 462
F1LE DELETION, 54 . lncrement system, 34
Fi1e number, 561 lnput Command from MD1, 243
Fiïe number after the file is deleted, 541 lnput of ineasured workpiece origin offsets, 668
Fi1e output location, 544 lnputting a program, 542
Fi1e search, 539 lnputting and outputting parameters arıd pitch error compensation
data, 548
Fi1e search by N-9999, 539
lnputting custcm macro common variabies, 552
Firıishïrıg cycle G70 , 153 lnputting multiple programs from an NC tape, 542
FLOATING REFERENCE POS1T10N RETURN , 81 lnputting Offset Data, 546
Forbidden area overrapping, 517 lnputting Paramet rs, 548
Front Boring Cyc1e G85 / Side Boring Cyc1e G89 , 172 lnputting pitch error compensation data. 550
Front driiling cycle G83 / side dńlling cycle G87 , 167 INPUTTING/OUTPIJTTINGCI ІЯТОМ MACRO CπππМОN VARı_
,4ri , 552 Front Tapping Cyc1e G84 / Side Tapping Cyc1e U88 , 170
nserting a block, 599
Furıctíon Keys, 427, 428
Inserting a Word, 567
FUNCTIONS TO S1MPLIF v PROGRAMMING, 136
1NSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD, 563
lnterterence Check, 235
1NTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS, 41
-G-
lNTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO, 306
1S0 code, 545 general flow af operation of cnc machine too1, 5
General Precautions for ONset Operations, 244
Generaí Screerı Operations, 427
Gaphic , 413 K
GRλPH1CS DISPLAY, 689 Key 1r put and lnput Buffer, 446
ΓRAPHiCS FUNCTION, 688
GRAPHIC SCREEN, 445
_L-
Linear lnterpolation G01 , 44
-- H OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT, 711
Lºca1 Coordinate S_ѕtem 92 Handy[Fi1e, 536
Heading a Program, 566
HELICAL CUTTÌNG G02,G03 , 49
łλFLP FUNCTION, 695 М
HELP SCREEN, 444 M code, 469
H GH sPFED CYCL,E CUTT NG 329 , 339 M codA aroup check Σuпctiaгі 129
Machin Coordinate System, 83 High-speed remote butfer, 343
Machine Lock and Auxiliary Lock, 504 High-speed Temo4e bLiffer A G05 , 343
CALL, 285 Hnw to indicate cвmmØпd dimensions for moving the too1 AЬsn-
Wte, ıncremental cnmmands, 20 Macгa ca11, 477
How to use canned cycles G90, G92, G94 , 145 Macго Ca11 Using G Code, 292
ľ -J
1 N D EX в-6г444Eı0з
Macro Ca11 Usíng an M Code, 293 NOMOGRAPHS, 717
Macro commands specífyíng thu menu tifie, 387 notes on reading ;hls manual, 7
Macгo instructíon descńbíng the pattern name, 388 Notes on muitiple repetitive cycle G70AG76 , 163
Macгo ínstructíon specífyíng th pattern datatítle the menu títle , Notes on tool nose radíus compensatíon, 212
391 Number of fìles regístered, 489
Macro ínstruction specífyíng the varlable name, 391 Number of lines in a program, 476
Macгo ínstructíon to descńbe a comment, 392 Nurnber of repetitïons, 489
MACRO STATEMENTs, 280
Main program and subprogram, 122
Manual absolute, 484 о ,
Manual Absolute ON and OFF, 465
Offset, 195 manual contínuous feed, 470
OFFSET DATA 1NPUT AND OUTPUT, 546 Manual Harıd e F eed, 4F,3
Offset Number, 194 M,ANUAL HANDLE 1NTERRUPTION, 493
Offset nurnber and offset vaIue, 205
Manual interventíon, 484
OFFSET/SETTING sCRĚEN, 439, 604
manual íntervention and retum, 498
On the memo record, 544
MANUAL OPERATION, 400, 457
Operating Mnnitor Dispiay, 621
Manual operatíon after single block stop, 469
OPERATION METHOD screen, 697
Manua operatíon duńng comeńng, 469
OPERATION OF PORTABLE TAPE READFR, 750
Manual operatíon performed іп other than corneńng, 468
OPERATIONAL DEVECES, 416
Manua1 puIse generator, 463
Operators, 282
Marıuai reference positíon retum, 80, 458
Optíonal block skíp, 473
Maximum strokes, 35
Optíonal stop, 118
MD1 OPERATION, 474
Optíonal stop Mt01 , 472
MD1 operation, 631
Oscillation Dírect Fíxed-Dimensíon Gńnding Cyc1e, 178
Memoгу aгea, 477
Oscíllation Gгinding Cyc1e G73 , 177
Memoгy Common to Too1 Posts, 379 Outer dìameter / intemal diameter cuttíng cycle G90 , 137
MEMORY OPERATION, 471, 472
Outer diameter / ínternal díameter dńllíng cycle G75 , 158
MEMORY OPERATION by FS15 TAPE FORMAT, 38
Outputting a program, 544
Mergíng a program, 581 Outputting a program aíter fıle headíng, 544
MESSAGE SCREEN, 444 Outputting Custom Macю Common Vańable, 553
METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY, 703 Outputtinü Offiset Data, 547
MIRROR ıMAGE; 496 Outputting Parameters, 549
mіггoг image for doub e turret G68, G69 , 182 Outputtïng pitch error compensatíon data, 551
Moda1 Ca11 G66 , 290 Outputting Pragrams, 559
Moda1 informatíon, 631 Overall Posítíon Dìsplay, 614
Mcdífyíng a block, 599 Overcuttíng hy tooi nose radíus compensation, 240
Moving part of a program, 580 Overtravel, 514
multíple repetítíve canned turníng cycle, 323 Overtravel during automatíc operatíon, 514
Multíple repetitíve Cyc1e G70AG76 , 147 Overtrave durïng manuai operatíon, 514
Muftiple thread cutting cycle G76 , 159 OVERVIEW OF TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION, 202
Multiple-Thread Cuttíng, 63
Multiplem Commands 1n A Síngle B1ock, 119
Muftistªgεэ skip, 67
Γ
P-type restart, 483
Page Stream, Sty1e Fun, Sty1e Name, Page Sep, A1arm, 490
-N-
PARAMETER TABLE screen, 698
Name of axes, 33 PART ClRAW1NG AND TOOL MOVEMENT, 16
NC STATEMENTS , 280 Parts Count Display, Run Time Dísplay, 413
Next B1ock Dísplay Screen, 627 password function, 587
і-4
в-62444εı0з 1NDEX
PATTERN DATA DISPLAY, 390 Procedure for dísplayíng the program check screen, 628
PATTERN DATA 1NPUT FUNCTION, 385 Procedure for displaying the program contents, 625
Pattern No. seIection, 388 Procedure for displayíng the program screen for MD1 operatíon,
631
Pattem repeating G73 , 152
Procedure for enabling/dispiaying parameter wňting , 680
P1ane Selection, 94
Procedure for executing one fi1e, 486
PolarCoordinate lnterpolation ,, 50
Procedure for execuiing tłie scheduling function, 488
POLIGONAL TURNING, 334
Pгосedurø for Heading a Program, 566
PoгtaЫe Tape Reader, 453
Procedure for inserting a word, 567
Position Display in the Relative Coordinate Systern, 611
Prосedurв for inserting, ałtering and deleting a word, 563
Posítion Dísplay in the Workpíece Coordinate Systвm, 609 Prосedυre for merging a program, 581
POS1T10N DISPLAY SCREEN, 601 Pгoceduгы for moving part of a program, 580
POS1T10N SCREEN, 430 Procedure for Presetting the Workpíece Coordínate System, 616
Position settfng for reierence points of two tooi posts, 367 Pгосeduгe for program number search, 572
POS1T10N1NG G00 , 42 Procedure for replacing CNC battery for memory back-up, 704
Power Disconnection, 456 Procedure for scanning a program, 564
POWER ON/OFF, 454 Procedure for searching a word, 565
Precautions to be taken by operator, 174 Procedure for searching an address, 565
PREPARATORY FUNCTION G FUNCTION , 36 Prucedure for sequence number compańson and stop, 663
Presetting Yhe Workpiece Coordinate System, 616 Procedure for sequence number search, 573
Procedure for altering a word, 568 Proceduгв for setting and displaying the tool offset value and ihe
tool nose radius compensation va1ue, 648 Procedure for background edItIng, 586
Ç rucоdurы for setting the floating reference φsition, 620
Procedure for change of words ur addresses, 583
Procedure for setting the setting da ia, 661
Procedure for copying part of a program, 579
Pгoceduгы tor setting the tool offset va1ue, 653
Procedure for counter input of offset va1ue, 655
Procedure for setting the tool offset va1ue of the Y axis, 658
PCocedure for countef input of the offset value, 660
Procedure for setting the vıork coordinate system shift amount,
Procodure for deleting a block, 570 654
Procedure for deletirig a word, 569 Procedure for setting the workpiece coordinate system shitting
amount, 656 Procedure for deIeting a11 programs, 575
Pгoceduгe of copying an entire prograni, 578
Pгoceduгe for deleting more than orıe prugram by specifying a
range, 576 Procedure of tuming on the pııwer, 454
ProcedιІrв for deieting muitipie blocks, 571 Procedur to reset a11 axes, 613
Procedure for deleting one program, 575 Prосeduгы to set the axís coordinate to a specified vałue, 612
Pгoceduгø for direct input ot tool offset value, 651 PROCESSING MACRO sTATEMENTS, 298
Proceduгы for display and settÍng the tool iife management data, Program Check Screen, 628
673
Pгоgгam comφnents, i 23
Pглcоluгы fordisplaying and setting custom macгu common vań PROGRAM COMPONENTS OTHER THAN PROGRAM SEC- ables, 670 T10NS, 124
Procedure for dìsplaying and setting parameters, 679 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION, 26, 122
Procedure for Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Couııt and Program Contents Display, 625
T me , 665
Program Dísplay, 411
Procedure fordisplaying and settírıg the pitch errorcompensation
data, 682 Proyram editing status, 685
Procedu re Tord isplaying and setting the software operators panel, Program eıid M02, M30 , 472
671
Program irıpuUoutput, 542
Procedure for Displayirig and setting the Workpiece Origin Offset
Va1ue, 667 Program nurnber urı a NC tape, 543
PROGFiAM NUMBER SEARCH, 572 Procedure fordisplayíng memory used and a líst of programs, 641
Program of tool life data, 113 Pгoceduгe for displayíng overa11 φsition dísplay screen, 614
Program regístratíon, 476 Procedure for dísplayíng run time and parts count on the current
φsition display screen, 619 Pгоgгam registration in the background, 543
Pгoceduгe for dísplayíng the current block display screen, 626 PROGRAM RESTART, 478
Procedure for dísplayíng the next bIock dispiay screen, 627 PROGRAM SCREEN, 431, 433, 435, Ø, 437, 602, 603
Procedure for dísplayíng the operating monítor, 621 Program Screen for MD1 Operatíon, 631
ĺ-5
iNDEX B-62444E/03
PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION, 127 Schedulíng function for the 16-TTA and 18-TTA, 489
Program section contiguratíon, 123 Screen Dispiayed at Power-on, 455
Program stop, 118 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY OFFSET/SET-
TING, 647
Program stop M00 , 472
SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY PROG 1N
PROGRAMMABLE PRAMETER ENTRY G10 , 315 MEMORY MODE OR MD1 MODE , 624
Protect switch, 538, 541 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY PROG 1N THE
ED1T MODE , 641
Punchíng a11 programs, 545
SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY SYSTEM, 678, 686
Punching programs іп the background, 545
Selectíng a Workpiece Coordínate System, 85
Screen indicatíng module setting status, 456
Screen transítíon chart, 600
-R- Screen transition tńggered Ьy the function key OFFSET/SET-
T1NG, 604
RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING, 725 Screen transítion triggered by the functíon key POS, 601
RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE, 714 Screen transitíon tńggered by the functíon key PROG in the ED1T
mode,603 Rapid Traverse, 73
Screen transítíon tńggered by the function key PROG in the Rapíd Traverse Override, 506 MEMORY or MD1 mode, 602
Rapíd traverse prior to reference position retum, 461 Screen transítíon tńggered Ьy the functíon key SYSTEM, 606
Readíng Fí1es, 558 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY POS, 608
Reference posítion retum, 484 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING -
TOOL FUNCTION, 24 Reference posítion retum check, 79
Separate Type MD1 Sma11 Type , 423 REFERENCE POS1T10N, 78
Sequence Number Compańson and Stop, 663 Reference posítíon machíne-specífıc position , 16
SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH, 573
Reference positíon retum, 79
Setting a Workpiece Coordínate System, 84
REGISTERING CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMS, 300
Settíng a workpíece coordinate system by G92, 84
Related manuals, 4
setting and dispIay of interterence forbidden агеаѕ fortooi роѕt іп-
Releasíng overtravel, 514 terference checkıng, 371
Releasing the alarms, 517 SETTING AND DISPLAY UN1T, 417
Removing the tape, 752 Settíng and Dísplaying B-axís Too1 Compensation, 676
Repetítíon Whi1e Statement , 282 Settíng and displayíng B-axís tool compensation, 676
REPLACING BATTERIES FOR ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER, SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA, 600
705 Settíng and Dísplayíng the Too1 Offset Va1ue, 648
Replacing batteries for absolute pulse Øer a seńes servo amp Setting the chuck and taílstock barńers, 519
module , 706
Settíng the Floating Reference Posítíon, 620
REPLACING CNC BATTERY FOR MEMORY BACK-UP, 704
setting the forbídden area, 518
Request for Ωoppy repIacement, 537
Setting the tape, 752
Reposítioning, 360
Setting the Workpiece Coordinate System Shiftíng Amount, 656
Reset, 473, 484
simple calculatíon of íncorrect thread length, 720
Restart, 476 Símple Ca11 G65 , 285
Restart block, 483 Simple Synchronízatíon Control, 341
Restartíng automatic operatíon, 489 Síngle bfock, 484, 508
Retraction, 360 SK1P FUNCTION, 65
Retum, 360 S1ot status dísplay, 455
Retum to the program screen, 489 Soft key transítíon triggered Ьy the functíon key GRAPH, 445
ROTARY AX1S ROLL-OVER, 340 Soft key transítíon tńggered Ьy the functíon key HELP, 444
Soft key transítíon tńggered by the function key MESSAGE, 444
Soft key transition tńggered Ьy the functíon key POS, 430
Soft key transition tň gered Ьy the functíon ke PROG When the
soft key [BG-ED1 ] is pressed in a11 modes , 437
S5-D1G1T COMMAND, 101 Soft key transition tńggered Ьy the functíon key PROG in the ED1T
mode, 433
Sample Program, 296
Soft keуΡ transition tńggered by the functíon key PROG in the
SCHEDULING FUNCTION, 486 HNDL, JOG, or REF mode, 436
i-6
e-62444εı0з 1 N DEX
Soft key transitíon triggered Ьy the function key PROG ín the MD1 The center of the arc is identícai wíth the start φsítion or the end
made, 435 φsítion, 224
Sott key transition triggered Ьy the function key PROG ín the MEM The next block to G31 is an absolute command for 1 axís, 66
mode, 431
The next block to G31 ís an íncremental command, 66
Soft key transítion triggered bythe functíon key PROG in the TJOG the second auxіlіarу functíons b Øes , 121 or THDL mode, 436
There is пo inner íntersectíon, 224 Soft key transitíon tríggered Ьy the function key SYSTEM, 441
Thread cuttíng cycle G92 , 139 Soft Keys, 427, 429
Tımíng gordísplayíng an a1aгm, 518 Specificatíon Method, 307
Too1 Compensatíon and Number of Too1 Compensatíon, 256 Specífyíng a tool group ín a machining program, 116
TOOL COMPENSA- T10N VALUES, NUMBER OF COM- Specifying no fıle number, 489 PENSATION VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE
PROGRAM G10 , 256 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED VALUE DIRECTLY, 101
TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MOT10N BY PROGRAM, 29 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED W1TH A BINARY COOE,
101 Too1 functíon, 111
Spindle Control ín Two-path Control, 380 Too1 geometry offset, 193
Spíndle ońentatíon, 108 TOOL L1FE MANAGEMENT, 113
Spíndle positioriing, 108 TOOL MOVEMENTALONG WORKPIECE PARTS F1GURE-1N-
TERPOLATION, 12
Spindle Speed Fluctuatíon Detectíon Fuπctíon G25, G26 , 105
TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATIC OPERA-
Spíndle Speed Functíon , 100 T10N, 402
Spíndlr posítioníng functíon, 108 Too1 Movement in Offset Mode, 219
Stamping the machiníng time, 632 Too1 Movement ín Offset Mode Cancel, 232
State in whích an auxiliary function is being executed, 684 Too1 Movement in Start-up, 217
STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR AND TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE, 30
WHEN RESET, 726
TOOL OFFSET, 193
Stock removal ín facing G72 , 151
tool path at comer, 722
Stock removal ín turníng G71 , 147
Too1 Post lnterface Check, 367
Stoppíng and termínatíng memory operation, 472
Too1 selectíon, 112, 194
Stopping MD1 operatíon, 475 tool wear offset, 193
stoppíng memory operatíon, 471 Too1 wíthdrawal алd retum , 359
Stopping the punch, 545 Torque Límít Skíp, 68
Stroke Check, 515 Traverse dírect fíxed-dimension gńnding cycle G72 , 176
SUBPROGRAM, 133 Traverse gńndíng cycle G71 , 175
SUBPROGRAM CALL FUNCTION, 491 TV check, 545
subprogram calling, 321 Tumíng on the Power, 454
Subprogram Ca11 Using an M Code, 294 Type 11 when an interrupt ís performed at the end of the block , 309
Subprogram Ca11s Using a T Code, 295
Subprogram nestíng, 476
Supplementary ExpIanation for Copyíng, Movíng and Merging,
582 U
Synchronízation Control, 346 Unconditional Branch GOTO Statement , 281
Synchronízatíon Control and Composíte Control, 382
SYSTEM SCREEN, 441, 606
SYSTEM VARIABLES 270 _ V_
VARIABLES, 266
Vańable-lead thread cuttínp G34 , 61
T
T code for Too1 Offset, 194
Tailstock barńer setting screen, 520
- uv -
tape Øe 1íst, 719 Waming for data setting or input/output operation, 685
TESTING A PROGRAM, 405 Waming Messages, 447
TEST OPERATION, 503 What ís a Fí1e, 537
і-7
іІ
1NDEX в-62444ε10з
When the switch is ON duńng cutter compensation, 468 Wńtíng memo, 538
Wíthdrawal, 360
word search, 564
Work Position and Move Command, 207 Y-
Workpiece Coordínate system, 84 Y Axís Offset, 658
Workpiece Coordirıate System Preset , 89
1
ĺ-8
Revisïorı Record
FANUĆ; Šërieš 1 б/1811 бU/1_80-TB flPERATOR S ЛλNUAL. ,_ 444E003
Following functions were added.
o Rígid tappíng
o G53, G28, G30 and commands when tool posítion
offset is applied
o G53, G28, G30, and commands ín tool-típ radius
compensatíon mode
o Distríbutíon processíng termination monitoring function for
03 Feb., 95 the high-speed machining command G05
o Too1 withdrawal and return
o Pattern data dísplay
o DNC operation
o Specίal síngle-block contrcl
o Stroke limit check príor to performíng movement
o External operator message history display
Correction of erros
Series 18/160/180-TB were added.
Fuse replacement in 1V MAINTENANCE part was
02 Nov., 94 deleted.
Replacement of battery for absolute pulse coder for a
series Amp. wa added.
01 Mar., 94
Edítion Date Contents Editíon Date Contents